PC 2109 
.P7 

Copy 1 



J LIBRARY OF CONGRESS J 



| UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. | 



PINNEY AND AKNOULTS 



FRENCH GRAMMAR, 



A NEW METHOD, COMBINING BOTH 



THE OEAL xilD THEORETIC 



PAETICULAELY CALCULATED TO EENDEE THE 



SPEAKING OF FRENCH 



EASY TO LEARNERS OF DIFFERENT AGES AND CAPACITIES. 



WITH THE 



PRONUNCIATION OF ALL THE WORDS, 



A LEXICON. 

BY 

NORMAN PINNEY and EMILE ARNOULT. 



NEW YORK: ^v ; ^ ^ 
PUBLISHED BY MASON B R O T H. S Jjjjj . 
1861. 



ft 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1SG0, by 

MASON BROTHERS, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, for the 
Southern District of New York. 



JOHN F. TROW, 
PRINTER, 8TERE0TYPER, AND ELECTROTTPER, 
4C, 48 & 50 Greene Street, 
New York. 



PREFACE. 



The superiority of the oral method for teaching the modern languages is 
now so generally understood, that little need be said in its favor. Years of 
experience have proved beyond all question that he who studies faithfully by 
this method, with a competent teacher, can, in no great length of time, not 
only translate the language which he studies, but can also write and speak it 
sufficiently for all necessary purposes, — a result which can seldom, if ever, be 
attained by the old methods. On this point, therefore, we need not dwell. 
But there are other characteristics of the present work on which more should 
be said. 

It is now about twenty years since Ollendorff first published his improve- 
ment on Manesca's System. During this time various works have appeared 
on this method, which possess their merits and their use. But it is no dispar- 
agement to these to say that experience calls for important improvements in 
them all. Some, prepared chiefly for oral purposes, have had too much the 
character of mere phrase-books, lacking system and grammatical complete- 
ness. Others again have inclined to an opposite course, and have sacrificed 
much of oral ease and simplicity without attaining all that was to be desired 
in point of grammar. 

It is to be borne in mind that the best grammar for the French learner is 
not the best grammar for the English, and that rules may be, and very often 
are, given, which, though perfectly correct, are absolutely detrimental to the 
learner. A rule, for instance, on a mere common phrase which is best learned 
by example, is worse than useless, as are, also, rules on those parts of the 
language where the French does not differ from the English, so that the un- 
aided learner can not go wrong. Such rules, by presenting an appearance of 
difficulty where none exists, tend to confuse and perplex the learner, and to 
draw off his attention from things of real use. On the other hand, in those 
parts of the grammar where the languages differ, the rules and examples 
should be full. Too much pains can not be taken to present and illustrate 



4 



PREFACE. 



these with clearness. Now an ordinary French Grammar, written for the 
French, is deficient in both these respects. Three-fourths perhaps of such 
a work are occupied with matters on which the English learner needs no 
instruction, while the remainder, where he needs all help, is passed over 
with a brevity, which, though sufficient for the French, is entirely inadequate 
to his wants, and much, too, which is of vast importance to him is entirely 
omitted. 

This is a subject which deserves to be well considered ; for, we are apt at 
first to suppose that a French Grammar, which has reputation among the 
French, and is useful in their schools, must be good also for ours. But a 
little reflection shows us that this is by no means so. What the English 
learner chiefly needs is an explanation of the differences between the French 
language and his own. These must be clearly and carefully laid before him, 
and the rest he understands as a matter of course. Now these are precisely 
the points of which a foreign grammarian has no idea. They do not, and 
ought not to enter the mind of a Frenchman who is preparing a book for the 
schools of his own country. His sole object is to meet the wants of the 
French learner, and as these differ vastly from the wants of the English 
learner, his grammar of course contains much wdiich the latter does not need, 
and omits no less that he does need.* Hence, too, it is not strange that oral 
methods, though designed particularly for English learners, should have more 
or less of this character; that they should contain many rules which ought to 
be entirely omitted, while they pass over in silence equally much which is very 
necessary to the learner. 

Here, then, is the first great advantage of the present work. Combining, 
as it docs, the united care of experienced native teachers in both languages, 
it will be found, we think, to unite an accurate knowledge of the idioms and 
pronunciation of the French with a more perfect adaptation to the wants of 
t!:j English learner. The lessons are comparatively short, the oral exercises 
easy, and very gradually progressive ; all superfluous matter, which tends only 
to perplex the learner, has been carefully avoided, while the peculiar difficul- 
ties which the language presents to the English student have been still more 
carefully explained. As a grammatical treatise, the improvements made in 
the present work can not here be specified \n detail ; but it will be found, we 
believe, on trial, to contain not only much of the ordinary grammatical mat- 



* On this subject we quote from the preface of Dr. Arnoult's Pronouncing Reader, 
in which he says: "American grammars are necessary to teach the theory of the lan- 
guage, and notwithstanding some inaccuracies (which ought to be mended in subsequent 
editions), we certainly prefer them for teaching Americans to any French grammars, writ- 
ten in Taris solely for native learners, and reprinted in New York for the use of American 
students. French grammarians do not know a word of Engiish. Their books therefore 
can not contain the most necessary part, the corresponding idiomatic features of both lan- 
guages. They give but one side of the subject. Hence it is that the worst American gram- 
mar, written for Americans, and containing the whole, is far more useful for teachers and 
scholars in American schools, than the best one-sided book published in Paris." 



PREFACE. 



5 



ter presented in an easier form, but many useful rules and much valuable in- 
struction on the use of the language, given in no previous book. 

Another important advantage of the present work consists in its method 
of teaching the pronunciation. This, it will be seen by examining the pre- 
liminary lessons and exercises, is united with the matter taught in a peculiar 
way. After the simple vowel and the consonant sounds have been given, the 
words and phrases which form the oral exercises are selected and introduced 
in such a way that all the vowel-sounds, and such of the consonants as require 
practice, are called into use one at a time, and made familiar by repetition, 
until the whole are learned. Thus, without the sacrifice of any time, and with- 
out retarding in the least the learner's progress in the acquisition of words, 
phrases, and grammatical principles, he is exercised in a systematic course of 
pronunciation in all its parts. It is not to be supposed that any marked pro- 
nunciation can at all supply the place of the oral teacher ; but after the simple 
sounds have been given by the living voice, the annotation of each new word 
at the bottom of the page throughout the course, with its division into syllables 
and its silent letters, must be convenient to the teacher, and of much value to 
the learner. 

Another advantage of the present work is its capability of abridgment 
without any sacrifice of grammatical system. The French language is studied 
among us by learners differing widely in age, talents, and attainments. Some, 
too, as children, who begin it young, have ample time for its acquirement. 
Others, as the students in our colleges and high-schools, can give but a brief 
period to the study. Now, no one book can be suited to all these various 
wants without the provision of longer and shorter courses. These accordingly 
are here provided in this way. At the end of each lesson, excepting a few of 
the first, are given a quantity of exercises termed optional, intended only for 
fuller practice on words and rules previously introduced. At the end, too, 
after the grammatical course is completed, is a series of lessons styled supple- 
mentary ; while at the beginning, those called preliminary are designed merely 
to facilitate the pronunciation, and make the oral exercises more gradually 
progressive. By the omission, therefore, of any or all of these, at the discre- 
tion of the teacher, and according to the wants of the learner, the work may 
be abridged to the extent of one-half, or even more, without destroying its 
completeness as a grammar, or breaking the chain of its oral exercises. 

The introduction of the optional exercises is attended, also, with this fur- 
ther advantage. It gives opportunity for the use of connected dialogues of 
some length, on the same subject, of which they will generally be found to 
consist. This serves not only to give more reality and interest to the dia- 
logue, but to call more into exercise that class of words whose chief use is to 
show the relation of sentences to each other, and which can not be so well 
employed in those disconnected questions and answers which are given 
merely to make exercises on certain words, or to illustrate the application of 
particular rules. 

The last advantage of this work which we shall specify, i3 the dictionary of 



6 



PREFACE. 



all the English words into French, given at the end. By the aid of this, the 
learner who has forgotten the French for any English word previously given, 
can recall it without resorting to the key. Learners in classes who chance 
from any cause to have lost a few lessons, may by the aid of this avoid falling 
behind their companions. And, as the place of introduction of each word is 
marked in it, it may serve as a complete verbal index when the book is to be 
consulted on the use of any term or phrase. 

NORMAN PINNEY : EMILE ARNOULT. 

N. B. Teachers can omit at discretion all that precedes page 65 ; as that 
which follows contains the entire grammar, and presupposes a knowledge of 
nothing which precedes, except the table of pronunciation, page 8. 

In the marked pronunciation at the bottom of the pages, some words will 
be found marked differently from the general rule. These are not misprints, 
but anomalous cases, where French usage differs from the general analogy of 
the language. 



FEEZsTCH GEAMMAE. 



ALPHABET. 



A, 


a, . 


. . ah. 


N, 


n, . . 




B, 


b, . . 


. . bay. 


o, 


0, 


. . o. 


c, 


c, . 


. ' . say. 


P, 


p, . . 


. . pay. 


Di 


d, . . 


. . day. 


Q, 


q, • 


. . ku. 


E, 


e, . 


. . a. 


R, 


r, . . 


. . air. 


F, 


f, • . 


. . ef. 


Si 


s, . 


. . ess. 


G, 


g> ■ 


. . jay (zhay). 


T, 


t, . . 


. . tay. 


H, 


h, . . 


. . ash. 


u, 


u, . 


. . u. 


I, 


i, • 


. . e. 


v, 


V, . . 


. . vay. 


J, 


j> • • 


. . jee (zhee). 


x, 


X, . 


. . eeks. 


K, 


k, . 


. . kah. 




y> • • 


. . e-grek 


L, 






z, 


z, . 


. . zed. 


M, 


m, . 


. . em. 









ACCENTS, AND OTHER SIGNS. 

There are three accents in French ; the acute (a), the grave («), and the circumflex (a). 

The acute accent is never placed over any vowel but e; as, de. The e is then always 
60unded long at the end of words. 

The grave accent is sometimes placed over a, e, u ; as, Id, pres, ou. Over a and u it 
marks no change ; over e it marks a change of sound. 

The circumflex accent is used over any vowel except y; as, age, oete, epitre, hoie, 
flute. The vowel thus accented is long, with very few exceptions. 

The cedilla (?•) is placed under c before a, o, u, to give it the sound of s. 

The aposteopiie (') marks the elision of a final vowel before another vowel or silent h ; 
as, V animal, for le animal ; Vhomme, for le Iwmme. 

Elision takes place in the following words : ce, de, je, la, le, me, ne, que, des que,jus- 
que, parce que, vu que ; also in lorsque, puisque, and quoique, before il, Us, elle, elles, en, 
on,un,une; in entre and presque when compounded with other words, as entr 1 aider, 
presqiC ile; in quelque before un and autre, as quelqxC un ; in si before il, Us. E a&n be 
elided or not before eux, elle. Uof grande is always elided in grand? mere, grand? tanie, 
grand 1 chambre, grand 1 chose, grand' croix, grand' messe, and frequently in grand peine, 
grand? peur, grand piiie, and grand honte, when not immediately preceded by an article 
or pronominal adjective. 

Ce, de, le, suffer no elision before otii, onze, Jiuit, and derivatives; as, le out, de huit d 
onze, ce onzieme chapitre. 

Diuresis (••) is placed over e, i, v, to indicate that the foregoing vowel is to be sounded 
separately ; as, amMgue, knqne, Esau. 

The hyphen (-) is used to connect words or syllables ; as, apres-midi. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



SIMPLE VOWEL SOUNDS. 





r 1 


a, sounded as 


a in a/?, represented by 


a, ca, a3 
a, a, a?, 


A" 


2 


a, 


a in am, " 




3 


an, nasal, " 


en in encore, " 


an, en, a?;?, e?n, ean, " 




" 4 


e* 


m in ms, " 


e, ?«e, etc. 




5 


e,f 


e in ebb, " 


e, e, et*, er, ess*, etc. M 




6 


e, 


a in /ate, u 


e, ai, u'e, ey, cr, etc. " 


Hi -< 


7 


e, " 


ai in air, " 


e, cs, ez, er, aie, etc. " 


8 


e, 


e in where, " 


e, ai, ue, 




9 


eu, " 


?t in ws, " 
cuyli in cuyhr, " 


eu, oeu, oei, " 




in 




/>~)t f^P'ii P1I0 />)/ 
Ct*j Uc-ttj CctCj ttt', 




11 


eu (before r), 


in sir, " 


ci<, oen, " 




{ VI 


i, " 


e in pique, " 


i, ui, y, 


I< 


13 


i, 


ee in ee/, " 


h V, ie, _ 




14 


in, nasal, " 


an in anchor, " 


en, im, a^'n, em, ym, yen, " 




; 15 


o, 

o (before r\ 


o in «o/, " 


o, oi, " 




16 


aw in av:e, " 


o, an, eo, ao, " 




17 


6, 


o in no, " 


6, au, can, 


0< 


18 


ou, 


ozf in " 


ou, aou, oil, " 




19 


on, " 


oo in mood, " 


oii, owe, " 




20 


oi,§ 


wa in wash, " 


oi, oy, noi, oie, ua, " 




21 


on, nasal, " 


on in wrong, " 


on, om, aon, " 






u, " 


z« in queen, u 


en, " 


U* 


[S 


% " 


if in queen, " 


??, we, nie, 






un4 nasal, " 




wn, ww, e*m, " 



Remark. — Y is generally sounded as i ; between two vowels it is sounded 
as i i, forming two syllables. A cipher over e marks that it is entirely silent. 



* This sound is distinguished from eu hy being pronounced like e in the before a con- 
sonant, as Vie man. 

Eat the end of a word, at the end of a syllabic after a single consonant, and in combina- 

oo o 
lions, is often silent; as, sale, gelera, lie me le. 

+ E followed by a consonant in the same syllable, and e at the beginning or in the mid- 
dle of a word, have commonly this sound. 

X Eu and un have no very near representative sounds in English, and require tho 
especial instruction of the teacher. 

§ Oi has the nature of a compound sound made up of the 15 and 1. In several in- 
stances, also, the sounds marked above with different figures may consist of the same ele- 
ments, differing only in quantity and combinations. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



SIMPLE SOUNDS ILLUSTBATED. 



1 


a, 


la, 


ma, 


bal, 


sa, 


rat, 


place, 
hate, 


orgeat. 


2 


bas, 


gras, 


mat, 
blanc, 


tas, 


age, 


ame, 
temps, 


n age at. 


3 


an, 


banc, 


en, 


camp, 


Jean, 


tante. 


4 


J e > 


ce, 


de, 


le, 


me, 


que, 


se, 
chef, 


ne. 


5 


est, 


es, edit, 
cle, 


met, 


net, 


ciocher, 


papier, 


bref. 


6 


ble, 


de, 


gue, 


j'ai, 


Dey, 


ranger, 


chez. 


1 


mere, 


pere, - 


clier, 


ces, 


des, 


mer, 
chaine, 


Agnez, 


craie. 


8 


bleme, 


meme, 


bete, 
neuf, 


tete, 


maitre, 


enquete, 


d'etre. 


9 


bleu, 


peut, 


jeu, 


boeuf, 


ceuf, 


ceil, 


seul. Eitrope 


J. u 


j eune, 
















11 


peur, 


ardeur, 


rigeur, 


nageur, 


mosurs, 


tueur, 


terreur, 


meurs. 


12 


dix, 


lis, 


lit, 


prix, 


oui, 




y» 


a. 


13 


dime, 


gite, 


ile, 


prie, 


scie, 


vie, 


cocyte, 


amie. 


14 


lin, 


vin, 


imbu, 


pain, 


saint, 


sein, 


nymphe, 


moyen. 


15 


col, 


bol, 


pot, 


notre, 


oignon, 


poignet, 


mode, 


noce. 


16 


fort, 


Tor, 


mort, 


tort, 


maure, 


aurai, 


George, 


Sadne. 


17 


dome, 


mole, 


notre, 


faux, 


1'eau, 


duo, 


vos, 


gros. 


18 


bout, 


fou, 


coup, 
foule, 


a out, 


ou, 


tout, 


vous, 


cou. 


19 


route, 


boue, 


loue, 


roue, 


coude, 


ours, 


soute. 


20 


bois, 


dois, 
long, 


roi, 
rond, 


toit, 
oncle, 


loyal, 


quoi, 


noie, 


quadrupede. 


21 


bon, 


nom, 


ombre, 


taon, 


ongle. 


22 


bu, 


In, 
lue, 


vu, 


sur, 


tu, 


sut, 


eu, 


j'eus. 


23 


bue, 


vue, 


sur, 


mur, 


mure, 


plue, 


j"ge. 


24 


un, 


brun, 


chacun, 


humble, 


parfum, 


jeun, 


defunt, 


Huns. 



DIPHTHONGS. 



ai as 


in mail. 


ien as in 


rien. 


ia 


' diacre. 


ien " 


patience. 


ie 


' moitie. 


ian u 


viande. 


ie 


' lumiere. 


ieu " 


Dieu. 


iai 


' biais. 


ion " 


occasion. 


oi 


loi. 


iou " 


chiourme. 


eoi 


' villageois. 


oe " 


moelle. 


ouai 


1 ouais. 


ouan " 


louange. 


oin 


' soin. 


ua " 


equateur. 


ouin 


' baragouin. 


oue " 


ouest. 


oui 


' Louis. 


ui " 


lui. 


ue 


' 6cuelle. 


uin " 


juin. 


io 


' pioche. 







1* 



10 



PRONUNCIATION. 



CONSONANT SOUNDS. 

Consonants, when not silent, are pronounced as in English, with the fol- 
lowing exceptions : 

C, before a, o, w, has the sound of k, as cap, col, cuve,- before e, i, that 
of s, as ceci ; c is only used before a, o, u, and has the sound of s, as 

ca, lecon, recit. 

D, F. At the end of a word, and preceding another word beginning with 
a vowel or silent h, d has the sound of t, and / of v ; as, grand ami, 
grand hommc, ncuf annees. 

G, before c, i, y, has the sound of s in pleasure, as age, gite, gypse ; be- 
fore a, o, u, and the liquids I, n, r, it has the hard sound, as gant, 
gond, aigu. When final, and followed by a word beginning with a 
vowel, it has the sound of k, as rang eleve. It generally forms a liquid 
sound with n. (See liquid sounds, below.) 

II is said to be aspirated in words which do not require or admit of any 
elision of a vowel preceding them, and not aspirated (or silent) in words 
which require such elision. Thus h is aspirated in le hommard, and not 
aspirated (or silent) in Vhomme. It is hardly ever sounded in French. 

J has the sound of s in pleasure ; as, jaloux, jeu,joue. 

L is sometimes liquid (see liquid sounds), otherwise it is sounded as in 
English. 

Q is always followed by ic. They are commonly sounded like k ; as, que, 
question. Sometimes qu is sounded as in English; as, quadrupede. 

R is pronounced stronger than in English, and is always sounded as r in rose. 

S. A single s between two vowels, and s final before a word beginning 
with a vowel, has the sound of z ; as, rose, pas ici. 

T before ion, ial, iel, and before i in a few other cases, has the sound of s ; 
as, action, martial, partiel. In the final syllable tie, t has the sound of 
s, when preceded by a vowel, in all words except chdtie or a past parti- 
ciple ; as, dhnocratie, theocratic 

X alone, or after e at the beginning of a word, when followed by a vowel, 
has the sound of gz, as Xerces, examen ; in a few word3 it has the 
sound of s, as soixante, six, dix, dix-sept, JBruxellcs. X final is silent 
when preceded by a diphthong or compound vowel, in words pronounced 
alone or preceding a consonant or aspirated h ; as, paix, maux, choix, 
jaloux, aux livrcs, aux hcros, deux mille. Before c it is always sounded 
like /.-, as in excite, etc. At the end of a few words, when preceding an- 
other word beginning with a vowel or // not aspirated, and in most 
compound numerals, x has the sound of z; as, deux enfants, six ans, 
dix hommcs, dix-huit, dix-neuf, also in deuxieme, sixihne, dixieme, and 
their derivatives. In other cases it is sounded as in English. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



11 



W does not properly belong to the French alphabet. It is used only in 
words adopted from foreign languages, and then takes, in some words, 
the sound which it has in those languages ; as, whig, whiskey, whist, 
Washington, Wellington, Walter Scott. The French generally sound it 
as v. 

LIQUID SOUNDS. 

Gn is generally liquid in French, in which case it has the sound of ni in 
onion; as, mignon. In a few words gn is pronounced as in magnate. 

L, 11, in the middle or at the end of a word, when preceded by i, have 
usually the sound of gli in seraglio, or Hi in brilliant. They are pro- 
nounced by many Frenchmen also with the sound of y in yoke. 

TEBMINATIONS IN LE AND RE. 

In English we pronounce the terminations le, re, like ul, ur, as if the con- 
sonant were placed last. Care must be taken to avoid this pronunciation in 
French as very harsh and erroneous. Such syllables must be pronounced as 
follows : 

ble as blu in blush. fre as fru in frustrate. 



bre 


bru 


brush. 


gle 


glu 


glum. 


cle 


clu 


clung. 


gre 


gru 


grum. 


ere 


cru 


crumb. 


pie 


plu 


plum. 


dre 


dru 


drum. 


pre 


pru. 




fie 


flu 


flung. 


tre 


tru 


trump. 



As, bible, eandelabre, acre, camphre, monstre, theatre. 

Important Remark. — Eis never silent in French, when two consonants are 
to be found before it : at the end of words, the three letters form a plain, dis- 
tinct half-audible sound, as in all the above final syllables ; and, in the middle 
of words, the e is articulated in full sound with the last of the foregoing conso- 
nants, as in distinctament, par/Ement, paWEront, gouvemEment, etc. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



PKONOUNCING. 

E. FOURTH SOUND. 



4. E sounded as u in us ; Fourth Sound. 


Je, 


I. 


le, 


the. 


me, 


me. 


ce, 


this or that. 


te, 


thee. 


que, 


what. 


se, 


one's self. 


de, 


of. 


G. 


£ sounded 


as a in fate; Sixth Sound. 


6 

Cle or clef, 


key. 


6 

fee, 


fairy. 


ble, 


wheat. 


the, 


tea. 


do 


thimble. 


geai, 


jay. 


gue, 


ford. 


j'ai, 


I have. 


ne, nee, 


born. 


je sais, 


I know. 


5. 


E sounded as e in ebb ; Fifth Sound, 


and 


7. 


£ sounded as ai in air; Seventh Sound. 


Bee, 


beak. 


7 

baie, 


bay. 


bel, 


handsome. 


craie, 


chalk. 


chef, 


chief. 


vraie, 


true. 


net, 


clean. 


begue, 


stutterer. 


effet, 


effect. 


cede, 


yields. 


jet, 


throw. 


cher, 


dear. 


dctte, 


debt. 


fraise, 


strawberry. 


quel, 


what. 


vaine. 


vain. 


godet, 


small cup. 


creme; 


cream. 


poulet, 


chicken. 


gele, 


freezes. 


parapet, 


parapet. 


zele, 


zeal. 


8. 


£ sounded as e in where ; Eighth Sound. 



8 

Beehe, 

bete, 

bleme, 

fete, 

memo, 



spade. 

animal. 

sallow. 

festival. 

same. 



peche, 

quete, 

tete, 

vete, 

maitre, 



peach. 

search. 

head. 

clothes. 

master. 



* "When a figure or mark of sound is placed over a vowel in the following columns, it is 
meant to apply also to the words placed immediately under it in the same column, as 4 hero 
applies also to e in me, te, and so on. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



13 



SENTENCES. 



4 6 5 4 7 

Ce de est de fer. 

4 6 5 7 

Ce ble est cher. 

3 7, 5 7 

Ce lait est frais. 

5 7 5 7 

Cette creme est fraiche. 

5 7 5 5 

Cette fraise est belle. 

5 8 5 5 

Cette fete est belle. 

5 7 5 7 7 

C'est vrai, c'est tres-vrai. 

4 7 4 8 7 

Je fais le meme theme. 

4 7 4 5 . 

Que fait le chef? 

47 4 7044 5 

Que fait le frere de ce chef ? 



This thimble is of iron. 

This wheat is dear. 

This milk is cool. 

This cream is cool. 

This strawberry is handsome. 

This festival is beautiful. 

It is true, it is very true. 

I do the same exercise. 

What does the chief? 

What does the brother of that chief ? 



A. FIEST SOUND. 

1. A sounded as a in ah; First Sound. 



■y 

A, 


has. 


1 

balle, 


ball. 


as, 


hast. 


calme, 


calm. 


bal, 


ball. 


dame, 


lady. 


cap, 


cape. 


face, 


face. 


chat, 


cat. 


cage, 


cage. 


plat, 


dish. 


femme, 


woman. 


ma, 


my. 


dalle, 


flag-stone, 


la, 


the. 


salle, 


hall. 


fat, 


fop. 


malle, 


trunk. 


drap, 


cloth. 


dard, 


dart. 




2. A sounded as a in arm; Second Sound. 


\ 




2 




Age, 


age. 


pate, 


dough. 


ame, 


soul. 


platre, 


plaster. 


hate, 


haste. 


bas, 


low. 


lache, 


loose. 


gras, 


fat. 


male, 


male. 


tas, 


pile. 


pale, 


pale. 


mat, 


mast. 




12. I sounded as \ 


i in pique ; Twelfth Sound. 


12 




12 




Ami, 


friend. 


dit, 


said. 


H, 


he. 


file, 


bow, file. 


cire, 


wax. 


lime, 


file. 


bis, 


brown. 


mille, 


thousand. 


cil, 


eye -lash. 


pile, 


pile. 


dix, 


ten. 


quitte, 


free, disci 


lit, 


bed. 


rime, 


rhyme. 



1 1 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



12 




12 




pis, 


worse. 


souris, 


mouse. 


prix, 


price. 


si, 


if. 


qui, 


who. 


bati, 


built. 


riz, 


rice. 


six, 


six. 


13. 1 sounded as ee in eel ; Thirteenth 


Sound. 




(Also 


ie, y.) 




13 




13 




Lie, 


dregs. 


dime, 


tithe. 


scie, 


saw. 


gite, 


home. 


vie, 


life. 


lie, 


island. 


15. 


sounded as o in not ; Fifteenth Sound ; and 


16. 


sounded as aw in awe; Sixteenth Sound. 


15 




16 




Botte, 


boot. 


encore, 


again. 


code, 


code. 


dore, 


gilds. 


folic, 


crazy. 


Georges, 


George. 


mode, 


mode. 


maure, 


Moor. 


noce, 


wedding. 


corps, 


body. 


sotte, 


foolish. 


bord, 


edge. 


devot, 


devout. 


fort, 


strong. 


col, 


neck. 


nord, 


north. 


UU1, 


bowl. 


tort, 


wrong. 


1 

vol, 


theft. 


mort, 


dead. 


17. 


sounded as o in no; Seventeenth Sound. 


17 




17 




Cote, 


coast. 


dome, 


dome. 


gros, 


big. 


mole, 


mole. 


nos, 


we. 


role, 


roll. 


vos, 


you. 


rose, 


rose. 


peau, 


skin. 


tole, 


sheet-iron. 


rot, 


roast. 


cause, 


cause. 


flot, 


wave. 


psaume, 


psalm. 


tot, 


soon. 


sauce, 


sauce. 


beau, 


handsome. 


saug'e, 


sage. 


cau, 


water. 


geole, 


jail. 



SENTENCES. 

4 15 1 

Le chat est la. The cat is there. 

4 15 5 

Le drap est sec. The cloth is dry. 

4 15 11 1 

Le plat est a sa place. The dish is in its place. 

4 2 1 5 1 

Le tas de sacs est la. The pile of bags is there. 

5 7 5 2 

Cette daine est grasse. That doe is fat. 

6 1 5 6 

Cette sallc est belle. That hall is beautiful. 



PRELIMINARY LESSOXS. 



15 



4 114 1 

Le chat a le rat. 

4 5 11 10 

Le chef a la malle. 

110 14 6 

La dame a le the. 

5 1 Oil 6 

Cett£ femme a la clef. 

4 1 5 17 5 2 

Ce chat est gros et gras. 

50805 17 4 

Cette bete est grosse et grasse. 

61 704110 

J'ai la craie de la dame. 

6150518 

J'ai la pelle et la beche. 

6 1 1 4 4 6 # 

J'ai la cage de ce geai. 

611 04501 

J'ai la bague de cette femme. 

12 1 4 1 5 1 - 

H a le dard et l'arc. 

12 1 4 12 4 4 5 

11 a le lit de ce chef. 

12 1 1 13 1 16 o 

II a la scie et la corde. 

4 5 1 4 17 15 

Le chef a le pot et le bol. 

1 1 o 1 1 17 o 

La dame a la rose. 

12 1 1 13 41 1 o 

Qui a la cire de la dame ? 

15 1 1 13 

Georges a la cire. 

12 1 4 "17 17 

Qui a le beau seau ? 

15 1 4 17 5 4 17 17 

Georges a le seau et le gros pot. 



The cat has the rat. 

The chief has the trunk. 

The lady has the tea. 

That woman has the key. 

That cat is big and fat. 

That animal is big and fat. 

I have the chalk of the lady. 

I have the shovel and the spade. 

I have the cage of that jay. 

I have the jeweled ring of that woman. 

He has the dart and the bow. 

He has the bed of that chief. 

He has the saw and the cord. 

The chief has the pot and the bowl. 

The lady has the rose. 

Who has the wax of the lady ? 

George has the wax. 

Who has the handsome bucket ? 

George has the bucket and the big pot. 



U. TWENTY-SECOND SOUND. 

22. V sounded as u in queen ; Twenty-second Sound. 



22 22 

Bu, drunk. butte, hill, 

but, aim. chut! hush! 

du, of the. plume, feather, 

lu, read. tu, thou, 

nu, naked. eu, had. 

su, known. sur, on. 

23. TJ sounded as it prolonged Twenty-third Sound. 

23 23 

Eut, had. buche, log. 

mur, ripe. flute, flute, 

sur, sure. mure, mulberry, 

bue, drunk. juge, judge, 

lue, read. tue, kills, 

sue, known. ruse, craft. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



0. 


Eu sounded as u in us ; Ninth Sound, and 


11. Eu sounded as i in sir ; Eleventh Sound. 


9 

Bleu, 


blue. 


9 

jeune, 


young. 


feu, 


fire. 


peuple, 


people. 


jeu, 


game. 


11 

beurre, 


butter. 


seul, 


alone. 


peur, 


fear. 


b cc u f , 


beef. 


m purs 


die. 


ceuf, 


egg- 


moeurs, 


manners. 


neuf, 


nine. 


i ii 
labeur, 


labor. 


veuf, 


widower. 


ardeur, 


ardor. 


pcux, 


can. 


nageur, 


swimmer. 


veux, 


will. 






10. 


Eu sounded as eugh 


in eughr ; 


Tenth Sound. 


10 




10 12 




Jeune, 


fast. 


jeudi, 


Thursday. 


deux, 


two. 


boeu/s, 


oxen. 


eux, 


them. 


ceufs, 


eggs. 


peu, 


little. 


creux, 


hollow. 


18. On sounded as in you 


; Eighteenth Sound, and 


19. Oil sounded as oo in mood; Nineteenth Sound. 


18 




19 




Bouc, 


he-goat. 


boule, 


ball. 


bout, 


end. 


coude, 


elbow. 


aout, 


August. 


moule, 


mold. 


coup, 


blow. 


poule, 


hen. 


cour, 


yard. 


toute, 


all. 


doux, 


sweet. 


voute, 


vault. 


nous, . 


we, us. 


boue, 


mud. 


sous, 


under. 


roue, 


wheel. 


tout, 


all. 


foule, 


multitude. 


vous, 


you. 


roue, 


rolls. 


20. 


Oi sounded as wa in icasTi ; Twentieth Sound. 


20 

Bois, 


wood. 


20 

boite, 


box. 


doit, 


finger. 


droite, 


right. 


moi, 


to me. 


noir, 


black. 


roi, 


king. 


pois, 


pea. 


foi, 


faith. 


loi, 


law. 



SENTENCES. 



6 22 18 4 7 

«Tai bu tout le lait. 

6 _ 22 22 11 o 7 

J'ai eu du beurre frais. 

6 22 1 23 4 8 

J'ai vu la buche de chene. 



I have drunk all the milk. 
I have had some fresh butter. 
I have seen the log of oak. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



17 



12 1 22 22 22 4 23 

11 a bu du jus de mures. 

12 1 22 22 12 5 22 11 

11 a eu du riz et du beurre. 

12 1 22 4 9 5 IS 

11 a vu le bceuf et le bouc. 

5 1 22 18 4 7 4 1 11 

Elle a bu tout le lait de sa soaur. 

5 1 22 1 18 22 4 22 

Elle a vu la poule sur le mur. 

5 1 22 1 15 10 

Elle a eu sa robe bleue. 

16 1 22 1 22 9 

Georges a eu la plume neuve. 

1 901 01 22 1 17 

La jeune feinme a eu la rose. 

1 101 22 1 8 23 

La dame a eu la peche mure. 

4 6 5 15 22 6 

Ce the est trop sucre. 

1 18 5 18 12 

La poule est sous le lit. 

1 10 22 6 5 9 

La queue du geai est bleue. 

1 16 5 22 1 90 

La corde est sur la meule. 

4 1 9 5 9 

Ce drap bleu est neuf. 

4 17 9 5 9 5 16 

Ce gros bosuf est jeune et fort. 

4 10 5 7 22 

Ce noeud est tres-dur. 

12 5 18 4 17 

Qui est sous ce dome ? 

4 17 5 17 17 

Ce dome est haut et beau. 

6 22 1 13 22 4 17 

J'ai vu la cire sur le pot. 

12 1 22 1 22 18 4 17 ) 

II a vu ma plume sous le seau. [• 

5 1- 22 13 4 7 5 4 11 

Elle a eu tout le lait et le beurre. 



He has drunk some mulberry juice. 
He has had some rice and some butter. 
He has seen the ox and the hc-goat. 
She has drunk all the milk of her sister. 
She has seen the hen on the wall. 
She has had her blue gown. 
George has had the new pen. 
The young woman has had the rose. 
The lady has had the ripe peach. 
This tea is too sweet. 
The hen is under the bed. 
The tail of the jay is blue. 
The rope is on the grindstone. 
This blue cloth is new. 
That big ox is young and strong. 
This knot is very hard. 
"Who is under that dome ? 
That dome is high and handsome. 
I (have seen) saw the wax on the pot. 
He (has seen) saw my pen under the 
bucket. 

She has had all the milk and the butter. 



NASAL SOUNDS. 

3. An sounded as en in encore ; Third Sound. 



3 3 

An, year. tante, aunt, 

banc, bench. tente, tent, 

blanc, white. vente, sale, 

en, in. paon, pea-fowl, 

flanc, flank. sang, blood. 

Jean, John. temps, time. 

14. In sounded as an in anchor ; Fourteenth Sound. 

14 14 

Daim, deer. peintre, painter, 

faim, hunger. crainte, fear, 

lin, flax. mainte, many, 

pain, bread. nymphe, nymph, 

sain, sound. sein, bosom, 

saint, holy. vin, wine. 



18 PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 

21. On sounded as on in song ; Twenty-first Sound. 

21 21 

Bon, good. monde, world, 

long, long. ronde, round, 

rond, round. honte, shame, 

done, then. ombre, shadow, 

font, make. taon, breeze-fly. 

24. Un sounded as un in uling ; Twenty-fourth Sound. 
(Also um, eun.) 

24 1 24 

Un, a, one. chacun, each one. 

bruD, brown. parfum, perfume. 

24 

Huns, Huns. humble, humble. 

6 24 

defunt, deceased. jeun, fast. 



S E N T E 

3 1 24 21 3 

Jean a un long banc. 

4 14 6 i 5 21 

Ce pain est blanc et bon. 

6 22 24 17 3 

J'ai vu un beau paon. 

12 1 22 24 17 _ 24 

II a vu un gros boeuf brun. 

4 3 4 14 5 ^7 3 

Ce champ de lin est tres-graud. 

21 7 1 22 12 14 

lion pere a du til tin. 

6 22 22 14 13 

J'ai bu du Yin doux. 

4 9 5 14 4 3 

Ce bceuf est plein de sang. 

21 21 5 21 5 16 

Son gond est long et fort. 

21 1 21 5 7 21 

Mon plat rond est trus-bon. 

4 3 4 4 3 17 5 17 

Le plan de ce grand dome est beau. 

4 21 4 3 5 22 21 3 

Le nom de Jean est sur son banc. 



NCES. 

John has a long bench. 

This bread is white and good. 

I haYe seen a beautiful peacock. 

He has seen a big brown ox. 

This field of flax is very large. 

My father has some fine thread. 

I have drunk some siveet wine. 

This ox is full of blood. 

nis hinge is long and strong. 

My round dish is very good. 

The plan of that large dome is fine. 

The name of John is on his bench. 



LIQUID BOUNDS. 



Gn sounded as ni in onion; LI or I as Hi in brilliant. 



Digne, 

cygnc, 

ligne, 

signe, 

vigne, 
7 o 
peigne, 

rcgne, 

1 12 21 

Avignon, 



worthy. 

swan. 

line. 

sign. 

vine. 

comb. 

reign. 

Avignon. 



12 

bille, 

fille, 

grille, 

quille, 

vrille, 

g ril > 

7 

treille, 
veille, 



marble. 

girl. 

grate. 

ninepin. 

gimlet. 

gridiron. 

trellis. 

watch. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



19 



SEN 

4 12 7 22 17 

Le cygne regne sur l'eau. 

5 12 5 7 16 

Cette ligne est tres forte. 

12 14 7 450 12 

Qui a le peigne de cette fille ? 

1 12 22 5 1 24 12 

La fille du chef a un cygne. 

1 12 05 22 4 710 

La vigne est sur le treillage. 

4 9 3 1 1' 

Le boeuf mange la paille. 

1 1 5 22 4 12 

La caille est sur le gril. 

1105 18 170 

La paille est sous la treille. 

5 12 7 24 12 

Cette fille fait un signe. 

12 1 1 12 5 1 12 

Qui a ma vrille et ma ligne ? 

16 5 12 22 12 

Georges est digne du prix. 

12 12 21 21 18 1 12 

II signe son nom sous la ligne. 



ENCES. 

The swan reigns on the water. 

That line is very strong. 

Who has the comb of that girl ? 

The daughter of the chief has a swan. 

The Tine is on the trellis. 

The ox eats the straw. 

The quail is on the gridiron. 

The straw is under the trellis. 

That girl makes a sign. 

Who has my gimlet and my line ? 

George is worthy of the prize. 

He signs his name under the line. 



WORDS CONTAINING DIPHTHONGS. 



121 4 

Diacre, 
diable, 
fiacre, 

6 

fier, 
fiez, 

7 

biais, 
fiais, 

7 

fier, 

5 

ciel, 

9 

Dieu, 

10 

pieu, 
vieux, 

10 

lieue, 
cieux, 

15 

fiole, 



viol, 



deacon. 

devil. 

hack. 

to trust. 

trust. 

slant. 

trusted. 

proud. 

sky. 

God. 

stake. 

old. 

league. 

skies. 

vial. 

violation. 



4 12 1 5 12 10 

Ce diacre est pieux. 

4 12 1 5 12 9 

Le fiacre est vieux. 

4 12 5 5 9 

Le ciel est bleu. 

12 9 20 18 22 17 

Dieu voit tout du haut a 

4 20 24 21 4 20 

Je vois un toit de bois. 

4 5 5 12 7 5 22 5 

Ce chef est fier et cruel. 



151 o 

moelle, 
i 

poele, 

7 

poeme, 

7 

poete, 

IS 1 

fouet, 

221 

nuage, 

6 

nuee, 

5 

bluet, 

fiiiet, 
n 

lueur, 
sueur, 

2212 

buis, 
nuit, 
puis, 

13 



marrow. 

stove. 

poem. 

poet. 

whip. 

cloud. 

cloud. 

blue-bottle, 
thin. 

light, 
sweat. 

box-wood. 

night. 

then. 

soot. 



SENTENCES. 

That deacon is pious. 
The hackney-coach is old. 
The sky is blue. 

12 9 

',s cieux. God sees all/row the height of the skies. 
I see a roof of wood. 
That chief is proud and cruel. 



20 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



11 voit un nuage noir. 

1 1215 6 23 4 20 22 2212 

La liolo est sur le toit du puits. 

6 22 4 15 8 4 4 15 7 

J'ai lu lc poeme de cc poete. 

4 18 1 6 5 22 151 

Le fouet est pres du poele. 

4 22 12 5 12 14 15 12 

Ce buis est bien joli. 

4 22 12 3 6 4 22 11 

Je suis trempe de sueur. 



He sees a black cloud. 
The viol is on the roof of the well. 
I have read the poem of that poet. 
The whip is near (of) the stove. 
That box-wood is very pretty. 
I am wet through with sweat. 



PROMISCUOUS SENTENCES. 



4 15 1 5 3 4 1 17 

Le forcat est dans le cachot. 

4 12 20 5 14 4 1 125 

Ce tiroir est plein de panier. 

20 12 24 12 14 17 1 17 

Void un bien beau tableau. 

1812 4 1 17 5 7 3 17 

Oui, ce tableau est vraiment beau. 

6 22 4 2012 22 5 12 3 

JVii vu le fruit du paysan. 

4 15 11 1 12 21 1 1 

Le voleur a pi is men tabac. 

4 18 17 1 7 5 22 14 

Ce nouveau laquais est mutin. 

20 1 4 1 15 5 4 1 17 

Voila lc rabot et le marteau. 

6_ 3 6 24 4 21 22 6 

J'ai mange un melon musquL 

4 23 12 5 5 18 7 4 2212 

Ce muricr est couvert de fruit. 

22 1 1 1 1 21 7 

Gustavo va a la fontaine. 

4 15 12 1 22 3 5 

Co droguiste a une lancette. 

4 15 7 5 7 14 22 

Le notaire est tres-injuste. 

1 10 23 4 1 22 5 5 21 

La fortune de la duchesse est grande. 

C 12 1 20 o 

J'ai pris I'ardoise. 

4 18 3 5 1 24 1 15 5 

Le boulanger a un flageolet. 

4 12 3 3 5 12 14 14 12 5 

Ce petit enfant est bien indiscret. 

4 1 21 1 5 10 4 1 12 15 3 

Lc garcon paresseux sera ignorant. 

4 15 15 5 4 1 24 IS 5 5 1 

Ce colonel sera un jour general. 

501030103 7 

Cette allemande parlc franeais. 

4 20125 1 ? 22 10 

Ce voilier a fait une voile. 

4 1 5 12 11 17 15 4 17 

Le balayeur balaie avec le balai. 

4 7 I 125 % SB SB IS 22 7 

Le ferblaotier a du cuivre ct du ler. 



Tiie convict is in the dungeon. 

That drawer is full of paper. 

Here is a very fine picture. 

Yes, this picture is truly fine. 

I have seen the fruit of the country- 
man. 

The thief has taken my tobacco. 

That new lackey is stubborn. 

There are the plane and the hammer. 

I have eaten a musJcvaelon. 

That mulberry tree is covered with 
fruit. 

Gustavus goes to the fountain. 

That druggist has a lancet. 

The notary is very unjust. 

The fortune of the duchess is large. 

I have taken the slate. 

The baker has a flageolet. 

That little boy is very indiscreet. 

That lazy boy will be ignorant. 

This colonel will be one day general. 

That German woman speaks French. 

That sailmaker has made a sail. 

The sweeper sweeps with the broom. 

The tinman has some copper and some 



4 1 5 1214 1 1 1 86 21 12 

Ce galericn a avoue sun crime. 

21 4 12 12 5 5 1 C 4 2212 

Mon cerisier est charge de fruit. 

4 1 1212 5 1 1 "1 20 O 3 

Ce jardinier travaille adroitcment. 



That galley-slave has confessed his 
crime. 

My cherry-tree is loaded with fruit. 
That gardener works skilfully. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



21 



4 14 5 3 41036 

Le pain est dans le garde-manger. 

4 12 1 21 5 21 1 1 1 

Ce petit garcon est mon camarade. 

12 51 7015 22 12 3 

II decachete la lettre furtivement. 

4 15 7 4 15 12 9 14 12 3 

Je connais ce monsieur intimement. 

1 12 127 18 1 12 3 

La riviere coule rapidement. 



The bread is in the pantry. 
That little boy is my comrade. 
He unseals the letter stealthily. 
I know that gentleman intimately. 
The river flows rapidly. 



FINAL CONSONANTS SOUNDED ON A FOLLOWING VOWEL. 

When a word, ending with a consonant, precedes one beginning with a vowel or an h 
not aspirated, the two are often connected in pronunciation, though no rule but euphony 
can be given for making or avoiding the connection. 

In the following sentences the mark w is used to denote such a connection, in which 
case d is sounded as t; /.as v ; c, g, and g, as Tc; s and x as z, and final consonants which 
are naturally silent, in such cases are sounded upon the following vowel. 

53 3 11 5 15 

Cet enfant va a 1'ecole. 

5 W 15 5 3 24 1 1215 5 

Cet homme est dans un cabriolet. 

4^12 4 5 1 12~5 5 15 12 3 

Le prix de cet habit est exorbitant. 

12 1 3 1 12~0 15 l"l2 12 6 

11 apprend a lire avec facilite. 

4 12 3^3 5 7 14 5 5 3 

Ce petit enfant est tres-interessant. 

is 5V5121 3 ^110 
Vous etes evidemment malade. 

4 1 V 24~^ 21 11 12 5 5 6 

Cela est un bonheur inespere. 

is i^a 11 1V3 12 
Nous allons a la boulangerie. 

3 24~^ 13 15 3 

J'entends un bourdonnement. 

5 15 "^o 7 22 6 1130 

Cet homme fait une extravagance. 

1~* 1 1 12 4 "~~5 15 5 12 1 12 

La maladie de cet homme est imagi- 
70 w ^ 

naire. 

4 1 3 1 12 17 22 9 3 
Ce marchand agit frauduleusement. 

12 1 2212 22 0^4 21 12 5 1 3 

11 traduit une lecon litteralement. 

5 3 1 1 12 18 10 3 
Cet enfant travaille vigoureusement. 

4 w 's 4 12 3 1 12 1215 5 
Je mets le livre dans la bibliotheque. 

5 1 1 5 121214 5 7 1 3 

Cet academicien est tres-savant. 

5 15 1 12 15 15 1 4 3 

Cet homme agit honorablement. 

12 1^4 1 3 12 1212 6 

II a de la sensibilite. 
^18 1 21 1 5 17 5 
Nous allons a cet hotel. 

18 "~~5 12 IT* 1 lT'lS 14 3 

Vous ecrivez abominablement. 

6 "Tjf X ~*1t057 15 1 43 

Cet homme parle deraisonnablement. 



That child goes to school. 
That man is in a gig. 
The price of that coat is exorbitant. 
He learns to read with facility. 
That little child is very interesting. 
You are evidently sick. 
That is an unhoped for happiness. 
We are going to the baker's shop. 
I hear a buzzing. 

That man commits an extravagance. 
The sickness of that man is imaginary. 

That merchant acts fraudulently. 
He translates a lesson literally. 
That child works vigorously. 
I put the book in the library. 
That academician is very learned. 

That man acts honorably. 
He has {some) sensibility. 
We go to that hotel. 
You write abominably. 
That man speaks unreasonably. 



22 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



Ent is silent in the third person plural of verbs ; but then the preceding letter should 
be peculiarly sounded : if a vowel, it is long; if a consonant, it must be very distinctly 
hoard ; as, lis Smt (they laugh), lis etudiewi (they study) ; ils contew* (they relate), ils 

pare»£ (they adorn), etc. 

Ent is sounded as in nasal in the third person singular of the verbsjENiR and venie, 

and all their derivatives, as, II tieitf (he holds), il vien* (he comes), il convien* (he agrees, or 
it is suitable), etc. i ia$ is 

Ent, in all other cases, has the sound of en nasal, as patient (patient), agen£ (agent), 

1 3 

parent (relation), etc. 



17 1 3 1 12 18 18 

Nos agents agissewtf pour nous. 

12 l""' 3 0^ 4 22 12 015 4 1 3 

Ilsargentcw£le cuivre avec de Z'argent. 

7 15 21 11 1 3 

Ces liommes compter leur argent. 

7 13 10 11 3 W 8 

Les parents parent leurs enfants. 

7 5 12 3 5 12 18 1 18 

Ces presidents president tour a tour. 

7 15 1216 3 1215 ^ 18 3 

Les homraes violents violent souvent 

W 7 20 

les lois. 

12 21 12 14 12 21 13 11 1 12 

11 convient qu'ils conx'ient leurs amis. 

12 5 3 7 1 11 12 4 5 

11 pressent les malheurs qui le pressed. 

12 1 12 1 5 5 17 12 6 4 

Ils admired la generosite de 

w 5 15 o 

cet homme. 

12 5 22 130 7 1 5 1 12 

Us etudierc^ les mathematiques. 

7~^ 22 22 1 11 • 21 5 5 10 3 

Les usurpateurs sont generalement 

^ 5 5 6 

detestes. 

12 6 22 130 11 4 21 5 12 1 3 

Us etudie?i£ leurs lecons negligemment. They study their lessons negligently. 

A single s between two vowels has the sound o% s, except in a few compound words, 
but 88, and 8 (single) between two consonants or between a vowel and a consonant, are 
sounded as ss in bliss. 



Our agents act for us. 

They plate the copper with (some) 
silver. 

Those men count their money. 
The parents adorn their children. 
These presidents preside by turns. 
Violent men often violate the law. 

It is suitable that they invite their 
friends. 

He foresees the misfortunes which 

press him. 
They admire the generosity of that 

man. 



They study the mathematics. 
Usurpers are generally detested. 



Raiser, to kiss, 

2 

base, base, 
2 o 

ca.se, hut, 
n o 

chose, thing, 

18 14 

cousin, cousin, 



baisser, to lower. 

2 o 
basse, low. 

2 o 

casse, breaks. 

i o 
chasse, hunt. 

18 14 

coussin, cushion. 



5 7 

desert, desert, 

20 21 

poison, poison, 

17 

rose, rose, 

22 

ruse, artifice 



dessert, dessert. 

20 21 

poisson, fish. 



rosse, jade. 

22 

russe, Russian. 

15 ' 7 1 12 21 1 1 1221 

observation, abstraction. 



The addition of e to an adjective or past participle ending with a consonant, causes that 
consonant to bo sounded. The addition of e (or any other towel-sound) causes also the 
svllables an, en, in, on, un, to lose their nasal sound. 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



23 



MASCULINE. 
2 

Bas, 

17 

cliaud, 

5 20 

etroit, 

20 

froid, 

17 

gros, 

412 

petit, 

24 

brun, 

12 14 

divin, 

14 

plein, 

14 

vain, 



FEMININE. 
2 

basse, 

17 

cbaude, 

5 20 

etroite, 

20 o 

froide, 

17 

grosse, 

4 12 o 

petite, 

22 

brune, 

1212 

divine, 

7 . 
pleine, 

7 

vaine, 



low. 

warm. 

narrow. 

cold. 

big. 

small. 

brown. 

divine. 

full. 

vain. 



MASCULINE. 

18 

court, 

20 

droit, 

12 

dit, 

2 

gras, 

17 

haut, 

18 

lourd, 

18 14 

cousin, 

14 

fin, 

14 

sain, 

20 14 

voisin, 



FEMININE. 

18 

courte, 

20 

droite, 

12 o 

dite, 

2 o 
grasse, 

17 

haute, 

18 

lourde, 

18 12 

cousine, 

12 

fine, 

7 

saine, 

20 12 

voisine, 



short. 

strait. 

said. 

fat. 

high. 

heavy. 

cousin. 

fine. 

sound. 

neighbor. 



Kemark.— But there are only four words in French which lose their nasality when n 
final is carried over to the following word; they are the monosyllables mon, ton, son, and 
Ion. 



24 15 1 12 

Un bon ami, 

15 3 V 

son enfant, 



a good friend, 
his child. 



15 1 12 

mon ami, 
15 V T' 
ton arbre. 



my friend, 
thy tree. 



In speaking, e is often silent in words where it has naturally the sound of e. This 
occurs chiefly when several monosyllables succeed each other. 



4 15 o 

Je te le donne. 

4 4 15 1 

Je ne te le donne pas. 

4 20 

Je le vois. 

4 4 20 1 

Je ne le vois pas. 

4 12 4 4 20_ 1 

Je te dis que je ne le vois pas. 

12 4 15 o 

11 me le donne. 

12 4 3 

11 te le vend. 

12 4 4 3 1 

II ne te le vend pas. 

21 1214 4 12 1 

On vient de me dire cela. 

15 10 17 o 

Cela est peu de chose. 



I give it to thee. 
I give it not to thee. 
I see it. 
I see it not. 

I tell thee that I see it not. 

He gives it to me. 

He sells it to thee. 

He does not sell it to thee. 

One has just told me that. 

That is a small matter. 



DliEEESIS. 



The vowels e, i, w, when marked with the diaeresis (")• 



112 

Hai, 

11215 5 

baionnette, bayonet. 

112 o 

caique, 

112 o 

lai'que, 



hated. 



long-boat. 



hated. 



113 

Ha'ie, 

112 3 

caiman, alligator. 

5 / 122 

Esau, Esau. 

112 

mais, maize. 



1512 

Moise, 

11214 

paien, 

157 o 

poete, 

122 

Saul, 



pagan. 

poet. 

Saul. 



112 

naif, 



artless, 
poem. 
Raphael, Raphael. 



poeme, 

1 15 



24 



PRELIMINARY LESSONS. 



CONVEBSATIO 

21 18 15 12 9 

Boniour, monsieur. 

1 1 4 13 18 7 4 

Madame, jc vous souhaite le bonjour. 

21 20 8 20 5 

Bonsoir, mademoiselle. 

8 20 S 4 18 18 7 4 21 

Mademoiselle, je vous souhaite le bon- 
is 
soir. 

15 3 18 15 C 18 

Comment vous portez-vous ? 

7 1214 4 13 4 5 12 

Tres-bien, je vous remercie. 

15 3 4 15 1101 

Comment se porte madame A. ? 

15 3 4 15 18 21 G 

Comment se porte tout le monde cbez 

18 ^ 

vous ? 

1 7 3 1214 

Parfaitement bien. 

18 21 4 15 1214 

Tout le monde se porte bien. 

5 ^13 15 3 5 15 436 

Et vous, comment est votre sante ? 

15 16 12 7 4 15 1 6 

Comme d'ordinaire, je me porte assez 

1214 7 12 W ~~ 

bien, merci. 

12 7 1214 17 3 

11 fait bien beau temps. 

12 7 24 3 22 5 

11 fait un temps superbe. 

1812 t 12 7 15 5 

Oui, mais il fait trop sec. 

1 1 if 5 5 18 3 

La chaleur est etouflante. 

18 1 21 W 4^1314 4 2213 

Nous avons besoin de pluie. 

12 I*'"' 20 1214 17 

11 va pleuvoir bientot. 

4 20 5 4 221 

Je vois quelques images. 

12 1 7 20 125 17 20 

11 a fait froid hier au soir. 

12 7 17 4 1 14~' 

11 fait chaud ce matin. 

9 12 

rieut-il ? 

15 W 16 12 11 7 12 5 

Non, monsieur, mais il gele. 

12 7 12 7 22^8 

11 neige. 11 fait du vent. 

12 5 1 21 20 

II est tard. Bonsoir. 

1 12 9 17 4 20 

Adieu. Au revoir. 



?AL PH EASES. 

Good day (or good morning), sir. 
Madam, I wish you a good day, or a 
good morning. 

Good evening, miss. 

Miss, I wish you a good evening. 

How do you do ? 

Very well, I thank you. 

How does madame A. do? 

How is every body at your house ? 

I am perfectly well. 

Every body is well. 

And you, how is your health? 

As usual, I am pretty well, thank you. 

It is very fine weather. 
It is splendid weather. 

Yes, but it is too dry. 

The heat is suffocating. 

We have need of rain. 

It is going to rain soon. 

I see some clouds. 

It was cold yesterday evening. 

It is warm this morning. 

Does it rain ? 

No, sir, but it freezes. 

It snows. It is windy. 

It is late. Good evening. 

Adieu. Until we see each other again. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



1. — PREMIERE LEgON. 



Sound of E and of 01. 



E sounded as u in us. 

20 

pois, 



4 4 4 4 4 4 

je, le, ce, de, me, tie. 



I. I see. 

The. This, that. 

Him, it. I see it or him. 

The king. This king. 

The wood. That wood. 

The finger. This finger. 

The weight. That weight. 

The pea. This roof. 

Cold. Of, from. 

Of wood. From that king. 

I see the roof. 

I see it. 

I see the king. 

I see him. 

I see the wood of this king. 

The roof of wood. 

The cold pea. The cold finger. 



01 sounded as wa in wash. 

20 20 20 20 20 20 

, doigt, froid, poids, roi, toil, vois. 



Je.* Je vois. 

Le (before a noun). Ce. 

Le (before a verb). Je le vois. 

Le roi. Ce roi. 

Le bois. Ce bois. 

Le doigt. Ce doigt. 

Le poids. Ce poids. 

Le pois. Ce toit. 

Froid. Be. 

De bois. De ce roi. 

Je vois le toit. 

Je le vois. 

Je vois le roi. 

Je le vois. 

Je vois le bois de ce roi. 
Le toit de bois. 

Le pois froid. Le doigt froid. 



Most adjectives are placed after their nouns in French. 

Je vois le poids. Je le vois. Je vois ce pois. Je vois le pois 
froid. Je le vois. Je vois le roi. Je vois ce roi. Je le vois. Je 
vois le bois. Je vois le doigt de ce roi. Je vois ce poids. Je vois 
le toit de bois. Je le vois. 

I see the king. I see this king. I see him. I see the wood. 
I see that wood. I see it. I see the finger of this king. I see it. 



* Words introduced for the first time are printed in italics. 

2 



26 PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 

I see that weight. I see the pea. I see the cold pea. I see it. 
I see the roof. I see this roof. I see the roof of wood. I see it. 



2. — SECONDE LEQOX. 

1 6 

Sound of A and 13. 

A sounded as a in ah, mass. £ sounded as a in fate. 

11 1 1 1 1 10 66 6616116 

lac, sac, pas, drap, plat, chat, pape.* de, hie, pre, the, cafe, canape. 

The lalce. The sack or bar/. Le lac. Le sac. 

The cloth. The dish. Le drap. Le plat. 

The cat. The pope. Le chat. Le pape. 

Not. I do not sec. JVe-pas. Je ne vois pas. 

A T ot is two words in French ; ne fcefore the verb and pas after it. 

This thimble. That corn. Ce de. Ce ble. 

This meadow. That, tea, Ce pre. Ce the. 

This coffee. That sofa. Ce cafe. Ce canape. 

I do not see the lake. Je ne vois pas le lac. 

I do not see the bag. Je ne vois pas le sac. 

I do not see the cloth. Je ne vois pas le drap. 

I do not see the dish. Je ne vois pas le plat. 

I do not see the cat. Je ne vois pas le chat. 

I do not see the pope. Je ne vois pas le pape. 

Je ne vois pas le roi. Je ne vois pas le hois. Je ne vois pas 
le doigt. Je ne vois pas le poids. Je ne vois pas le pois froid. 
Je ne vois pas le toit de bois. Je vois ce de. Je le vois. Je vois 
ce ble. * Je le vois. Je vois le pre. Je vois le the froid. Je le 
vois. Je vois le cafe de ce roi. Je^ vois le canape de ce pape. Je 
vois le pape. Je le vois. Je ne vois pas le de. Je ne vois pas 
leble. 

I see the lake. I see this bag. I see this cloth. I see that 
dish. I see this cat. I see the pope. I see him. I see the thim- 
ble. I see the corn. I see it. I see the meadow. I see the tea 
of this king. I see the cold coffee. I see the sofa. I do not see 
the meadow. I do not see the tea of this king. I do not see the 
coffee. I do not see the sofa. I do not see the sac of cloth. 



A cipher over e shows that it is silent ; this is often the case at the end of words. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



27 



3.— TRGISIiME LEgON". 



5 5 5 5 

b ref, chef, jet, et. 



Sound of E and of E. 
E as e in ebb. E as ai in air. 

* 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 

cerf, fer, verre, ver, vert, rais, dais, lait, palais. 



The brief. The chief. 

The jet. And. 

The stag. This tYora. 

That glass, tumbler. The t£>or?K. 

Green. This spo£e. 

The canopy. The »m7&. 

The palace. The green canopy. 

I do not see the brief.- 

I do not see it. 

I do not see the chief. 

I do not see him. 

I see the iron and the glass. 

Jc vois le cerf. Je le vois. 



Le bref. Le chef. 

Le jet, Et. 

Le cerf. Ce fer. 

Ce verre. Le ver. 

Vert. Ce rais, 

Le dais. Le lait. 

Le palais. Le dais vert. 

Je ne vois pas le bref. 

Je ne le vois pas. 

Je ne vois pas le chef. 

Je ne le vois pas. 

Je vois le fer et le verre. 



Je ne vois pas le jet froid. Je ne 
le vois pas. J e vois le ver. Je ne vois pas le rais. Je ne le vois 
pas. Je vois le dais vert. Je ne vois pas le lait de ce pape. Je 
vois le palais de ce roi. Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le lac. Je ne 
vois pas le sac. Je vois le drap et le chat. Je ne vois pas le plat. 
Je vois le palais de ce pape. Je vois le de de fer. 

I do not see the green corn. I do not see it. I see the green 
meadow. I do not see the tea. I do not see it. I see the coffee 
and the milk. I do not see the sofa. I do not see it. I see the 
king and the pope. I see the cold jet. I do not see the chief. I 
do not see the stag. I do not see him. I see the glass. I do not 
see the iron. I see the spoke of wood and the green canopy. I do 
not see the palace. I do not see it. I see the cold milk. I see it. 



4.— quatriEme leqqn. 



2 

Sound of A. 

A sounded as a in father, arm. 

2 2 2 2 77177 

mat, bas, tas, gras. Sounds before given, frais, laid, balai, vers, 

1 1 101 116 

rat, dard, cadenas, memoire. 
The mast. That heap, pile. Le mat. Ce tas. 

The stocking. Fat. Le bas. Gras. 

Low. Bas. 
The rat. That dart. Le rat. Ce dard. 



28 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



This padlock. This broom. Ce cadenas. Ce bcdai. 

Cool, fresh. Ugly. Frais. Laid. 

This account, memorandum, memorial. Ce memoire. 

The low roof. The cool milk. Le toit bas. Le kit frais. 

The ugly chief. The fat king. Le chef laid. Le roi gras. 

I see the mast of wood. Je vois le mat de bois. 

I do not see the pile of wood. Je ne vois pas le tas de bois. 

I do not see it. Je ne le vois pas. 

Je ne vois pas le bas. Je ne le vois pas. J e vois le bois. Je vois 
le canape bas et le balai de bois. Je ne vois pas le rat. Je ne le 
vois pas. Je vois le dard et le cadenas. Je vois le dard de fer et 
le balai. Je vois le vers. Je le vois. Je ne vois pas le memoire. 
Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le bref de ce pape. Je vois le palais 
de ce chef. Je ne vois pas le cerf. Je ne le vois pas. Je vois le 
ver et le fer. Je ne vois pas le ver. Je vois ce cadenas. 

I see the spoke of wood. I do not see the green canopy. I do 
not see it. I see the fresh milk. I see the low mast. I do not 
see the pile of wood. I do not see it. I do not see the stocking. 
I see the cat and the rat. I see the dart and the padlock. I see 
the glass of this ugly and fat chief, and the memorial of this king. 
I do not see the mast. I see the pile of iron. I see the stocking 
and the bag. I see the wood and the dart of iron. I do not see 
the rat. I do not see him. I see the glass and the memorial of 
this chief. I see the fresh milk and the stag. 



5.— CINQUlEME leqon. 

IS 16 17 

Sound of O, O v , and O. 
as o in not. as aw in axce. 6 as o in go, no. 

15 15 15 5 15 5 15 1 1G 16 16 16 17 17 17 1 4 17 1 17 

Vol, globe, roeher, crochet, eoldat: or, fort, mort,porc: seau,gros, beau, matelot, bateau. 

The bowl. The globe. Le bol. Le globe. 

That rock. That soldier. Ce rocher. Ce soldat. 

This hook. This swine. Ce crochet. Ce pore. 

The gold. This gold. L'or. Cet or. 

Le and de become V and cV, and ce becomes cet, before a vowel or a silent h. 

The bowl of gold. The globe of gold. Le bol d'or. Le globe d'or. 
Strong. Dead. Fort. Mort. 

The bucket. Big, coarse. Le seau. Gros. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



29 



Handsome, fine. The sailor. Beau. Le matelot. 

This boat. The strong soldier. Ce bateau. Le soldat fort. 

The dead stag. The big sailor. Le cerf mort. Le gros matelot. 

Most adjectives, as we have seen (Lesson 1), are placed after their nouns. Some are 
placed before them. Gros and beau are of this kind. Such adjectives will be marked in 
these Lessons with the abbreviation (bef. n.) 

The big boat. The handsome globe. Le gros bateau. Le beau globe. 

Je vois le gros bol. Je le vois. Je ne vois pas le globe. Je 
ne le vois pas. Je vois le gros rocher. Je ne vois pas le soldat 
laid. Je vois le crochet et le dard. Je ne vois pas le pore. Je 
vois Tor de ce matelot. Je vois le matelot fort. Je ne vois pas 
le cerf mort. J e vois le seau de bois. Je ne vois pas le mat de ce 
bateau. Je ne vois pas le beau seau. Je vois le pore gras et le 
bol de ce soldat. Je vois le rocher bas. J e vois le tas de bois gras. 
Je ne vois pas le beau bas. 

I see the cat and the rat. I see the padlock of iron and the 
broom of wood. I do not see the handsome glass. I do not see 
it. I see the fresh milk. I do not see the memorial of this soldier. 
I do not see it. I see the bowl of wood and the handsome globe. 
I do not see the big rock. I do not see it. I see the fat pork. I 
do not see the gold of this ugly sailor. I see the big cat. I do 
not see the dead soldier. I do not see him. I see the bucket of 
strong wood. I do not see the handsome boat. I do not see it. 
I see the gold. I see this gold. 



6.— SIXIEME LEgON. 

12 13 

Sound of I and of 1. 

I as i in pique. t as ee in eel. 

12 12 1 12 12 12 5 12 12 17 12 1 4 12 12 17 13 13 13 13 20 2 12 

lit, lis, tapis, Jil, filet, il, sirop, pirate, petit, rideau: dime, cidre, glte, ile, voit, rdteau, 
gateau, cadeau. 

The bed. The lily. Le lit. Le lis. 

The carpet. Tbe thread. Le tapis, hefil. 

The net. That syrup. Le filet. Le sirop. 

The pirate. He, it. Le pirate. U. 

This curtain. Small, little. Ce rideau. Petit, (bef. n.) 

The cider. Le cidre. 

This cake. That rake. Ce gateau. Ce rdteau. 

The present. He sees. Le cadeau. II voit. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



lie sees. Ue docs not see. II voit. II ne voit pas. 

He sees it. He does not see him. II lc voit. II ne le voit pas. 

The soldier sees the pirate. Le soldat voit lc pirate. 

He sees him. II le voit. 

The pirate does not lcc the boat. Le pirate ne voit pas le bateau. 

He does not sec it. II ne le voit pas. 

Le rnatelot voit le gros roclier. II le voit. II ne voit pas le 
crochet d'or. II ne le voit pas. Le soldat voit le lit et le tapis. 
II ne voit pas le beau lis. Le rnatelot voit le petit filet, il ne voit 
pas le fil. Le soldat voit le cidre et le sirop, il ne voit pas le petit 
rideau. II voit le filet de ce chef. II ne voit pas le gateau de ce 
rnatelot, il voit le petit rateau de fer. Le pirate voit le cadeau de 
ce soldat. Je vois le gros lit et le beau tapis. Le pirate voit le 
pore, et le soldat rnort. II ne voit pas le rnatelot fort. 

The sailor sees the small bucket. He sees the hook of iron 
and the hook of gold. He does not see the handsome lily. He 
does not see it. I see the thread and the net. I do not see the 
handsome curtain. The soldier sees the cider and the cake of that 
pirate. I see the syrup and the little cake. The soldier sees the 
present of this king. He sees the handsome carpet, he does not 
see the bed. He does not see it. He sees the thread and the small 
net, he does not see the syrup. He sees the rake of wood and the 
rake of iron. I see the handsome curtain. 



7. — SEPTIiCME LECON. 



Hie same Sounds continued. 



5 17 7 17 1 17 1 17 15 5 6 15 5 15 

Jerome, vaisseau, marteau, anneau, loquet, perroquet, ros 

15 o 1 12 20 o 20 1 1 1 o 

homme, habit, moine, voile, camarade 



17 15 12 10 15 5 

a u, jolt, Georges, Joseph, 



Jerome. The ship. 

This hammer. This latch. 

The ring. That ring. 

That parrot. That reed. 

The vail. Pretty. 

George. Joseph. 

That man. The man. 

This coat. The coat. 

The comrade. The monk. 

Does he see ? Docs he not see ? 



Jerome. Le vaisseau. 
Ce marteau. Ce loquet. 
~V anneau. Cet anneau. 
Ce perroquct. Ce roseate. 
Le voile. Joli, (bcf. n.) 
Georges. Joseph. 
Cet homme. Uhomme. 
Cet habit. Vliabit. 
Le camarade. Le moine. 
Voit-il ? Ne voit-il pas? 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



31 



The subject pronoun after the verb is always joined to it by a hyphen. 
Does he see the ship ? Yoit-il le vaisseau ? 

Does he not see the hammer? Ne voit-il pas le marfceau ? 

Jerome voit le loquet de fer. Voit-il le perroquet de J oseph ? 
II le voit. Ne voit-il pas le joli roseau ? II ne le voit pas. Voit- 
il le joli voile % II ne le voit pas, il voit le tapis et le beau ricleau. 
Voit-il le camarade de ce moine % II le voit. Georges voit le vais- 
seau de Jerome, voit-il le gros marteau? II voit le marteau de fer 
et le loquet de bois. Voit-il Tanneau d'or % II voit l'anneau d'or 
et le joli voile. Voit-il le perroquet de cet liomme 1 II voit le 
perroquet de George et le joli roseau. Joseph voit le camarade de 
ce moine, ne voit-il pas 1'habit de cet homme ? II le voit. 

Jerome sees the pretty reed, does he see the handsome lily ? 
He sees the lily, he does not see the reed. Does he not see the 
bed of this monk % He does not see it. He sees the thread of 
George and the handsome net. Does he not see the comrade of 
Joseph ? He does not see him, he sees the monk and that ugly 
man. Does he see the cider ? He sees the cider and the syrup. 
George sees the present of Joseph, does he not see the handsome 
cake 1 He sees the handsome cake and the fresh milk. I see the 
small curtain, the rake of iron, and the pretty present of Jerome. 
I see the latch of iron, the pretty vail, and the coat of that man. 



8.— HUITlfcME LEQON. 

18 ID 

Sound of OU and of OlT. 
OU as in you, OtT as oo in mood. 

18 IS IS IS 5 18 5 12 18 12 18 18 17 18 18 19 19 

clou, trou, court, Voucher, boulet, hibou, bijou, couteau, ou, chou : ours, voute, 

1 16 1 1 15 17 15 1 1 20 

panorama, poteau,fromage, plat, noir. 



The nail. The hole. 

Short. This knife. 

The butcher. The cannon ball. 

The oid. This jewel. 

Or. That cabbage. 

The bear. The panorama. 

This cheese. That post. 

Black. 
The knife or the dish. 
That black bear. That black dish. 



Le clou. Le trou. 
Court. Ce couteau. 
Le boucher. Le boulet. 
Le hibou. Ce bijou. 
Ou. Ce chou. 
Hours. Le panorama. 
Ce fromage. Ce poteau. 
Noir. 

Le couteau ou le plat. 

Cet ours noir. Ce plat noir. 



32 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Je vois le clou de fer. Le boucher voit le petit hibou. Ne 
voit-il pas le cbou ? II ne le voit pas. Le rat voit le fromage, 
voit-il ce trou ? 11 le voit. Le boucher voit le boulet, ne voit-il 
pas le poteau court 1 II voit le poteau court, et le mat court. Voit- 
il le clou ou le boulet ? II voit le clou. Le hibou voit le chat, ne 
voit-il pas le trou ? Ne voit-il pas le couteau de ce boucher ? 11 ne 
le voit pas. Voit-il le chou ou le fromage? II voit le chou, il ne 
voit pas le fromage. Georges voit le drap noir, ne voit-il pas le 
panorama ? II voit le panorama et le palais de ce chef. 

Jerome sees the hammer, does he see the latch ? He does not 
see it, he sees the ring of gold, and the post of iron. The parrot 
does not see the owl. The butcher sees the nail, does he see the 
cannon-ball ? Does he see the black vail or the black coat ? The 
comrade of Jerome sees the panorama, does he not see the black 
bear ? He does not see him. Does he not see the knife of this 
man ? He sees it. The owl sees the rat, does he not see this small 
hole ? I see the dish, I do not see the post of iron. Joseph sees 
the big post, does he not see the pretty dish ? He sees it. Does 
he see the nail or the latch 1 He sees the nail, he does not see the 
latch. 



9.— NEUVIEME LEgON. 



Sound of AN and of IN. 

AN as en in encore. IN as an in anchor. 

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 14 14 14 14 14 14 

prends, oanc, olanc, champ, Jean, grand, gant ; hn,pin, vin,pain, linge, daim, 

1214 17 12 4 

Men, aussi, que. 



White. The bench. 

The field. John. 

Large. The glove. 

The flax. The linen. 

This pine. This wine. 

That deer. Very. 

What {what thing?) Also. 

I take. He takes. 
Does he take ? What does he take ? 
1 take the large pine. 
He takes the -white glove. 
I take the flax and the linen also. 
Very large. Very white. 



Blanc. Le banc. 

Le champ. Jean. 

Grand (bef. n.) Le gant. 

Le lin. Le linge. 

Ce pin. Ce vin. 

Ce daim. Bien. 

Que. Aussi. 

J e prends. II prend. 
Prend-il ? Que prend-il ? 
Je prends le grand pin. 
II prend le gant blanc. 
Je prends le lin et le linge aussi. 
Bien grand. Bien blanc. 



PRELIMINAKY EXEKCISES. 33 

Jean voit le pre, voit-il le grand champ ? II le voit. Ne voit- 
il pas le couteau de ce boucher ? II ne le voit pas. Que prend-il % 
II prend le boulet de fer et le gros chou. Prencl-il le gant noir ou 
le blanc ? Je prends le banc. Que prend J ean ? II prend le lin 
de cet homme. Prend-il le linge aussi ? Je vois le gros daim blanc. 
Que prend le soldat % II prend le pain et le vin. Prend-il le fro- 
mage aussi % II prend le fromage et le lait aussi. Je prends le 
pain et le vin. Que prend le matelot % II prend le gateau de Jean. 
Je prends le banc court. Que voit ce hibou % II voit le petit trou 
et le grand cliamp. 

The soldier sees the white deer, does he see the large bench 
also ? He sees it. Does he not see the large field 1 He does not 
see it. John takes the glove, does he take the flax also? He 
takes the flax and the linen also. I take the white bread, what 
does George take % He takes the cake and the wine. Does he not 
see the white deer ? He does not see him. Does he see the large 
pine ? He sees it, and he sees the small wood also. I take the 
black glove of John, what does he take? He takes the white 
bread and the fresh milk. I take the wine of John, does he take 
the bread or the cake ? He takes the bread and the cake also. 



10.— DIXIEME LEgON. 



Sound of U and of tr. 

XJ as in queen. tj, the same sound prolonged 

22 22 22 22 22 5 22 12 22 12 22 1214 23 23 18 S 5 14 

tu, du, dur, Jules, mulet, rubis, fruit, Julien : mur, juge : boulanger, peintre, 



Thou. Of the. 

The handkerchief. IF7ta£(adj 

Julius. Hard. 

The mide. The ruby. 

Julian. The fruit. 

The judge. Ripe. 

The baker. The painter. 

Thou seest. Thou takest. 

Thou dost not see. 

Thou dost not take. 
Dost thou see ? Dost thou take ? 
What ruby dost thou see ? 
I see the ruby of the painter. 
Of the judge. Of the baker. 
2* 



mouchoir, quel. 

Tu 



Quel. 



Du. 
Le mouchoir. 
Jules. Dur. 
Le mulet. Le rubis. 
Julien. Le fruit. 
Le juge. Mur. 
Le boulanger. Le peintre. 
Tu vois. Tu prends. 
Tu ne vois pas. 
Tu ne prends pas. 
Yois-tu ? Prends-tu ? 
Quel rubis vois-tu ? 
Je vois le rubis du peintre. 
Dujuge. Du boulanger. 



34 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Que vois-tu ? Je vois le mouchoir du boulanger. Que prends- 
tu? Je prends le fruit. Quel fruit prends-tu ? Je prends le 
fruit dur. Prends-tu le fruit mur? Je ne le prends pas, Jules le 
prend. Que vois-tu? Je vois le mulet. Quel mulet vois-tu? Je 
vois le mulet du peintre. Que prend le boulanger ? II prend le 
mouchoir. Quel mouchoir prend-il? II prend le mouchoir de Ju- 
lien. Vois-tu le mulet de Jules? Je le vois. Prends-tu le fruit 
dur? Je ne le prends pas, je prends le fruit bien mur. Vois-tu le 
camarade de Julien ? Je ne le vois pas. Que prends-tu ? Je prends 
le rubis du juge et le fruit dur. 

Julius sees the mule of the baker, what dost thou see ? I see 
the ruby of Julian. Dost thou see the coat of the judge ? I do 
not see it. What fruit dost thou take? I take the ripe fruit. 
Dost thou take the glove or the stocking ? I take the glove and 
the stocking also. What ruby dost thou take ? I take the ruby of 
the painter. Thou takest the hard fruit, dost thou take the cheese 
also? I do not take it. Julius takes the bowl of Julian. What 
bread dost thou take? I take the bread of the baker. What 
dost thou take ? I take the ring of the painter, and the wine of 
the judge. I see the ripe fruit. Dost thou see the field or the 
meadow ? I see the field and the meadow also. 



11.— ONZIfcME LECON. 



Sound of EU, of ECT (before r), of EC V . 



ETJ as u in us. ETTE as vr in sir. 



EIj as eugh in eugh) 



9 9 12 9 9 9 12 5 9 11 11 11 1 U 

feu, jeii, lieu, bceuf, meunier, nceud: beurre, cceur, leur, nageu 

4 1 4 5 20 22 22 17 13 1 

chemin, etroit: sur, mur, beaucoitp, large. 



deux, pei',, feu : 



The fire. The play, game. 

That place. That miller. 

The knot. The ox, or beef. 

The heart. Their butter. 

The swimmer. Little (not much). 

Wide. The wall. 

On. Much, many. 

The path. Narrow. 



Le feu. Le jeu. 
Ce lieu. Ce meunier. 
Le nceud. Le bceuf. 
Le cceur. Leur beurre. 
Le nageur. Pen de. 
Large. Le mur. 
Sur. Bcauconp de. 
Le chemin. Etroit. 



Pen and beaucoup take de before the following nouns. 
Much beef. Little butter. Beaucoup de bceuf. Peu de beurre. 

The wide path. The narrow path. Le chemin large. Le chemin etroit. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



35 



Je vois ce jeu, le vois-tu ? Je ne le vois pas. Le meunier voit 
le mur ; ne voit-il pas le chemin ? II ne le voit pas. Ne voit-il 
pas le feu ? II le voit. Le nageur ne voit pas ce beau lieu ; voit-il 
le chemin etroit % II le voit et il voit le feu aussi. Prends-tu ce 
petit noeucl % Je ne le prends pas. Ne prends-tu pas le coeur du 
boeuf. Je prends le coeur du boeuf et le pain du nageur. Ne prends- 
tu pas beaucoup de beurre ? Je prends beaucoup de beurre et peu 
de boeuf? Que voit ce chat? II voit le perroquet sur le mur. Que 
voit le meunier % II voit le beau jeu. Quel mur voit-il ? II voit le 
gros mur. Ne prend-il pas le coeur du boeuf? II ne le prend pas. 

What dost thou see % I see the parrot. What parrot dost thou 
see ? I see the pretty parrot on the wall. Dost thou see the wide 
road or the narrow % I see the wide and the narrow also. Dost 
thou see this beautiful place? I see it. What does the miller 
take % He takes the coat of the swimmer. Does he not take the 
little knot % He does not take it. Does he not take much butter % 
He takes little butter and little beef. Dost thou not see the cat on 
that wall ? I see him ? and I see the parrot on the big rock. Dost 
thou take the big knot or the little? I take the little (one). 
Dost thou not take the handkerchief of the swimmer % I do not 
take it. Dost thou see the large lire 1 I do not see it. The mill- 
er sees this beautiful place, does he not see the game ? He does 
not see it. 



12.— DOUZIEME LEQON. 



Sound of UN. 

UN sounded u7tng (g silent), or very nearly as un in sunk. 

24 24 1 24 1 24 24 24 9 9 22 12 16 7 12 1 3 5 5 3 

un, brun, chacun, parfum, jeun, humble: veux, vent, cuir, mauvais, diamant, elephant, 

1 12 5 3 17 9 4 1 1 14 

papier, manteau, bleu, renard, lapm. 



A, one. Brown. 
The perfume. Each one. 
Bad. The leather. 
A diamond. An elephant. 
A cloak. This paper. 
A fox. A rabbit. 
Blue. A blue cloak. 
I wish for, thou wishest for, he wishes 
for. 

Dost thou icish for ? does he wish for ? Veux-tu ? veut-il? 



Un. Brun. 
Le parfum. Chacun. 
Mauvais (before n.), Le cuir. 
Un diamant. Un elephant. 
Un manteau. Ce papier. 
Un renard. Un lapm. 
Bleu. Un manteau bleu. 
Je veux, tu veux, il veut. 



1'RELIMIXARY EXERCISES. 



I do not wish for, thou dost not wish Jc nc veux pas, tu ne veux pas, il ne 

for, he does not wish for. veut pas. 

Dost tbou not wish for? docs he not Ne veux-tu pas? ne veut-il pas? 

wish for? 

I wish for it, thou wishest for it, he Je lc veux, tu le veux, il le veut. 
wishes for it. 

I do not wish for it, thou dost not wish Je ne le veux pas, tu ne le veux pas, 

for it, he does not wish for it. il ne le veut pas. 

What dost thou wish for ? Que veux-tu ? 

1 wish for the brown paper. Je veux le papier brun. 

George does not wish for the rabbit. Georges ne veut pas le lapin. 

He does not wish for it ; I wish for it. II ne le veut pas ; je le veux. 

Je veux le parfum. Que veux-tu ? Je veux le cuir. Chacim 
veut un couteau. Georges veut le diamant, veut-il aussi ce mauvais 
cuir ? II ne le veut pas. Ne veux-tu pas le renarcl ? Je ne le 
veux pas, je veux l'elephant. Tu veux le manteau brun, ne veux- 
tu pas le bleu aussi ? Je le veux. Charles veut le parfum, ne veut- 
il pas le diamant aussi ? II le veut. Cliacun veut un plat et un 
gateau. Veux-tu ce mauvais papier ? Je ne le veux pas. Que 
veut le meunier ? II veut l'elephant. Veut-il le renard ? II ne 
le veut pas. Ne veut-il pas le lapin ? II le veut. 

Dost thou wish for the brown cloak or the blue ? I wish for 
the brRwn and the blue also. Dost thou not wish for this perfume ? 
I wish for it. Each one wishes for a rabbit. Each one wishes for 
a stag and a fox. Charles wishes for the bad leather. He wishes 
for it. I do not wish for it. Does he not wish for the diamond ? 
He does notVish for it. I wish for it. I do not wish for the ele- 
phant, dost thou not wish for him? Thou dost not wish for him. 
I wish for him. Charles wishes for the paper, does he wish for the 
leather also % He wishes for the paper, and the bad perfume. What 
does the soldier wish for *? He wishes for the elephant. Dost thou 
wish for this cloak ? I wish for it. 



13.— TREIZlkME LEgON. 
Sound of ON. 

ON sounded as on in wrong. 

21 21 21 21 21 1 21 12 21 1 21 1 21 20 21 4 21 18 21 21 

men, ton, son, Ion, gond, canon, lion, maqon, gar con, toyons, prenons, voulons, long, 

18 15 o 

nous, noire. 

My. Tin/. Mon. Ton. 

His, her, its. Our. Son. Notre. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



37 



My hinge. Thy cannon. 

His lion. Our mason. 

A boy. We. 

Good. Long. 

We see. We ta£e. 

We wish for the good bread. 
Do we take ? Do we wish for ? 
Do we see the long cannon ? 
Do we take the hinge ? 
We take it. We do not take it. 

We see it. We do not see it. 
We wish for it. We do not wish 
for it. 

Do we not see the good mason? 
Do we not take the hinge of iron ? 
Do we not wish for our stick i 



Mon gond. Ton canon. 
Son lion. Notre macon. 
Un garcon. Nous. 
Bon. Long. 

Nous voyons. Nous prenons. 

Nous voulons ie bon pain. 
Prenons-nous ? Voulons-nous? 
Voyons-nous le long canon? 
Prenons-nous le gond ? 
Nous le prenons. Nous ne le prenons 

pas. 

Nous le voyons. Nous ne le voyons pas. 
Nous le voulons. Nous ne le voulons 
pas. 

Ne voyons-nous pas le bon magon ? 
Ne prenons-nous pas le gond de fer? 
Ne voulons-nous pas notre baton ? 



Que voyons-nous? Nous voyons mon champ et ton pre. Ne 
voyons-nous pas le fer du macon ? Nous le voyons. Voyons-nous 
son bois ? Nous ne le voyons pas. Que prenons-nous ? Nous pre- 
nons notre goncl de fer. Prenons-nous le canon du chef? Nous ne 
le prenons pas. Ne prenons nous pas son lion ? Nous le prenons. 
Quel baton voulons-nous? Nous voulons mon baton. Voulons- 
nous le long canon ? Nous ne le voulons pas. Ne voulons-nous 
pas le bon fromage ? Nous le voulons. Nous voulons le marteau 
du macon, nous ne voulons pas son lion. Nous voulons le long ta- 
pis et le bon lit. 

What do we see ? We see my ox and thy mule. Do we see 
our good mason ? We see him. Do we not see his long cannon ? 
We do not see it. Do we take the good hinge ? We take it. Do 
we not take the good cloak ? We do not take it. Do we wish for 
the diamond ? We wish for it. Do we not wish for the fox ? We 
do not wish for him. What do we wish for ? We wish for our 
stick. Dost thou see the palace of the king ? I see it. What 
does the monk see ? He sees the palace of the pope. Dost thou 
take the padlock or the hinge ? I take the padlock. What does 
the soldier take ? He takes the fruit of the baker. We take our 
fruit. What paper do we wish for ? I wish for the white paper, 
and thou wishest for the blue. Each one wishes for a knife and a 
cake. 



38 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



14.— QUATORZlfcME LECON. 

Sound of RE final. 

EE final sounded as ru in brush (half audible). 

1 4 1 4 1 4 7 4 1 4 22 4 2 4 5 2 4 12 4 12 7 4 12 21 

arbre, marbre, sabre, cedre, cadre, mere, 2^('dre, theatre, litre, lievre, qui, plorab, 

21 21 4 12 21 22 17 

concombre, pigeon, gruau. 

The tree. This tree. Varbre. Cet arbre. 

The marble. The sword, saber. Le marhre. Le sabre. 

The cedar. The sugar. Le cedre. Le sucre. 

This plaster. A frame. Ce pldtre. Un c«af?v. 

A theater. A Un theatre. Un ftt>re. 

The /ia»r. A cucumber. Le &eyra Un concombre. 

The Zeac/. A pigeon. Le plomb. L T n pigeon. 

The IF7k>. Le gruau. Qui. 

Who wishes for this book? Qui veut ee livre? 

The mason wishes for it. Le macon le veut. 

Dost thou wish for it? Le veux-tu ? 

Dost thou not wish for it ? Ne le veux-tu pas ? 

Dost thou see it ? Le vois-tu ? 

Dost thou not see it ? Ne le vois-tu pas ? 

Dost thou take it ? Le prends-tu ? 

Dost thou not take it ? Ne le prends-tu pas ? 

Qui veut le sucre blanc 1 Je le veux. Que vois-tu 1 Je vois 
le grand arbre. Que voit le macon ? II voit le beau niarbre. Que 
voyons-nous ? Nous voyons le platre blanc. Vois-tu le sabre? Je 
le vois. Le veux-tu ? Jo le veux. Ne le prends-tu pas ? Je ne 
le prends pas. Nous voulons le cedre du macon, ne le veux-tu pas ? 
Je veux le cedre et le niarbre. Nous ne prenons pas le beau cadre, 
le prends-tu ? Je prends le beau cadre et le long sabre. Nous 
voyons le grand theatre ; ne le vois-tu pas ? Je vois le grand the- 
atre et le grand arbre. Qui prend le sucre ? Je prends le sucre 
et le gruau. Qui voit mon livre, le vois-tu ? Veux-tu le lievre ? 
Je veux le lievre et le pigeon. 

What dost thou see 1 I see the cucumber and the lead. V/ e 
see the pigeon ; dost thou see him ? I see the pigeon and the hare. 
Who takes the gruel ; dost thou take it ? I take the gruel and the 
sugar. "We see the white plaster ; dost thou not see it ? I see the 
plaster and the lead. I take the cucumber ; dost thou wish for it? I 
wish for the cucumber and the gruel. We do not take the book ; dost 
thou not take it ? I take the book and the frame. What dost thou 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 39 

see ? I see the white marble, the long sword, and the cedar of the 
mason. We wish for the lead ; dost thou not wish for if? I wish 
for the lead, the marble, and the plaster. Dost thou see the hand- 
some theater ? I see the handsome theater and the large tree. We 
wish for the hare and the pigeon. 



15. — QUINZliSME LEQON. 



Sound of EZ final. 

6 

EZ final sounded as <?, or a in fate. 

6 1 6 2012 6 46 IS 6 61616 12 6 IS 15 o 7 7 3 4 

nez, asses, voyez, prenez, voulez, res, avez, saves, ries: vous, votre, %>ere, frere, chanvre, 

21 16 17 18 21 22 3 

rond, taureau, oouion, ruban. 



The nose. Sufficiently, enough. 

You. You see. 

You take. You wish for. 

Your. Round. 

Your father. Your brother. 

The hemp. The bull. 

M) 7 button. Your ribbon. 
Sufficiently long. Sufficiently short. 
Do you see ? Do you take ? 
Do you wish for? Do you not see ? 
Do you not take ? Do you not wish 

for? 

Does he see it ? Does he not see it ? 
Does he take it ? Does he not take it ? 
Does he wish for it ? Does he not wish 
for it? 

Voulez-vous le bouton rond ? 
le chanvre u ? Je ne le veux pas. 



Le nez. Assez. 

Vous. Yous voyez. 

Vous prenez. Yous voulez. 

Voire. Rond. 

Votre pere. Yotre frere. 

Le chanvre. Le taureau. 

Hon bouton. Votre ruban. 
Assez long. Assez court. 
Voyez-vous ? Prenez-vous ? 
Voulez-vous ? Ne voyez-vous pas ? 
Ne prenez-vous pas ? Ne voulez-vous 

pas? 

Le voit-il ? Ne le voit-il pas ? 
Le prend-il ? Ne le prend-il pas ? 
Le veut-il ? Ne le veut-il pas ? 



Je le veux. Ne voulez-vous pas 
Voyez-vous le taureau de mon 



pere % Je vois le taureau de votre pere et le bceuf de votre frere. 
Que prenez-vous % Je prends le ruban. Quel ruban prenez-vous % 
Je prends le long ruban. Je veux le ruban long. Que voyez-vous % 
Nous voyons le chanvre de votre frere ; le veut-il ? II ne le veut 
pas. Ne le prend-il pas % II ne le prend pas. Le voit-il % II le 
voit. Prenez-vous le bouton rond f Je le prends. Vous voyez le 
sabre de votre frere. Vous prenez le sucre blanc. Vous voulez le 
cedre du macon ; le veut-il aussi ? II ne le veut pas. Votre frere 
veut son livre ; ne le prend-il pas % II ne le prend pas. 

Do you wish for this little cucumber ? We do not wish for it. 



40 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Do you see the handsome frame? I see it. What do you take? 
I take the round button and the long ribbon. I take it sufficiently 
long. Who wishes for the hemp ? My father wishes for it. Does 
he take it 1 He takes the hemp and the flax. Who wishes for the 
round cake ? My brother wishes for it. Does he not see it ? He 
does not see it. What does your father wish for ? He wishes for 
his bull. Does he see him ? He sees him. Does he not take him ? 
He takes his bull and his ox. Do you see the field of your father ? 
I see it. What do you take ? I take the book of my brother. Do 
you wish for the long ribbon ? Yes, I wish for it. Do you wish for 
the sus:ar or the milk ? We wish for the sugar and the milk also. 



10.— SEIZlfcME LEQON. 
Sound of £. 

E sounded as e in where. 

8 8 7 7 7 8 8 8 5 8 11 8 4 8 4 4 21 22 12 4 

chene, meme, les, tes, ses, McJie, fete, pecher, pecheur, hetre, maitre: melon, cuivre, 

1 14 1 11 3 12 5 22 12 1G 9 1 125 12 20 

• jardin, ami, encrier, uniforme, oeuf, acier, ivoire. 

The oak. The same. Le chene. Le meme. 

A peach-tree. A fisherman. Un pecher. Un pecheur. 

The master. The beech. Le maitre. Le hetre. 

The melon. The copper. Le melon. Le cuivre. 

A garden. The friend. Un jardin. Uami. 

That inkstand. The uniform. Cet encrier. Vuniforme. 

This egg'. The steel. Cet ceuf. Vacier. 

The ivory. This ivory. LHvoire. Cet ivoire. 

Do you see it ? Do you not see it ? Le voyez-vous ? Ne le voyez-vous pas ? 

Do you take it? Do you not take Le prenez-vous ? Ne le prenez-vous 

it ? pas ? 

Do you wish for it ? Do you not wish Le voulez-vous? Ne le youlez-vous 

for it ? pas ? 

A noun plaeed as an adjective before another noun, in English, is translated into French 
by placiug it after the noun to which it belongs, with de between them ; as, 

The oak wood. The copper nail. Le bois de chene. Le clou de cuivre. 

The ivory inkstand. The steel knife. L'encrier d'ivoire. Le couteau d'acier. 
The oak bench. The steel sword. Le banc de chene. Le sabre d'acier. 

Quel arbre voyez-vous? Je vois le pecher. Voyez-vous le meme 
arbre ? Je vois le pecher et le chene. Que prend le pecheur *? II 
prend son bateau. Qui veut l'encrier de cuivre % Le maitre le veut. 
Voulez-vous le meme encrier ? Je ne veux pas le meme. Je vois le 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



41 



petit hetre, ne le voyez-vous pas ? Je vois le hetre et le chene. 
Votre ami veut ce melon, le voulez-vous aussi ? Je ne veux pas le 
meme melon. Vous voyez le petit ceuf, ne le prenez-vous pas ? Je 
ne le prends pas ; le soldat prend le petit ceuf et son uniforme. Que 
voyez-vous ? Je vois le beau jardin de votre ami. Qui voit le ba- 
teau du pecheur ? Notre ami le voit. Je vois le jardin de notre 
maitre ; que voyez-vous ? Je vois l'uniforme du soldat et l'encrier 
d'ivoire de votre ami. 

I take the big melon ; do you wish for it ? I do not wish for 
the melon, I wish for the egg. Do you see the peach-tree % I see 
it; do you not see it"? I see the peach-tree, and the large garden 
of our master. Do you see the boat of the fisherman % I see the 
boat of the fisherman, and the ship of the king. I take the copper 
hammer ; do you wish for it ? I wish for the copper hammer and 
the steel knife. We see the broom ; do you not see it % I see the 
broom and the oak. You wish for the ivory inkstand ; do you not 
take it 1 We take the ivory inkstand and the steel knife. The 
soldier wishes for his uniform ; do you see it ? I take the small 
egg ; do you not wish for it ? I wish for the egg and the melon. 
The soldier wishes for this uniform ; do you wish for the same ? I 
do not wish for it. Do you see this handsome garden ? I see the 
handsome garden, and the green meadow. Who wishes for the 
ivory knife ? Our master wishes for it. 



17.— DIX-SEPTIfiME LEgON. 
Sound of LE final and CH. 

LE final as lu in blunt (half audible). CH as sh in shade. 

2 4 1 * ,23 4 5 1 4 1 5 1 4 18 4 72 14 4 1 1 21 1 3 

cable, sable, buffie, spectacle, agreable, double: cliien, cheval, charbon, marchand, 

5 3 1 17 1 17 3 11 7 21 

mechant, chameau, chapeau, chanteur, chardon. 

A cable. The sand. Un cable. Le sable. 

A buffalo. A spectacle. Un buffle. Un spectacle. 

Agreeable. Double. Agreable. Double. 

A dog. A horse. Un chien. Un cheval. 

The coal. A trader. Le charbon. Un marchand. 

Wicked. The camel. Mechant. Le chameau. 

A hat. A singer. Un chapeau. Un chanteur. 

A thistle. Enough sand. Un chardon. Assez de sable. 
Asses, like beaucoup and peu, takes de before the following noun. 



42 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



This agreeable perfume. Ce parfum agreable. 

The double knot. Le noeud double. 

The wicked man. Le mediant liomme. 

Prenez-vous le gros cable ? Nous ne le prenons pas. Voyez- 
vous le cable de ce bateau ? Nous ne le voyons pas. Que voyons- 
nous? Yous voyez le buffle et le chaineau. Je vois un spectacle 
bien agreable, le voyez-vous ? Nous le voyons. Que voit le petit 
cliien ? II voit le mechant cheval et le gros cbameau. Prenez- 
vous le cbardon ? Nous ne le prenons pas. Nous voyons le cha- 
peau du tnarchand ; le veut-il ? II ne le veut pas. Le cbanteur 
veut son livre ; ne le prend-il pas ? II prencl son livre et son cha- 
peau. Voyez-vous le cheval noir? Je vois le cheval noir et le 
chien noir aussi. Ne voyez-vous pas le grand buffle ? Je ne le vois 
pas, je vois le gros taureau. Je prends assez de charbon et assez 
de sable. 

Do you see this beautiful spectacle ? I see it, and I see the large 
garden of the trader. What do you take ? I take the thistle and 
the double knot. I take this agreeable perfume ; do you wish for 
it ? I wish for this agreeable perfume and the book of the singer. 
What does the singer wish for ? He wishes for his hat and his 
dog. Who wishes for the long cable l ? The sailor wishes for the 
long cable and the boat of the trader. Do you see the big buffalo ? 
I see the big buffalo and the wicked horse. Do you wish for much 
sand ? I wish for little sand, and much charcoal. Do you take 
sufficieni charcoal ? I take sufficient charcoal, and the singer takes 
sufficient wood. What spectacle do you see ? I see the great spec- 
tacle. What knot do you take? I take the double knot. I see 
the mule of the trader and the big thistle. We see the wicked dog ; 
do you see him? I see the good camel, the white hat, and the big 
thistle. 



18.— DIX-IIUITI^ME LECON. 
Sound of EXT, and of ENT final. 

ENT final, in the third person plural of verbs, silent. ENT final otherwise as en. 

20 5 4 1 3 15 3 15 3 VI 1 3 18 12 12 21 

voietit, rtrennent, veulent : urgent, froment, comment: Us, charmant, oui,si, non, 

15 12 9 1 1 1 20 5 

mo?isieu?\ madame, mademoiselle. 

The silver, money. The wheat. TJ argent. Le froment. 
Charming. They. Charmant. Ik. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



43 



Yes, sir. iVb, madam. Oui, monsieur. Non, madame. 

Yes, miss. No, miss. Si,* mademoiselle. Non, mademoiselle. 

They see. They take. lis voient. lis prennent. 

They wish for. They do not see. Ite veulent. lis ne voient pas. 

They do not take. They do not wish lis ne prennent pas. Us ne veulent 

for. pas. 

They see it. They take it. lis le voient. lis le prennent. 

They wish for it. They do not see it. lis le veulent. lis ne le voient pas. 

They do not take it. They do not Us ne le prennent pas. lis ne le veu- 

wish for it. lent pas. 

Do they see ? Do they take ? Voient-ils ? Prennent-ils ? 

Do they wish for ? Do they not see ? Yeulent-ils ? Ne voient-ils pas ? 

Do they not take ? Do they not wish Ne prennent-ils pas? Ne veulent-ils 

for ? pas ? 

Do they see it ? Do they take it? Le voient-ils ? Le prennent-ils ? 

Do they wish for it? Do they not Le veulent-ils? Ne le voient-ils pas ? 

see it ? 

Do they not take it ? Do they not Ne le prennent-ils pas ? Ne le veu- 
wish for it ? lent-ils pas ? 

Mon pere et mon frere veulent le bon cheval ; veulent-ils lecha- 
meau aussi ? lis ne le veulent pas. Veulent-ils le froment ? NTon, 
monsieur, ils ne le veulent pas. Ne veulent-ils pas 1' argent ? Si, 
monsieur, ils veulent l'argent et 1'or. Voient-ils ce charmant 
petit jarclin ? Non, madame, ils ne le voient pas. Voient-ils le 
gros elephant % Oui, madame, ils le voient. Prennent-ils l'argent 
du marchand ? Non, mademoiselle, ils ne le prennent pas. Pren- 
nent-ils son froment ? Oui, mademoiselle, ils prennent son froment 
et son beurre. Qui voit ce lieu charmant ? Le chanteur et le sol- 
dat le voient. Voyez-vous ce charmant spectacle ? Oui, monsieur, 
je le vois. Le soldat et le matelot veulent le bon melon ; ne le 
prennent-ils pas ? Non, monsieur, ils prennent le beurre et le fro- 
mage. 

Do you wish for much silver? Yes, madam, I wish for much 
silver and much gold. Who wishes for the wheat of the trader ? 
My father and my brother wish for it. Do they wish for this charm- 
ing garden ? Yes, madam, they wish for it. Do they take the 
white sugar % Yes, miss, they take it. What do the judge and 
the master see? They see the palace of the pope. Do they see 
the green meadow? Yes, miss, and they see the ship of the trader. 



* French people most generally use &i instead of oui, in answering interrogative sen- 
tences constr acted -with a negation. 



44 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Dost thou see the glass inkstand ? * Yes, sir, I see the glass ink- 
stand and the white paper. What does the master take ? He takes 
his hat and his handkerchief. Do you wish for the ivory knife ? 
No, sir, I do not wish for it. What do the mason and his boy wish 
for? They wish for much copper and much iron. Do you take 
sufficient milk ? Yes, madam, I take sufficient milk and sufficient 
su^ar. 



19.— DIX-NEUVlEME LEQON. 
Sound of Y between vowels. 

1212 

Y between two vowels, and sometimes between a vowel and a consonant, as ii. 

61221 20 1214 512 14 5 12 1 7 7 7 7 7 )7 17 11 11 

crayon, doyen, paysan, paysage: les, mes, les, ses, ces, nos, vos, leur, lews. 

My pencil. This dean. Hon crayon. Ce doyen. 

The countryman. The landscape. Le paysan. Le paysage. 

The plural of French nouns and adjectives is generally formed by adding s to the singular. 
The great man. The great men. Le grand homme. Les grands hommes. 

The small pencil. The small pencils. Le petit crayon. Les petits crayons. 

The article and adjectives in French agree with their nouns in number. The following 
are the plural of the article and pronominal adjectives thus far given. 

My. Thy. His, her, its. Mes. Tes. Ses (plural). 

Our. Your, lliese, those. Nos. Vos. Ces. 

Tfie. Their. Les. Leur (sing.). Leurs (plural). 

Of the. Of the deans. Of the men. Des (plur.). Des doyens. Des hommes. 
The dean. The deans. Le doyen. Les doyens. 

This countryman. These countrymen. Ce paysan. Ces paysans. 
That landscape. Those landscapes. Ce paysage. Ces paysages. 
My dog. My dogs. Mon chien. Mes chiens. 

Thy melon. Thy melons. Ton melon. Tes melons. 

His inkstand. His inkstands. Son encrier. Ses encriers. 

Our book. Our books. Notre li-vre. Nos livres. 

Your long pencil. Your long pencils. Votre long crayon. Yos longs crayons. 
Their round button. Their round but- Leur bouton rond. Leurs boutons 

tons. ronds. 

Voyez-vous ce charmant paysage ? Oui, monsieur, je le vois. 
Que prennent les doyens ? lis prennent leurs bons crayons. Veu- 
lent-ils nos livres ? Non, madame, ils veulent les livres de vos freres. 
Que veulent les paysans? Ils veulent les petits sacs de ces gar- 
cons. Que voient ces matelots % Ils voient les soldats. Voient- 
ils les pres verts? Oui, mademoiselle, ils les voient. Que voulez- 
vous % Je veux mes encriers de verre. Ne veux-tu pas tes des d'ar- 
gent? Non, monsieur, je veux mes bons canap6s. Que prend le 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



4o 



doyen? II prend ses papiers et ses crayons. Voyez-vous mes 
gants? Oui, madame, je vois vos gants et vos mouchoirs blancs. 
Que veut ce garc,on ? II veut nos balais et nos bancs. Que pren- 
nent ces paysans % II prennent leur beurre et leurs melons. Voyez- 
vous ce beau paysage % Oui, mademoiselle, et je vois le beau jar- 
din aussi. 

Do you wish for your books ? I wish for my books and my pa- 
pers. What do those men wish for % They wish for their mules 
and their oxen. Do they take their cheese % Yes, sir, they take it. 
What dost thou see ? I see a palace. What palace dost thou see ? 
I see the large palace of the king. Charles takes the big cake ; does 
he wish for it % He wishes for it. What does the sailor see % He 
sees the large masts of his ship. Do you see my brothers % I see 
your brothers and your father. Do you wish for this melon ? No, 
sir, I do not wish for it. We see the horse of those countrymen ; 
do they wish for him ? They wish for their horse and their oxen. 
Do you wish for the white handkerchiefs or the black % We wish 
for the white handkerchiefs and the black. Do you take the fruit 
of the countryman % We do not take it. What do those soldiers 
wish for? They wish for much silver and much gold. Do you wish 
for their cheese ? I wish for their cheese and their butter. We 
take our books, our pencils, and our paper. 



20.— VINGTlftME LEQON. 
Sound of S and of SS. 

S between two vowels sounded as z. SS sounded as ss in miss. 

20 21 16 14 12 21 20 14 20 21 18 14 12 1 1 6 6 12 7 4 7 12 

poison, cousin, bison, voisin: poisson, coussin, bissae, avez, ai, si, plait, remercie. 



The poison. The fish. 

The cousin. The cushion. 

Your bison. 

The neighbor. If. 

Pleases. Thank. 
If you please {if it pleases you). 
I thank you {I you thank). 
I have. You have. Have I? Have 

you ? 

I have not. You have not. 

I have it. You have it. 

I have it not. You have it not. 



he poison. Le poisson. 

Le cousin. Le coussin. 

Votre bison. 

Le voisin. Si. 

Plait. Remercie. 
S^il vous plait. 
Je vous remercie. 

tTai. Vous avez. .Ai-je? Avez- 
vous ? 

Je n'ai pas. Vous n'avez pas. 

Je l'ai. Vous l'avez. 

Je ne l'ai pas. Vous ne l'avez pas. 



46 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Have I not? Have you not? N'ai-je pas? X'avez-vous pas . 

Have I it? Have you it? L'ai-je? L'avez-vous? 

Have I it not ? Have you it not? Xe l'ai-je pas ? Xe l'avez-vous pas? j 

Je, ne, le, si, que, become/, n\ V, s\ qu\ before a vowel or a silent h. 

Have you the fish ? I have it. Avcz-vous le poisson? Je l'ai. 

Have you not the poison ? I have it X'avez-vous pas le poison ? Je ne l'ai 

not. pas. 

Have I your cushion ? You have it. Ai-je votre coussin ? Vous l'avez. 

Have I not your bison? You have it X'ai-je pas votre bison? Yous ne l'a- 

not. vez pas. 

What have you? I have the fish. Quavez-vous ? J'ai le poisson. 

Avez-vous le bison ? Non, monsieur, je ne l'ai pas. N'avez-vous 
pas mon coussin? Je l'ai. N'ai-je pas votre poisson? Si, mon- 
sieur, vous l'avez. N'ai-je pas le poison ? Vous ne l'avez pas. Que 
prend votre cousin ? II prend mon encrier d'ivoire. Que voit notre 
voisin ? II voit le bison noir de mon cousin. Youlez-vous le the ? 
Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. Quel the voulez-vous? Je venx le 
bon. Youlez-vous ce fruit ? Non, monsieur, je vous remercie. Que 
veulent ces hommes ? lis veulent beaucoup de fruits. Que voient 
nos voisins ? lis voient les bisons de ces paysans. Prennent-ils le 
poison ? lis ne le prennent pas. Youlez-vous mes livres ? Oui, 
monsieur, s'il vous plait. Youlez-vous vos gants ? Non, madame, 
je vous remercie. Qui prend le gros poisson? Nos cousins le 
prennent. lis veulent leurs poissons et leurs fruits. 

Have you my fish ? No, sir, I have your fruit. Have you the 
cushions of my cousin ? Yes, madam, I have his cushions and his 
benches. Have you not the books of our neighbors ? I have their 
books and their sacks. Do you not take the fish ? I do not take 
the fish, I take the sugar and the milk. What bisons do you see ? 
I see the bisons of your cousin, and the oxen of the neighbor. Do 
you wish for this round cake ? No, madam, I thank you. Do you 
wish for the milk and the sugar? Yes, miss, if you please. Have 
you not my papers ? I have not thy papers. Have you the gloves 
of my brother ? I have his gloves and his handkerchief. Have I 
not your pencils ? You have our pencils and our inkstand. Have 
you the fish of those men ? I have their fish and their fruit. I 
have the beautiful lily ; do you wish for it ? Yes, sir, if you please. 
Y7ho takes the white hat ? Your cousin takes it. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



47 



21. — VINGT ET UNlMlE LEQON. 
Sound of GN. 
GN, commonly as gni in bagnio; rarely as gn in stagnate. 

12 12 15 21 1 21 7 12 15 3 1 1212 1 1 21 1 12 

eigne, tignoble, compagnon, peigne, ignorant : magnifique, as, avons, canif. 

A swan. A vineyard. Un eigne. Un vignoble. 

Your companion. A comb. Votre camarade or ami. Un peigne. 

Ignorant. Magnificent. Ignorant. Magnifique. 

Thou hast. Hast thou ? Tu as. As-tu? 

Thou hast not. Hast thou not? Tu n'as pas. N'as-tu pas? 

We have. Have we ? , Nous avons. Avons-nous ? 

We have not. Have we not ? • Nous n'avons pas. N'avons-nous pas ? 

Hast thou it ? I have it. L'as-tu ? Je l'ai. 

Have you it not? We have it not. Ne l'avez-vous pas ? Nous ne 1'avons 

pas. 

A penknife. Them. Un canif. Les (before the verb). 

Hast thou them ? We have them. Les as-tu? Nous les avons. 

We have them not ; thou hast them. Nous ne les avons pas, tu les as. 

Who? Whom, that, which. Qui? Que. 

WJwm interrogative is qui, not interrogative is que. 

Whom do you see ? Qici voyez-vous? 

I see the man whom you see. Je vois l'homme que vous voyez. 

As-tu ton canif? Je ne l'ai pas, ne l'as-tu pas? J'ai ton canif 
et ton peigne. Avons-nous le peigne de notre camarade (or ami) ? 
Nous 1'avons. Avons-nous les cignes du voisin? Nous les avons. 
Avez-vous nos poissons ? Nous les avons. N'avons-nous pas vos 
cignes? Vous ne les avez pas. N'as-tu pas mon canif ? Je ne 
l'ai pas. N'avons-nous pas les coussins de notre ami ? Nous ne 
les avons pas. As-tu le fruit cle ce petit ignorant ? Je ne l'ai 
pas. Vois-tu le eigne magnifique de notre voisin ? Je le vois. 
N'avons-nous pas le peigne de cet homme ignorant ? Nous ne 
1'avons pas. Voyez-vous ces vignobles magnifiques? Nous les 
voyons. Que voyez-vous? Nous voyons les vignobles du voisin. 
Qui voulez-vous ? Je veux le garcon que vous voyez. Que voit ce 
garcon ignorant ? II voit notre camarade. Nous voyons le soldat 
que vous voyez. 

Have you those magnificent swans ? We have them not. Hast 
thou the hat of that ignorant man? I have it not. What combs 
hast thou ? I have the combs of the trader. Have you his pen- 
knives? We have them not. Do you see them? We do not see 



48 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



them. What do you see 1 We see the white swans and the mag- 
nificent vineyard of our neighbor. What does your companion see ? 
He sees the large vineyard. Hast thou not our papers ? I have 
them not. Have you the silver inkstands ? We have them not. 
Have you not the ivory buttons ? We have them. Do you wish 
for this fruit ? Yes, sir, if you please. Dost thou wish for these 
gloves % No, madam, I thank you. I see the man whom I wish 
for, whom do you see ? I see the ignorant little boy of your friend. 
Hast thou the good tea and the white sugar ? I have them not. 
Dost thou wish for them ? Yes, miss, if you please. Whom dost 
thou see ? I see the men whom I wish for. Thou hast thy pencils, 
and we have our books and our papers. 



22.— YINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON. 
Sound of L and LL. 

L or LL liquid,as Hi in brilliant* 

15 1 15 3 12 3 1 5 1, 6 1 18 5 3 1 12 15 1? 9 1 6 7 12 21 

corail, soleil, brillant, maillet, caille, caillou, evantail : ivrogne, vieux, a, etain,fils, onele. 



He 



The coral. The sun. 
Brilliant. A mallet. 
Curdled. The flint (stone). 
The fan. That drunkard. 
The pewter. Old. 
The sow. The uncle. 
Has he? He has. Has he not ? 
has not. 

1. When il follows a verb ending 
Has he it ? He has it. 
Has he them? He has them not. 
The curdled milk. The old mallet. 

2. Nouns and adjectives ending in 
The stocking, the stockings. The nose, 

the noses. 
The big spoke, the big spokes. 
The old carpet, the old carpets. 
This bad verse. These bad verses. 



Le corail. Le soleil. 
Brillant. Un maillet. 
Caille. Le caillou. 
LSevantail. Cet ivrogne. 
Uetain. Vieux (bef. n.). 
Le Jils. \loncle. 
A-t-il? II a. N'a-t-il pas? II i 
pas. 

with a vowel, -t- is inserted for better sound. 
LVt-il? IlTa. 
Les a-t-il ? II ne les a pas. 
Le lait caille. Le vieux maillet. 
x, or z, are the same in the plural. 
Le bas, les bas. Le nez, les nez. 

Le gros rais, les gros rais. 
Le vieux tapis, les vieux tapis. 
Ce mauvais vers, ces mauvais vers. 



Qu'a le fils du vieux matelot ? II a le petit caillou et l'evantail 
d'i voire. N'a-t-il pas mon encrier d'etain ? II ne l'a pas. Qu'a 
cet ivrogne ? II a le vieux chien de mon oncle. Qui a le beau co- 



* L and U have generally this sound, in the middle or at the end of a word, when pre- 
ceded by i. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



49 



rail ? Le fils du macon Pa. Voyez-vous ce paysage magnifique % 
Je vois le beau paysage et le soleil brillant. Qui a le maillet de 
notre oncle ? Le fils du voisin Pa. A-t-il le lait caille % II ne Pa 
pas. Qu'a ce petit garcon? II a le joli caillou et le plat d'etain. 
A-t-il les evantails d'ivoire % II ne les a pas. Youlez-vous ce co- 
rail? Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. Qui a le chapeau de l'i- 
vrogne? Le garcon de mon oncle Pa. Je vois le beaujardin et le 
soleil brillant. Nous avons les gros bas et les vieux tapis, et vous 
avez les mauvais dais. 

What has the son of our old baker? He has the handsome 
coral and the big mallet." Has he not the curdled milk % He has 
it not. Has he the ivory fan % He has it. Who has the pewter 
inkstands ? Your uncle has them. Who has the hat of that 
drunkard 1 That little boy has it. Has he not the little flint ? 
He has it not. What do you see % I see the fine sun, and the 
beautiful landscape. What has the old mason % He has his mal- 
lets and his inkstand of shining pewter. Dost thou wish for this 
flint ? No, sir, I thank you. Do you take the big fans 1 We do 
not take them. What has that drunkard ? He has the old gloves 
of my uncle. Whom do you see ? I see the sailors whom you see. 
Have you the big stockings or the little ones ? I have the big and 
the little ones also. Who has the large fans % Your brother has 
them. Has he the white handkerchiefs I He has them not, the son 
of our neighbor has them. 



23.— VINGT-TROISlfiME LEQON. 
Sound of ER final. 

5 

ER in most nouns (polysyllables) ending in ier, per, cher, ger, and iller, sound as e 
(or e in ebb), when r is silent. 

1 125 J8 125 1 12 5 20125 1 3 12 5 4 22 12 125 1 12 125 1 5 12 5 21 

cahier, Soulier, tablier, foyer, cJiarpentier, menuisier, jardinier, chavelier, ont, 

7 4 9 

mais, neveu. 

A copy-book. A sltoe. ITn cahier. Un Soulier. 

My apron. The hearth. Mon tablier. Le foyer (or Ydtre). 

The carpenter. The joiner. Le cJiarpentier. Le menuisier. 

The gardener. The hatter. Le jardinier. Le chapelier. 

But. His nephew. The stranger. Mais. Son neveu. L" 1 Stranger. 

Have they? They have. Ont-ils ? lis ont. 

Have they not ? They have not. N'ont-iis pas ? lis n'ont pas. 

Have they it ? They have it. L'ont-ils ? lis Pont. 

Have they it not ? Thev have it not. Ne l'ont-ils pas? lis ne Font pas. 
3 



50 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Nouns and adjectives ending in al change this termination into aux for the plural, and 
those ending in au, en, add an x; as, 



I have the oxen, but not the horses. J'ai les bceufs, mais non pas les che- 



Les neveux du chapelier ont nos cahiers. Quels souliers ont- 
ils ? lis ont leurs souliers. N'ont-ils pas les tabliers de cuir? 
Non, monsieur, ils ont les souliers, mais non pas les tabliers de cuir. 
Qu'ont les jardiniere? Ils ont les rateaux de fer. Ont-ils nos 
fruits? Non, monsieur, ils ne les ont pas. Qu'ont ces charpen- 
tiers ? Ils ont les beaux canapes, et les longs bancs. N'ont-ils pas 
le bois de ces menuisiers ? Non, monsieur, ils ne l'ont pas. 
Voyez-vous le charbon ? Je le vois sur le foyer. Le fils du jardi- 
nier a les tabliers, mais le neveu du menuisier a les souliers. Qui 
a nos cahiers ? Les neveux du charpentier ont nos cahiers et les 
fils du charpentier ont nos crayons. Voyez-vous les generaux? 
Nous voyons les generaux et leurs soldats. Les charpen tiers voient 
le charbon sur le foyer. 

Who has my copy-book ? The son of the carpenter has it. Do 
you see the coal on the hearth ? I see it. Who has the leather 
shoes? The nephews of the joiner have them. Have they the 
cloth shoes also ? No, madam, they have the shoes of leather, but 
not the shoes of cloth. What has the hatter ? He has many (bean- 
coup) black hats and many white hats. Who has the rakes of the 
gardener ? His sons have them. Have they the hammers of the 
carpenter? No, madam, they have his nails, but they have not his 
hammers. Have they the wood of the joiner ? No, sir. Who has 
the hats of the hatter ? The sons of the general have them. What 
do the nephews of the gardener wish for? They wish for the 
melons of their uncle. Do you see the wood on the hearth ? No, 
miss, I see the coal, but I do not see the wood. Hast thou thy 
copy-book ? I have it. What has the general ? He has his fine 
horses. Have you the leather gloves ? No, sir, our cousins have 
them, and they have also the leather shoes. 



The horse, the horses. 

Hie general, the generals. 

The handsome boat, the handsome 



Le cheval, les chevaux. 

Le general, les generaux. 

Le beau bateau, les beaux bateaux. 



boats. 
The hat, the hats. 
But not. 



Le chapcau, les chapeaux. 
Mais pas, mais non, mais non pas. 



vaux. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



51 



24.— VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON. 

5 

Sound of ES final, continued. 

12 2212 5 22 12 5 5 12 12 5 20 1 125 15 125 20 125 20125 15 125 22 12 3 3 

figuier, prunier, cerisier, coignassier, rosier, poirier, noyer, pommier, fusil, enfant, 
grand-pere, petit-fils, conseiller, docker. 
A fig-tree. A plum-tree. JJn figuier. Un pritnier. 

A cherry-tree. A quince-tree. Un cerisier. Un coignassier. 

A rose-tree. A pear-tree. Advise% ' Un rosier. Un poirier. Conseiller. 
A walnut-tree. An apple-tree. Steeple. \ Un noyer. Un pommier. Clocher. 
The grandfather. The grandson. \Le grand-pere. Le petit-fils. 

In questions, when a noun is the subject, the noun is placed first, then the verb, and the 
pronoun of the third person is used after the verb ; thus, 

Does the man see ? Do the men see ? L'homme voit-il ? Les hommes voient- 

ils? 

Does the soldier take ? Do the sol- Le soldat prend-il ? Les soldats pren- 

diers take ? nent-ils ? 

Does the child want ? Do the chil- U enfant veut-il ? Les enfants veulent- 

dren want ? ils ? 

Has the grandfather? Have the grand- Le grand-pere a-t-il? Les petits-fils 

sons ? ont-ils ? 

Has the gardener a fig-tree ? Le jardinier a-t-il un figuier ? 

Do your brothers see the plum-tree ? Vos freres voient-ils le prunier ? 

Does not your father take the good Yotre pere ne prend-il pas le bon 

fruit ? fruit ? 

Do those men wish for the cherry- Ces hommes veulent-ils les cerisiers ? 

trees ? 

Have the soldiers their guns? Les soldats ont-ils leurs/tm7s ? 

Does your grandfather take these Votre grand-pere prend-il ces coignas- 

quince-trees ? siers ? 

The child. The gun. U enfant. Le fusil. 

Notre jardinier a-t-il les rosiers 1 II a les rosiers et les poiriers. 
Votre ami ne voit-il pas les noyers ? II les voit. Les petits-fils du 
voisin prennent-ils nos fruits % Ils ne les prennent pas. Les voi- 
sins veulent-ils les petits pommiers ? Nbn, monsieur, ils veulent le 
fruit du jardinier. Vois-tu le figuier ou le prunier? Je vois le 
figuier. Votre oncle prend-il les beaux chevaux? II les prend. 
Les jardiniers veulent-ils ces cerisiers? lis veulent ces cerisiers 
et ces coignassiers. Qui a les noyers 1 Les paysans ont les noyers, 
les pommiers et les poiriers. Get enfant n'a-t-il pas votre fusil? 
II a mon fusil et mon chapeau. Quel liomme le petit-fils de notre 
voisin voit-il? II voit Thomme que nous voyons. Quels arbres 
voyez-vous? Je vois les pruniers, les coignassiers, les noyers et 



52 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



les pommiers. Votre grand-pere a-t-il beaucoup de chevaux ? II 
a beaucoup de chevaux et beaucoup de boeufs. Cet enfant n'a-t-il 
pas votre canif ? II l'a. 

Does the countryman wish for the gardener's trees ? He wishes 
for his fig-trees and his plum-trees. Have those gardeners many 
trees? They have many cherry-trees, many quince-trees, and 
many apple-trees. Has your grandfather a large garden ? He has 
a large garden and a large vineyard. Has not the grandson of the 
soldier his gun ? He has his gun and his saber. Do you see those 
large rose-trees ? Yes, sir, I see the rose-trees, the pear-trees, and 
the walnut-trees. Do those children take your books? They do 
not take them. What do you wish for ? I wish for a little bread 
and a little milk. Have those children sufficient butter? They 
have sufficient butter and sufficient bread. Do you wish for this 
fruit ? No, miss, I thank you. Do you wish for the milk ? Yes, 
madam, if you please. Do the sailors see those handsome boats ? 
They see those handsome boats and those large ships. Whom do 
you wish for ? We wish for the men whom we see. 



25. — YINGT-CINQUI^ME LEQON. 

ER, in the middle of words, 
Is pronounced like the English word air, when r is distinctly articulated, as in rose. 

7 6 

Chercher, to seeJc. 

Do you seek ? We seek. Cherchez-vous ? Nous chcrchons. 

Do you not seek ? We do not seek. Ne cherchez-vous pas ? Nous ne cher- 

chons pas. 

Do you seek it ? We seek it. Le cherchez-vous ? Nousle cherchons. 

Do you not seek him ? Ne le cherchez-vous pas ? 

We do not seek him. Nous ne le cherchons pas. 

Lost thou seek ? I seek. Cherches-tu? Je cherche. 

Dost thou not seek ? I do not seek. Ne cherches-tu pas ? Je ne cherche 

pas. 

Dost thou seek them? I seek them. Les cherches-tu ? Je les cherche. 
Dost thou not seek them ? Ne les cherches-tu pas ? 

I do not seek them. Je ne les cherche pas. 

Do we seek? You seek. Cherchons-nous ? Vous cherchez. 

Do we not seek ? You do not seek. Ne cherchons-nous pas ? Yous ne 

cherchez pas. 

Do we seek him? You seek him. Le cherchons-nous? Vous le cherchez. 
Do we not seek it? You do not seek Ne le cherchons-nous pas ? Yous ne 
it. le cherchez pas. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



53 



Me, Thee, Us. 



Me, Te, Nous (all placed immediately 



Tlie one, that. The ones, those. 
Dost thou seek me ? I seek thee. 
You seek us. "We seek you. 



before the verb). 
Cehti. Ceux. 

Me cherches-tu ? Je te cherche. 
Vous nous cherchez. Nous vous cher- 



.1 seek the one of my father. 
You seek those of the gardener. 



chons. 

Je cherche celui de mon pere. 
Vous cherchez ceux du jardinier. 



Me cherchez- vous ? Je vous cherche. Nous cherchez-vous ? 
Nous vous cherchons. Je te cherche ; me cherches-tu ? Je ne te 
cherche pas. Ne me cherchez-vous pas ? Je ne vous cherche pas. 
Nous cherches-tu? Je ne vous cherche pas. Qui cherchez-vous? 
Nous te cherchons. Ne nous cherchez-vous pas ? Non, monsieur, 
nous cherchons nos freres. Qui cherches-tu? Nous cherchons 
notre oncle. Nous vous cherchons ; nous cherchez-vous ? Nous ne 
vous cherchons pas. Que cherches-tu? Je cherche un cheval. 
Quel cheval cherches-tu ? Je cherche celui de mon pere. Ne 
cherches-tu pas celui cle ton oncle? Si, monsieur, je cherche 
celui de mon oncle et celui de mon pere. Que cherchez-vous? 
Nous cherchons les gants. Quels gants cherchez-vous ? Nous 
cherchons ceux du maitic. Ne cherchez-vous pas ceux de votre 
cousin ? Nous cherchons ceux du maitre et ceux de notre cousin. 
Votre grand-pere a-t-il son chapeau ? Oui, monsieur, il l'a. 

Whom dost thou seek ? I seek thee, dost thou seek me ? I do 
not seek thee. Do you seek us? We do not seek you. Whom 
do you seek ? We seek our friends. Dost thou seek us ? I do 
not seek you. Do you not seek me ? We do not seek thee, we 
seek thy cousin. What dost thou seek ? I seek a book. What 
book dost thou seek? I seek the one of the master. Dost thou 
not seek the one of thy brother? No, sir, I seek that of the 
master, I do not seek that of my brother. What papers do you 
seek ? We seek those of these little boys. Do you not seek those 
of your cousins ? , Yes, sir, we seek those of our cousins and those 
of the master also. Does that cat see the rats ? Yes, sir, he sees 
them. Do the rats see the cat ? They see him also. Do the 
soldiers take your fruit ? They do not take it. Does your grand- 
father wish for our gun? He does not wish for it. Have those 
children their books ? Yes, sir, they have them. Do you not seek 
for me? No, sir, I seek my little cousin. 



54 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



26.— VINGT-SIXIEME LE£ON. 



Chercher, to seelc. 



Does he seek ? He seeks. 
Does he not seek? He does not seek. 

Does he seek them ? He seeks them. 
Does he not seek them ? He does 

not seek them. 
Do they seek ? They seek. 
Do they not seek ? They do not seek. 

Do they seek him ? They seek him. 
Do they not seek it ? They do not 
seek it. 

Tlie one who. The ones (those) iclio. 
The one whom. The ones (those) whom. 
"Which man do you seek ? 
I seek the one zoho seeks me. 
I seek those who seek me. 
I seek the one whom you seek. 
I seek those idiom you seek. 
Does your uncle seek you ? 
He seeks me. 

I seek them, and they seek me. 
A dictionary. An atlas. 
Young. Red. 

Cet homrne clierche-t-il son cheval ? II le cherche. Ne cher- 
che-t-il pas ses bceufs ? II ne les cherche pas. Qui le jarclinier 
cherche-t-il ? II nous cherche. Me cherche-t-il ? II vous cherche. 
Ces petits garcons cherchent-ils leurs livres ? lis les cherchent. 
Quels livres cherchent-ils? lis cherchent leurs dictionnaires. Ne 
cherchent-ils pas leurs atlas? lis les cherchent. Ce jeune garcon 
cherche-t-il son frere? Non, monsieur, il cherche un enfant. Quel 
enfant cherche-t-il ? II cherche celui qui a le chapeau de ce garcon. 
Ne cherche-t-il pas ceux qui ont ses papiers % II ne les cherche 
pas. Quels soldats ces hommes cherchent-ils % lis cherchent ceux 
que nous cherchons. Cherchez-vous celui que je cherche? Je 
cherche celui qui a mon mouchoir rouge. Vous cherchez ceux que 
je cherche, et ceux qui nous cherchent. 

Do you seek your dictionary? I seek my dictionary and my 
atlas. Does that young hoy seek his handkerchief? He seeks it. 



Cherche-t-il ? 12 cherche. 

Ne cherche-t-il pas? II ne cherche 

pas. 

Les cherche-t-il? II les cherche. 

Ne les cherche-t-il pas? II ne les 
cherche pas. 

Cherchent-ils ? lis cherchent. 

Ne cherchent-ils pas? lis ne cher- 
chent pas. 

Le cherchent-ils ? Hs le cherchent. 

Ne le cherchent-ils pas ? lis ne le 
cherchent pas. 

Celui qui. Ceux qui. 

Celui qu?. Ceux que. 

Quel homme cherchez-vous ? 

Je cherche celui qui me cherche. 

Je cherche ceux qui me cherchent. 

Je cherche celui que vous cherchez. 

Je cherche ceux que vous cherchez. 

Yotre oncle vous cherche-t-il ? 

II me cherche. 

Je les cherche, et ils me cherchent. 

Un dictionnaire. Un atlas. 
Jeune. Rouge. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



55 



Does he seek his red handkerchief? He seeks his red handkerchief 
and his red coat. Do those young hoys seek a mason % No, sir, 
they seek a gardener. What gardener do they seek ? They seek 
the one who has much fruit. Do they seek the one who seeks 
them ? No, sir, they seek the one whom we seek. Do they see 
the one whom they seek ? What soldiers do you seek *? We seek 
those who seek us, and you seek those whom we seek. Have you 
my atlas ? No, sir, that young boy has it. Whom does that man 
seek 1 He seeks thee. Does he not seek you % He does not seek 
me. Who seeks us ? The grandchildren of our neighbor seek us. 
What men do you see ? I see those whom you see. What book 
have you ? I have the one of my cousin, and you have the one of 
the master. 



27.— VINGT-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 

IS 6 
DoNNEIi, tO 



Dost thou give ? I give. 
Dost thou not give ? I do not give. 
Dost thou not give it ? I do not give 
it. 

Bo you give ? We give. 

Do you give them ? We give them. 

To me. To thee. To us. 

To you. To him. To them. 

To. To that man. To that child. 

To whom do you give your money ? 

I give it to my father. 

To the. 

Dost thou give me the fruit? 
I give it to the little boy. 
We give thee the books. 
I give you the papers. 
Do you give us your pencils ? 
I give him my pencils. 
We give them our papers. 
We give them to the men. 



Donnes-iu ? Je donne. 
Ne donnes-tu pas ? Je ne donne pas. 
Ne le donnes-tu pas ? Je ne le donne 
pas. 

Donnez-vous ? Nous donnons. 

Les donnez-vous? Nous les donnons. 

Me. Te. Nous. 

Vbus. Lui. Leur. 

A. A cet homme. A cet enfant. 

A qui donnez-vous votre argent ? 

Je le donne a mon pere. 

Au (singular). Aux (plural). 

Me donnes-tu le fruit ? 

Je le donne au petit gar con. 

Nous te donnons les livres. 

Je vous donne les papiers. 

Nous donnez-vous vos crayons ? 

Je lui donne mes crayons. 

Nous leur donnons nos papiers. 

Nous les donnons aux hommes. 



Que me donnez-vous % Je te donne cet anneau d'or. Que nous 
donnes-tu? Je te donne ces jolis livres. Que donnons-nous au 
petit garcon? Nous lui donnons ce gateau. Donnez-vous les 
melons aux soldats % Non, monsieur, je leur donne ces fruits. A 
qui donnez-vous ce joli canif % Je le donne au petit-fils du jardi- 



50 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



nier. A qui donnez-vous vos beaux crayons'? Je les donne a mes 
amis. Me donnes-tu le bon vin ? Non, mon ami, je te donne le 
cafe. Nous donnez-vous le lait ? Nous vous donnons le lait et le 
the. Que donnons-nous a mon fr ore ? Nous lui donnons nos livres. 
Donnons-nous ces encriers aux petits garcons ? Non, madame, 
nous leur donnons ces petits livres. A qui donnez-vous cet atlas ? 
Je le donne a Charles. 

Do you give me these books ? I give you these books and these 
papers. We give thee these pencils, what dost thou give us? I 
give you these rings. Do you give your ivory inkstand to the 
master? I give him the inkstand, and I give the knives to the 
little boys. Do you give them these gloves? No, sir, we give 
them to the children. To whom do we give the melons ? We 
give them to the soldier. What book have you ? I have that (the 
one) of my brother. • Have you not his papers ? No, sir, I have 
those of the master. What man do you see ? I see the one who 
has my book. What soldiers do you see ? I see those who have 
the red coats. Whom do you see ? I see the gardener. Do you 
see the one w T hom you wish for ? Yes, sir, and I see those whom 
you seek. W T hat dost thou give me ? I give thee my ivory knife. 
We give you our books, and you give us your pencils. Whom do 
you seek ? I seek the man whom you seek. Do you give him his 
money ? I give him his money, but not his books. 



28. — VINGT-HUlTlfiME LEgON. 

15 6 

Donner, to give. 



Does he give ? He gives. 

Does he not give ? He does not give. 

Does he not give it ? He does not 

give it. 
Do they give ? They give. 
Do they give it ? They give it. 
It to me. Tliem to me. 
It to you. Them to you. 
Docs he give it to me ? 
He gives it to you. 
Do they not give them to you ? 
They do not give them to me. 



Donne-t-il ? B donne. 
Ne donne-t-il pas ? II ne donne pas. 
Ne le donne-t-il pas ? II ne le donne 
pas. 

Donnent-ils? Us donnent. 

Le donnent-ils ? lis le donnent. 

Me le. Me les. 

Vous le. Vous les. 

Me le donne-t-il ? 

II vous le donne. 

Ne vous les donnent-ils pas ? 

lis ne me les donnent pas. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



57 



Of the, and to the, in the singular, are de V and a V before a vowel or a silent h ; in the 
plural, they are always des and aux. 

Of the man. Of the men. De Z'homme. Des hommes. 

Of the child. Of the children. De /'enfant. Des enfants. 

To the man. To the men. A Thomme. Aux hommes. 

To the child. To the children. A Z'enfant. Aux enfants. 

Of the mason. Of the masons. Du macon. Des macons. 

To the mason. To the masons. Au macon. Aux macons. 

Of the grocer. To the grocer. De Vepicicr. A Vepicier. 

He gives the money to the grocer. II donne I'argent a l'epicier. 

Me donnez-vous les livre des petits garcons ? Je vous les donne. 
A qui le maitre donne-t-il ce cadeau 1 II me le donne. Ne me le 
donne-t-il pas ? II ne vous le donne pas. A qui les maitres don- 
nent-ils les cahiers des enfants'? Us vous les donnent. Ne vous les 
donnent-ils pas ? lis ne me les donnenj: pas. Le jardinier donne- 
t-il son fruit a, l'epicier? II lui donne Ole fruit de ces arbres. 
L'epicier donne-t-il son rateau au jardinier? II lui donne son ra- 
teau et ses balais. Qu'avez-vous ? J'ai le beurre de l'epicier et les 
fruits des paysans. Me donnez-vous cet encrier de verre ? Je vous 
le donne. Je donne ce livre a l'ami de Jean. Le voisin vous 
donne-t-il ces melons? II me les donne. Qui a le caliier de 
l'enfant? Je l'ai. Vous le donne-t-il? II me le donne. Lui 
donnez-vous le gateau ? Je lui donne le gateau et le bon fruit. 

You have the ivory inkstand ; do you give it to me ? I do not 
give it to you. Do you give it to the child of our neighbor ? I 
give him the inkstand and the copybook. Have you the wine of 
the grocer ? We have his wine and his butter. To whom does the 
master give the ivory ? He gives it to me. Does he not give it 
to me ? He does not give it to you. What books does the master 
seek ? He seeks those of my brother. Does he seek the children 
whom we seek? No, sir, he seeks those who have his books. 
What inkstand do you seek ? I seek the one of the grocer, and 
my brother seeks those of the little boys. My brother gives you 
the pretty ribbons. Do you not give them to me ? I give them to 
you. What man do you see? I see the one whom you seek. 
What books has your brother ? He has his dictionary and his 
atlas. Do you wish for the coffee ? No, sir, I thank you. What 
does your friend take ? He takes the bread, the butter, the cheese, 
and the milk. 



58 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



29.— VINGT-NEUVIEME LE£ON. 

to 1>C 



8 4 

£tre, 



Are you ? We are. 

Are you not ? We arc not. 

Art thou ? I am 

Art thou not ? I am not. 

Here. There. 

In. Under. 

The store. The turf. 

The floor. A relat ion {kin). 

Sick. The sick man, patient. 

Where. Where are you ? 

It to thee. Them to thee. 

It to us. Them to us. 
Dost thou give it to me ? 
I do not give it to thee. 
Do they not give them to us? 
They give them to us. 
He gives them to thee. 
They do not give it to us. 



Are you there ? 
Art thou under 
the turf. 



We are here. 

the tree ? I am on 



Etes-vous? Nous sommes. 

N'etes-vous pas? Nous ne som- 
mes pas. 

Es-tu ? Je suis. 

N'es-tu pas ? Je ne suis pas. 

Ici. Lot. 

Dans. Sous. 

Le magasin. Le gazon. 

Le plancher. Un parent. 

Maladc. Le malade. 

Ou. Oii etes-vous ? 

Te le. Te les. 

Nous le. Nous les. 
Me le donnes-tu ? 
Je ne te le donne pas. 
Ne nous les donnent-ils pas? 
lis nous les donnent. 
II te les donne. 
lis ne nous le donnent pas. 
Etes-vous la ? Nous sommes ici. 
Es-tu sous l'arbre ? Je suis sur le 

gazon. 



Oii es-tu? Je suis ici. Es-tu la dans le jardin ? Je suis ici 
dans le magasin. Etes-vous sous Parbre ? Oui, nous sommes sous 
1'arbre sur le gazon. Etes-vous malades? Non, monsieur, nous 
ne sommes pas malades. N'es-tu pas parent de Charles ? Si, 
mademoiselle, je suis son frere. Je ne suis pas le frere de Jules, 
je suis son cousin. N'etes-vous pas dans le magasin ? Je suis ici 
sur le plancher. Je suis ton parent. Qu'a votre parent ? II a un 
bouton d'or. Ne me le donne-t-il pas ? II ne te le donne pas. 
Vous le donne-t-il? II ne nous le donne pas. Me donne-t-il ses 
livres ? II ne te les donne pas. Ne vous les donne-t-il pas ? II 
nous les donne. Que donnez-vous a cet homme ? Je lui donne un 
bon marteau. Que donnez-vous a ses enfants ? Je leur donne ce 
pain et ce fruit. Me donnes-tu ce melon? Je te le donne. 

Where are you? I am here. Are you in the store or in the 
garden ? I am in the store. Are you on the bench or on the 
floor ? We are on the bench. Art thou not sick ? I am not sick. 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



59 



Art thou there under the tree ? I am here on the turf. Art thou 
not on the floor ? I am here on the bench. Are you not our rela- 
tions ? We are your cousins. What has our master ? He has 
the pretty ivory inkstand. Does he give it to us ? He does not 
give it to us. To whom does he give the gold pencils? He gives 
them to thee. Does he give me the pretty book ? He gives it to 
thee. Does he give me the papers ? He does not give them to 
thee, he gives them to us. To whom do the gardeners give their 
fruits ? They give them to us. What books do those little boys 
seek 1 They seek those of the master. Do they not seek those of 
your brother? No, sir, they do not seek them. What dictionary 
do you seek ? I seek the one of my brother. 



30.— TRENTIfcME LEQON. 

8 4 

£tre, to be. 



Is he ? He is. 
Is he not ? He is not. 
Are they ? They are. 
Are they not ? They are not. 
At the house of. At my house. 
At my father's, or the house of my 
father. 

At my uncle's, or the house of my 
uncle. 

He is at my grandfather's. 

They are at my brother's. 

It to him. Them to him. 

Do you give it to him ? 

I do not give it to him. 

We give them to him. 

Which (relative pronoun). 

You seek the book which is here. 

You seek the book which I have. 



Est-il ? H est. 

N'est-il pas ? II n'est pas. 

Sont-ils ? lis sont. 

Ne sont-ils pas ? lis ne sont pas. 

Chez (preposition). Chez moi. 

Chez mon pere. 

Chez mon oncle. 

II est chez mon grand-pere. 

lis sont chez mon frere. 

Le lui. Les lui. 

Le lui donnez-vous ? 

Je ne le lui donne pas. 

Nous les lui donnons. 

Qui (subject). Que (object). 

Vous cherchez le livre qui est ici. 

Vous cherchez le livre que j'ai. 



We here see that qui is the subject and que the object of the following verb. 

I take the pencils which are of gold. Je prends les boutons qui sont d'or. 
I take the peweils which you give me. Je prends les boutons que vous me 

donncz. 

We see the horses which are in the Nous voyons les chevaux qui sont dans 

field. le champ. 

We see those which you have. Nous voyons ceux que vous avez 



GO 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



Ou est votre frere ? II est chez mon pere. Votre cousin est-il 
chez votre oncle? Non, monsieur, il est chez moi. Ou sont vos 
livres ? lis sont la sur le banc. Vos freres sont-ils chez votre 
pere? Non, madame, ils sont chez moi. Quel livre avez-vous? 
J'ai celui cle mon frere. Ne le lui donnez-vous pas ? Je le lui 
donne. Lui donnez-vous vos papiers ? Je ne les lui donne pas. 
Ne donnes-tu pas tes themes aux maitre ? Je les lui donne. Je 
veux l'encrier qui est sur le banc, et mon frere veut le livre que 
vous avez. Ou est le neveu de votre voisin? II est chez moi, et 
les petits garcons sont chez mon oncle. Donnez-vous le marteau 
au macon? Je le lui donne. Donnez-vous les gateaux au petit 
garcon ? Je les lui donne. Je prends les livres qui sont ici, et 
vous prenez le canif clu maitre. Me donnes-tu ce joli anneau? Je 
ne te le donne pas, je le donne a ton frere. 

Where is your friend ? He is at my house. Is your brother 
at the neighbor's ? No, sir, he is at my father's. Where are your 
cousins ? They are at my uncle's, and the children of the neighbor 
are at my grandfather's. Have you not the knife of the master 
I have it. Do you give it to him ? I give it to him. Do you 
give the rakes to the gardener ? I give them to him. Does he 
give his fruits to your father 1 He gives them to him. Where are 
the children of the neighbors % They are at my house. I take the 
book which is there on the bench, and you take the ivory inkstand 
of the master. Do you seek the papers which are here % No, sir, 
I seek ike papers which you have. Whom do you see ? I see the 
little boy who has my book. What knife do you take % I take 
the one of ivory. Does the countryman wish for our horses % No, 
sir, he wishes for those of the neighbors. Do those men seek their 
pencils which are here 1 No, sir, they seek the books which we 
have. Do they give them to the master? They give them to 
him and he gives them to us. 



31. — TRENTE ET UNlfeME LEQON. 

1 6 

Aller, to go. 

Do you go, are you going? Allez-vous? 
We go, we are going. Nous allons. 

Lost thou go, art thou going? Vas-tu? 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



61 



I go, I am going. 
To our house. To your house. 
To his house. To their house. 
To thy house. I am going to thy house. 
Art thou not going to our house ? 
I am not going to your house. 
Are you not going to his house? 
We are going to their house. 

Tliat which. TJiose which. 

Here again qui is the subject and que the object of the following verb. 

W T hat book have you ? Quel livre avez-vous ? 

I have that which is here. J'ai celui qui est ici. 

I have that which you seek. J'ai celui que vous cherchez. 

What papers do they seek ? Quels papiers cherchent-ils ? 

They seek those which are on the bench. lis cherchent ceux qui sont sur le banc. 

They seek those which you wish for. lis cherchent ceux que vous voulez. 

Oii vas-tu ? Je vais chez moi. Ne vas-tu pas chez nous ? Je 
ne vais pas chez vous, je vais chez mon frere. N'allez-vous pas 
chez lui? Non, monsieur, nous allons chez nous. Allez-vous chez 
le voisin? Non, mademoiselle, nous n' allons pas chez lui. On 
allez-vous ? Nous allons chez vous. N'allons-nous pas chez 
nous? Nous allons chez ces hommes. Vas-tu chez eux? Je 
ne vais pas chez eux ; je vais chez toi. Quel livre donnez-vous a 
cet enfant ? Je lui donne celui qui est chez moi. Me donnez-vous 
celui que je veux ? Je vous donne ceux qui sont chez vous. Quels 
cahiers avez-vous ? J'ai ceux que le maitre me donne. Que cherche 
cet homme ? II cherche ses gants. Cherche-t-il ceux qui sont ici % 
Non, monsieur, il cherche ceux de cet enfant. Quel encrier voulez- 
vous % Je veux celui du maitre. Ne voulez- vous pas celui que nous 
avons ? . Je ne le veux pas. Vas-tu au magasin ? Non, madame, 
je vais chez moi. 

Where art thou going % I am going to the store. Art thou 
not going to my house ? I am not going to thy house. Where are 
you going ? We are going to our house. Are you not going to 
our house % We are not going to your house. Is my brother at 
your house % No, sir, he is at his house. Where are your cousins ? 
They are at their house. Do you wish for the hook which I have % 
I wish for the one which is at your house. What knife do you seek % 
I seek that of your little brother. Do you wish for those books which 



Je vais. 

Chez nous. Chez vous. 

Chez lui. Chez eux. 

Chez toi. Je vais chez toi. 

Ne vas-tu pas chez nous ? 

Je ne vais pas chez vous. 

N'allez-vous pas chez lui? 

Nous allons chez eux. 

Celui qui. Ceux qui (subjects). 

Celui que. Ceux que (objects). 



62 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



I have ? No, sir, I wish for those which are here on the bench. Do 
you seek the children who are in the garden ? No, sir, I seek those 
whom you seek. To whom do you give that fruit ? I give it to 
the little boys. Do you not give it to me ? I do not give it to 
thee. Does the general give us his horse ? He does not give it to 
us. Does he give it to the soldier ? He does not give it to him. 



32.— TRENTE-DEUXlEME LEQON. 



Allee, to go. 



Does he 



go, is he going ? 



He goes, he is going. 
Do they go, are they going ? 
They go, they are going. 
Something. Nothing, not any thing. 
Somewhere. Nowhere, not any where. 
To-day. Now, at present. 
This morning. This evening. 
Where is your father going to-day ? 
He is not going any where. 
Are your brothers going any where ? 
They are going nowhere. 
Where is your cousin going this morn- 
ing? 

He is going to the store. 
Are you going any where this evening ? 
I am going now to my grandfather's. 
|Does the master give you any thing ? 

He gives me something. 
He gives you nothing. 



Va-t-il? 
IWa. 
Vont-ils. 
lis vont. 

Quelque chose. Rien (ne bef. the verb). 

Quelque part. Nulle part (ne bef . v.). 

Aujourd'hui. A present. 

Ce matin. Ce soir. 

Ou va votre pere aujourd'hui? 

II ne va nulle part. 

Yos freres vont-ils quelque part ? 

lis ne vont nulle part. 

Ou va votre cousin ce matin ? 

II va au magasin. 

Allez-vous quelque part ce soir? 

Je vais a present chez mon grand-pere. 

Le maitre vous donne-t-il quelque 

chose ? 
II me donne quelque chose. 
H ne vous donne rien. 



Oii va le general ce matin ? II ne va nulle part. " Ses fils ne 
vont-ils nulle part aujourd'hui? lis vont au palais du roi. Votre 
frere Charles va-t-il quelque part ce soir? II va chez lui. Vos 
cousins vont-ils quelque part aujourd'hui? lis vont a present 
chez mon oncle. Ou vont ses petits garcons ce matin? lis vont 
au jardin du marchand. Vont-ils quelque part ce soir? Non, 
monsieur, ils ne vont nulle part. Que me donnez-vous? Je ne 
vous donne rien. Donnez-vous quelque chose a mon frere ? Je ne 
lui donne rien. Le maitre donne-t-il quelque chose aux petits 



PRELIMINARY EXERCISES. 



63 



garcons ? II leur donne ses jolis livres. Leur donne-t-il son joli 
encrier ? II le leur doune. Les enfants donnent-ils leurs fruits au 
maitre? lis les lui donnent. Me donnez-vous ce joli anneau? 
Je ne vous le donne pas. Le donnez-vous a mon frere ? Je le lui 
donne. 

Where does the general go to-day ? lie is going to the palace 
of the king. Are his sons going any where now? They are not 
going any where. Is your brother going to the general's this morn- 
ing? No, sir, he is going to our grandfather's. Where are the 
children going this evening ? They are going to the garden. Do 
you give any thing to the mason ? I give him nothing. Whom do 
you see ? I see the man who seeks you. Does the master take the 
book which is on the bench ? He takes the one which you wish for. 
Does he give it to your brother? He does not give it to him. 
Does he give it to you ? He gives it to me. What papers do you 
seek ? I seek those which are here, and my brother seeks those 
which you have. Where are your brothers? They are at the 
neighbor's. Where are you going now % I am going home (to my 
house). Is your uncle going any where to-day? He is going no- 
where. Are you going to our house this morning ? No, sir, we 
are going to the neighbor's. Where are the soldiers going this 
evening ? They are going nowhere. Do you give them any thing ? 
I give them nothing. 



CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES. 



Ah ! how do you do ? It is an age 

since I have seen you. 
I am very well, thank you ; and I am 

delighted to see you in good 

health. 

Where have you been during all the 

time since I have seen you ? 
I have been to New York, where I 

Stayed two months. 
I am very glad to see you ; how long 

have you been back? 
Only since yesterday. And how are 

they all at your house ? 
Every body is well. 



Ah ! comment vous portez-vous ? II y 
a un siecle que je ne vous ai vu. 

Je me porte tres-bien, merci ; et je 
suis charm e de vous voir en bonne 
sante. 

Ou avez-vous ete pendant tout le 

temps que je ne vous ai pas vu? 
J'ai ete a New York, ou je suis reste 

deux mois. 
Je suis bien aise de vous voir ; depuis 

quand etes-vous de retour ? 
Depuis hier seulement. 'Et comment 

va tout le monde chez vous ? 
Tout le monde se porte bien. 



64 



CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES. 



How do your mother and sister do ? 

My sister is perfectly well, but my 
mother is indisposed. 

Ah, what is the matter with her ? 

She has a very bad headache. 

Is she subject to headaches? 

No, she often has the teethache, and 
a sore throat, but not the head- 
ache ; perhaps she has taken cold. 

I am very sorry, and I hope that it 

will be nothing. 
Is your father at home ? 
No, sir, he has gone to the country 

for a week. 
And is your brother still absent ? 

He is absent at present, but he will be 
back to-morrow. 

Will it not rain to-morrow ? 

I believe not ; it is very fine weather 
at present. 

It has been very agreeable weather, 
but it begins to be too dry. 

Do you not like warm weather ? 

I like warm weather in winter, but in 
summer I prefer cool weather. 

Come and dine with me to-day. 

I cannot to-day, but to-morrow I am 
at your command'. 

Well, good-by; we shall see you to- 
morrow about five, it is agreed. 

I shall not fail. 



Comment se portent madame votrc . 

mere et mademoiselle votre sceur ? 
Ma soeur se porte parfaitement' bien, 

mais ma mere est indisposee. • 
Ah, qu'est-ce quelle a done ? 
Elle a tres-mal a la tete. 
Est-elle sujette aux maux de tete ? 
Non, elle a souvent mal aux dents, et 

mal a la gorge, mais non pas a la 

tete ; elle s'est peut-etre enrhu- 

mee. 

J'en suis bien fache, et j'espere que ce 

nc sera rien. 
Monsieur votre pere est-il a la maison? 
Non, monsieur, il est alle a, la campagne 

pour une semaine. 
Et monsieur votre frere est-il encore 

absent ? 

II est absent a present, mais demain il 

sera de retour. 
Ne pleuvra-t-il pas demain ? 
Je crois que non; il- fait bien beau 

temps a present. 
II a fait un temps tres-agreable, mais 

il commence a faire trop sec. 
N'aimez-vous pas la chaleur ? 
En hiver, j'aime la chaleur, mais en 

ete, je preferc un temps frais. 
Yenez diner avec nous aujourd'hui. 
Aujourd'hui je ne le puis pas, mais 

demain je suis a vos ordres. 
Eh bien, adieu ; on vous verra demain 

vers cinqheures, e'est convenu. 
Je n'y manquerai pas. 



FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



1.— PREMIERE LEQON. 

AVOIE, TO HA VE. FIEST AND SECOND PEESON. 
Have. You. Avez* Vous. 

L Have. Je. Ai. 

Have you ? I have. Avez-vous ? J'ai. 

1. "When the pronoun follows the verb, it is joined to it by a hyphen. 

2. Je becomes f before a vowel or a silent h. 

The (singular). Le (masculine). La (feminine). 

The (plural). Les (mas.). Les (fern.). 

3. The plural of nouns is generally formed in French as in English, by adding to the 
singular an s, silent in pronunciation. 

4. All nouns in French are either masculine or feminine. They have no neuter gender. 
Masculine nouns will be placed in the left-hand column, and feminine in the right, as seen 
below. 



The book. 
The books. 
The desk. 
The desks. 
The paper. 
The papers. 
The fruit. 
The fruits. 



The pen. 
The pens. 
The table. 
The tables 
The letter. 
The letters. 
The apple. 
The apples. 



MASCULINE. 

Le livre. 
Les livres. 
Le pupitre. 
Les pupitres. 
Le papier. 
Les papiers. 
Le fruit. 
Les fruits. 



FEMININE. 

La plume. 
Les plumes. 
La table. 
Les tables. 
La lettre. 
Les lettres. 
La pomme. 
Les pommes. 



5. As here seen, le is used with the masculine singular of nouns, la with the feminine 
singular, and les with the plural of both numbers ; i. e. The article agrees with its noun in 
gender and number. 

Sir, mister. Madam. Monsieur. Madame. 

6. Monsieur is contracted to M. and madame to Mme. ; but only before a proper name. 
Monsieur is pronounced with both the n and the r silent. 

Have you the book ? Avez-vous le livre ? 

iVo, sir, I have the pen. N'on, monsieur, j'ai la plume. 



* Words introduced for the first time are printed in italics, and their pronunciation is 
marked at the bottom of the pages where they occur. The figures mark the simple vowel- 
sounds according to the table, page 8. The silent letters are in italics. In a few cases the 
sounds are denoted by a change in the letter. Monosyllables, in which each letter has its 
natural sound, as given on pages 8, 10, 11, it is deemed unnecessary to mark. 

1 6 13 6 7 12 22 22 12 1 1 12 5 2212 15 15 12 9 

a-ves, vous, ai, les, livre, plume, pu-pitre, table, pa-pier, frui£, pomme, monsieur, 

11 21 4 12 5 

ma-dame, non, pre-mie/*. 



66 



THE SECOXD LESSON. 



1. Avez-vous les livres? 2. Non, madame, j'ai les plumes. 
3. Avez-vous le pupitre? 4. Non, monsieur, j'ai la table. 5. Avez- 
vous les papiers ? 6. Non, madame, j'ai les lettres. 7. Avez-vous 
les fruits ? * 8. Non, monsieur, j'ai les pommes. 9. J'ai le livre ; 
avez-vous le papier ? 10. Non, madame, j'ai la lettre. 

1. Have you the pen? 2. I have the pen. 3. Have you the 
book? 4. No, sir, I have the paper. 5. Have you the desks? 
6. No, madam, I have the tables. 7. Have you the letter? 8. I 
have the letter. 9. Have you the papers? 10. No, sir, I have the 
fruit. 11. Have you the apples? 12. I have the apples. 13. I 
have the books ; have you the tables ? 14. No, madam, I have the 
desk. 



2.— DEUXIEME LEQON. 

GENDER OF NOUNS. 

1. Names of males are masculine, as le roi, the king ; le lion, the lion. 

2. Names of females are feminine, as la reine, the queen ; la lionne, the lioness. 

3. Names of things, and also of animals, when the male and female are not easily dis- 
tinguished, are generally feminine if they end in e mute, and masculine if not ending in e 
mute, as la plume, the pen; la tortue, the turtle; le fer, the iron; le rossignol, the 
nightingale. To this rule, however, there are many exceptions. For more on this subject, 
see Grammatical Rules and Principles, page 42S-9. 

Yes. And. Oui, Si. Et. 

4. Yes, in answer to a negative question, is most commonly si. 







MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The coffee. 


The fork. 


Le cafe. 


La fourchette. 


The sugar. 


The flour. 


Le sucre. 


~La,fari?ie. 


The bread. 


The meat. 


Le pain. 


La viande. 


The tea. 


The beer. 


Le the. 


La biere. 


The disk. 


The candle. 


Le -plat. 


La chandelle. 


5. 


Le and la become V before a vowel or a silent h. 


The inkstand. 


The ink. 


Vencrier. 


Vencre. 


The milk. 


The water. 


Le tail. 


Ueau. 


The bread and the meat. 


Le pain et la viande. 


Yes, sir. 


Yes, madam. 


Oui, monsieur. 


Oui, madam 


Him, it. 


Her, it. 


Le. 


La. 


Them (mas.). 


Them (fern.). 


Les. 


Les. 



6. These pronouns are placed immediately before the verb, and le, la, are elided like the 
article above. 



* Fruit is more frequently plural in French than in English. 



5 18 5 22 1 12 H 12 3 12 7 1 3 5 3 12 5 8 

et, four-chette, sucre, fa-rine, pain, vi-ande, tZte, bi-C-re, plu#, chan-delle, en-crier, encre, 

7 17 7 9 12 7 

lai£, eau, les, deu-zieme. 



THE THIRD LESSON. 



07 



Have you the coffee ? 
Yes, sir, I have it. 
Have you the fork ? 
I have it. 

Have you the inkstands ? 
Yes, madam, I have them. 



Avez-vous le cafe ? 
Oui, monsieur, je l'ai. 
Avez-vous la fourchette ? 
Je l'ai. 

Avez-vous les encriers ? 
Oui, madame, je les ai. 



7. Le stands for a noun in the masculine singular, la for one in the feminine singular, 
and les for the plural of both genders; i. e. Pronouns agree with their antecedents in gen- 
der and number. 

1. J'ai le sucre ; avez-vous la farine ? 2. Oui, monsieur, je l'ai. 
3. Avez-vous le the? 4. Oui, madame, j'ai le the et le beurre. 
5. Avez-vous le plat? 6. Non, monsieur, j'ai la chandelle. 7. Avez- 
vous Pencre? 8. Oui, madame, j'ai l'encre et la plume. 9. Avez- 
vous le lait? 10. Oui, madame, je l'ai. 11. Avez-vous l'eau et 
lecafe? 12. Oui, monsieur, je les ai. 13. J'ai les pupitres et les 
tables; avez-vous le papier? 14. Oui, madame, je l'ai. 15. J'ai 
la fourchette et le sucre ; avez-vous la viande? 16. J'ai la viande, 
la farine et le pain. 

1. Have you the beer? 2. Yes, sir, I have it. 3. Have you 
the dish and the candle? 4. Yes, madam, I have them. 5. Have 
you the inkstand? 6. I have it, and I have the milk and the 
water. 7. I have the coffee ; have you the sugar and the milk ? 
8. No, sir, I have the bread, the flour, and the meat. 9. Have you 
the fork? 10. Yes, sir, I have it. 11. Have you the dish? 12. 
Yes, madam, I have the dish, the fork, and the candle. 13. Have 
you the tea and the butter? 14. I have them, and I have the 
coffee, the milk, and the water. 



1. French adjectives are varied in gender and number. The plural of adjectives, like 
that of nouns, is generally formed by adding s to the singular. 

2. The feminine of French adjectives always ends in e mute. When, therefore, the 
masculine ends in a silent e, it is unchanged in the feminine ; but when it does not end in a 
silent e, it takes one for the feminine. 



3.— TROISIfiME LEgOF. 



AGEEEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 



Young (singular). 
Young (plural). 



MASCULINE. 

Jeune. 
Jeunes. 



FEMININE. 



Jeune. 
Jeunes. 
La deuxieme. 
La seconde. 



The second. 




* Deuxiime is the second of a series. 



9 4 21 4 21 

jeune, se-gonc?, se-gonde. 



68 



THE THIRD LESSON. 



The third. 




Le troisieme. 


La troisieme. 


Large (singular). 


Grand (gros). 


Grande (grosse).* 


Large (plural). 




Grands. 


Grandes. 


Bad. 




Mauvais. 


Mauvaise. 


My (singular). 




Mon. 


Ma. 


My (plural). 




Mes. 


Mes. 


Your (singular). 




Voire. 


Votre. 


Your (plural). 




Vos. 


Vos. 


My wine. 


My bottle. 


Mon vin. 


Ma bouteille. 


Your glass. 


Your plate. 


Yotre verre. 


Votre assiette. 


My butter. 


My cream. 


Mon beurre. 


Ma creme. 


Your volume. 


Your leaf. 


Votre volume. 


Yotre feuillc. 



). Adjectives agree with their nouns in gender and number. 



The second volume. The second leaf. 
The bad butter. The bad cream. 
The large glasses. The large plates. 

My inkstands. My bottles. 
Your volumes. Your leaves. 

Or. Also. 
The first or the second. 
The glass and the bottle also. 



Le second volume. La seconde feuille. 
Le mauvais beurre. La mauvaise creme. 
Les grands verres. Les grandes as- 
siettes. 

Mes encriers. Mes bouteilles. 
Yos volumes. Yos feuilles. 

Ou. Aussi. 
Le premier ou le second. 
Le verre et la bouteille aussi. 

1. J'ai mon vin et votre bouteille. 2. Avez-vous le deuxieme 
on le troisieme volume ? 3. J'ai le deuxieme et le troisieme aussi. 
4. Avez-vous les grands encriers ou les grandes chandelles ? 5. J'ai 
les grands encriers et la mauvaise encre. 6. Avez-vous votre vin ? 
7. J'ai mon vin et mes verres. 8. Avez-vous vos grandes assiettes? 
9. Je les ai. 10. Avez-vous le beurre ou la creme? 11. J'ai le 
beurre et la creme aussi. 12. Avez-vous le mauvais sucre ? 13. 
Non, monsieur, j'ai le mauvais the et la mauvaise biere. 

1. Have you the first volume or the second? 2. I have the 
second and the third. 3. Have you the bad flour % 4. Yes, sir, I 
have it. 5. Have you the bad bread ? 6. Yes, madam, I have it. 
7. Have you the large bottle ? 8. I have the large bottle and the 
large glass. 9. Have you your plates? 10. Yes, sir, I have my 
plates and my wine. 11. I have the bad butter; have you the 
cream % 12. Yes, madam, I have it. 13. Have you the first leaf 
or the second? 14. I have the first leaf and the second also. 
15. I have the large leaves and the large volumes. 

* See Lesson 4, 2. 

20 12 7 3 3 17 17 1G 7 1G 7 21 7 15 17 14 

troi-zieme, grantf, grande, gros, srosse, mau-vais, mau-vaize, mon, mes, votre, vos, vin, 

18 5 7 1 125 11 7 15 22 9 17 12 

bou-teille, verre, as-siette, beurre, creme, vo-lume, feuille, aus-si. 



THE FOURTH LESSON. 



69 



4.— quatriEme leqon. 

FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. We have seen (Lesson 3, 2) that the feminine of adjectives is generally formed by 
adding a silent e, as le mauvais the, la mauvaise biere ; and that when the masculine ends 
in e mute, the feminine is the same, as le roi coupable, the guilty king ; la reine coupdble, 
the guilty queen. 

2. Adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on, as, os, et, ot, double the final consonant and add 
e mute ; as, 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

What, which (adjective). Quel. Quelle. 

Good. Bon. Bonne. 

Big, eoarse (also large). Gros. Grosse. 

So pareil, par eille, equal; ancien, ancienne, ancient ; gras, grasse, fat ; muet, muette, 
mute ; sot, sotte, foolish. 

3. Adjectives ending in/change it to ve, and those in x to se, for the feminine, as vif, 
Dive, lively ; heurenx, heureuse, happy. 

4. Adjectives, as also nouns, ending in ettr, change these letters, for the feminine, some- 
times into euse, as menteur, menteuse, lying ; rice, as acteur, actrice, one who acts ; 
er 'esse, as pecheur, pecJier esse, sinful. Sometimes by the general rule, as meilleur, mei- 
lleure, better. For more on this subject, see Grammatical Rules and Principles, p. 435-6. 

Small, little; the small one, the little Petit, le petit. Petite, la petite, 
one. 

5. One after an adjective is not to be translated into French. The good (one), le ton, 
la bonne ; the big (one), le gros, la grosse. 

What beef (or ox). What cow. Quel bceuf. Quelle vache. 

The good hat. The good slate. Le bon fthapeau. La bonne ardoise. 

The coarse shoe. The coarse boot. Le gros Soulier. La grosse botte. 

The large glove. The large chair. Le grand gant. La grande chaise. 

The little bag. The small trunk. Le petit sac. La petite malle. 

Havel? You have. Ai-je? Vous avez. 

What. Que {qrf before a vowel or a silent h). 
6. WJiat, belonging to a noun, is quel; meaning whai thing, it is que. 

What hat have you ? Quel chapeau avez-vous ? 

What have you ? Qu'avez-vous ? 

Have I the good beef? Ai-je le bon bceuf? 

You have it. Vous l'avez. 

Have I the coarse boots ? Ai-je les grosses bottes? 

You have them. Vous les avez. 

1. Ai-je la petite vache % 2. Vous l'avez. 3. Ai-je votre ardoise ? 
4. Non, monsieur, vous avez mon petit sac. 5. Quels souliers avez- 
vous'? 6. J'ai les bons souliers et les bonnes bottes. 7. Ai-je vos 
gants? 8. Oui, monsieur, vous les avez. 9. Qu'avez-vous 1 ? 10. 

5 21 15 9 10 3 11 3 9 1 11 1 12 5 11 5 

kel, bon, bonne, boeuf (pi. bceu/s), men-teur, men-teuze, ac-teur, ac-trice, pe-cheur, peche- 

5 1 1 16 1 20 18 12 5 15 3 6 4 12 4 12 4 1 12 7 

res.se, vache, cha-peau, ar-doize, sou-lier, botte, gant, chaize, pe-tit, pe-tite, ke, ka-tri-eme, 

5 11 5 11 

mei-lleur, mei-lleure. 



70 



THE FIFTH LESSON. 



J'ai les grandes chaises et les petites malles. 11. Quels boeufs avez- 
vous? 12. J'ai mes boeufs et mes vach.es. 13. Ai-je votre cha- 
peau? 14. Vous l'avez. 15. Ai-je votre ardoise ? 16. Non, ma- 
dame ; vous avez votre ardoise et votre livre. 17. Qu'avez-vous ? 
18. J'ai mon sac et mes gants. 19. Avez- vous la grosse chaise et 
la petite malle ? 20. Je les ai. 

1. What have you ? 2. I have the shoes and the boots. 
3. What shoes have you? 4. I have the good ones. 5. Have I 
your gloves? 6. No, sir, I have them. 7. What hat have you? 
8. I have the good hat and the good boots. 9. What slate have 
you? 10. I have the big one. 11. Have you the small gloves? 
12. Yes, madam, I have them. 13. What cow have you? 14. I 
have the good cow. 15. What ox have you ? 16. I have the large 
one. 17. Have you the large chair? 18. No, sir, I have the small 
one. 19. What bag have you? 20. I have the little one. 21. 
What have you ? 22. I have the bag, the chair, and the trunk. 
23. What trunk have you ? 24. I have the big one. 25. Have I 
your trunks ? 26. No, sir, I have them. 



5.— CINQUIEME LEQON. 

AVOIR, TO HAVE. JFIEST AND SECOND PEESON NEGATIVE. 
Not. JVe-jias, ne-point. 



1. lie is placed before the verb, pas and point after it. 
becomes ?i' before a vowel or a silent h. 



Point is stronger than pas. Ne 



Have you not the fork ? 
I have it not. 

Have I not your inkstands ? 

You have them not. 

You have not. I have not. 



A, one. 
A pencil. 
A copy-booh. 
My father. 
A brother. 

Pretty, the pretty one 
The knife. The 
The cotton. The wool. 



A salt-cellar. 
A page. 
My mother. 
A sister. 



N'avez-vous pas la fourchette ? 

Je ne l'ai pas. 

N'ai-je pas vos encriers? 

Yous ne les avez pas. 

Yous n'avez pas. Je n'ai pas. 

MASCULINE. 

Un. 
Un crayon. 



Un cahier. 
Mon pere. 
Un frere. 
Joli, le joli. 
Le couteau. 
Le coton. 



FEMININE. 

Une. 

Une saliere. 
Une page. 
Ma mere. 
Une sceur. 
Jolie, la jolie. 
La cuiller. 
La laine. 



1 IS 14 24 22 5 12 21 1 12 7 1 125 1 7 7 7 11 15 12 15 12 

pas, poinf, un, une. cra-yon, sa-liere, ca-Mer, page, pere, mere, frere, soeur, jo-li, jo-lie, 

18 17 22 4 5 15 21 7 14 12 7 

cou-teau, cu-iller, co-ton, laine, cin-ki-cme. 



THE FIFTH LESSON. 



71 



Of, from. De, d' before a vowel or a silent k. 

I have a leaf of my book. J'ai une feuille de mon livre. 

What have I? Qu'ai-je ? 

You have the pencil of my father, or Yous avez le crayon de mon pere. 
my father's pencil. 

2. The English possessive case is always translated, as in this last phrase, with de be- 
fore the possessor. The French have no possessive case. 

My sister's glove (the glove of my sis- Le gant de ma soeur. 
ter). 

Edward's book. Henry's pen. Le livre SEdouard. La plume ft Henri. 

My father's oxen. Les boeufs de mon pere. 

My mother's cows. Les vaches de ma mere. 

Have you not my brothers' copy- N'avez-vous pas les cahiers de mes 

books ? freres ? 

I have not your sisters' spoons. Je n'ai pas les cuillers de vos soeurs. 

Have I not your salt-cellar? N'ai-je pas votre saliere? 

Yes, sir, you have it. Si, monsieur, vous l'avez. 

1. N'avez-vous pas la premiere page de mon livre? 2. J'ai la 
premiere page et la seconde aussi. 3. Avez- vous mon joli couteau? 

4. Je ne l'ai pas. 5. Avez-vous le coton ou la laine? 6. J'ai le 
coton, je n'ai pas la laine. 7. N'ai-je pas votre crayon ? 8. Vous 
ne l'avez pas. 9. N'avez-vous pas la saliere de ma mere ? 10. Je 
ne l'ai pas. 11. N'ai-je pas les cahiers de vos freres? 12. Non, 
monsieur, vous ne les avez pas. 13. N'avez-vous pas le couteau de 
mon pere? 14. Si, monsieur, je l'ai. 15. N'avez-vous pas le cou- 
teau et la cuiller d'Edouard ? 16. Si, madame, je les ai. 17. N'ai- 
je pas un bon crayon? 18. Yous avez un bon crayon et un bonne 
plume. 19. J'ai le coton d'Edouard et la laine d'Henri. 

1. What have you? 2. I have a salt-cellar and a spoon. 
3. What salt-cellar have you ? 4. I have the salt-cellar of Henry. 

5. Have you not my copy-book ? 6. I have not your copy-book, I 
have your pencil. 7. What leaf have you ? 8. I have the first leaf. 
9. Have you not the third page ? 10. I have not the third, I have 
the first and the second. 11. Have you not the cotton of my fa- 
ther? 12. I have not the cotton, I have the wool. 13. Have I 
not your brother's knife ? 14. Yes, sir, and you have the pretty 
spoons. 15. Have I not your father's hat? 16. No, sir, you have 
it not. 17. Have you not the gloves of your mother? 18. Yes, 
sir, I have my mother's gloves, my brother's pencil, and my sister's 
pen. 19. Have you not the wool? 20. No, sir, I have it not 
21. I have my sister's pretty book. 



72 



THE SIXTH LESSON. 



6.—SIXIEME LEgON. 

THE SAME CONTINUED. 

Have I it? Have I it not ? Hai-je? NeVai-je 

Have you it ? Have you it not ? L'avez-vous ? Ne l'avez-vous ? 

Have you them? Have you them not ? Les avez-vous ? Ne lcs avez-vous pas? 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The man. The woman, wife. Lliomme. La, femme. 

A son. A young lady. TJn fils. Une demoiselle. 

The boy. The daughter, girl. Le gargon. La fille. 

1. Boy, meaning child, is petit gargon in French ; boys, meaning yonngmen, is jeunes 
gens. Gargon means also servant, fellow, bachelor, etc. Girl, also meaning child, is pe- 
tite fille; meaning young lady, is jeune fille. Fille alone, not meaning daughter, is ser- 
vant girl, unmarried lady, etc. 

This, that. Ce. Cette. 

TJiesc, those. Ces. Ces. 

That boy's hat. Le chapeau de ce petit gargon. 

That girl's book. Le livre de cette petite fille. 

The stick. Miss. Le baton. Mademoiselle. 

The button. The lady. Le bouton. La dame. 

A cousin. Un cousin. Une cousine. 

A friend. TJn ami. Une amie. 

The carpet. The saw. Le tapis. La scie. 

2. Ce becomes cet before a vowel or a silent h. 

This man. That friend. Cet homme. Cet ami, cette amie. 
These men. Those friends. ' Ces hommes. Ces amis, ces amies. 
Of the, from the (singular). Du. De la. 

Of the, from the (plural). Des. Des. 

3. Du is compounded of de le, and des of de les. Both du and de la become de V bo- 
fore a vowel or a silent h. 

The stick of the boy. Le baton du petit gargon. 

The woman's carpet. Le tapis de la femme. 

The buttons of the young ladies. Les boutons des demoiselles. 

The man's saw. La scie de l'homme. 

A cousin of your sister's friend. Un cousin de l'amie de votre sceur. 

1. Quel baton avez-vous? 2. J'ai le baton du fils de cette 
femme. 3. Je n'ai pas le livre de cette petite fille; l'avez-vous? 
4. Non, mademoiselle, je ne l'ai pas. 5. Je n'ai pas la scie de cet 
homme ; ne l'avez-vous pas ? 6. Si, monsieur, je l'ai. 7. Qu' avez- 
vous ? 8. J'ai les gants de cette demoiselle et le chapeau du fils 
de votre ami. 9. Je n'ai pas les jolis boutons; les avez-vous? 

12 J2 7 IS 1 12 4 20 5 1 21 12 5 7 2 21 1 20 

si-zieme, 7iomme, femme, fi7s, de-moi-zelle, gar-con, fille, cette, ces, ba-ton, made-moi- 

5 18 21 1 18 U 18 12 1 12 1 13 1 12 13 7 

zelle, bou-ton, dame, cou-zin, cou-zine, a-mi, a-mie, ta-pi.s\ scie, des. 



THE SEVENTH LESSON. 73 

10. Non, mademoiselle, je n'ai pas les jolis boutons, j'ai le tapis de 
cette dame. 11. N'avez-vous pas les plumes de la petite fille? 

12. Non, mademoiselle, je ne les ai pas. 13. Qu'avez-vous ? 14. 
J'ai les carriers des demoiselles, le batou du petit gargon et le cra- 
yon de Tamie de votre cousine. 15. N'avez-vous pas le tapis de 
cette dame? 16. Si, mademoiselle, et j'ai ces jolis boutons aussi. 
17. Vous avez le livre du fils de cette femme, et j'ai les papiers des 
amies de votre cousine. 

1. I Lave not the stick of this man ; have you it not ? 2. No, 
sir, I have the book of the young lady. 3. Have you the pencils 
of this woman's son? 4. No, miss, I have them not. 5. Have 
you not the pencil of the (little) boy? 6. No, sir, I have the pretty 
button of this (little) girl. 7. You have the oxen of these men; 
have you not the letters of these ladies? 8. I have them not. 
9. What saw have you ? 10. I have the saw of the friend of your 
cousin. 11. Have you not the carpet of the daughter of my 
cousin ? 12. Yes, sir, and I have the slates of the (little) boys. 

13. What leaf have you? 14. I have the leaf of that large vol- 
ume. 15. I have not my cousin's book ; have you it? 16. I have 
it not. 17. Have you not the man's glove ? 18. No, miss, I have 
my fruit and my butter. 

■ #J ' 

7.— SEPTIftME LEgON. 

AVOIR, TO HA VK THIRD PEESON SINGULAR. 
Who. Has. Qui. A. 

He, it. She, it. 11. Elle. 

Has he? He has. A-t-il? II a. 

1. When the verb ends with a vowel, and the subject-pronoun following begins with a 
vowel, -t- is inserted for better sound. 

Has she not ? She has not. N'a-t-elle pas ? Elle n'a pas. 

Has she it ? She has it. LVt-elle ? Elle l'a. 

Has he it not ? He has it not. Ne l'a-t-il pas ? II ne l'a pas. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The leather. The porcelain, china. Le cuir. u& porcelaine. 

The coat. The dress, gown. 1? habit. La robe. 

This cloth. This silk. Ce drap. Cette soie. 

That gold. That watch. Cet or. Cette montre. 

That silver, or) m 

> Ine q old watch. Cet arqent. La montre d or. 

money. ) a J 



5 127 12 5 2212 16 4 7 1 12 15 1 20 16 21 1 3 

se_p-tieme, ki, elle, cuir, porce-laine, AabM, robe, drap, soie, or, montre, argent 



74 



THE SEVENTH LESSON. 



A ring. A finger- A ring (with Un annean. L T ne bague. 

ring. jewels). 
The sfegj. A cravat. Uacier. Une cravate. 

The iron. A pin. Lefcr. Une cpingle. 

Who has ? The gentleman has. Qui a ? Le monsieur 

2. When monsieur, madame, mademoiselle, denote a person present and supposed to 
hear the speaker, they omit the article and demonstrative pronouns ce, cette, in French. 

Who has the good cloth ? Qui a le bon drap ? 

The gentleman has it. Monsieur l'a (if present) ; (if not pres- 

ent), Le monsieur Fa. 
The lady has it. The young lady has it. Madame l'a. Mademoiselle Ta. 

3. We have seen that yes, in answer to a negative interrogation, is si, and not oui. 
Such questions are often in the form of affirmation in French, with the interrogative accent. 

You have not my watch ? Vous n'avez pas ma montre ? 

Yes, sir, I have it. Si, monsieur, je l'ai. 

I have not your cravats ? Je n'ai pas vos cravates ? 

Yes, sir, you have them. Si, monsieur, vous les avez. 

1. Qui a le bon cuir? 2. Monsieur l'a. 3. Qui a la jolie 
porcelaine? 4. Votre mere l'a. 5. A-t-ellela jolie robe? 6. Elle 
ne l'a pas. 7. Qui a l'kabit de drap ? 8. Mon pere l'a. 9. Qui 
a la robe de soie? 10. Cette dame l'a. 11. A-t-elle le crayon? 
12. Non, mademoiselle, elle ne l'a pas. 13. N'a-t-elle pas l'anneau 
d'or ? 14. Elle a l'anneau d'or et une jolie bague. 15. Qui a le 
couteau d'acier ? 16. L'ami d'Edouard a le couteau d'acier et le 
crayon d' argent. 17. N'a-t-il pas les jolies cravates? 18. Si, 
monsieur, et il a les epingles d'or aussi. 19. Qui a les souliers de 
cuir? 20. Ce monsieur les a. 21. Qu' avez- vous ? 22. J'ai la 
jolie porcelaine, le bon habit de drap et cette soie. 23. Qui a mon 
argent ? 24. Mon frere a votre argent, votre jolie bague et la 
grosse epingle d'or. 

1. Have you the small pins? 2. No, madam, the gentleman 
has them. 3. Has he the shoes of leather ? 4. No, sir, he has 
them not. 5. Who has the plates of porcelain ? 6. The lady has 
them. 7. Has she the dress of silk? 8. She has the dress of 
silk, the watch of gold, and the pretty finger-ring. 9. Who has 
the coat of cloth? 10. The son of the gentleman has the coat and 
the pantaloons. 11. Has he not the watch of silver ? 12. He has 
it not. 13. Has he the ring of gold? 14. He has it. 15. Has 
he the pretty cravats ? 16. Yes, sir, he has them. 17. Has he 

1 17 1 1 125 1 1 5 5 14 

aft-ncau, bag»e. a-cie/', cra-vate, fer, e-pingle. 



THE EIGHTH LESSOR. 



75 



not the boots of leather? 18. No, madam, he has them not. 19. 
Who has the knife of steel 1 ? 20. My cousin has the knife of steel, 
the plate of porcelain, and the coat of cloth. 21. I have the pretty- 
cravats, the buttons, and the good pins. 22. Who has the good 
silk ? 23. The lady has it ; the gentleman has it not. 



8.— iiuitiEme leqon. 

INTEEEOGATIONS, WITH A NOUN FOE SUBJECT. 

1. In questions, with a noun for subject, in French, the subject is mentioned first, and 
then the question is asked with the pronoun. Thus, instead of Has the man ? Has the 
woman ? etc., as in English, the French say, The man has he ? The woman has she ? etc. 

Has the man ? L'hornme a-t-il ? 

Has the woman ? La femme a-t-elle ? 

Has my brother your money ? Mon frere a-t-il votre argent ? 

Has that lady the silk ? Cette dame a-t-elle la soie ? 

Has your friend the gold ? Votre ami a-t-il Tor ? 

2. If, however, an interrogative word, as que, quel, on, where, quand, when, comment, 
how, combien, how much, etc., be used, the question must begin with the interrogative in 
French, as in English. 

What has your friend ? Qu\ votre ami ? 

What has that great man ? Qu\ ce grand homme ? 

\ Quel anneau a votre cousin ? or, 
( Quel anneau votre cousin a-t-il ? 



Wliat ring has your cousin 



3. But, when having asked about several persons or things successively, we change to 
another, we may begin the question with the subject; as, 



What has your brother ? 

He has the book. 

What has your sister ? 

She has the paper. 

And your cousin, what has he ? 



Qu'a, votre frere ? 

II a le livre. 

Qu\ votre sceur? 

Elle a le papier. 

Et votre cousin, qu'a-t-il ? 







MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The horse. 


The goat. 


Le cheval. 


La chevre. 


The mutton, 


sheep. 


Le mouton. 


La brebis. 


A chicken. 


A hen. 


TJn poulet. 


Une poule. 


The cabbage. 


A peach. 


Le chou. 


Une peche. 


A servant. 


A mule. 


TJn domestique. 


Une mule. 


The captain. 


A pear. 


Le capitaine. 


Une poire. 


This cloak. 


This cherry. 


Ce manteau. 


Cette cerise. 


That wood. 


That vest, jacket. 


Ce bois. 


Cette veste. 



2212127 4 1 7 18 21 4 12 18 5 18 8 15 5 12 22 

hui-tieme, che-val, chevre, mou-ton, bre-bis, pou-let, poule, peche, do-mes-tike, mule, 

1 12 7 20 3 17 12 20 6 

ca-pi-taine, poire, man-teau, cerize, bois, veste. 



70 



THE EIGHTH LESSON. 



Handsome, fine. 



Beau* 
Vieux. 
Son. 
Ses. 



Belle. 
Vieille. 
Sa. 
Ses 



Old. 



His, her, its (singular). 
His, her, its (plural). 



4. Son, sa, ses, like all possessive adjectives, agree with the thing possessed, and not 
with the possessor. 

Her son. His daughter. His or her Son fils. Sa fille. Ses plumes. 



1. Le capitaine a-t-il son cheval ? 2. II l'a. 3. Le domes- 
tique n' a-t-il pas la chevre? 4. II a la chevre et la brebis. 5. Cet 
liomme n'a-t-il pas son raouton? 6. II a son niouton, ses poulets 
et ses poules. 7. Le fils cle cette femme n'a-t-il pas son cbou ? 8. 
Si, monsieur, il a son cbou et ses peches. 9. A-t-il la mule du 
capitaine? 10. II a sa mule et son cbeval. 11. Le domestique 
a-t-il vos fruits 1 12. Oui, mademoiselle, il a mes pecbes, mes 
poires et mes cerises. 13. Quel manteau a le capitaine? 14. II 
a le manteau de drap. 15. Qu'a le vieux domestique? 16. II a 
le beau manteau et la belle veste. 17. Quel bois a-t-il ? 18. II a 
mon bois. 19. Votre domestique a-t-il la vieille mule? 20. II a 
la vieille mule et la vieille brebis. 21. J'ai le poulet et la poule. 

1. Has not the captain bis horse ? 2. He has bis horse, bis 
mule, and bis goat. 3. Has the old servant bis sbeep ? He bas 
bis sbeep, bis goat, bis bens, and bis cbickens. 5. Wbo bas tbe 
big cabbage? 6. My brother bas it. 7. What fruit bas be? 8. 
He bas tbe peacbes, tbe pears, and tbe cberries. 9. Has be the 
fine cberries ? 10. Yes, madam, he has the fine cherries, the fine 
peaches, and the fine pears. 11. Has the wife of the captain her 
hens? 12. She has her hens and her chickens. 13. What vest 
has your cousin ? 14. He has the handsome vest and the hand- 
some cloak. 15. Has the son of that man his wood? 16. He has 
it. 17. What have you? 18. I have the handsome vest, the old 
cloak, and my good hat. 19. Has the brother of your friend the 
handsome hat? 20. He has the handsome hat and the old cloak. 



pens. 



* Beau applies rather to what is noble and imposing ; joli, to what is delicate, small, 
and. regular. 



17 5 12 9 12 5 7 

beau, belle, vieucc, vi-eille, ses. 



THE NINTH LESSON. 



77 



9.— NEUVLEME LEQON. 
AYOIE, TO HA VK fiest peeson plueal. 



Have we ? We have. 

Have we not ? We have not. 

Have we it ? We have it. 

Have we it not ? We have it not. 



The pantaloons. 


The linen. 


Le pantalon. 


The apron. 


The plum. 


Le tablier. 


The candlestick. 


The lamp. 


Le chandelier. 


The waistcoat. 


The flower. 


Le o^Ze£. 


The cap. 


The rose. 


Le bonnet. 


The dog. 




Le chien. 


The coal (fossil). 


The 2w%>. 


Le charbon (de terre). 


The charcoal. 


The muslin. 


Le charbon (cle bois). 


A biscuit. 


A potato. 


Un biscuit. 


Our (singular). 




Notre. 


Our (plural). 




Nos. 



Avons-nous ? Nous avons. 
N'avons-nous pas ? Nous n' avons pas. 
L'avons-nous? Nous 1'avons. 
Ne l'avons-nous pas ? Nous ne 1'avons 
pas. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

La foiZe. 
La prune. 
La lampe. 
La yfewr. 
La rose. 
La chienne. 
La tidipe. 
La mousseline. 
line pomme de 

terre. 
Notre. 
Nos. 

Avons-nous nos bonnets ? 
Nous les avons. 
Avons-nous le gros pantalon ? 
Nous 1'avons. 

N'avons-nous pas le tablier ? 
Nous ne 1'avons pas. 

1. The name of the material of which any thing consists may be used as an adjective in 
English, and placed before the name of the thing ; as, a gold watch, a leather shoe. This 
cannot be done in French, but the name of the material is placed after that of the thing, 
with de between them ; as, a watch of gold, a shoe of leather, etc. Thus, 

A silver candlestick. Un chandelier d'argent. 

A gold ring. Un anneau d'or. 

His leather shoes. Ses souliers de cuir. 

Our porcelain dishes. Nos plats de porcelaine. 

What has that little girl ? Qu'a cette petite fille ? 

She has her silk apron. Elle a sou tablier de soie. 

1. Quel fruits avons-nous % 2. Nous avons les poires, les cerises 
et les prunes. 3. Avons-nous le bois ou le charbon? 4. Nous 
avons le bois et le charbon. 5. Quel gilet votre fr ere a-t-il? 6. II 
a le gilet de soie. 7. Quelles fleurs votre soeur a-t-elle? 8. Elle 



Have we our caps ? 
We have them. 

Have we the coarse pantaloons ? 
We have them. 
Have we not the apron ? 
We have it not. 



9 127 

neu-vieme, a-vons, 



18 3 1 21 20 1 12 5 22 3 4 125 3 12 5 

nous, pan-ta-lon, toile, ta-bli-er, prune, chan-de-lier, lampe, gi-let, 

11 15 5 17 1214 125 1 21 7 22 12 IS 12 12 22 12 15 

fleur, bo?i-ne/, roze, chien, chienne, char-bon, terre, tu-lipe, mouss-line, bis-cui£, pomme, 
notre, nos. 



78 TIIE TEXTH LESSON. 

a les roses et les talipes. 9. Le garcon a-t-il le bonnet de cuir ? 
10. Non, monsieur, il a le bonnet de drap. 11. Qu'a le vieux 
cliien ? 12. II a le biscuit du domestique. 13. Quelles lampes a 
le capitaine? 14. II a les lampes et les chandeliers d' argent. 

15. Qu'a cette femme ? 1G. Elle a notre toile et notre mousseline. 
17. La chienne n'a-t-elle pas le biscuit ? 18. Si, elle a le biscuit 
et la pomme de terre. 19. Quelle lampe le domestique a-t-il? 
20. II a la lampe d'argent. 21. N'a-t-il pas son charbon? 20. 
Non, il ne l'a pas. 

1. What pantaloons have we? 2. We have the cloth panta- 
loons. 3. Have we not our linen 1 4. Yes, sir, we have our linen 
and our silk. 5. What plums has the little boy? 6. He has our 
plums. 7. Have we the silk waistcoats ? 8. We have the silk 
w T aistcoats and the cloth pantaloons. 9. What flowers has that 
girl? 10. She has her roses and our tulips. 11. Has she not the 
lady's flowers ? 12. No, miss, she has them not. 12. Has that 
young girl the handsome muslin ? 14. She has the handsome 
muslin and the handsome linen. 15. What has your father's dog? 

16. He has the little boy's biscuit and the big potato. 17. What 
aprons have we? 18. We have the silk apron and the cloth cap. 
19. What potato has the little boy ? 20. He has the good potato 
and the good biscuit. 21. Have you the lady's roses? 22. Yes, 
miss, I have her roses and her tulips. 23. Have we not the silver 
candlesticks ? 24. We have not the silver candlesticks, we have 
the silver plates. 



10.— DIXIEME LEQON. 

AVOIE, TO HA VK THIED PEESON PLUEAL. 
They. lis (mas.). Elles (fern.). 

Have they? They have. Ont-ils (or elles)? lis (or elles) 

ont. 

Have they not? They have not. N'ont-ils pas ? Us n'ont pas. 

Have they it ? They have it. L'ont-clles ? Elles 1'ont. 

Have they it not ? They have it not. Ne l'ont-ils pas? lis ne l'ont pas. 
Have they them ? They have them Les ont-elles ? Elles ne les ont pas. 
not. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The neighbor. Le voisin. La voisine. 

The cool: Le cuisinier. La cuisiniere. 



12 195 12 5 21 CO 14 TO 12 22 12 1 2 12 5 2212 12 J2 7 

di-ziemc, ils, ellfiS, onf, voi-zin, voi-zinc, cui-zi-me;\ cui-zi-nicre. 



THE TENTH LESSON. 



79 



1. Nouns often form the feminine in the same manner as adjectives, and in both, when 
the masculine ends in er, the feminine takes a grave accent on the e. 



A scholar (school child). 


Un ecolier.* 


Une ecoliere. 


A pupil or scholar (of any age). 


Un eleve. 


Une eleve. 


A stranger, foreigner 




TTn fifvnii not* 


u lie til ii/tijti o. 


That countryman. 


That country- 


I/O *}1 /V 1 / Q /Y W 
VJ\s jJllUoU/lt/. 


Oette paysanne. 


woman. 








The shopkeeper, merchant. 


UliXI L/t'U*/(/U/. 


Tin winf/tli riviflp 
XJtX //tut C/lll/tlCt'. 


The merchant. 


The young lady. 


1 if 1 11 friCiPi flwf 

/l&UUlsO<Jj/vl/. 


J-JCL VlClAiV-HQ^llC 


An egg. 


A key. 


Tj n ceuf. 


Une clef . 


The tobacco. 


The soup. 


Le tabac. 


La soupe. 


Excellent. 




Excellent. 


Excellente. 


Last. 




Dernier. 


Derniere. 


Tlieir (sing.). 




Leur. 


Leur. 


Tlieir (plur.). 




Leurs. 


Leurs. 


The bed. 


His bed. 


Le lit. 


Son lit. 



2. Beau becomes bel, and vieux commonly becomes vieil, before a vowel or a silent A.t 
The handsome gold. The handsome Le bel or. Le bel argent, 
silver. 

The old bird. The old feather. Le vieil oiseau. La vieille plume. 

They have their fruit and their flowers. lis ont leurs fruits et leurs fleurs. 
You have a handsome coat. Vous avez un bel habit. 

1. Quel tabac les voisins ont-ils ? 2. lis ont leur tabac. 3. 
Quels oeufs les cuisinieres ont-elles ? 4. Elles ont leurs oeufs. 5. 
Les eeoliers n'ont-ils pas leurs plumes ? 6. Non, monsieur, ils 
ont les plumes des marchands. 7. Les ecolieres n'ont-elles pas 
leurs crayons ? 8. Elles ne les ont pas. 9. Ces etrangers ont-ils 
leur argent ? 10. Non, monsieur, ils ont 1'argent du negociant. 
11. Cet homme a-t-il le livre de son eleve? 12. Non, monsieur, 
il a les oeufs du paysan. 13. Qu'a cette paysanne ? 14. Elle a le 
beau drap de la marcliande, 15. Ces demoiselles ont-elles leurs 
clefs ? 16. Elles les ont. 17. Quels livres ces demoiselles ont-elles ? 
18. Elles ont leurs excellents livres. 19. Les cuisiniers ont-ils leur 



* "We often use the term scholar, or good scholar, for a learned man. The translation 
of that in French is savant. Savante, applied to ladies, generally means blue-stocking. 
Student, as of law or medicine, is etudiant. 

t Also, fou, crazy, mow, soft, and nouveuu, new, before a vowel or a silent h, become 
fol, mol, vouvel, and from this form ending in I, these five adjectives form their feminine ; 
as, bel habit, fine coat, belle robe, fine dress; fol espoir, foolish hope, foils conduiie, foolish 
conduct; mol edredon, soft eider down, molle aisance, soft ease ; no'uvel arbre, new tree, 
nouvelle table, new table. 

5 15 125 5 15 137 5 7 5 3 5 5 3 7 5 12 3 5 12 1 1 3 

e-co-lier, e-co-liere, e-leve, e-tran-ger, e-tran-gere, pa-y-zan, pa-y-zanne, mar-chancZ, 

13 5 15 1-^3 9 10 6 1 1 18 5 5 3 5 5 3 7 

mar-chand<?, ne-go-ciani5, ceuf (pi. ceufs), clef, ta-bac, soupe, ek-ceZ-len?5, ek-ceHente, der- 

125 7 127 11 11 12 1-2 5 20 17 

nier, der-niere, leur, leurs, lit, vi-eil, oi-zeau. 



80 



THE ELEVENTH LESSON. 



excellente soupe ? 20. lis ont leur excellente soupe et leur excel- 
lent cafe. 21. L'eleve de votre frere a la derniere feuille de son 
livre. 22. Quel lit avez-vous ? 23. J'ai le petit lit. 

1. What have the countrywomen ? 2. They have their eggs 
and their soup. 3. What have the merchants ? 4. They have the 
keys of the shopkeepers. 5. Have they their excellent tobacco ? 
G. No, sir, they have the keys of the neighbor and the cook's soup. 
7. What have the pupils of the captain ? 8. They have the apples 
of their neighbor and the cook's tea. 9. Has that scholar the sec- 
ond volume or the last? 10. He has the last volume. 11. What 
has that foreigner ? 12. He has a handsome horse and a pretty 
little gold watch. 13. Who has the handsome bird ? 14. My old 
friend has the handsome bird and the handsome silver. 15. Have 
those foreigners the countrymen's fruit ? 16. They have the coun- 
trymen's fruit and the merchant's flowers. 17. What has that lit- 
tle boy? 18. He has the old coat and the handsome egg. 19. 
What flowers have those scholars ? 20. They have their handsome 
roses and their handsome tulips. 21. What have we? 22. We 
have the handsome flowers. 23. Have we not our candlesticks ? 
24. We have our candlesticks and our handsome inkstand. 25. 
Have you the big bed or the little one ? 2G. I have the big bed. 



11. — ONZIEME LEQON. 

PLUEAL OP NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 

1. We have seen that the plural of nouns and adjectives is generally formed by adding 
8 to the singular. To this rule there are many exceptions. 

2. Those ending in s, as, or s, are unchanged in the plural. 

The nut. The nuts. La noix. Les noix. 

The old carpet. The old carpets. Le vieux tapis. Les vieux tapis. 

The coarse stocking. The coarse Le gros bas. Les gros bas. 
stockings. 

3. Those ending in al change this termination into aux for the plural. 
The general. The generals. Le general. Les generaux. 
The corporal. The corporals. Le caporal. Les caporaux. 
The animal. The animals. 1? animal. Les animaux. 

4. Thoso in an, and nouns in eu, take x in the plural.* 

* For exceptions to these rules, see Grammatical Rules. 



21 12 5 20 5 5 1 5 5 17 1 15 1 1 15 17 1 12 1 1 12 17 

on-ziernf, noia?, ge-ne-ral, ge-ne-raiuo, cap-o-ral, cap-o-ratue, a-ni-mal, a-ni-maua^. 



THE ELEVENTH LESSON. 



81 



The cloak. The cloaks. 
The handsome hat. The handsome 
hats. 

The handsome bird. The handsome 
birds. 



Le manteau. Les manteaux. 
Le beau chapeau. Les beaux cha- 
peaux. 

Le bel oiseau. Les beaux oiseaux. 



A store. 
The whip. 
That widower. 

Honest. 

Rich. 

Poor. 



A house. 

The maid (servant). 
That 



MASCULINE. 

Un magasin. 
Le fouet. 
Ce veuf. 
Honnete. 
Riche. 
JPauvre. 



FEMININE. 

Une maison. 
La servante. 
Cette veuve. 
Honnete. 
Riche. 
Pauvre. 



5. Pamre placed before the noun means pitiable ; after it, it means poor in property. 



Ugly. 

A cake. A carriage. 
What have the corporals ? 
They have the horses of the generals. 
Who has the apples and the cakes ? 
Those boys (young men) have them. 
Who has the ugly animals ? 
That poor widower has them. 



Vilain, laid. Vilaine, laide. 
Un gateau. Une voiture. 
Qu'ont les caporaux ? 
lis ont les chevaux des generaux. 
Qui a les pommes et les gateaux ? 
Ces jeunes gens les ont. 
Qui a les vilains animaux ? 
Ce pauvre veuf les a. 



1. Qu'a cette riche veuve ? 2. Elle a la belle voiture. 3. Qu'a 
ce petit garcon ? 4. II a le fouet et les noix. 5. Quels animaux 
ces paysans ont-ils ? 6. lis ont les beaux chevaux. 7. Cette ser- 
vante n'a-t-elle pas les gros gateaux ? 8. Si, elle les a. 9. Cet 
homme riche n'a-t-il pas une grande maison ? 10. II a une grande 
maison et un grand magasin. 11. Qu'a cette servante ? 12. Elle 
a le fouet du general. 13. Quels chevaux ces caporaux ont-ils ? 
14. lis ont leurs vilains chevaux. 15. Cette riche veuve a-t-elle 
son argent ? 16. Oui, mademoiselle, et elle a l'argent de ses filles. 
17. Qu'a cet honnete homme? 18. II a son grand magasin. 
19. Qui a la belle voiture ? 20. Ce veuf a la belle voiture et les 
beaux chevaux. 21. Le cuisinier a ses gateaux et ses fruits. 

1. What has the maid-servant? 2. She has the cook's cakes 
and the countrywoman's chickens. 3. Has the cook your cakes ? 
4. He has my cakes and my nuts. 5. Have the maid-servants the 
soup? 6. They have the soup and the potatoes. 7. Have the 
corporals the keys of their trunks ? 8. They have them. 9. What 
animals have we ? 10. We have our horses and our sheep. 11. 



5 20 17 1 1 14 7 21 18 1 7 3 9 9 15 8 12 17 

bel, oi-zeau, ma-ga-zin, mai-zon, fou-etf, ser-vante, veuf, veuve, 7ton-wete, riche. pauvre, 

12 14 12 7 7 7 2 17 20 22 

vi-lain, vi-laine, laid, laide, ga-teau, voi-ture. 



82 



THE TWELFTH LESSON". 



Have we not the handsome bird ? 12. We have it not. 13. What 
have we ? 14. We have the general's whip, and the money of that 
young widow. 15. Has that honest man his papers? 1G. He has 
them not. 17. What birds has the poor man ? 18. He has the 
handsome birds. 19. Who has the rich man's horses? 20. My 
brothers have them. 21. Have they the handsome horses or the 
ugly ones ? 22. They have the ugly ones. 23. Have those serv- 
ants their fruit ? 24. They have it. 25. What candlestick have 
we? 26. We have the old candlestick. 



12.— DOUZIEME LEQON. 

SECOND PERSON SINGULAR 

Hast thou ? Thou hast. 
Hast thou not ? Thou hast not. 
Hast thou them? Thou hast them. 
Hast thou it not ? Thou hast it not 
Thy (singular). 
Thy (plural). 



As-tu ? Tu as. 
N'as-tu pas ? Tu n'as pas. 
Les as-tu ? Tu les as. 
Ne l'as-tu pas ? Tu ne l'as pas. 
Ton (mas.). Ta (fern.). 
Tes (mas.). Tes (fern.). 



1. The second person singular (tit, ton, etc.) is considerably more used in French than 
in English. It is used, first, to denote great intimacy and endearment ; secondly, as in Eng- 
lish, in the solemn and sublime style ; thirdly, to the Supreme Being, and to high dignita- 
ries; and sometimes, in speaking to inferiors, and to show contempt. 

When respect or civility are to be expressed, the second person plural, or the third per- 
son, -with monsieur, madame, mademoiselle, etc., must be used. (See Eesson 16, 3.) 

Tu as ta plume ; as-tu ton papier et 
tes livres ? Je les ai. 



Thou hast thy pen ; hast thou thy pa- 
per and thy books ? I have them. 



The snuff. The napkin. 

The soap. A pair. 

A (school) exercise. A brush. 

A relation, relative. 

The ham. The street. 

A gun. A plank, board. 

Wicked. 

The best. 

My "brother-in-law. My sister-in-law. 

Here. On. 
The floor. On the floor. 
My relation's carriage. 
These guns. These plank. 



MASCULINE. 

Le tabac a priser 
Le savo7}. 
Un theme. 
Un parent. 
Le jamb on. 
Un fusil. 
Mediant. 
Le meilleur. 
Mon beau-frere. 

lei. 
Le plancher 



FEMININE. 

La serviette. 
Une pjaire. 
ITne brosse. 
Une parente. 
La rue. 
ITne planche. 
Mechante. 
La meilleur e. 
Ma belle-sceur. 
Sur. 
Sur le plancher. 



La voiture de mon parent. 
Ces fusils. Ces planches. 



dou-zieme, as, ton, tes, pri-zer, ser-vi-ette, sa-von, paire, t/icme, brosse, pa-ren£, pa-rente, 

S 31 S« 22 11 8 5 3 5 3 5 il 5 11 12 12 3 5 

jam-bon, rue, fu-ziZ, planche, me-chan^, mu-chante, meill-eur, meill-eure, i-ci, plan-cher. 



THE TWELFTH LESSON. 



83 



The gentleman has my knife. 

Who has your gun ? 

This gentleman has it here. 

Those gentlemen have it not. 

Has the lady her book ? 

The young lady has it. 

We have the gentleman's brush. 



Monsieur a mon couteau. 
Qui a votre fusil ? 
Monsieur l'a ici. 
Ces messieurs ne l'ont pas. 
Madame a-t-elle son livre ? 
Mademoiselle l'a. 

Nous avons la brosse de monsieur. 



1. Votre beau-frere a-t-il le tabac a priser ? 2. II l'a. 3. Mon- 
sieur, a-t-il une serviette? 4. Monsieur a une serviette et une 
assiette. 5. Qu'a mademoiselle ? 6. Elle a le savon, la brosse 
et une paire de souliers. 7. Ces messieurs ont-ils leurs themes ? 
8. lis ne les ont pas. 9. Qu'a votre parent ? 10. II a le jam- 
bon et les pommes de terre. 11. Ces dames ont-elles leurs fleurs ? 
12. Elles les ont ici sur la table. 13. Qu'a ce mechant homme 
ici ? 14. II a une petite planche. 15. As-tu le meilleur fusil ? 
16. Je l'ai ici sur le plancher. 17. Qu'a votre belle soeur ? 18. Elle 
a son mouchoir et sa brosse. 19. Qui a le tabac a priser ? 20. Vo- 
tre parent l'a. 21. Qu'a cette petite fille ? 22. Elle a la serviette, 
le savon et une paire de gants. 23. Tu as ton crayon ; n'as-tu pas 
tes cahiers aussi ? 24. Je les ai. 

1. Hast thou thy exercises ? 2. I have them. 3. Who has the 
best ham ? 4. The shopkeeper has it. 5. Has that wicked man the 
plank ? 6. He has it here on the floor. 7. Hast thou not the best 
gun ? 8. No, sir, my brother-in-law has it. 9. Has your sister- 
in-law the brush ? 10. She has it. 11. Who has the best soap ? 
12. My relation has the best soap and the best ham. 13. Has your 
brother-in-law the best exercise ? 14. No, sir, my sister-in-law has 
the best. 15. Has the gentleman his snuff? 16. He has it here 
in this paper. 17. What has your relation ? 18. She has the nap- 
kin, the brush, and the handsome gloves. 19. Hast thou the wick- 
ed animal? 20. No, madam, my relation has him. 21. What has 
that boy (servant) ? 22. He has a pair of boots and a little plank. 
23. Has he his shoes here ? 24. He has them here on the floor. 
25. Have these gentlemen their gloves? 26. These young ladies 
have them. 27. Has the young lady her gloves ? 28. The lady 
has them. Hast thou thy pencil ? I have it. 



84 



THE THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



13. — TKEIZIiJME LEgON. 

ETRE, TO BE. FIKST AND SECOND PERSONS. 

Are you? lam. Etcs-vous? Je suis. 

Are you not? I am not. N'etes-vous pas ? Je ne suis pas. 

We are. We are not. Nous sommes. Nous ne sommes pas. 

Where? There. In. Ou? La. Bans. 

People, persons, men. Gens. 

Gens has the adjectives before it generally feminine, those after it masculine. 
Young people, young men. Les jeunes gens. 

Honest persons, honest men. Les honnetes gens. 

1. People, meaning a people or nation, is pcuple. 

2. When vows refers to but one, the adjectives, nouns, and pronouns belonging to it are 
singular ; when it refers to more than one, they are plural. 

Are you poor ? I am poor. Etes-vous pauvre ? Je suis pauvre. 

Are you not our friends? N'etes-vous pas nos amis? 

We are your friends. Nous sommes vos amis. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

A handkerchief. The yard. Un mouchoir. La cour. 

PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

3. Nouns compounded of a substantive and. adjective, change both for the plural. 
Her brother-in-law. Her sister-in-law. Son beau-frere. Sa belle-sceur. 
Her brothers-in-law. Her sisters-in-law. Ses beaux-freres. Ses belles-soeurs. 

4. The three following are compounded of a possessive adjective and a noun. 

Sir, gentleman. Sirs, gentlemen. Monsieur* (sing.). Messieurs (plu.). 

Madam. Ladies. Madame, " Mesdames, " 

Miss. Misses. Mademoiselle, " Mesdemoiselles, " 

5. Sieur, dame, and demoiselle, are not used without the prefix in addressing persons, 
nor in titles. 

6. Nouns compounded of two substantives without a preposition, take the form of the 
plural with both ; as, 

The cauliflower. The cauliflowers. Le chou-fleur. Les choux-fleurs. 

7. Nouns compounded of two substantives joined by a preposition, take the form of the 
plural in the first only ; as, 

The potato. The potatoes. La pomme de terre. Les pommes de 

terre. 

8. Nouns compounded of a substantive and adverb, take the form of the plural in tho 
substantive only ; as, 

The fore-runner. The fore-runners. Uavant-coureicr. Les avant-coureurs. 



* Monsieur is compounded of mon and sieur ; madame of ma and dame ; mademoi- 
selle of ma and demoiselle. 

7 12 5 6 22 12 15 3 9 3 18 20 18 11 1 3 18 11 

trei-ziem*?, etes, suis, sommes, dans, joeuple, gens, mou-choir, chou-fleur, a-van£-cou-reur. 



THE THIRTEENTH LESSON. 



85 



9. Nouns compounded of verbs, prepositions, or adverbs, are unchanged in the plural. 
His drink-money. Son pour-boire. Ses pour-boire. 

10. Sometimes the meaning of a noun and adjective forming a compound is such as not 
to admit a change for the plural. 

"The tooth-pick. The tooth-picks. Le cure-dents. Les cure-dents. 

Are you there in the house ? Etes-vous la dans la maison ? 

I am here in the store. Je suis ici dans le magasin. 

Ladies, have you your cloaks ? Mesdames, avez-vous vos manteaux ? 

1. Etes-vous riche ? 2. Je ne suis pas riche. 3. N'etes-vous 
pas moil ami? 4. Je suis votre ami. 5. Oii etes-vous ? 6. Nous 
sommes ici. 7. N'etes-vous pas dans la rue ? 8. Non, monsieur, 
nous sommes ici dans la cour, nous ne sommes pas dans la rue. 
9. Etes-vous la ? 10. Nous sommes ici dans la maison. 11. N'etes- 
vous pas dans le magasin ? 12. Non, monsieur, je suis ici sur le 
plancher. 13. N'etes-vous pas mon parent ? 14. Je suis votre 
cousin. 15. Etes-vous les amis de monsieur? 16. Oui, mesdames, 
nous sommes ses amis. 17. Mesdemoiselles, etes-vous les belles- 
soeurs du general ? 18. Oui, mesdames, nous sommes ses belles- 
soeurs. 19. Qu'a ce mechant chien ? 20. II a les gateaux et le 
jambon des petits garcons. 21. Mesdames, avez-vous les niouchoirs 
de coton ou de soie ? 22. Nous avons les mouchoirs de soie. 
23. Qui a la meilleure voiture ? 24. Cette riche veuve a la meil- 
leure voiture et les meilleurs chevaux. 25. Quelle planche avez- 
vous ? 2G. J'ai la petite planche et le bon bois. 

1. Where are you ? 2. I am here. 3. Are you in the yard or 
in the street ? 4. We are in the street. 5. Are you not the friend 
of the young widow ? 6. I am her friend and her relation. 7. Are 
you the relations of that wicked man ? 8. We are not his relations. 
9. What has that young man ? 10. He has his whips and his 
guns. 11. What animals has the countryman ? 12. He has the 
wicked animals. 13. Who has the best guns ? 14. Those young 
men have the best guns and the best whips. 15. Are you the 
brother-in-law of the rich widow ? 16. No, ladies, I am her brother. 
17. Are you the relation of that young girl ? 18. Yes, I am her 
cousin. 19. What has that maid-servant ? 20. She has the large 
cakes, the excellent hams, and the good fruit. 21. Who has the 
handsome houses ? 22. The merchant has the handsome houses 
and the handsome stores. 23. Has he the best butter ? 24. He 



18 20 1 3 

pour-boire, cure-denfo. 



83 



THE FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



has the best butter and the best flour. 25. Who has your hand- 
some bird ? 2G. My sister-in-law has my handsome bird and my 
handsome flowers. 27. Are you the sons of the captain? 28. No, 
miss, we are his brothers-in-law. 



14.— QUATORZIEME LEQON. 
etre, to be. third peeson singular and first plural. 



Are 



To 



Are we not ? You are not. 
Is he ? He is. Is she ? She is. 
Is he not? He is not. 
Is she not? She is not. 

Nothing. 

What have you ? Nothing. 
I have nothing here. 
Nothing is good here. 
Under. But. 

Something, any thing. A thing. 

The bench. 

A fish. A codfish. 

An onion. A sardine. 

The parasol. The clock (large). 

The pendulum. The clock. 



Sommcs-noxts ? Vous etes. 

Ne sommes-nous pas ? Vous n'etes pas. 

Est-il? II est. Est-elle? Elle est. 

N'est-il pas ? II n'est pas. 

N'est-elle pas? Elle n'est pas. 

Without a verb, rien; with a verb of which 
it is the object, ne before the verb and 
rien after it; with a verb of which it is 
the subject, rien ne before the verb. 

Qu'avez-vous ? Rien. 

Je rfai rien ici. 

Rien n'est bon ici. 
Sous. Mais. 



MASCULINE. 

Quelque chose. 
Le banc. 
Un poisson. 
Un oignon. 
Le parasol. 
Le pendule. 



FEMININE. 

Une chose. 

Une morue. 
Une sardine. 
Vhorloge. 
La pendule. 



1. Rorloge is a large clock upon some large building to sound the hours for the public. 
La pendule is a clock for an ordinary room. 



The clock of that church is large. 
I have here a fine clock. 
That pendulum is long. 
A broom. A strawberry. 
That sofa. That cellar. 
I have the chest, but I have not the 
broom. 

A newspaper. A den, cavern. 
My chest. My room. 
Have you any thing, is any thing the 
matter with you ? 



L'horloge de cette cglise est grande. 

J'ai ici une belle pendule. 

Ce pendule est long. 

Un balai. Une f raise. 

Ce canape. Cette cave. 

J'ai le coffre, mais je n'ai pas le balai. 

Tin journal. Une caverne. 
Mon coffre. Ma chambre. 
Avez-vous quelque chose ? 



1 16 127 5 1214 13 7 5 4 17 3 20 21 15 23 15 1-21 1 

^ ka-tor-ziem^es*, n-en^sous, maw, kel-ke choze, banc, pois-son, mo-rue, oi-gnion, sar- 
dine, pa-ra-sol, 7ior-loge, pen-dule, ba-lai, fraize, ca-na-pe, cave, jcmr-nal, ca-verne, coffre, 

chambre. 



THE FOURTEENTH LESSON. 



87 



I have something, something is the J'ai quelque chose. 

matter with me. 
What is the matter with you ? Qu'avez-vous ? 

Nothing is the matter with me. Je n'ai rien. 

2. Quelque chose is not used with a negative except in a question. 
Have you not something ? N'avez-vous pas quelque chose ? 

Have you not any thing (or nothing) ? N'avez-vous rien ? 

3. Quelque chose, rien, and que interrogative, take de before a following adjective, 
Have you any thing good? Avez-vous quelque chose de bon ? 

I have nothing good. Je n'ai rien de bon. 

What have you pretty ? Qu'avez-vous de joli ? 

1. Sommes-nous les amis du marchand 1 2. Nous sommes ses 
amis. 3. Ne sommes-nous pas ses cousins? 4. Non, monsieur, 
nous ne sommes pas ses cousins. 5. Ou. est votre beau-frere? 6. II 
est dans sa chambre. 7. Mon parasol est-il sur le banc ? 8. Non, 
mademoiselle, elle est sur le planclier. 9. La morue est-elle dans 
la cave? 10. La morue est dans la cave, et les sardines sont ici 
sur le banc. 11. L'oignon est-il sur le banc ou sous le banc? 
12. II est sous le banc. 13. Od est le canape ? 14. II est dans 
votre chambre. 15. Le journal est-il sur le canape? 16. II est 
dans votre coffre. 17. N'as-tu pas les fraises? 18. J'ai les fraises 
et les cerises. 19. As-tu les poissons ici ? 20. La morue est ici 
et les sardines sont sur la table. 21. Cette horloge est grande, et 
cette pendule est jolie. 22. J'ai le parasol et le balai. 23. Le 
journal est sur la table, et l'oignon est sur le plancher. 24. La 
petite chevre est dans cette caverne. 25. Qu'avez-vous de gros? 
26. Je n'ai rien de gros. 

1. What has that man ? 2. He has his gun. 3. What is the 
matter with you ? 4. Nothing is the matter with me. 5. Are we 
not your relations? 6. You are our cousins. 7. Have you the 
fish ? 8. No, madame, the fish is here on the bench. 9. Is the 
codfish in the cellar? 10. The codfish is in the cellar, the sardines 
are on the table, and the onions are under the table. 11. Where 
is the newspaper? 12. It is on the sofa. 13. Has the servant 
any thing ? 14. He has the broom and the parasol. 15. Have 
you a chest in your room? 16. I have a chest in my room and a 
trunk also. 17. Have you the strawberries ? 18. No, sir, I have 
the cherries, but I have not the strawberries. 19. I have the onion 
and the sardine, and you have the parasol, the sofa, and the broom. 
20. Are we in your store? 21. No, sir, we are in the store of my 



83 



THE FIFTEENTH LESSON. 



father. 22. Are we not your friends ? 23. You are our friends 
and our relations. 24. Where is the clock % 25. It is in my room. 
26. Have you a good clock % 27. We have a good clock and a 
good watch ; the watch is of gold, but the clock is of wood. 28. 
Have you any thing handsome % 29. I have nothing handsome. 
30. What have you good ? We have nothing good. 



15. — QUINZIEME LEQON. 
etee, to be. second peeson singular and thied plueal. 



Art thou? Tliou art. 

Art thou not ? Thou art not. 

Are they ? They are. 

Are they not ? They are not. 



Es-tu? Tu es. 

N'es-tu pas ? Tu n'es pas. 
(Sont-ils? Us sont. 
\Sont-elles? Elles sont. 
( Ne sont-ils pas ? lis ne sont pas. 
\ Ne sont-elles pas ? 



A hammer. 
The ivory. 
This tree. 
My uncle. 
His nephew. 



A cup. 
A saucer. 
This cord, rope. 
My aunt. 
Her niece. 



Which one, what one, which. 
Which ones, what ones, which. 



The garden. 
The physician 
All (singular). 
All (plural). 
Much, many. 
Much ivory. 



The straw. 

The washerwoman. 



Little, few. 
Many hammers. 



Little straw. Few cups. 



MASCULINE. 

Tin marteau. 
LHvoire. 
Cet arbre. 
Mon oncle. 
Son neveu. 
Lequel. 
Lesquels. 
Le jardin. 
Le medecin. 
Tout. 
Tous. 
Beaucoup. 
Beaucoup cTivoire 
teaux. 

Peu de paille. Peu de tasses 



Elles ne sont pas. 

FEMININE. 

Une iasse. 
Une soucoupe. 
Cette corde. 
Ma tante. 
Sa niece. 
Laquelle. 
Lesquelles. 
La paille. 
La blanchisseuse. 
Toute. 
Toutes. 

Peu (adverb). 
Beaucoup de mar- 



1. Beaucoup, peu, and adverbs of quantity generally, take de before the following noun. 



Where is the washerwoman's cord? 
It is on the tree. 
Which one has she ? 
Which ones are under the tree ? 
I have the large cup ; which one have 
you? 



Ou est la corde de la blanchisseuse ? 
Elle est sur l'arbre. 
Laquelle a-t-elle ? 
Lesquelles sont sous Tarbre ? 
J'ai la grande tasse; laquelle avez- 
vous ? 



11 



2 20 18 18 1 10 21 1 

i-voire, sou-coupe, arbre, corde, oncle, tante, 



5 1 17 1 

kin-zicme, es, mar-teau, tasse 

]2 5 4 5 1 5 7 5 7 5 1 14 1 5 11 3 12 » 18 

ni-ece, le-kel, la-keUe, le.s-kels, les-keUes, jar-din, paille, rnede-cin, blan-ckis-seuze, tou* 

18 18 18 17 j8 10 

toute, tous, toutes, beau-cowp, peu. 



THE FIFTEENTH LESSON. 89 

Which ones has the physician ? Laquelle le medecin a-t-il? 

To, or at the house of. At my uncle's Chez (preposition). Chez mon oncle. 
house. 

At the man's house. At my aunt's. Chez 1'homme. Chez ma tante. 

2. "When house is understood after the possessive ease in English, dies must be nsed in 
French; as, 

At your nephew's. At your brother's. Chez votre neveu. Chez votre frere. 
Your nieces are at the neighbor's. Vos nieces sont chez la voisine. 
They are not at my father's. Elles ne sont pas chez mon pere. 

3. Sujet, subject, is often applied to persons, especially to boys, in reference to their 
morals; as, 

The neighbor's son is a bad boy. Le fils du voisin est un mauvais sujet. 

Edward's friend is a good boy. L'ami d'Edouard est un bon sujet. 

4. Bon gargon means usually good fellow. 
Henry is a good fellow, but his cousin Henri est un bon gargon, mais son 
is bad. cousin est un mauvais sujet. 

1. Les marteaux sont-ils dans votre chanibre? 2. Nbn, mon- 
sieur, ils sont ici sur la table. 3. Ou. sont les soucoupes ? 4. Elles 
sont dans le magasin du marcband. 5, Ou sont les cordes et les 
cordeaux? 6. Elles sont sous l'arbre. 7. Vos soeurs sont-elles 
chez votre oncle % 8. Elles sont chez ma tante. 9. Ou sont les 
medecins? 10. Ils sont chez votre pere. 11. Le neveu du voisin 
a tout l'ivoire, et sa niece a toute la soie, toutes les tasses et tous 
les papiers. 12. Ou est la blanchisseuse ? 13. La blancbisseuse 
est dans le jardin de mon oncle, et le medecin est chez ma tante. 
14. Ou est la corde de la blanchisseuse? 15. Elle est sur le grand 
arbre dans votre jardin. 16. Ce marchand a beaucoup de soucoupes 
et peu de tasses. 17. Ce paysan a beaucoup de paille ; sa corde est 
ici sur cette chaise. 18. Edouard estun bon garcon, mais son petit 
frere est un mauvais sujet. 19. N'es-tu pas mon parent? 20. Je 
suis ton cousin. 21. Tu es l'ami d'Henri. 

1. Where are the shopkeeper's cords'? 2. They are on the 
plank under the tree. 3. Where are his iron hammers ? 4. His 
iron hammers are on the floor, and his ivory knives are on the desk. 
5. Has he many cups? 6. No, sir, he has few cups and few sau- 
cers. 7. Where are the lines of the washerwoman ? 8. They are 
on the tree in the garden. 9. Where is the rope ? 10. It is under 
the tree in the garden. 11. Has the countryman the straw? 
12. He has all the straw and all the fruit. 13. Has the servant 
the knives? 14. He has all the knives and all the forks. 15. 
What has the physician's niece ? 16. She has the parasol. 17. Which 



90 



THE SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



one has she? 18. She has the little one. 19. Which ones has the 
nephew? 20. He has the silk parasols. 21. Are thy brothers at 
thy uncle's I 22. No, sir, they are at my aunt's. 23. The nephew 
of the shopkeeper has his cups ; which ones has he ? 24. He has 
the cups of porcelain. 25. Which one has his niece ? 26. She has 
the pretty one. 27. The washerwoman is at my aunt's ; she has 
her line and her soap. 28. Thou art the nephew of the general. 
29. What have you bad? 30. We have nothing bad. 31. Have 
you something good ? 32. I have the good coffee and the good fruit. 



16.— SEIZIEME LEQON. 

ALLEE, TO GO. FIEST AND SECOND PEESONS. 



Bo you go ? are you going? 


Allez-vous ? 




We go, we are going. 


Nous allons. 




Do you not go ? are you not going ? 


N'allez-vous pas 




We do not go, we are not going. 


Nous n'allons pas. 


Dost thou go ? art thou going ? 


Vas-tu ? 




I go. I am going. 


Je vais. 




Dost thou not go ? art thou not going ? 


Ne vas-tu pas ? 




I do not go, I am not going. 


Je ne vais pas. 




To, at. To or at my house. 


A. 


Chez moi. 


To our house. At your house. 


Chez notes. 


Chez vous. 


To his house. At her house. 


Chez lui. 


Chez elle. 


To or at their house. 


Chez eux. 


Chez elles. 




MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The child. The country. 


\t enfant. 


La campagne. 


That tailor. That river. 


Ce tailleur. 


Cette riviere. 


The pepper. The city. 


Le poivre. 


La ville. 


The roast beef. The kitchen. 


Le bceuf-roti. 


La cuisine. 


The roast meat. The mountain. 


Le roti. 


La montagne. 


To the (singular). 


Au. 


A la. 


To the (plural). 


Aux 


Aux. 



1. A le and d les are not to be used in French ; 
before a consonant, and the latter always into au%. 
vowel or a silent h. 

Are you going to the garden ? 
We are going to the stores. 
Art thou not going to the kitchen? 
I am going to the tree. 



but the former is contracted into au 
A le and d la become d V before a 



Allez-vous au jardin? 
Nous allons aux magasins. 
Ne vas-tu pas a la cuisine? 
Je vais a l'arbre. 



7 125 1 6 1 21 1 7 6 2212 10 3 3 1 1 1 11 12 12 7 

sei-zieme, a\l-ez, aZ-lons, va.s, vais, ches, lui, eucc, en-fan?, cam-pagne, taill-eur, ri-vi-ere, 



12 22 12 12 21 

poivre, ville, roti, cui-zine, mon-tagne, au, auce. 



THE SIXTEENTH LESSON. 



91 



2. A la maison is vorv often used for to or at the house of the person referred to. 
Is he at home ? Est-il a, la maison, or chez lui ? 

Art thou going home ? Vas-tu a la maison, or chez toi? 

Madame est-elle chez elle ? 



\ 



Madame est-elle a la maison ? 
Is the lady at home ? ^ Madame ^ % . § , 

Madame y est-elle? See les. 39. 
3. Monsieur, madame, and mademoiselle, sue often joined to terms of relationship and 
to titles, from politeness. 

Where is your father ? Ou est monsieur votre pere ? 

Is your mother here ? Madame votre mere est-elle ici ? 

Is your sister at home ? Mademoiselle votre soeur est-elle chez 

elle? 

"Where is the general ? Ou est monsieur le general ? 

1. Allez-vous au jardin du tailleur ? 2. Nbn, madame, nous 
allonsala riviere. 3. Ou vas-tu? 4. Je vais a la maison. 5. Ne 
vas-tu pas chez nous ? 6. Non, monsieur, je vais chez moi. 7. Al- 
lez-vous chez les tailleurs ? 8. Oui, maclame, nous allons chez eux. 
9. Le medecin est-il chez lui ? 10. Non, monsieur, il est chez moi. 
11. Vas-tu chez toi ? 12. Non, monsieur, je vais a, la campagne. 
13. Ou sont tes cousins ? 14. lis sont chez eux. 15. Es-tu l'ami 
des tailleurs ? 16. Je suis leur ami. 17. Vas-tu chez eux? 18. 
Je vais chez moi. 19. Allez-vous a la ville ? 20. Non, madame, 
je vais a la riviere et a la montagne. 21. L' enfant du voisin est-il 
chez vous ? 22. II n'est pas chez moi, il est chez son pere. 23. Cet 
enfant a le boeuf-rdti et les pommes de terre. 24. Qui a le roti ? 
25. L' enfant l'a. 26. Est-il a la cuisine? 27. II est chez vous. 
28. Tu n'es pas le parent de Charles ? 29. Si, je suis son frere. 

1. Where are you going ? 2. We are going to the city. 3. 
Are you not going to the mountain ? 4. We are going to the 
mountain and to the river. 5. Art thou going to the house of thy 
uncle ? 6. I am not going to his house, I am going to thy house. 
7. Is the little child at the house of his cousins ? 8. He is not at 
their house, he is at the kitchen. 9. Art thou going to the coun- 
try? 10. I am not going to the country, I am going to the city. 
11. Are you going to the tailor's ? 12. We are not going to his 
house, we are going to thy house. 13. Where are the nieces of the 
physician ? 14. They are at their house. 15. You are going to 
the city, we are going to the country. 16. Art thou going to the 

15 12 

lo-gis. 



92 



THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



river or to the mountain ? 17. I am going to my uncle's. 18. I 
have the roast beef and the pepper ; thou hast the roast meat and 
the bread. 19. I am going to the garden ; are you going to the 
stores ? 20. We are going to the stores ; art thou not going to the 
river? 21. No, sir, I am going to the tree in the garden. 22. 
Hast thou the pepper or the roast beef? 23. I have the pepper 
and the roast meat. 24. Have you anything small ? 25. I have 
nothing small. 26. What have you large ? I have the large 
horse. 



17.— DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON. 

ALLEE, TO GO. THIED PERSON, 



Does he go? is he going ? 

He goes, he is going. 

Does she not go ? is she not going ? 

She does not go, she is not going. 

Do they go ? are they going ? 

They go, they are going. 

Do they not go ? are they not going 

They do not go, they are not going. 



The president. 
The doctor. 
The market. 
The mill. 



The door. 
The window. 
The stable. 
The half. 



Va-t-il? 
II va. 

Ne va-t-elle pas ? 
Elle ne va pas. 
Vont-ils ? 
lis vont. 

Ne vont-elles pas ? 
Ellcs ne vont pas. 

MASCULINE. 

Le president. 
Le docteur. 
Le marche. 
Le moulin. 



FEMININE. 

La porte. 

La fenetre, croisec. 
lSecurie. 
La moitie. 



1. Mon, ton, votre, etc., are adjectives, 
nouns, and used without nouns. Le notre, 
always have a circumflex accent. 



and belong to nouns. The following are pro- 
le voire, and their feminines and plurals, must 



Mine (singular). 


Le mien, 


la raiennc. 


Mine (plural). 


Les miens, 


les miennes. 


Thine (singular). 


Le tien, 


la ticnne. 


Thine (plural). 


Les tiens, 


les tiennes. 


His, hers, its (singular). 


Le sien, 


la sienne. 


His, hers, its (plural). 


Les siens, 


les siennes. 


Ours (singular). 


Le notre, 


la notre. 


Ours (plural). 


Les notres, 


les notres. 


Yours (singular). 


Le vdtre, 


la votre. 


Yours (plural). 


Les votres, 


les votres. 


Tlieirs (singular). 


Le leur, 


la leur. 


Theirs (plural). 


Les leurs, 


les leurs. 



)2 5 125 21 5 12 3 1C 15 11 8 20 6 1 6 5 22 13 

dis-se_p-tieme, xont, pre-zi-denf, port'?, doc-teur, fenetre croi-zee, mar-che, c-cu-rie, 

18 14 £0 1J5 12 14 12 6 12 14 12 5 12 14 12 5 17 17 11 

mou-lin, inoi-tie, mi-en, mi-cnnc, ti-en, ti-enne, si-en, si-enne, notre, votre, leur. 



THE SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 



93 



2. The above pronouns cannot be used -without the article. Like all pronouns, they 
agree with their nouns in gender and number. 

What hats have you ? Quels chapeaux avez-vous ? 

We have ours. I have mine, thou Nous avons les notres. J'ai le mien, 
hast thine, he has his, you have tu as ]e tien, il a le sien, vous avez 

yours, and they have theirs. les votres, et ils ont les leurs. 

1. Ou va le docteur? 2.. II va chez le president. 3. L' enfant 
ne va-t-il pas a la porte? 4. II va a l'ecurie. 5. Ou vont ces 
hommes I 6. Ils vont au moulin. 7. Ne vont-ils pas aux magasins ? 
8. Ils vont aux magasins et aux inoulins aussi. 9. Cet enfant va- 
t-il a la porte ou a la fenetre (croisee) ? 10. II va a la croisee 
(fenetre). 11. Le garcon va-t-il au marche? 12. II va a l'ecurie, 
et le domestique va au marche. 13. Quel poivre as-tu ? 14. J'ai 
le mien. 15. Qu'a cet enfant ? 16. II a la moitie d'une pomme 
et la moitie d'une poire. 17. Ai-je le fruit du docteur ? 18. Non, 
Charles, tu as le tien et il a le sien. 19. Quelles pommes avons- 
nous ? 20. J'ai la mienne, tu a la tienne, et le docteur a la sienne, 
vous avez les votres, et ces messieurs ont les leurs. 21. N'ai-je pas 
tes livres ? 22. Non, monsieur, j'ai les miens, tu as les tiens, et 
mon frere a les siens. 23. Avons-nous nos papiers ? 24. Vous 
avez les votres, nous avons les notres, et le docteur a les siens. 

1. Are the physicians going to the president's? 2. They are 
not going to the president's, they are going to the doctor's. 3. 
Where is that child going ? 4. He is going to the door. 5. Is he 
not going to the window % 6. No, sir, he is going to the door and 
to the stable. 7. Art thou the son of the president? 8. No, 
madam, I am his nephew. 9. Are you going to the market or 
to the mill? 10. I am going to the market, and the servant is 
going to the mill. 11. Is the lady at home? 12. Yes, sir, she is 
at home. 13. Where is that little child going ? 14. He is going 
to the stable. 15. Where is his stick ? 16. It is on the window. 
17. What has he? 18. He has the half of a pear and the half of 
a potato. 19. Has the cook our meat? 20. He has not ours, he 
has his. 21. What cloth have the little boys? 22. They have 
theirs. 23. Have they their buttons ? 24. No, sir, they have not 
theirs. 25. Is not the doctor going to our house? 26. No, 
madam, he is not going to your house ; he is going home. 27. 
That child has an inkstand ; which one has he ? 28. He has thine ; 
he has not mine. 



94 



THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



18.— DIX-HUITlilME LECOX. 

YOUEOIE, TO WILL. FIRST AXD SECOND PEESOXS. 



To mil. To be witling. 



Void oh 



Vouloir bien. 



1. The verb rouloir has various significations in English, and its right use forms one of 
the difficulties of the French language. In general it means to icill, and, modified by bien, 
to be willing. Followed by a noun or pronoun as object, it may be rendered to icish for; 
and in this sense it will now be used. Its other meanings will be given in their places 
hereafter. 



Do you icishfor? will you have? 
We icishfor, ice icill have. 
Do you not wish for ? will you not 
have? 

We do not wish for, we will not have. 

Dost thou icishfor? wilt thou have? 
I icish for, I icill have. 
Dost thou not wish for ? wilt thou not 
have? 

I do not wish for, I will not have. 
Do you wish for the milk ? 
Yes, sir, if you please. 
Xo, sir, I thank you. 



The blacksmith. 
The grocer. 



A history. 
America. 



Voulcz-vous ? or, Desirez-vous ? 

Xov.s'voulons, or, Xous dtsirons. 

Xe voulez-vous pas? or, Xe desirez- 
vous pas ? 

Xous ne voulons pas, or, Xous ne de- 
sirons pas. 

Veux-tu ? or, Desires-tu ? 

Je veux, or, Je desire. 

Xe veux-tu pas? or, Xe desires-tu 
pas ? 

Je ne veux pas, or, Je ne desire pas. 
Voulez-vous le lait ? 
Oui, monsieur, sil vous plait.* 
Xon, monsieur, Je vous remercie. 

MASCrLXN'E. FEirrSThTU 

Le forgeron. Une histoire. 
Vepicicr. ~U Amerique. 



2. The names of countries generally take the article in French. 
A nail. England. Vn clou. VAngleterre. 

The copper. France. Le cuivre. La France. 

The one of, that of. Celui de. Celle de. 

Hie ones of, those of. Ceux de. Celles de. 

The one of iron, that of iron, the iron Celui de fer. Celle de fer. 

one. 

The ones of iron, those of iron, the Ceux de fer. Celles de fer. 

iron ones. 

8. Celui and ceux are pronouns, and of course agree with their antecedents in gender 
and number. 

What nail dost thou wish for? Quel clou veux-tu? 

I wish for the one of copper. Je veux celui de cuivre. 

Do vou not wish for the silver ones ? Xe voulez-vous pas ceux d'argent ? 



* S"il vous plait means literally, if it you pleases ; i. e. if it pleases you. 

12 2212 12 5 IS 20 12 14 IS 6 5 12 6 IS 21 5 12 21 9 5 12 

diz-hui-tK-me, vou-loir, bi-en, vou-lez, de-zi-rez, vou-lon*, de-zi-rons, veux, de-zir<?, 

7 4 7 13 16 4 21 12 VO 5 12 12 5 1 5 12 3 4 7 22 12 3 

platf, re-mer-cie, for-ge-ron, Ais-toire, e-pi-cier, A-me-rike, An-gle-terre, cuivre, France, 

4 2212 5 10. 

ce-lui. celle. ceux. 



THE EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 



95 



We do not wish for them. Nous ne les voulons pas. 

What cups do you wish for ? Quelles tasses voulez-vous ? 

I wish for the glass ones. Je veux celles de verre. 

You wish for those of porcelain. Vous voulez celles de porcelaine. 

4. The pronoun belonging to the possessive case is often omitted in English. "We can 
say either, The man's, or that of the man ; My father's, or those of my father. In such 
cases, celvA de, celle de, etc., must not be omitted in French. 

The blacksmith's, or, that of the black- Celui du forgeron, or, celle du forge- 
smith, ron. 
The grocer's, or, those of the grocer. Ceux de Fepicier, or, celles de l'epi- 

cier. 

1. Voulez-vous le beurre de l'epicier? 2. Oui, monsieur, s'il 
vous plait. 3. Veux-tu son cafe? 4. Non, monsieur, je vous 
remercie. 5. Quelle histoire voulez-vous? 6. Nous voulons l'his- 
toire de France. 7. Ne voulez-vous pas celle d' Angleterre ? 8- 
Non, madame, nous voulons celles d'Amerique et de France. 9. 
Veux-tu le cafe ? 10. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. 11. Veux-tu 
le the aussi ? 12. Non, monsieur, je vous remercie. 13. Desirez- 
vous le marteau du forgeron f 14. Je ne desire pas celui du forge- 
ron, je desire le mien. 15. Quels clous voulez-vous? 16. Nous 
voulons les clous de cuivre. 17. J'ai l'histoire d' Angleterre et 
celle d'Amerique ; laquelle voulez-vous ? 18. Je veux celle 
d'Amerique et celle d' Angleterre aussi. 19. Voulez-vous tous ces 
livres?" 20. Je ne les veux pas tous. 21. Lequels voulez-vous? 
22. Je veux Phistoire d' Angleterre et celle d'Amerique. 23. Voulez- 
vous les clous de l'epicier ? 24. Non, monsieur, je vous remercie. 
25. Veux-tu tous ces livres ? 26. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. 

1. What do you wish for? 2. I desire a good history. 3. We 
wish for the history of America ; which one dost thou wish for ? 4. 
We wish for that of England and that of France. 5. Dost thou 
wish for mine ? 6. I do not wish for thine, I wish for that of my 
brother. 7. Do you wish for the nails ? 8. Yes, sir, if you please. 
9. Do you wish for the nails of copper, or those of iron ? 10. I 
wish for those of copper. 11. Dost thou wish for the nails of the 
blacksmith? 12. No, sir, I thank you. 13. Which ones dost thou 
wish for? 14. I wish for the iron nails and those of copper. 15. 
What sugar do you wish for? 16. We wish for that of the grocer. 
17. Have you all the hammers ? 18. No, sir, I have them not all. 
19. Which have you ? 20. I have the iron hammers and those of 
copper. 21. Where are you going? 22. I am going to the city, 



90 



THE NINETEENTH LESSON. 



and the cook is going to the market. 23. Where is your cousin ? 
24. He is at the store. 25. Has the servant your candlestick? 
26. He has not mine, he has the doctor's. 27. Have you my pen? 
28. I have not yours, I have the grocer's. 20. Have you not my 
papers? 30. No, sir, I have those of the master. 31. Have you 
not my candles ? 32. I have not yours, I have my brother's (or 
those of my brother). 



19.— DIX-NEUVLEME LEgON. 

VOULOIE, TO WISH FOE (will have). THIRD PERSON SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 

Veut-il ? or, Desire-t-il ? 
II veut, or, II desire. 
Ne vcut-elle pas? or, Ne desire-t-elle 

pas? 

Elle ne veut pas, or, Elle ne desire pas. 
Veulent-ils? or, Desirent-ils ? 
lis veulent, or, lis desirent. 
Ne veulent-elles pas ? or, Ne desirent- 

elles pas ? 
Elles ne veulent pas, or, Elles ne desi- 
rent pas. 



Does he wish for? will he have? 

He wishes for, he will have. 

Does she not wish ? will she not have ? 

She does not wish, she will not have. 
Do they wish for? will they have? 
They wish for, they will have. 
Do they not wish for ? will they not 
have ? 

They do not wish for, they will not 
have. 



The baker. 
The fisherman. 
A carpenter. 
A dollar. 
The same. 
The other. 
Sick. 

The sick man. 

The soldier. 

A sailor. 

Which. 
The stone which is here. 
The stone which we have. 
The bricks which are there. 
The bricks which you wish for, 



A piece. 
A bark. 
A dollar. 



The sick woman. 
The stone. 
A brick. 



MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


Le boidanger. 


Une piece. 


Le pecheur. 


"One barque. 


Un charpentier. 


Une piastre. 


Un dollar. 


Une gourde. 


Le meme. 


La menu. 


Uautre. 


Uautre. 


Malade. 


Malade. 


Le malade. 


La malade. 


Le soldat. 


La pierre. 


Un matelot. 


Une brique. 


Qui (subject). 


Que (object). 



La pierre qui est ici. 
La pierre que nous avons. 
Les briques qui sont la. 
Les briques que vous voulez. 



1. "We here see that qui is the subject and que the object of the following verb. 
The baker wishes for the piece of cloth Le boulanger veut la piece de drap qui 
which is on the table. est sur la table. 



12 9 12 5 9 5 12 9 5 12 )8 3 5 12 5 5 11 1 1 

diz-neu-vieme, rent, de-zire, \evi\ent, de-zirent, bou-lan-ger, pi-ece, ne-cbeur, barke, char- 

S 125 121 15 1 18 8 17 1 1 15 J 12 7 1 17 12 12 4 

pen-tier, pi-astre, dollar, gounk, meme, autre, ma-lade, sol-da^, pierre, mate-lotf.brike, ki, ke. 



THE NINETEENTH LESSON. 



97 



We wish for the cloth which you have. Nous voulons le drap que vous avez. 

I desire the hammer which is of iron. Je desire le marteau qui est de fer. 

The hammer which the carpenter has. Le marteau que le charpentier a. 

He desires to be tall. II desire etre grand. 

We desire to be your friends. Nous desirons etre vos amis. 

The fishermen wish for the haxk which Les pecheurs veulent la barque qui est 
is on the river. sur la riviere. 

You desire to be their friend, and they Yous desirez etre leur ami, et ils de- 
desire to be yours. sirent etre les votres. 

Do you wish for the half of this apple ? Youlez-vous la moitie de cette pomme ? 

No, I thank you. Je vous remercie. 

2. Je vous remercie in such replies always signifies declining. 

1. Que vent ce matelot ? 2. II vent la petite barque. 3. La- 
quelle veut-il ? 4. II veut celle du pecheur. 5. Que veulent les 
soldats ? 6. Ils veulent le bon pain. 7. Celui de qui veulent-ils ? 
8. Us veulent celui du boulanger. 9. Que desires-tu ? 10. Je de- 
sire une chandelle et un chandelier. 11. Que veut le boulanger? 

12. II veut ces pieces de drap. 13. Lesqueiles veut-il ? 14. II veut 
celles que les charpen tiers ont et celles qui sont ici sur la table. 
15. Que veulent ces matelots ? 16. Ils veulent les barques des 
pecheurs. 17. Ces enfants veulent-ils les dollars d'or ou ceux d' ar- 
gent? 18. Ils veulent les dollars d'or et ceux d'argent aussi. 19. 
Ce petit enfant veut ce livre ; son frere veut-il le rneme ? 20. II 
ne veut pas le meme, il veut le sien. 21. Le soldat est-il ma- 
lade ? 22. II n'est pas malade. 23. Que veut le malade ? 24. II 
veut le pain du boulanger, et les soldats veulent le meme. 25. 
Le matelot et les charpentiers veulent-ils le meme pain ou l'autre ? 
Ils veulent l'autre. 26. La maison du pecheur est-elle de brique 
ou de pierre ? 27. Elle est de bois. 

1. Do you wish for the half of this fish? 2. Yes, sir, if you 
please. 3. Do you wish for the milk ? 4. No, sir, I thank you. 
5. What has that child ? 6. He has the silver dollars. 7. Has he 
all the dollars ? 8. He has them all. 9. What does the baker 
wish for ? 10. He wishes for the wood and the flour. 11. What 
has the servant ? 12. He has a piece of cloth and a piece of linen. 

13. What does the sailor wish for ? 14. He wishes for the bark of 
the fisherman. 15. Where is his bark ? 16. It is on the river. 
17. Is the carpenter's house of stone or of brick? 18. It is of 
brick. 19. I wish for this coffee; does the sick man wish for the 
same or for the other? 20. He wishes for the other. 21. The 

5 



98 



THE TWENTIETH LESSON. 



soldier desires the bread of the sick man ; we desire the wine which 
is on the table. 22. What has the little child ? 23. He has the 
dollars. 24. Which (ones) has he ? 25. He has the gold dollars 
and the silver ones. 2G. What has the soldier ? 27. He has all 
the meat and all the butter. 28. Do you desire to be rich ? 29. 
My brother desires to be rich, and I desire to be good. 30. The 
neighbors desire to be our friends, and we desire to be theirs. 



20. — yixgti£me lecox. 

PRESENT FAETICTPLE. 

1. The present participle, in French, is formed by changing oxs, of the first person 
plural, indicative present, into axt ; * as, 



IXTIXTTIVE. 

To go. 
To will. 
To desire. 



PARTICIPLE. 

Going. 

Milling. 

Desiring. 



IXTLXTTIVE. 1ST PERS. PLr. PARTICIPLE. 

Aller, aMons, Allant. 

Vouloir, voulons, Youlant. 

Disirer, desirous, Dtsirant. 



2. The present participles of avoir and etre arc exceptions to the above rule.t 
To have. Having. Avoir. Ayant. 

To be. Being. Etre. Etant. 

The present iXLJCATrvE of the following five verbs has now been given. 



TO HATE, HATING. 
Jai, tu as, il a, 

I have, thou hast, he has, 

To EE, EEING. 

Je suis, tit es, il est, 

I am, thou art, he is, 

To GO, GOING. 
Jevais, tu vas, ilra, 
I go, thou goest, he goes, 

To WILL, WILLING. 

Je reux, tu teux, il reut, 
I will, thou wiliest, he wills, 

TO DESIRE, DESIRING. 
Je desire, tu desires, il desire, 
I desire, thou desirest, he desires, 



Atoir, atant. 
nousavons, rous arez, ilsont, 
we have, you have, they have. 

Etre, etant. 
nous sommes. vous etes, its sont, 

we are, you are, they are, 

ALLER, ALLANT. 

nous allons, rous allez. Us tout, 

we go, you go, they go. 

Vot*LOIR, TOULANT. 
nous voulons, rous routes, its reul-ent, 
we will, you will, they will. 

Desirer, desirant. 
7ious desirons, rous desires, Us dtsirent, 
we desire, you desire, they desire. 



* Most Erench grammarians form the first person plural from the participle, and this is 
well for the French : but as it is a matter of mere convenience, and as the English learner 
becomes acquainted with the present indicative first, I have thought it best'to give the 
above rule. , 

t There are three other exceptions in all.— Echoir. to fall to. makes echeant. falling to; 
Savoir, to know, makes sachant. knowing; and Seoir, to sit, makes stunt, sitting. 



14 1?5 I 6 1 S 18 8 S 1-3 6 5 12 S 1 20 5 ICS 8 5 S 

vinj7-tiem?. al-ler, aManr", vou-lanf, de-zi-rer, de-zi-ranf, a-voir, a-yan/. etr<>. e-tanf. 



THE TWENTIETH LESSON. 



99 



3. "We have seen (Lesson 19) that qui is the subject and que the object of the following 
verb. It is the same when qui and que are joined to the demonstrative pronouns celui> 
ce, etc. 



Cehd qui. Celle qui. 

Celui que. Celle que. 

Ceux qui. Celles qui. 

Ceux que. Celles que. 

J'ai celui qui est ici. 
J'ai celui que yous desirez. 
Nous avons celles qui sont la. 
Nous avons celles que vous voulez. 



The one which, that which (subject). 
The one which, that which (object). 
Hie ones which, those ivhich (subject). 
The ones which, those which (object). 
I have the one which is here. 
I have the one which you desire. 
We have those which are there. 
We have those which you wish for. 

4. Wliat, equivalent to that which, or tlie tMng which, is ce qui or ce que. 
I desire what {that ivhich) is just. Je desire ce qui est juste. 

We desire what (that ivhich) you have. Nous desirous ce que vous avez. 

5. Some adjectives are generally placed before the noun, and some are generally placed 
after it; others again arc sometimes placed before and sometimes after it. The adjectives 
thus far introduced are placed before the noun. The learner may understand generally, until 
farther rules be given, that all other adiectives are placed after their nouns. 

FEMININE. 

Fraiche. 
Blanche. 
Noire. 
Bleue. 
Verte. 
Jaune. 
Rouge. 
Douce. 
Aigre. 

The white glove. The black stocking. Le gant blanc. Le bas noir. 
The umbrella. A needle. Le parapluie. TJne aiguille. 

6. Ma, ta, sa, become mon, ton, son, before a vowel or a silent h. 
My pen, thy table, his spoon. Ma plume, ta table, sa cuiller. 

My plate, thy needle, his ink. Hon assiette, ton aiguille, son encre. 

7. A verb following another verb, and expressing its object, is put in the infinitive. 
He desires to have a horse. II desire avoir un cheval. 

They desire to be rich. lis desirent etre riches. 

I will go home. Je veux aller chez moi, or a la maison. 

1. Desires-tu etre riche ? 2. Non, monsieur, je desire etre juste 
et bon, mais je ne desire pas etre riche. 3. Ce monsieur desire 
avoir beaucoup d'argent, et ses fils desirent avoir beaucoup d'amis. 
4. Desirez-vous aller chez vous ? 5. Non, monsieur, nous desirons 
aller a la campagne. 6. Quel parapluie voulez-vous ? 7. Je veux 

.22 7 7 3 3 20 20 9 9 7 7 17 18 

juste, frai*, frai-che, blanc, blan-che, noir, noire, bleu, bleue, yert, verte, jaune, rouge, 

IS 18 7 1 1 9813 7 22 32 

doua?, douce, aigre, pa-ra-pluie, ai-gu-ille. 





MASCULINE. 


Fresh, cool. 


Frais. 


White. 


Blanc. 


Black. 


Noir. 


Blue. 


Bleu. 


Green. 


Vert. 


Yellow. 


Jaune. 


Red. 


Rouge. 


Sweet, gentle. 


Douz. 


Sour. 


Aigre. 



100 



THE TWENTY-FIRST LESSOX. 



celui qui est sur le banc. 8. Mon frere desire celui que vous avez. 
9. Voulez-vous les parapluies qui sont dans le magasin 1 10. Je 
desire les parapluies qui sont sur votre table, et mon pere desire 
ceux du marchand. 11. Quelles plumes voulez-vous ? 12. Je veux 
les plumes qui sont sur le pupitre, et celle que le marchand a cliez 
lui. 13. Quelles aiguilles veulent les tailleurs? 14. lis veulent 
les aiguilles qui sont ici et celles que le marchand a dans son ma- 
gasin. 15. Desires-tu ce que j'ai? 16. ISTon, monsieur, je desire 
ce que nous avons ici. 17. Le domestique a-t-il l'eau fraiche ? 
18. II a l'eau fraiche et le vin frais. 19. Avez-vous le chapeau 
blanc ou le noir ? 20. J'ai le blanc et le noir aussi. 21. J'ai le 
papier bleu, le vert et le jaune, et cet enfant a 1'encre rouge, le vin 
doux et le lait frais. 

1. My cousin desires to be rich, but we desire to be just and 
good. 2. What book do you wish for % 3.1 wish for that which 
is on my desk, and the one w T hich that child desires, and my broth- 
ers wish for those which are at the store, and those which we have. 
4. I wish for the needle which the tailor has in his chest, and for 
those w r hich are on this table. 5. What apples do those children 
desire ? 6. They wish for the ones which are here, and those which 
the countryman has on his table. 7. Do you wish for what is i'i? 1 " 
that chair? 8. Yes, sir, I wish for what is on that chair, and for 
that which the soldiers have here. 9. Have you the black um- 
brella or the blue? 10. I have the blue one. 11. Has your friend 
the green paper or the yellow ! 12. He has the green and the 
yellow also. 13. Do the scholars wish for the red ink or the black ? 
14. They wish for the red. 15. Is that wine sweet or sour ? 16. 
That wine is sweet, but the milk is sour. 17. This needle is small ; 
do you wish for it? 18. Yes, madam, I wish for the small needle 
and the blue umbrella. 19. The little child has my pen and my 
slate ; he has also thy paper and thy ink. 



21. — VINGT ET UNlEME LEQON 

CHEECHEE, TO SEEK OE LOOK FOB. 

To seek, or look for. Seeking, looking for. Chercher. Chercnant. 

Je cherche, fob c?ierc7ies, il c7ierc7ie, nous clierchons, tons cherchez, Us c7ierc7ient, 
I seek, thou seekest, he seeks, we seek, you seek, they seek. 



14 5 22 12 5 7 6 7 3 7 7 

xingt et unicrn?, cher-cher, cher-chan£, cher-ch^, cher-ches. 



THE TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



101 



1. The learner has seen, that, a verb agrees with its subject in number and person; i. e. 
the first person singular is always used with je, the second with tit, and the third with all 
other subjects singular ; the first person plural is always used with nous, the second with 
voits, and the third with all other subjects plural. 

2. Let the learner bear in mind also that the English have three forms of the present, 
as I seek, do seek, am seeking ; thou seekest, dost seek, art seeking ; he seeks, does seek, 
is seeking ; and that these three are rendered by one form in French, as above. 

I seek "what thou art seeking. Je cherche ce que tu cherches. 

He is seeking what we seek. II cherche ce que nous cherchons. 

You seek what they are seeking. Vous cherchez ce qu'ils cherchent. 

3. The syllable ci is annexed by a hyphen to a noun with a demonstrative adjective, or 
to a demonstrative pronoun, to denote an object near, and Id to denote one more remote; 
also when objects are contrasted. 



This apron. 
These aprons. 
Thy dictionary. 
That dictionary 



This needle. 
These needles. 
Thy grammar. 
That grammar. 



Those dictionaries. Those grammars 



FEMININE. 

Cette aiguille-ci. 
Ces aiguiUes-ci. 
Ta grammaire. 
Cette grammaire- 

Ces grammaires-la. 



MASCULINE. 

Ce tablier-ci. 
Ces tabliers-ci. 
Ton diciionnaire. 
Ce dictionnaire- 
IL 

Ces dictionnaires- 

la. 
Cclui-ci. 
Ceup-ci. 
Celui-ld. 
Ceuz-ld. 

Ne (bef. verb), ni (after it). 
Je n'ai ni la brique ni la pierre 
II n'a ni le gant ni le bas. 



Celle-ci. 
Celles-ci. 
Celle-la. 
Celles-la. 



This, this one, the latter. 

These, these here, the latter. 

That, that one, the former. 

TJwse, those there, (he former. 

Neither. Nor. JVe (bef. verb), ni (after it). Ni. 

I have neither the brick nor the stone. 

He has neither the glove nor the stock- 
ing. 

4. When ne is used with ni, rien, or any negative word, pas is omitted. 
I am looking for nothing. Je ne cherche rien. 

He is looking for neither this one nor II ne cherche ni celui-ci ni celui-lti. 
that one. 

5. Ce, cette, ces, arc adjectives, and always belong to nouns ; celui, cclle, ceux, celles, are 
pronouns, and stand without nouns. 

Does he wish for these needles or those ? Yeut-il ces aiguilles-ci ou celles-la ? 
He wishes for neither these nor those. II ne veut ni celles-ci ni celles-la. 
He has these umbrellas and those. II a ces parapluies-ci et ceux-la. 

6. When two or more nouns singular are the subject of the verb, unless they are con- 
nected by ou, the verb must be plural, and the adjectives agreeing with them must be plural 



The soldier and the sailor are here. 
The apple and the peach are good. 
The doctor or his brother is sick. 



Le soldat et le matelot sont ici. 

La pomme et la peche sont bonnes. 

Le docteur ou son frere est malade. 

7. Quelque chose, rien, and que interrogative, as we have seen, require de before the 
following adjective and adverb. 



7 21 7 6 7 12 1215 7 1 7 

cher-chons, cher-ches, cher-chent, dic-tio?i-naire, gram-maire. 



102 



THE TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



What have you white ? 
I have nothing white. 
We have something sweet. 



(ht'avcz-vousefc blanc ? 

Je n'ai rien de blanc. 

Nous avons quclque chose de doux. 



1. Qu'avez-vous de frais ? 2. Je n'ai rien de frais. 3. Avez- 
vous quelque chose de noir? 4. J'ai 1'encre noire. 5. Que cher- 
ches-tu de vert? G. Je clierche le drap vert, 7. Les tailleurs 
cherchent-ils quelque chose de jaune ? 8. lis cherchent le drap 
jaune et 1'encre rouge. 9. Cherchez-vous quelque chose ? 10. Nous 
ne cherchons rien. 11. Quel dictionnaire cherchez-vous? 12. Je 
cherche celui que vous avez. 13. Cherchez-vous celui-ci ou celui- 
la? 14. Nous ne cherchons ni celui-ci ni celui-la, nous cherchons 
celui qui est ici. 15. Voulez-vous cette grammaire-ci ou celle-la ? 
16. Je ne veux ni celle-ci ni celle-la. 17. Votre pere veut-il ces 
chevaux? 18. II ne veut pas ces chevaux-la, il veut ceux-ci. 19. 
Ces enfants veulent-ils ces pommes-ci ou celles-la ? 20. lis ne veu- 
lent ni celles-ci ni celles-la, ils veulent celles du domestique. 21. 
Desirez-vous ce que j'ai? 22. Non, maclame, je desire ce qui est 
ici. 23. Je desire le bon pain et le vin frais. 

1. What art thou looking for? 2. I am looking for my gram- 
mar and my dictionary. 3. Do you wish for this dictionary or for 
that? 4. I wish for neither this nor that, I wish for mine. 5. Are 
you looking for your grammar? 6. I am looking for it. 7. Are 
you looking for this one or for that one? 8. I am looking for nei- 
ther this one nor that one. 9. Have you any thing sweet ? 10. I 
have something sweet. 11. What have you sweet ? 12. I have 
the sweet wine. 13. Have you the red ink or the black ? 14. I 
have neither the red nor the black. 15. Do you wish for your book 
or that of your brother ? 1G. I wish for neither mine nor that of my 
brother. 17. What have you blue ? 18. I have the blue umbrella 
and the blue handkerchief. 19. Have you any thing green ? 20. 
I have nothing green. 21. Do you wish for these peaches or those? 
22. I wish for neither these nor those, I wish for the ones of the 
countrywoman. 23. Have you the cloth shoes or those of leather? 
24. I have the cloth ones and the leather ones also. 25. What 
inkstand are you looking for ? 26. I look for the ivory one. 



[K B. — The exercises headed Optional, throughout the book, may be omitted -whenever 
circumstances require it.] 



1. Have you your book ? 2. No, sir, I have it not ; do you wish 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 



THE TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



103 



for it? 3. I wish, for yours or your brother's. 4. My brother's 
book is on the table. 5. Where is yours ? 6. I have it not here ; 
it is at home. 7. Do you wish for this one ? 8. If you please. 
9. Is your mother at home ? 10. No, sir, she is at my cousin's. 
11. Where is your father % 12. He is in his room ; do you wish to 
see him'? 13. If you please. 14. I am going to look for him. 
15. Father, Mr. A. asks for (demands) you. 16. Is he here % 17. 
Yes, sir, he is in the garden. 



22.— VINGT-DEUXIilME LEQON. 

PERSONAL PKONOUNS. DIEECT OBJECT. 

To love, loving. Aimer, aimant. 

(Palme, tu aimes, il aime, nous aimons, vous aimez, ils aiment, 

I love, thou lovest, he loves, we love, you love, they love. 

Me. Thee. Me. Te. 

Us. You. Nous. Vous. 

1. These four pronouns, like le, la, les, are placed immediately before a transitive verb. 
We love thee and thou lovest us. Nous t'airnons ct tu nous aimes. 
They love me and I love them. Ils m'aiment et je les aime. 

You love him and he loves you. Vous l'aimez et il vous aime. 

2. Me, te, become m\ t\ before a vowel or a silent h. 

Whom? Who. Qui? que. Qui. 

3. Whom interrogative is always qui. With this exception, qui is the subject and que 
the object of the following verb ; the same of persons as we have seen of things (Lessons 19 
and 20). 

Whom do you love ? Qui aimez-vous? 

I love the friend whom you love. J'aime 1'ami que vous aimez. 

He loves the brother who loves him. II aime le frere qui 1'aime. 

We love him (the one) who loves us. Nous aimons celui qui nous aime. 

They love her (the one) whom thou Ils aiment celle que tu aimes. 
lovest. 

I seek those (the ones) who seek me. Je cherche ceux qui me cherchent. 

We seek those (the ones) whom you Nous cherchous celles que vous cher- 
seek. chez. 

4. Pronouns which are the object of the verb in the manner of the above .(me, te, vous, 
etc.), that is, without a preposition expressed or understood before them, are called dieect 

OBJECTS, Or DIRECT OBJECTIVE PEONOEXS. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

A rat. A mouse. Un rat. Une souris. 

A cat. A bat. Un chat. Une chauve-souris. 

A clerh. A. pound. Un commis. Une livre. 

14 10 IS? r f6 f 3 1 7 7 21 7 6 7 1 18 12 1 

vingt-deu-zieine, ai-mer, ai-raantf, aime, aimes, ai-mons, ai-mes. aiment. rot. sou-ris, cha£, 

17 IS 12 15 12 12 

chauve-sou-ris, corn-mis, livre 



104 



THE TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



Superb. 



But 



But not. 



It fat 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Superbc. Supcrbe. 

r Mais pas, mats non. 
) Mais non pas. 
I Mais point. 
v Mais non point.* 
5. "When de comes before a possessive pronoun (la mien, le tien, etc.), de le and de les 
arc of course contracted to du, des (according to Lesson G, 3). 

SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Die mien, do la mienne, des miens, des miennes. 

Du tien, de la tienne, des tiens, des tiennes. 

Du sien, de la sienne, • des siens, des siennes. 

Du notre, de la notre, des notres, des notres. 

Du votre, de la voire, des votres, des votres. 

Du leur, de la leur, des leurs, des leurs. 



PLUEAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. 



Of mine, from mine 
Of thine, from thine. 
Of his, hers, its, etc. 
Of ours, from ours. 
Of yours, from yours. 
Of theirs, from theirs. 



Art thou the clerk of his father or of Es-tu le commis de son pere ou du 



mine ? 
I am the clerk of thine. 
I have the pen, but not the paper. 
Has he the money of your friends and 

of ours ? 

He has that of yours, but not of ours. 



mien ? 

Je suis le commis du tien. 
J'ai la plume, mais pas le papier. 
A-t-il Fargent de vos amis et des notres ? 

II a celui des votres, mais non pas des 
notres. 

1. Tes amis t'aiment-ils % 2. lis m'aiment, et je les aime. 
3. Le general vous ahne-t-il? 4. II nous aime. 5. Qui aiinez- 
vous % 6. Nous aimons tous nos amis. 7. Qui aime le commis ? 
8. II aime celui qui 1'aime. 9. Cherchez-vous la clarne que nous 
cherchons ? 10. Nous ne cherchons pas celle que vous cherchez, 
nous cherchons celle qui est chez ma tante. 11. Cherchez-vous les 
hommes que je cherche? 12. Non, monsieur, je cherche ceux qui 
me cherchent. 13. Qui ces dames aiment-elles ? 14. Elles aiment 
les petites filles qui les aiment. 15. Le negociant cherche-t-il les 
commis que nous cherchons I 1G. Non, monsieur, il cherche ceux 
qui nous cherchent. 17. Que cherche le chat ? 18. II cherche les 
rats et les souris. 19. Ne cherche-t-il pas les chauves-souris aussi % 
20. Non, maclame, il cherche les souris mais non pas les chauves- 
souris. 21. Le chat a-t-il le rat? 22. Non, monsieur, il a la souris, 
mais pas le rat. 23. La maison du general est superbe, et ses 
chevaux sont superbes aussi. 24. Le garcon veut une livre de 

* These negatives stand in the order of their strength— point being stronger than pas, 
and non point the strongest ; mais non is the most elegant. 



22 7 7 

Gu-perbe, mais. 



THE TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



105 



viande et une livre de chandelles. 25. Veut-il le pain de mon 
boulanger ou du sien ? 26. II veut celui du sien et du votre. 

1. Whom dost thou love ? 2. I love my good friends. 3. Does 
the neighbor love me ? 4. He loves thee. 5. Do the children love 
you? 6. They love us and we love them. 7. Whom does the 
doctor love ? 8. He loves thee and he loves us also. 9. Does he 
not love you? 10. No, he loves you, hut he does not love me. 11. 
Whom is the clerk looking for 1 12. He is looking for the mer- 
chant whom we are looking for. 13. Is he not looking for the one 
who is looking for him ? 14. No, sir, he is looking for the one who 
is in that store. 15. What children do you seek ? 16. I seek 
those whom you seek, and those who are in the garden. 17. Are 
you looking for the little girls whom I am looking for ? 18.. No, 
sir, I am looking for those who are at the neighbor's. 19. What 
has the cat % 20. He has the rat and the bat. 21. Has he not 
the mouse ? 22. No, sir, he has the bat, but not the mouse. 23. 
What do you wish for ? 24. I wish for a pound of tea and a pound 
of sugar. 25. Do those men wish for the coffee of their merchant 
or of ours ? 26. They w 7 ish for that of theirs ; we wish for that of 
yours. 27. I wish for the superb coat. 28. Do you wish for this 
one or that one ? 29. I wish, for neither this one nor that one, I 
wish for the superb coat of the tailor. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What are you looking for ? 2. I am looking for my pen and 
my pencil. 3. Your pen is in my copy-book, and your pencil is 
under that slate. 4. I am not looking for my steel pen. 5. Which 
one do you wish for ? 6. I am looking for my gold pen. 7. Is it 
not on the table ? 8. No, sir. 9. Sister (ma soeur), what do you 
wish for ? 10. I wish for your ink and your copy-book, if you 
please. 11. My ink is there on the chair. 12. Where is your 
copy-book ? 13. It is not here, my cousin has it in the house. 
14. Have you a pin ? 15. Do you wish for a large pin or a small 
one? 16. A large one, if you please. 17. Is this good? 18. 
Yes, thank you (mercij. 



23.— VINGT-TROISlfcME LEQON. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. IN EE. 

1. There are in French four conjugations, that is, four different ways of conjugating 
verbs, distinguished by the termination of the infinitive. 



106 



THE TWENTY-THIRD LESSOX. 



The First Conjugation has the infinitive ending in EE. 
The Second " « j n jg. 

The Third " » - m oiE. 

The Fourth " " i n EE. 

2. A very large majority of all the verbs in the language arc of the fikst conjugation 
(in EE) ; and all of them, except aller, to go, have the terminations of the indicative pres- 
ent, like desirer, cherclier, and aimer, in E, ES, E, ons, EZ ent. 

3. The past participle of this conjugation is formed by dropping r final of the infinitive, 
and accenting the final e. Thus, 

Desirer, to desire, makes the past participle desire, desired. 



Chcrchcr, to seek, " 
Aller, to go, " 
Aimer, to love, " 

To listen to, listening to, listened to 
tTecoute, 
I listen to, 



tit ecoutes, il ecoute, 
thou listenest to, he listens to, 



How much, how many. 



One. Two. 
How much gold. 

The master. 
The king. 
A 'prince. 
A bishop. 
The shoemaker. 
The mason. 
Whose beef. 



TItree. Four. 
How many dollars. 

The mistress. 
The queen. 
A princess. 
A church. 
The seamstress. 
The poultry. 
Whose poultry. 



Whose, the one of whom (sing.). 
Whose, the ones of whom (plur.). 

4. Whose, accompanied by a noun, is de qui in French, -with the noun preceding; with- 
out a noun, it is de qui with celui, celle, ceux, or celles, preceding. 



" cherche, soug/it. 

" alle, gone. 

" aime, loved. 

Ecouter, ecoutant, ecoute. 
nous ecoutons, vous ecoutes, Us eContent, 
we listen to, you listen to, they listen to. 

Combien [de before the noun). 
Un, unc. Deux. Trois. Quatre. 
Combien d'or. Combien de piastres. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Le maitre. La maitresse. 

Le roi. La reine. 

Un prince. Une princesse. 

Un eveque. Une eglise. 

Le cordonnier. La couturiere. 

Le magon. La volaille. 

Le bceuf de qui. La volaille de qui. 

Celui de qui. Celle de qui. 

Ceux de qui. Celles de qui. 



Whose horse do you wish for ? 
Whose has the master ? 
Whose history art thotHooking for ? 
Whose has the mistress ? 
Whose children do you listen to ? 
Whose does the prince listen to ? 
Whose slates have you? 
W T hose has the mason ? 



Le cheval de qui voulez-vous ? 
Celui de qui le maitre a-t-il ? 
L'histoire de qui cherches-tu ? 
Celle de qui la maitresse a-t-elle ? 
Les enfants de qui ecoutez-vous ? 
Ceux de qui le prince ecoute-t-il ? 
Les ardoises de qui avez-vous ? 
Celles de qui le maqon a-t-il ? 



5. The article is prefixed to titles and epithets belonging to proper names. 
General Jackson. President Adams. Le general Jackson. Le president 

Adams. 

King George. Queen Victoria. Le roi Georges. La reine Victoria. 

Doctor Peter. Big William. Le docteur Pierre. Le gros Guillaume. 



5 12 6 7 C 1 6 7 C 5 IS 6 5 IS 3 5 18 C 5 IS 5 18 5 18 

de-si-re, oher-che, aZ-16, ai-me, 6-cou-ter, e-cou-tanf, c-cou-te, e-coute, ecoutes, c-cou- 

21 5 18 6 5 18 21 12 14 22 )0 20 1 5 5 5 7 !4 

tons, e-cou-tes, e-cou-te??£, com-bien. une, deujr, trois, katre, mai-tre, mai-tresse, reine, prince, 

14 5 5 8 5 )2 16 15 125 18 2-2 117 1 21 Jo 1 

prin-cesse, e-veke, eg-lize, cor-do7i-nie/', cou-tu-riere, ma-con, vo-laille. 



THE TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



107 



6. When de precedes such epithets, it of course forms du with the article (Lesson 6). 



1. M'ecoutes-tu '? 2. Je t' ecoute. 3. Qui le roi ecoute-t-il? 
4. II ecoute l'eveque Jean. 5. Nous ecoutez-vous ? 6. Nous vous 
ecoutons. 7. Les soldats ecoutent-ils la reine ? 8. II ne l'ecoutent 
pas. 9. Combien d'enfants le roi a-t-il ? 10. II a deux fils et trois 
filles. 11. Combien de freres la reine a-t-elle? 12. Elle aquatre 
freres et deux soeurs. 13. Ecoutez-vous la princesse? 14. 
J' ecoute la princesse et le prince. 15. Combien d'enfants le maitre 
a-t-il ? 16. II a quatre fils et trois filles. 17. Allez-vous a l'eglise 
de l'eveque Pierre? 18. Non, monsieur, je vais chez le cordonnier. 
19. Le cordonnier ecoute-t-il la couturiere? 20. Non, monsieur, 
la couturiere ecoute le cordonnier et le macon. 21. Les aiguilles 
de qui avez-vous? 22. J'ai celles de la couturiere. 23. La volaille 
de qui voulez-vous? 24. Je veux celle du paysan. 25. Allez- 
vous a l'eglise ? 26. Non, monsieur, je ne vais pas a l'eglise, je 
vais chez le voisin. 

1. To whom dost thou listen f 2. I listen to thee. 3. Does 
the scholar listen to me ? 4. No, sir, he listens to the master. 5. 
To whom do the little girls listen ? 6. They listen to the mistress. 
7. Do you listen to us ? 8. We do not listen to you. 9. How 
many horses has your father ? 10. He has two horses, three cows, 
and four oxen. 11. How many children has the king? 12. He 
has two sons and three daughters. 13. Does the mistress wish for 
this book or that ? 14. She wishes for neither this one nor that, 
she wishes for the one of the master. 15. Is the king going to 
this church or to that ? 16. He is going neither to this nor to that, 
he is going to that of the bishop. 17. How many sons has the 
queen? 18. She has four sons and one daughter. 19. Does the 
queen listen to tne prince or to the princess ? 20. She listens 
neither to the prince nor to the princess, she listens to the bishop. 
21. Do you desire the shoes of my shoemaker or of yours ? 22. I 
desire those of mine. 23. Have you the needles of your seamstress 
or of ours ? 24. I have those of yours. 25. Whose hammers has 
the mason? 26. He has his. 27. Whose poultry have you ? 28. 
I have mine. 29. Whose has the mason ? 30. He has the poul- 
try of the countrywoman. 



Corporal John's gun. 

Captain Smith's house. 

The books of the good David. 



Le fusil du caporal Jean. 

La maison du capitaine Smith. 

Les livres du bon David. 



108 



THE TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Where is the little boy who has the mason's hammer? 1. 
He is in the yard of my uncle's house. 3. He is not there. 4. Is 
he not in the garden % 5. He is neither in the yard nor in the 
garden. G. He is in the yard or in the house. 7. Have you not 
the mistress's book % she wishes for it. 8. No, sir, I have it not. 
9. Who has it? 10. Your cousin has it. 11. Where is she ? 12. 
She is at your house, in the garden. 13. Does that scholar wish 
for his dictionary and his grammar? 14. He wishes for his dic- 
tionary, but not his grammar. 15. What knife have you? 16. 
The big one. 17. Where is it? 18. It is in the yard on the 
bench. 19. Thank you. 



24.— VINGT-QUATRIftME LECON. 

AVOIR, TO HA VK IDIOMATIC. 
1. In the phrases, to be xcarm, to be cold, to be hungry, to be thirst}/, to be sleepy, to be 
afraid, to be ashamed, to be right, to be wrong, instead of the verb to be with an adjective, 
as in English, the French use the verb to have and a noun, literally meaning to have heat, 
to have cold, to have hunger, etc. 



To be warm. To be cold. 

To be hungry. To be thirsty. 

To be sleepy. To be afraid. 

To be right. To be wrong. 

To be ashamed. Well, very. 
Are you cold ? I am not cold. 
He is very cold. 
Art thou not warm ? 
I am very warm. 
Are you not hungry ? 
We are very hungry. 
Is the mistress thirsty ? 
She is very thirsty. 
Are the children sleepy ? 
They are very sleepy. 
What is the matter with you? 
I am very hungry. 
Who is afraid? 
That seamstress is afraid. 
Is big William right ? 
No, sir, he is wrong. 
Is not king George wrong ? 
No, sir, he is right. 
Are you ashamed ? I am ashamed. 



Avoir chaud. Avoir froid. 

Avoir /aim. Avoir soif . 

Avoir sommeil. Avoir peur. 

Avoir raison. Avoir tort. 

Avoir honte. Bien. 
Avez-vous froid ? Je n'ai pas froid. 
II a bien froid. 
N'as-tu pas chaud? 
J'ai bien chaud. 
N'avez-vous pas faim ? 
Nous avons bien faim. 
La maitresse a-t-elle soif? 
Elle a bien soif. 
Les enfants ont-ils sommeil ? 
lis ont bien sommeil. 
QiC avez-vous ? 
J'ai bien faim. 
Qui a peur ? 

Cette couturiere a peur. 

Le gros Guillaume a-t-il raison ? 

Non, monsieur, il a tort. 

Le roi George n'a-t-il pas tort ? 

Non, monsieur, il a raison. 

Avez-vous honte ? J'ai honte. 



17 21 14 on 15 7 11 7 21 18 21 1214 

chauc/, froirf, laim, soif, so?n-meil, peur, rai-zon, tori, honte, bien. 



THE TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



109 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The cold. Hunger. Le froid. La faim. 

Sleep. Thirst. Le sommeil. La soif. 

The brook. Fear. Le ruisseau. La peur. 

A vessel. Reason. Un vaisseau. ■ La raison. 

A ship. Shame. Un navire. La honte. 

2. In addressing relations and intimate friends, Ifonsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle, "are 
not to be used ; and pere, mere, frere, sarnr, etc., are not to be used without mon or ma; as, 

Son, art thou cold ? No, sir, I am Mon fils, as-tu froid ? Non, mon pere,* 

warm. j'ai chaud. 

Daughter, art thou warm ? Ma fille, as-tu chaud ? 

Yes, ma'am, I am very warm. Oui, ma mere, j'ai bien chaud. 

Brother, where are you going ? Mon frere, ou vas-tu ? 

Sister, are you thirsty ? Ma sceur, as-tu soif? 

1. Avez-vous chaud? 2. Jen'aipas chaud, j'ai froid. 3. Avez- 
vous bien froid ? 4. Nod, monsieur. 5. Qui a faim ? 6. Le petit 
gargon a bien faim. 7. Les petites filles ont-elles soif? 8. Elles 
n'ont pas soif. 9. Qu' avez-vous ? 10. J'ai sommeil. 11. Avez- 
vous bien sommeil? 12. Non, madame. 13. Qui a peur? 14. Ces 
jeunes filles ont peur. 15. Qui a raison et qui a tort ? 16. Le 
maitre a raison, et ce jeune garcon a tort. 17. Avez-vous honte ? 
18. Je n'aipas honte. 19. Mon fils vas-tu au ruisseau? 20. Non, 
mon pere, je vais chez le voisin. 21. Le matelot va-t-il a ce vais- 
seau-ci ou a celui-la ? 22. II ne va ni a celui-ci ni a celui-la, il va 
a ce navire. 23. Mon frere, ou vas-tu ? 24. Je vais au ruisseau. 
25. Le general veut-il ce vaisseau-ci ou ce vaisseau-la ? 26. II ne 
veut ni celui-ci ni celui-la, il veut ce gros navire. 27. Le navire de 
qui veut-il? 28. II veut celui du negociant. 29. Celui de qui 
voulez-vous? 30. Je veux le votre. 31. Avez-vous le cheval de 
mon frere ou du votre ? 32. J'ai celui du mien. 

1. Are you warm or cold? 2. I am neither warm nor cold. 
3. Art thou hungry or thirsty ? 4. I am hungry and thirsty also. 
5. Are you not sleepy? 6. Yes, sir, we are very sleepy. 7. Who 
is afraid ? 8. This little boy is afraid. 9. Are the masons right 
or wrong? 10. They are right, they are not wrong. 11. Are you 
afraid or ashamed ? 12. We are neither afraid nor ashamed. 13. 
What is the matter with you? 14. We are very sleepy. 15. Son, 



* Oui, monsieur, addressed to a father or brother, would be not very unlike yes, mis- 
ter, in English. 



22 12 37 7 17 1 13 

ruis-seau, vais-seau, na-vin 



110 



THE TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



is thy sister here? 16. No, sir, she is at her aunt's. 17. Daugh- 
ter, hast thou my pen? 18. No, ma'am, it is on the table. 19. My 
son, hast thou my knife ? 20. No, sir, Charles has it. 21. Daugh- 
ter, hast thou thy book? 22. Yes, ma'am, I have it here. 23. Are 
you going to the vessel or to the brook ? 24. I am going to the 
brook. 25. Does the prince wish for this ship or that one ? 26. He 
wishes for neither this one nor that one. 27. Does he not wish for 
the ship and the vessel? 28. He wishes for the vessel, but not the 
ship. 29. Whose apples has the little boy? 30. He has his. 31. 
"Whose has his sister ? 32. She has the gardener's. 33. Has she 
those of our gardener or of theirs? 34. She has those of theirs. 
35. Are you looking for the men whom I am looking for? 36. I 
am looking for those who are looking for me. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I am very thirsty ; I wish for a glass of cool water. 2. The 
glass is on the table. 3. Do you wish for a glass of beer or a glass 
of wine ? 4. I thank you, a glass of cool water ; I do not like (la) 
beer. 5. You are right ; Hike (le) wine, but not (la) beer. 6. Who 
has my dictionary? I wish for it. 7. Have you my dictionary, my 
friend ? 8. Yes ; do you wish for it ? 9. I am looking for it. 10. 
It is there on my table. 11. This is not mine. 12. Is your dic- 
tionary big or little ? 13. It is big. 14. It is in my room ; I am 
going to look for it. 15. If you please. 16. Is this one yours ? 
17. Yes, my friend, I thank you (inille remerciments). 



25. — YLNGT-CINQUlEME LEQON. 

TOULOIE, TO WILL. 

1. We have seen that the verb 'couloir, followed by a noun or pronoun, may be trans- 
lated wish for, will have. Before a verb also, when used interrogatively or negatively, it 
may be translated to wish, or to be willing. 

Do you wish to (will you) go home ? Youlez-vous aller chez vous? 
He is not willing to (will not) be ray II ne veut pas etre mon ami. 
friend. 

Are you willing to (will you) be good? Voulez-vous etre bon ? 

We do not wish to (will not) be lazy. Nous ne voulons-pas etre paresseux. 

2. The ordinary meaning of vouloir, however, especially when affirmative, is equivalent 
to will, in English, a little emphasized. 

I will have my money to-day. Je veux avoir mon argent anjourd'kui. 

She will have all that she desires. Elle veut avoir tout ce qu'elle desire. 

We will (are determined to) have it. Nous voulons l'avoir. 
They will (are determined to) be rich. lis veulent etre riches. 



1 5 9 17 18 2212 

pa-res-seua?, au-jour-d'hui. 



THE TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



Ill 



3. Youloir Men, used interrogatively, is 
affirmatively, it denotes consent. 

Will you please to go to our house ? 
I am quite willing. 

Will you please to look for ray pencil? 



for it. 



I am quite willing to loo 

To speak, speaking, spoken 
Jeparle, tu paries, il parle, 
I speak, thou speakest, lie speaks, 

4. Let the learner bear in mind that all verbs of the first conju 
as chercher, aimer, ecouter, andparler, already given. 



a polite mode of asking or requesting ; used 

Voulez-vous bien aller chez nous ? 
Je le veux bien. 

Voulez-vous bien chercher mon cra- 
yon? 

Je veux bien le chercher. 



Parler, parlant, parle. 
nous parlons, vous paries, Us parlent, 
we speak, you speak, they speak. 

ition (in EE) are varied 



To me. To us. 

To thee. To you. 

To him, to her, to it. To them. 
To whom dost thou speak ? 
I speak to thee. 
Do you not speak to me ? 
We do not speak to you. 
The shoemakers speak to us. 
My brother speaks to them, and they 

speak to him. 
I speak to her, and she speaks to me. 



Me. Nous. 

Te. Vous. 

Lui. Leur. 
A qui parles-tu ? 
Je te parle. 

Ne me parlez-vous pas ? 

Nous ne vous parlons pas. 

Les cordonniers nous parlent. 

Mon frere leur parle, et ils lui parlent. 

Je lui parle, et elle me parle. 



5. Pronouns which are the object of the verb in the manner of the above six, — that is, 
with the preposition to employed before them in English, — are called indirect objects or 
indirect objective pronouns. They are placed immediately before a transitive verb. 



To taste, 



tasting, tasted. 



Tlie one and the other, both (sing.). 
The ones and the others, both (plur.). 

Neither the one nor the other, neither 
(sing.). 

Neither the ones nor the others, nei- 
ther (plur.). 



Gouter, 

MASCULINE. 

Vun et V autre. 
Les uns et les au- 
tres. 

Ni Vun ni V autre. 



goutant, goute. 

FEMININE. 

JOune et V autre. 
Les unes et les au- 
tres. 

Ni Vune ni V autre. 



Ni les uns ni les 
autres. 



Ni les unes ni les 
autres. 



6. The above negatives require ne before the verb. 



Dost thou taste the sweet fruit or the 

sour fruit ? 
I taste neither. 

Do you taste this meat or that ? 
We taste neither. 

Does he taste the biscuits or the cakes ? 

He tastes neither. 

Lazy. 

To-day. To-morrow. 



Goutes-tu le fruit doux ou le fruit ai- 
gre? 

Je ne goute ni l'un ni 1'autre. 
Goutez-vous cette viande-ci ou celle-la? 
Nous ne goutons ni l'une ni 1'autre. 
Goute-t-il les biscuits ou les gateaux ? 
II ne goute ni les uns ni les autres. 
Paresseux. Paresseuse. 
Aujourdliui. Demain. 



1613 161 121 16 1 

par-ler, par-lantf, par-le, par-le, par-Ions, par-les, par- 



18 6 18 3 18 6 1 

gou-ter, gou-tani, gou-te, pa- 



112 



THE TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



1. Desirez-vous votre. argent? 2. Oui, monsieur, je le desire, 
et je veux l'avoir aujourd'hui. 3. Get homme aime 1' argent, et il 
veut etre riche. 4. Vonlez-vous bien ecouter cet homme'? 5. Je 
veux bien 1' ecouter. 6. Voulez-vous bien chercher mon livrel 7. Je 
veux bien le chercher. 8. Que goutent les soldats ? 9. lis goutent 
notrebonvin. 10. Goutent-ils ces pommes-ci ou celles-la ? 11. lis 
ne goutent ni les unes ni les autres, 12. Me parles-tu? 13. Je te 
parle. 14. Nous parlez-vous? 15. Nous vous parlous. 16. Le 
maitre parle-t-il a cet ecolier ? 17. II lui parle. 18. Les ecolieres 
parlent-elles a la maitresse? 19. Elles lui parlent. 20. Le gene- 
ral parle-t-il aux soldats? 21. II leur parle. 22. Goutes-tu le the 
ou le cafe ? 23. Je goute Tun et l'autre. 24. Goutez-vous la peche 
et la poire % 25. Nous ne goutons ni l'une ni l'autre. 26. Cet 
enfant n'a ni faim ni soif ? 27. Je ne goute ni l'eau ni la biere, 
mon frere goute l'une et l'autre. 

1. Will you go to the store ? 2. No, sir, I will go home. 3. That 
man will have all that he desires. 4. Will you please to look for 
my pen ? 5.1 am quite willing to look for it. 6. Do you taste the 
sweet apples or the sour ? 7. We taste both. 8. Does the general 
taste these biscuits or those ? 9. He tastes both. 10. Dost thou 
taste the wine or the milk? 11. I taste neither. 12. What gloves 
have you ? 13. I have mine. 14. Have you the white gloves or 
the black ones ? 15. I have neither. 16. Have you the gloves or 
the stockings ? 17. We have both. 18. Has the merchant both ? 
19. No, sir, he has neither. 20. Has the doctor the white cravats 
or the blue? 21. He has neither. 22. Hast thou both? 23. I 
have neither. 24. Where are you going? 25. We are going to the 
brook. 26. Queen Victoria has many soldiers and many vessels. 

1. I speak to thee ; dost thou speak to me ? 2. I speak to thee. 
3. Do you speak to us? 4. We do not speak to you. 5. We speak 
to you ; do you not speak to us ? 6. We speak to you. 7. Those 
men speak to me, and I speak to them. 8. Does the master speak 
to the scholars ? 9. He speaks to them, and they speak to him. 
10. Do you taste the bread or the butter? 11. We taste neither, 
but the children taste both. 12. Do you wish for the pen or the ink? 
13. I wish for neither, but my friend is looking for both. 14. Is the 
boy looking for his books or his papers? 15. He is looking for 
neither. 



THE TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



113 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Charles, where are you going ? 2. I am going to the store 
of my father. 3. Are you going for (allez-vous chercher) any thing % 
4. I am going for (chercher) a coat. 5. Are you not cold ? 6. No, 
sir. 7. Are you warm ? 8. I am not warm, but I am not very cold. 
9. Who is at the store ? 10. The clerks are there. 11. Where are 
your father and your uncle ? 12. They are at the house ; do you 
wish to see them ? 13. I wish to see your father. 14. He is at 
home. 15. Is that pretty little girl your sister? 16. No, sir, she 
is my cousin. 17. Good morning (honjour), my little friend. 18. 
Good morning, sir. 

26.— VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON. 

OBJECTIVE PEONOUNS. 

To give, giving, given. Donner, aonnant, donne, e. 

To carry, carrying, carried. Porter, portant, porte, e. 

1. The feminine of participles, like that of adjectives, is formed by adding e. The plu- 
ral also is formed as in adjectives. 

Where do you carry the fish ? Ou portez-vous les poissons ? 

I carry them to the cook's. Je les porte chez le cuisinier. 

Do you give them to your friends or to Les donnez-vous a vos amis ou aux 

ours ? notres ? 

I give them to mine. Je les donne aux miens. 

Do the soldiers wear the blue coats, Les soldats portent-ils les habits bleus, 

or the blue pantaloons ? ou les pantalons bleus ? 

They wear both. lis portent les uns et les autres. 

To lend, lending, lent. Preter, pretant, prete, e. 

To send, sending, sent. Envoyer, envoyant, envoye, e. 

2. Verbs in yer change y into i when it comes before e mute. 
tPenvoie, tio envoies, il envoie, nous envoyons, vous envoy ez, Us envoienl, 
I send, thou sende6t, he sends, we send, you send, they send. 

Do you lend this book or that? Pretez-vous ce livre-ci ou celui-la ? 

We lend both. Nous pretons Fun et l'autre. 

3. The personal pronouns, direct objects of the verb, have been spoken of in Lesson 22 
and the indirect in Lesson 25. The following have been given. 

DIEECT OBJECTS. INDIRECT OBJECTS. 

Me, us. Me, nous. To me, to us. Me, nous. 

Thee, you. Te, vous. To thee, to you. Te, vous. 

Him, it, them. Le, les. To him, to it, to them. Lui, leur. 

Her, it, them. La, les. ■ To her, to it, to them. Lui, leur. 

4. When two pronouns, a direct and an indirect object, belong to the same verb, they 
are placed according to the following rules: first, when the pronouns are of different per- 
is 6 15 3 15 6 16 6 16 3 1 6 6 5 6 5 3 5 6 3 20126 

don-ner, do??-nan£, do??-ne, por-ter, por-tan;!, por-te, pre-ter, pre-tan#, pre-te, en-vo-yer, 

3 2012 3 3 20 12 6 3 20 3 20 1221 3 20 

en-vo-yan/, en-vo-ye, en-voie, en-vo-yons, en-voie«#. 



THE TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



sons, the first and the second persons precede the third; second, when they are both of the 
third person, the direct object is always placed first. Thus, 

It or him to me, it or her to me, them Me le, me la, me les. 
to me. 

It or him to thee, it or her to thee, them 
to thee. 

It or him to us, it or her to us, them to 
us. 

It or him to you, it or her to you, them 
to you. 

It or him to him, it or her to him, them 
to him. 

It or him to her, it or her to her, them 
to her. 

It or him to them, it or her to them, 
them to them. 

Does the gentleman give you the par- 
asol? 

He does not give it to me. 
I give it to him. 
Do you not give it to us ? 
We do not give it to you. 
Dost thou lend me thy pen? 
I do not lend it to thee. 
Do you not lend it to us ? 
We do not lend it to you. 



Te le, te la, te les. 

Nous le, nous la, nous les. 

Yous le, vous la, vous les. 

Le lui, la lui, les lui. 

Le lui, la lui, les lui. 

Le leur, la leur, les leur. 

Monsieur vous donne-t-il le parasol ? 

II ne me le donne pas. 

Je le lui donne. 

Ne nous le donnez-vous pas ? 

Nous ne vous le donnons pas. 

Me pretes-tu ta plume ? 

Je ne te la prete pas. 

Ne nous la pretez-vous pas ? 

Nous ne vous la pretons pas. 



5. When two nouns, a direct and indirect object, belong to the same verb, the direct 
object is generally placed first.* 

I give the man this money. Je donne cet argent a l'homme. 

He sends his brother the letters. II envoie les lettres a son frere. 

6. But if the direct object be limited by something following, it is to be placed after the 
indirect object. 

He sends to his brother the letters of II envoie a son frere les lettres de son 
his son and daughter. fils et de sa fille. 

1. Pretes-tu ton crayon ou ton couteau? 2. Je ne prete ni l'un 
ni l'autre. 3. Portes-tu les journaux a mon pere ? 4. Je ne les 
lui porte pas. 5. Les portez-vous auxvoisins? 6. Nous les leur 
portons. 7. Envoyez-vous cette lettre au capitaine ? 8. Je la lui 
envoie. 9. Me donnes-tu le fruit? 10. Je te le donne. 11. Le 
petit garcon vous donne-t-il sa neiir? 12. II ne me la donne pas. 
13. Les negociants vous donne-t-il leurs pomrnes 1 14. lis ne me 
les donnent pas. 15. lis te les donnent, ne nous les donnes-tu pas ? 
16. Je ne vous les donne pas. 17. L'ecolier donne-t-il cette rose 

* The direct and indirect objects in nouns are distinguished in the same way as in pro- 



THE TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



115 



au ruaitre? 18. II ne la lui donne pas. 19. Ne la donne-t-il pas 
a la maitresse? 20. II la lui donne. 21. Les soldats pretent-ils 
leurs fusils a ces homines ? 22. lis les leur pretent. 23. Prelez- 
vous votre livre a cette dame ? 24. Je le lui prete. 25. Le pretez- 
vous aux ecoliers? 26. Je le leur prete. 27. Envoyez-vous les 
journaux a vos freres? 28. Nous les leur envoyons. 29. Envoies- 
tu ce livre a ta soeur ? 30. Je le lui envoie. 

1. To whom dost thou give the handsome sofa? 2. I give it to 
thee. 3. To whom does the master give the pretty book ? 4. He 
gives it to me. 5. Dost thou not give it to us ? 6. I clo not give 
it to you. 7. To whom do the gardeners give their flowers ? 8. 
They give them to me. 9. Do they not give them to us ? 10. They 
do not give them to you. 11. Do they give them to thee ? 12. Yegj 
sir, they give them to me. 13. To whom do the fishermen carry 
their fish? 14. They carry them to you. 15. Do they not carry 
them to the shoemaker? 16. They do not carry them, to him. 
17. Do you carry your letters to your friends? 18. We carry them 
to them. 19. To whom does the clerk send the gloves ? 20. He 
sends them to the stranger. 21. Does he send them to thee? 
22. He does not send them to me. 23. Does he send them to us ? 
24. He does not send them to you. 

25. Does the clerk carry the cloth to the doctor? 26. He does 
not carry it to him. 27. Does he carry (to) him the silk ? 28. He 
carries it to him. 29. Dost thou carry that book to thy mother ? 
30. I carry it to her. 31. Dost thou carry her the newspaper also? 
32. I do not carry it to her. 33. Do you give the flowers to that 
young lady? 34. We give them to her. 35. Do you lend your 
money to the merchants ? 36. We lend it to them. 37. Do you 
send the meat to the soldiers? 38. We send it to them. 39. Do 
you wear the white cravat or the black one ? 40. I wear neither. 
41. Do you lend me these books or those ? 42. I lend you both. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Good morning, sir ; do you wish to buy (acheter) something? 
2. Yes, sir, I wish to buy a book. 3. What book do you wish to 
buy ? 4. Have you the history of France ? 5. Yes, sir, we have 
it ; do you wish for it in French (en frangais) or in English (en 
anglais) ? 6. In French, if you please. 7. This one is a good 
history. 8. Thanks (merci). 9. To whom do you speak ? 10. I 
speak to the president. 11. Do-those gentlemen speak to doctor 



116 



THE TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



Peter? 12. They speak to him. 13. Does captain John speak to 
the soldiers? 14. He speaks to them. 15. Do they speak to the 
sailors'? 16. They do not speak to them. 17. Do they speak to 
thee? 18. They do not speak to me. 19. Are you warm or cold? 
20. I am neither warm nor cold. 21. Is that sick man thirsty? 
22. He is very thirsty. 23. Is he not sleepy ? 24. No, sir, he is 
thirsty, but not sleepy. 



27. — VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON. 



USE OF EST-CE QUE. 

1. With most French verbs a question is asked in the first person singular, as in the 
other persons, by placing the subject after the verb ; as, 



Do I go to the bank ? 

Am I at your house or your father' 

Have I a good pen ? 

Do I speak properly ? 

Do I listen well ? 



Vais-je a la ban que? 

Suis-je chez vous ou chez votre pere ? 

Ai-je une bonne plume ? 

Parle-je convenablement ? 

lEcoute-je bien? 



2. Whence follows the verb, e final of the first person singular indicative present takes 
an acute accent, as in the last two phrases. 

3. Est-ee que, however, is used to introduce the indicative present first person, to avoid 
a harsh sound. 



Do I sleep 
Do I run ? 
Do I seek? 



Est-ce que je dors (not dors-je)? 
Est-ce que je cours (not cours-je) ? 
Est-ce que je cherche ? 



4. The French also use est-ce que with all persons and tenses, to express some emotion 
blended with the interrogation. 



Do I go to school, father ? 

Are you wounded, my friend ? 

Are we the friends of that wicked 

person ? 
Do I ever speak evil of you ? 
Have we your money? 

To study, studying, studied. 

To buy, buying, bought. 



Est-ce que je vais a l'ecole, mon pere ? 
Est-ce que vous etes blessc, mon ami ? 
Est-ce que nous sommes les amis de ce 

mechant ? 
Est-ce que je parle jamais mal de vous ? 
Est-ce que nous avons votre argent ? 

Etudier, etudiant, etudic. 

Achetcr, achetant, achete. 



5. In verbs of the first conjugation having e mute in the last syllable but one, that 
takes the grave accent when the next consonant is followed by e mute. 



Machete, 
I buy, 



tu achetes, il achete, 
thou buyest, he buys, 



That scholar studies well. 



nous achetons, xous achetez, Us achetent, 
we buy, you buy, they buy. 

Cet ecolier etudie bien. 



1 £ 21 1 4 8 6 22 126 5 22 123 6 22 126 1 6 1 3 1 6 

par-leje, conve-nable-men^, e-tu-dier, e-tu-dianf, c-tu-die, a-che-ter, a-che-tan^ a-che-te, 

151 21 1615 ' ' 

a-chete, a-che-tons, a-che-tes, a-chete?^. 



THE TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



117 







MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The air. 


A. fever. 




Une fievre. 


This country. 


A tomato. 


Ce pays. 


Une tomate. 


X tilo LvllllsXlV, 


The mustard. 


Ce climat. 


La moutarde. 


The time, weather. 


My library. 


Le temps. 


Ha bibliotheque. 


The Frenchman. 


The French-woman. 


Le frangais. 


La franpaise. 


The Spaniard. 


( The Spanish- 
( woman. 


Uespagnol. 


It' 'espagnole. 




( The German- 
l woman. 


Uallemand. 


Jjallemande. 


The German. 






The Englishman. 


( The English- 
I woman. 


Uanglais. 


Ij anglaise. 


The Italian. 


The Italian-woman. 


Jjitalien. 


Vitalienne. 



6. National designations like the above, when used as nouns and applied to nations, 
begin with a capital letter ; when used as adjectives or applied to individuals, they begin 
with a small letter. 

The French are polite. Les Francais sont polis. 

He is a Frenchman (French). II est francais. 

I have an English watch. J'ai une montre anglaise. 

7. The masculine of the above five also denotes the language. 

I study French and English, you study J'etudie le francais et Yanglais, vous 

German and Spanish, she studies etudiez Vallemand et Yespagnol, 

Italian. elle etudie Yitalien. 

1, Quels livres avez-vous ? 2. J'ai un dictionnaire anglais et 
une grammaire italienne. 3. Etudiez-vous le francais ? 4. J'etu- 
die le francais et mes cousins etudient l'espagnol. 5. Le frangais 
achete-t-il les cravates blanches ou les cravates noires? 6. II 
n'achete ni les unes ni les autres. 7. Que desirez-vous etudier? 
8. Je desire etudier l'espagnol, niais ma sceur veut etudier l'alle- 
mand. 9. Est-ce que votre sceur est malade % 10. Elle est un 
peu malade. 11. L'air de cette ckambre est-il frais f 12. II est 
bien frais. 13. Aimez-vous ce pays-ci ? 14. J'aime ce pays-ci et ce 
clirnat-ci ? 15. Votre mere va-t-elle chez la petite francaise? 16. 
Non, madame, elle n'a pas le temps. 17. Votre ami est-il malade '% 
18. Oui, monsieur, il a la fievre. 19. Qu'a ce domestique? 20. 

II a les tomates et la moutarde. 21. La bibliotheque du docteur 
est grande. 

1. I desire to study French, but my brother will study Spanish. 
2. What is the matter with that sick man ? 3. He has the fever. 



7 12 7 51-2 15 1 12 1 18 1 3 12 12 15 5 3 7 3 

air, n-evr^, pays, to-mate, cli-matf, mou-tarde, temps, bi-bli-o-tfteke, fran-cais, fran- 

7 5 1 15 5 1 15 1 3 1 3 3 7 3 7 12 1 1214 12 1 12 5 

caize, es-pa-gnol, es-pa-gnole, al?e-man<Z, alZe-mande, an glais, an-glaize, i-ta-lien, i-ta-Iienne. 



118 



THE TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



4. What art thou buying % 5. I am buying a library. 6. What 
do the cooks wish to buy ? 7. They wish to buy the tomatoes and 
the mustard. 8. Is the Spanish woman going to the house of the 
German woman % 9. No, sir, she is going to the Italian woman's. 
10. Are you going to the English woman's? 11. No, sir, I have 
not the time. 12. Do you wish to study Italian % 13. I wish to 
study Italian, but my sister will study French. 14. Do 'you study 
Spanish or German? 15. We study neither. 16. Do the mer- 
chants buy the shoes or the gloves? 17. They buy neither. 18. 
Do you buy the forks or the spoons ? 19. We buy neither. 

20. What do those children study? 21. They study English. 
22. Do the countrymen send you their fruit ? 23. They send it 
to me. 24. Do they send you their peaches ? 25. They do not 
send them to me. 26. To whom do you give your books ? 27. 
We give them to thee. 28. Do you send this meat to the neigh- 
bor ? 29. We do not send it to him, we send it to thee. 30. To 
whom do you lend your books ? 31. We lend them to you. 32. 
To whom does the master lend his ? 33. He lends them to thee. 
34. To whom dost thou lend thy money ? 35. I lend it to you. 
36. Does the merchant send you your money? 37. He sends it 
to us. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What are you carrying in that bag? 2. We are carrying 
these nails to the carpenter who is at our house. 3. You have 
many nails ; does the carpenter wish for them all ? 4. Yes, he 
wishes for them all. 5. Where do you go for (chercher) these 
nails? 6. My father sends me for them (les chercher) to the store. 
7. Do you go to the store of Mr. A. or to Mr. B.'s? 8. I go to 
neither the one nor the other ; I go to my cousin's. 9. Is your 
cousin at his store? 10. No, sir, he is sick. 11. He is sick! 
what is the matter with him ? 12. He has the fever. 13. Who 
is his physician ? 14. His physician is doctor H. 15. Is your 
cousin very sick ? 16. Not (non pas) very sick. 17. I wish to go 
to his house. 18. You are right ; he loves you much. 



THE TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



119 



28.— VINGT-HUlTIilME LEQON. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. IN IB. 

1. Verbs of the Second Conjugation (inf. in IE), have the terminations of the present 
indicative, as follows : 

IS, IS, IT, ISSONS, ISSEZ, ISSENT. 

2. The past participle of this conjugation is formed by dropping IE of the infinitive ; 
except that those in enir change the i to v.* 

To Choose, Chosen, Choisir (inf.). Choisi (past part.). 

Je choisis, tu clioisis, il choisit, nous choisissons, vous choisisses, Us choisissent, 
I choose, thou choosest, he chooses, we choose, you choose, they choose. 

To come, coming, come. Venir, venant, venu. 

To hold, holding, held. Tenir, tenant, tenn. 

3. Venir, tenir, and their compounds, are irregular, and terminate thus : 
Jeviens, twviens, ilment, nous venom, vousvenez, Us viennent, 
I come, thou comest, he comes, we come, you come, they come. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 



The chocolate. 
A billet, note. 
A bank-bill. 
Live, living. 
Bead. 
Whence. 

From his house. 



A purse. 
A violet. 
A jonquil. 



From your house. 
From her house. 
Do you choose the chocolate or the 
tea? 

I choose neither the chocolate nor the 
tea. 

Do you choose the leather purse ? 
I choose the silk purse. 
Whence do you come ? 
We come from home. 
Dost thou come from the store ? 
No, I come from the brook. 
What are those little boys holding ? 
They are holding their books, and I 
am holding mine. 



Le chocolat. 
Un billet. 

Un billet de banque. 
Vivant. 
Mort. 
D'ou, 

De chez lui. 



Une bourse. 
Une violette. 
Une jonquille. 
Vivante. 
Morte. 

De chez vous. 
De chez elle. 



Choisissez-vous le chocolat ou le the ? 

Je ne choisis ni le chocolat ni le the\ 

Choisissez-vous la bourse de cuir? 
Je choisis la bourse de soie. 
D'ou venez-vous ? 
Nous venons de chez nous. 
Viens-tu du magasin ? 
Non, je viens du ruisseau. 
Que tiennent ces petits garcons ? 
lis tiennent leurs livres, et je tiens les 
miens. 



4. The articles and adjective pronouns are to be repeated before each noun in the same 
construction, and before each adjective belonging to a separate noun. 
He has the book, pencil, and paper. II a le livre, le crayon et le papier. 
We wish for the bread and cheese. Nous voulons le pain et le fromage. 
He has his sugar and milk. II a son sucre et son lait. 



* Other exceptions to this rule will be given as the verbs are introduced. 



20 12 20 12 20 12 

choi-zir, choi-zi, choi-zis, 

4 3 4 22 4 12 43 4 

ve-nanf, v 



12 21 



20 12 6 20 12 4 12 

choi-zi^, choi-zis-sosns, choi-zis-ses, choi-zissew#, ve-nir, 

22 1214 1214 4 21 4 6 125 15 15 1 18 

ve-nu, te nir, te-nans, te-nu, viens, vien#, ve-nons, ve-nes, viennewtf, cho-co-laif, bourse, 

12 15 5 3 21 13 12 3 12 3 16 16 

bi-llet, vi-o-lette, banke, jon-kille, vi-van#, vi-vante, mor£, morte. 



120 



THE TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



5. Country, meaning a particular region, -is pays; country, distinguished from the 
city, is campagne. 

I like ray country, you like yours. J'aime mon pays, vous aimez le votre. 

We like the country, be likes the city. Nous aimons la campagne, il aime la 

ville. 

1. D'ou viennent vos freres? 2. lis viennent de chez eux. 
3. Les chevaux de qui tenez-vous ? 4. Nous tenons les notres. 
5. Que tient ce petit garcon ? 6. II tient les fleurs de cette dame. 
7. Je tiens mes livres, et les enfants tiennent les roses, les violettes 
et les jonquilles. 8. Portez-vous ce billet a votre pere ? 9. Je le 
lui porte. 10. Donnez-vous les billets de banque aux marchands ? 
11. Nous les leur donnons. 12. Quel poisson ce cuisinier choisit-il? 
13. II choisit celui-ci. 14. Ces poissons-ci sont vivants et ceux-la 
sontmorts. 15. Ces arbres du jardinier sont morts. 16. La mere de 
ce petit garcon est-elle morte 1 17. Elle est vivante. 18. Ces dames 
choisissent-elles les violettes ou les jonquilles? 19. Elles choisis- 
sent les unes et les autres. 20. D'ou cet homme vient-il ? 21. II 
vient de France. 22. Que tiens-tu ? 23. Je tiens mon livre. 

1. Do the cooks choose the live fish of this boy, or the dead 
ones of the fisherman ? 2. They choose the live ones. 3. Dost 
thou choose the glass candlestick or the copper one ? 4. I choose 
neither. 5. Do you come from the (du) brook ? 6. No, sir, I come 
from the store. 7. Does the mason come from your house? 8. No, 
sir, he comes from the ship. 9. Are the countrymen coming here ? 
10. No, sir, they are going to the country. 11. Whence do you 
come? 12. We come from the city. 13. Dost thou come from the 
country? 14. No, sir, I come from home {de chez moi). 15. What 
books are you holding ? 16. We are holding ours. 17. Are the 
scholars holding theirs ? 18. They are holding them. 19. Whose 
horse is the countryman holding? 20. He is holding his. 21. 
Whose books dost thou hold ? 22. I hold my friends'. 23. Do 
they not hold theirs ? 24. No, sir, I hold them. 

1. Does the master lend you his pen ? 2. He lends it to us. 
3. Do the merchants lend you their money ? 4. They do not lend 
it to us, they lend it to you. 5. Dost thou send the flower to that 
lady ? 6. I send it to her. 7. Does the neighbor send you your 
notes ? - 8. He sends them to us. 9. Do you send his newspapers 
to him? 10. I send them to him. 11. Do you carry the fruit to 



7 12 1 1 

pays, cam-pagne 



THE TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 



121 



your mother ? 12. I carry it to her. 13. Do you carry her the 
violets and the jonquils ? 1-1. I carry them to her. 15. Dost thou 
send that soup to the sick men? 16. I send it to them. 17. Dost 
thou send them the coffee also ? 18. I send it to them. 19. Where 
is the bank bill? 20. It is here in my purse. 21. My mother, 
sister, and cousin are here. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

I. Do you study French? 2. No, madam, but I am going to 
study it. 3. Do you like the French ? 4. I like much the French 
and the Spanish, but I do not like the German. 5. Do you not 
wish for a dictionary ? 6. I have a French and English dictionary 
at home. 7. If you wish, I am going to send you a history. 8. 
You are very good, sir. 9. Adieu {adieu), sir. • 10. Till we see 
each other again (au revoir). 

II. What have you in that bag? 12. I have the books which 
I study. 13. Do you study all those books? 14. Yes, sir, I study 
them all. 15. Is the air of this chamber fresh? 16. It is very 
fresh. 17. What do you buy of (a) that countryman? 18. I buy 
his tomatoes and his mustard. 19. Have you a history of France 
in your library ? 20. Yes, sir, this book is the history of France, 
and that one the history of Spain. 21. Do you buy the German 
grammar ? 22. No, sir, we buy the Italian grammar. 



29.— VINGT-NETTVlEME LE£ON. 

SECOND CONJUGATION CONTINUED. 

1. Some verbs of the Second Conjugation, the stems* of which, end in two distinct con- 
sonants, terminate in 

S, S, T, ONS, EZ, ENT. 

and drop the last consonant of the stem before a silent terminating consonant. 

To go out, going out, gone out. Sortir, sortant, sorti. 

Je sors, tu sors, il sort, nous sortons, vous sortes, Us sortent, 

I go out, thou goest out, he goes out, we go out, you go out, they go out. 

Without a verb, jamais; with a verb, rtt 



Kevcr. ■{ before the verb and jamais after it, or 

jamais ne before the verb. 
Ever. Often. Jamais. Souvent. 

Still (adverb). Again. Encore, or toujours. Encore. 

Sometimes. Already. Quelquefois. Bejd.. 

* The stem is that part of the verb which is unchanged, to which the terminations are 
added in conjugating it. 

16 12 1G 3 1G 12 16 16 16 21 16 6 16 1 7 IS 3 S 26 

sor-tir, sor-tan/, sor-ti, sors, sor£, sar*tons, sorites, sortent, ja-mais, sou-ven£, en-core, 

18 18 5 4 'JO 5 1 

tou-jours, kel-ke-fois, de-jA. 



122 



THE TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 



Not yet. 

The morning. 
The fire. 
The evening. 
Hard. 
Soft. 



I Without a verb, pas encore ; with a verb, 
< ne before the verb and pas encore af- 
( ter it. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The night. Le matin. La nuit. 

Thence. Lefeu. La glace. 

The school. Le soir. Vecole. 

Bur. Dure. 
Mou. Molle. 
2. Mow becomes tnol before a vowel or a silent h. 
Warm, hot. Chaud. Chaude. 

Cold. Froid. Froide. 

Do you often go out ? Sortez-vous souvent? 

We go out sometimes, but not often. Nous sortons quelquefois, mais pas 

souvent. 

3. Adverbs are generally placed immediately after their verbs. Those of time and place, 
however, can stand at the beginning of the phrase. 

Do you never go to the market? N'allez-vous jamais au marche? Ja- 



Never. 
He never goes to church. 
I often go to the store, but I never go 

to the market. 



mais. 

II ne va jamais a Teglise. 
Je vais souvent au magasin, mais ja- 
mais je ne vais au marche. 



4. The circumstance of time is often expressed in French without a preposition. 

Le soir. 



Le matin. 
La nuit. 

Sors-tu jamais la nuit ? 
Non, monsieur. Je sors quelquefois le 
matin et le soir, mais je ne sors 
jamais la nuit. 
Cet enfant a-t-il deja faim ? 
II n'a pas encore faim. 
II a encore sommeil. 

also with nouns in a 



In the morning. In the evening. ' 
In the night, at night. 
Dost thou ever go out at night ? 
No, sir. I sometimes go out in the 
morning and in the evening, but 
I never go out at night. 
Is that child already hungry ? 
He is not yet hungry. 
He is still sleepy. 

5. The article is used as in English with nouns in a definite sense 
general sense (which omit it in English) ; as, 

Iron is hard. Coal is black. Le fer es dur. Le charbon est noir. 

Fire is hot. Ice is cold. Le feu est chaud. La glace est froide. 

I like tea, I do not like coffee. J'aime le the, je n'aime pas le cafe. 

1. Ce petit gar^on a-t-il deja soif ? 2. Pas encore. 3. J'ai 
encore froid ; n'avez-vous pas froid ? 4. Non, monsieur, j'ai chaud. 
5. Votre frere sort-il la nuit ? 6. Jamais. 7. Qu'a ce malade ? 
8. II a la fievre jaune. 9. Ces enfants sortent-ils quelquefois ? 
10. lis sortent souvent. 11. Sortent-ils la nuit ? 12. Non, mon- 
sieur, ils sortent le matin, et le soir, mais ils ne sortent jamais 



1 14 22 n 1 S 15 23 15 17 20 

ma-tin, nuit, glace, c-cole, dure, molZe, chaude, froide. 



THE TWENTY-NINTH LESSON. 



123 



la nuit. 13. L'acier n'est il pas bleu ? 14. Si, l'acier est bleu, 
l'argent est blanc, et le charbon est noir. 15. Choisissez-vous le 
biscuit mou ou le dur? 16. Nous voulons 1'un et l'autre. 17. 
Aimez-vous un climat chaud ou un climat froid ? 18. Je n'aime ni 
l'un ni l'autre. 19. N' aimez-vous pas ce pays-ci ? 20. Je 1'aime 
beaucoup. 21. Desirez-vous etudier l'allemand? 22. Je desire 
l'etudier, mais mon pere ne le veut pas. 23. Voulez-vous bien venir 
icicesoir? 24. Oui, je le veux bien. 25. Ou allez-vous ? 26. 
Je vais a l'ecole. 

1. Dost thou buy the countryman's chickens ? 2. I buy his 
chickens, his tomatoes, and his mustard. 3. Where is your Spanish 
grammar ? 4. It is in my library. 5. Is your brother still sick ? 
6. Yes, madam, he has the fever still. 7. Do you choose the choc- 
olate or the tea ? 8. We choose the chocolate. 9. What has the 
Italian woman ? 10. She has the silk purse and the bank bill. 11. 
Does the neighbor send you his fruit ? 12. He sends it to me. 
13. Do you send him his notes ? 14. I send them to him. 15. Does 
that child go out often ? 16. He goes out sometimes, but not often. 
17. Is he already hungry ? 18. He is not yet hungry. 19. Is the 
mason still thirsty ? 20. He is still thirsty. 

21. Is that child already sleepy ? 22. He is not yet sleepy. 
23. Dost thou ever go out in the morning ? 24. No, I often go 
out id the evening, but I never go out in the morning. 25. Does 
your sister choose the roses or the tulips ? 26. She chooses nei- 
ther, she chooses the violets and the jonquils. 27. Does she give 
them to you ? 28. She gives them to me. 29. Does the master 
give you his pen ? 80. He gives it to me. 31. To whom dost 
thou give that note ? 32. I give it to thee. 33. Dost thou give 
me the letter ? 34. I give it to thee. 35. Dost thou give me the 
newspapers ? 36. I give them to thee. 37. Do you give me that 
purse? 38. We give it to you. 39. Are you going to school? 
40. I am not going to school, I am going to church. 

OPTIONAL EXEKCISES. 

1. Do you ever speak Spanish ? 2. Sometimes, but not often. 
3. Do you study it still ? 4. No, sir, I have not the time, I study 
French. 5. Do you speak it ? 6. Not yet. 7. Your brother speaks 
it, however (cependani). 8. Yes, sir, my brother and sister speak 
it. 9. Where is your brother ? 10. He is clerk in the store of my 
uncle. 11. Does he still study French ? 12. Yes, sir, he studies it 



124 



THE THIRTIETH LESSOX. 



still ; lie wishes to speak it well {le bien parler). 13. He is right. 
14. Where does your sister go to school ? 15. She goes to the 
school of Madam G. 1C. It is a very good school. 17. Madam G. 
speaks French, and her daughters also. 18. She has many schol- 
ars, and they all study {elles etudient toutes) French. 19. Do your 
cousins goto Madam G/s school? 20. No, sir, they do not go to 
school at present (a present). 



30.— TRENTIEME LEQON. 

THE EELATIYES WITH EST-CE QUI AND EST-CE QUE. 

1. We have seen that (except qui t whom? interrogative) qui is the subject and que 
the object of the following verb. The same is the case also when these relatives follow qui 
est-ce or qu'est-ce, interrogative. 



Who ? 
Whom ? 

What? (subject). 
Wliat? (object). 

"Who goes to the bank ? 
Whom is that man looking for ? 
What have you ? 



Qui cst-cc qui ? 
Qui est-ce que? 
Qu'cst-ce qui? 
Qu'est-ce que ? 
Qui est-ce qui va a la banque ? 
Qui va a la banque ? 
j Qui est-ce que cet homnie cherchc ? 
\ Qui cet homme cherche-t-il ? 



Qu'est-ce que vous avez ? 
avez-vous ? 



2. The choice between the two forms of translating icho, whom, and what, here given, 
is determined by euphony; but what? as subject, can only be qu'est-ce quit 

{ Qu'est-ce qui est sur la table ? 



What is on the table ? 

To pick up, picking up, picked up. 
To find, finding, found. 

The gardener. 

A cupboard. A clothes-press. 



((And not Que est sur, etc.) 
Ramasser, ramassant, ramasse. 
Trouver, trouvant, trouve. 

FEMININE. 



MASCULINE. 

Le jardinier. 
Un buffet. 
Un tonncau. 
Un baril. 
Plein. 
Vide. 



La jardiniere. 
Une garde-robe. 
Une armoire. 
L T ne etable. 
Pleine. 
Toujour s. 



A cask. A closet. 

A barrel. A stable. 
Full. 

Emphj. Always. 
Do you pick up what you find ? 
We pick up what we find. - 
I pick up what I find. 
The cow is in the stable. 

3. iZeurie is a stable for horses and mules ; etalle, for oxen, cows, and sheep. 

3 ,55 1 1 6 1 1 3 1 1 18 6 13 3 18 6 1 12 125 

tren-tiem<? ra-mas-ser, ra-mas-san^, ra-rnas-se, trou-ver, trou-van£, trou-ve, jar di-nie/% 

1 12 12 7 22 5 1 15 15 17 1 20_ 1 12 5 1 .14 7 W 18 

jar-di-niere, bu/-fe£, garde-rob?, to?i-neau, ar-moire, ba-ru, e-table, plein, plein;?, vide, tou- 

18 

jours. 



Ramassez-vous ce que vous trouvoz ? 
Nous ramassons ce que nous trouvons. 
Je ramasse ce que je trouve. 
La vache est dans Fetable. 



THE THIRTIETH LESSON. 



125 



4. lie, she, it, they, arc translated by ce instead of il, elle, Us, elles, before the verb etre, 
w hen the predicate is a noun, a pronoun, or any phrase characterizing the subject, except an 
adjective, a past participle, or a noun used as an adjective. 
Who is that man ? Qui est cet hommc ? 

He is our neighbor. C'est notre voisin. 

That woman is beautiful. Cette femme est belle. 

She is the wife of our neighbor. C'est la femme de notre voisin. 

Who are those little boys ? Qui sont ces petits garcons ? 



They are my cousins. 



Ce sont mes cousins. 



Do you see those young ladies ? Yoyez-vous ces jeunes demoiselles ? 

They are the scholars of Madam G. Ce sont les ccolieres de madame G. 
They are very good. Elles sont bien bonnes. 

Mies is used in this last phrase, because the predicate is the verb and adjective merely ; 
ce is used in the preceding, because the predicate contains a noun. 

5. Usage authorizes the employment of il, elle, etc., in such cases, provided the subject 
has been distinctly specified. 

Who is the gentleman ? Qui est ce monsieur ? 

He is my brother. C'est mon frere, or, II est mon frere. 

Who is in the house ? Qui est dans la maison ? 

It is my brother. C'est mon frere (and not II est, etc.). 

What have you there ? Qu'avez-vous la ? 

They are my books. Ce sont mes livres. 

You love John. He is my friend. Yous aimez Jean. C'est (or il est) mon 

ami. 

1. Qui est chez vous? 2. Ce son! mes amis. 3. Qui est cet 
liomme! 4. C'est notre meclecm. 5. II est anglais.* 6. Qui est- 
ce que vous chercliez ? 7. Je cherche celui que vous cherchez. 8. 
Qui est-ce qui veut ces papiers? 9. Le maitre les veut. 10. Qu'est- 
ce que vous ramassez? -11. Je ramasse ces pommes. 12. Qu'est-ce 
qui est sur la table? 13. Ce sont les papiers clu maitre. 14. Trou- 
vez-vous ce que vous cherchez? 15. Je le trouve. 16. Cet homme 
est-il votre cuisinier ? 17. Non, monsieur, c'est notre jarclinier. 
18. Ou est la clef du buffet ? 19. La clef du buffet est dans cette 
armoire, et celle cle la garde-robe est sur la table. 20. Qu'est-ce 
qui est sous cet arjbre? 21. Ce sont les tonneaux et les barils du 
marchand. 22. Sont-ils pleins ou vides % 23. Les tonneaux sont 
vicles, et les barils sont pleins de biere. 24. Qu'est-ce qui est dans 
l'etable? 25. Ce sont nos vaches. 26. Qui est (or qui est-ce 
qui est) dans le jardin % 27. C'est le jar dinier. 

1. Does the gardener send us the flowers ? 2. He sends them 
to us. 3. Who picks up those apples 1 4. The gardener picks 



* 11 is used here, and not ce, because anglais is used as an adjectivi 



126 



THE THIRTIETH LESSOX. 



them up. 5. Do you find the man whom you seek ? C.I find him. 
7. Do you pick up what you find ? 8. I pick it up. 9. What is in 
the cupboard? 10. It is our glass bottles and our porcelain plates. 
11. Are the bottles full or empty? 12. They are empty. 13. 
AYhere is the key of the wardrobe ? 14. It is in that closet. 15. 
Where is your cloak ? 16. It is in my wardrobe. 17. Your cup- 
board is small, but your closet is large. 18. Are those casks empty? 
19. No, sir, those casks are full of wine, and these barrels are full 
of wine also. 20. What is in the stable? 21. It is the oxen of 
my father. 22. Who is that man? 23. It is Captain John. 24. 
He is very tall. 25. That lady is beautiful ; she is the friend of 
my sister. 26. Who are those little boys? 27. They are the chil- 
dren of our neighbor. 28. What is on the table? 29. They are 
my books and my papers. 30. Where is the cow? 31. She is in 
the stable. 

32. Does that young girl lend you her pen ? 33. She lends it 
tome. 34. Do you give those apples to your sister? 35. I give 
them to her. 36. I find the air of this room very fresh. 37. What 
is the matter with your sick friend ? 38. He has the fever. 39. 
Do you send the bank-bill to your mother ? 40. I do not send it to 
her. 41. Do you send it to your brothers ? 42. I send it to them. 
43. What is in the stable ? 44. It is the horse of our neighbor. 
45, To whom does the gardener give those apples ? 46. He gives 
them to us. 47. Do you not give them to me ? 48. We give them 
to you. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you find the candlesticks which you seek ? 2. I do not 
find them. 3. Do you look for the hat which is on the floor ? 4. I 
do not look for it. 5. Does the countryman find what he looks for? 
6. He does not find it. 7. Does the merchant wish for the casks 
which are empty ? 8. No, sir, he wishes for those which are full of 
wine. 9. Does the gardener wish for the barrels of the merchant ? 
10. No, sir, he wishes for those which are in the yard. 11. What 
is in the cupboard? 12. It is the porcelain cups. 13. What cow 
do you buy? 14. I buy the one which is in the stable. 15. Do 
you ever go out in the morning? 16. I often go out in the morn- 
ing and in the evening. 17. Who is that man? 18. He is the 
friend of my father. 19. What is on the table? 20. They are the 
letters of my friend. 



THE THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. 



127 



31. — TRENTE ET UNIEME LEQON. 

PAETITIVE NOUNS. 

1. When the word some or any is expressed or understood with a noun, it is said to be 
used in a partitive sense. Nouns so used take de and the article in French, which, according 
to the gender and number, take the following forms. 



Some, any (singular). 

Some, any (plural). 
Some bread. Some meat. 
Some gold. Some water. 
Some casks. Some slates. 
He wishes for some bread and some 
meat. 

We wish for some pens and some ink. 

2. The learner can easily determine, on reflection, whether the noun is used in a parti- 
tive or in a general sense. In the first three of the following sentences the noun is general, 
and therefore takes the article, but not de ; in the last three it is partitive, and takes de with 
the article. 

He loves money. He loves coffee. II aime l'argent. II aime lo cafe. 
He loves chocolate. He has money. II aime le cbocoiat. II a de l'argent. 
He has coffee. He has chocolate. II a du cafe. II a du chocolat. 

3. To the above rule of partitive nouns taking de and the article, there are two excep- 
tions; first exception, a partitive noun being the object of a verb with a negative, takes de, 
without the article. 

He has no money. II n'a pas d'argent. 

Have you no biscuit ? N'avez-vous pas de biscuit ? 

I have some biscuit. J'ai du biscuit. 

4. Sometimes, especially in questions, the form of the phrase is negative, though the 
meaning is not, or does not express total negation; in such cases the article must be used. 

Have you not money ? (meaning af- N'avez-vous pas de l'argent ? 
firmatire.) 

I have no money to spend foolishly. Je n'ai pas de l'argent * pour le de- 

penser follement. 

5. Second exception, partitives immediately preceded by an adjective take de without 
the article. 

I have some pretty buttons. J'ai de jolis boutons. 

He has excellent wine. H a d'excellent vin. 

The above rule (1) and its two exceptions are illustrated in the four following phrases. 
Has he any ivory ? A-t-il de fivoire ? 

He has no ivory. II n'a pas d'ivoire. 

* The meaning is, I have money, but not to spend foolishly. 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

■q u j De la (before a con- 

( sonant). 
p e p j De P (before a vowel 

( or silent h). 
Des. Des. 
Du pain. De la viande. 

De l'or. De Feaii. 

Des tonneaux. Des ardoises. 
II veut du pain et de la viande. 

Nous voulons des plumes et de l'encre. 



3 5 22 12 5 5 3 6 

trentf et unieme, de-pen-ser. 



128 



THE THIRTY-FIRST LESSON. 



He has some good sheep. 
He has some white sheep. 

6. The article and preposition are to be 
construction. 

I wish for some paper, pens, and ink. Je vcux du papier, des plumes et de 



II a de bons moutons. 
II a des moutons blancs. 
repeated before each partitive noun in the same 



To break. 
Foolishly. 
Blind. 



To show. 

Blind of one eye. 

That blind man. 



A portfolio, pocket-book. The lettuce. 

A mattress. The bean. 

Raw. 

Cooked. 

Well-cooked, well-done. 
Hare. 



l'encre. 

Casser. 

Follement. 

Aveugle. 

MASCULINE. 

Un porte-feidlle. 
Un matelas. 
Cm. 

Cuit. ■ 
Bien cuit. 
Feu cuit. 



Montr er. 
Borgne. 
Cet aveugle. 

FEMININE. 

La laitue. 

La f eve, le haricot. 

Crue. 

Cuite. 

Bien cuite. 

Peu cuite. 



1. Qu'est-ce que les espagnols cassent ? 2. lis cassent leurs 
verres. 3. Nous montrez-vous les billets de banque? 4. Nous 
vous les montrons. 5. Choisissez-vous le portefeuille rouge on le 
bleu ? 6. Je choisis le rouge. 7. Le francais choisit-il le matelas 
dur ou le mou ? 8. II choisit le doux. 9. Choisissez-vous le boeuf 
cru ou le cuit? 10. Je choisis le cuit. 11. Nous aimons la viande 
peu cuite et l'anglais l'aime bien cuite. 12. Que desire 1' aveugle? 
13. II veut de l'argent. 14. Cet homme est-il aveugle ? 15. Non, 
monsieur, il est borgne, mais non pas aveugle. 16. Que vous 
montre la paysanne? 17. Elle me montre de la laitue et des hari- 
cots. 18. Ce borgne casse son verre et son assiette. 19. Que 
cassez-vous? 20. Je ne casse rien. 21. Avez-vous du fer? 22. 
Je n'ai pas de fer ; j'ai de l'argent et de bel ivoire. 

1. Do you like chocolate ? 2. I like chocolate and tea. 3. 
Do you like meat rare or well done? 4. I like meat rare and 
eggs well done. 5. Does the Italian like ham raw or cooked ? 6. 
He likes it raw. 7. What does the servant break f 8. He breaks 
(cracks) the nuts. 9. What do you break? 10. We often break 
our glasses and our plates. 11. What do you show to the master? 
12. We show him our copy-books and our slates. 13. Dost thou 
show him thy papers? 14. I show them to him. 15. Do you 
show your brothers that letter? 16. I show it to them. 17. Do 



16 21 6 IS 3 16 1 9 15 9 7 '3 12 7 

cas-ser, mon-trer, folle-ment, borgne, a-veu-gk, porte-feuilZe, lai-tue, mate-las, t&re, 

23 2212 22 1 i 

crue, cuitf, cuite. 



THE THIHTY-SECOND LESSON. 



129 



you wish for some warm biscuit ? 18. No, sir, I wish for some warm 
meat and some cold bread. 

19. 13o you wish for some cool water ? 20. I wish for some 
cool water and some good wine. 21. What has the countryman? 
22. He has some fresh meat and some good apples. 23. What 
have you in your portfolio ? 24. I have some letters and some 
papers in my portfolio. 25. Has the shopkeeper some mattresses'? 
26. He has mattresses and beds (lits). 27. What does the servant 
buy? 28. He buys lettuce, beans, and potatoes. 29. Has the 
gardener lettuce and beans ? 30. He has good lettuce, but he has 
no beans ; he has fruit and beautiful flowers. 31. That man is 
blind of one eye ; he is our neighbor. 32. Father, where is your 
portfolio'? 33. The gentleman has it. 34. "What is on the floor? 
35. It is some beautiful flowers. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you a garden ? 2. I have a garden, but I have no 
gardener. 3. What have you in your garden ? 4. I have violets 
and jonquils in my garden, and some roses in my yard. 5. At my 
house I have neither roses nor violets, but I have fruits. 6. What 
fruits have you ? 7. I have apples and pears, and my uncle has 
some superb peaches and some beautiful plums in his garden. 8. 
Do you not like apples ? 9. I like all fruits (les fruits). 10. A 
fine peach is an excellent fruit. 11. Have you many apples at 
your house ? 12. We have not many apples, but we have many 
pears. 13. What horse do you wish to buy? 14. I wish to buy 
the one which is in the stable. 15. What nuts do you pick up? 
16. We pick up those which we find under the tree, and the chil- 
dren pick up those which are on the floor. 



32.— TRENTE-DETJXlEME LEQON. 

THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

I. Verbs whose infinitive ends in OIE are of the third conjugation. They 
form the past participle by adding TJ to the stem ; as, 

To RECEIVE, RECEIVED. ReC-EVOIR, RE£-Tj. 

Regular verbs of this conjugation * have the following terminations in the indicative 
present : ois, ois, oit, evons, evez, oivent. 

* There are only seven regular verbs of this conjugation: S'apereevoir, concevoir, 
Decevoir, Devoir, jPercevoir, lieeevoir, Redevoir. 



4 4 20 4 22 

re-ce-voir, re-cu. 



ISO 



THE THIRTY-SECOND LESSON, 



Je regois, tu recois, il recoit, nous re-cevons, vous re-ceves, Us resolvent, 
I receive, thou receivest, lie receives, we receive, you receive, they receive. 

Do you receive our notes? Recevez-vous nos billets ? 

We receive them all. Nous les recevons tous. 

I receive many letters. Je rcc,ois beaucoup de lettres. 

Why. Because. JPourquoi. Farce que. 

Badly. Sad. Mai. Triste. 

As adjectives ending in e are common gender, they will be placed hereafter in either 
column of genders, as may be convenient. 

A little. Very. Un peu. Tres, fort, bien. 

2. Tres is always joined by a hyphen to the following word. Tres and fort have about 
the same force, l>ien is more used in exclamations. 

Very hard. Tres-dur, fort dur, bien dur. 

3. As an exclamation, lien denotes approbation ; eh Men is merely introductory to 
something further to be said. 

How do you like this book? Comment trouvez-vous ce livre? 

Well ; it is a very good work. Bien ; e'est un bon ouvrage. 

This little boy does not study at all. Ce petit garcon n'etudie pas die tout. 

Well, I am going to speak to his Eh bien, je vais parler a son pere. 
father. 

Some. Some difficulty. Quelque. Quelque dij/ictdte. 

A few, sofne. A few apples. Quelques. Quelques pommes. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The vinegar. A radish. Le vinaigre. Une rave. 

Of which one. Duquel. De laquelle. 

Of which ones. Besquels. Desquelles. 

4. Objective pronouns with a preposition expressed, always follow the verb. Their 
form, then, (as seen Lesson 16), is as follows : 

Of me, to me, of us, to us. De moi, a moi, de nous, a nous. 

Of thee, to thee, of you, to you. De toi, a toi, de vous, a vous. 

Of him, to him, of them, to them. De lui, a lui, d'eux, a eux. 

Of her, to her, of them, to them. D'elle, a elle, d'elles, a elles. 

Of what, to what. De quoi, h quoi. 

/-Without a verb, personne; with a verb of 
r J which it is the object, ne before the verb 

Ao one, nobody. < and personne after it . with a verb of 

' which it is the subject, personne ne. 
YVhom do you seek ? No one. Qui cherchez-vous ? Personne. 

I seek nobody. Je ne cherche personne. 

No one is looking for me. Personne ne me cherche. 

To fill with. To load with. Bemplir de. Charger de. ' 

5. Verbs which require zoith after them in English, require de in French. 
He fills the cask with wine. II remplit le tonneau de vin. 

4 20 4 20 4 4 21 4 4 6 4 20 13 20 1 4 11 ? 1R 

re-cois, re-coi£, re-ce-vons. re-ce-ves, re-coiven?, pour-quoi, parce-ke, triste, trc.s, fovt, 

]5 3 18 1 5 4 12 12 22 (5 14 7 1 2 5 7 5 7 15 3 

com-meni, ou-vrage, kel-ke, di/-fi-cul-te, vin-aigrc?, rave, du-kel, des-kel.5, per-sou»d, rem- 

12 1 6 

plir, char-ger. 



THE THIRTY-SECOND LESSON. 



131 



I fill the chest with wood. Je remplis de bois * le cofire. 

They load the ship with cotton. lis chargent le navire de coton. 

1. Kecois-tu les lettres que jet'envoie? 2. Je les recois. 3. 
Votre pere recoit-il ce que vous lui envoyez? 4. Mon pere le 
recoit, mais mes freres ne regoivent pas ce que je leur envoie. 5. 
Pourquoi l'homme riche est-il triste? 6. II est triste parce qu'il 
est malade. 7. Cet homme parle-t-il Hen francais? 8. Nod, 
monsieur, il le parle tres-mal. 9. Ce petit garcon etudie un peu, 
et son cousin etudie fort bien. 10. Comment trouvez-vous ce dis- 
cours? 11. Bien; il est excellent. 12. Votre frere n'etudie pas 
du tout. 13. Eh bien ; je vais parler au maitre. 14. De quoi 
remplissez-vous ce baril? 15. Je le remplis de vinaigre. 16. Qu'a 
le domestique? 17. II a quelque laitue et quelques raves. 18. 
Qui cherchez-vous ? 19. Je ne cherche personne. 20. Qui est 
dans cette chambre 1 21. Personne. 22, Parlez-vous de moi? 
23. Nous parlous de vous. 24. Ces paysans parlent-ils de toil 
25. lis parlent de moi. 26. De quoi parlez-vous? 27. Je parle 
de mes lecons. 28. Desquelles parlez-vous ? 29. Je parle de mes 
lecons de francais. 

1. Do you speak of us? 2. We do not speak of you. 3. Does 
the little boy speak of the master ? 4. He speaks of him. 5. 
Does he speak of the scholars ? 6. He speaks of them. 7. Do 
you speak of those young girls 1 8. We speak of them. 9. Do 
you speak of your sister ? 10. I do not speak of her. 11. No one 
is coming here to-day. 12. With what do you load that boat? 
13. I load it with butter and flour. 14. Does the cook wish for 
the radishes ? 15. He wishes for the radishes and the vinegar. 
16. Has he not some radishes ? 17. He has a few radishes and a 
little lettuce. 18. Does the German speak English well? 19. He 
speaks it badly. 20. Why are you afraid? 21. I am afraid 
because I have no gun. 

22. Do you receive the books which I send you? 23. I receive 
them. 24. How do you like them ? 25. Well, they are excellent 
works. 26. Why is the gardener sad? 27. He is sad because 
he has no fruit. 28. Why do you look for the captain? 29. 
Because I desire to speak to him. 30. What notes dost thou re- 
ceive? 31. I receive those which my friend sends me. 32. Does 

* This construction is used to avoid ambiguity, as coffre de bois means also chest of 
wood. 



132 



THE THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 



the Frenchman speak English well? 33. No, sir, he speaks it 
very badly. 34. What is in the stable ? 35. It is the horses of 
my friend. 36. Of whom do you speak 1 37. I speak of the 
mason. 38. Of which one do you speak? 39. I speak of the old 
mason. 40. Of what does the little girl speak? 41. She speaks 
of her pen. 42. Of which one does she speak? 43. She speaks 
of the gold pen. 44. The cook has no radishes. 45. Well, I am 
going to buy some radishes and some lettuce. 46. With what do 
you fill that bottle ? 47. I fill it with wine. 48. This bottle is 
full of vinegar. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. With what does the merchant fill his cask ? 2. He fills it 
with vinegar. 3. Has that man many books? 4. He has few 
books ; he has a few friends, and a little money. 5. What have you 
good (de Ion) ? 6. I have a little good wine. 7. Do you receive 
the letters which we send you? 8. I receive them all. 9. Do 
your brothers receive their letters? 10. They receive them. 11. 
Of whom does the master speak ? 12. He speaks of thee and of 
me. 13. Does he speak of the beautiful ladies? 14. He speaks 
of them. 15. Of which ones does he speak? 16. He speaks of 
those who are going to church. 17. Do you speak of the same, or 
of the others? 18. I speak of neither. 19. Is not that man one- 
eyed (borgne) ? 20. No, madam, he is blind. 21. Have you bank- 
bills in your pocket-book ? 22. No, sir. 23. Whom are you look- 
ing for? 24. I am looking for no one. 



33.— TRENTE-TROISlEME LEQON. 



THE PRONOUN EN. 



To doubt, to doubt of. 

To thank, to thank for. 

To have need of to need, to want. 

To know, knowing, known. 

Je sais, tu sais, il sait, 

I know, thou knowest, he knows, 

Pleased, contented (with). 
The foot The hand. 

A service. The mouth. 

A penknife. Clean. 



Douter, douter de. 

Remercier, remercier de. 

Avoir besoin de. 

Savoir, sachant, su. 
nous savons, vous saves, Us savent, 
we know, you know, they know. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Content (de). Contente (de). 

Le pied. La main. 

Un service. La bouche. 

Un canif. Propre. 



18 6 4 7 12 B 4 1814 1 20 1 3 6 6 1 21 1 6 1 21 

dou-ter, re-mer-cier. be-zom, sa-voir, sa-chan£ sais, satf, sa-vons, sa-ves, savent, con- 

3 21 3 125 14 7 12 18 1 19 15 

iaut, con-tentc, pied, main, ser-vice, bouch<?, ca-nif, propr<?. 



THE THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 



133 



His or her courage. Dirty. 
The linen. The head. 

New (newly made, bought new). 
New, novel (new in kind). 
I fill the chest with linen. 



Son courage. 
Le linge. 
Neuf. 



Sale. 
La tete. 
Neuve. 
Nouvelle. 
Je remplis le coffre de linge. 



1. Toile is linen cloth ; linge is linen made into articles of use. 

2. In speaking of the parts of the body, the articles le, la, etc., are to be preferred to 
m on, ton, son, etc., when the possessor is otherwise sufficiently denoted. Observe also the 
French use of avoir in phrases like the following. In such phrases the adjective always fol- 
lows the noun. 



That man's foot is large. 
His hand is large also. 
That lady's mouth is small. 
Her head is too large. 
To take care (of), to have care (of). 
He takes care of my garden. 
Of it, of them, from it, from them, 
of him, of her, some, f rom there. 

3. En is a pronoun, having, as indicated by the above definitions, the force of de with 
lit i, elle, eux, elles, or cela ; also often an adverb for id, or Id. As a pronoun, it usually 
refers to things or animals. When therefore a noun of the third person, and object of de is 
replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun is to be en, unless persons are referred to. 



Cet homme a le pied grand. 
II a la main grande aussi. 
Cette dame a la bouche petite. 
Elle a la tete trop grosse. 
Avoir soin (de). 
II a soin de mon jardin. 

En (placed before the verb). 



Have you need of our service ? 
I have need of it. 

Does the boy take care of the horses? 

He takes care of them. 

My little dog is sick, and my sister has 

care of him. 
My little brother is sick, and my sister 

has care of him. 
Do you come from the brook? 
I come from there. 
Do you fill the chests with linen ? 
I fill them with it. 

Does he thank you for your service ? 
He thanks me for it. 
Are you pleased with your boy ? 
I am pleased with him. 



Avez-vous besoin de notre service ? 
Ten ai besoin. 

Le garcon a-t-il soin des chevaux ? 
II en a soin. 

Mon petit chien est malade, et ma soeur 
en a soin. 

Mon petit frere est malade, et ma sceur 

a soin de lui. 
Venez-vous du ruisseau ? 
Ten viens. 

Remplissez-vous les coffres de linge ? 
Je les en remplis. 

Vous remercie-t-il de votre service ? 
II m'en remercie. 

Etes-vous content de votre garcon ? 
Ten suis content. 



"We see in these sentences that en supplies the place of de and its object. So partitive 
nouns, being preceded by de, are replaced by en. 



Have you some linen ' 
I have some. 
Has the Italian coura< 
He has none. 



Avez-vous du linge ? 
Ten ai. 

L'italien a-t-il du courage ? 
II n'en a point. 



con-rage, sale, linge, tete, neuf. neuve, nou-veau, nou-velk. toile. en. 



134 



THE THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 



En is to be used in French, when of it or of them may be understood in English. 
I hare wine, have you some ? tTai du viu, en avez-vous ? 

I have some good. JVw ai de bon. 

TTave you butter ? I ha^ve. Avez-vous da beurre ? Ten ai. 

1. Doutez-vous de mon courage ? 2. Je n'en doute pas. 3. 
Doutez-vous du courage de ce soldat ? 4. Xous en doutons. 5. 
Eemerciez-vous cet bom me de son service ? 6. Je Ten remercie. 7. 
Avez-vous besoin de ces papiers ! 8. J* en ai besoin. 9. Qui a 
soin de votre chambre ? 10. Le doniestique en a soin. 11. Etes- 
vous contents de vos livres ! 12. Xous en sommes contents. 13. 
Ce mouchoir neuf est-il sale ! 14. Xon, monsieur, il est tii-s- 
propre. 15. Avez-vous de bons canifs ? 16. Je n'en ai pas. 17. 
Cet enfant a-t-il peur des fusils ? 18. II en a peur. 19. Parlez- 
vous de ces billets de banque ? 20. Xous en parlous. 21. Savez- 
vous ou est votre frere ? 22. II est a la maison. 23. Savez-vous 
la grammaire ? 24. Je la sais bien. 25. Cet ecolier sait-il bienla 
gram m aire ? 26. II sait bien la grammaire et l'histoire. 

1. Has the gardener lettuce and beans ? 2. He has some. 
3. Do you receive some newspapers this morning ? 4. I receive 
some. 5. Does not the Frenchman speak English badly ? 6. 
Yes, very badly. 7. "Why is that boy sad ? 8. He is sad be- 
cause his father is sick. 9. I have a little wine ; do you wish for 
some (en voulez-rous) ? 10. Xo. thank you. 11. Do you thank 
your friends for their service ? 12. TTe thank them for it. 13. 
Do they thank you for your flowers ? 14. They thank me for 
them. 15. Are those ladies pleased with their flowers ? 16. They 
are pleased with them. 17. That servant's feet are large, and his 
hands are large also. 18. Has the shopkeeper some good pen- 
knives ? 19. He has some (de) good. 20. What have you white? 
21. I have some white paper. 22. Have you any thing black ? 
23. I have nothing black. 

1. Do those scholars know history well ? 2. They do not know 
it well. 3. Dost thou know grammar ? 4. I know it well. 5. 
Are those new handkerchiefs clean or dirty ? 6. These handker- 
chiefs are clean and those are dirty. 7. What have you new ! 8. 
I have some new boots and some new shoes. 9. That lady's hand 
is small and her foot is small also. 10. Her head is large and her 
mouth is large also. 11. Has the shopkeeper penknives ? 12. He 
has some. 13. Do you fill the chest with linen ? 14. I fill it with 



THE THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON". 



135 



it. 15. Does the captain doubt of our courage? 16. He does not 
doubt of it. 17. That man's head is small and his mouth large. 
18. Have you need of money 1 19. I have need of some. 20. Is 
that lady afraid of the dog? 21. She is afraid of him. 22. Do 
you know your lessons well 1 23. We know them well. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What have you in these barrels? 2. This one is a barrel of 
wine, and that one is full of vinegar. 3. Is your vinegar good? 

4. It is vinegar of white wine, and it is excellent ; will you taste it ? 

5. No, thank you (merci) ; I will buy a little. 6. How much do 
you wish ? 7. Not much ; have you some demijohns (dames-jeannes, 
fern.) ? 8. Yes, sir, I have some large and some small ones. 9. 
Well, a large demijohn full is all that I wish. 10. I am going to 
fill you one. 11. Do you not wish for a box (line caisse) of red wine ? 
12. Have you some good? 13. Will you please taste of this? 14. 
How do you like (trouvez) it? 15. It is not bad ; how many boxes 
of it have you ? 10. I have half a dozen ( une demi-douzaine). 17. 
Well, I wish for them all. 18. Do you not wish, also, for a few 
bottles of white wine? I have some very good. 19. Thank you, I 
have some (du) white still in (a) the house. 20. If you wish, I am 
going to send the wine and the vinegar to your house. 21. Yes, 
sir, if you please. 

34.— TRENTE-QUATRIfiME LEQON. 

EX CONTINUED. FOUETH CONJUGATION. 

Five, Six, Seven, Eight. Cinq, Six, Sept, Huit. 

1. En, though commonly spoken of things or animals, when used in a partitive sense 
may refer to persons as well as things. 

Have you brothers ? Avez-vous des freres ? 

I have some. J'en ai. 

How many have you ? Combien en avez-vous ? 

I have six ; my friend has seven. J'en ai six ; mon ami en a sept. 

2. In other cases, though en may refer to persons, the objective pronoun with de is pre- 
ferred. 

My friend is sick, and I take care of Mon ami est malade, et fai soin de lui 
him. (rather than fen ai soin). 

Your horse is here, and the boy takes Yotre cheval est ici, et le garcon en a 
care of him. soin. 

3. An adjective belonging to a partitive noun understood, takes or omits the article the 
same as if the noun were expressed. 

li li 12 J2 5 22 J2 

cink, cinq* sis, six,* sept, huit. 

* The last consonant of cinq and six are not sounded before a noun beginning with a consonant. The x of 
six is pronounced like s in all other cases. Sept and huit sound the final consonant only at the end of a phrase, 
or before a vowel. 



136 



THE THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



Have you ink ? Avez-vous de l'eucre ? 

I have some good. I have some black. J'en ai de bonne. J'en ai de la noire.* 
4. En used with any other objective pronoun must be placed after it. 



Some to me. Some to tis. 

Some to thee. Some to you. 

Some to him, or her. Some to them. 
You have fruit ; do you give me some ? 
I give thee some. I give them some. 
I give him some. I give you some. 
They give us some. 



JkTen. Nous en. 

T'en. Vous en. 

Lui en. Leur en. 

Vous avez du fruit ; irfen donnez-vous ? 
Je fen donne. Je leur en donne. 
Je lui en donne. Je vous en donne. 
lis nous en donnent. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

5. Verbs whose infinitive ends in EE are of the FOURTH CONJUGATION. Those 
which are regular form the past participle by adding v to the stem. They have the termi- 
nations of the indicative present as follows : 

S, S, T, ONS, EZ, ENT. 

To return (give back), returning, returned. Ren-dre, ren-dant, ren-du. 

Je rends, tu rends, il rend, nous rendons, vous rendes, ilsrendent. 
The proper termination of the third person singular is here blended with d of the stem. 

6. Those in UIRE form the past participle by adding t to the stem. In the indicative 
present they take s after the stem before a vowel, and terminate thus : 

To conduct, conducting, conducted. Condui-re, conduisant, condui-t. 

Je condui-s, tu condui-s, il condui-t, nous condui-sons, vous condui-sez, Us condid-sdil, 
I conduct, thou conductest, he conducts, we conduct, you conduct, they conduct. 

FEMININE. 



The care. A case, box. 

The wit, spirit, mind. A demijohn. 
His or her judgment. A bridle. 
The village. ' A saddle. 

That ivorhnan. That working-woman. 
Green. 

The turf. The verdure. 

Gray. 

Not at all. 

At the same time. 

Where dost thou conduct the blind 
man ? 

I conduct him to the village. 
What do you give back to the work- 
man? 

I give back to him his green cloth. 



MASCULINE. 

Le soin. 
Hesprit. 
Son jugement. 
Le village. 
Cet ouvrier. 
Vert. 

Le gazon. 
Gris. 
Pas die tout. 

En mime temps, au meme temps. 
Ou conduis-tu l'aveugle ? 

Je le conduis au village. 
Que rendez-vous a l'ouvrier ? 

Je lui rends son drap vert. 



Une caisse. 
Une damc-jeanne. 
Une bride. 
Une selle. 
Cette oitvriere. 
Verte. 

La verdure. 
Grise. 



* Bon comes before the noun and omits the article, noir comes after the noun and takes 
it. With the noun expressed, it would be, J'ai de bonne encre, J'ai de iSencre noire. 

3 3 3 3 22 3 3 3 VI 3 6 3 21 32 2 21 C2J2 

rendre, ren-dan^, ren-du, rends, vend, ren-dons, ren-dea, render, con-duire, con-clui- 

3 21 2212 21 2212 21 2212 21 22 12 21 21 22 12 6 21 22 12 18. i 7 5 12 

san£, con-dui£, con-duis, con-dui^, con-dui-sons, con-dui-ses, con-duiser?i, soin, caisse, es-pri£, 

1 1 22 3 12 12 I 5 18 125 7 7 1 21 7 23 12 l_8 

dame-jeanne, juge-men^, bride, viZ-lage, sell*?, ou-vrie?', vert, verte, ga-zon, ver-dure, gris,grize. 



THE THIKTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



137 



1. Que vous rend cet homme ? 2. II me rend mon canif. 3. 
Oft les ouvriers conduisent-ils cet aveugle? 4. lis le conduisent 
chez lui. 5. Qu'ont les ouvrieres ? 6. Elles n'ont rien. 7. Sont- 
elles chez elles aujourd'hui? 8. Elles sont toujours chez elles. 9. 
Me donnes-tu des rleurs? 10. Je t'en donne. 11. En donnes-tu a 
l'ouvrier ? 12. Je lui en donne. 13. Nous en donne-t-il ? 14. II 
vous en donne. 15. Donnez-vous des billets de ban que a ces homines'? 
16. Nous leur en donnons. 17. J'ai cinq pommes ; combien en 
avez-vous? 18. J'en ai huit. 19. Doutez-vous de mon jugement? 
20. Je n'en doute pas. 21. De quoi doutez-vous? 22. Je doute du 
jugement et de I'esprit de cet ouvrier. 23. Qu'a le niarchand? 24. 
II a du drap vert et du gris. 25. Oli con duisez- vous 1'etranger ? 
26. Nous le conduisons au village. 27. Nous rendons la caisse et 
la dame-jeanne de vin au marchand. 28. J'ai une selle et une 
bride, mais je n'ai pas de fouet. 29. Votre fouet est sur le gazon 
dans le jardin. 30. Ce petit garcon n'etudie pas du tout. 

1. Do you give back to the neighbor his saddle and bridle ? 2. 
I give them back to him. 3. Does the blind man give back to you 
your money? 4. He gives it back to me. 5. Do the scholars give 
back to us our books ? 6. They give them back to us. 7. Does 
the workman conduct the blind man to the store? 8. No, sir, he 
conducts him to the village. 9. Do you conduct the stranger to 
the village? 10. No, sir, we conduct him to the river. 11. Who 
is at your house? 12. It is a friend of my father. 13. Who is in 
that room? 14. No one. 15. To whom do you give that box of 
wine? 16. I give it to no one. 17. What dost thou give back to 
the merchant? 18. I give back to him the green ribbons and the 
gray cloth. 19. What do you give to that blind man? 20. I give 
him a demijohn of wine. 

21. Are you going to the village to-day? 22. No, sir, I am 
going to the country to-day. 23. Do you doubt of the stranger's wit? 
24. I doubt of it. 25. Do you doubt of his judgment? 26. I do 
not doubt of it. 27. Does your uncle doubt of his wit or of his 
judgment ? 28. He doubts of both. 29. Do you give back to the 
merchant the green cloth or the gray ? 30. We give back to him 
neither. 31. How many pears have you? 32. I have eight; I 
have also six peaches and seven apples. 33. How many sisters 
have you? 34. I have five. 35. Do you give my brother some 



133 



TKE THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



fruit ? 38. I give him some, and I give thee some also. 37. Where 
are your flowers 1 38. They are on the turf in the garden. 39. Do 
you give some to my brothers % 40. I give some to them, at the 
same time that [que) I give some to you. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you sometimes receive letters from your friend Peter? 2. 
I receive some often ; if you wish I am going to show you his last. 
3. You are very good; I never receive letters from him (de ses let- 
tres). 4. He speaks to me of you in all those which I receive from 
him. 5. Does he like the climate of the country where he is ? 6. 
He does not like it much. 7. I wish to go to Mr. A.'s, and I want 
your horse this morning. 8. Well, if you come to my house, I will 
let you have him (je vais vous le don iter). 9. I thank you much. 
10. Do you wish for the saddle and bridle? 11. If you please; I 
have a saddle which is not very good, but I have no bridle. 12. 
Well, I am going to lend you mine, if you come to my house. 13. 
Thank you, lam going for them (je vais les chercher) ; you are very 
good. 14. That (cela) is a very little thing (bien pen de chose). 
15. Which horse do you wish for? 16. Either; are you pleased 
with your big horse ? 17. Yes, I am well pleased with him ; but 
the little one is not bad. 18. Have you need of two horses? 19. 
Sometimes. 



35.— TREXTE-CIXQUIEME LEQON. 

FOUETH CONJUGATION CONTINUED. 

1. Verbs in ais-dee, eixdbe, and oixdee, form the past participle by adding t to the stem 
and dropping the preceding d. They drop the d generally before a silent consonant, and 
change nd into gn before a vowel. 

To pity, pitying, pitied. Plaindre, plaignant, plaint. 

Je plains, tu plains, il plaint, nous plaiGSons, tous plaiGxez, Us plaiGsent, 
I pity, thou pitiest, he pilies, we pity, you pity, they pity. 

2. Those in aitp.e and oitee have a t after the stem only before r. They take ss before 
a vowel, and form the past participle by adding u to the stem, and dropping the preceding 
diphthong. 

To BE ACQUAINTED WITH, TO KXOW. CoXXAiTRE. 

Knotting, known. Connai-ssant, conn-u. 

Je connais, tu connais, ilconnait, nous connaissons, vous connaissez, Us connaissent, 
I Know, thou knowest, he knows, we know, you know, they know 

8. Connattre is to know objects of the senses; savoir, to know what is learned and re> 
membered. 

I know him, and I know where he lives. Je le connais, et je sais ou il demeure. 

14 7 3 14 14 14 7 21 7 6 7 !5 8 

plaindre, plai-srnanf. plain?, plains, plain?, plai-gnons, plai-scnes, plaiirnew?, con-naitre, 

15 7 3 15 w 22 i5 7 15 7 15 7 21 15 7 " 6 io 7 

co?i-nais-san/, co?i-nu, co?i-nai-s, co/i-nai?, co?i-nais-sons, co/i-nais-ses, con-naisse7it. 



THE THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



139 



Pleasure. A foicn tain. 

The name. A pitcher, jug. 

The lily. The pansy. 

To dwell, to live, to remain. To forget. 

Nine, Ten, Eleven, Twelve. 

As far as, to. With pleasure. 

Some one, somebody, any one. 

Some ones, some, a few. 

Has any one my blue cap ? 

No one has it. 



MASCULINE. 

Le plaisir. 
Le nom, 
Le lis. 

Demeurer, rester. 
Neuf, Dix,* Onze, 



FEMININE. 

Une fontaine. 
Une cruche. 
La pensce. 
Oublier. 
Douze. 



JusqxCa. Avec plaisir. 

Quelqitun. Quelqu\ine. 
Quelques-uns. Quelques-unes. 
Quelqu'un a-t-il mon bonnet bleu ? 
Personne ue l'a. 



3. Quelque is an adjective, and belongs to a noun ; quelqu'un is a pronoun, and used 
without a noun. 

Have you not some- pain? N'avez-vous pas quelque peine? 

I have a few friends. J'ai quelques amis. 

I have a few. J'en ai quelques-uns. 

4. Quelqu'un, in a general sense, is always masculine singular. 



Do you know any one here ? 
I know.some of these ladies. 
Some of those flowers are very beau- 
tiful. 

We live in Boston. 

I sometimes forget your name. 

I go as far as the fountain. 

Do you not pity those poor people? 

We pity them. 

We know that man, and we know from 



Connaissez-vous quelqu'un ici ? 
Je connais quelques-unes de ces dames. 
Quelques-unes de ces fleurs sont tres- 
belles. 

Nous demeurons a Boston. 

J'oublie quelquefois votre nom. 

Je vais jusqu'a la fontaine. 

Ne plaignez-vous pas ces pauvres gens? 

Nous les plaignons. 

Nous connaissons cet homme, et nous 
savons d'ou. il vient. 



whence he comes. 

5. Partitive nouns, with ni .. ni, take neither de nor the. article. 
I have neither bread nor wine. Je n'ai ni pain ni vin. 

He buys neither sugar nor tea. II n'achete ni sucre ni the. 

6. XTe before the verb and que after it mean but or only. 
Have you only twelve apples ? N'avez-vous que douze pommes ? 

I have only nine or ten. Je n'en ai que neuf ou dix. 

You have but eleven. Yous n'en avez que onze.f 

1. Cet homme connait-il quelqu'un ici 1 2. II ne connait per- 
sonne. 3. Conuais-tu quelqu'un de mes parents"? 4. J'en connais 

* Sept, huit, neuf, dix, have the final consonant sounded at the end of a phrase, or 
before a vowel, but not before a consonant. 

t i?is never elided before onze and onziem'e. 

7 !2 21 7 21 22 12 3 6 4 9 6 5 6 38 !2 6 9 32 

plai-zir, fon-tuine, nom, cruche, lis, pen-see, de-meu-rer, res-ter, ou-blier, neuf* diz* 

21 18 22 1 5 5 24 5 22 5 4 24 5 4 22 

onze, douze, jusk', a-vec, kel-k'un, kel-k'une, kel-kez-uns, kel-kez-unes. 

* Before a noun beginning with a vowel, the final letter of neuf is pronounced like v, before one beginning 
with a consonant it is silent ; otherwise it is sounded as/. Before a vowel, the final consonant of dix is pro- 
nounced z, before a consonant it is silent, at the end of a clause and in dix-sept, dix-huit, dix-neuf, it has the 
sound of e. 



140 



THE THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



quelques-uns. 5. Ces etrangers connaissent-ils quelqu'un dans ce 
village ? 6. lis connaissent quelques-uns de nos amis. 7. Con- 
naissez-vous quelqu'u'ne de ces clames ? 8. Nous en connaissons 
quelques-unes. 9. Qui est-ce que vous plaignez? 10. Je plains cet 
aveugle. 11. Connaissez-vous le bon Jean? 12. Je le connais et 
je sais ou il demeure. 13. Pourquoi plaignez-vous ce monsieur? 
14. Je le plains parce qu'il n'a pas d'amis. 15. L'allemand plaint- 
il son cheval? 16. II ne le plaint pas. 17. Les enfants plaignent- 
ils ce pauvre animal? 18. lis le plaignent. 19. Plaignez-vous ces 
pauvres animaux? 20. Je les plains. 21. Qu'a votre garcon ? 22. 
II a une cruche pleine d'eau. 23. Voulez-vous bien me donner des 
lis et des pansees? 24. Avec plaisir. 25. Avez-vous beaucoup 
d'argent ? 26. Je n'ai que dix dollars. 

1. Have you some fresh water? 2. Yes, sir, I have a pitcher 
full. 3. What flowers has the gardener? 4. He has lilies and 
pansies. 5. Where does your friend dwell ? 6. Hedw T ellsin (d) 
New York. 7. Do you dwell in this village ? 8. No, sir, I dwell 
in Boston. 9. Do you sometimes forget the merchant's name? 10. 
We forget it often. 11. Does he ever forget your name ? 12. He 
never forgets it. 13. How many oxen has the countryman? 14. 
He has ten oxen, nine cows, and eleven sheep. 15. Has the fish- 
erman many fish ? 16. He has only twelve. 17. Have you some 
of my books ? 18. I have a few. 19. Do you know any one of those 
gentlemen ? "20. I know some of them. 21. Are you going as far 
as the fountain ? 22. I am going as far as the village. 

23. Is that pitcher empty % 24. No, sir, it is full of water. 25. 
Have you much water ? 26. No, sir, I have only that pitcher full. 
27. Do you know where the servant is going? 28. He is going as 
far as the fountain. 29. What does the gardener give you? 30. 
He gives me flowers. 31. Does he give you lilies or pansies ? 32. 
He gives me neither lilies nor pansies. 33. Why do you pity that 
child ? 34. I pity him because he has neither bread nor meat. 
35. What has the countrywoman ? 36. She has some apples, some 
peaches, and a few flowers. 37. Do you know any of those ladies ? 
38. I know some of them. 39. I have need of your dictionary ; 
have you it here? 40. Yes; which do you wish for? 41. I wish 
for that one. 42. Does the countryman give you some fruit? 43. 
He gives me some. 44. Does he give us some ? 45. He gives you 



THE THIRTY-SIXTH LESSOX. 



141 



some. 46. Does he carry some to the sick man ? 47. He carries 
some to him. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. George, are you coming with me ? 2. Where are you going? 
3. I am going as far as the fountain. 4. Why are you going to the 
fountain % 5. 1 am going for (chercher) a pitcher of fresh water for 
(pour) my aunt. 6. Where is Charles ? 7. He is studying his les- 
son under the large tree in the garden. 8. Have you many flow- 
ers in your garden ? 9. Not many (pas beaucoup), we have some 
roses, some lilies, and some beautiful tulips. 10. At our house, we 
have no lilies, but we have many violets and pansies. 11. I like 
pansies very much, but I like violets still better (mieux). 12. I am 
going to give you a few violets to (pour) carry to your aunt (ma- 
dame voire tante) ; she likes them much. 



36. — TRENTE- S1XI&ME LEQON. 

THE PAST-INDEFINITE TENSE. 

Had. Eu (past part, of avoir). 

Been. Ete (past part, of eire). 

1. The past-indefinite tense is formed by joining the past participle to the present 
tense of the auxiliary verb avoir. Thus : 

Past-in definite of avoir, to have, 
J^ai eu, tu as eu, il a eu, nous avons eu, vous avez eu, Us ont eu, 

I have had, thou hast had, he has had, we have had, you have had, they have bad. 

Past-indefinite of etre, to be. 
J'ai ete, tu as ete, il a ete, nous avons ete, vous avez ete, Us ont ete, 

I have been, thou hast, etc., he has, etc., we have, etc., you have, etc., they have, etc. 

Past-indefinite of parler, to speak (1st Conj.). 

J y ai parte, tu as parte, il a parte, nous avons parte, vous avez parte, its ont parte, 
I have spoken, thou hast, etc., he has, etc., we have, etc., you have, etc., they have, etc. 

Past-indefinite o/fintr, to finish (2d Conj.). 

J^aifini, tu as fini, il afini, nous avons fini, nous avez jini, Us ont fini, 

I have finished, thou hast, etc., he has, etc., we have, etc., you have, etc., they have, etc. 

Past-indefinite of recevoir, to receive (3d Conj.). 

J'airecu, tuasrecu, ilarecu, nous avons regu, vous avez recu, Us ont recu, 
I have received, thou hast, etc., he has, etc., we have, etc., you have, etc., they have, etc. 

Past-indefinite o/"rendre, to give bach (4th Conj.). 

J' ai rendu, tu as rendu, il a rendu, nous avons rendu, vous avez rendu, Us ont rendu, 

I have given back, thou hast, etc., he has, etc., we have, etc., you have, etc., they have, etc. 

2. This tense is called past-indefinite because it is used in speaking of indefinite past 
ume, as, I have spoken to your orother, J^ai parte & voire frere (time not defined). It is 



5 6 12 12 

c-te, fi-ni. 



142 



THE THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



used also of definite past time, which includes the present day, as, / spoke to your brother 
this morning, this month, etc., J^ai parte d voire frere ce matin, eemois, etc. 

3. The negatives and pronouns which are placed before the verb in the simple tenses are 
placed before the auxiliary in the compound tenses, and the last negative word is placed 
between the auxiliary and the past participle. 



Have you not had my book ? 
I have not had it. 

To believe, believing, believed. 

Je crois, tu crois, il croit, 

I believe, thou believest, he believes, 

You believe that he is rich. 
I believe that he is not rich. 



My grandfather. My grandmother. 
His grandson. His granddaughter. 
A father-in-law. A mother-in-law. 
A step-father. A step-mother. 

( Your daughter-in- 
Your step-son. -j law, or step- 

( daughter. 

Your son-in-law. 

Did you give the fruit to your grand- 
father ? 

I did not give it to him. 

Hast thou not found thy pencil ? 

I have not found it. 

Somebody's, that of somebody (sing.). 

Somebody's, those of somebody 
(plur.). 

Nobody's, that of nobody (sing.). 
Nobody's, those of nobody (plur.). 



nous croyons. 
we believe, 



N'avez-vous pas eu mon livre ? 
Je ne l'ai pas eu. 

Croire, croyant, cru (fem. crue). 

vous croyez, Us croient, 
you believe, they believe. 

Vous croyez qu'il est riche. 
Je crois qu'il n'est pas riche. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Mon grand-pere. Ma grand 1 mere. 
Son petit-fils. Sa petite-file. 



Un beau- 



pere. 



Une belle-mere. 



Votre beau-fls. Votre belle-fille. 

Yotre gendre, or votre beau-fls. 
Avez-vous donne le fruit a votre 

grand-pere ? 
Je ne le lui ai pas donne. 
N'as-tu pas trouve ton crayon ? 
Je ne l'ai pas trouve. 
Celui de quelqu'un, celle de quelqiCun. 
Ceux de quelqu'un, celles de quelqu'un. 

Celui de personne, celle de personne. 
Ceux de personne, celles de personne. 



1. Avez-vous eu mon livre? 2. Nous ne l'avons pas eu. 3. 
Votre grand'mere a-t-elle ete chez vous ? 4. Non, monsieur, elle 
a ete a l'eglise. 5. As-tu trouve ton canif ? G. Je l'ai trouve. 
7. Ces ouvriers ont-ils fini leur ouvrage (work) ? 8. lis l'ont fini. 
9. Votre beau-pere a-t-il recu le billet de son petit-fils? 10. II ne 
l'a pas recu. 11. La petite-fille de votre voisin vous a-t-elle rendu 
votre livre ? 12. Elle me l'a rendu. 13. Ces ecoliers croient que 
vous avez eu leurs plumes. 14. Avez-vous ete au marche ? 15. 
Non, madame, nous avons ete cbez votre belle-mere. 16. N' avez- 
vous pas eu le cheval de votre beau-frere 1 ? 17. Nous ne l'avons 
pas eu. 18. Ou ces petites filles ont-elles ete? 19. Elles ont ete 



?0 20 123 TO 20 20 123 20 12(3 20 3 

croiiv, cro-yan£, crois, croi£, cro-yons, cro-ye.?, croient, gendre. 



THE THIRTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



143 



cliez votre belle-soeur. 20. Notre voisin a-t-il trouve son gendre % 

21. II l'a trouve. 22. Avez-vous trouve le mouchoir de quelqu'un ? 
23. J'ai trouve celui de quelqu'un. 24. Avez-vous eu les plumes 
de quelqu'un? 25. Nous n'avons eu celles de personne. 26. 
Avez-vous les livres de quelqu'un? 27. Non, mademoiselle, je 
n'ai ceux de personne. 28. Nous croyons que votre pere est riche; 
notre voisin croit qu'il est pauvre. 

1. Has the neighbor's grandson your horse? 2. He has him 
not. 3. Has he not somebody's ? 4. He has nobody's. 5. Has 
your grandfather your gold pen 1 6. He has it not. 7. Has he 
not somebody's ? 8. He has nobody's. 9. Where has your grand- 
mother been? 10. She has been to her son-in-law's. 11. Has 
your brother-in-law had the money of your sister-in-law ? 12. He 
has not had it. 13. Has your father had the letters of his grand- 
daughter? 14. No, sir, he has had her copy-book, but not her 
letters. 15. Has he not had somebody's? 16. No, sir, he has 
had nobody's. 17. Whose horse have you bought ? 18. I have 
bought nobody's. 19. Has your father-in-law bought somebody's ? 
20. He Las bought nobody's. 21. Have you finished your exercise ? 

22. I have not finished it. 

23. Where has your mother-in-law been ? 24. She has been 
to her grand-daughter's. 25. Are you the general's step-son ? 
26. No, sir, I am his brother-in-law. 27. Have you not found the 
general's grandson ? 28. We have not found him. 29. Did not 
the gardeners give the fruit to your mother-in-law ? 30. No, miss, 
they gave it to my sister-in-law. 31. Did you not give the copy- 
book to the master ? 32. I did not give it to him. 33. Has the 
workman finished his work ? 34. Yes, sir, he finished it this morn- 
ing. 35. Have you my pen ? 36. I have it not. 37. Have you 
had somebody's ? 38. I have had nobody's. 39. Where has the 
neighbor's grandson been ? 40. He has been to my grandfather's. 
41. Are you acquainted with the general's grand-daughter ? 42. I 
am acquainted with her, and I know where she lives. 43. I be- 
lieve that she lives in this village. 44. You believe that she is 
rich ; we believe that she is poor. 45. The scholars believe that it 
will rain. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. How many brothers have you ? 2. I have three, but I have 



144 



THE THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



only one sister. 3. Your father has five children ? 4. Yes, and 
my uncle has nine. 5. I know a gentleman who has thirteen 
(treize). 6. He has many indeed (yraiment). 7. Yes, it is a large 
family (famille). 8. Who is that little child that your sister is 
conducting to school ? 9. He is one of our neighbor's children. 
10. Is he going to the school of Mr. B. ? 11. Yes, sir. 12. He 
is very young. 13. Who is that workman ? do you know him ? 
14. I know him, and I know that he is a good workman ; he comes 
often to our house. 15. Is he not blind of one eye ? 16. No, but 
he has a brother who is blind. 17. I pity him ; who takes care of 
him ? 18. His brother takes care of him, and his nephews conduct 
him when (quand) he goes out. 19. Does any one give him money ? 
20. No, no one gives him any. 21. Is he not very young ? 22, 
No, he is not a child, he is a man. 23. I know a young man who 
is blind, and you know him also ; it is Peter B. 24. I know him 
very well. 

37.— TRENTE-SEPTIftME LEQON. 

AGREEMENT OF PAST PARTICIPLES. 
1. The past participle forming part of an active verb agrees •with the direct object of 
that verb when the object precedes it, but when the object follows it remains unchanged. 
Past participles, as we have seen (Lesson 26), form the feminine and plural as adjectives. 

Have you found your pen ? Avez-vous trouve votre plume ? 

I have found it. Je l'ai trouvee. 

In the former of these phrases, trouve does not agree, because its object, plume, comes 
after it ; in the latter it agrees, because its object, la, precedes it. So in the following. 

Didst thou buy the horses? As-tu achete les chevaux? (object fol- 

lows). 

I bought them. Je les ai achetes (object precedes). 

Have you had my pens? Avez-vous eu mes plumes? (object 

follows). 

I have not had them. Je ne les ai pas eues (obj. precedes). 

Did your brother receive your letter ? Yotre frere a-t-il regu votre lettre ? 

(object follows). 

He received it. II /'a recue (object precedes). 

To finish., finishing, finished. Finir, finissant, fini, e (fem.). 

Have they finished their exercises ? Ont-ils fini leurs themes ? (object fol- 
lows). 

They have finished them. lis les ont finis (object precedes). 

Have you returned our letters? Avez-vous rendu nos lettres? (object 

follows). 

We have returned them. Nous les avons rendues* (object pre- 

cedes). 



* From the above examples it may be seen that the past participle coming after its ob- 
ject has more the nature of an adjective than when it precedes the object. When I say, 



12 ]2 12 12 3 

fi-nir, fi-ni-ssani. 



THE THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



145 



A. journey. 
That work. 
The lake. 



The news. 
The news. 
Wise, discreet. 

2. Sage, applied to children, means good. 



MASCULINE. 

Un voyage. 
Cet ouvrage. 
Le lac. 



FEMININE. 

La nouvelle (sing.). 
Les nouvelles (plur.). 
Sage. 



An old man. 
Proud. 
The finger. 
This way. 



Acquaintance. 



Which way. 
TJiat way. 
Which way are you gohig ? 
He comes this way. He goes that 
way. 

3. Changes in condition and feelin 
rendre in French. 

This bad weather makes me sad. 
Misfortune makes us wise. 

To follow, following, followed. 
Je suis, tu snis, il suit, 

I follow, thou followest, he follows, 

To live, living, lived. 

Je vis, tu vis, il vii, 

I live, thou livest, he lives, 

To live on. Wherewith to live. 
He lives on dry bread. 
They have lived on bread and water 
Do you follow me ? 
I follow you. 

Have you followed your brothers ? 
We have followed them. 



Un vieillard. Connaissance. 

Fier. Mere. 

Le doigt. Par oil. 

Par ici. Par Id. 

Par ou allez-vous ? 

II vient par ici. II va par la. 



expressed by make in English, are expressed by 



nous smvons, 
we follow, 



Ce mauvais temps me rend triste. 
Le malheur nous rend sages. 
Suivre, suivant, s%tivi, e (fern.). 

vous suivez, Us suivent, 
you follow, they follow. 

Vivre, vivant, vecu, e (fem.). 

nous vivons, vous vivez, ils vivent, 
we live, you. live, they live. 

Vivre de. Be quoi vivre. 
II vit de pain sec. 
II ont vecu de pain et d'eau. 
Me suivez- vous ? 
Je vous suis. 

Avez-vous suivi vos frercs ? 
Nous les avons suivis. 



4. Dernier, as a numeral, precedes its noun ; when not a numeral, it follows it. 
I have the first, he has the last volume. J'ai le premier, il a le dernier volume. 
I spoke to him last week. Je lui ai parle la semaine derniere. 

1. Ou allez-vous % 2. Je vais au marche. 3. Ces messieurs 
viennent par ici, nous allons par la. 4. Votre beau-pere a-t-il cher- 
che ses petits-nls? 5. II les a cherches. 6. A-t-il trouve ses 
petites-filles ? 7. II les a trouvees. 8. Avez-vous recu la nouvelle % 
9. Je l'ai recue ce matin. 10. Mon frere a fini son long voyage. 
11. Avez-vous fini votre ouvrage ? 12. Je l'ai fini. 13. Ces pom- 



*Tai fini mes themes, I have finished my exercises, have and finished are taken together as 
in English, and express the idea of an action merely. But when I say, Je les ai finis, I 
have them finished, it is evident that finished has more the nature of an adjective. Hence 
in the latter case it agrees like an adjective. 

20 121 18 5 18 1 1 1 127 12 7 20 12 12 3 5 22 12 12 

vo-yage, nou-vel£e, ou-vrage, lac, sase, her, fi-ere, doigtf, vi-vr<?, vi-vantf, ve-cu, vis, vit, 

12 21 12 6 12 125 1 15 7 3 

vi-vons, vi-vez, yivent, vie#-lar<Z, coft-nais-sance. 



146 



THE THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



mes aigres m'ont rendu malacle. 14. Ce vieillard est sage et son 
gendre est fier. 15. Avez-vous 6te sur le lac % 16. Non, mon- 
sieur, j'ai ete sur la riviere, mais non pas sur le lac. 17. Qui est ce 
vieillard? 18. C'est mon grand-pere, il a beaucoup de connaissances 
dans cette ville. 19. Ce forgeron a le bras {arm) etles doigts gros. 
20. Votre beau-pere a-t-il recu les nouvelles? 21. II les a recues. 
22. Ce vieillard n'a pas de quoi vivre. 23. Me suivez-vous ? 24. 
Je ne vous suis pas. 25. Get homme vous suit-il ? 26. II me suit. 
27. Ces oiseaux vivent longtemps (long). 28. Avez-vous suivi ces 
homines ? 29. Nous les avons suivis. 

1. Did you lend your money to that old man? 2. I lent it to 
him. 3. Did the scholars give you their pens? 4. They gave 
them to me. 5. Have you received the letters of your brother? 6. 
I have received them. 7. Has the old man lent you his books? 
8. He has lent them to me. 9. Did the children have my slate ? 
10. No, sir, your mother-in-law had it. 11. Has your grandfather 
received the news ? 12. He has received it. 13. Has that work- 
man finished his work ? 14. He has finished it. 15. Has your 
brother finished his journey? 16. He has not finished it. 17. 
Have you been on the lake? 18. No, sir, I have been on the 
river. 19. Are the neighbor's children good? 20. They are very 
good. 21. Have you many acquaintances here ? 22. No, sir, I 
know no one in this village. 23. Is not that lady proud ? 24. She 
is very proud. 

25. That lady's hands are white and her fingers small. 26. 
The servant's fingers are big. 27. On what does that poor man 
live? 28. He lives on bread and cheese. 29. On what does the 
mason live ? 30. He lives on bread and meat. 31. Do those men 
live on dry bread ? 32. They live on bread and butter. 33. This 
water is bad ; it makes me sick. 34. Have you had the last vol- 
ume of this work ? 35. I have had it ; and I returned it to your 
father this morning. 36. Father, am I going to the store to-day ? 
37. No, son, you are going to school. 38. Will you please to give 
me these apples ? 39. With pleasure ; do you not wish for some 
pears also ? 40- Thank you ; you are very good. 41. Does your 
brother know any one here? 42. Yes, sir, he has many acquaint- 
ances in this city. 43. He believes that they are all very good. 
44. You believe that that man is rich ; I believe that he is poor. 



THE THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



147 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Has not the grocer wine and beer ? 2. He has neither wine 
nor beer. 3. Have you bought coffee or tea ? 4. I have bought 
neither coffee nor tea. 5. I have a few acquaintances in this vil- 
lage. 6. Where did you conduct (conduit) the stranger last even- 
ing {hier au soir) ? 7. I conducted him to the theatre. 8. Where 
did you conduct your little sister this morning? 9. I conducted 
her to the school of madam B. 10. Have you some ink? 11. I 
have some black ink and some red. 12. How many uncles have 
you? 13. I have only two ; my friend has five. 14. What has the 
gardener? 15. He has much fruit. 16. Does he give you some ? 
17. He gives us some. 18. Does he give me some ? 19. He gives 
thee some. 20. Has he given some to the neighbors? 21. He 
has given them some. 22. Has that proud man much wit ? 23. 
He has neither courage nor wit. 24. With what do you fill that 
cask ? 25. I fill it with water. 26. Does that scholar study much ? 
27. No, sir, he desires to learn, but he will not study. 28. How 
many chickens has the countryman ? 29. He has twelve. 



38.— TRENTE-HUITIftME LEQON. 

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 



To make, making, made. 

Je fais, tu fais, il fait, 

I make, thou makest, lie makes, 

To wash, washing, washed. 
Less. Once. Twice. 
TJiree times. Four ti?nes, etc. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBERS. 
1, 

2, 



9, 
10, 
13. 

12, 
13, 
14, 
15, 
16, 
17, 
18, 



NOMBRES 
CARDINATJX. 

Un, une, 

Deux, 

lYois, 

Quaire, 

Cinq, 

Six, 

Sept, 

Euit, 

Neuf, 

Dix, 

Onze, 

Douse, 

Treize, 

Qtiatorze, 

Quinze, 

Seize, 

Dix-sept, 

Dix-huit, 



Fair -e, fais ant, fait, e (fern.). 

nous faisons, vous faites, Us font, 

•we make, you make, they make. 

Laver, lavant, lave, e (fem.). 
Moins. Unefois. Deux fois. 
Trcis fois. Quatre fois. 

ORDINAL NOMBRES 
NUMBERS. ORDINAUX. 

1st, Premier (m.), Premiere (f.). 

2d, Second (m.), Seconde (f.). 

3d, Troisieme, 

4th, Quatrieme, 

5th, Cinquieme, 

Cth, Sixieme, 

7th, Septieme, 

8th, Huitieme, 

9th, Neunieme, 

10th, Dixieme, 

11th, Onzieme, 

12th, Douzieme, 

13th, Treizieme, 

14th, Quatorzieme, 

15th, Quinzieme, 

16th, Seizieme, 

lTth, Dix-septieme, 

18th, Dix-huitieme, 



7 7 3 7 7 7 21 7 21 1613 161 1 1 11 

faire, fai-zani, fait, fais, fai-zons, faites, fon£, la-ver, la-vantf, la-ve, lave, laves, la-vons, 

16 1 18 J4 20 21 1 12 17 16 12 17 7 1 JG 14 7 

la-ves, laveni, moins, fois, nom-bres, car-di-nauce, or-di-naucc, treize, ka-torze, kinze, seize, 



dis-sept, diz-huit. 



148 



THE THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



NOMBEE3 
OEDINATJX. 

Dix-neuvieme, 
Vingtieme, 
Vingt et unieme, 
Vingt-deuxieme, 
Vingt-troisieme, 
Trentieme, 
Trente et unieme, 
Trente-deuxieme, 
QuaraniUme, 
Cinquantieme, 
Soixantieme, 
Soixante-dixiem e, 
So ixante-onzieme, 
Q uatre-vingtieme, 
Q ua tre-vingt-unieme, 
Quatre-vingt-dixieme, 
Quatre-vingt-onzieme, 
Centieme, 
Cent unieme, 
Deux centieme. 
Deux cent dixieme, 
Millieme, 
Mille unieme, 
Deux mille cinq centieme. 
Millionieme. 

1. In vingt, t is sounded before a vowel, and rarely at the end of a phrase ; it must be dis- 
tinctly heard in vingt et un, vingt-deux, etc,; but in quatre-vingt-un, quatre-vingt-deux, 
etc., the t is never sounded. 

2. Vingt and cent take s when multiplied by another number, as cinq cents, except 
when followed by a number, as quatre-vingt-cinq, trois cent dix; and when used as ordi- 
nal numbers, as, Page quatre cent, Van mil sept cent quatre-vingt. 

3. Mille becomes mil only in the computation of years of the Christian era ; Van mil 
huit cent soixante, The year one thousand eight hundred and sixty. 



CARDINAL 






NUMBERS 




NUMBERS. 


19, 


Dix-neuf, 


19th, 


20, 


Vingt, 


20th, 


21, 


Vingt et un, 


21st, 


22, 


Vingt-deux, 


22d, 


23, 


Vingt-trois, 


23d, 


30, 


Trente, 


30th, 


31, 


Trente et un, 


31st, 


32, 


Trente-deux, 


32d, 


40, 


Quaranle, 


40th, 


50, 


Cinquante, 


50th, 


60, 


Soixante, 


60th, 


70, 


Soixante-dix, 


TOth, 


71, 


Soixante et onze, 


71st, 


80, 


Quatre-vingts, 


80th, 


81, 


Quatre-vingt-un, 


81st, 


90, 


Quatre-vingl-dix, 


90th, 


91 


Quatre-v ingt-onze, 


91st 


100' 


Cent, 


100th, 


101, 


Cent un, 


101st, 


200, 


Deux cents, 


200th, 


210, 


Deux cent dix, 


210th, 


1.000, 


Mille, 


1,000th, 


1,001, 


Mille un, 


1,001st, 


2,500, 


Deux mille cinq cents, 


2,500th, 


1,000,000, 


Un million, 


1,000,000th, 



What are you doing ? 
I am doing nothing. 
We do what you do. 
What is the washerwoman doing ? 
She is washing pocket-handkerchiefs. 
How many do four times five make ? 
Four times five make twenty. 
Twenty-five less nine make sixteen. 
A pocket. A pocket-handkerchief. 



Que faites-vous ? 
Je ne fais rien. 

Nous faisons ce que vous faitcs. 
Que fait la blanchisseuse ? 
Elle lave des mouchoirs de poche. 
Combien font quatre fois cinq ? 
Quatre fois cinq font vingt. 
Vingt-cinq moins neuf font seize. 
Une poche. Un mouchoir de poche. 



1. Combien font deux fois quatre? 2. Deux fois quatre font 
huit. 3. Combien font quatre fois cinq? o. Quatre fois cinq font 
vingt. 5. Combien font cinq fois six? 6. Cinq fois six font 
trente. 7. Combien font six fois sept ? 8. Six fois sept font qua- 
rante-deux. 9. Combien font sept fois huit? 10. Sept fois huit 
font cinquante-six. 11. Combien font huit fois neuf? 12. Huit 
fois neuf font soixante-douze. 13. Combien font neuf fois dix? 
14. Neuf fois dix font quatre-vingt-dix, 15. Dix fois onze font 

12 9 14 14 5 24 14 9 3 1 3 HI CO 3 3 12 

diz-rieuf, vingt, vin^-et-un, vin^t-deutr, trente, ka-rant<?, cin-kante, soi-sant?, cent-w\lle, 

12 12 21 1 3 )25 14 3 125 20 3 12 5 3 125 12 '25 12 1215 125 

mi-lli-on, ka-ran-tieme, cin-kan-tieme, soi-san-tieme, cen-tiern<?, mi-Hiem<?, mi-iii-o-nicine, 

15 

poche. 



THE THIKTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



149 



cent clix. 16. LTuit et six font quatorze. 17. Quarante-cinq 
moins quinze font trente. 18. Dix-sept moms neuf font huit. 19. 
Que fais-tu? 20. Je ne fais rien. 21. Que lavez-vous ? 22. Je 
lave mon ardoise. 23. Avez-vous lave vos encriers ? 24. Je les 
ai laves. 25. Avez-vous fait un voyage ? 26. J'ai fait un long 
voyage. 27. Avez-vous votre livre? 28. Je l'ai dans ma poche. 

1. What art thou doing ? 2. I am washing my slate. 3. What 
are you doing J 4. We are washing our inkstands. 5. Have you 
washed your j^ks 1 ^ 4 6. We have not washed them. 7. What are 
those washerwomen washing ? 8. They are washing my pocket- 
handkerchiefs. 9. What saddle have you had? 10. I have had 
mine. 11. Have you somebody's bridle? 12. I have nobody's. 
13. Has that child had some one's hammer ? 14. He has had some 
one's. 15. Will you please give me some lilies and some pansies ? 
16. Yes, sir, with pleasure. 17. What has the servant ? 18. He 
has a pitcher of water. 19. Have you forgotten our names? 20. 
I have forgotten them. 21. Where have you been? 22. I have 
been as far as the fountain. 

23. What flowers have you ? 24. I have roses, lilies, and pan- 
sies. 25. Have you had my pen ? 26. I have not had it. 27. 
What have you in that pitcher ? 28. It is fresh Water. 29. Have 
you had my papers? 30. I have not had them. 31. Has not that 
child somebody's book? 32. He has somebody's. 33. Whose 
cravats has he? 34. He has nobody's. 35. How many do five 
times five make ? 36. Five times five make twenty-five, and six 
times six make thirty-six. 37. How many do seven times seven 
make ? 38. Seven times seven make forty-nine, eight times eight 
make sixty-four, and nine times nine make eighty-one. 39. Ninety- 
four less twenty-eight are sixty-six. 40. Has the tailor made your 
coat and pantaloons? 41. He has made them. 42. What has 
that man ? 43. He has his pockets full of money. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you desire your money ? 2. I desire it and I will have 
it to-day. 3. Will you please come to my house to-day ? 4. I am 
quite willing. 5. Who takes care of your horse? 6. The boy takes 
care of him. 7. Have you received your letters ? 8. Yes, sir, I 
have received them. 9. That boy has not done his work. 10. 
Well, I am going to speak to his master. 11. Have you some 
fruit ? 12. I have some good fruit. 13. Have you some apples ? 



150 



THE THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. 



14. I have no apples ; but I have a few pears and some excellent 
peaches. 15. What is on your table ? 16. They are the books of 
my sister. 17. What makes that noise {bruit) ? 18. It is the 
children who are in the street. 

19. Do you ever go out in the morning ? 20. I often go out 
in the morning and in the evening. 21. Has the workman already 
finished his work ? 22. He has not yet finished it. 23. Has the 
carpenter already finished his benches ? 24. He has finished them. 
25. Has the shoemaker made your shoes ? 26. He has not yet 
made them. 27. Has the washerwoman washed my cravats ? 28. 
She has washed them. 



!9.— TRENTE-NEUYIEME LECON. 

THE PEONOUN Y. 



To put, put on, putting, put. 

Je mets, tu mets, il met, 

I put, thou puttest, he puts, 

Where do you put your book ? 
I put it on the desk. 

To dry, drying, dried. 



Mettre, mettant, mis, e. 
nous meitons, vous mettes, Us mettent, 
we put, you put, they put. 

Ou mettez-vous votre livre ? 
Je le mets sur le pupitre. 

Seeker, sechant, seche, e. 

1. Verbs having an acute accent on e in the penult of the infinitive, as secher, change 
the acute to the grave accent when followed by a consonant having e mute after it ; thus, 
Je seche, tu seches, il seche, nous sechons, vous sechez, Us sechent, 
I dry, 



r , thou driest, he dries, y 


r Q dry, you dry, 


they dry. 






MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The wind. 


A spade. 


Le vent. 


Une beche. 


The sun. 


A pepper-box. 


Le soleil. 


line poivriere. 


The east. 


A smell, odor. 


Uest (st sounded). 


Une odeur. 


The west. 


The part, share. 


L' 'oitest (st sounded). 


La partie, part. 


The north. 


A family. 


Le nord. 


Une famille. 


The south. 




Le sud (d sounded). 




Wet. 




Mouille. 


Mouillee. 


Before. 




Devant, avant. 





2. Devant refers to place, and avant to time. 



Before the fire. Before mornin< 
The wet linen. In the wind. 
In the sun. In the fire. 
We dry the linen in the sun. 
Do you dry yours in the wind ? 
I dry it before the fire. 



Devant le feu. Avant le matin. 
Le linge mouille. Au vent. 
Au soleil. Au feu. 
Nous sechons le linge au soleil. 
Sechez-vous le votre au vent ? 
Je le seche devant le feu. 



5 53 12 5 S5 21 56 5 565356 

met-tve, met-tznt, mis, mets, met, met-tons, me^-tess, mettent, sc-cher, se-chan#, se-che, 

7 5 21 5 6 7 3 8 15 5 20 12 7 5 1 )3 1 16 1 

Beche, se-chons, se-ches, seehent, \ent, beche, so-leil, poi-vri-ere, est, par- tie, partf, nord, fa- 

12 22 18 6 4 3 1 3 

milk, sud, mouil-le, de-van^, a-van£. 



THE THIRTY-NINTH LESSON. 



151 



Which way (where) is the wind ? Ou est {or, D'ou vient) le vent ? 

It is in the east. II est a l'est, or, II vient de Test. 

To it, at it, in it, to them, at them, in) y/^ e £> ore ^ Q veT fo\ 

them, there, thither, here, hither. ) ^ 

Are you going to the village ? Allez-vous au village ? 

I am going there. J'y vais. 

What do you put in that barrel? Que mettez-vous dans ce baril? 

We put vinegar in it. Nous y mettons du vinaigre. 

What does the workman put in his Qu'est-ce que l'ouvrier met dans son 

chest ? coffre ? 

He puts linen in it. II y met du linge. 

3. Hiere and here referring to a place not mentioned before are la (or y), and ici. 

Dost thou always put thy books there ? Mets-tu toujours tes livres Ik ? 

I always put them there. Je les y mets toujours. 

Do you put your umbrellas here? Mettez-vous vos parapluies ici? 

We put them there. Nous les y mettons. 

We put our hats there also. Nous y mettons nos chapeaux aussi. 

He puts on his cloak. II met son manteau. 

1. Oa le domestique lave-t-il son linge ? 2. II le lave au ruis- 
seau. 3. Le scche-t-il au soleil ? 4. II le seche (levant le feu. 5. 
Le vent n'est pas au norcl ; ne vient-il pas de l'ouest ? 6. Non, 
monsieur, il vient du sud. 7. Qu'est-ce que vous mettez dans votre 
porte-feuille ? 8. J'y mets des "billets de banque. 9. Qu'est-ce que 
les marchands mettent dans ces tonneaux ? 10. lis y mettent du 
vin. 11. Mon frere est-il chez vous? 12. Oui, madame, il y vient 
toujours avant le soir. 13. La beche est-elle dans le jardin ? 14- 
Elle y est. 15. La poivriere n'est-elle pas sur la table ? 16. Elle 
n'y est pas. 17. J'aime beaucoup les violettes ; elles ont une odeur 
tres-douce. 18. Les blanchisseuses sechent-elles leur linge au so- 
leil ? 19. Elles l'y sechent. 20. Avez-vous eu votre part de ce 
fruit ? 21. Je ne l'ai pas eue. 22. Get homme a huit fils et six filles ; 
c'est une grande famille. 23. J'ai ici un bon gateau ; en voulez- 
vous une partie ? 24. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. 

1. Where does the maid-servant wash the linen ? 2. She washes 
it at the brook. 3. Does she dry it in the wind ? 4. No, madam, 
she dries it before the fire. 5. What art thou drying ? 6. I am 
drying my wet handkerchief. 7. Is the wind in the east or in the 
west ? 8. It is neither in the east nor in the west ; it is in the 
south. 9. Is it not in the north ? 10. It is not in the north ; it is 
in the south. 11. How many do five times seven make ? 12. Five 
times seven make thirty-five, and eight times twelve make ninety- 



152 



THE FOKTIETH LESSON. 



six. 13. Are you going to the village ? 14. I am going there. 
15. Of what has that workman need ? 16. He has need of a spade. 
17. What is on the table? 18. It is a pepper-box and a pocket- 
handkerchief. 19. What does the workman put on the bench? 
20. He puts his spade there. 

21. Are you going to the city before evening ? 22. I am going 
there now. 23. Didst thou dry thy wet gloves in the sun ? 24. I 
dried them before the fire. 25. Our neighbor has much fruit; does 
he give you a part ? 26. He gives me some. 27. Do you give 
money to that poor man ? 28. I give him some. 29. Do you give 
some to his children? 30. I give some to them. 31. Whose books 
have you ? 32. I have nobody's. 33. Has not that scholar some- 
body's ? 34. She has nobody's. 35. Whose pens has she ? 36. 
She has nobody's. 37. Hast thou washed thy slate ? 38. I have 
washed it. 39. Have you washed your inkstands ? 40. We have 
not washed them. 41. What has the gardener? 42. He has a 
spade and some flowers. 43. Do you like the odor of those flow- 
ers ? 44. I like it much. 45. Is the family of your friend going 
to the country ? 46. They {die) are going there. 47. Do you 
wish for the pepper-box ? 48. Yes, sir, if you please. 



1. Where is the pepper-box ? 2. Is it not on the table ? 3. No, 
it is not there. 4. I want a little soup. 5. Will you have also a 
piece of boiled meat (bouilli) ? 6. No, sir, thank you. 7. Do you 
not like boiled meat ? 8. Yes, sir, I like it, but I do not wish for 
any to-day. 

9. You have nothing on your plate ; do you wish for a piece of 
roast meat ? it is very tender (tendre). 10. A little piece, if you 
please. 11. Do you like it well done ? 12. I like it rare. 13. Do 
you wish for some bread ? 14. Thank you, I have some still. 15. 
You are not hungry. 16. Yes, I am very hungry ; this roast meat 
is excellent. 17. Is not your coffee cold ? 18. No, sir, it is still 
very warm. 19. Do you wish for a cup of tea ? 20. I thank you 
much ; I like coffee and not tea. 21. AVhy do you put on your 
cloak ? 22. I put it on because I am cold. 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 



40.— QUARANTINE LEQON. 



PEONOUN Y CONTINUED. 



To think (of), thinking, thought. 
To labor (on), laboring, labored. 



Penser (a), pensant, pense, e (fern.). 
Travailler (a), travaillant, travaille. 



3 6 3 3 36116 113 116 

pen-ser, pen-sanf, pen-se, tra-vail-ler, tra-vail-lan£, tra-vail-le. 



THE FORTIETH LESSOX. 



153 



1. T" is generally a pronoun, having the force of d, or some other preposition of place 
except de, with lui, ette, eux, elles, or cela, also often an adverb for ici or Id. As a pronoun 
it applies almost always to things. 



Do you put your name to these papers ? 

I put it to them. 

Does he labor on that work ? 

He labors on it. 

Do you ever think of your books ? 

I think of them often. 

Are the musicians coming here? 

They are coming here. 

Are they in the country ? 

They are there. 



Mettez-vous votre nom a ces papiers ? 
Je l'y mets. 

Travaille-t-il a cet ouvrage ? 
II y travaille. 

Pensez-vous jamais a vos livres ? 

J'y pense souvent. 

Les musiciens viennent-ils ici ? 

lis y viennent. 

Sont-ils a la campagne ? 

lis y sont. 



2. The place of the other objective pronouns we have seen (Lesson 26), and that en is 
placed last of all (Lesson 34). Fis placed after the other objective pronouns and before en. 



Me there. Us there. 

Thee there. You there. 

Him, it, or her there. TJiem there. 

Some there. I put some there. 

We conduct you there. 

He conducts me there. 

I conduct thee there. 

They carry it there. 

We take some there to you. 

To lead, take, leading, led. 

To mend, mending, mended. . 

This, this thing. That, that thing. 



M'y. JS r ous y. 

r fy. Vous y. 

L'y. Les y. 

Y en. J'y en mets. 

Nous vous y conduissons. 

II m'y conduit. 

Je t'y conduis. 

lis l'y portent. 

Nous vous y en portons. 
Metier, menant, mene, e(fem.). 
Haccommoder, raccommodant, raccommode. 
Ceci. Cela. 



3. Ceci and cela are used in reference to propositions, or to things not named. 
This is good, that is bad. Ceci est bon, cela est mauvais. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The traveler. The color. Le voyageur. La coideur. 

The place. The place, square. V endroit, lieu. Laplace. 

4. Endroit and lieu denote mere locality ; place belonging to a person or thing, is place. 



The hatter. The border. 

The arrangement. The disposal. 
The musician. 

The lieutenant. Somewhere, any where. 
The tuorld, people. Every where. 
Every body. All the world. 
Easily. Nowhere. 

No one, none. 



Le chapelier. 
Y? arrangement. 
Le musicien. 
Le lieutenant. 



La b or dure. 
La disposition. 
La musicienne 
Quel que part. 



Le monde. Partout. 

Tout le monde. Le monde entier. 

Facilement. Nidle part. 

Without a verb, aucun ; with a verb, and 
standing as subject, aucun ne before the 
verb; standing as object, ne before the 
verb and aucun after it. The feminine 
is aucune. 



4 6 4 3 4 6 1 15 15 6 1 15 15 3 1 15 15 6 4 12 1 1 20 12 1 

me-ner, me-nan^, me-ne, rac-co-mo-der, rac-co-mo-dan^, rac-co-mo-de, ce-ci, ce-la, vo-ya- 

11 18 11 3 '10 12 9 1 1 4 12 5 16 22 1 3 3 12 15 12 12 21 22 

geur, cou-leur, en-droi£, lieu, place, cha-pe-lier. bor-dure, ar-range-men2, dis-po-zi-sion, mu- 

12 12 14 22 12 125 1'2 9 3 15 1 ]8 3 12 5 1 12 3 22 

zi-cien, mu-zi-cien?ie, lieute-nan#, monde, par-tou^, en-tier, fa-cile-men£, nulle. 



*7* 



154 



THE FORTIETH LESSON. 



To which one. Auquel. A. laquelle. 

To which on&s. Auxquels. Auxquelles. 

To what store dost thou take the cloth? A quel magasin portes-tu le drap? 

To which one do you take the traveler? Auquel menez-vous le voyageur ? 

I take him to none. Je ne le mene a aucun. (Les. 2*7, 5.) 

To which ones do your friends go ? Auxquels vos amis vont-ils ? 

Does no child go to school? Aucun enfant ne va-t-il k l'ecole ? 

None. No one goes there. Aucun. Aucun n'y va. 

Do you doubt of that ? Doutez-vous de cela ? 

I do not doubt of it. Je n'en doute pas. 

1. Le voyageur vous conduit-il a, la riviere ? 2. H nous y con- 
duit. 3. Conduissez-vous les enfants a l'ecole ? 4. Je les y con- 
duis. 5. Nous y conduisez-vous ? 6. Je ne vous y conduis pas. 
7. Pensez-vous jamais a vos amis % 8. Je pense souvent a eux. 9. 
Travaillez-vous a cet ouvrage? 10. J'y travaille beaucoup. 11. 
Portez-vous du sucre au magasin ? 12. J'y en porte vingt livres. 
13. Ceci n'est-il pas jaune ? 14. Si, ceci est jaune et cela est vert. 
15. Avez-vous mene les voyageurs au village * 16. Je les y ai menes. 
17. Kaccommodez-vous quelque chose % 18. Je ne raccommode rien. 
19. Le tailleur a-t-il raccommode vos pantalons ? 20. II les a rac- 
commodes. 21. Avez-vous connu le lieutenant et le musicien ? 22. 
Je les ai connus. 23. Je mets mes livres dans cet endroit-ci. 24. 
Nous mettons toujours nos papiers k leur place. 25. Allez-vous 
quelque part ? 26. Je ne vais nulle part. 27. Avez-vous cherche 
votre livre ? 28. Je l'ai cherche. 29. Tout le monde connait le 
lieutenant. 30. Savez-vous ou il demeure? 31. Oui. Est-ce un 
bel endroit ? C'est le plus beau lieu du monde. 32. Cette fleur 
est d'une belle couleur. 33. Pensez-vous a votre lecon? 34. J'y 
peDse. 35. Ce monsieur parle bien facilement. 

1. Where are you going? 2. I am going to school. 3. To 
which one are you going? 4. Iam going to Mr. A.'s. 5. To which 
ones do your sisters go? 6. They go to none. 7. Do you often 
think of your friends ? 8. We think of them very often. 9. Of (d) 
what do those scholars think ? 10. They think of what they study. 
11. Does the servant take the horse to the stable? 12. He takes 
him there. 13. What are those tailors mending ? 14. They are 
mending coats and pantaloons. 15. Where have you put your 
books ? 16. I have put them in that place. 17. Do you always put 
them in (a) their place? 18. I often put them there. 19. Is this 
iron? 20. This is iron and that is copper. 21. Have you labored 



THE FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 



155 



on that work ? 22. I labored on it. 23. Did you finish it easily ? 
24. I finished it very easily. 25. I like the arrangement of that 
garden. 26. The color of that cloth is blue. 

27. How many sisters have you? 28. I have none. 29. The 
smell of these flowers is very sweet. 80. The wind is neither in the 
north nor in the south, it is in the west. 31. Where does the wash- 
erwoman dry the wet cravats % 32. She dries them in the sun and 
in the wind. 33. How many brothers has the lieutenant? 34. The 
lieutenant has none, the musician has four. 35. Are you going any 
whereto-day? 36. I am going nowhere. 37. Where is the trav- 
eler going? 38. He is going every where. 39. Is the musician 
going any where ? 40. She is going nowhere. 41. Does the hat- 
ter (chapelier) think of what he has done ? 42. He thinks of it. 
43. Will you please conduct me to the hatter's ? 44. With pleas- 
ure ; I am going there now. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you need of your spade? 2. No ; do you wish for it? 
3. Certainly (certainement). 4. It is in the garden, under the win- 
dow of the kitchen. 5. Why do you need a spade? 6. I wish to 
make a hole (un trou) before the house, in order to (pour) put there 
a yellow rose-tree (rosier). 7. Have you yellow roses ? 8. I have 
some yellow, some white, and some red ; have you not some % 9. 
Not (pas) yellow ones, that color is rare (rare). 10. If you come 
with (avec) me, I am going to give you a stock (un pied) of it. 11. 
You are too good. 12. All that I have is at your disposal. 13. Do 
you see (voyez-vous) what large leaves this rose-tree has ? 14. Yes, 
truly (vraiment), they are very large. 15. What rose is it (est-ce) ? 
16. It is the cloth of gold (drap d'or) rose ; if you wish for it, it is 
at your service. 17. Thank you, I am going to take good (Men) 
care of it. 18. Do you wish for a stock of the white? 19. I thank 
you, I have some of that color, and I have not much space (place) 
in my border. 



41.— QUARANTE ET UNIftME LEQON. 

A BEFOEE THE INFINITIVE. 

I like to listen to the traveler. J'aime a ecouter le voyageur. 

1. The verb aimer generally requires d before a dependent infinitive, as seen in the 
above phrase. Many other verbs and phrases do the same. Avoir, chercher, donner, met- 
tre, montrer, porter, and trouver, already given, take d before a dependent infinitive. Such 
verbs will be marked, as they are given hereafter, with the abbreviation (d bef. inf.). Some 
verbs and phrases also take de before the infinitive. These will be noted hereafter. 



156 



THE FOKTY-FIRST LESSON. 



I have something to do. J'ai quelque chose a faire. 

He seeks to do that. II cherche a faire cela. 

We show you how to do that. Nous vous montrons a faire cela. 

2. Other verbs, as we have seen, govern the infinitive without a preposition. 



I am going to look for my book 



Je vais chercher mon livre. 



The thread. The apothecary's shop. 
Secret. 
Fine. 

Alone, only (adj.). 
An officer. Exactly so. 

A secret. ■ That is it. 

Only (adv.). To stay, remain. 
To-morrow. To intrust, confide. 
With. To count, reckon, also intend. 
To admire. To leave, let. 
To take away, to take off. 
To depart, set out, departing, departed. 

8. Partir is conjugated like sortir (Lesson 29). 
Have you only the fine thread ? Avez-vous seuiement le fil fin ? {or 

stronger) N'avez-vous que le fil fin ? 

Of whom, from whom, of which, from 
which, whose. 

4. De qui is used only of persons and personified objects. It must always be used when 
of whom or whose is interrogative. Dont applies to both persons and things, and is general- 
ly preferred to de qui when followed by a pronoun. 



MASCULINE. 

Lq fil. 
Secret. 
Fin. 
Seul. 

Un officier. 
Un secret. 
Seuiement. 
Demain. 
Avec. 
Admirer. 
Oter. 

Partir, partant, parti 



FEMININE. 

La pharmacie. 
Secrete. 
Fine. 
Seule. 
Tout juste. 
C'est cela. 
Hester (a, bef. inf.). 
Confier. 
Compter. 
Laisser. 



Dont. 



Of whom do you speak ? 

I speak of the man of whom you speak. 

Do you buy the thread of which I speak ? 

That {the one) of which or of whom. 

Those {the ones) of which or of whom. 

That {the thing) of icldch. 

I admire him of whom you speak. 

He admires her of whom you speak. 

He takes away that of which I am afraid. 

We leave our books here. 

My brothers remain at home. 

I trust to you my money. 

I intend to depart to-morrow. 



De qui parlez-vous ? 
Je parle de 1'homme dont vous parlez. 
Achetez-vous le fil dont je parle ? 
Celui dont (m.). Celle dont (f.). 
Ceux dont (m.). Celles dont (f.). 
Ce dont. 

J'admire celui dont vous parlez. 
II admire celle dont vous parlez. 
II ote ce dont j'ai peur. 
Nous laissons nos livres ici. 
Mes freres restent chez eux. 
Je vous confie mon argent. 
Je compte partir demain. 

5. Ifime, the same, an adjective, and meme, self, joined to a pronoun, are variable; but 
meme, even, an adverb, is invariable. 

We have the same friends. Nous avons les memes amis. 

We are ourselves his friends. Nous sommes nous-memes ses amis. 

He does not love even his children. II n'aime pas meme ses enfants. 

12 1 1 13 4 5 4 5 ]4 12 9 9 15 12 105 22 9 3 5 

fil, phar-ma-cie, se-cref, se-crete, fin, fine, seul, seule, of-fi-cier, juste, seule-meniJ, rps-ter, 

4 14 21 12 5 1 5 21 G 1 12 6 7 6 17 6 1 12 1 3 1 12 51 

de-main, con-fier, a-vec, eomp-ter, ad-mi-rer, lais-ser, 6-ter, par-tir, par-tan^, par-ti, don£ 



THE FORTY-FIRST LESSON. 



157 



1. Cet ecolier trouve beaucoup a etudier. 2. II aime a, parler 
fraucais. 3. Avez-vous seuleruent ces poissons-ci? 4. Je n'ai 
que celui-ci, et mon ami n'a que celui-la. 5. Pourquoi otez-vous 
votre chapeau? 6. Je l'ote a cet homme. 7. Laissez-vous votre 
argent dans ce coffre ? 8. Je l'y laisse. 9. Eestez-vous seuls ici ? 
10. Nous y restons seuls. 11. Confiez-vous votre argent a nos soins? 
12. Nous l'y confions. 13. Est-ce que vous admirez l'officier dont 
nous parlors'? 14. Nous ne l'admirons pas. 15. Ne compte-t-il pas 
les soldats? 16. II les compte. 17. Compte-t-il partir demain? 18. 
Non, monsieur, il part aujourd'hui. 19. Partez-vous demain? 20. 
Nous partons ce matin. 21. Oii va ce chapelier? 22. II va a la 
pharmacie. 23. Je confie tout a mon ami, il est fort discret. 24. 
Vous confie-t-il son secret ? 25. H me le confie. 

1. Where does the hatter take that officer? 2. He takes him 
to the grain market-house {la halle aux bles). 3. Has the carpen- 
ter mended your door? 4. He has mended it. 5. To whom does 
the hatter speak ? 6. He speaks to the musician. 7. To which 
one does he speak ? 8. He speaks to this one. 9. Have you put 
your tree in this place ? 10. I have put it in this place, and my roses 
in that. 11. Is that officer going any where ? 12. He is going 
nowhere. 13. I am going to the apothecary's shop. 14. To which 
are you going? 15. I am going to mine. 16. Are you acquainted 
with that officer? 17. Yes, sir, every body is acquainted with him. 
18. Does he intrust to you his secrets? 19. He intrusts them tome. 
20. What have you fine? 21. I have nothing fine. 

22. Do you always leave your books in their place ? 23. I al- 
ways leave them there. 24. Does your brother remain here ? 25. 
He remains here to-day only, but he intends to depart to-morrow. 
26. Do you confide your secret to me ? 27. I confide it to you. 
28. Do you admire the officer of whom we speak ? 29. We admire 
him. 30. Why do you take off your cloak ? 31.1 take it off be- 
cause I am warm. 32. What men are you looking for ? 33. I am 
looking for those of whom you speak. 34. The physician dwells in 
Water-street ; he is going to the apothecary's shop with his friend. 
35. Of what do you speak ? 36. I speak of that of which you speak. 
37. My pencil is on my desk with my books. 38. I have bought 
the horse of which you speak. 39. Our neighbor has a dog, of 
which we are afraid. 



158 



THE FORTY-SECOND LESSON. 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

I. Where are you going ? 2. I am going to conduct this little 
boy home. 3. Where does he dwell? 4. He dwells near (pres du) 
the market on Water-street. 5. Who is his father? 6. It is Mr. 
Bernard ; do you not know him ? 7. I know him very well. 8. Is 
Mr. Bernard at home to-day ? 9. I do not doubt of it ; he does not 
often go out. 10. Well, I am going to his house with you. 

II. Who is that man? 12. Which one? 13. He who is going 
to the apothecary's shop with Mr. George. 14. He is the physician 
of my father ; he comes to our house often. 15. Is your father still 
sick ? 16. He is not very well yet. 17. I will go and see (je vais 
aller voir) your father. 18. You do not come often. 19. Do you 
still (toujours) live at the same place ? 20. Yes, we live in Saint 
Francis-street (la rue Saint Frangois). 21. You live in a large white 
house, do you not {rCest-ce pas) ? 22. Exactly (exactemente) ; that 
is it. 



42.— QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LEQON. 

NEGATIVE PARTITIVES, ETC. 
1. We have seen (Lesson 31, Nos. 3, 4) that negative partitives take or omit the article 
as the affirmative or negative meaning prevails. 



Has not this rich man money ? 
Has not this great king power ? 
Has that poor man no bread ? 
To feel, to smell, feeling, felt. 

All, quite. All alone. 

Instantly, forthwith. 
Too, too much. 

The blovj. The writing. 

The thunder. The reading. 

Square. 

The hole. The slit, chink. 

Round. 

The nest. Lean. 

Salted, salt. 

Fat. 

Does it rain ? It rains. 
When. The clap of thunder. 
Do you feel the north wind ? 
I feel it. 

Are you afraid of claps of thunder ? 
Now, at present. From here. 



Get homme riche n'a-t-il pas de l'argent? 
Ce grand roi n'a-t-il pas du pouvoir ? 
Ce pauvre homme n'a-t-il pas de pain ? 
Sentir, sentant, senti. 

(Conjugated, as sortir, Lesson 29.) 
Tout (adv.). Tout seul. 

A V instant, sur le champ, tout de suite. 
Trop (de before a noun). 



MASCULINE. 



FEMININE. 



Le coup. Uecriture. 
Le tonncrre. La lecture. 

Carre. Garr'ee. 
Le trou. ~L&fente. 
Rond. Ronde. 
Le nid. Maigre. 
Sale, Salee. 
Gras. Grasse. 
Pleut-il ? II pleut. 
Quand. Le coup de tonnerre. 
Sentez-vous le vent du nord ? 
Je le sens. 

Avez-vous peur des coups de tonnerre ? 
A present. DHci. 



18 20 3 12 3 3 3 12 14 3 22 12 18 5 12 22 15 7 1 6 1 

pou-voir, sen-tir, sen-tantf, sen-ti, ins-tan^, suite, coup, e-cri-ture, tofi-nerre, car-re, car- 

63 21 21 7 1616 22 9 3 53 

ree, fente, rone?, ronde, maigre, sa-le, sa-lee, gras, grasse, pleui, kancZ, pre-sen£. 



THE FORTY-SECOND LESSON. 



159 



Do ycu smell from here the flowers of 



Sentez-vous d'ici Ies fleurs de votre 



your garden ? 
Do the children feel the cold ? 
They feel it and I feel it also. 
Near. Near the church. 



jardin ? 

Les enfants sentent-ils le froid ? 
lis le sentent et je le sens aussi. 
JPres, au pres {de bef. n.). Pres de 



2. Pres is accidentally near, 
Do you see that lady near the fountain ? 



l'eglise. 
aupres, permanently near. 



Voyez-vous cette dame pres de la fon- 



The large tree is near the fountain. 



taine ? 

Le grand arbre est aupres de la fon- 



I give the horse some water. 
I give the horse some blows with your 
whip. 



taine. 

Je donne de l'eau au cheval. 

Je donne au cheval des coups de votre 



fouet (Lesson 26, 6). 



1. Est-ce que vous laissez cet enfant tout seul ? 2. L'oiseau est- 
il dans son nid ? 3. II y est. 4. Les rats font des trous au plan- 
cher. 5. Voulez-vous dubceuf sale ? 6. J' en veux. 7. Veux-tu du 
boeuf gras ou du maigre ? 8. J'en veux du maigre. 9. Pleut-il a 
present? 10. II ne pleut pas. 11. Est-ce que je confie trop d' ar- 
gent a cet homme ? 12. Vous lui en confiez trop. 13. Quand pen- 
sez-vous partir ? 14. Je pense partir ce soir. 15. Avez-vous 1* en- 
crier carre et le rond? 16. Je n'ai que le carre. 17. Cette ecriture 
est bien vieille. 18. Aimez-vous la lecture ? 19. Je l'aime beau- 
coup. 20. Pourquoi cet homme riche est-il triste ; n'a-t-il pas des 
amis et de 1' argent ? 21. Votre ami part a l'instant. 22. Je lui 
ai parle. 23. II a recu votre lettre, et il va partir tout de suite, 
or a l'instant. 

1. Do you feel the cold ? 2. We feel it much. 3. Does the 
grocer feel the cold ? 4. Yes, every body feels it. 5. Do you con- 
fide your secrets to your friend ? 6. I confide them to him. 7. Do 
you buy the fine thread ? 8. I buy the fine thread and the coarse. 
9. When do you intend to depart ? 10. I intend to depart forth- 
with. 11. Have you an apothecary's shop? 12. I have one on 
Water-street. 13. Do you go out when it rains ? 14. I never go 
out when it rains. 15. Does it rain now ? 16. It does not rain. 
17. Where does the bird make his nest ? 18. He makes it in that 
hole. 19. Do you wish for some salt fish or some fresh? 20. I 
wish for some salt. 21. Is the garden square or round ? 22. It is 
square. 23. Who has made a chink in the door ? 24. Some one 
has made a chink in the door, and a hole in the floor. 



160 



THE FOKTY-THIED LESSOX. 



25. Do you wish for some fat beef and some lean ? 26. I wish 
only for some lean, and that officer wishes only for some fat. 27. 
Dost thou fear the clap of thunder ? 28. I fear it. 29. Dost thou 
depart instantly ? 30. I depart instantly, and the Frenchman in- 
tends to depart to-morrow. 31. Art thou going any where ? 32.1 
am going nowhere, but the traveler is going every where. 33. Do 
you speak French easily? 34. No, sir, I speak French, but not 
easily. 35. Is not that writing beautiful ? 36. It is very beauti- 
ful. 37. Do you like reading ? 38. I like it much. 39. Has the 
master given you blows ? 40. No, he has given blows to that bad 
boy (sajet). 41. Dost thou smell those flowers from here? 42. I 
smell them. 43. Of what dogs are you afraid ? 44. I am afraid 
of those of which you speak. 45. I take away that of which you 
are afraid. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. George, have you nothing to do? 2. Yes, sir, I have to do 
my exercise. 3. Well, why have you not clone it ? 4. Because I 
have no pen. 5. But where is your new pen ? 6. I am looking for 
it, but I do not find it. 7. You do not take care of your pens. 8. 
I always put my pens in my portfolio, and some one takes (prend) 
them. 9. I doubt of it, because you do not take care of your things 
(affaires). 10. Have you some ink ? 11. I have still a little, but 
not much. 12. I am going to give you another pen, and some ink, 
if you have need of them. 13. Where is your copy-book ? I wish 
to see (voir) your writing. 14. Your copy-book is dirty ; why do 
you not take care of your books ? 15. Your brothers take care of 
theirs. 16. What is Peter (Pierre) doing ? 17. He is studying 
his French lesson (legon de frangais). 18. Peter is a very good 
child ; he loves reading, and he takes good care of his books. 19. 
You do not hold your pen well ; that is why (Jest pourquoi) you 
write (ecrivez) so badly. 20. Now you can (pouvez) go out. Good 
morning (bonjour). 



43.— QUARANTE-TROISI^ME LEQON. 

NOUNS, ADJECTIVES, ETC. 

To see, seeing, seen. Voir, voyant, vu, e (fern.). 

Je vois, tu vois, il voit, nous voyons, vous voyez, Us voient, 
I see, thou seest, he sees, we see, you see, they see. 

20 20 :2 3 20 CO 20 1221 20 12 6 20_ 

voir, vo-yan£, vois, voit, vo-yons, vo-yes, voien£ 



THE FOKTY-THIRD LESSON. 



161 



The road,. 
The drawer. 
A. piece, bit. 



The week. 
The rain. 

In a moment, pres- 
ently. 
The skin. 
The sight. 
Wide, broad. 
Bald. 



MASCULINE. 

Le chemin. 
Le tiroir. 
TTn morceau. 



FEMININE. 

La semaine. 
La pluie. 
Tout a Vheure. 



Good fortune. 
Bad fortune. 
The storm. 
The forehead. 
Bitter. 

Narrow, tight. 

High. 

Thick. 

The eye. The eyes. 

That paper is thick. 
That plank is thick. 
That man's forehead is high. 
His skin is white. 
His sight is bad. 
Your eyes are blue. 
This road is wide, and that one is 
narrow. 

What do you put in that drawer ? 
I put some pieces of cloth there. 
Do you see the storm coming ? 
I see it. 

The dog sees the birds, and the birds 

see the dog. 
Have you some more fruit? 
I have some more. 



Le bonheur. La* peau. 
Le malheur. La vue. 
Vorage. Large. 
Le front. Chauve. 
Amer. Amere. 
Etroit. Etroite. 
Haut. Haute. 
Epais. Epaisse. 
IS ceil (sing.). Les yeux (plur.). 
Ce papier est epais. 
Cette planche est epaisse. 
Cet homme a le front haut. 
II a la peau blanche. (Less. 33, 2.) 
II a la vue mauvaise. 
Vous avez les yeux bleus. 
Ce chemin-ci est large, et celui-la est 
etroit. 

Que mettez-vous dans ce tiroir ? 
J'y mets des morceaux de drap. 
Yoyez-vous venir l'orage ? 
Je le vois. 

Le chien voit les oiseaux, et les oiseaux 

voient le chien. 
Avez-vous encore du fruit ? 
J'en ai encore. 

Encore (de). JSfe plus (de). 

Encore oxiAplus take de 



Some more. No more. 

1. Encore meaning some more, is not used with a negative, 
before the following noun. 

He has some more money. II a encore de l'argent. 

He has no more money. fl n'a plus d'argent. 

We have some more. Nous en avons encore. 

We have no more. Nous n'en avons plus. 
To have the goodness, or kindness. Avoir la bonte. 

2. Avoir la bonte and other verbal expressions formed of avoir and a noun, take de 
before the following infinitive. 

1. Cet homme a beaucoup de bonheur et peu de malheur. 2. 
Le medecin ne va-t-il pas faire une operation a ce malade ? 3. Si, 

14 7 12 20 2213 16 17 18 1 11 15 11 17 1 11 23 

che-min, semaine, ti-roir. pluie, mor-ceau, tou-ta-l'Aeure, bon-fteur, peau, mal-Aeur, vue, 

16 1 1 21 17 1 7 1 7 5 20 5 20 17 17 5 7 9 12 9 

o-rage, lar<?e, frontf, chauve, a-mer, a-mere, e-troil e-troite, hau£, haute, e-pais, ceil, yeua?, 

3 16 21 6 

en-core, bon-te. 



162 



THE FORTY-THIRD LESSON. 



il compte la faire cette semaine. 4. Cet homme est chauve ; il a le 
front haut et large ; il a aussi la vue mauvaise. 5. Quels chiens 
ce garcon a-t-il? 6. II a ceux dont vous avez peur. 7. Quel 
homme voyez-vous ? 8. Nous voyons celui dont vous parlez. 9. 
Ce vin n'est-il pas amer? 10. II est bien amer. 11. Avez-vous 
mis les morceaux de papier dans votre tiroir ? 12. Je les y ai mis. 
13. Quelles vaches avez-vous achetees? 14. Nous avons achete 
celles dont ce garcon a soin. 15. Voyez-vous ce dont le cheval a 
peur ? 16. Nous le voyons. 17. Votre frere a la bonte de venir 
souvent chez moi. 18. II a toujours soin de bien etudier sa lecon. 
19. Vois-tu la fleur dont je parle? 20. Je la vois. 21. Avez-vous 
vu ma belle-sceur ? 22. Je l'ai vue. 

1. Dost thou see the lady of whom we speak ? 2. I see the 
one of whom you speak, and those of whom your friend speaks 
also. 8. What birds do you see ? 4. We see those of which you 
have care. 5. Have you seen our beautiful flowers ? 6. I have 
not seen them. 7. Whom dost thou see ? 8. I see him of whose 
courage you doubt. 9. Do you go out at night all alone? 10. I 
never go out alone ; I go out with my father and with my brother. 
11. When do you go home? 12. I go there forthwith. 13. Do 
you give that ox some blows with a whip (de fouet) ? 14. I give 
him some. 15.1 admire the writing and the reading of that scholar. 
16. This road is broad and that one is narrow. 17. I have not 
been to my friend's this week, but I intend to go there forthwith. 
18. Some one has put a piece of cake in my drawer. 

19. Have you had much bad fortune ? 20. No, sir, I have had 
much good fortune. 21. The ox has the skin thicker (plus epaisse) 
than the sheep. 22. Do those birds see the storm coming ? 23. 
They see it. 24. Is not that apple bitter? 25. Yes, it is very bit- 
ter. 26. Is not that coat too tight? 27. It is very tight, but 
these pantaloons are wide. 28. That man's forehead is high ; are 
not his eyes blue ? 29. His forehead is high and he is bald, but 
his eyes are black. 30. Have you some more wine? 31. I have 
no more. 32. Our neighbor has the goodness to send us fruit and 
flowers. 33. Do you intend to depart this week ? 34. I intend 
to depart forthwith. 35. Do you wish for a piece of roast beef? 
36. Yes, sir, if you please. 



THE FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



163 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Does your aunt intend to depart to-morrow for New Orleans 
( pour la Nouvelle Orleans) % 2. No, madam, she only intends to 
depart next (prochaine) week. 3. Does she always live at your 
house ? 4. Yes, madam, she lives there, but she is not at home 
to-day; she is in the country, at the house of her sister. 5. When 
does she intend to return (revenir) % 6. To-morrow, madam. 7. I 
wish to see her to-day. 8. Do you often go to see your aunt who 
lives in the country % 9. I go there sometimes. 

10. What is the matter with that little girl % 11. She is Hind. 
12. Poor child, how (que) I pity her! 13. It is a thick film (taie) 
which she has on the eyes ; our physician says (dit) that he can 
(peut) take it away ; he intends to perform (faire) the operation 
(operation) for her this week. 14. If it is only a film, the physi- 
cian can restore her sight (to her the sight). 15. Do you speak of 
the general's good fortune? 16. I speak of his bad fortune. 17. 
What do you take away? 18. I take away that of which the child 
is afraid. 



44.— QUAKANTE-QUATRlSME LEQON. 



IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 



To shut. To bring. 
Do you shut the door ? 
I shut it. 

The servant brings some good fruit. 



Fermer. Apporter. 
Fermez-vous la porte ? 
Je la ferme. 

Le domestique apporte de bon fruit. 



1. The Imperative Mood of all French verbs, with very few exceptions, which will be 
given hereafter, has the first and second persons plural the same as those of the indicative 
present, and the second person singular the same as the first person singular of the indica- 
tive present, all omitting the subject. Thus : 



Come (thou). Viens. Shut (thou). 

Let us come. Venons. Let us shut. 

Come (you). Venez. Shut (you). 

Come (thou) here. Come (you) here. 

Go to the neighbor's. 

Let us go to the neighbor's. 

Shut the door. 

Bring the book. 

Shut the window. Shut it. 



Ferme. 
Fermons. 
Fermez. 
Viens ici. 



Bring (thou). 
Let us bring. 
Bring (you). 
Venez ici. 



Apporte. 

Apportons. 

Apportez. 



Allez chez le voisin. 

Allons chez le voisin. 

Ferme la porte, or, Fermez la porte. 

Apporte le livre, or, Apportez le livr<e. 

Fermez la fenetre. Fermez-la. 



2. These persons of the imperative, when affirmative, take after the verb, and join to 
it by a hyphen, all those pronouns which usually come before the verb ; the direct always 
preceding the indirect, y and en coming after the other pronouns. 

Give him the bread. Donnez (or donne)-lui le pain. 

Give it to him. Donne (or donnez)-le lui. 

Let us give her some bread. Donnons-lui du pain. 



7 6 1 16 6 1 16 1 16 21 1 16 6 7 7 6 

fer-me?-, ap-por-ter, ap-porte* ap-por-tons, a£>-por-tes, ferme, fer-mes. 



184 



THE FORTY-FOURTH LESSOX. 



Let us give her some. 
Give some to them. 
Let us give them the napkins. 
Give them to us. 



Donnons-lui-en. 
Donnez-leur-en. 
Donnons-leur les serviettes. 
Donnez-les-nous. 



8. "With negative imperatives, the pronouns are placed, as usual, before the verb. 

Do not carry them to him. Ne les lui porte pas. 

Let us not carry any to them. Ne leur en portons pas. 

Do not carry them there. Ne les y portez pas. 

Let us not carry any there. N'y en portons pas. 

Send them to the village. Envoyez-les au village. 

Send them there. Envoyez (or envoie)-les-y. 

Send some there. Envoyez (or envoies)-y-en. 

4. The second person singular imperative, if ending with a vowel, takes an s when fol- 
lowed by y or en, as in this last phrase. 

Send some to thy father. Envoies-en a ton pere. 

5. "With affirmative imperatives me and te become moi and toi, and are placed after y. 



Bring me thy book. 
Take me there. 
Make thyself a soldier. 
Lend me your pen. 
Lend it to me. 



Apporte-moi ton livre. 
Menez-y-moi. 
Fais-toi soldat. 
Pretez-moi votre plume. 
Pretez-la-moi. 



The arm. 
The noise. 
The return 
The honor. 
Long. 

Happy, fortunate. 



A box. 
A person. 
A rule. 
Arithmetic. 



Unhappy, unfortunate. 

A hair. To kindle, to light. 

The hair. Yesterday, the day before 

yesterday. 
Day after to-morrow. 



MASCULINE. 

Le bras. 
Le bruit. 
Le retour. 
Uhonneur. 
Long. 

Heureux, for- 
tune. 

Malheureux, in 
fortune. 

L T n cheveu. 

Les cheveux. Eier, 



FEMININE. 

Une boite. 
Une personne. 
Une regie. 
U 1 arithmetique. 
Longue. 

Heureuse, fortunee. 



Malheureuse, infor- 

tunee. 
Allumer. 
avant-hier. 



Apres-demain. 



1. Allumez la chandelle. 2. Allumons la lampe. 3. Qui al- 
lume le feu? 4. Le domestique 1' all nine. 5. Allumez- vous la 
lampe f 6. Non, monsieur, j'allume la chandelle. 7. Allons a 
l'eglise. 8. Allez a l'ecole. 9. Apportez-moi la boite d'ivoire. 
10. Cet homme a le bras long et le pied grand ; il a aussi les che- 



1 20 2212 7 15 4 18 7 15 11 1 12 5 12 21 21 9 

bras, boite, bruitf, per-somie, re-tour, re-gle, ^on-neur, a-rit^-me-tike, longr, longwe, heu- 

10 9 9 16 22 6 16 22 6 1 9 9 1 9 9 14 16 22 6 14 16 22 

reuaj, heu-reuze, for-tu-ne, for-tu-ne&. mal-^eu-reucc, mal-7teu-reuz<3, in-for-tu-ne, in-for-tu- 

6 4 10 4 10 1 - 22 6 127 1 3 127 1 5 14 

nee, che-veu, che-veua?. aWu-mer, 7iier, avant-7iier, a-presdc-main, 



THE FORTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



165 



veux noirs. 11. Sentez-vous lapluie? 12. Je sens la pluie et 
Pair frais. 13. Cette demoiselle n'est-elle pas heureuse? 14. Elle 
est heureuse parce qu'elle est tres-bonne, et son frere est malheureux 
parce qu'il est tres-mechant. 15. Allez a votre chambre. 16. 
Allez-y tout a 1'heure. 17. Demeurez-vous pres d'ici? 18. Je 
demeure dans la rue Charles. 19. Donnez-moi cette boite d'ivoire. 
20. Qu'est-ce qui fait tant de bruit? 21. Le vent le fait. 22. 
Cet etranger est une personne d'esprit. 23. Je compte aller chez 
vous a mon retour de la ville. 24. Savez-vous les regies d'arith- 
metique? 25. Je les sais bien. 

1. Shut the door. 2. Bring me thy copy-book. 3. Give me 
the butter. 4. Bring me the bread. 5. Bring it to me. 6. Give 
the master thy pen. 7. Give it to him. 8. Give the young lady 
the flowers. 9. Give them to her. 10. Bring the scholars their 
pens. 11. Bring them to them. 12, Carry the ladies the gloves. 
13. Carry them to them. 14. Come here. 15. Let us look for 
our books. 16. Let us go to school. 17. Do not speak to that 
boy. 18. Do not speak to him. 19. Do not give those men the 
fruit. 20. Do not give it to them. 21. Do not bring it to me. 
22. Is that road narrow? 23. That road is narrow, and this one 
is broad. 24. I saw your uncle yesterday, and I saw the general 
day before yesterday. 

25. Will you please to give me a piece of cake? 26. Have 
you some more fruit? 27. I have no more. 28. That lady's arms 
are very white, her hair is black, and her eyes blue. 29. Put your 
papers in this box. 30. Do the children make that noise ? $1. 
Yes, sir, they make much noise. 32. I am acquainted with that 
lady ; she is a person of wit. 33.1 saw your brother yesterday on 
(d) my return from the country, and I saw your father day before 
yesterday. 34. What are you studying ? 35. I am studying the 
rules of arithmetic. 36. Has not the general much good fortune ? 
37. He has much good fortune and the captain has much bad for- 
tune. 38. When did you see the general ? 39. I saw him yester- 
day, and I saw the captain the day before yesterday. 40. I intend 
to go to your house day after to-morrow. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you not feel the rain? 2. Yes, sir, it rains already 
much. 3. I am going to look for my books which are under the.. 



166 



THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



tree. 4. I am going with you. 5. Are you not cold ? 6. No, I 
am neither warm nor cold ; the wind is a little fresh, but it is not 
cold. 7. I like to hear the claps of thunder when I have nothing 
to do, but I do not like them too near. 8. Are you afraid of them f 
9. I am not afraid of them. 10. My books are already a little wet ; 
I am going to put them before the fire. 11. Who is in the house 
with John ? 12. George is there. 13. I am going to see him. 
14. Why ? 15. Because I have his knife, and I wish to return it to 
him. 16. You need not go (d'aller) to the house for that ; they 
are coming here in a moment. 17. Well, I remain here. 18. Have 
(ctijez) the goodness to put my books on the table. 19. I am going 
to put them before the fire if you wish it. 20. I thank you ; but 
they are not very wet. 21. Well, I am going to put them in the 
sun. 

22. Lend me a pen. 23. I have none. 24. Who has one ? 
25. No one here ; all the pens are in that room, and Mr. E. has 
the key. 26. Have you not a pencil % 27. I have none, but 
George has one. 28. I am going for it (le chercher). 



45.— QUARANTE-CIN'QUIEME LEQON. 

2PEST-CE PAS, PEBSONNE, ETC. 

To drink, drinking, drunk. Boire, buvant, bu, e. 

Je dots, tu bois, il doit, nous buvons, vous buvez, Us boivent, 

I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks, we drink, you drink, they drink. 

To translate. Traduire (varied as Conduire, Les. 34). 

To ivait for, expect, expecting, expected. Attendre, attendant, attendu, e. 

To lose, losing, lost. Perdre, perdant, perdu, e. 

To hear, hearing, heard. Entendre, entendant, entenda, e. 

, 1. These last three verbs follow the model of the fourth conjugation, Lesson 34. When 
the infinitive only of a verb is given hereafter, it is to be understood that it follows the reg- 
ular model of its conjugation. 



The salt. A line. 

A ribbon. Easy. 

Next (approaching). 

A month. Geography. 

Long (in time). Some time. 

Difficult. Is it not ? does it not ? etc. 



MASCULINE. 

Le sel. 
Un rub an. 
Prochain. 
Un mois. 
Longtemps. 
Difficile. 



FEMININE. 

ITne ligne. 
Facile. 
Prochaine. 
La geographic 
Quelque temps. 
N'est-ce pas ? 



2. N'est-ce pas, at the end of an affirmation, like is it not, does it not, etc., in English, 
makes it interrogative. 

This geography lesson is difficult, is Cette lecon de geographie est difficile, 
it not? n'est-ce pas ? 

20 22 3 20 20 22 21 22 6 20 1 22 12 1 3 1 3 3 1 

boire, bu-vanl bois, boil bu-vons, bu-ves, "bovvent, tra-duire, at-tendre, a£-ten-dantf, at- 

3 22 7 7 3 7 22 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 22 5 12 22 31 12 

ten-du, perdre, per-dantf, per-du, en-tendre, en-ten-dan£, en-ten-du, sel, ligne, ru-ban, fa-cile, 

15 14 15 7 20 5 15 1 13 21 3 5 1 

pro-chain, pro-chaine, mois, ge-o-gra-phie, \ong-temps, n'est-ce pas. 



THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



167 



That man drinks much wine ; does he Cet homme boit beaucoup de Tin, 
not ? n'est-ce pas ? 

You are waiting for the return of your Yous attendez le retour de vos pa- 
relations ; are you not ? rents, n'est-ce pas ? 

Those scholars do not translate French Ces ecoliers ne traduissent pas bien le 
well ; do they ? francais, n'est-ce pas ? 

I hear the noise of the thunder. J'entends le bruit du tonnerre. 

To return. To have returned, to be back. Revenir. Etre de retour. 

Our neighbor has returned home. Notre voisin est de retour chez lui. 

Perfectly. Intimately. Parfaitement. Intimement. 

On it, there on. Under it, there under. Dessus. Dessous. 

To recite. He recites well. Reciter. II recite bien. 

Next year. Uan prochain. Uann'ee prochaine. 

That. He says that it rains. Que (conj.). II dit qu'il pleut. 

3. We have seen (Lesson 32) that persbnne without a verb, or with ne before the verb, 
means nobody. With a verb and without ne, it means any body, any one. It is always 
masculine singular. Without ne, and with an article or demonstrative adjective, however, 
it is a feminine noun, and means person (Lesson 44). 

Does any one desire to do that ? Personne desire-t-il faire cela ? 

Nobody desires to do it. Personne ne desire le faire. 

T/iis person desires to do it. Cette personne desire le faire. 

4. JVo one, in a general sense equivalent to nobody, is personne ; meaning not one of a 
number referred to, is aucun. 

I know no one here. Je ne connais personne ici. 

I know no one of those gentlemen. Je ne connais aucun de ces messieurs. 

I have none of your books. Je w'ai aucun de vos livres. 

I have translated that whole page. J'ai traduit cette page entiere. 

1. Voyez-vous les lignes sur ce papier ? 2. Je les vois. 3. Per- 
dez-vous vos parapluies ? 4. Je les perds souvent. 5. Buvez-vous 
de ce vin-ci ou decelui-la? 6. Nous buvons de celui-ci et notre 
ami boit de celui-la. 7. Nous etudions les regies de 1'aritrimetiqu.e. 
8. Je doute de l'honneur de cet homme. 9. Qui attendez-vous ? 
10. J'attends la cuisiniere, et la cuisiniere attend la servante. 11. 
Traduisez ce livre francais. 12. Traduisez-le. 13. Etudie ta ge- 
ographic 14. Cette dame a les yeux bleus et la peau tres-blanche. 
15. Sait-il, lui, que je desire le voir? 16. Combien demois font un an 
(une annee) ? 17. Douze moisfont uneannee (un an). 18. Le fran- 
cais connait intimement votre frere. 19. Apportez-moi le sel. Don- 
nez-moi le ruban. 20. Votre lecon est-elle facile ? 21. Elle est bien 
facile. 22. Kestez-vous ici longtemps? 23. Kon, monsieur, je pars 
apres-demain. 24. Combien de lignes recitez-vous bien? 25. Je 

4 12 4 18 1 7 3 14 12 3 4 22 4 18 5 ri2 6 3 1 6 

rev^-nir, re-tour, par-faite-mentf, in-time-men£, des-sus, des-sous, re-ci-ter, an, an-nee, 

4 17 24 

ke, au-cun. 



168 



THE FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



recite parfaitement bien une page entiere. 26. Mettez-vous votre 
chapeau sur la table ou dessous ? 27. Je ne le mets ni dessus ni 
dessous. 28. Votre frere compte-t-il revenir tout de suite? 29. 
II est de retour a present. 

1. Do you drink tea or coffee ? 2.1 drink coffee and my sisters 
drink tea. 3. I know the doctor, and I know that he is a man of 
wit. 4. Are you waiting for anyone? 5. I am waiting for the 
return of my brother. 6. Your brother has returned. 7. Do you 
sometimes lose your money? 8. I never lose it. 9. Do you hear 
what I say ? 10. I hear it perfectly. 11. How many lines do those 
scholars translate ? 12. They translate all the lines of that page. 

13. I know that that man is intimately acquainted with your father. 

14. Does your brother return home often? 15. He returns very 
often. 16. He has returned now. 17. Are the lessons easy or 
difficult? 18. Our lessons are difficult, but the one of that lazy 
little one is very easy. 

19. Have you bought the blue ribbons ? 20. I have bought them. 
21. Have you recited your lesson well ? 22. I recited it perfectly 
well. 23. Did you translate all the lines of that page? 24. I trans- 
lated them all. 25. I intend to go out in a moment. 26. Give 
me the salt. 27. Bring me the ribbons. Show them to me. 28. 
Do not show them to him. 29. Do you depart next week or next 
month? 30. I depart day after to-morrow. 31. Is your hat on 
the bench or under it ? 32. It is neither on it nor under it ; it is 
here on the table. 33. Give me thy book. 34. Lend me your 
knife. 35. Let us drink the coffee. 36. Bring me that box. Bring 
it to me. 37. Carry it to her. 38. Do not carry it to them. 39. 
Give it to us. 40. Let us take the potatoes to the cellar. 41. Let 
us take some there. 42. Let us go to the church. 43. Let us go 
there. 44. Has any one my book ? 45. No one has it. 46. You 
know my father ; do you not ? 47. I know no one of your relations. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you know any one of those gentlemen? 2. No, sir, my 
brother knows many persons (monde) here, but I know nobody and 
nobody knows me. 3. Who take's you to school ? 4. Nobody ; I 
go there alone. 5. Are you acquainted with none of the pupils ? 
6. Yes, I know them all. 7. Charles, lend me thy slate. 8. Yes, 
certainly ; where is thine ? 9. It is full of writing. 10. Well, wash 
it. 11. No, my friend. 12. Why not ? 13. Because it is the 



THE FORTY-SIXTH LESSOX. 



169 



writing of my brother, and he has need of it. 14. Well, mine is 
there on the bench. 15. Hast thou need of a slate-pencil [crayon 
d'ardoise) ? 16. Thank yon, I have one. 17. Show me the lesson in 
(de) arithmetic. 18. What have we to do? 19. We have this rule 
to study. 20. That is not very difficult. 21. What art thou 
studying ? 22.1 am studying my lesson in geography, and I am 
going to study my lesson in reading. 

23. Which of all thy lessons dost thou like the best (le mieux), 
John? 24. That of geography. 25. Because that lesson is less 
difficult than the others ; is it not ? 28. Yes, Charles ; dost thou 
know any pupil who likes difficult lessons? 27. No, my little 
friend ; children are a little lazy ; but thou hast not to study only 
that which is easy. 28. No, I know it, I wish to study all ; but I 
do not like what is too difficult. 29. Is thy father still in the coun- 
try ? 30. No, he has returned. 



46.— QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEQON. 

NEGATIVE "WITH THE INFINITIVE, ETC. 



To read, reading, read. 
J e lis, tu lis, il lit, 

I read, thou readest, he reads, 

To write, writing, loritten. 
J'ecris, tu ecris, il ecrit, 
I write, thou writest, he writes, 

To say, saying, said. 
Jedis, tudis, ildit, 

I say, thou sayest, he says, 

The credit. The tongue, language. 
The profit. To be worth. 
To sell. He sells wine. 



Lire, lisant, he, e (fern.). 
nous lisons, vous lisez, Us lisent, 

we read, you read, they read. 

Ecrire, ecrivant, ecrit. 
nous ecrivons, vous ecrivez, Us ecrivent, 
we write, you write, they write. 

Lire, disant, dit. 
nous disons, vous dites, Us disent, 
we say, you say, they say. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Le credit. 
Le profit. 
Vendre. II vend du vin. 
Voutil. Alors, done. 
Cet homrne est riche de cent mille dol- 
lars. 



La langue. 
Eire riche de. 



The tool. Then. 

That man is worth a hundred thousand 
dollars. 

1. Then, an adverb of time, is alors ; then, a conjunction of inference, is done. 

I was at your house this morning, and J'ai ere chez vous ce matin, et alors 

then I saw your brother. j'ai vu votre fi ere. 

My father is sick. Mon pere est malade. 

Then he does not go out at present. Lone il ne sort pas a present. 

To have the appearance of, to look. Avoir Voir (de). 

12 12 3 12 12 12 21 32 6 12 5 13 5 32 3 5 12 5 12 5_ 12 21 5 12 

lire, li-zan£, lis, lit, li-zons, li-zes, lizent, e-crire, e-cri-varJ, e-cri£, e-cris, e-cri-vons, e-cri- 

6 5 12 13 12 3 12 12 12 21 12 6 12 6 12 1 15 12 12 

ves, e-crive?i£, dire, di-zani, dit, dis, di-zons, di-zes, diz&nt, cre-di£, langue, pro-h7, riche, 

4 18 12 1 1G 21 7 

vendre, oa-til, a-lors, done, air. 

8 



170 



THE FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



You look in good health. Vous avcz l'air d'etre en Donne sante. 

She looks in good humor. Elle a l'air de bonne humeur. 

He looks in bad humor. II a l'air de mauvaise humeur. 

That lady looks proud. Cette dame a l'air fier. 

2. When an adjective following avoir l'air merely expresses physical qualifications, it 
is made to agree with the subject ; but when applied to a moral faculty or metaphysical 
distinction, it most generally agrees with the word air. See page 439, 20. 

That apple looks good. Cette pomme a l'air bonne. 

That lady looks good. Cette dame a l'air bon. 

That lady looks badly formed. Cette dame a l'air mal faite. 

3. "We have seen (Lesson 20, 7) that one verb following another, and expressing its ob- 
ject, is put in the infinitive. This is often the case when the verbs in English are joined by 
a conjunction. 

Come and read. Go and write. Yenez lire. Allez ecrire. 

Come and tell me thy name. Yiens me dire ton nom. 

4. "When a negative belongs particularly to the infinitive present, both parts (ne rien, ne 
pas, etc.) are placed before the verb. 

They like to do nothing. lis aiment a ne rien faire. 

I wish not to write. Je desire ne pas ecrire. 

He takes good care not to go to school. II a bien soin de ne pas aller a 1'ecole. 

5. A is to be repeated before every infinitive depending on the same word or phrase. 

I have something to study and recite. J'ai quelque chose a etudier et a, reciter. 
We like to read, write, and study. Nous aimons a lire, a ecrire et a etudier. 

1. Get epicier a-t-il du credit? 2. II a du credit et du profit. 
3. Combien de langues le maitre parle-t-il ? 4. II parle parfaite- 
ment 1' anglais, le francais etl'espagnol. 5. Ces marchandes ont l'air 
bien gai. 6. Elles ont meme l'air distingue, mais leurs marchandises 
ont l'air bien mauvaises. 7. Que vends-tu ? 8. Je ne vends rien, 
mais cet ouvrier vend ses outils. 9. Savez-vous ce que dit cette 
femme ? 10. Elle dit que son fils sait parfaitement le francais. 
11. Je connais intimement son fils, et je dis qu'il sait parfaitement 
le francais et l'espagnol. 12. II est riche de soixante mille dollars. 
13. Lis-tu ce livre frangais ? 14. Je ne le lis pas, mais mon frere le 
lit et mes sceurs le lisent aussi. 15. Ecris-tu beaucoup de lettres ? 
16. J'en ecris beaucoup. 17. Dites-vous qu'il pleut ? 18. Je dis 
qu'il pleut. 19. Vous avez l'air d'etre malade; etes-vous en bonne 
sante? 20. Je suis un peu malade. 21. Pourquoi cet eleve a-t-il 
l'air de mauvaise humeur? 22. Parce qu'il trouve sa lecon unpeu 
difficile. 23. Quand avez-vous ecrit vos lettres? 24. Je les ai 
ecrites avant hier. 

1. What languages do you speak ? 2.1 speak English and 
French. 3. Which language do you like the best (le mieux) ? 4. 



THE FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



171 



It is the English. 5. Has that merchant profit ? 6. He has nei- 
ther profit nor credit. 7. Is he not rich ? 8. Yes, sir, he is worth 
two hundred thousand dollars. 9. What is that workman selling ? 
10. He is selling his tools. 11. Do you read the letters which we 
write? 12. We read them. 13. Do the scholars write letters to 
their friends ? 14. They write some to them. 15. What do you 
say 1 ? 1G. We say that it rains. 17. Do those children tell you 
their names ? 18. They tell them to us. 19. Tell me where is 
your father ? 20. He is at home. 21. May (mai) is the fifth month 
of the year ; is it not ? 22. It is the fifth. 23. That man loses his 
money. 

24. Do you hear the noise of the wind ? 25. Yes, sir, and I 
hear the noise of the rain also. 26. That musician translates Span- 
ish easily. 27. Does the doctor dwell near here (pres (Fici) ? 28. 
No, sir, he dwells near the market. 29. That scholar is a little 
lazy. 30. Then she does not like to study. 31. Do you read all 
that the master writes ? 32. I read it all. 33. Has that old lady 
read the letters of her daughter ? 34. Yes, sir, she received them 
this morning, and then she read them. 35. Have those children 
told you their names ? 36. They have not told them to me. 37. 
Does any one know the name of that stranger ? 38. No one knows it. 
39. Have you read any one of these books ? 40. I have read none. 
41. Do you intend to remain long in this village ? 42. No, sir, I 
depart forthwith ; but my brother intends to remain here some time. 
43. That scholar likes to do nothing. 44. Go and look for your 
copy-book. 45. Come and show me your writing. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

I. Do you see that young lady who is going to Madame B.'s? 
2. Yes, I see her. 3. Who is she ? are you acquainted with her ? 
4. She is the sister of Charles ; I see her sometimes at church. 5. 
She lives near our house, and she comes to see my mother frequent- 
ly. 6. What is her name ? 7. Her name is Mary (Marie) ; do you 
wish to make her acquaintance (sa connaissance) ? 8. With much 
pleasure. 9. Well, one evening of this week I am going to take 
you to see her. 10. I thank you much. 

II. George (Georges), what hast thou in that bag? 12. They 
are apples, sir ; will you have one ? 13. No, thank you ; but where 
didst thou find so (de si) beautiful apples ? 14. At the house of our 
grocer, where my father sends me to buy some sometimes. 15. 
They are superb ; I am going to buy some also. 16. Where does 



172 



THE FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



your grocer live % 17. On Koyal-street, near the market ; if you 
are not acquainted with the place, I am going to conduct you there. 
18. Hast thou the time to (de) go there ? 19. 0, yes, I have noth- 
ing to do. 20. Thank thee, my friend, thou art very good. 

21. The scholars recite their lessons perfectly to-day ; they are 
not lazy. 22. Generally (generalement) you do not stay here long ; 
do you intend to depart the day after to-morrow 1 23. I intend to 
depart next month. 24. Do you always put your umbrella on the 
table ? 25. I do not put it on it, I put it under it. 26. Why does 
the Spaniard look in ill humor ? 27. Because he is not in good 
health. 



47.— QUARANTE-SEPTlEME LECON. 

FUTTJEE TENSE. 

1. The Future of French verbs is formed from the infinitive by the following general 
rule : Change r final of the first and second conjugations, oir of the third, and re of the 
fourth, into the terminations, 

EAI, HAS, EA, EONS, REZ, R0NT. 

FIRST CONJUGATION. AIMER, TO LOVE. 
tu aimeras, il aimera, nous airnerons, vous aimerez, Us aimeront, 



tPaimerai, 
I shall love, 



thou wilt love, he will love, we shall love, you will love, they will love. 
SECOND CONJUGATION. FI1UR, TO FINISH. 



Jefinirai, 
I shall finish, 



tufiniras, ilfinira, nous finiroiu 
thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., 



tousfinirez, ils finiront, 
you will, etc., they will, etc. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. BECEVOIB, TO RECEIVE. 
Jerecevrai, tureeevras, il recevra, nous recevrons, vous recevrez, ils recevront, 
I shall receive, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. BEHDRE, TO RESTORE. 
Je rendrai, tu rendras, il rendra, nous rendrons, xous rendrez, ils rendront, 
I shall give back, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 

2. Avoir, to have, and Etre, to be, have the future irregular. 
Jaurai, tu auras, il aura, nous aurons, vous aurez, ils auront, 
I shall have, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 
Je serai, tu seras, il sera, nous serons, nous serez, ils seront, 

I shall be, thou wilt be, he will be, we shall be, you will be, they will be. 

There are a few other verbs (fourteen) whose futures vary slightly from the above ml,-. 
These will be noted hereafter. 



Will the scholars love the master? 
They will love him. 
"When will you finish your exercises ? 
We shall finish them this evening. 
Wilt thou receive thy letters to-mor- 
row ? 



Les ecoliers aimeront-ils le maitre ? 
Ils l'aimeront. 

Quand finirez-vous vos themes ? 
Nous les finirons ce soir. 
Keeevras-tu tes lettres domain ? 



7 6 1 1 ?1 6 21 12 12 6 4 4 6 3 6 1*1 6 

aime-rai, ras, ra, rons, re^, xoni, fi-ni-rai, re-cev-rai, ren-drai, au-rai, ss-rai. 



THE FOKTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



173 



I shall receive them day after to-mor- Je les recevrai apres-demain. 
row. 

The gentleman will give back to you Monsieur vous rendra votre argent, 
your money. 

I shall be at your house to-morrow. Je serai chez vous demain. 
We shall have our money nest week. Nous aurons notre argent la semaine 

prochaine. 

3. After adverbs of time, where the English employ other tenses for the future, the 
French employ the future ; but after si conditional, they use the present. 

When I have my money I shall be rich. Qu&nd faurai mon argent je serai riche. 
When we have time we will write. Quand nous aurons le temps nous ecri- 

rons. 

He will read when he has books. II lira quand il aura des livres. 

If I see him I will speak to him. Si je le vois je lui parlerai. 

In all the above verbs the meaning is future, and in French the future is used in all 
except the one following si, if. 

4. Si, meaning wlieilier, is followed in such cases by the future. 

I do not know whether he sets out to- Je ne sais s'il partira demain. 
morrow. 

Do you know whether we recite this Savez-vous si nous reciterons ce soir ? 
evening ? 

5. A future event, which is near, is sometimes expressed, in French as in English, by 
the present. 

He arrives this evening. II arrive ce soir. 

He departs to-morrow. II part demain. 

1. Aimeras-tu tes leeons? 2. Je les aimerai toutes. 3. 
Ainierez-vous vos amis 1 4. Nous les aimerons. 5. Sortiras-tu ce 
matin'? 6. Nou, mon ami, je sortirai ce soir. 7. Les enfants 
sortiront-ils ce soir? 8. lis ne sortiront pas aujourd'hui. 9. 
Quand recevrez-vous votre argent? 10. Nous le recevrons le mois 
prochain. 11. Les negociants recevront-ils le leur demain? 12. 
Oui, monsieur, et le capitaine recevra lesien apres-demain. 13. Ou 
mettrez-vous vos mouchoirs? 14. Je les mettrai dans ce tiroir. 
15. Ou les ouvriers mettront-ils leurs outils? 16. lis les mettront 
sur le banc. 17. Nous mettrons nos livres sur le pupitre ; ou met- 
tras-tu les tiens? 18. Je les mettrai dans mon tiroir. 19. Aurez- 
vous beaucoup d' argent demain ? 20. Je n'en aurai pas beaucoup. 
21. Quand les ecoliers auront-ils leurs livres? 22. lis les auront 
tout a l'heure. 23. Vos amis seront-ils ici demain ? 24. lis seront 
ici aujourd'hui. 25. Serez-vous chez vous ce soir ? 26. J'y serai 
et mon frere y sera aussi. 27. Quand je serai a New York, je vous 
ecrirai. 28. Si je reste a Boston, je vous le dirai. 



174 



THE FORTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



1. When will you have your money ? 2. I shall have it the 
day after to-morrow. 3. When wilt thou be in New York ? 4. I 
shall be there next month. 5. When shall we have some fruit ? 

6. We shall have some next week. 7. Where will the general be 
next month? 8. He will be in the city. 9. Where will his sons 
be then? 10. They will be there also. 11. My father will have 
his money the day after to-morrow ; will you have yours then also ? 

12. I shall not have mine this year. 13. That trader has no 
money. 14. Then he will have neither profit nor credit. 15. Will 
your brother go out this evening ? 16. No, sir, he will remain at 
home. 17. When will your relations receive your letters? 18. 
They will receive them next week. 19. Will you put on your 
cloak? 20. I shall put it on if I am cold. 

21. What does that lazy scholar like to do? 22. She likes to 
do nothing. 23. Will not the cook be pleased when she has that 
large fish? 24. She will be much pleased. 25. Where will you 
be to-morrow? 28. I shall be at school. 27. Will you have your 
money when we have ours? 28. I do not know when you will 
have yours; but we shall have ours day after to-morrow. 29. Then 
you will have yours very soon (bientol). 30. Where is George? 
31. Is he not in the yard? 32. No, no one of the boys is there. 
33. John is there. 34. No, no one is there. 35. They are in the 
house. 36. Well, I am going there. 37. Have you bought the 
countryman's horses? 38. I have not bought them yet, but I shall 
buy them to-morrow. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Will you give back to John this knife, and bring me my 
book which is on my table ? 2. I wish to write my exercises, I 
forget them sometimes ; do you never forget yours ? 3. No, never. 
4. Does your brother ever forget his ? 5. Yes, sometimes, but not 
often. 6. George, pick up your books and put them on the table. 

7. If you know your lesson, come and recite it, 8. I know mine, 
but my brother does not yet know his. 9. Well, come and recite 
yours; how many lines do you know? 10. I know a page. 11. 
Well, very well, you are not lazy to-day. 12. Give me the book. 

13. I have it not. 14. Where is it ? 15. Charles has it. 16. Go 
and look for it. 17. Charles, give me my book; I am going to re- 
cite my lesson. 18. Lend it to me still a little. 19. I have need 
of it; Mr. A. wishes for it. 20. Well, take (prenez) it. 

21. Well, George, hast thou thy book?" 22. Yes, sir. 23. 
Give it to me and show me the lesson. 24. It is this one. 25. 



THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



175 



Very well, recite it. 26. Thou knowest it perfectly ; go (va) and 
write thy exercise. 27. Let (Jaissez) me carry this book to Charles, 
if you please. 28. Yes, carry it to him ; but has he not his % 29. 
No, sir, his is at home. 30. Tell him that he will soon (bientot) 
recite his lesson. 81. Permit (permettes) me to go for (dialler 
chercher) some water. 32. Yes, if you wish for some. 33. Let 
John go (venir) with me, if you please. 34. Yes, go, but do not 
stay long. 35. We will be back soon. 



48.— QUAEANTE-HUITIEME LEQON. 

IEEEGULAE FUTURES. DE BEFOEE THE INFINITIVE. 
1. Aller, to go, and envoyer, to send, have the future irregular. 
JHrai, tu iras, il ira, nous irons, vous irez, Us iront, 

I shall go, thou wilt go, he wiil go, we shall go, you will go, they will go. 
tfenverrai, tu enverras, il enverra, nous enverrons, vous enverrez, Us enverront, 
I shall send, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 

Will you go to the city to-morrow ? Irez-vous a la ville demain ? 
I shall go there. J'irai. 

2. Fis always omitted before the future and conditional of aller for euphony. 



Mon frere ira aussi. 
Nous n'irons pas. 
M'enverras-tu dix dollars ? 
Je te les enverrai. 



My brother will go there also. 
We shall not go there. 
Wilt thou send me ten dollars ? 
I will send them to thee. 

The power. The health. 
The taste. Good humor. 

The minister. Ill humor. 
A kingdom. The company. 

Latin. 
Greek. 

The cheese. To taste of. 

To beat, beating, beaten. 

8. Battre is varied in the present like mettre (Lesson 39). 
To take, taking, taken. Prendre, prenant, pris, e. 

Jeprends, tuprends, ilprend, nousprenons, vousprenez, ils prennent, 
I take, thou takest, he takes, we take, you take, they take. 

To recognize. To learn. Reconnaitre. Apprcndre (a, bef. inf.). 

4. Reconnaitre and apprendre, compounds of connaitre and prendre, are varied like 
them. Compounds generally follow the form of their simples. 



MASCULINE. 

Le pouvoir. 
Le gout. 
Le ministre. 
Un royaume. 
Latin. 
Grec. 



FEMININE. 

La sante. 

La bonne humeur. 
La mauvaise humeur. 
La compagnie. 
Latine. 
Grccque. 



Le frontage. Avoir le gout de. 
Battre, battant, battu, e. 



J2 6 3 7 6 13 16 3 6 18 22 11 12 12 20 1217 21 1 13 

i-rai, en-ve/'-rai, pou-voir, san-te, gou£, hu-meur, mi-nistre, ro-yaume, com-pa-gni<3, 

1 1-1 1 12 5 5 15 1 1 1 3 1 £2 3 4 3 12 3 

la-tin, la-tine, grec, grecke, fro-mage, battre, ba£-tan£ bai-tu, prendre, pre-nan?, pris, mends, 

3 4 21 46 5 4 15 7 1 3 

prencf, pre-nons, pre-nez, prennent, re-con.-naitre, a/?-prendr<?. 



176 THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 

Comprendre (compounded of prendre). 
Pleuvra-t-il ? II pleuvra. 
Plusicurs. Plusieurs hommes. 
Cette soupe a bon gout. 
Eile a un gout de poivre. 
Qui bat le petit garcon? 
Les ouvriers le battent parce qu'il 

prend leurs outils. 
Qu'apprenez-vous ? 
J'apprends a lire la langue latine. 
Rcconnaissez-vous votre vieil ami ? 
Jc le reconnais. 

5. We have seen (Lesson 41) that some verbs and phrases require a before a following 
infinitive, and that others require no preposition. There are some verbs and phrases also 
which require de. Dire and oublier, already given, take de before the following infinitive. 
Such words will be marked, as they are given hereafter, by the abbreviation (de bef. inf.). 

He tells me to do that. II me dit de faire eela. 

He forgets to read the letter. II oublie de lire la lettre. 

1. Ou iras-tu ? 2. J'irai a la riviere, et mes freres iront chez 
eux. 3. Cette homme a l'air cle mauvaise humeur ; est-il malade ? 
4. Non, monsieur, il est en bonne sante. 5. Que prenez-vous ? 6. 
Je prends mes livres. 7. Apprenez-vous a lire la langue latine ? 
8. J'apprends a lire la langue latine et la grecque. 9. Le ministre 
n'a ni credit ni profit. 10. Ou irez-vous demain 1 11. J'irai a la 
campagne. 12. Apprenez-vous a lire la langue espagnole? 13. 
J'apprends a la lire et a 1'ecrire. 14. Apprends-tu la langue 
grecque? 15. Je 1'apprends. 16. Le ministre a-t-il dupouvoir? 
17. II n'a ni pouvoir ni argent. 18. Est-ce que vous battez ce 
chien? 19. Je le bats. 20. Pleuvra-t-il aujourd'hui? 21. Je 
crois qu'il ne pleuvra pas. 22. Combien cle royaumes l'Europe 
comprend-elle ? 23. Elle en comprend plusieurs. 24. Le presi- 
dent recoit de la compagnie a la maison blanche ce soir. 25. Get 
epicier a-t-il de bon fromage ? 26. II n'a ni fromage ni beurre. 
27. Eeconnaissez-vous cet homme? 28. Oui, c'est le ministre de la 
reine. 29. La France est un royaume riche et bien beau. 80. Le 
general recevra de la compagnie demain. 

1. Will your brother go to school to-morrow? 2. No, sir, he 
will go to the city. 3. Will you not go there also ? 4. No, sir, I 
shall go to my uncle's. 5. Will you send some money to that man ? 
6. We shall send some to him. 7. Who will send these letters to 



To comprehend. 

Will it rain? It will rain. 

Several. Several men. 

That soup tastes good. 

It tastes of pepper. 

Who beats the little boy ? 

The workmen beat him because he 

takes their tools. 
What do you learn ? 
I learn to read the Latin language. 
L-o you recognize your old friend? 
I recognize him. 



21 3 9 1 22 12 11 

com-prendre, pleuv-ra, plu-zieurs. 



THE FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



177 



the general? 8. His friends will send them to him. 9. The 
minister of the queen is not in good health. 10. This coffee tastes 
good ; but that cake tastes of pepper. 1 1 . What does your brother 
learn? 12. He learns Latin and Greek. 13. Does that cheese 
taste good? 14. No, sir, it tastes of pepper. 15. Has the minis- 
ter power? 16. He has much power ; he has also money; he is 
worth sixty thousand dollars. 

17. Dost thou beat the dog? 18. I beat him. 19. Does the 
countryman beat his horse? 20. He beats him. 21. What do 
those children beat ? 22. They beat the ugly cat. 23. Do you 
ever beat that child? 24. I never beat him. 25. Do you take 
what I give you? 26. I take it. 27. What do those scholars 
take? 28. They take their slates and books. 29. Why do you 
take your hats ? 30. We take them because we are going home. 
31. Does that child comprehend what he reads ? 32. He compre- 
hends it perfectly. 33. Do you comprehend that history ? 34. I 
comprehend it. 35. Why does that little boy look in ill humor? 
36. Because he does not comprehend what he studies. 37. Europe 
comprehends several large kingdoms. 38. Dost thou recognize 
thy friend? 39. I recognize him. 40. We shall receive company 
to-morrow. 41. Do you recognize your writing? 42. I recog- 
nize it. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. John, come with me. 2. Where are you going? 3. Iam 
going to the grocer's for (chercher) some sugar. 4. 1 will go there 
with you ; but let us not stay long. 5. No, I do not wish to stay 
there. 6. Have you a bag? 7. I have two. 8. Give me one. 
9. Take this one. 10. What will you put in this bag? 11. I will 
put some sugar in that one and some coffee in the other. 12. To 
what grocer's are you going? 13. We will go to Mr. B.'s ; he has 
a large store. 14. Do you sometimes go to his house? 15. Yes ; 
I go there often ; my father sends me there when he has need of 
something. 16. I never see you go there, 17. I often go there in 
the morning. 

18. Good morning (bonjour), Mr. B., my father sends me for 
some sugar and some coffee. 19. Well, my friend, give me thy 
bags. 20. How much sugar dost thou wish for? 21. Fill the bag. 
22. What sugar does thy father wish for? 23. Some white sugar. 
24. And how much coffee ? 25. Put ten pounds in this bag. 26. 
Dost thou not wish for some cheese or some butter to-day ? 27. 
No, sir, we have some still at our house. 28. I have some good 



178 



THE FORTY-NINTH LESSON. 



cheese ; carry a piece of it to thy father, and tell him to taste it. 
29. Have you some water? 30. Yes, I have some ; dost thou ever 
drink wine? 31. No, I never drink any, but I sometimes drink 
beer. 



49.— QTTARANTE-NEUVIEME LEQON. 

THE INDEFINITE PEONOUN OK 
One, they, we, people. On. 

1. On, though it may sometimes have a feminine or a plural agreeing with it, is general- 
ly masculine singular. It is used when no definite antecedent is referred to. 

What do they say in your village ? Que dit-on dans votre village ? 
They say that the president is here. On dit que le president est ici. 

2. Where the English employ the passive verb without an agent, the French employ 
on with the active. 

It is said that he is rich. On dit qu'il est riche. 

It is believed. They are heard. On croit. On les entend. 

3. Von is often used for euphony in preference to on after the words et, ou, ou, que, qui, 
quoi, si, and some others, unless it be immediately followed by le, la, les, lai, or other 
words beginning with I. Von is never used in an interrogation, but when on follows a verb 
ending with a vowel, a euphonic t is placed before it. 

I know the country where they find Je connais le pays ou Von trouve de 

gold. Tor. 
We cannot always do what we wish. On ne peut pas toujours faire ce que 

Von veut. 

Is gold found in California? Tvouve-t-on de Tor en California? 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

The body. The steam, vapor. Le corps. La vapeur. 

New, novel. Nouveau, nouvel. Nouvelle. 

4. Kouveau becomes nouvel before a vowel or a silent 7i. (See Note, Lesson 10.) 
Keuf means newly made, or obtained ; nouveau, new in kind. 

I have seen the new work. J'ai vu le nouvel ouvrage. 

I have bought a new hat. J'ai achete un chapeau neuf. 

His (or her) duty. Swift. Son devoir. Vite. 

Each one, every one. Chacun. Chacune. 

Dry. Sec. Seche. 

Low. Bas. .Basse. 

Good, property. The expense. Le Men. La depense. 

Evil, harm. Expenses, cost. Le mal, tort. Les depenses. 

The neck. Pain. Le cou. La douleur, peine. 

5. Depens, expense, is always masculine .plural. 

At the expense of others. Aux depens d'autrui. 

6. Autrui, others, other people, is used only after prepositions. 

21 16 1 11 18 5 4 JO 13 1 24 1 C2 5 5 2 2 J? 14 

on, corps, va-peur, nou-vel, de-voir, vite, cha-cun, cha-cune, sec, seche, bas, basse, bien, 

5 3 16 38 11 7 17 2212 

de-pense, tor?, dou-leur, peine, au-trui. 



THE FORTY-NINTH LESSON. 



179 



The face. he visage. La figure. 

Precious. Precieux. Precieuse. 

Swollen, swelled. Enfie. Enfi'ee. 

From street to street. The figicre. De rue en rue. La taille. 

To undertake. Entreprendre (corup. of prendre). 

7. Which, referring to place, and following a preposition, is commonly rendered by ou. 
The village in which you dwell. Le village ou vous demeurez. 

The city from which you come. La ville d'ou vous veuez. 

The place to which you go. Le lieu ou vous allez. 

The street by which you will go. La rue par ou vous irez. 

What do you undertake ? Qu'est-ce que vous entreprenez ? 

I undertake a great work. J'entreprends un grand ouvrage. 

I desire to do good to others. Je desire faire du bien a autrui (or 

aux autres). 

1. On dit que votre frere est malade. 2. On trouve beaucoup 
d'or ici. 3. On fait beaucoup de beurre dans ce village. 4. Cet 
homme vit aux depens d' autrui. 5. Nous voulons faire du bien a 
autrui (aux autres). 6. Cet enfant a le visage sale. 7. Cet ani- 
mal a le- corps long, il a aussi le pied enfle. 8. La sante est un 
bien tres-precieux. 9. Ce voyageur entreprend-il quelque chose? 
10. II entreprend un long voyage. 11. Qu'est-ce que vous entre- 
prenez ? 12. Nous entreprenons un grand ouvrage. 13. L'avez- 
vous entrepris seuls? 14. Nous ne l'avons pas entrepris seuls. 15. 
Qu'entreprennent ces messieurs? 16. lis n'entreprennent rien. 
17. Ce monsieur vous a-t-il fait du bien ? 18. Non, monsieur, il 
m'a fait du tort. 19. Ce monsieur est trop gros ; sa taille n'est 
pas belle. 20. Je vois la vapeur de ce bateau. 21. Cet homine 
vit de pain sec. 22. Ce banc est bas et cette chaise est basse 
aussi. 23. Avez-vous fait votre devoir? 24. Je l'ai fait. 25. 
Ecrivez-vous vite? 26. Je n'ecris pas tres-vite. 27. J'ai achete 
un chapeau neuf, et mon pere m'a achete des bottes neuves. 28. 
J'ai vu le nouvel ouvrage du docteur Jean. 29. Ce malade a le 
cou enfle, il a beaucoup de douleur. 

1. What do they make in your village? 2. They make hats 
there. 3. That man is said to be rich. 4. Do you believe all that 
they tell you? 5. I do not believe all. 6. Are those cravats dry? 
7. They are dry. 8. The gardener has some new fruit. 9. What 
have you new? 10. I have some new books. 11. Do you desire 
to do your duty ? 12. Yes, sir, each one desires to do his duty. 

IS 1 12 73 5 12 10 5 12 30 3 6 3 6 1 3 4 3 

vi-zage, fi-gure, pre-ci-eu£P, pre-ci-euze, en-flj, en-flee, taille, en-tre-prendre. 



180 



THE FORTY-NINTH LESSON. 



13. I have some new horses ; have you seen them ? 14. I have 
seen them. 15. I shall always desire to do my duty. 16. What 
do they do at your house ? 17. They read and study much there. 
18. Have you seen the doctor's new works ? 19. I have not seen 
them. 20. Are the streets dry? 21. They are very dry. 

22. Is the river high or low 1 23. It is very low. 24. Do you 
see the vapor on the river ? 25. I see it. 26. This chair is low, 
and that bench is low also. 27. Does each one sometimes forget 
his duties ? 28. Each one forgets them sometimes. 29. Do you 
live at the expense of others ? 30.1 live at the expense of my 
father. 31. Do you wish evil to any one? 32. Do you wish to do 
harm to any one ? 33. I wish to do evil to no one ; I wish to do 
good to every body. 34. What is the matter with you ? 35. My 
face and my neck are inflamed. 36. Take good care of your 
health, for (car) it is very precious. 37. Does not that young girl 
read fast ? 38. She reads too fast. 39. That lady's figure is very 
beautiful. 40. Have you learned your lesson ? 41. I have not 
learned it yet, but I shall learn it this evening. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Which way are you going? 2. Iam going by (par) the 
lake. 3. Come this way, sir. 4. Go that way, my friend. 5. 
Are you acquainted with Dr. B. ? 6. Yes, sir ; he is a good old 
man whom misfortune has made wise. 7. What is the matter with 
you ? you look sick. 8. I am not sick, but in bad humor. 9. But 
why? 10. I need to (de) go out, and it is going to rain. 11. It 
will not rain much. 12. It rains already, and I had the fever last 
week. 13. It is unfortunate ; but why have you to go out? 14. I 
have some money to give to Mr. Bichard, and he has need of it to- 
day. 15. You have no need to (de) go out for (pour) that. 16. 
I shall go to his house this morning, and if you wish it, I am going 
to carry it to him. 17. Thank you ; you do (rendez) me a great 
service. 18. It is no great thing (grand' chose). 19. It is a ser- 
vice which you render me, and for which I thank you much. 

20. Were you long sick ? 21. No, I had the fever only two 
days ; but my physician tells me not to (de) go out when it rains. 
22. He is right ; if you do not take care of your health, you will 
be sick again. 23. I intend to stay in (a) the house during (pen- 
dant) a few days. 24. Have you had news from your brother 
lately (dernier ement)% 25. I had some last week; he is at New 
York. 26. When does he intend to return ? 27. Next week. 

28. Charles, lend me a cord, if you please. 29. What will 
you do with it? 30. I will go and put it on the garden-door. 31. 



THE FIFTIETH LESSON". 



181 



Take this which is on this plank, if it is good. 32. Thank you; I 
am going to put it on the door. 33. Have you seen John ? 34. 
Yes, sir ; he is in the garden. 35. Tell him to come here, and 
send me your hammer and a few big nails. 



50.— CINQUANTIEME LEQON. 

IMPEKFECT TENSE. 

1. The imperfect tense is formed from the present participle, by changing ant into 
the following terminations : 



AIS, 


AIS, AIT, 


IONS, IEZ, 


AIENT. 




' Jeparlais, 


ilparlait, 


vous parliez, 


Parlant, _ 


I was speaking, 


he was speaking, 


you were speaking, 


speaking. 


tu parlais, 


nous parlions, 


ils parlaient, 




, thou wast speaking, 


we were speaking 


they were speaking. 




' Je recevais, 


il recevait, 


'vous receviez, 


Becevant, 


I was receiving, 


he was receiving, 


you were receiving, 


receiving. 


tu recevais, 


nous recevions, 


ils recevaient, 




. thou wast receiving, 


we were receiving, 


they were receiving 



2. Avoir and savoir, the only exceptions, have the imperfect thus: 
J'avais, tu avais, il avait, nous avions, vous aviez, ils avaient, 
I had, thou hadst, he had, we had, you had, they had. 

Je savais, tu savais, il savait, nous savions, vous saviez, ils savaient, 
I knew, thou knewest, he knew, we knew, you knew, they knew. 

3. This tense always denotes continuous past action. When, therefore, any thing is 
spoken of as once done and finished,* without denoting continuance, this tense is not to bt> 
used. 

Cicero was a great orator Ciceron etait un grand orateur. 

Washington was a great man. "Washington etait un grand homme. 

We had much fruit when we lived in Nous avions beaucoup de fruit quand 

the country. nous demeurions h la campagne. 

I was looking for my penknife and I Je cherchais mon canif et jW trouve 

found my pencil. mon crayon. 

We here see that where continuous past action is implied, the imperfect is used.* So 
the following. 

You were reading (continuous) while Yous lisiez pendant que ^ecrivais. 

I was writing (continuous). 

They were (continuous) here when we Ils etaient ici quand nous les avons 

saw (not continuous) them. vus. 

He had (continuous) the horses when H avait les cheraux quand je les ai 

I bought (not continuous) them. achetes. 



* Washington continued to be a great man, Cicero continued to be a great orator, but 
the finding of the pencil denotes no continuance ; it is therefore not in the imperfect, but in 
the past indefinite? 



1 7 7 H"l J 4 ? 5 7 44717 17 

par-iais, lai', lion*, liez, l&ient, re-ce-vais, a-vais, sa-vais. 



182 



THE FIFTIETH LESSON. 



She was (continuous) at your house Elle etait chez vous quand je l'ai en- 
when I heard (not continuous) tendue chanter, 

her sing. 



The fog. The season. 
A barber. A task. 
During. While. 
To play. A spot. 
While I was playing. 
As good bread, as good flour. 
As good as. As rich as. 
To weep. To mount, go up, ascend. 
To laugh (at), laughing, laughed. 

Je ris, tu ris, il rit, 

I laugh, thou laughest, he laughs, 

Do you laugh at that ? 
I laugh at it. 
During this month. 
Have you money still ? 



MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Le brouillard. La saison. 
Un barbier. Une tdche. 

Pendant. Pendant que. 

Jouer. Une tache. 

Pendant que je jouais. 
D^aussi bon pain, a" aussi bonne farine. 
Aussi bon que. Aussi riche que. 
Pleurer. Monter. 



Rire (de), ria?it, ri (irregular). 
ious Hons, vous riez, Us rient, 
ve laugh, you laugh, they laugh. 

Riez-vous de cela ? 
J'en ris. 

Pendant ce mois. 

Avez-vous encore (toujours) de 
l'argent ? 

I have no more. Je n'en ai plus. 

1. fitais-tu a Paris quand mon frere y etait ? 2. Je n'y etais 
pas. 3. Tu travaillais pendant que je jouais. 4. lis jouaient pen- 
dant que vous etudiiez. 5. Jouez-vous beaucoup 1 6. Je joue quel- 
quefois, mais non pas beaucoup. 7. Pleurez-vous quelquefois ? 8. 
Je ne pleure pas sou vent. 9. Ne riiez-vous pas pendant que nous 
pleurions 1 10. Nous ne riions pas. 11. Que faisiez-vous ce matin 
pendant que je lisais ? 12. J'ecrivais une lettre. 13. Cet homme 
avait-il beaucoup d'amis quand il etait jeune ? 14. II en avait beau- 
coup. 15. Oii alliez-vous ce matin quand je vous ai vu dans la rue? 
16. J'allais chez mon oncle. 17. Votre frere voulait-il ses livres 
quand il etait a la campagne ? 18. II les voulait. 19. Ecoutiez- 
vous 1'orateur bier pendant qu'il parlait % 20. Nous l'ecoutions, et 
nos freres l'ecoutaient aussi. 21. Pourquoi avez-vous ri de cet 
homme? 22. Parce qu'il n'a pas de chapeau. 23. Montez-vous 
souvent dans votre chambre % 24. J'y monte souvent. 25. Avez- 
vous fini votre tache? 26. Je l'ai finie. 27. Le brouillard est epais 
ce matin. 28. Le barbier va a la ville, ou il restera toute la saison. 

29. Avez-vous dans votre magasin d'aussi belle farine que celle-ci % 

30. J'en ai de meilleure. 

18 I 7 21 1 19 5 2 3 3 18 6 1 9 6 21 6 13 . 

brouil-lar<2, sai-zon, bar-bier, tache, pen-dantf, jou-er, tache, pleu-rer, mon-ter, rir«, 

11 3 12 12 12 3 12 6 13 

ri-an£, ris, rit, ri-ons, ri-ez, rient. 



THE FIFTIETH LESSON. 183 

1. "Wast thou studying when the master spoke to thee? 2. I 
was studying my French lesson. 3. To whom were you speaking 
this morning when the boy gave you your letters 1 4. We were 
speaking to our cousins. 5. Have you looked for your pens ? 6. 
We were looking for them when the master spoke to us. 7. Were 
your brothers coming here when we saw them this morning ? 8. 
No, they were going to the river. 9. What wast thou doing when 
thy father spoke to thee? 10. I was holding the horses of my 
brother. 11. Will not your father laugh if he sees that work? 
12. He will laugh. 13. Will you not weep if you lose your money? 
14. I shall not weep. 15. Will you go up to your room when the 
barber is here ? 16. I shall go up to it. 17. Have you already 
finished your task ? 18. I have not yet finished it. 

19. Is your task easy? 20. It is very easy. 21. What is that 
scholar doing ? 22. He is making spots on his book. 23. Were 
you playing when you received my letter ? 24. I was not playing, 
I was reading the newspaper. 25. You will stay here during all 
the week ; will you not ? 26. I shall stay here during all the sea- 
son. 27. Have you as good butter as this ? 28. I have some bet- 
ter. 29. What made those spots on your paper? 30. That little 
boy made them. 31. Is it foggy (fait-il du brouillard) ? 32. Yes, 
sir, the fog is very thick. 33. Were you listening while the orator 
was speaking? 34. I was listening. 35. Which season do you 
like? 36. I like all the seasons. 37. Will you go to the north 
before the beautiful season? 38. I shall not go there this year. 
39. Had you much money when you bought that horse? 40. I had 
not much 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you seen Joseph this morning? 2. Yes, sir, he is com- 
ing. 3. I am going into the garden, if you have no need of me. 
4. No, go there, if that pleases you ; have you done any thing in 
the garden this morning? 5. I have done nothing there yet ; I am 
going to work there. 6. If you find some beautiful roses there, bring 
me a few. 7. I saw some roses and some jonquils, and I am going 
to bring you some. 8. Had you many friends when you lived in 
(a) Paris ? 9. We had many. 10. What wast thou doing this 
morning while we were playing? 11. I was studying my lesson. 
12. Were you not reading while we were studying? 13. No, we 
were writing our exercises. 14. Have those scholars finished their 
tasks ? 15. They have finished them. 16. What has made those 
black spots on those white stockings ? 17. That little child made 



184 



THE FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 



them with ink. 18. Has not that workman labored much? 19. 
He has labored during the whole night. 20. Have you seen my 
new house? 21. I have not seen it, but I have been told that it is 
large and beautiful. 



51. — CLNQUANTE ET UNI^ME LEQON. 

NOUNS COMPOUNDED WITH A AND DK 

1. When an infinitive depending on a verb has a personal prononn for its object, the 
pronoun is generally placed before the infinitive ; but sometimes it is placed before the first 
verb. 

I wish to do it. Je desire le faire. 

He comes for me. II vient me chercher (or old style, II 

me vient chercher). 

He likes to do it. II aime a le faire (not, 11 i'aime a faire). 

2. Past participles are not varied to agree with en, it being an indirect object. 
I give you these flowers. Je vous donne ces fleurs. 

I did not give any to my sister. Je n'en ai pas donne a ma soeur. 

I gave some to my cousin, J'en ai donne a ma cousine. 

3. When two nouns joined by a preposition form a compound, d is used to denote its 
moving power and purpose, de the material and sphere of use. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

A boat. A coffee-cup. Un bateau. Une tasse a cafe. 

A steamboat. A tobacco-box. Un bateau a vapeur. Une boite d tabac. 

A mustardpot. A schoolmistress. Un pot d moutarde. Une maitresse d"e- 

cole. 

A bookseller. A. gold button. Un marchand de H- Une bouton d'or.* 

vres. 

The coffee-cups. Les moulins d vapeur. Lcs tasses a cafe. 
Faire mal. 
Le doigt me fait mal. 
Le cou lui fait mal. 
Yous me faites mal. 
Vous me faites mal au pied. 
II me fait du mal. 

Avoir mal d. 
J'ai mal au doigt. 



The steam-mills. 

To pain, to ache, to hurt. 
My finger pains me. 
His neck pains him. 
You hurt me. 
You hurt my foot. 
He does me harm (an injury). 

To have a pain in, to be sore. 
I have a pain in my finger, or a sore 

finger. 
He has a headache. 
He has a violent headache. 
Without. Without a hat. 

4. Sans is not followed" hy the indefinite article, unless it be emphatic 
Without a coat. Vv'ithout a friend. Sans habit. Sans ami. 



II a mal a la tete. 

II a un violent mal de tete. 

Sans. Sans chapeau. 



Such compounds, we have seen (Lesson 13), form the plural by changing the first noun. 

1 17 15 7 a 5 3 

ba-teau, pot, mai-tress?, sans. 



THE FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 



185 



One's self, itself. For, in order to. Soi. Pour. 
For one's self. In order to do one's Pour soi. Pour faire son devoir, 
duty. 

5. Pronouns referring to masculine and feminine nouns collectively, must be masculine 
plural. 

Are your brother and sister sick ? Votre frere et votre soeur sont-ils ma- 

lades? 

They are sick. lis sont malades. 

To like better. To prefer. Aimer mieux. Preferer. 

I like tea better than coffee. J'aime mieux le the que le cafe. 

I prefer tea to coffee. Je prefere le the au cafe. 

6. Meilleur is an adjective, and qualifies a noun ; mieux is an adverb, and generally 
modifies a verb. 

This man is better than that. Cet homme-ci est meilleur que celui-la. 

This man does better than that. Cet homme-ci fait mieux que celui-la. 

Better. Better than. Mieux. Mieux que. 

Less. Less than. Moins {de bef. n.). Moins que. 

j- Tant {de bef. n.). Tant.que. 



So much. So much that. 
So many. So many that. 
As much. As much as. 
As many. As many as. 
Sufficient, sufficiently, enough. Assez {de bef. n.), suFFiSAMwewtf {de 

bef. n.). 



Autant {de bef. n.). Autant que. 



1. Cet liomme a assez de courage. 2. II a suffisamment de bien 
pour vivre. 3. Ce marchand-ci n'a pas aatant de profit que celui-la. 

4. Ce marchand cle livres a tant de biens qu'il sera toujours riche. 

5. Cette dame est moins jolie que sa soeur. 6. Mon pere a moins 
de fortune que mon oncle. 7. Aimez-vous mieux le the que le cafe ? 
8. Non, j'aime autant le cafe que le the, mais mon frere prefere le 
cafe. 9. Le visage vous fait-il mal? 10. II me fait mal. 11. Qu'a- 
vez-vous ? 12. J'ai mal au cou. 13. Qu'acet homme? 14. II a mal 
a la tete, et le pied lui fait mal. 15. Vous avez l'oeil enfle, n'y avez- 
vous pas mal ? 16. J'y ai mal. 17. Votre ami aime-t-il mieux le 
the que le cafe 1 18. Non, madame, il prefere le cafe au the. 19. 
Ces bateaux a vapeur vont-il sur le lac 1 20. Celui-ci va sur le lac 
et celui-la sur la riviere. 21. Qu'est-ce que la maitresse d'ecole a 
achete % 22. Elle a achete des tasses a cafe, des pots a beurre et 
un*pot amoutarde. 23. Votre pere et votre* mere sont-ils ici? 24. 
Non, ils sont a la maison. 

1. Do you undertake that work without money 1 ? 2. We do not 

12 9 5 5 6 1814 3 17 3 1 6 22 12 1 8 

mieua', pre-fe-rer, moin-s, tantf, au-tan£, as-ses, su/-fi-zam-mentf. 



186 



THE FIFTY-FIRST LESSON. 



undertake it without money. 3. What is the matter with you ? 
4. My finger is sore, and my foot pains me. 5. Is not your neck 
swollen ? 6. It is swollen, and I have a pain in it. 7. Have they 
given you some fruit? 8. They have given me some. 9. Does each 
one live for himself? 10. No, no one lives for himself. 11. Have 
you bought the beautiful coffee-cups % 12. I have bought them. 
13. Where will you go to-morrow ? 14. I shall go in a steamboat 
on the river. 15. What does that countryman buy? 16. He buys 
some coffee-cups, some butter-plates, and a tobacco-box. 17. Are 
you acquainted with that man? 18. Yes, sir, he is a bookseller of 
our city, and that lady is a schoolmistress. 

19. Have you a sore finger ? 20. No, sir, it is my hand that 
(a la main que) is sore. 21. Your mouth looks swollen ; have you 
a pain in it ? 22. I have a pain in it. 23. Do you like the French 
better than the Spanish ? 24. No, sir, I like the Spanish as much 
as the French. 25. Is that man as rich as the bookseller ? 26. 
Yes, sir, he has so much money that he never counts it. 27. Was 
your brother here when you saw him? 28. No, sir, he has not been 
here yet, but he will be here to-morrow. 29. Why was your little 
sister weeping when we saw her the day before yesterday? 30. She 
wept because she had the headache. 31. Do you sometimes have 
the headache ? 32. No, but I had the headache often last year. 
33. Have you sufficient sugar ? 34. I have sufficient. 35. Where 
will you be to-morrow? 36. I shall be at home. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. John, go into the yard ; your father wants you. 2. Have you 
the hammer ? 3. No, I have not seen it. 4. See if it is not in the 
box. 5. Yes, I have it. 6. Well, take a few big nails, and carry 
them to your father. 7. How many nails does he wish for ? 8. He 
does not wish for many. 9. I am going to carry him the box. 10. 
No, leave the box ; he wishes only a few ; take them in your hand. 
11. Shall you be in the yard? 12. No, I shall not be there; I have 
some work to do in the garden. 13. Well, I am going to carry the 
nails, and I will go into the garden also. 14. Come, if your father 
does not want you. 15. Will you be here? 16. Yes, you will have 
no trouble to {peine a) find me, I shall not be far off {loin). J. 7. 
Does my father wish for the hammer also? 18. Yes, carry him the 
hammer and the nails. 19. I comprehend. 

20. Let us go and see Peter [Pierre). 21. Well, is he at home? 
22. Yes, he is there. 23. Go for (chercher) your hat. 24. Come 
with me into the house. 25. No, I am going to stay here. 26. 



THE FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 



187 



Well, wait for me. 27. Do not stay long. 28. Have you your 
hat? 29. Yes ; come, let us go (allons par tons). 



52.— CINQUANTE-DEIIXIEME LEQON. 

USE OF VEST, PLACE OF ADVEEBS, ETC. 

1. We have seen (Lesson 30) that ce is used instead of il, elle, Us, elles, before etre, when 
the predicate characterizes the subject, and is not an adjective merely with the verb. The 
following illustrate more fully this rule when the predicate contains a nouD, a pronoun, an 
adverb, an article with an adjective, or a verb. 

It is my book. It is your pen. C'est mon livre. C'est votre plume. 

They are the books. Ce sont les livres. 

It is he. It is she. C'est lui. C'est elle. 

It is they. Ce sont eux, ce sont elles. 

It is to-day. It is the first. C 'est aujourcT hui. C 'est le premier. 
It is to make a good use of one's for- wC'est faire un bon usage de sa fortune 
tune to employ it in good works. que del'employer en bonnes ceuvres. 
2. With an adjective alone in the predicate, ce is not used. 
He is good. She is good. II est bon. Elle est bonne. 

He is a good brother. C'est un bon frere. 

She is a good mother. C'est une bonne mere. 

3. It is, referring to a preceding proposition, is c'est ; referring to one following, is il est. 
He has lost his book ; it is a pity. II a perdu son livre ; c'est dommage. 

It is a pity that he has lost his friend. ^11 est dommage pour lui d'avoir perdu ~f 

son ami. 

It is disagreeable to be always alone. II est desagreable d'etre toujours seul. 
Yes, you are right, it is very disagree- Oui, vous avez raison, c'est tres-desa- 
able. greable. 

4. When the pronoun referring to a proposition just stated is the object of a transitive 
verb or a preposition, it may be rendered by cela or le. 

That man is rich ; do you know it ? Cet homme est riche ; savez-vous cela 

(or le savez-vous) ? 

5. Soi, used of persons, must refer only to a vague antecedent, as on, chacun, etc., except 
when perspicuity requires. 

People love to speak of themselves. On aime a, parlor de soi. 

A benefaction carries with it its re- Un bienfait porte sa recompense avec 

ward. . soi. 

When that young man does a pleasure Quand ce jeune homme fait un plaisir 

to his father he works for himself. a son pere, il travaille pour soi.* 



* In these last two sentences, the antecedents of soi are definite ; but in the former, the 
reference is not to a person, and in the latter, the use of soi instead of lui avoids an ambi- 
guity. 

15 1 1214 7 5 21 3 

dom-mage, bien-fai£, re-com-pense. 



188 



THE FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 



MASCULINE. 



A bcnefd, benefaction, ^recompense. 


Un bienfait. 


Une recompense. 


That drunkard. 


Drunk, tipsy. 


Cet ivrogne. 


Ivre, gris. 


An accident. 


Useful. 


Un accident. 


Utile. 


The juice, gravy. 


Study. 


Le jus. 


Vetude. 


True. 




Vrai. 


Vraie. 


Gay. 




Gai. 


Gaie. 


Subject. 




Sujet. 


Sujette. 


False, counterfeit. 




Faux. 


Faus.se. 


Displeased, discontented. 


Mecontent. 


Mecontente. 



6. The futures of venir and tenir are irregular. 
Jetiendrai, tu viendras, ilviendra, nous viendrons, vous viendrez, Us Tiendront, 
I shall come, thou wilt come, he will come, we shall come, you will come, they will come. 
Je tiendrai, tu Uendras, il tiendra, nous tiendrons, nous tiendrez, Us tiendront, 
I shall hold, thou wilt hold, he will hold, we shall hold, you will hold, they will hold. 

1. Again, with a verb, is often expressed by the prefix re in French ; as, 
To make again. To take again. Hvfaire. HEprendre. 

To come again. I shall return. Unvenir. Je REviendrai. 

We will hold those horses. Nous tiendrons ces chevaux. 

He will come again (return) to-morrow. II reviendra demain. 

8. After as and than, I, thou,, he, they, are rendered moi, toi, lui, eux, elles. 
More than I. More than thou. Plus que moi. Plus que toi. 

More than he. More than she. Plus que lui. Plus qu'elle. 

As much as we. As much as you. Autant que nous. Autant que vous. 
As much as they. Autant qu'eux. Autant qu'elles. 

1. Vienclrez-vous ici demain ? 2. J'y viendrai ce soir, et mes 
amis y viendront aussi. 3. Tiendrez-vous les chevaux ? 4. Non, 
nous tiendrons les livres, et les domestiques tiendront les chevaux. 
5. Cet homme est-il plus riche que moi? 6. Non, il est moins riche 
que toi. 7. Suis-je aussi grand que votre frere ? 8. Vous etes plus 
grand que lui ; mais il apprend plus vite que vous. 9. Mon cousin 
lit plus que moi, mais j'etudie plus que lui. 10. Aimez-vous mieux 
le vin que Peau? 11. Nous aimons mieux Peau que le vin. 12. Ta 
cousine lit-elle mieux que toi ? 13. Non, monsieur, je lis mieux 
qu'elle. 14. Est-ce que je travaille moins que mon cousin? 15. 
Vous travaillez plus que lui, et il travaille plus que moi. 16. Ce 
monsieur n'est-il pas le monsieur que vous cherchez? 17. C'est lui. 
18. Ces enfants ne sont-ils pas vos cousins? 19. Si, ce sont eux. 
20. La vache est un animal plus utile que le chien. 21. Voulez- 



12 15 12 12 1 12 3 22 12 22 5 22 7 7 6 6 22 5 22 5 

i-vrogne, ivr<?, gris, ac-ci-den£, u-tile, jus, e-tude, vrai, vraie, sai, gaie. su-ie£, su-iet/e, 

17 17 5 21 3 5 21 3 123 C 1214 6 4 7^13 4 12 

faua\ faus-se, me-con-ten^, me-con-tente, vien-drai, tien-drai, re-fair<?, re-prendre, reve-nir, 

4 J214 6 

re- vien-drai. 



THE FIFTY-SECOND LESSON. 



189 



vous du jus sur votre boeuf roti ? 22. Oui, monsieur, s'il vous plait. 
23. Cet homme est un ivrogne, il est ivre a present. 24. Notre 
vie est sujette a beaucoup d' accidents. 

1. Dost thou work as much as I ? 2. I work more than thou. 
3. Does thy brother study less than thy sister? 4. He studies less 
than she, and she reads less than he. 5. Do you speak more than 
your sisters ? 6. I speak les than they. 7. Do your sisters speak 
less than your brothers ? 8. They speak more than they. 9. That 
young lady looks gay. 10. This bank-bill looks counterfeit. 11. 
That man's face is red ; has he not drunk too much ? 12. Yes, sir, 
he is a drunkard ; he is drunk now. 13. Do you wish for some 
more of the gravy on your roast meat ? 14. No, sir, I have enough. 
15. That man is tipsy ; is he not? 16. Yes, sir, he is a drunkard 
who is always drunk. 17. Are we not subject to many accidents? 
18. Yes, sir, we are always subject to accidents. 

19. Do you know the great accident? 20. Yes, sir, it is very 
deplorable {deplorable). 21. Why is that stranger discontented? 
22. He is discontented because he has no money. 23. Will you 
come here to-morrow ? 24. I will come here to-morrow morning 
(demain matin). 25. Wilt thou come to my house? 26. Yes, and 
my friend will come also. 27. Will you hold the horses? 28. I 
will hold them. 29. They say that you intend to depart to-mor- 
row ; is it true? 30. It is true. 31. It is said that Mr. A. is sick ; 
is it true? 32. No, it is not true ; he is in good health. 33. Your 
brother is here ; do you know it? 34. I know it. 35. Has that 
peach much juice ? 36. Yes, sir, it is full of juice. 37. Do you 
like study? 38. I like it much. 39. Does one confer (repxmdez- $&f^ , 
v&trs) benefits without a recompense ? 40. No, sir ; a benefit always 
carries its recompense with it. 41. Is not that young lady gay? 
42. She is gay. 43. That little boy loves study, and he is very 
useful to his relations ; do you know that ? 44. I know it. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I bought a penknife this morning. 2. Show it to me. 3. 
Tell me what you think of it. 4. It is very pretty ; where did you 
buy it ? 5. At Mr. D.'s ; he has some very pretty knives. 6. I 
wish to buy a penknife also ; mine is broken ; but I wish for one 
bigger than yours. 7. Buy a knife and a penknife. 8. No, I do 
not need a knife. 9. Let me choose a penknife for you. 10. Well, 
choose me one ; but do not take one too big. 11. If I do not choose 

■ 



190 



THE FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 



you a good one, do not take it. 12. Well, let us see if you know 
(how) to choose penknives. 

13. Are you going to the country to-morrow? 14. No, I am 
not going there. 15. Who is going there? 16. No one is going 
there to-morrow. 17. Well, lend me your horse to-morrow if you 
do not need him. 18. Take him ; but where do you intend to go % 
19. I am going to my aunt's. 20. If you go there, bring (apportez) 
me some pretty roses. 21. Very well; she has many at her house. 
22. Do not forget me. 23. Do you prefer flowers to fruits ? 24. 
No, sir, I prefer fruits to flowers. 25. Does Miss P. know French? 
26. Yes, miss, she speaks it very well. 27. She has had good 
masters, and she has taste for study. 28. I have heard Mr. R. say 
(dire a monsieur R.) that he has never seen any one learn French 
more easily. 29. Have you seen Miss P. this week ? 30. I have 
seen her. 31. Has she not been sick? 32. She has been a little 
sick, but now she is in good health. 



5 3.— CINQU ANTE-TROISlBME LEQON. 

NUMEEAL TITLES. 1 AFTER THE YEEB. 

1. In designating sovereigns, where the English employ the ordinal numbers with the 
article, the French employ the cardinal, with the exception of the first and sometimes the, 
second, without the article. 

J ohn the first. J ean premier. 

William the second. Guillaume deux, or second. 

James the third. George the fourth. Jacques trois. Georges quatre. 
Philip the sixth. Henry the eighth. Philippe six. Henri huit. 

2. To go or come to a place is alter d or venir a ; to go or come to a person is generally 
alter trouver, or venir trouver. 

He is going to Charleston. II va a Charleston. 

He is going to Charles. II va trouver Charles. 

He comes to Louisville. II vient a Louisville. 

He comes to Mr. Lewis. II vient trouver M. Louis. 

3. In emphatic cases, as calling, or ordering help, and after penser and songer, to think, 
the pronoun is used after the verb, and preceded by d. 

Come to me. Go to him. Venez a moi. Allez d lui. 

Run to them. Think of me. Courez d eux. Pensez d moi. 

I think of you. He thinks of her. Je pense a vous. II songe a elle. 

4. This construction is generally employed when more than one indirect objective pro- 
noun (y and en excepted) belong to the verb ; as also when the pronoun is emphatic. 

Do you speak to him or to me ? Parlez-vous d lui ou a moi ? 

I speak neither to him nor to thee ; I Je ne parle ni d lui ni a toi ; je parle 
speak to them. a eux. 



3 12 17 2 16 12 12 3 12 1 18 12 

Jean, G?iill-aume, Jackes, Georges, Phi-lippe, i7en-ri, Charles, Lou-is. 



THE FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 



191 



5. To hear is entendre; to hear of, or that, is entendre dire or parler ; to hear from is 
recevoir des nowoeUes. 



I heard the noise. He heard it. 
I heard of your friend. 
I have heard that your friend is here. 
I have heard from your friend to-day. 

Have you heard that he is at my 

house ? 
I have not heard it. 
To be able, can, being able, been able. 
Jepeuxox puis* tupeux, ilpeut, 
I can, thou canst, lie can, 

Can I be useful to you ? 
God can do all things. 
We cannot do that. 



J'ai entendu le bruit. II l'a entendu. 
J'ai entendu parler de votre ami. 
J'ai entendu dire que votre ami est ici. 
J'ai recu des nouvelles de votre ami 

aujourd'hui. 
Avez-vous entendu dire qu'il est chez 

moi ? 

Je n'ai pas entendu dire cela. 
Pouvoir, puvant, pu. 
nouspowoons, vous pouves, Us peuvent, 
we can, you can, they can. 

Puis-je vous etre utile ? 
Dieu peut faire toutes choses. 
Nous ne pouvons (pas) faire cela. 



6. Pas is often omitted after pouvoir negative. 



I have not been able to study. 



Je n'ai pu etudier. 







MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


The back. 


The shoulder. 


Le dos. 


Vepaule. 


The heart. 


Attention. 


Le cceur. 


Attention. 


The knee, knees. 


The character, 


Le genou, genoux. 


La reputation. 




reputation. 






God. 


The moon. 


Dieu. 


La lune. 


The {natural) dis- 


A star. 


Le caractere. 


Une etoile. 


position. 








The bottom. 


So. 


Le fond. 


Si. 


Lame. 




Boiteux. 


Boiteuse. 


A lame man. 


So lame. 


TJn boiteux. 


Si boiteux (m.). 


Healthy. 


Bent, curved. 


Sain. 


Courbe, vout'e (m 


Right, straight. 


Left. 


Droit. 


Gauche. 


To pay attention to. 




Faire attention &. 




Soon. 


Much, many. 


Bientot. 


Bien. 



7. Adverbs of quantity, we have seen, take de before the following noun ; Men, mean- 
ing much, many, takes de and the article, making du, de !*, de la, des. 



Much money. Few friends. 
Much money. Many friends. 
Much courage. Much beauty. 



Beaucoup d'argent. Peu d'amis. 
Bien de l'argent. Bien des amis. 
Bien du courage. Bien de la beaute. 



1. Avez-vous votre argent? 2. Je l'aurai bientot. 3. Cet 
homme a-t-il bien de l'argent % 4. II a bien de l'argent et bien 

* Puis is more used than peux. 

18 fO 18 3 22 9 2212 9 18 21 18 6 9 129 17 

pou-voir, pou-van£, pu, peua?, puis, peutf, pou-vons, pou-ves, peuve?^, Dieu, dos, 

6 17 1 1 7 5 20 21 12 50 10 20 10 14 18 6 19 6 20 £0 

e-paule, ca-rac-tere, e-toile, fontf, si, boi-teuce, boi-teuze, sain, cour-be, vou-te, droit, droit*?, 

17 13 1221 1214 17 1214 

gauche, af-ten-tion, bien-tot, bien. 



192 



THE FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. 



des amis. 5. J'ai entendu dire que votre pere est malade; est-ce 
vrai? 6. Ce n'est pas vrai, il est en bonne saute. 7. Donnez-vous 
des fleurs a mes freres et a mes sceurs ? 8. J'en donne a, eux et a 
elles. 9. Ces vieillards peuvent-ils faire de Pouvrage? 10. lis n'en 
peuvent pas faire beaucoup. 11. Pouvez-vous traduire ce livre 
francais? 12. Je peux le traduire. 13. Qu'a ce vieillard? 14. 
II a mal au dos et a Pepaule. 15. N'a-t-il pas le dos voute? 16. 
Si, il Pa voute. 17. Pourquoi ce petit garcon est-il boiteux? 18. 
II est boiteux parce qu'il a mal au genou. 19. N'avez-vous pas 
mal a la main droite? 20. Non, j'ai mal a la main gauche. 21. 
A-t-on trouve le fond de ce lac ? 22. On ne Pa pas trouve. 23. 
N'est-ce pas nouvelle lune aujourd'hui? 24. Non, c'est pleine lune. 
25. La lune et les etoiles sont belles. 26. Admirez-vous le carac- 
tere de Charles XII. ? 27. Non, monsieur, j'admire plus le 
caractere de Louis XIV. 28. Cet homme est sain de corps, mais 
il n'a pas le coeur content. 

1. Canst thou study when thou art warm? 2. I can study- 
well when I am very warm. 3. Can the carpenters do their work 
to-day? 4. They cannot do it to-day. 5. Do you admire the 
character of George the Fourth? 6. I do not admire it. 7. What 
is the matter with that lame man ? 8. He has a pain in the left 
knee. 9. The fisherman's hammer is at the bottom of the lake. 

y 10. Does not God know all hearts? 11. God reads the bottom of 
all hearts, and can do all things. 12. Have you a pain in the 
knee? 13. No, I haye a pain in the back and in the shoulder. 
14. Is that servant in good health? 15. He is healthy in (de) 
body and mind, but he is a little lazy. 16. The cook is so lame 
that she cannot do her work. 

17. Do you pay attention to what the master says? 18. We 
pay attention to it. 19. Is that line straight or curved? 20. It 
is straight. 21. Have you a pain in the right hand or in the left? 

y -22.1 have no pain in the hand, I have a pain in the back and in 
the shoulder. 23. Do you like to look at the stars ? 24. I like to 
look at the stars and the moon. 25. I have heard that the general 
is sick ; do you know if it is true ? 26. It is true. 27. Is that 
history false ? 28. It is false. 29. Have you been able to learn 
that lesson? 30. I have not been able to learn it. 31. Pay atten- 
tion to what I say. 32. That man is English ; he is a subject of 



TEE FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON". 



193 



the queen. 33. Could you speak the French when you were in 
Paris ? 34. I could speak it a little. 35. Will you come to our 
house soon ? 36. I arn so lame that I cannot go there at present. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you seen my brother to-day ? 2. I saw him in Mr. C.'s 
store. 3. I am looking for him every where. 4. I have heard that 
he is soon going to set out for France ; is it true ? 5. Yes, sir ; he 
sets out next week by the steamer (le vapeur) America. 6. Does 
he intend to stay long in France ? 7. He intends to stay there 
eighteen months. 8. He will have time to learn the French well 
in eighteen months. 9. He understands and reads it sufficiently 
well already. 10. I know it ; he needs only practice {pratique) to 
(pour) speak it perfectly. 11. I know many gentlemen who read 
French, but do not know (how) to speak it. 12. The French is a 
language which is very difficult. 

13. Is that child useful to his relations ? 14. He is very useful 
to his father and mother. 15. That bank-bill looks counterfeit; is 
it not counterfeit ? 16. It is counterfeit. 17. Has the carpenter 
been able to do his work ? 18. He has not been able to do it. » 
19. When will you come here again? 20. I shall come here again 
to-morrow. 21. I have heard that the general is coming here ; do 
you know if it is true? 22. It is true. 23. Why does your cousin 
look so sad? 24. Because he has a headache ; his head pains him^ 
much. 25. Who makes so much noise? 26. It is some drunkards 
in the street. 



54.— CINQUANTE-QUATRlfeME LECON. 

IEEEGTTLAE FUTUEES, ETC. 
1. The futures of voir, to see, and /aire, to make, are irregular. 
tu verras, il verra, nous verrons, vous verrez, Us verroni,] 
thou wilt see, he will see, we shall see, you will see, 



Je verrai, 

I shall see, thou wilt see, he will see, we shall see, you will see, they will see. 
Je ferai, tu /eras, ilfera, nous ferons, vonsferez, Us feront, 

I shall make, thou wilt make, he will make, we shall make, you will make, they will make. 



Will you see the general to-day ? 

I have seen him already, and I shall 

see him again this evening. 
You will do your duty, and we shall 

do ours. 
To cause, to talk. To sing. 



A cent. 
The handle. 



A song. 
The tooth. 



Verrez-vous le general aujourd'hui ? 
Je l'ai deja vu, et je le re verrai c 
soir. 

Yous ferez voire devoir, et nous ferons 

le notre. 
Causer. Chanter. 

MASCULINE. FEMININE. 

Un cent,* (sou). TJne chanson. 
Le manche. La dent. 



* Cent (sou) sounds as in English. 

76 6 ]7 6 36 3 21 3 3 

ver-rai, fe-rai, cau-se?*, chan-ter, chan-son, manche, dentf. 

9 



194 



THE FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



A picture. An affair, business. Un tableau. Une affaire. 

Labor. Strange. Travail. Mrange. 

Extraordinary. Against. Extraordinaire. Contre. 

The day. Past. he jour. Passe (in.). 

That American. Cet americain. Cette americaine. 

For cash, cash down. Comptant, au comptant, argent comp- 

tant. 

On credit. A toothache. A credit. Un mal de dent. 

2. Gre is used chiefly to form verbal or adverbial expressions like the following: 

To be grateful for. Savoir gre de. 

Against one's liking, unwillingly. Contre son gre. 

To my liking. To your liking. A mon gre. A voire gre. 

To my taste. To your taste. A mon gout. A votre gout. 

To that American's liking. Au gre de cet americain. 

To every body's liking. Au gre de tout le monde. 

3. When several verbs are connected by nor in English, ni is to be repeated before each 
verb in French. 

He neither reads, nor writes, nor H ne lit, ni n'ecrit, ni n'etudie. 
studies. 

"We neither buy nor sell. Nous n'achetons ni ne vendons. 

4. Parler frangais means to speak in French, or to speak French, frangais being 
used adverbially.* Parler le frangais is less used. Parler is the only verb with which a 
r ational designation can be used adverbially. 

He speaks French (or in French). II parle francais. 

He speaks the French of good society. II parle le francais de la bonne com- 

pagnie. 

5. Aimer mieux, followed by two infinitives, takes no pTeposidon before the former, 
but requires de before the latter. 

I like better to read than to think, and J'aime-mieux lire que de penser, et 
I like better to think than to j'aime mieux penser que d'ecrire. 

write. 

What causes that noise ? Qu'est-ce qui cause ce bruit? 

She talks with her brother, and speaks Elle cause avec son frere, et parle a 

to the child. l'enfant. 
The past month. The past night. Le mois passe. La nuit passee. 

6. The verbs venir and alter have in some cases a use in French different from come 
and go in English. Venir denotes movement towards the individual who speaks, or to 
what he regards as his home, or accompanying when he considers himself as taking the 
lead. 

Will you come here to-morrow? Vicndrez-vous ici demain? 

I will come here with pleasure. J'y viendrai avec plaisir. 



* Let it be borne in mind that frangais, an adverb, cannot be the antecedent of a pro- 
noun. 

1 17 1 7 1 7 5 3 5 1 10 12 7 CI 1 6 21 3 15 

ta-bleau, a/-faire, tra-vail, e-trange, ex-tra-or-di-nair<?, contre-, pas-se, comp-tant, a-me- 

12 14 1 5 12 7 6 12 

ri-cain, a-me-ri-caine, cre-dii 



THE FIFTY-FOUIITH LESSON. 



195 



When will you come to my house ? Quand viendrez -vous chez moi ? 

I will come and see you to-morrow. J'irai vous voir demain. 

Will you go along with me to Boston ? Voulez-vous venir a Boston avec moi ? 

I will go willingly. J'irai volontiers. 

1. Que feras-tu ce soir ? 2. Je ne ferai rien. 8. Ferez-vous 
quelque chose demain ? 4, Nous ferons beaucoup de choses. 5 
Le paysan fera-t-il du beurre ? 6. II fera du beurre et du fromage. 
7. Verras-tu ton oncle demain ? 8. Non, je le verrai la semaine 
prochaine. ' 9. Quand verrez-vous vos amis 1 10» Nous les verrons 
bientdt. 11. Combien de cents (sous) font une piastre? 12. Cent 
sous font une piastre. 13. Qui a casse le manche de ce marteau? 
14. Le domestique l'a casse. 15. Qu'avez-vous ? 16.. J'ai mal 
aux dents. 17. C'est un bien mauvais mal. 18. Avez-vous quel- 
que chose a faire ? 19. J'ai bien des affaires. 20. Quelles chan- 
sons chantez-vous ? 21. Nous chantons des chansons anglaises. 22. 
Avez-vous achete ce tableau a credit? 23. Je l'ai achete conip- 
tant. 24. Ce petit garcon aime-t-il mieux l'etude que le travail 1 
25. II aime mieux le travail que l'etude. 26. Je connais madame 
D. ; c'est une femme extraordinaire. 27. Cet etranger est francais ; 
c'est un homme bien extraordinaire. 28. Cette femme chante a mon 
gout. 29. Ce garcon ne fera pas bien son ouvrage, parce qu'il le 
fera contre son gre. 30. Sept jours font une semaine. 31. Voulez- 
vous me vendre ce tableau ? 32. Bien volontiers, monsieur. 

1. When will you come to our house? 2. I will go there day 
after to-morrow. 3. Will you go (come) to New York with me % 
4. I will go there with pleasure. 5. Will the soldiers see the gene- 
ral to-day ? 6. They will see him. 7. We shall see the new pic- 
ture to-day; will not the master see it also? 8. Pie will see it. 
9. What caused so much noise this morning? 10. It is the w 7 ind 
which caused it. 11. What songs does the English woman sing? 
12. The English woman sings French songs, and the German 
woman sings German songs. 13. What will you do to-morrow? 
14. We shall do nothing. 15. How many cents will you give to 
that poor blind man ? 16. I shall give him twenty-five cents. 17. 
The handle of this knife is of ivory. 18. I often had the teethache 
when I was in the country. 

1 9. Will the American buy those pictures on credit or for cash ? 



15 21 125 

vo-lon-tiers. 



196 



THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSOX. 



20. He will buy them for cash. 21. That man likes to work better 
than to do nothing ; is not that extraordinary ? 22. It is not ex- 
traordinary that he loves labor. 23. Have they shown you some- 
thing strange? 24. They have shown me nothing strange. 25. 
Do you buy on credit or for cash? 26. I sometimes buy on credit 
and sometimes for cash. 27. What is the matter with you? 28. 
I have a violent [violent) toothache and a distracting (fou) head- 
ache. 29. Has that merchant much business (affaires) ? 30. He 
has much business, and he gives great attention to it. 31. Does 
that scholar study against his will ? 82. Yes, sir ; and the servant 
works against his will. 33. Are the nights longer than the days 
this month? 34. Yes ; and the days will be longer than the nights 
next month. 35. Does the American know French better than I ? 
36. No ; he neither reads, nor writes, nor speaks that language. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is not your face swollen ? 2. Yes ; I have the toothache. 
3. Do your teeth pain you much ? 4. Not much at present, but 
the toothache is a very bad pain (mat). 5. I know what it is, I 
have had it often enough. 6. Do you know any remedy (remcde) ? 

7. I know only one good one (de ton), it is the cold iron (le fer). 

8. I do not like that one much ; I desire not to lose my teeth. 9. 
What do the merchants Isay ? are they doing good business? 10. 
Not very (trop) good ; they are not doing much business at present. 
11. In (dans) two or three months, I intend to undertake some 
business. 12. What can you do ? 13. I do not know yet ; if I 
can find a good store for sale (a vendre), I intend to buy it. 

14. I know one on Water-street which is for sale. 15. What 
store is it? 16. It is a wine-store which is on that street, and 
which you are acquainted with undoubtedly (sans doute). 17. You 
mean (voulez dire) that of Mr. C. ? 18. Yes, it is the very same 
(celui-la meme). 19. But why does Mr. C. wish to sell it? 20. 
His health is not good, and he wishes to make a journey in (en) 
England. 21. Well, I will go and see his store to-morrow. 



55.— CINQTJANTE-CINQUIEME leqon. 

ETEE AS AUXILIARY. 

1. In forming the past definite and other compound tenses of the verbs aller, venir, 
and several others which will be given hereafter, the past participle is joined to the tenses 
of etre instead of avoir, and then the participle always agrees with the subject of the 
verb. 



THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSOR. 



197 



Past indefinite of aller, to go. 

T .(.alii, ox alii, or il est $ alii, ox sommes $ alV ' s > 

Jesuls \allie, tucs \allie, elle \allie, nous sommes \alLes, 
I went, thou wentest, lie went, we ws. 

Past indefinite o/venir, to come 



allis, or rnu ,u e AaUis, ox Us sont i a, 
VOUSetes I allies, elles } a, 
you went, they went. 



il 

elle 



nous sommes ■ 



venus, Us 
venues, elles 



Your brother has come. 
My sister has gone to school. 
My father has gone to the store. 
We came here this morning. 
My sisters came also. 
My brothers have gone to the country. 
He has been near the fountain- 
He has gone near the fountain. 



Votre frere est venu. 

Ma sceur est allee a l'ecole. 

Mon pere est alle au magasin. 

Nous sommes venus ici ce matin. 

Mes soeurs sont venues aussi. 

Mes freres sont alles a la campagne. 

II a et'e pres de la fontaine. 



II est alle pres de la fontaine. 

2. A ete implies that the person has returned ; est alle that he has gone merely. 

3. Verbs in f fir and vrir have in the present (and some other tenses) the same termi- 
nations as verbs of the first conjugation. 

Offrir {de bef. inf.), off rant, offert, e. 
Ouvrir, ouvrant, ouvert, e. 

nous ouvrons, vous ouvrez, Us ouvrent, 
we open, you open, they open. 



To offer, offering, offered. 
To open, opening, opened. 



J'ouvre, 
I open, 



tu ouvres, il ouvre, 
thou openest, he opens, 



Studious. 

A husband. A wife. 

A spouse. 

The thumb, inch. The dryness, drought 



A vegetable. Fixed. 

A partner. A light. 

A fault, defect. An error, mistake. 
By mistake. 

Skillful, able. A fault, mistake. 

4. Faute implies deviation from duty or rule; defaut, defect of mind or body: 
misapprehension or miscalculation ; meprise, the taking of one thing for another. 



MASCULINE. 

Studieux. 
Un mari. 
Un epoux. 
Le pouce. 
Un legume. 
Un associe. 
Un defaut. 
Par megarde. 
Habile. 



FEMININE. 

Studieuse. 
Une femme. 
Une epouse. 
La secheresse. 
Fixe. 

Une lumiere. 
Une erreur, meprise. 

U nefaute. 



To walk. To borrow. 

How. Frequently. 
To extinguish. 
To promise. 

At what price, for how much. 
How does your partner do that ? 
For how much does he sell this cloth ? 
He promises his father to be studious. 



Marcher. Emprunter. 
Comment. Frequemment. 
Jbteindre (varied as plaindre, Less. 35). 
Promettre (comp. of mettre, de bef. inf.). 
Combien. 

Comment votre associe fait-il cela? 

Combien vend-il ce drap ? 

II promet a. son pere d'etre studieux. 



35 12 15 3 IS 7 J8 12 :8 3 18 7 18 18 18 ?1 IS 6 

o/-frir, q/-fran£, cf-fevt, ou-vrir, ou-vran£, ou-verf, ou-vre, ou-vres, ou-vrons, ou-vres, 

18 22 1210 '22 12 10 1 J2 1 5 18 5 18 18 5 5 5 22 

o\xvre?it, stu-dieuo*, stu-di-euze, ma-ri, femra<?, e-poucc, e-pouz-?, pouce, se-ch^-ressg, le-gume, 

12 1 15 126 22 127 5 17 7 11 5 13 5 1 17 1 6 3 £4 6 

fixe, as-so-cic', lu-miere, de-fau^, er-reur, me-prize, me-^arde, fuute, mar-cher, em-prun-ter, 

15 3 5 1 8 5 14 15 5 21 1214 

corn-men?, fre-ke?»-ment, e-teindre, pro-me^tre, com-bien. 



198 



THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



She offers to buy that silk -gown. Elle offre cTacheter cette robe de soie. 

He has opened the door. II a ouvert la porte. 

I have offered to buy that house. J'ai offert d'acheter cette niaison. 

I am grateful to the master that he Je sais gre au maitre de ce qu'il m'a 
has given me this good book. donne ce bon livre. 

1. Voulez-vous bien me preter ce livre? 2. Tres-volontiers, 
monsieur. 3. On ne pent pas rappeler le temps passe. 4. Vos 
freres sont-ils alles a l'ecole ? 5. lis y sont alles. 6. Es-tu venu 
ici ce matin 1 7. Non, je suis venu hier an soir. 8. Yos freres 
sont-ils venus hier aussi ? 9. Non, ils sont venus la semaine (pas- 
see) derniere. 10. Ouvrez la porte. 11. Ouvrons la fenetre. 12. 
Cette clef ouvre cette boite-la. 13. Eteignez le feu. ]Steignons-le. 

14. La lime emprunte sa lumiere. 15. Le pouce me fait mal. 16. 
Ce domestique n'a-t-il pas des defauts ? 17. II en a quelques-uns. 
18. Avez-vous fait des fautes dans votre theme ? 19. J' en ai fait 
quelques-unes. 20. Combien vendez-vous ce livre? 21. Je le vends 
un dollar. 22. Pourquoi eteignez-vous le feu? 23. Je 1'eteins parce 
que je sors. 24. La lune emprunte-t-elle sa lumiere du soleil ? 25.. 
Elle la lui emprunte. 26. Me promettez-vous de bien etudier ? 27. 
Je vous le promets. 28. Get enfant marche-t-il deja? 29. II ne 
marche pas encore. 30. Ma mere est allee chez la voisine. 31. Ce 
medecin est tres-habile. 32. A-t-il emprunte de 1' argent a votre 
pere ? 33. Non, il a emprunte deux mille dollars a mon cousin. 

1. Do the children open the windows? 2. They open them. 
3. Does the doctor extinguish the light when he goes out ? 4. He 
extinguishes it. 5. Do you extinguish your candle when you go 
^.out at night ? 6. I extinguish it frequently, but not always. 7. 
Do you walk more than I ? 8. We walk less than you. 9. Do you 
offer some money to that poor man? 10. I offer him some. 11. 
Do you frequently recite your lessons to your father? 12. I recite 
them to him very frequently. 13. What do the scholars promise to 
the master? 14. They promise to show him their copy-books. 

15. Do they offer to sell you their books? 16. They offer to sell 
^them to us, and we offer to buy them of them {les lear). 17. Does 

your partner's niece promise to be studious ? 18. She promises to 
be very studious. 

19. Is not Doctor Jones an able man? 20. He is very able, 
and his brother is able also. 21. Hast thou more vegetables than I? 
22. No, my friend, I have more fruit than thou, but I have not so 



THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSOX. 



199 



many vegetables. 23. Hast thou more vegetables than thy brother? 
24. Yes, because the drought has injured {fait mat) his,/ 25. How 
many inches make a foot? 26. Twelve inches make afoot, and 
twenty-four inches make two feet. 27. Has your brother gone any 
where? 28. No, sir, he went to the city this morning, but he has 
returned (revenu*) from there. 29. When did you return from 
the country? 30. I returned from there this morning. 31. Do the 
fixed stars borrow their light ? 32. No, sir, the fixed stars are suns. 
33. Is that man the husband of that lacly ? 34. No, sir, he is the 
husband of my partner's niece. 35. The wife of your cousin writes 
her exercise without a fault. 36. This drought will do harm to the 
vegetables. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Does that woman sing better than her husband? 2. She 
sings better than he, but he reads better than she. 3. Has the 
drought hurt the vegetables? 4. It has done them much harm. 5. 
Have you seen the peaches which I bought? 6. No, I have not 
seen them ; where are they ? 7. I have sent them to the cook ; but 
I am going to tell John to bring me a few of them. 8. How do 
you find them ? 9. They are superb ; I have not seen so fine ones 
this year. 10. They are bringing much fruit to market now ; whence 
do they bring it? 11. It comes from the country. 12. One does 
not see many vegetables at the market (cut, marche). 13. No, we 
have not had rain for (depuh) so long a time, that all the gardens are 
dried up (desseches). 14. The gardeners say that they have never 
> *Vseen such a (une telle) drought; they are doing nothing at all (du 
tout). 

15. They say that the rivers are very low. 16. I wish to make 
a short (petit) journey ; but if the rivers are so low, I will not go in 
a (en) steamboat. 17. Where do you desire to go ? 18. I desire to 
go as far as Cincinnati. 19. The small boats go as far as there ; 
when do you think to set out ? 20. Next week ; I am waiting for 
the return of my father, who is in the country. 



5 6. — CINQU ANTE-SIXIEME LEQON. 

PLUPEEEECT TENSE. 
1. The pluperfect tense is formed in French as in English, by joining the past partici- 
ple to the imperfect of the auxiliary^ Thus, 

J'avais jini, tu avaisfini, il avaitfini, nous arions fini, votis aviezfini, Us avaient fini, 
I had finished, thou hadst, etc., he had, etc., we had, etc., you had, etc., they had, etc. 

* Compounds generally take the same auxiliary as their simples. 

t The only verbs, thus far given, which take etre for auxiliary, are aller and venir ; all 
the others take avoir. 



200 



THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



J'etais venu, tu etais venu, il etait venu, nous etions venus, vous etiez venus, Us etaient, ete. 
I had come, thou hadst come, he had come, we had come, you had come, they had come. 



Hadst thou learned thy lesson when 

the master came ? 
I had learned it. 

Had you written your exercises? 
We had written them. 
They had gone to school, and he had 
gone there also. 



Avais-tn appris taleqon quandle mai. 

tre est venu? 
Je Vavais apprise. 
Aviez-Yous ecrit vos themes ? 
Nous les avions ecrits. 
lis etaient alles a l'ecole, et il y etait 

alle aussi. 



In speaking of the weather, the French commonly employ /a ire, to make, imperson- 



ally. 

What weather is it ? how is the weather? 
The weather is cold. The weather is 
cool. 

It is cold. It is cool. 

It is warm. It is very warm. 



Sorrow. 
His appetite. 
The moonlight. 



A chain. 
A match. 
A work. 



Quel temps fait-il ? 
Le temps est froid. 

frais. 
II fait froid. 
II fait chaud. 

MASCULINE. 

Le chagrin. 
Son app'etit. 



Le temps est 



II fait frais. 
II fait bien chaud. 

FEMININE. 

Une chaine. 
Une allumette. 



Le clair de bene. Une osuvre. 



3. Travail implies the act of Avorking; outrage, the produce of the work; ceuvre, the 
production of talent or merit. 

An exercise. A long exercise. Un exercice. Un long exercice. 

Slippery. Bark. Glissant. Sombre, obscur. 

4. Sombre implies scarcity of light ; obscur, absence of light. 

[As the learner is now sufficiently acquainted with forming the feminine of adjectives 
and participles, they will be given only in the masculine, except in peculiar cases.] 



Wet. Damp, moist. 
Agreeable. Amiable, lovely. 
To sleep, slept. 
To refuse. To gain. 

On horseback. On foot. 
This summer. In summer. 
This autumn. In autumn. 
This winter. In winter. 
This spring. In spring. 

5. En is used indefinitely with the names of the seasons, except printemps, which is 
never preceded by en. They are all masculine. 

Do you sleep less in winter than in Dormez-vous moins en hiver (or Phi- 
spring ? ver) qu'au printemps ? 

Yes, and I sleep more in summer than Oui, et je dors plus en ete (or Fete) 
in autumn. qu'en automne. 

1 14 8 1 6 12 1 22 5 7 9 5 7 12 12 3 15 18 

cha-grin, chaine, ap-pe-tii, aZ-lu-meWe, clair, ceuvre., eg-zer-cice, glis-santf, sombre, obs- 

22 22 1-2 1 5 1 7 1 16 12 16 12 4 22 6 1 6 5 6 16 21 12 

care, 7iu-mide, a-gre-able, ai-mable, dor-mir, dor-mi, re-fu-ser, ga-gner, ete, au-tonme, hi- 

7 14 3 

ver, prin-teinps. 



Mouille. Ilumide. 
Agreable. Aimable. 
Dormir, dormi (as sortir, Les. 29). p 
Refuser (de bef. inf.). Gagner (d bef. 
inf.). 

A cheval. A pied. 

Get ete. En ete or Fete. 

Cet automne. En automne or Tautomne. 

Cet hiver. En hiver or l'hiver. 

Ce printemps. Au printemps. 



THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



201 



Is it dry ? No, it is wet. 

Is it dark ? No, it is moonlight. 

It is fine weather. It is stormy. 

It is good walking. It is slippery. 

It is foggy. It is muddy. 

It is night. It is day. 

It has been windy and dusty. 

It will be sunny. 

The mud. The dust. 

By. By mistake. 



Fait-il sec ? Non, il fait humide. 

Fait-il obscur ? Non, il fait clair de lune. 

II fait beau temps. II fait de l'orage. 

II fait bon marcher. II fait glissant. 

II fait du brouillard. II fait de la boue. 

II fait nuit. II fait jour. 

II a fait du vent et de la poussiere. 

II fera du soleil. 

La boue. La poussiere. 

Par. Par meprise. 



1. Voulez-vous bien me preter ces cenvres de Fenelon ? 2. Tres- 
volontiers, monsieur. 3. Combien vendez-vous cette chaine? 4. Je 
la vends cinq dollars. , 5. Avez-vous pris ma plume ? 6. Je l'ai prise 
par megarde. 7. Avais-tu appris ta lecon quand tu as lu le jour- 
nal ? 8. Je l'avais apprise. 9. £tiez-vous revenus de la campagne 
quancl vous avez vu mon pere % 10. Nous en etions revenus. 11. 
Votre frere avait-il lu cet ouvrage quand il me l'a prete ? 12. II 
l'avait lu. 13. Vos freres etaient-ils alles a l'ecole quand vous etes 
venu chez nous? 14. lis y etaient alles. 15. JStais-tu alle a la 
campagne quand nous sommes alles chez toi? 16. J'y etais alle. 
17. Vos freres avaient-ils appris le francais quand ils ont etudie 
1'espagnol? 18. Ils pouvaient parler un peu francais. 19. Avez- 
vous beaucoup d'appetit en automne 1 20. J'ai beaucoup d'appetit 
en automne et en hiver (l'automne et 1'mVer). 21. Irez-vous a la 
viile a pied ou a cheval % 22. Je n'irai ni a pied ni a cheval, j'irai 
en bateau a, vapeur. 23. Ce pauvre homme n'a-t-il pas beaucoup 
de chagrin? 24. Si, madame, il est tres-maiheureux. 25. Que 
desirez-vous acheter ? 26. Je desire acheter une chaine d'or et une 
boite d'allumettes. 27. Ces ecoliers studieux refusent-ils de reciter 
leurs lecons ? 28. Ils ne refusent pas de les reciter. 29. Gagnez- 
vous beaucoup d'argent ? 30. Je n'en gagne pas beaucoup. 

1. Do you promise to come and see me soon ? 2. I promise to 
come (go) and see you to-morrow. 3. Is that studious man amia- 
ble ? 4. He is very amiable. 5. How is the weather ? 6. It is 
fine weather. 7. Is it not cold ? 8. No, it is neither warm nor 
cold. 9. Is it not damp? 10. No, sir, it was damp this morning, 
but it is dry now. 11. Is it not dark this evening? 12. No, sir, 
it is moonlight. 13. Is it not slippery? 14. No, it is good walk- 



19 18 12 7 

boue, pous-siere. 



202 THE FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON. 

ing. 15Vls it net muddy? 16. No, it is neither muddy nor dusty. 
17. Is it very good walking? 18. No, sir, it is a little slippery. 
19. Has not that poor man much sorrow? 20. He has had much 
sorrow, but he is happy now. 21. Will you buy a chain of gold or 
of silver ? 22. I shall buy a gold chain. 23. Have you some 
matches ? 24. I have a box of good matches. 

25. Have you much appetite in autumn'? 26. Yes, I have more 
appetite in autumn than in summer. 27. Do you sleep more in 
winter than in spring? 28. No, sir, I sleep as much in spring as 
in winter. 29. Ho we sleep more than you ? SO. No, you sleep 
less than we. 31. Do those scholars sleep much ? 32. Yes, they 
sleep too much, but the master does not sleep enough. 33. Do those 
shop-keepers gain much money ? 34. They gain much. 35. Do 
you gain more than they ? 36. No, I gain less than they. 37. 
What weather is it? 38. It is very agreeable weather (un temps). 
39. It was dark last night; will it not be dark to-night* 40. No, 
sir, it will be moonlight. 41. Do you take exercise frequently? 42. 
I take exercise morning and evening. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Has it been foggy this week? 2. Yes, sir, but it is dry now. 
3. Is it good walking ? 4. It is good walking, but it has been slip- 
pery. 5. Why do you extinguish the lights? 6. I extinguish them 
because it is day. 7. Did the American buy his pictures on credit 
or for cash? 8. He bought them for cash. 9. What is the matter 
with you? 10. I have a violent toothache, and my thumb pains 
me. 11. They speak much of the new work of Dumas ; have you 
seen it ? 12. I never read his works. 13. Why? do you not like 
them? 14. They are not to my taste. 15. I have heard that 
Dumas writes very well. 

16. I am going to buy a lamp ; I have broken mine. 17. Do 
you wish for a small one or a large one ? 18. I wish for a large 
one. 19. How did you break yours? 20. I let it fall (tomber). 
21. Is this one good? 22. Yes, it is exactly (exactement) what I 
wish. 23. For how much do you sell a lamp like (comme) this ? 
24. I will let you have it (at) two dollars. 25. Well, I take it ; 
have you some matches ? 26. Yes, I have some ; how many boxes 
do you wish for? 27. Six or eight boxes (ce) will be enough. 



THE FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



203 



57.— CINQUANTE-SEPTIF.ME LEQON. 

THE IEEEGULAE IMPEESONAL YEEB FALLOIB. 



Faut-il ? or, Est-il necessaire i 
II faut, il est necessaire. 
Fallait-il ? II fallaii. 
A-t-ilfallu? Ilafallu. 



Is it necessary ? 
It is necessary. 

Was it necessary ? It was necessary. 

Has it been necessary ? It has been 
necessaiy. 

Had it been necessary ? It had been 
necessary. 

Will it be necessary ? It will be ne- 
cessary. 

1. Falloir and etre necessaire may be used alike, except negatively, but the former 
is a little stronger. When a person is used with falloir, if it be a pronoun, it is the indirect 
object ; if a noun, it is preceded by d. 



Avait-il fcdlu ? II avait fallu. 
Faudra-t-il ? II faudra. 



I need (must have) a string. 
He must have a horse. 
They will need money. 
That man must have money. 
He must write a letter. 

To have a mind, desire, fancy (for). 
Have you a fancy for my pen ? 
I have a desire to learn French. 
To run, running, run. 

Je cours, tic cours, il court, 

I run, thou runnest, he runs, 



II me faut un cordon. 

II lui faut un cheval. 

II leur faudra de l'argent. 

II faut de l'argent a, cet homme. 

H lui faut ecrire une lettre.* 

Avoir envie (de) (de bef. n. and inf.). 
Avez-vous envie de ma plume ? 
J'ai envie d'apprendre le francais. 
Courir, courant, couru. 



neics coicrons, vous courez, Us courenl, 
we run, you run, they run. 

2. The future of courir is irregular by dropping the i. 

Jecourrai, iu courras, il courra, nous courrons, vous courrez, ilscourront, 

I shall run, thou wilt run, he will run, we shall run, you will run, they will run. 

To perceive, descry, perceiving, perceived. Apercevoir, apercevant, apercu. 

Do you perceive that light ? Apercevez-vous cette lumiere ? 

I perceive it. Je. 1'apercois. 

To give pleasure. To please. Faire plaisir. Plaire. 

8. These two verbs always govern the dative ; i. e., they always take the noun preceded 
by d, or the indirect objective pronoun. 



He pleases his father, his father is 

pleased with him. 
He pleases him. 

You will please me by your good con- 
duct. 



II plait a son pere. 
II lui plait. 

Yous me ferez plaisir par votre bonne 
conduite. 



* 'When falloir, with a person, is followed also by a verb, the conjunction que with the 
subjunctive is generally preferred. 

17 ? 5 7 1 7 1 23 17 1 1 20 3 13 18 12 18 3 18 22 18 

iaur, ne-ces-saire, faMaitf, fa'-lu, fau-dra, faMoir, en-vie, cou-rir, cou-rantf, cou-ru, corns, 

18 18 21 18 6 18 IS 617 4 20 17 i 3 17 22 7 

couit, cou-rons, cou-res, courent, cour-rai, a-per-ce-voir, a-per-ce-van?, a-per-cu, plaire. 



204 



THE FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSOX. 



I am pleased with him. 

If they come, will you perceive them ? 

I shall perceive them. 



II me plait, or, Je suis content de lui. 
S'ils viennent, les apercevrez-vous ? 
Je les apercevrai. 



The string. 
A mile. 
The middle. 
Interest. 
The least. 



The mode, fashion. 
A hoe. 
The spade. 
The shovel. 
An ax. 



MASCULINE. 

Le cordon. 
Un mille. 
Le milieu. 
L'interet. 

Le moindre, le moins. 



FElIINIIfE. 

La mode. 
Une houe. 
La beche. 
La pelle. 
Une hache. 



4. IToindrcis an adjective, and belongs to a noun; moins is an adverb, and modifies a 
verb, adjective, or adverb. 



II n'a pas le moindre courage. 

II etudie le moins. 

Au milieu du chemin. 

A bonmarche. Une charrue. 

Cher. Une charrette. 

Fort. Une brouettc. 

Par interet. Sans interet. 

Faire un mille. 
Je ferai dix milles. 

lis vendent h bonmarche, mais je vends 
a meilleur marche qu'eux. 



He has not the least courage. 

He studies the least. 

In the middle of the path. 

Cheap. A plow. 

Dear. A cart. 

Strong. A wheelbarrow. 

Interestedly, from interest. Disinter- 
estedly. 

To go a mile. 

I shall go ten miles. 

They sell cheap, but I sell cheaper 
than they. 

1. Que faut-il (est-il necessaire de) faire ? 2. II faut apprendre 
nos lecons. 3. A-t-il fallu (ete necessaire de) travailler? 4. II a 
fallu (ete necessaire de) travailler beaucoup. 5. Faudra-t-il (sera- 
t-il necessaire de) aller a la riviere % 6. II ne fauclra pas y aller. 
7. II faut une houe au jardinier. 8. II nous faut une charrette et 
une brouette. 9. II a fait chaud la semaine passee, mais a present 
il fait un temps agreable. 10. Ce marchand ne vend-il pas cher 1 
11. Non, il vend a bon marche. 12. Courez-vous plus vite que 
moi? 13. Je ne cours pas aussi (or si) vite que vous. 14. Cet 
etranger fait-il plaisir a votre ami par interet ? 15. Oui, il ne rend 
pas le moindre service sans interet. 16. Apercevez-vous celui que 
vous cherchez ? 17. Nous l'apercevons et il nous apercoit. 18. 
Ces enfants courent parce qu'ils ont peur de la pluie. 19. Nous ne 
courons jamais, mais ces petits gar cons courent beaucoup. 20. 
Yous faut-il quel que chose ? 21. II me faut un cordon et une beche, 
et il faut au paysan une pelle et une hache. 22. Le jardinier a-t-il 
tout ce qu'il lui faut ? 23. Non, il lui faudra encore un charrue, 



16 21 15 12 19 12 12 9 8 14 5 5 5 1 2 £3 15 

cor-don, mode, mille, houe, mi-lieu, beche, in-te-re^, pelle, hache, char-rue, cha/vrettfe, 

15 18 5 

fort, brou-ette. 



THE FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSOX. 



205 



une cliarrette et une grosse brouette. 24. Ce cheval est-il fort ? 

25. II est fort et bien doux. 26. Courrez-vous si vous voyez le 
gros chien ? Je courrai. 

1. What does the blacksmith make ? 2. He makes hoes, spades, 
shovels, axes, and plows. 3. Why does that cat run ? 4. He runs 
because he perceives the dogs. 5. Why do you run ? 6. We run 
because we perceive the storm. 7. If you see your brother, will you 
not run to him ? 8.1 shall run to him. 9. Of what has the wash- 
erwoman need ? 10. She has need of a cord or of a long string. 
11. Will you go a mile this morning? 12. I shall go two. 13. 
Where does the servant put the hoe and the ax ? 14. He puts the 
hoe in the middle of the garden, and he puts the ax in the middle 
of the yard. 15. Is not butter dear? 16. Yes, every thing is dear 
now. 17. Does not the merchant sell dear? 18. No, sir, he sells 
very cheap ; he has not the least profit. 

19. Have you seen the sister of my friend? 20. I have seen 
her; she is pretty and very amiable. 21. Had you written your 
exercise this morning when the master came ? 22. I had written 
it. 23. Had your brothers gone to school when I saw you yester- 
day? 24. They had gone there. 25. Of what have you need? 

26. I must have some candles or a lamp. 27. Do you perceive the 
traveler? 28. I perceive him, and he perceives me. 29. Do you 
take much exercise? 30. Yes, sir, I go two miles in the morning 
and two miles in the evening. 31. Is any thing the matter with 
you? n32. I have a pain in my thumb. 33. Is the workman in 
want of any thing ? 34. He is in want of a wheelbarrow and a 
cart. 35. Labor is the least of evils, consequently (consequemment) 
it is the one which I feel the least. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you read the works of Lamartine ? 2. I have read a 
few of them. 3. What will the weather be to-morrow ? 4. It will 
be cold. 5. Will it be good walking? 6. It will be slippery. 7. 
Does that sailor like to go on foot ? 8. He likes better to go on 
foot than to go on horseback. 9. Whose is (a qui est) that dog_ 
which is following you? 10. It is a dog that one has given me. 
11. I have never seen him follow you. 12. He does not follow me 
often, but he has broken his cord this morning. 13. Why do you 
not buy him a chain ? 14. I have one which I bought, and w T hich 
he cannot break. 

15. Let us go and take the air in the country to-morrow. 16. I 



206 



THE FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



am perfectly (bien) willing; the air of the city is not good. 17. It 
is not so good in summer as in whiter. 18. What are you doing ? 
19. I am putting my linen in (d) the air. 20. Put it on this cord. 
21. Let us open the door ; the air of this room is warm. 22. Yes ; 
but is not the air of the street too cold 1 23. It is not very cold 
to-day. 24. Do not open the door ; open the window. 25. Where 
are you going ? 26. I am going into the yard to look for some- 
thing. 27. Do not go in the air nor in the sun without a hat. 28. 
I am not going to stay long, and my hat is in the other room. 29. 
Put on mine ; I do not want it. SO. Well, give it to me, if you 
please. 31. It is a little too small ; put it on, however (tov.jours). 



58.— CIXQUAXTE-HUITIEaTE LECOX. 

TEAXSLATION OF PARTICIPIAL NOUXS. 

L The English participial noun is commonly rendered into French by the infinitive. 
Is studying much agreeable to you? Yousest-ilagreablecTtfo^/erbeaiacoup? 
Heading at night hurts my eyes. Lire la nuit me fait mal aux yeux. 

Writing at night is still worse. Ecrire la nuit est encore plus mauvais. 

2. Prepositions followed by verbal expressions in English take the infinitive in French. 
En, as will be seen hereafter, is an exception. 

Do you gain much by doing that? Gagnez-vous beaucoup a /aire cela? 

I have a fancy for learning French. J'ai envie oTapprendre le francais. 
He recites his lesson without making a H recite sa lecon sans /aire de faute 
mistake. (or une faute). 

3. Pour before a noun or pronoun means for ; before an infinitive it means to, or in 
order to. 

For me. For him. For them. Pour moi. Pour lui. Pour eux. 

He will come to see you. H viendra pour vous voir. 

I study in order to learn. *Tetudie pour apprendre. 

<£. Participles used as adjectives always agree with their nouns. 
Clothes made in the new fashion. Des habits faits a la nourelle mode. 

A gown made in the old fashion. Une robe faite a la vieille mode. 

In the fashion. In the French fashion. A la mode. A la mode francaise. 

Future of savoir, to know. Irregular. 
Jesaurai, iusauras, Usaura, nous saurons, roussaurez, its sauront, 
I shall know, thou wilt know, he will know, we shall know, you will know, they will know. 

If it rains, 'will you know it ? S'il pleut, le saurez-vous ? 

I shall know it. Je le saurai. 

To appear, appearing, appeared. Paraitre, paraissant, pane (as connai- 

tre). 



16 61? 173 123 

sau-rai, pa-raitre, pa-rai-9-sanr, pa-ru. 



THE FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



207 



MASCTTLINE. FEMININE. 

This motion, impulse. Early. Ce mouvement. De bonne heure. 

A lawyer. Sooner. Un avocat. Plus tot. 

A motive. Rather. Un motif, mobile. Plutut. 

5. Plutdi, one word, means rather ; plus tot, two words, means sooner. 

You will return sooner than I. Vous reviendrez plus tot que moi. 

I will do good rather than evil. Je ferai du bien plutot que du mal. 

An action, fact, deed. Earlier. Un fait, acte. De meilleure. heure. 

C. Fait means something accomplished; acte expresses action, or the result of action. 

Sunday, on Sunday. Le dimanche, dimanche. 

Monday, on Monday. Le lundi, lundi. 

Tuesday, on Tuesday. Le mardi, mardi. 

Wednesday, on Wednesday. Le mercredi, mercredi. 

Thursday, on Thursday. ~Lejeudi, jeudi. 

Friday, on Friday. Le vendredi, vendredi. 

Saturday, on Saturday. Le samedi, samedi. 

Almost. Perhaps. Presque. Peut-eire. 

7. The article is used with the days of the week to denote what is habitual or periodi- 
cal (when the plural may be used in English) ; also when they are used definitely. Used as 
adverbs, they take neither article nor preposition. 

They return home Sundays. lis reviennent chez eux le dimanche. 

I shall be here on Sunday. Je serai ici dimanche. 

She comes here Saturdays. Elle vient ici le samedi. 

We will return on Saturday. Nous reviendrons samedi. 

1. Est-ce que je parais malade? 2. Non, monsieur, vous parais- 
sez etre en bonne sante. 3. Fait-il nuit ? 4. II fait nuit, et la 
lime et les etoiles paraissent. 5. Les faits de cette histoire sont 
extraordinaires. 6. Ce clieval a les mouvements beaux. 7. Ee- 
viendrez-vous lundi ou mardi? 8. Je reviendrai de bonne heure 
lundi. 9. Vous parait-il agreable d'etudier beaucoup? 10. Cela 
me parait agreable et utile. 11. Quand irez-vous chez 1'avocaf? 
12. J'irai mercredi. 13. Eevenez-vous de chez lui a present? 14. 
J' en reviens. 15. Allez-vous au marche de bonne heure ? 16. Oui, 
mais vous y allez de meilleure heure que moi. 17. II n'a pas fait 
froid cette semaine ; n'est-ce pas? 18. Si, presque toute la semaine, 
mercredi, jeudi, vendredi et samedi. 19. Cet homme vous rend-il 
service par interet? 20. Oui, l'interet est son seul motif (mobile). 
21. Simon frere vient ici, le saurez-vous? 22. Nous saurons la 
lecon plus tot que vous, et mon cousin la saura plus tot que nous. 
23. J'apprends le francais mais non pas l'espagnol. 24. Le maitre 

18 3 11 1 15 1 15 12 15 13 22 17 7 1 12 3 22 12 1 

-louYtf-menif, kenre, a-vo-ca^, mo-tif. mo-bile, plu-to?!, fait, acte, di-manch-', lnn-di, mar- 

12 7 4 2 )0 12 3 4 12 1 12 5 9 8 

di, mer-cre-di, jeu-di, ven-dre-di, same-di, preske, peu-tetre. 



20S THE FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON". 

y 

est alle chez lui ; peut-etre qu'il reviendra bientot. 25. Silence, 
restez tranquille : cet enfant est le mouvement perpetuel. 

1. Does the washerwoman wish for any thing % 2. She wishes 
for a long string and some soap. 3. What does the gardener need ? 

4. He needs a shovel, an ax, a plow, a cart, and a wheelbarrow. 

5. Is that servant useful to 7011? 6. No, he does not render me 
the least service. 7. Does the shop-keeper sell cheap ? 8. No ; he 
sells very dear. 9. How is the weather ? 10. It is cold this morn- 
ing. 11. Is it not night? 12. It is night, and the stars appear. 
13. Do those ladies appear to you amiable? 14. Yes, they appear 
to me very amiable. 15. Does that man appear to you lame? 1G. 
Yes, sir, he is lame ; he has a pain in the left foot. 17. Are you 
returning from the lawyer's? 18. I am returning from his house. 
19. Has your partner gone to the lawyer's? 20. No; he went 
early this morning to the country ; perhaps he will return to-day. 

21. Is the motion of this boat agreeable to you? 22. No, it is 
not agreeable. 23. That man obliges {rend service a) every body ; 
what is his motive ? 24. Interest is his only motive. 25. Do you 
know any one without fault ? 26. I know no one without fault. 

27. This new history is extraordinary ; it is full of strange facts. 

28. Do you go out early in the morning? 29. Yes, but my 
brother goes out earlier than I. 30. Will you go to school earlier 
than your cousin? 31. I shall go earlier than he. 32. Had your 
brother gone to school when we saw you this morning? 33. He 
had gone there. 34. Had you recited your lesson when we recited 
ours? 35. I had recited it 36. Has that child courage? 37. 
He has not the least courage. 38. Is it warm this evening ? 39. 
No, it is almost always in the evening that it is the least warm. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

I. See that pretty little dog which follows that lady ; he is 
very small and all white, the pretty little animal ! 2. Do you like 
dogs ? 3. I like them much ; I like dogs and horses ; they are good 
animals. 4. The horse is a very useful animal. 5. You are right, 
he is an animal very useful. 6. Is it healthy to (de) stay in the 
air without a coat? 7- It is not healthy. 8. Well, let us go and 
put on our coats. 9. Yes, I feel that the air is damp this morning. 
10. Damp air is not healthy in the city (en ville) ; in the country 
we do not think of it. 

II. Who gave you that great box? 12. No one gave it tome ; 
I bought it. 13. What will you do with it ? 14. I am going to 



THE FIFTY-NINTH LESSON. 



209 



give it to the gardener to (pour) put his tools in (it) (y). 15. What 
tools will he put in it ? 16. He will put in it his hoe, his spade, 
his shovel, his ax, and some other tools. 17. Is that box long 
enough to put a hoe or a spade in (it) % 18. Yes, it is long enough. 
19. They say that you have a fine garden. 20. Yes; our new 
gardener has made (rendu) it very fine. 21. Have you a plow? 
22. No, we have none. 23. I have one, and it is at your service, 
if you wish for it. 24. Thank you, but we have no need of it ; we 
do every thing (tout) with (a) the spade. 

25. Will you return from the river earlier than your brothers ? 
26. No ; they will return earlier than we. 27 When wilt thou go 
to Boston ? 28. I shall go there on Monday. 29. Wilt thou re- 
turn on Tuesday ? 30. No ; I shall return on Wednesday or Thurs- 
day ; my brother will return on Friday, and my cousin will return 
on Saturday or Sunday. 



59. — CINQUANTE-NEUVIl£ME LEQON. 

DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

1. There are three degrees of comparison, the positive, comparative, and superlative. 

2. Of comparatives there are also those of superiority, equality, and inferiority. 

3. The comparative is formed by placing before the adjective the adverbs plus for su- 
periority, aussi for equality, and moins for inferiority, and que after it. Thus : 

Small, smaller, as small, less small. Petit, plus petit, aussi petit, moms 

petit. 

Elegant, more elegant, as elegant, less Elegant, plus elegant, aussi elegant, 
elegant. moins elegant. 

4. Many adverbs are compared in the same way as adjectives. 

Easily, more easily, as easily, less ea- Facilement, plus facilement, aussi fa- 
sily. cilement, moins facilement. 

5. When quantities are compared, plus, autant, moins are used with de before the ob- 
ject compared, and que de before the one it is compared with ; as, 

More butter than bread. Plus de beurre que de pain. 

As much of this as of that. Autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 

Less money than clothes. Moins ^'argent que tZ'habits. 

6. The superlative is formed by prefixing the article le, or a possessive adjective, to the 
comparative of superiority or inferiority. 

Small, smaller, smallest. Petit, plus petit, le plus petit. 

Cold, less cold, least cold. Froid, moins froid, le moins froid. 

7. There are a few irregularities. Meilleur and le meilleur are sometimes used for the 
comparative and superlative of ton; moindre and le moindre for those of petit; mieux 
and le mieux for those of tien ; pire and le pire for those of mauvais ; pis and le pis for 
those of mal. 

My foot is smaller than yours. Mon pied est plus petit que le votre. 

His foot is the smallest. II a le plus petit pied. 



S 5 3 

e-le-gan£. 



210 



THE FIFTY-XIXTH LESSOX. 



This scholar is less studious than that. 



Get eleve est moins studieux que 
celui-la. 

Celui-la est le moins studieux de tous. 
(Test mon meilleur cheval ; c'est le 
meilleur que j'ai. 

8. Plus petit more commonly applies to 'what is measured ; moindre, to what is valued. 



That one is the least studious of all. 
It is my best horse ; he is the best that 
I have. 



My brother is smaller than I. 
He is the smallest of the family. 
His talents are less than yours. 

He is the smallest of small minds. 
Sweet, sweetened. To answer. 
The side. The liquor, cordial. 
The chin. The sweet liquor. 
On this side. On that side. 
The spectacle, play. To the play. 
His turn. In his (or her) turn. 
A pig, swine. A fat pig. 
Something else. Nothing else. 
Consequently. I read the best. 
To keep. He keeps my letters, 
To fall. 

He has fallen from a horse. 
Do they come on this side or on that 
side? 

They come on this side. 
Did you answer that man ? 
I answered him. 



Mon frere est plus petit que moi. 
C'est le plus petit de la famille. 
Ses talents sont moindres que les 
votres. 

C'est le moindre des petits esprits. 

Sucre. Repondre (de before nouns). 

Le cote. La liqueur. 

Le menton. La liqueur douce. 

De ce cote-ci. De ce c6te-la. 

Le spectacle. Au spectacle. 

Son tour. A son tour. 

Un cochon. Un cochon gras. 

Quelque autre chose. Mien autre chose. 

Conscquemment. Je lis le mieux. 

Carder. II garde mes lettres. 

Tomber (etre for auxiliary). 

II est tombe de cheval. 

Tiennent-ils de ce cote-ci ou de ce 

cote-la ? 
Hs viennent de ce cote-ci. 
Avez-vous repondu a cet homme ? 
Je lui ai repondu. 



1. Avez-vous envie d'aller quelque part ? 2. Oui, j'ai envie 
(Taller a la campagne. 3. Achetez-vous des habits faits a la mode 
franeaise ? 4. Xon, j'achete des habits faits a la mode anglaise. 
5. Avez-vous plus de fromage que de beurre? 6. Xon, monsieur, 
j'ai autant de beurre que de fromage. 7. Avez-vous moins de peches 
que de pommes ? 8. Xon, j'ai moins de pom mes que de peches. 
9. Yotre sceur n'est-elle pas plus grande que vous? 10. Elle est 
plus grande que moi, mais mon frere est le plus grand de la famille.* 
11. Yotre cousin n'est-il pas moins studieux que vous? 12. Oui, 
il est le moins studieux de l'ecole. 13. Yous lisez mieux que moi, 
mais mon frere lit le mieux. 14. Qu' avez-vous ? 15. J'ai mal au 
menton. 16. Buvez-vous la liqueur sucree ? 17. Je la bois. 18. 



1814 12 12 22 6 5 21 17 6 12 11 3 -1 5 1 IS 15 21 

moindre, pire, pi*, su-cro. re-pondre, cd-te, li-keur, men-ton. spec-tack, tour, co-chon, 

21 5 1 3 1 6 15 6 

con-se-kam-menf. srar-der, tom-ber. 



THE FIFTY-XINTH LESSOR. 



211 



Buvez-vous quelque autre chose ? 19. Je ne bois rien autre chose. 
20. Tombez-vous souvent quancl il fait glissant? 21. Je tombe 
quelquefois, mais non pas souvent. 22. Ma plume est rneilleure 
que la votre, consequemment j'ecris mieux que vous. 23. J'ai la 
rneilleure des plumes, et c'est moi qui ecrit le mieux. 24. Ma plume 
est mauvaise, celle de Charles est pire, la votre est la pire cle toutes ; 
consequemment j'ecris mal, Charles ecrit pis que moi, et vous / 
ecrivez le pis de tous. 

1. Do you answer all the letters of the captain ? 2. I answer 
them (y). 3. Have you answered the doctor % 4. I have not 
answered him. 5. When will you answer his letter % 6. I shall 
answer it on Thursday. 7. Do you keep the money that you gain ? 
8. I keep mine, but my brother does not keep his. 9. What have 
you a mind to do? 10. I have a mind to write some letters. 11. 
Is this liquor sweeter than that ? 12. Yes, this liquor is sweeter 
than that, but that of the cook is the sweetest. 13. Is this pig as 
fat as that ? 14. No, this pig is less fat than that. 15. What 
does that man buy % 16. He buys a coat made in the old fashion, 
and his wife buys a gown made in the new fashion. 17. Do you 
take your sister to the play ? 18. I take her there. 

19. Is that scholar as studious as his cousin ? 20. He is more 
studious than his cousin, but he is less studious than his brother; 
the son of the German is the most studious of all. 21. Do you 
speak in your turn ? 22. Yes, each one speaks in his turn. 23. 
That scholar's merit (merite) is less than yours, but his brother's is 
the least of all. 24. My ink is bad, yours is worse, and this little 
boy's is the worst of all. 25. This little girl reads badly, her 
brother reads worse, and her cousin reads the worst of all the school. x 
26. Is not your chin swollen 1 27. My chin is swollen, and I have 
also the toothache. 28. Where is the roast pig ? 29. The cook 
has carried it to the kitchen. 30. Is your friend coming on this 
side ! 31. No, he is coming on that side. 32. You learn French 
and Spanish ; do you learn any thing else ? 33. I learn nothing else. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you seen the carriage which I have bought? 2. No; 
I have been told that you have bought a new one, but I have not 
yet seen it ; is it large ? 3. Not very large ; I have need of a cart 
also ; mine is all (toute) broken. 4. I have seen some very good 
ones at John the blacksmith's. 5. Are they large? 6. I saw some 



212 



THE SIXTIETH LESSOX. 



large ones' and some small ones ; you had better ( ferez Men de) go 
and see thein. 7. Yes, I will go to-morrow ; I am in want also of 
a little wheelbarrow. 8. You will see some at his house. 9. They 
say that John is a very good workman. 10. Yes, his work is 
strong, and does not break like {coonme) that of so many others. 
11. The work which they make at present is none too (pas trop) 
good. 12. They do not always take care to choose good wood. 

13. George, do you know where your little brother is? 14. He 
is in the middle of the road. 15. Can you tell me where my dic- 
tionary and my grammar are? 16. Yes ; your brother has carried 
(emportes) them off into his room. 17. He is studying his lesson ; 
but I do not yet know mine. 18. Have you not studied it yet? 
19. I have studied it a little, but not enough. 20. Take my gram- 
mar if you have need of it. 21. You are very good ; if I do not 
study, our master will be displeased (mecontent), and he will be 
right. 



CO.— SOXXANTIEME LEQON. 

PASSIVE VERB. 

To reward. To punish. Recompenser. Punir. 

To esteem. To despise. Estimer. Mepriser. 

To correct. To neglect. Corriger. Negliger (de bef. inf.). 

The thief, robber. Ignorant. Le voleur. Ignorant. 

1. TnE Passive Verb is formed in French, as in English, by joining the past participle 
to the auxiliary etre, — the past participle agreeing in gender and number with the subject 
of the verb. 

I am loved. Je sicis aime or aimee. 

Thou art loved. Tu es aime or aimee. 

He is loved.' She is loved. II est aime. Elle est aimee. 

We are loved. Nous sommes aimes or aimees. 

T _ ( aime or aimee. 

1 ou are loved. V ous etes < . , . , * 

( aimes or aimees* 

Triey are loved. Us sont aimes or elles sont aimees. 

I was rewarded. J'etais recompense or recompensee. 

Thou hast been punished. Tu as ete puni or punic. 

He had been neglected. II avail ete neglige. 

She had been esteemed. Elle avait ete estimee. 

We shcdl be despised. Kous serons meprises or meprisees. 

estim'e or estimee. 



You will be esteemed. Vous serez 



estimes or estimees. 



* When vous refers to but one, the participle is singular ; when to more than one, it is 
plural. 

5 21 3 6 22 12 5 12 6 5 12 6 16 12 6 5 12 6 15 11 12 16 3 

rc-com-pen-ser, pu-nir, es-ti-mer, me-pri-ze?% cor-ri-ger, ne-gli-ge;', vo-leur, i-gno-runl 

5 21 3 6 22 12 5 12 6 5 12 6 5 12 5 

re-com-pen-se, pu-ni, ne-gli-ge, es-ti-me, me-pri-ze. 



THE SIXTIETH LESSON. 



213 



2. By before the agent of a passive verb is rendered by de when speaking of the senti- 
ments of the heart ; by par, of actions physical or mental. 

They were loved by their friends. Elles etaient aimees de leurs amis. 

He will be punished by the master. II sera puni par le maitre. 
The exercises will be corrected by the Les themes seront corriges par le mal- 
master. tre. 

3. The passive verb is not often used in French -when the agent is general or unknown. 
Expressions like the following, therefore, though passive in English, must be active in French. 

This house is to be sold. Cette maison est a vendre. 

That poor man is to be pitied. Ce pauvre homme est d plaindre. 

That house is to be let. Cette maison est a louer. 

That is an animal to be feared. C'est un animal a craindre. 

It is said that he is sick. On dit qu'il est maiade. 

We have been told that you are rich. Gn nous a dit que vous etes riche. 

Instead of. To bring, to take to. Au lieu de. Amener. 

4. Apporter is to bring by carrying ; amener, to bring without carrying ; emporter also 
is to carry away ; emmener, to lead or take away. 

Is there, are there ? TJiere is, there are. Y a-t-il ? II y a. 
Has or have there been ? was or were Y a-t-il eu ? 
there ? 

There has or have been, there was or were. II y a eu. 
Will there be? There will be. Y aur a-t-il F 11 y aura. 

Was there ? There was. ^ Y avait-il ? II y avait. 

Had there been ? TJiere had been. Y avait-il eu ? 11 y avait eu. 

He brings his sister. II amene sa soeur. 

He brings his book. II apporte son livre. 

Are there some people at your house ? Y a-t-il du monde chez vous ? 
There will be some to-morrow. II y en aura demain. 

There have been many people at church II y a eu beaucoup de monde a, l'eglise 
this evening. ce soir. 

1. Cet liomme neglige sa sante, il sera maiade. 2. Ces ecoliers 
negligent d'etudier, ils seront pimis. 3. Cet eleve sera-t-il recom- 
pense ? 4. Non, il est paresseux, il neglige ses lecons, et il sera 
puni au lieu d'etre recompense. 5. Ges enfants sages seront es- 
times au lieu d'etre meprises. 6. Par qui etes-vous recompenses ? 
7. Nous sommes recompenses par le maitre. 8. Nous serons aimes 
de nos parents. 9. Ce voleur a-t-il ete puni ? 10. Pas encore, 
mas il sera bientot puni. 11. Ce gros garcon est tres-ignorant. 
12. Oui, il est si ignorant qu'il ne sait pas lire. 13. Vos themes 
sont-il corriges ? 14. Non, mais ils seront bientot corriges par le 
maitre. 15. J'ai amene ma soeur ici, et j'y ai apporte sa malle. 
16. N'y a-t-il pas un livre sur votre pupitre ? 17. II y en a un. 

18 6 1 6 

lou-er, ame-ner. 



214 



THE SIXTIETH LESSON. 



18. Y a-t-il des papiers dans votre tiroir? 19. II n'y en a pas. 

20. N'y a-t-il pas eu beaucoup de bruit dans la rue hier au soir? 

21. II y en a eu beaucoup. 22. Y aura-t-il beaucoup de monde chez 
vous demain ? 23. II y en aura beaucoup. 24. Y avait-il beau- 
coup de fruit a la campagne, quand vous y etiez % 25. II y en 
avait beaucoup. 

1. Has the master given you any thing? 2. Yes, sir, he has 
given me a pretty book. 3. Has he given you any thing else ? 4. 
No, he has given me nothing else. 5. Is that tea sweetened ? 6. 
It is sweetened. 7. Are those pears good % 8. They are sweet 
and good. 9. Was your exercise finished when the master cor- 
rected mine? 10. Yes, I had finished it, and the master had cor- 
rected it. 11. Has that lazy scholar been punished? 12. Yes, sir, 
and that studious scholar has been rewarded. 13. Who will be 
esteemed and who will be despised? 14. The studious scholar 
will be esteemed, and the ignorant scholar will be despised. 15. 
When will the thief be punished? 16. He will be punished next 
week. 17. Is not that scholar ignorant ? 18. He is very ignorant ; 
he plays instead of studying, and he will be punished by the master. 

19. Do you correct your exercises? 20. No, sir, the master 
corrects them. 21. Do you not neglect your health ? 22. No, I 
do not neglect it. 23. Do you play instead of studying? 24. No, 
sir, I have learned my lesson, and now I am going to play. 25. 
Are there not thieves in this city? 26. There are a few. 27. Were 
there not some people at your house yesterday ? 28. Yes, there 
were many there yesterday, and there will be many to-morrow. 
29. Are there not some books on your table? 30. There are a few. 
31. Do you answer all the letters that you receive? 32. I answer 
them. 33. Do you keep all the money that you gain ? 34. I do not 
keep it all. 35. I have brought my little brother to school. 36. Have 
you brought his books also ? 37. I have brought them. 38. Have 
you brought any thing else ? 39. I have brought nothing else. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

/ 1. Show me (faites-moi voir) the lesson ; let us see if it is that 
which I have studied. 2. It is this one. 3. Very well ; it is the 
same. I know already the half of it ; I can learn it easily. 4. 
W^ich is the more useful, the French or the Latin ? 5. The French 
undoubtedly {sans doute) ; but I wish to know the Latin also ; do 
you not intend to learn it ? 6.1 do not know yet ; I prefer the 



THE SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 



215 



French. 7. But you can learn the Latin also. 8. Yes, if I have 
the time, for (car) I wish to learn also the Spanish and the German. 
9. Do you sometimes speak French to your sister'? 10. I speak 
French to her sometimes. 11. She comprehends French very well ; 
does she not? 12. Yes, and she speaks it sufficiently well. 13. 
Why do you not always speak French to her ? 14. I often forget 
to do it, and besides (d'ailleurs) it is a little difficult for me. 15. 
The more one speaks, the sooner one learns; does he not? 16. 
Certainly [certainement) ; one has need of study and of practice also. 

17. Are the soldiers coming on this side or on that side? 18. 
They are coming on that side. 19. My father gives me money to 
go to the play. 20. Does he give you any thing else? 21. He 
gives me nothing else. 22. Has there "been much fruit this sum- 
mer? 23. There has been much. 24. Will there be much cotton 
this autumn? 25. There will not be much. 26. What do you 
buy? 27. I buy some apples. 28. Do you buy any thing else? 
29. I buy nothing else. 30. Does that child fall often? 31. He 
falls very often. 32. Do you prefer the Spanish to the French? 
33. No, I prefer the French to the Spanish. 



61.— SOIXANTE ET UNIfcME LEQON. 

COMPAEAT1VES WITH NE AND LE. 



To touch. To owe, must, etc. 

Do you owe ? I owe. 
They owe me money. 
He owes me gratitude. 

1. Devoir has many significations in Enj 
I must write. I should write. 
I ought to write. I have to write. 
I am to write. 

The breakfast. To breakfast. 

The dinner. To dine. 

The word. The word (spoken). 

The cabbage. The earth, ground. 

At breakfast. At dinner. 

Coffee with milk. Coffee without milk. 

Malicious, cunning. 

Short. Charming. 

He is Dear-sighted. 

That man cultivates the earth. 

Take away that man. 



Toucher. Devoir. 

Devez-vous ? Je dois. 
lis me doivent de l'argent. 
II me doit de la reconnaissance. 
;lish, all denoting obligation in future. 

^ Je dois ecrire. 

Le dejeuner. Dejeuner. 

Le diner. Diner. 

Le mot. La parole. 

Le chou. La terre. 

A dejeuner. A diner. 

Cafe au lait. Cafe noir. 

Malin. Maligne. 

Court. Charmant. 

II a la vue courte (or basse). 

Cet homme cultive la terre. 

Emmenez cet homme. 



18 6 4 20 20 4 6 5 9 6 12 6 17 1 15 7 1 14 1 12 

tou-cher, de-voir, dois, de-ves, de-jeu-ner, di-ner, motf, pa-role, torre, ma-lin, ma-ligr 



court, char-man^. 



216 



THE SIXTY-FIRST LESSON". 



Joyous. Joyeux. Joyeuse. 

Crazy. Fou. Folle. 

2. Fou becomes fol before a vowel or a silent h. 

Wheat, grain. A pancake. Le ble, grain. Une crepe. 

Buckwheat. Le sarrasin, le ble noir. 

A buckibheat cake. Tine crepe de sarrasin (or de ble noir). 

He wishes for buckwheat cakes with II veut des crepes de sarrasin au beurre 

butter and syrup. et au sirop. 

It is good traveling. It is good living. II fait bon voyager. II fait bon vivre. 

3. Comparatives of superiority or inferiority take ne before the following verb, unless 
the comparison be negative. 

You have more money than I have. Yous avez plus d'argent que je w'en ai. 

He drinks less than you drink. II boit moins que vous ne buvez. 

I have no less courage than he has. Je n'ai pas moins de courage qu'il en a.* 

4. Comparatives generally, when the following verb may have a participle, an adjective, 
or a verb understood, after it, require such verb to be preceded by le. 

He is not so sick as he believes. II n'est pas aussi malade qu'il le croit. 

That is not so difficult as they think. Cela n'est pas aussi difficile qu'on le 

pense.f 

5. "When a comparative of this latter kind is also one of superiority or inferiority, and 
not negative, it takes of course both ne and le before the verb. 

They are richer than we are. lis sont plus riche que nous ne le 

sommes. 

He is more skillful than you believe. II est plus habile que vous ne le croyez. 

6. The pronoun le is commonly used before pouvoir, and some other verbs, instead of a 
preceding verb repeated. 

He learns as fast as he can. II apprend aussi vite qu'il le peut. 

He learns well when he will. II apprend bien quand il le veut. 

The Future o/vouloir, to be willing, is irregular. 
Je voudrai, tu voudras, il voudra, nous voudrons, vous voudrez, Us voudront, 
I shall wish for, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 

Will you want some paper ? Voudrez-vous du papier ? 

I shall want some. J'en voudrai. 

He has carried away my book. II a emporte mon livre. 

1. Devez-vous beaucoup d'argent? 2. Nous n'en devons pas 
beaucoup. 3. Combien d'argent me dois-tu ? 4. Je ne te dois rien. 
5. Toucbez-vous cet animal ? 6. Je le touche avec un baton, je ne 
le touche pas de la main. 7. Cette dame est charmante ; elle a Pair 
aimable, mais sa soeur a l'air malin. 8. Dejeunez-vous chez votre 



* JVe is not inserted in this last sentence because the comparison is negative, 
t In these sentences a verb may be supplied, thus : He is not so sick as he believes {that 
he is), That is not so difficult as they, think (it to be). 

20 12 9 20 12 9 15 14 8 1 1 14 12 17 18 6 

jo-yeucc, jo-yeuze, folle, grain, crepe, sar-ra-zin, si-ro/>, vou-drai. 



THE SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 



217 



ami ? 9. Non, monsieur, je dine chez lui, mais je dejeune chez moi. 
10. Fait-il bon vivre en Europe? 11. II y fait bon vivre. 12. 
Fait-il cher vivre a Paris ? 13, II fait aussi cher vivre a New York 
qu'a Paris. 14. L'Angleterre touche-t-elle a* la France? 15. Elle 
n'y touche pas. 16. Y a-t-il eu du cafe au lait a dejeuner? 17. II 
y a eu du cafe au lait a dejeuner, et il y aura du cafe noir a diner. 
18. II y aura du boeuf-roti a, diner. 19. Je sais mieux le francais 
que mon frere ne le sait. 20. Nous avons de meilleurs fruits que 
vous n'en avez. 21. II a ete pire, bien pire qu'il n'etait. 22. Nous 
sommes meilleurs qu'on ne le dit. 23. J'etudie quand je le puis. 
24. Savez-vous tous les mots cle votre lecon ? 25. Je les sais tous. 
26. Allez voir cette pauvre femme, et dites-lui quelques bonnes pa- 
roles de consolation. 27. Fait-il bon marcher ? 28. Non, il fait 
beaucoup de boue. 

1. Carry away these books. 2. Take away this child. 3. Does 
not that child fall often when it is slippery ? 4. He falls often 
when it is good walking. 5. My talents [talents) are less than 
yours, but this scholar's are the least. 6. Do those men owe you 
money ? 7. They owe me much. 8. Do you still owe us some ? 
9. "We owe you a hundred dollars. 10. What art thou to do to- 
morrow ? 11. I am to write many letters. 12. What is your little 
brother to do ? 13. He is to go to school. 14. Has the cook bought 
some cabbages? 15. He has bought some cabbages and some let- 
tuce. 16. Why is that scholar so joyous ? 17. He is joyous be- 
cause he knows his lesson well. 18. Do you touch that dog ? 19. 
I do not touch him. 20. Does America touch England ? 21. It 
does not touch it. 22. That man owes more money than you owe. ~ 

23. That maid-servant looks cunning ; is she as cunning a3 she > 
appears ? 24. She is more cunning than she appears. 25. That 
man looks crazy ; is he as crazy as he appears ? 26. He is less 
crazy than he appears. 27. My friend is very sick ; he has a ma- 
lignant fever. 28. What is the matter with that man ? 29. He 
is near-sighted. 30. How many words have you learned ? 31.1 
have learned all the words of this page. 32. Is it always good 
traveling in summer ? 33. It is always better traveling in sum- 
mer than in winter. 34. Is that lady as charming as she appears ? 
35. She is more charming than she appears. 36. Will that gentle- 



* Totialier, meaning to border upon, takes d before its object. 

10 



218 



THE SIXTY-SECOXD LESSON. 



man want coffee with milk or coffee -without milk ? 37. He will 
want some without milk. 38. What will you want to-morrow at 
school ? 39. We shall want some books, some paper, some pens, 
and some ink. 40. Those gentlemen will want some coffee with 
milk, and some buckwheat cakes with butter and syrup. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Paris is not more beautiful than London; is it ? 2. Yes, 
Paris is the most beautiful city in (de) Europe. 3. Have you re- 
cited your lesson in (de) French ? 4. Yes, I have recited it, and 
Charles has recited his also. 5. How T many mistakes did you make ? 
6. I made only one, but Charles made three. 7. He is not studious. 
8. Not (pas) always ; but sometimes he recites his lesson well. 

9. Show me (faites-moi voir) your exercise. 10. I have put it in 
my copy-book. 11. Have you written (ecrii) it without a mistake ? 
12. No, Mr. R. found in it two or three small mistakes. • 13. I have 
not yet written my exercise ; I have a mind to go and write it now. 
14. Why have you not yet done it ? 15. I have not had the time. 
16. All my lessons are recited and I have nothing to do. 17. Go 
and write your exercise, and after that (ensuite) we will go to the 
city. 18. Wait for me, I shall not be long. 19. Where do you go 
Sundays ? 20. I go to church Sundays, and I go to school Mon- 
days and the other days of the week. 21. Do you go to school 
Saturdays ? 22. There is no school Saturdays. 

23. Will you see Mr. P. soon ? 24. I shall see him to-morrow 
in the country at Mr. A.'s, where we are both (tous deux) going. 

25. ' Do me the pleasure to give him a note which I am writing him. 

26. I will do it with much pleasure. 27. It is necessary to give it 
to me this evening, for (car) I must (il me faudra) set out to-mor- 
row morning. 28. You must have a horse ; take mine, if you wish. 
29. Thank you, I have one already. 30. Well, when you have need 
of one, mine is at your service. 31. You are very good. 



62. — SOIXANTE-DEUXIfiME LEQON. 

NAMES OP COUNTEIES. 
1. The future of pouvoir, to be able, is irregular. 
Je pourrai, tu pourras, ilpcmrra^ nous pourrons, vous pourres, ils pourront, 
I shall be able, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 

To pray. I pray you. Trier. Je vous prie. 

To freeze. To produce. Geler. Produire (as conduire, Les. 34). 

2. Tie names of countries tako the article, and those ending in e are, with few excep- 
tions, feminine. 



12 6 4 6 35 2212 

pri-er, ge-le?% pro-duir< 



THE SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 



219 



France. 

Switzerland. 

Russia. 

Scotland. 



Turkey. 



England. 

Spain. 

Prussia. 

Ireland. 

Italy. 

Greece. 



La France. 
La Suisse. 
La Russie. 
IJPcosse. 
La Suede. 
La Turquie. 



L'Angleterre. 

Y? Espagne. 
La Prusse. 
12 Irlande. 
Vltalie. 
La Grece. 



3. Those of other terminations are generally masculine.* 



Denmark. Portugal. 
Canada. Peru. 

Europe touches Asia. 

Africa does not touch America. 

Sweden produces iron. 

I set out to-morrow for France, Swe- 
den, and Denmark. 



Le Panemark. Le Portugal. 

Le Canada. Le Perou. 
L'Europe touche a UAsie. 
JjAfrique ne touche pas a, L'Amerique. 
La Suede produit du fer. 
Je pars demain pour la France, la 

Suede et le Danemark. 



4. At, in, to, before names of countries, is en, from is always de ; and after these prep- 
ositions (en, de), feminine names of countries, when without an adjective, omit the article.t 
We are going to Germany. Nous allons en Allemagne. 

It freezes much in Russia. II gele beaucoup en Russie. 

They come from Spain. lis viennent d'Espagne. 

5. Before some masculine names of countries (mostly distant ones) au du are used in- 
stead of dde, as Je vais au Perou; je vais au Canada; je mens du Japon; je reviews 
du Danemark. 

6. Names of cities do not take the article. 

Paris is more beautiful than London. Paris est plus beau que Londres. 

He goes to Paris. II va a Paris. 

New York is larger than Boston. New York est plus grand que Boston. 

He comes from Boston. II vient de Boston. 

7. Those, however, derived from common nouns, or having an adjective or its equiva- 
lent for part of the name, take the article. 

He dwells at (or in) Havre. II demeure au Havre.% 

He comes from New Orleans. II vient de la JVouvelle- Orleans. 

8. In, after a superlative, and equivalent to of, is rendered by de. 

He is the richest man in our village. C'est l'homme le plus riche de notre 

village. 

France is the finest country in Europe. La France est le plus beau pays de 

FEurope. 

9. After mal, as we have seen, d is used to denote the part affected, de the name of the 
ailment. 

I have sore eyes. J'ai mal aus eux. 

He has a pain in the back. II a mal au dos. 

How is your headache ? Comment est votre mal de tete ? 

How comes on your earache ? Comment va votre mal d'oreille ? 



* The two names of countries, Mexique and Bengals, are the only ones which are mas- 
culine with a feminine termination. 

t .En Portugal, en Danemark, also are generally used. 
X Ha vre formerly meant harbor. 

3 2212 5 1 22 13 22 5 15~ 32 3 227 12 1 13 2S i! 7 

France Suisse. Es-pagne, Bus-sie, Prusse, 33-cosse, Ir-lande, Suede, I-ta-lie, Tur-kie, Grece, 

1 1 16 22 1 1 1 1 5 18 1 13 1 12 15 1 16 5 3 

Dane-mark, Por-tu-gal, Ca-na-da, Pe-rou, A-zie, Af-rike, Londres, Havre, Or-le-ans. 



220 



THE SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 



1. II gele plus en Eussie qu'en Angleterre. 2. L'Espagne et le 
Portugal produisent du vin. 3. Pourrez-vous aller en Suede Pete 
prochain ? 4. Je pourrai y aller. 5. Pourrons-nous aller en Prusse ? 
6. Oui, et nous pourrons aussi aller en Ecosse et en Ir.lande. 7. 
Gele-t-il plus en Suede qu'en Italie ? 8. Oui, il ne gele pas beau- 
coup en Italie. 9. La Turquie est-elle plus grande que la Grece? 
10. Oui, et la Prusse est plus grande que la Suisse. 11. Allez-vous 
au Canada? 12. Non, je vais en Portugal. 13. Le Canada pro- 
duit-il du ble ? 14. Oui, le Canada produit du Lie, et le Perou 
produit de Tor. 15. L'Asie touche-t-elle k l'Afrique? 16. Oui, elle 
y touche. 17. L'Asie est-elle plus grande que l'Afrique? 18. Oui, 
et l'Amerique est plus grande que l'Asie. 19. Allez-vous en Alle- 
magne f 20. Non, je vais a Londres et au Havre. 21. Venez-vous 
de Marseille? 22. Non, jeviens de la Nouvelle-Orleans. 23. Mes 
enfants, ne toucliez pas a mes papiers ni aux fruits. 

1. Will the workmen be able to do their work to-morrow? 2. 
No, they will not be able to do it this week. 3. Wilt thou be able 
to learn thy lesson well ? 4. Yes, sir, and my brother will also be 
able to learn his well. 5. Take away this child, I pray you. 6. 
Take away this table also. 7. Is not that horse's neck too short? 
8. Yes, his neck is too short, and his legs are too short also. 9. Do 
you wish for some syrup ? 10. Yes, sir, if you please. 11. Do those 
trees produce any thing? 12. Yes, sir, they produce beautiful fruit. 
13. Is not France the most beautiful country in Europe ? 14. Yes, 
and Kussia is the largest country in Europe. 15. Is not London 
larger than Paris ? 16. Yes, London is the largest city in the world. 
17. Is not New York larger than New Orleans? 18. Yes, New 
York is the largest city in America. 

19. Does Scotland touch Ireland? 20. No, Scotland touches 
England, but it does not touch Ireland. 21. When will you be 
able to go to Europe ? 22. I shall be able to go there when I have 
a mind. 23. Will you be able to go to Italy this summer ? 24. I 
shall be able to go to Italy, to Turkey, and to Greece. 25. Do you 
dwell in Paris ? 26. No, I dwell in Havre. 27. When will you go 
to New Orleans ? 28. I shall go there when I can. 29. Is your 
friend from Baltimore ? 30. No, he is from New Orleans. 31. Do 
you dine at the general's to-day ? 32. No, I dine at my friend's ; 
but I shall breakfast at the general's to-morrow. 33. Is there a 



r 



THE SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 221 

light in your room'? 34. No, there is none. 35. That man culti- 
vates (cultive) the earth. 36. There was coffee with milk at break- 
fast, and there will be coffee without milk at dinner. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is not that man rich? 2. Yes, he is richer than you think. 
3. What do those children wish for ? 4. They wish for buckwheat 
cakes with butter and syrup. 5. Is there a church in this village ? 
6. Yes, there are two. 7. Is there some wine at the bottom (au 
fond) of that barrel ? 8. There is a little. 9. Is that man as sick 
as he thinks % 10. He is not so sick as he thinks>' 11. When will 
you learn your lesson 1 12. I shall learn it when I can. 

13. How is the weather ? 14. It is fine weather, but a little 
cold. 15. That is nothing, if it is not damp. 16. No, it is dry 
weather. 17. It is good walking when it is cold. 18. To-day it 
has been very windy (beau-coup de vent) and very dusty. 19. Go 
and write your exercise, and we will go to the city. 20. Come with 
me. 21. Why, have you need of me ? 22. No, I can write it with- . 
out you, but I like better to have company. 23. You can write it 
better without me, and I want (fai besoin) to go out a little. 24. 
Go, if you wish, but do not set out without me. 25. No, I intend *• 
to come for you (vous chercher). 26. I shall be in the room ; re- 
turn soon. 

27. Are those ladies as amiable as they appear ? 28. They are 
more amiable than they appear. 29. How many windows are there 
in your room? 30. There are four. 31. Will you be at home to- * 
morrow 1 32. No, sir, I am to go to the country. 



63.— SOIXANTE-TROISIEME LEQON. 

MONTHS, DATES, ETC. 
To pass. To gather. Passer. Cueillir. 

1. Cueillir has its present and future like the first conjugation. 
Do you gather pears and plums ? Cueillez-vous des poires et des prunes? 

I gather apples and pears. Je cueille des pommes et des poires. 

Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, il cueillera, nous cueillerons, vous cueillerez, Us cueilleront, 
I shall gather, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 
We shall gather flowers. Kous cueillerons des fleurs. 

The theater. Ilusic. Le theatre. La musique. 

The opera. A passion. V opera. Une passion. 

Are you going to the theater (play) ? Allez-vous au theatre (spectacle) ? 
2. Spectators who go for amusement would say au spectacle rather than au theatre. 



2 6 9 12 9 6 5 2 15 5 1 2 1221 

pas-ser, czieil-lir, cweille-rai, t/ie-atre, o-pe-ra, pas-sion. 



222 



THE SIXTY-THIRD LESSOX. 



3. "When parce que, and other compound words ending in que, are repeated in a sec- 
ond clause, que only is used. 

That man falls because lie is drunk, Cet homme tombe parce qu'il est ivre, 

and because it is slippery. et quW fait glissant. 

While you were breakfasting, and while Pendant que vous dejeuniez, et que 

you were reading, I studied. vous lisiez, j'etudiais. 

4. Que is used in the same way also for comme, quand, and si, repeated in a second clause. 
As it is late, and as he is not here, we Comme il est tard, et qxCW. n'est pas ici, 

will go home. nous irons chez nous. 

When one is young, and when one is in Quand on est jeune, et que l'on est en 

good health, he ought to be happy. bonne sante, on doit etre heureux. 

5. The names of the months are masculine. 



January. 
March. 



July. 

September. 
November. 



February. 

April. 

June. 

August. 

October. 

December. 



Janvier. 

Mars. 

Mai. 

Juillet. 

Septcmbre. 

JVovembre. 



Fevrier. 

Avril. 

Juin. 

Aout. 

Octobre. 

Decembre. 



What day of the month is it to-day ' 

It is the second. 
It is the third. 



j Quel jour du mois est-ce aujourd'hui? 
(Quel quantieme est-ce aujourd'hui? 
j C'est le deux. 
} Nous sommes au deux. 
C'est le trois. 

6. The French use the cardinal numbers with all the days of the month except the 
first, and in dates generally employ figures. 

It is the third. It is the fourth. C'est le trois. C'est le quatre. 

In store, stored. In the store. En magasin. Dans le magasin. 

7. Dans has a sense precise, en more vague. Thus dans is always used with an article 
or determinative adjective ; en generally without one. 



I have some flour in that store. 

I have some in store (stored). 

He is in the prison. 

He is in prison (imprisoned). 

Philadelphia, December 15, 1861. 

Late. He dines late. 

Before dining. 

He breakfasts earlier than I. 



J'ai do la farine dans ce magasin. 
J'en ai en magasin. 
II est dans la prison. 
II est en prison. 

Philadelphie, le 15 decembre, 1861. 
Tard. II dine tard. 
Avant de diner (avant takes de bef. inf.). 
II dejeune de meilleure heure que moi. 



1. Yotre cousin lit-il plus que vous °l 2. Oui, pendant que j'er 
cris et que j'etudie, il lit. 3. Avez-vous du cidre? 4. J'en ai 
beaucoup en baril. 5. N'y en a-t-il pas dans ce baril-ci'? 6. II y 
en a un peu. 7. Dejeunez-vous de meilleure heure que moi % 8. 
Oui, mais je dejeune plus tard que notre voisin. 9. New York, le 

3 126 5 12 5 1 1 12 6 22 14 22 12 5 18 5 3 15 15 15 3 

jan-vier, fe-vrier, mars, a-vril, mai, juin, iui-llet, aoui, sep-tembre, oc-tobre, no-vembr^, 
53 -3 m a 
de-cembre, kan-tiume, tare?. 



THE SIXTY-THIRD LESSON. 



223 



5 Janvier, 1859. 10. J'ai recu votre lettre chi dix du mois dernier. 
11. Boston, 12 Fevrier, 1880. 12. Quel jour du mois est-ce au- 
jourd'hui? 13. C'est le cinq. 14. Quel quantieme du mois est-ce 
aujourd'hui? 15. C'est le sept. 16. JSTouvelle-Orleans, 18 Mars, 
1856. 17. Ou passez-vous Pete? 18. Je le passe a la campagne. 
19. Qu'est-ce que vos voisins cueillent? 20. lis cueillent des fruits, 
et cette petite fiile cueille des fleurs. 21. Aimez-vous la musique? 
22. Oui, c'est ma passion. 23. Allez-vous au spectacle (au thea- 
tre) ? 24. Oui, je vais a l'opera. 25. Quand cueillerez-vous vos 
pommes ? 26. Je les cueillerai au mois d'octobre.^" 27. Je ne veux 
pas ecrire mon theme a present. 28. Vous ne devez pas dire^e veux 
et je ne veux pas. 

1. Is your sister going to the opera ? 2. She is going there ; I 
am going also to the play, but to another theater. 3. What flowers 
art thou gathering'? 4. I am gathering roses and violets. 5. 
Wilt thou gather thy fruit to-day ? 6.1 shall not gather mine, but 
my brother will gather his, and our neighbors will gather theirs. 
7. Do you pass the month of April here % 8. Yes, sir, but we shall 
pass the month of May in the country, and our neighbors will pass 
it there also. 9. March, April, and May are the months of spring, 
and June, July, and August are the months of summer. 10. I pre- 
fer September, October, and November to the months of winter. 11. 
Does your sister like music I 12. She likes it much ; it is her pas- 
sion. 13. Lend me this book, I pray you. 14. Very willingly, sir. 

15. Do you like better to go to" the French theater than to go 
to the opera ? 16.1 like better to go to the opera. 17. When will 
you gather your fruit? 18. I shall gather it in autumn. 19. Those 
' little boys fall often because it has frozen much, and because it is 
slippery. 20. That man is afraid because he has enemies, and be- 
cause he has no gun. 21. Why is that man discontented 1 22. 
He is discontented because he has the headache, and his teeth pain 
him. 23. Do you breakfast late? 24. No, sir, I breakfast earlier 
than you. 25. Is there company at your house to-day? 26. There 
is none to-day, but there will be some to-morrow. 27. Will you 
please show me your letter? 28. I am quite willing. 29. I will 
not write my exercise now. 30. Children ought not to say, I will 
and I will not. 31. Some one has taken away my books. 



224 



THE SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I have a fancy to go and work a little in the garden. 2. 

What do you wish to do there? 3. I wish to dig up (becher) a 
^square [un carre) in order to put a few cabbages in it. 4. I will go 

with you ; I like to work (a) the ground sometimes. 5. I have only 

one spade. 6. Send your boy to borrow that of the neighbor. 7. 

Yes, he has one. 8. Charles, go to Mr. B.'s and ask him [demandez 
\ lui) to lend me his spade, if he has no use for it, until (jusqiCa) 

this evening. 9. Very well, sir; have you not need of a hoe also? 

10. Certainly (sans doute) ; but we have one : where is it? 11. It 

is at Mr. B.'s ; he borrowed it yesterday morning. 12. Well, bring 

it if he has no need of it. 
4- 13. Do you often work in the garden ? 14. The work which I 

do there is not extraordinary ; I leave that to Charles. 15. This 
^ lettuce looks good (a bonne mine). 16. Yes, it is sufficiently fine. 

17. I admire your garden ; it is very pretty. It is not very large. 

18. Sufficiently for you ; you have no need of one very large ; you 
keep (tenez) it very clean. 19. It is Charles who does all that ; it 
is his work. 20. He does not look lazy. 21. No, he is a good fel- 
low, and he has taste for work. 22. I see him coming (yenir) with 
the tools ; he did not stay long. 23. Well, gentlemen, take each 

^ one the tool which you wish, and let us see what you are going to 
do. 24. Give them to us. 25. I take the hoe ; you are going to 
see something fine. 26. I like better to work alone. 27. As you 
please (comme il vous plaira), we can do this without you. 



64.— SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 

VEEB3 IN GER, CER, TIER, AKD IER. 
To seat, seating, seated. Asseoir, asseyant, assis, e. 

J'assieds, tu assieds, il assied, nous asseyons, vous asseyez, Us asseyent, 
I seat, thou seatest, he seats, we seat, you seat, they seat. 

Will you seat? I shall seat. Assierez-vous ? J'assierai* 

To place, placing, placed. Placer, plagant, place. 

To eat. To travel. Manger. Voyager. 

1. Verbs in ger insert a silent e after the g, and verbs in cer a cedilla under the c, in all 
terminations before a and o. 

Je manga, tu manges, il mange, nous mangnons, vous mangez, Us mangent, 
I eat, thou eatest, he eats, we eat, you eat, they eat. 

Je voyagmis, tu voyagsais, il voyagvait, nous voyagions, vous voyagiez, Us voyagsaient, 
I traveled, thou traveledst, he traveled, we traveled, you traveled, they traveled. 

* The forms asseyerai and assoirai are also used in the future. 

1 20 1 5 103 1 12 1 12 5 1 XI 5 1 5 12 21 1 5 12 6 1 712 1 12 5 6 

as-seoir. as-se-van£, as-sis, assieds, as-siec?, as-se-von-s, a.s-se-yes, as-sejent, as-si-e-rai, 

1 6 1 3 1 6 3 6 20121 6 3 2D 121 7 

pla-cer, pla-cantf, pla-ce, man-ger, vo-ya-ge/% mange, vo-ya-geais. 



THE SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



225 



Do you place ? We place. Placez-vous ? Nous plaqons. 

2. Yerbs in uer take a dijeresis over the i in the first and second person plural of the 
imperfect, as nous joulons. vous jouiez, we played, you played. Verbs in ier double the i 
in the same persons, as nous eiudiions, vous etudiiez* we studied, you studied. 

To suffer, suffering, suffered. Souffrir, souffrant, souffert, e. 

To cover, covering, covered. Couvrir, couvrant, couvert, e. 

3. Souffrir, couvrir, and their compounds, are varied like ouvrir (Lesson 55). 
The sky, heaven. Each. Le del (pi. cieux). Chague, chacun. 
A cloud. Out of. Un image. Ilors. 

An instrument. A. flute. Un instrument. Une flute. 

A violin. Practice. Un violon. La pratique. 

To play. To belong to. Jouer. ApparUnir a, etrc a. 

4. Jouer takes de before the name of the instrument, and d before the game. 

I play the violin, you play the flute. Je joue violon, vous jouez de la flute. 
To play ball. To play cards. Jouer d la balle. Jouer aux cartes. 

That violin belongs to my brother. Ce violon appartient (est) a mon frere. 
It belongs to him. II lui appartient (il est a lui). 

Ready. Ready for dinner. Pret. Pret poilr le diner. 

5. Pret takes pour before a noun, d before an infinitive. 
He is ready to dine. II est pret a diner. 

It requires much practice to speak II faut beaucoup de pratique pour 
French. parler francais. 

6. FdcJie meaning sorry takes de before a noun, meaning angry it takes contre. It 
takes de before the infinitive. 

I am sorry for your misfortune. Je suis fache de votre malheur. 

He is angry at me. II est fache contre moi. 

I am very sorry to lose that. Je suis bien fache de perdre cela. 

1. CJiaque is an adjective, and always used with a noun ; chacun is a pronoun, and al- 
ways used without one. 

Each scholar will come, and each one Chaque eleve viendra, et chacun aura 
will have his lesson ready. sa lecon prete. 

8. All adjectives may be placed after their nouns when they are qualified by adverbs. 
He has salt as fine as this. II a du sel aussi fin que celui-ci. 

A very good book. Un livre bien bon. 

1. Ou asseyez- vous cet enfant ? 2. Je l'assieds sur cette chaise. 
3. Oii le maitre plagait-il les enfants? 4. II les placait sur les 
bancs. 5. Nous placons ici les enfants. G. J'ai les plumes que vous 
avez placees sur la table. 7. Voyagez-vous plus que nous ? 8. Non, 
monsieur, je voyage moins que vous. 9. Votre frere voyageait-il 
Pete passe pendant qu'il etait au Canada ? 10. II voyageait toujours. 

* This, however, is strictly according to the rule for forming the imperfect (Lesson 50). 

18 12 18 3 18 7 18 12 18 3 18 7 12 5 12 10 1 1 24 

sou/-frir, sou/-fran£, sou/-ferrf, cou-vrir, cou-vran& cou-vertf, ciel, cieux, chak<?, cha-cun, 

22 1 16 14 22 3 23 12 15 21 1 12 18 6 1 l 4 12 1 5 

nu-ag<?, hors, ins-tru-men£, flute, vi-o-lon, pra-tike, jou-e/', ap-par-te-nir, carte, pretf. 

10* 



226 



THE SIXTY-FOURTH LESSOX. 



11. Ne souffrez-vous pas du froid ? 12. Je n'en soufire pas. 13. Ce 
\ pauvre hornme n'a-t-il pas souffert du froid? 14. II en a bien souffert. 
15. De quoi couvrez-vous votre livre ? 167" Je le couvre de papier. 

17. De quoi le domestique a-t-il couvert les pommes de terre ? 18. 
II les a couvertes de terre. 19. Que mangez-vous ? 20. Nous man- 
geons du fruit. 21. Mes papiers sont hors de leur place. 22. Ce 
pauvre enfant pleure de chagrin. 23. N'y a-t-il pas un nuage an 
ciel? 24. II yen a plusieurs. 25. De quels instruments jouez- 
vous? 26. Nous jouons du violon et de la flute. 27. Ces instru- 
ments vous appartiennent-ils (sont-ils a vous) ? 28. Non, ils ap- 
partiennent (sont) au maitre. 29. A qui (est cette flute) cette flute 
appartient-elle? 

1. Is your task well done? 2. It is well done. 3. At (de) 
what is that lady laughing ? 4. She is laughing at those children. 
5. Are there not some clouds in the sky ? 6. Yes, the sky is cov- 
ered with clouds. 7. Has each scholar his task? 8. Each one has 
it all (toute) ready. 9. To whom does that instrument belong? 
10. It belonged to the musician formerly (autrefois), but now it is 
mine. 11/ Is the barber going up to his room? 12. He is going 
up there. 13. Were you playing on the flute while we were study- 
ing ? 14. I was playing on the flute, and my brothers were playing 
on the violin. 15. Has each scholar his book? 16. Yes, sir, and 
each one studies well. 17. Are not your books out of their place ? 

18. My books are out of their place, and my papers also. 

19. Did you eat much fruit when you dwelt in the country? 
20. I did not eat much because I had not much. 21. Were you 
traveling last summer while I was going to school ? 22. I traveled 
in the month of August. 23. Where will you seat that child ? 24. 
„ I will seat him here in (sur) this chair. 25. That physician has 
much practice. 26. Are not December, January, and February the 
months of winter ? 27. Yes, and March, April, and May are the 
months of spring. 28. June, July, and August also are the months 
of summer, and September, October, and November are the months 
- of autumn. 29. Is that child weeping from rage (rage) ? 30. No, 
sir, he is weeping from sorrow, because he has made some spots on 
my paper. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Where is Joseph ? I have not seen him this morning. 2. He 



THE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



227 



is sleeping still. The lazy one ! Go and call (appeler) him. 3. I 
have already called (appele) him, but he did not answer me. 4. He 
did not hear you ; did you open the door ? 5. No ; I am going to 
open it, and call him again. 6. Joseph, your father calls (appelle) 
you ; come forthwith : what are you doing in bed (au lit) ? 7. I am 
sleeping ; it is good sleeping (il fait bon dormir) in the morning. 
8. Yes, but it is not good sleeping all day (toute la journee). 9. Is 
it day already? 10. Is it day! do you not see the sun? 11. Is^ 
it not the moon ? 12. Stay in bed, if you will ; your father will 
come and call you, and make you know the difference (difference) 
that there is between (entre) the sun and the moon. 13. No, thank 
you ; I see well that it is the sun. 14. Tell (a) my father that I am 
coming. 

15. How is the weather out [dehors) ? 16. It is very agreeable 
weather. 17. Did it rain (a-t-il plu) during the night? 18. No^ 
sir, it was moonlight all night. 19. Open the window ; it is a little 
dark in this room. 20. Will you have some fire % 21. No, it is too 
warm. 22. Had you finished your task when your father returned % 
23. I had finished it. 



65. — SOIXANTE-CINQLTEME LEQON. 

FUTUKE PEEFECT TENSE. 

1. The future perfect tense is formed in French as in English, by joining the past 
participles to the future of the auxiliary: as, 

J'aurai eu, tu auras eu, il aura eu, nous aurons eu, vous aures eu, Us auront eu, 
I shall have had, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 
Je serai venu, tu seras venu, il sera venu, nous serons xenus, vous serez venus, 
I shall have come, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., 

Us seront venus, they will have come. 

When I shall have received my money Quand/awrai recu mon argent, je vous 
I will pay you for this horse. paierai ce cheval. 

When he shall have breakfasted, he Quand il aura dejeune, il sortira. 
will go out. 

You will have learned your lesson. Vous aurez appris votre lecon. 
We shall have gone home. Nous serons alles chez nous. 

They will have returned. lis seront revenus. 

To consent. To move. Consentir (a, bef. inf.). Remuer, mou- 

wir.* 

Je metis, tumeus, ilmeut, nous mouvons, vous mowves, Us meuvent, 
I move, thou movest, he moves, we move, you move, they move. 



* Mouvoir means to set in motion ; se mouvoir, to be in motion ; deloger and. demeria- 
ger mean to change lodgings. 



21 3 3 2 4 22 6 18 20 9 9 18 21 18 6 9 

con-sen-tir, re-mu-er, mou-voir, meus, mexit. mou-vons, mou-ves, meuve«i. 



228 



THE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



I consent to sell you my horse. Je consens a vous vendre mon cheval. 

To acquire. Acquired. Acquerir. Acquis, e. 

J'acquiers, ho acquiers, il acquiert, nous acquerons, vous acquerez, Us aequierent, 
I acquire, thou acquirest, he acquires, we acquire, you acquire, they acquire. 

The merchant acquires credit. Le marchand acquiert du credit. 

To die. Died. Mourir (etre for auxiliary). Mort, e. 

Je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, Us meurent, 
I die, thou diest, he dies, we die, you die, they die. 



The poor sometimes die of hunger. 



The carpenters are moving the school 

benches. 
You have acquired many friends. 
The sick man died this morning. 
The ball. A sickness, disease. 
The lot. Anger. 
That towel. Peace. 
War. A just war. 
During. Without doubt, certainly. 

2. Durani implies the whole time through ; pendant, some period during that time 



Les pauvres meurent quelquefois de 
faim. 

Les charpentiers meuvent les bancs de 
l'ecole. 

Vous avez acquis beaucoup d'amis. 
Le malade est mort ce matin. 
Le bed. Une maladie. 
Le sort. La colere. 
Cet esstiie-main. La paix. 
La guerre. Une guerre juste. 
Durant. Bans doute. 



The army will stay in Italy during the 
winter. 

They gained a battle during the win- 
ter. 

Hoes the barber appear angry ? 
He appears so. 



L'armee restera en Italie durant 1'b.i- 
ver. 

Elle a gagne une bataille pendant l'hi- 
ver. 

Le barbier parait-il fache ? 
II le parait. 



8. The pronoun le in French, like so in English, is often used in reference to a quality 
or circumstance previously mentioned. It may be taken as a general rule that when so of 
this kind is expressed, or can be understood in English, le is to be used in French. 

Does she seem angry still ? Parait-elle encore fachee ? 

She seems so. Elle le parait. 

4. When Reused in this way represents an adjective, or a noun used adjectively, it is in- 
variable; but when it represents a noun, or an adjective used as a noun, it agrees with it in 
gender and number. 



Madam, are you sick ? I am. 
Are you the sick person ? I am. 
Are you ministers ? We are. 
Are you the ministers of the queen ? 
We are. 



Madame, etes-vous malade ? Je le* suis. 
Etes-vous la malade ? Je la* suis. 
Etes-vous ministres? Nous le* sommes. 
Etes-vous les ministres de la reine ? 
Nous les * sommes. 



* In the first of these four answers, le is invariable because it refers to an adjective, and 
in the third because it refers to a noun used adjectively ; in the second it agrees because it 
refers to an adjective used as a noun, and in the fourth, because it refers to a noun. 



1 6 12 1 12 1 157 1 127 1 5 21 1 12 7 13 12 16 11 12 

ac-ke-rir, ac-kis, ac-kiers, ac-kier£, ac-ke-rons, aa-kVarent. mou-rir, mor£, meurs, meur#, 

18 21 18 6 12 111 13 16 15 7 5 2512 14 7 7 22 3 

mou-rons, mou-res, meurent, bal, ma-la-die, sor#, co-lere, es-sui-main, pa-ice, guerre, du-ran£ 



THE SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



229 



1. Consentez-vous a me donner ces essuie-mains ? 2. Je con- 
sens a vous les donner. 3. Les charpentiers peuvent-ils mouvoir 
cette maison ? 4. lis ne le peuvent pas. 5. Acquerez-vous beau- 
coup d' argent % 6. Je n'en acquiers pas beaucoup. 7. Avez-vous 
acquis des amis ? 8. Nous en avons acquis quelques-uns. 9. Les 
pauvres meurent-ils quelquefois de froid ? 10. Quelques-uns meu- 
rent de froid en hiver. 11. Preferez-vous jamais la guerre a la 
paix? 12. Non, je prefere toujours la paix a la guerre. 13. Voy- 
agerez-vous durant tout cemois? 14. Je voyagerai quelques jours 
seulement pendant l'ete. 15. Allez-vous au balce soir? 16. Non, 
monsieur, je vais au spectacle et ma soeur va au bal. 17. Ce petit 
garcon est-il en colere contre quelqu'un ? 18. II est en colere 
contre son frere. 19. N'allez pas dans la ville ; la maladie y est. 
20. Son sort est d'etre malheureux.^21. Placons le malade sur 
cette chaise et asseyez l'enfant sur celle-la. 22. Sa maladie est 
longue. 23. Le medecin viendra sans doute ici ce soir. 24. Le 
voisin est mort hier ; et son fils est mort ce matin. 

1. Can the servants move that cask? 2. They can move it 
easily. 3. Does that man acquire credit ? 4. He acquires credit 
and profit. 5. Has he acquired money % 6. He has acquired 
money and friends. 7. Do the poor often die of hunger ? 8. They 
often die of hunger in Ireland, and in (dans) other countries op' 
Europe. 9. Do some die of cold ? 10. Some die of cold in winter. 
11. He who has no courage dies a thousand times. 12. Are you 
going to the ball ? 13. No ; I am going to the theater, and my 
cousin is going to the ball. 14. Did you acquire much profit while ^ 
you dwelt in the city? 15. I did not acquire much. 16. Does 
anger move (porte) the soldier to that action (action) ? 17. Yes, - 
sir, anger moves him to it. 18. Is your friend sick ? 19. Yes, 
and his disease is dangerous (dangerense). 20. Do you wish for 
towels or napkins ? 21. I wish for towels. 

22. Will your brother study much? 23. Without doubt he 
will learn his lessons well. 24. There are some persons who prefer 
war to peace. 25. Does that scholar consent to sell his books 1 
26. He consents to sell them. 27. Has that workman worked 
during all the week % 28. He has worked all this month. 29. 
Do you like better to play cards than to play ball? 30. No; I 
prefer to play ball. 31. When I shall have finished my task, I will 



230 



THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



play on the violin. 32. The scholar will have learned his lesson 
when the master comes. 33. Will you have read that book when 
I shall have need of it ? 34. We shall have read it. 35. The 
scholars will have written their exercises when the master comes. 
36. Madam, are you French? 37. I am. 38. Are you the sister 
of the Frenchman ? 39. I am. 40. Gentlemen, are you soldiers % 
41. We are. 42. Are you the soldiers of the king? 43. We are. 
44. When did the general die ? 45. He died this morning. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. It is (il fait) very agreeable in the country at present ; there 
are many persons who are going there. 2. Yes, in summer the 
country is much more agreeable than the city. 3. The city is sad 
now ; there are no amusements (amusements) ; every body is going 
to the country in order to pass the summer there. 4. The theater 
is shut, is it not? 5. Yes; I believe (je crois) that I have seen 
S (avoir vu) the announcement (Pannonce) of a new theater which 
they are going to open next autumn. 6. I have not seen it, but I 
have been told that there will be one. 

7. Do you often go to the theater ? 8. No ; I go there but 
rarely (raremenf), but I go sufficiently often to the opera. 9. You 
love music. 10. It is my passion ; there is nothing that I love so 

^much. 11. Music is a thing very agreeable ; but every body has not 
so much taste as you. 12. Do you not prefer the opera to the 

' French theater? 13. I love them both (tous deux) sufficiently ; but 
hardly know (ne sais guere) which I prefer. 14. How ! you must 
not (il ne faut pas) say that. 15. I like a good play (piece) better 

' than a bad opera. 16. It is true that there is nothing more dis- 
agreeable (desagreable) to. hear than bad music. 17. Wilt thou 
have written thy exercise wEen tie master comes? 18. I shall 
have written it. 19. Are you English ? 20. Iam. 21. Are you 
the sister of Charles ? 22. I am. 23. Are you the children of our 
neighbor? 24. We are. 



66.— SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LEQON 

IRREGULAR FUTURES. 



To hope. An action. 
To fall to, become due. Fallen to. 
Your note falls due to-day. 
With all his might. Together. 
Champagne wine. -Life, living. 



Esperer. TJne action. 
E choir (defective). Echu. 
Yotre billet cchoit aujourd'hui. 
Ee toute sa force. Ensemble. 
Du vin de champagne. La vie. 



5 5 6 1 T2 21 5 20 5 22 16 3 3 3 1 13 

es-pe-rer, ac-tion, e-choir, e-chu, force, en-semble, eham-pagne, vie. 



THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



231 



Quite, perfectly. Quite charming. Tout afait. Tout a fait charmant. 
It is a note fallen due yesterday. C'est un billet echu depuis hier. 

1. De, like d, before the infinitive, is to be repeated before every verb depending on the 
same word or phrase. 

He refuses to eat and drink. II refuse de manger et de boire. 

They have forgotten to read and write. lis ont oublie de lire et cfecrire. 
It is he. It is not she. C'est lui. Ce n'est pas elle. 

2. In phrases like these, where ce is the subject, lui, elle, eux, elles, are not to be used 
in the predicate in reference to animals and things, but le, la, les, must then be employed. 
Is that your book ? Yes, it is. Est-ce la votre livre ? Oui, ce Z'est. 
Are those your books ? They are. Sont-ce la vos livres ? Ce les sont. 
Are those your cousins ? They are. Sont-ce la vos cousines ? Ce sont elles. 
Are those the soldiers ? They are. Sont-ce la, les soldats ? Ce sont eux. 

3. The verb etre, with ce for its subject, is plural only when followed by the third per- 
son plural. 

It is we. It is you. It is they. C'est nous. C'est vous. Ce sont eux. 

It is he and his brother. C'est lui et son frere. 

I hope that he will come. J'espere qu'il viendra. 

To be worth, being worth, been worth. Valoir, volant, valu. 
Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, nous talons, nous vales, Us valent, 

I am worth, thou art worth, he is worth, we are worth, you are worth, they are worth. 

The future o/taloir is irregular, thus : 
Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, il vaudra, nous vaudrons, vous vaudrez, Us vaudront, 
I shall be worth, thou wilt, etc., he will, etc., we shall, etc., you will, etc., they will, etc. 



4. The learner has now had all the irregular futures. They are these • 



INFINITIVE. 


FUTURE. 




INFINITIVE. 


FUTURE. 






Assierai, j 




Pleuvoir, 


Pleuvra, 


in Lesson 4S. 


Asseoir, 


Asseyerai, 


• in Lesson 64. 


Pouvoir, 


Fourrai, 


62. 




Assoirai, 




Savoii*, 


Saurai, 


58. 


Aller, 


Irai, 


" 4S. 


Tenir, 


Tiendrai, 


52. 


Avoir, 


Aurai, 


" 47. 


Valoir, 


Vaudrai, 


66. 


Cueillir, 


Cueillerai, 


63. 


Voir, 


Yerrai, 


54. 


Envoyer, 


Enverrai, 


48. 


Venir, 


Viendrai, 


52. 


Etre, 


Serai, 


47. 


Vouloir, 


Voudrai, 


61. 


Falloir, 


Faudra, 


" 57. 


and their compounds.* 




Faire, 


Ferai, 


54. 









The terminating letters are always the same without any exception, as given in Lesson 

47, RAI, RAS, RA, RONS, REZ, RONT. 

5. Acquerir, courir, and niourir, drop iin the future, and make 
J'acquerrai, tu acquerras, etc. Je eourrai, tu courras, etc. Je mourrai, tu mourras, etc. 
I shall acquire, etc. I shall run, etc. I shall die, etc. 

In these three futures the two r's must both be sounded. 

Fchoir, to fall to, also makes the future echerrai, etc. 
I hope that the good lot will fall to J'espere que le bon lot lui echerra. 
him. 

* Except prevoir and pourvoir, compounds of voir, which have in the future prevoirai 
and pouvvoiro.i. 

1 20 1 3 1 22 17 17 1 21 1 6 1 17 6 1 7 6 18 6 

va-loir, va-lan£, va-lu, vau«, vauf, va-lons, va-les, xslent, vau-drai, ac-ker-rai, cour-rai, 

18 6 5 7 1 

mour-rai, e-cher-ra. 



232 



THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



I shall die of this disease. 

You will acquire many friends. 

He will run with all his might. 

A bushel. To turn. 

His due. A bad cold. 

The brain. The breast. 

A cold in the head. 

A cold on the chest. 

A fever from a cold. 

Do not move that table. 



Je mourrai de cette maladie. 

Yous acquerrez beaucoup d'amis. 

II courra de toute sa force. 

Un boisseau. Tourner. 

Son du. Un mauvais rhume. 

Le cerveau. La poitrine. 

Un rhume de cerveau. 

Un rhume de poitrine. 

Une fievre de rhume. 

Xe remuez pas cette table. 



6. In phrases like the following, the measure of quantity, -which takes a in English, 
takes le in French. 



Butter is worth twenty-five cents a Le beurre vaut vingt-cinq sous la 



Flour Avill be worth ten dollars a barrel. La farine vaudra dix gourdes le baril. 

1. Ce petit garcon court de toute sa force parce qu'il a peur de 
ce chien. 2. Ces enfants sont toujours ensemble, ils viendront 
sans doute ici ensemble. 3. Qu'avez-vous offert a cet homme ? 4. 
Je lui ai offert du vin de champagne. 5. Esperez-vous qu'il 
pleuvra % 6. Nous esperons qu'il ne pleuvra pas. 7. Cet homme 
gagne-t-il sa vie a faire du beurre? 8. Non, il gagne sa vie a 
ecrire. 9. II fait beau temps. 10. Oui, il fait un temps tout a 
fait cbarmant. 11. Combien les pommes de terre valent-elles le 
boisseau? 12. Elles valent un dollar le boisseau. 13. Combien 
ce cheval peut-il valoir ? 14. II vaut cent dollars. 15. Vaudra-t- 
il un pen plus en hiver ? 16. Non, il vaudra beaucoup moins en 
Liver. 17. Pourquoi tournez-vous la tete? 18. Je latourne parce 
que je veux voir la personne qui vient. 19. Le commis vous don- 
nera-t-il votre du? 20. II nous donnera toujours notre du. 21. 
Votre billet echoit-il aujourd'hui? 22. Nbn, il echerra demain. 

1. Will you have written your letters when the boy comes? 
2. I shall have written them. 3. Do you hope to see your friends 
to-morrow? 4. I hope to see them this evening. 5. Will that 
workman do much work ? 6. Without doubt he will work with all 
his might. 7. How does he gain his living ? 8. He gains his liv- 
ing by making bricks. 9. You do not admire that lady; do you? 

10. Yes, madam, she is perfectly amiable and perfectly beautiful. 

11. How much may (pent) that ox be worth? 12. He is worth 



Apples are worth a dollar a bushel. 



Les pommes valent une piastre le bois- 



pound. 



livre. 



20 17 18 6 23 22 7 17 20 11 

bois-seau, tour-ner, du, rhume, cer-yeau, poi-trine. 



THE SIXTY-SIXTH LESSOX. 



233 



only fifty dollars now, but he will be worth sixty in the spring. 13. 
What will that man drink ? 14. He will drink some champagne 
wine. 

15. Why do you turn your head ? 16. I turn it because I hear 
a (du) noise. 17. Do you turn your head because one speaks to 
you? 18. No, sir, I turn it because I wish to see the man who is 
coming. 19. Does the shopkeeper give you your due? 20. Yes ; 
he always gives each one his due. 21. How much is wheat worth 
a bushel? 22. It is worth a dollar a bushel. 23. Have you a 
cold in the head, or a cold on the chest ? 24. I have a cold on the 
chest. 25. If you offer champagne wine to those men, will they 
drink it? 26. They will drink it. 27. What is the matter with 
that man ? 28. He has a bad cold in the head. 29. Do not move 
those chairs. 30. Do not move them. 31. Will those children go 
to school together ? 32. They will go there together. 33. Will 
you have dined when your friend comes ? 34. We shall have 
dined. 35. "We breakfast a little late, but we always dine early. 
36. Did your friend die this week ? 37. Yes, he died this morning. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What instrument of music do you prefer ? 2. The violin, 
when it is well played. 3. It is an instrument so difficult that 
there are not many persons capable of (capables de) playing it well., - 
4. Whose (d qui) is that flute? 5. It is mine. 6. I have one, but 
mine is not so beautiful as yours. 7. Do you pia^lf 8. Very little. 
9. Who gives you lessons ? 10. Mr. G. ; I go to his house three 
times a (^ar) week. 11. It needs time in order to learn even 
(mime) the flute. 12. If I know (how) to play it well in two years 
I shall be pleased. 13. It needs much practice in order to play 
well. 

14. Good morning (bonjour), gentlemen; are you making 
music? 15. No, we are speaking of it, that is all. 16. Are you<" 
(an) amateur {amateur) of music, Mr. Charles ? 17. Not much ; I 
like reading better than the opera. 18. Music, however (cependant), 
is a thing very agreeable. 19. That is true ; but you will not often 
see me put aside-(cfe cote) a good book to listen to the best musician 
in the world. 20. There are few persons who thiiak^ike (comme) 
you. 

21. On what instruments do you play? 22. I play on the 
violin, and my friend plays on the flute. 23. Does this instrument 
belong to you ? 24. Yes ; it belongs to me. 25. Are you the re- 
lations of my friend ? 26. We are. 27. Are these your papers ?- 
28. They are. 29. Are these your brothers ? ^30. They are. ^ 



234 



THE SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



67.— SOIXANTE-SEPTI^ME LEQON. 

NOUNS OF EPOCH AND QUANTITY. 
To pay the labor of a day. Payer le travail d'une journee. 

1. Jour is the epoch, day merely ; journee is a quantity, all the day through. 
He will surely come the day that he II viendra certainement le jour qu'il a 
has said, and will pass the whole dit, et il passera toute la journee 

day at your house. chez vous. 

There is the same distinction in the following. 
The morning. The morning {through). Le matin. La matinee. 
The evening. The evening {through). Le soir. La soiree. 
He will read all the morning. II lira toute la matinee. 



They will sing all the evening. 
To succeed, attain to. Succeeded. 



Elles chanteront toute la soiree. 
Parvenir {a bef. inf.). Parvenu. 



2. To succeed, to have success, is reussir; to come after, succeder a; to attain to, par- 
venir. 



He succeeds well in his studies. 
Louis Philip succeeded Charles X. 
We succeed in learning that. 
He attains to the foot of the moun- 
tain. 

But little, hut few, scarcely any. 

That man has hardly any money. 
He has hardly any. 
I have but few books. 
More, further, furthermore. N o more. 

3. Plus is used in the middle of a sentence, and davantage always at the end ; plus, 
meaning no more, may be placed at the end. Davantage is never followed by a noun, but 
is always used absolutely. 



II reussit bien dans ses etudes. 
Louis Philippe a succede h Charles X. 
Nous parvenons h apprendre cela. 
II parvient au pied de la montagne. 

Ne before the verb, guere after it ; 
without a verb, guere {de bef. a 
noun). 

Get homme n'a guere d'argent. 
II n'en a guere. 
Je n'ai guere de livres. 
Plus, davantage. He plus. 



I study more than you. 
That pleases me more. 
Have you still more money? 
I have no more. 
He can do for you further. 
To be born. Born. 

Je nais, tu nais, 
I am born, thou art born 



J'etudie plus que vous. 
Cela me plait davantage. 
Avez-vous encore de Targent ? 
Je n'en ai plus. 

II peut faire davantage pour vous. 
Naltre {etre for auxiliary). Ne. Nee. 
il nalt, nous naissons, vous naisses, Us naissent, 
he is born, we are born, you are born, they are born. 

I was born in America, you were born Je suis ne en Amerique, vous etes ne 

in Europe. en Europe. 

To clothe, clothed. To change. Vetir, vetu. Changer. 

4. Changer, to lay aside one thing and take another, is followed by de ; meaning to ex- 
change, bypoicr or contre; and meaning to convert, by en. 



1 12 6 20- S . 1 4 12 1 4 22 S 22 12 22 5 6 7 111 8 

ma-ti-ne<?, soi-ree, par-ve-nir, par-ve-nu, re-us-sir, snc-cc-der, gwore, da-van-tage, naitrg, 

6 7 7 7 21 7 G 7 8 12 3 6 

ne, nais, na:/, nais-sons, nais-ses, naissent, vfi-tir, chan-ger. 



THE SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



235 



He changes his hat. 

We change our books for some pic- 



II change de chapeau. 

Nous changeons nos livres pour (or 



tures. 

He changes water into wine. 
Weak. His stomach is weak. 
Pure. Nature. 
Credulous. Beauty. 
Incredulous. A question. 
To ask questions. The beard. 
With good xoill, heartily. 



contre) des tableaux. 
II change de l'eau en vin. 
Faible. II a Yestomac faible. 
Pur. La nature. 
Gredule. La beaute. 
Incredule. TJne question. 
Eaire des questions. La barbe. 
De bon cceur, de bon gre. 



1. Voyagerez-vous cet ete ? 2. Je voyagerai toute l'annee. 3. 
Voulez-vous beaucoup de bceuf ? 4. Je n'en veux guere. 5. Tout • 
ce qui nait est sujet a mourir. 6. N'etes-vous pas ne en Europe ? 
7. Non, monsieur, je suis ne en Amerique. 8. Le vieux soldat 
est-il mort ce mois-ci ? 9. Non, madame, il est mort le dix juillet. 
10. Oii etes-vous ne ? 11. Je suis ne a New York. 12. Ces fleurs 
ne naissent-elles pas au prentemps ? 13. Si, monsieur, elles uais- 
sent au mois d'avril. 14. Cet homme riche a-t-il vetu tous ses do- 
mestiques? 15. II les a Men vetus. 16. J'admire toutes les beautes 
de la nature. 17. Tous les enfants ne sont-ils pas credules? 18. 
lis sont bien credules. Ces hommes sont bien incredules. 19. Je 
cherche le barbier parce que j'ai la barbe longue. 20. Cette eau 
est-elle pure ? 21. Elle est tres-pure. 22. Cet enfant fait bien des 
questions. 23. Cet ouvrier travaille-t-il de bon cceur % 24. II tra- 
vaille de bon coeur toute l'annee. 25. Combien de temps votre 
grand-pere a-t-il vecu ? 26. II a vecu cent ans. 27. Apportez-moi 
un peu d'eau fraiche, je vous prie. 

1. Where is the old soldier ? 2. He is dead. 3. When did 
he die? 4. He died this year. 5. Where was that young man 
born? 6. He was bom in Germany, the sixth of August, one 
thousand eight hundred and thirty-eight. 7. Are not all animals 
born feeble? 8. Yes, sir, all animals are born feeble. 9. Why do 
those travelers change their clothes (habits) ? 10. They change 
them because they are wet. 11. Do you change your French book - 
for English books? 12. No, sir, I change them for pictures. 13. 
Does not cold change water into ice (glace) ? 14. Yes, it frequent- 
ly changes it into ice in winter. 15. When will you receive more 
money? 16. I shall receive no more. 17. Have you much? 18. 

7 5 15 1 22 1 23 5 22 17 6 14 5 22 5 1221 1 

faible, es-to-mac, pur, na-ture, cre-dule, beau-te, in-cre-dule, kes-tion, barbe. 



236 



THE SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



I have hardly any. 19. Do you ask questions of the (an) master? 
20. I ask him many questions. 21. Do you admire the beauties of 
nature ? 22. I admire much the beauties of the earth and of the 
sky. 

23. That man is looking for a barber because his beard is very 
long. 24. That child is too credulous, he believes all that they say 
to him. 25. Is not that man incredulous? 26. Yes, he does not be- 

4 lieve what you have told him. 27. Does not that lady sing much ? 
28. She sings all the morning and all the evening. 29. Does her 
sister sing much ? 30. No, she sings scarcely any, but she reads all 
day. 31. Does the barber work all the day? 32. He works ail 
the year. 33. Do you drink much wine? 34. I drink scarcely 
any. 35. Will you travel next month ? 36. No, I shall not travel 
any more ; I prefer to stay at home ; that pleases me more. 37. 
Spring succeeds to winter, and autumn to summer. 38. Has that 

_ merchant succeeded in becoming (devenir) rich? 39. Yes, he has 
attained to a great fortune (fortune). 40. Does the general suc- 
ceed in (a) war? 41. No, he will succeed in nothing. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is there any news from Europe to-day? 2. Yes, they say 
Athat there has been a great fire (incendie) in London. 3. I have 
/ not heard that ; what do they, say of it ? 4. That is all that I know 
of it; Mr. L. told it to me. 5. Do they speak of peace? 6. They 
say that peace is made. 7. I am delighted at it (fen suis charme) ; 
we need peace, for business (car les affaires) suffers much. 8. That 
^ is true ; it will need time to bring them back to the condition in 
which (la condition oil) they were before the war. 9. Do they 
know the conditions of the peace ? 10. They have not yet learned 
them. 11. All merchandise is (marchandises sont) very dear, but 
if we have peace they will be cheaper. 

12. Have they made a (une) good crop (recolte) of cotton this 
year? 13. Yes, pretty good. All the crops have been good. 14. 
Flour will be cheap next winter. 15. Without doubt ; and if there 
is no war in Europe, cotton will be dear. 16. What will you say 
if we have war with England or France before one year (an) ? 
17. We must (il faut) hope that that will not be. 18. War will do 
no. good to any one, and it can do us much evil. 

19. Do those shopkeepers succeed in becoming rich? 20. They 
succeed in it. 21. Have you not a cold in the head? 22. No; I 
have a cold in the chest. 23. Has your sister gone to the the- 
ater ? 24. No, she has gone to the ball. 



THE SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



237 



68.— SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LEQON. 

PAST DEFINITE TENSE. 

Past definite of pakler, to speak. 

Jeparlai, tuparlas, ilparla, nous parldmes, <vous parlates, its parlerent, 
I spoke, thou spokest, lie spoke, we spoke, you spoke, they spoke. 

1. All verbs of the first conjugation follow this model in the past definite. 

2. This tense is used only of time which is limited to the past, and separated from tho 
present by at least one day. If the time spoken of therefore does not exclude the present 
day, the past indefinite must be used, and not the past definite ; thus, 

I spoke (have spoken) to your brother. J'ai parte a votre frere. 

I spoke to him this week. Je lui ai parte cette semaine. 

I spoke to him last week. Je lui parlai la semaine derniere. 

In the first of the above phrases the present day is not excluded, for nothing is said of 
the time. In the second phrase it is not excluded, for this week includes the present day. 
In these therefore the past indefinite is used. In the last, the past week excludes the pres- 
ent, day, and the past definite is therefore used. 

The same distinction is illustrated in the following, where (ex.) denotes present day ex- 
cluded, and (n. ex.) present day not excluded. 



I was at your house this morning (n. ex.). 
I went to your house on Thursday (ex.). 
He mended my coat (n. ex.). 
He mended it last week (ex.). 
He broke his pen to-day (?i. ex.). 
I broke mine on Friday (ex.). 
They bought my horse (n. ex.). 
They bought him last summer (ex.). 
We found your pencil (n. ex.). 
We found it on Saturday (ex.). 
You traveled this summer (n. ex.). 
You traveled last summer (ex.). 

To cost. To ask. 

To pay, to pay for. To steal, rob. 



Vai ete chez vous ce matin. 

Tallai chez vous jeudi. 

II a raccommode mon habit. 

II le raccommoda la semaine derniere. 

II a casse sa plume aujourd'hui. 

Je cassai la mienne vendredi. 

lis ont achete mon cheval. 

lis Yacheterent l'ete passe. 

Nous avotm trouve votre crayon. 

Nous le trouvdmes samedi. 

Vous avez voyage eet ete. 

Vous voyagedtes l'ete dernier. 

Couter. Demander (a or de bef. inf.). 

Payer. Voter. 



8. These last three verbs, as also aclieter, to buy, and prendre, to take, when followed 
by objects both of the person and thing, take the thing for the direct, and the person for the 
indirect object. 



Do you pay that man for the carriage ? 
I pay him for it. 
I ask the scholar for the book. 
I ask him for it. 
I take it from him. 
He buys it for them. 
They have stolon it from me. 

4. The above-mentioned verbs with 
der then means to ask for. 



Payez-vous la voiture a cet homme ? 
Je la lui paie. 

Je demande le livre a l'ecolier. 
Je le lui demande 
Je le lui prends. 
II le leur achete. 
On me l'a vole, 
single object always take the direct; and demari- 



1 6 1 1 2 2 7 18 6 4 3 6 5 ;26 15 6 

par-lai, las, la, lame.9, kites, lerent, cou-ter, de-man-de.'', pa-yer, vo-ler. 



238 



THE SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



Ask for my father. 
The neighbor has been robbed. 
His fruit has been stolen. 
Pay the man. Pay for it. 
How much does he pay for it ? 
It costs him a hundred dollars. 
It is a good price. 



Demandez mon pere. 
On a vole le voisin. 
On a vole son fruit. 
Payez Fhomme. Payez-le. 
Combien le paie-t-il ? 
II lui coute cent gourdes. 
C'est un bon prix. 



1. Le maitre vous a-t-il donne ce livre ? 2. Oui, ilme le donna 
vendredi. 3. Quand avez-vous achete cette niaison? 4. Je 1'achetai 
Phiver passe or dernier. 5. Oil allates-vous lundi 1 6. Nous allames 
a l'ecole, et nos cousins y allerent aussi. 7. Ou allas-tu dimanche ? 
8. J'allai a l'eglise. 9. Quand avez-vous trouve le livre que vous 
aviez perdu? 10. Jele trouvai la semaine derniere. 11. Combien 
vous coute ce cheval ? 12. II me coute deux cents dollars. 13. Avez- 
vous paye la vache au paysan? 14. Je la lui ai payee. 15. Le prix 
de ce drap, n'est-il pas eleve ? 16. Non, le prix est bas. 17. Avez- 
vous demande le fruit au jardinier? 18. Je le lui ai demande. 
19. On a vole le manteau au jardinier? 20. On le lui a vole. 21. 
Combien cette voiture vous coute-t-elle ? 22. Elle me coute cinq 
cents gourdes. 23. C'est un prix tres eleve. 

1. Did you buy the countryman's apples'? 2. I bought them of 
him. 3. When did you buy them ? 4. I bought them last month. 
5. Did you pay him for them then? G. No, I paid him for them 
last week. 7. When did you ask the master for his book ? 8. We 
asked him for it on Tuesday. 9. Did you ask for the newspapers 

^at the same time? 10. We did not ask for them. 11. Has that 
man lost any thing ? 12. Some one has stolen from him his cloak. 
13. Do not those horses cost more than they are worth ? 14. No, 
V they are worth more than they cost. 15. Where is your horse? 
16. It has been stolen from me. 17. Was it stolen last week? 
18. Yes, it was stolen last week, on Wednesday. 19. What day 
of the month is it ? 20. It is the eleventh. 21. Has the servant 
robbed his master ? 22. Yes, he has stolen from him much money. 

■v. 23. How much may (pent) that cow be worth? 24. She is 
worth only thirty dollars. 25. How much are peaches worth a 
bushel? 26. They are worth two dollars a bushel. 27. Is it not 
a high price? 28. No, it is not high. 29. When did your cousins 
buy those beautiful pictures ? 30. They bought them last summer. 
31. When did the tailor mend your coat? 32. He mended it on 



THE SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 



239 



Thursday. 33. Are these your books'? 34. Yes, they are. 35. 
Are these your little sisters? 36. Yes, they are. 37. Miss, are 
'you French? 38. Yes, sir, I am. 39. Are you the sister of that 
Frenchman? 40. Yes, sir, I am. 41. Does not that lady appear 
perfectly amiable? 42. She appears so. 43. Your brother likes 
music ; on what instrument does he play ? 44. He plays on the 
flute and on the violin. 

OPTIONAL EXEECISES. 

1. Does Peter B. live near here (pres dhci) ? 2. Yes, he lives in 
this street ; are you acquainted with him ? 3. Very well ; we have 
been together at school during more than (de) a year, and I have 
still some books that are his. 4. He is a young man of an excel- 
lent character (caractere), and quite charming. 5. We have always 
"■"""been good friends, and I have a great desire {bien envie) to see him. 
6. If you wish it, I will take you to his house this evening. 7. I 
thank you, that will be impossible for me ; I expect this evening a 
friend ; but I will go with you another evening of this week. 8. 
Well, what day is it to-day ? 9. It is Tuesday. 10. I cannot go 
to-morrow, but Thursday or Friday I shall be at your service. 11. 
Thank you ; Thursday, then, if it be not bad weather, we will go 
to see him. 

12. What do you think of London? 13. It is an immense {im- 
mense) city, but it is not a beautiful city. 14. Are not the houses 
beautiful there ? 15. There are some beautiful and very large ones, 
but those of Paris are still more so. 16. I must go to Paris one 
day ; I desire much to see it. 



CO.— SOIXANTE-NEUYIEME LEQON. 

PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED. 

The past definite is generally treated by French grammarians as a primitive tense. 
Eulesfor its formation, however, will be useful to the English learner. 

1. The past definite of all French verbs may be formed as follows : In the first conju- 
gation, as we have seen, change er final of the infinitive into 

A I, AS. A, AMES, ATES, ERENT. 

In the second and fourth, ir and re final, into 

I9» IS, IT, iMES, 1TES, IRENT. 

ThusjtfniR, to finish, and vend-Rv, to sell, make 
Jejftnis, iujinis, ilftnit, nous firimes, vousjftnUes, itsfinirent, 

I finished, thou finishedst, he finished, we finished, you finished, they finished. 
Je vendis, tu vendis, il vendit, npus vendimes, vous vendites, Us vendirent, 
I sold, thou soldest, he sold, we sold, you sold, they sold. 

12 12 12 13 13 13 

fi-nis, nU, nime$, nites, nirent. 



240 



THE SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 



In the third, evoir, into 

US, ITS, UT, UMES, TJTES, TJEENT. 

Thus, recEvoiK, to receive, makes 
Je regus, tu regus, il regut, nous regumes, votes regutes, Us regurent, 

I received, thou receivedst, he received, we received, you received, they received. 

2. To the above rule must be added the three following remarks : 

First, verbs which have the past participle in is or it make the past definite by changing 
the is or it into the terminations of the second and fourth conjugations, is, is, it, etc. 
Thus mettre, past part, mis, and dire, past part. diT, make 
Je mis, tu mis, il mit, nous mimes, votes mites, Us mirent, 

I put, thou puttest, he put, we put, you put, they put. 

Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous dimes, vous dites, Us dirent, 

I said, thou saidst, he said, we said, you said, they said. 

Second, all irregular verbs of the second and fourth conjugations, which have the past 
participle in u, except vetir, battre, rompre, and their compounds, have this tense like the 
third conjugation, changing u final into us, us, ut. 

Thus courir, past part, courv, and boire, past part. bv, make 
Je courus, tu courus, il courut, nous courumes, vous courutes, Us coururent, 
I ran, thou rannest, he ran, we ran, you ran, they ran. 

Je bus, tu bus, il but, nous bumes, vous bides, Us burent, 

I drank, thou drankest, he drank, we drank, you drank, they drank. 

Third, all verbs in aindre, eindre, oindre, and uire, form this tense by changing ant of 
the present participle into is, is, it, etc. 

Thus eraindre, to fear, present participle, eraignxsT, make 
Je craignis, tw craignis, il craignit, nous craignlmes, vous craignttes, Us craignirent 
I feared, thou fearedst, he feared, we feared, you feared, they feared. 

Atteindre, to attain to, atteignxsr, makes fatteignis, tu atteignis, etc. 
Joindre, to join, joig?ix^T, makes jejoignis, tujoignis, iljoignit, etc. 
Civire, to cook, cuisANT, makes je cuisis, tu cuisis, il cuisit, etc. 

To sew. Sewed. Coudre. Cousu. 

Je couds, ta ootids, il coud, nous cousons, vous cousez, Us cousent, 

I sew, thou sewest, he sews, we sew, you sew, they sew. 

That tailor sews well. He has sewed Ce tailleur coud bien. II a cousu des 
some buttons on my coat. boutons a mon habit. 

To resolve, to solve. Resolved. ' Resoudre. Resolu, and resous.'* 

Je resous, tu resous, il resout, nous resolvons, vous resolves, Us resolvent, 

I resolve, thou resolvest, he resolves, we resolve, you resolve, they resolve. 

It is fog changed into rain. C'est du brouillard resous en pluie. 

Have they resolved upon peace or war? A-t-on resolu la paix ou la guerre ? 
He has solved the question. II a resolu la question. 

1. Ces servantes cousent-elles bien ? 2. Elles cousent tout aussi 
bien que le tailleur. 3. Le tailleur a-t-il cousu vos pantalons ? 4. 

II les a cousus. 5. Qui a casse la croisee ? 6. Le domestique la 



* Resous is used only in the sense of changed into. It is not used in the feminine. 

4 22 22 23 23 23 12 18 22 22 7 12 1814 20 3 20 12 

re-cus, cut, games, cutes, cment, mis, cou-rus, bus, crai-gnis, joindre, joi-gnan£, joi-gnis, 

17 1 7 3 1 7 12 2213 2212 3 22 1 '2 12 18 18 22 18 18 13 

atf-teindre, a?-tei-gnantf, a^-tei-gnis, cuire, cui-zantf, cui-zis, coudre, cou-su, couds, cou^, cou- 

21 18 6 19 5 18 5 15 22 5 18 5 18 5 15 21 5 15 6 5 15 

sons, cou-ses, consent, re-zoudre, re-zo-lu, re-zous, re-zou^, re-zol-vons, re-zol-v&z, re-zolvenZ. 



THE SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 



241 



cassa mardi. 7. Avez-vous lu le livre allemand que je vous ai 
prete ? 8. Oui, monsieur, je le lus le mois dernier. 9. Le tradui- 
s'ites-vous en meme temps 1 10. Non, je l'ai traduit cette semaine. 
11. Concluisites-vous l'etranger a l'eglise dimanche ? 12. Nous l'y 
conduisimes dimanche, et mon frere le conduisit au spectacle lundi. 

13. Parlas-tu au general quand tu le vis a Londres l'ete dernier ? 

14. Je ne lui parlai pas. 15. Kecutes-vous ma lettre la semaine 
derniere? 16. Nous la recumes lundi, et nous la lumes aussitot, 
et nos amis la lurent aussi. 17. Vendis-tu tes chevaux samedi? 
18. Oui, et mes cousins vendirent les leurs en meme temps? 19. 
Quand as-tu lu ce livre francais? 20. Je le lus samedi, et mon 
frere le lut dimanche. 21. Que coud ce tailleur ? 22. Ilcoudmon 
habit. 

1. Do those maid- servants sew well? 2. They do not sew so 
well as the tailor. 8. Have they sewed any thing for you ? 4. They 
have sewed some buttons on my coat. 5. Have you been to the 
neighbor's this week % 6. Yes, sir, I went there on Monday, and I 
went there again yesterday. 7. Didst thou speak to the general on 
Tuesday % 8.1 spoke to him, and my brother spoke to him also. 
9. When did you find those beautiful flowers ? 10. We found them 
last week in the woods. 11. Hast thou drunk the wine which I sent 
thee yesterday % 12, I drank of it yesterday, and my brother drank 
of it also ; we found it very good. 13. Didst thou finish thy writ- 
ing yesterday ? 14. Yes, I finished it early. 

15. When did you read the first volume of that history? 16. 
We read it last winter, and my father read it also. 17. Did you 
read the second volume at the same time (epoque)^ ' 18. We did 
not read it, but our sisters read it. 19. Have you translated that 
exercise into French ? 20. I translated it yesterday, and my broth- 
er translated it also. 21. Did you translate it into Spanish the 
same day ? 22. We translated it, and our cousins translated it 
also. 23. How old is your brother ? 24. He is not quite twenty-, 
five years old. 25. Has the gardener many apples ? 26. He has 
hardly any. 27. Do you study German? 28. No, sir, I do not 
study it any more. 29. Does your brother study it still? 30. Yes, 
he studies German and French. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What will you do when you are in the country ? 2. We 
11 



242 



THE SEVENTIETH LESSON". 



shall read much, and we shall write many letters. 3. When the 
gardener offers you fruit, will you take it? 4. I shall take it. 5. 
I am going to tell you the names of the months, and to count them 
at (en) the same time. G. January, one ; February, two ; March, 
three ; April, four ; May, five ; June, six ; July, seven ; August, 
eight ; September, nine ; October, ten ; November, eleven ; Decem- 
ber, twelve. 7v\ln the (au) month of January it is very cold, and 
the days are very short. 8. In the month of February it is very 
cold still, but the days are a little longer ; the night does not come 
so quick (vile), and in the morning it is day a little sooner/ 9. The 
country is still very sad. 10. Do you know that this month is the 
shortest of all? 11. It has only twenty-eight days, while (tandis 
-que) the others have thirty, and some thirty-one. 12. January is 
the first month, and February is the second. 

13. Did your cousin read much while he was at your house ? 
14. He read much, and he wrote many letters. 15. When I come 
to the city, will you know it ? 16. I shall know it. 17. When 
thou hast a master, wilt thou learn the French language? 18. I 
shall learn it, and my brother will learn it also. 19. When the 
master speaks to the scholars in French, will they comprehend him? 
20. They will comprehend him. 



70.— SOIXANTE-DIXlEME LEgON. 

PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED. 

The learner has now been made acquainted with the imperfect, past indefinite, and past 
definite tenses. As these divisions of past time do not correspond to any English tenses, they 
require especial attention, and the following additional rule and illustrations will serve to 
explain more clearly their use. 

1. If the verb expresses something past, which is habitual, repeated, or continuous* it 
must be in the imperfect tense ; if it do not express that, and refers to a time including the 
present day,t the past indefinite must be used ; but if it refer to a time excluding the pres- 
ent day, the past definite is to be used. 



Did you ever see (n. ex.) President T.? 

Yes, when I was (cont.) in Washing- 
ton last winter I saw (ex.) him. 

When did you find (n. ex.) yourglove? 

Yesterday ; as I was looking (cont.) 
for my handkerchief, I found (ex.) 
my glove. 

Who broke (n. ex.) your mirror? 

My brother broke it last week (ex.) ; 
he was playing (cont.) with his 



Avez-vous jamais vu le president T. ? 
Oui, qaand fetais a Washington, je le 

vis l'hiver dernier. 
Quand avez-vous troicve votre gant ? 
Hier, comme je cherchais mon mou- 

choir, je trouvai mon gant. 

Qui a casse votre miroir (glace)? 
C'est mon frere qui le cassa la semaine 
derniere ; il jouait avec sa balle, 



* These three qualities are essentially the same; for what is habitual, and what is re- 
peated, may be regarded as continuous or unfinished. Hence the name imperfect. 

t If the time referred to be the present day, the present week, month, year, or age, or, 
if the time be not specified, the present day is included. 



THE SEVENTIETH LESSON. 



243 



ball, and he threw (ex.) it just in et il la jet a juste au milieu de ma 

the middle of my glass. glace (mon miroir). 

2. Glace is a mirror of a large size. 

Did you receive (n. ex.) my note ? Avez-vous regu mon billet? 

We received it Saturday (ex.) while we Nous le recumes samedi pendant que 
were breakfasting (cont.). nous dejeunions. 

3. In conversation, when no importance is attached to the time, the past indefinite is 
often used for the past definite, — i. e., it is used when the present day is excluded; but not 
the opposite,— the past definite is not to be used when the present day may be included. 
"VVe m;iy say, Je ltd ai paele /tier* la semaine derniere, etc., but not, Je lui paelai au- 
jourd'hui cette semaine, etc. 

4. In historical writing, and in narratives of events long past,t the past indefinite is not 
to be used ; as, 



Napoleon, the first consul, gained the 
celebrated victory of Marengo 
over the Austrians, the 14th of 
June, 1800. 

Caesar reduced Spain, and conquered 
Gaid ; he penetrated even into 
Germany ; he subdued Egypt. 

A remedy. To look at. 

To be right. To be ivrong. 

The shore. The sea. 
Learned. Interesting. 
Ingenious. Along. 
Hardly, scarcely. Without the knowl- 
edge of. 
Yv r ithout his knowledge. 



Napoleon, premier consul, remporta la 
celebre victoire de Marengo sur 
les Autrichiens, le 14 Juin, 1800. 

Cesar rkluisit l'Espagne et conquit la 
Gaide ; il penetra jusqu'en Alle- 
magne ; il soumit TEgypte. 

Un remede. Regarder. 

Avoir raison (de bef. inf.). Avoir tort 
(de bef. inf.). 

Le rivage. La mer. 

Savant. Interessant. 

Ingenieux. Le long de. 

A peine. A Vinsu de. 

A son insu. 



4. To be worth, to possess, we have seen, is etre riche de ; to be worth in intrinsic value 
is valoir. 

To be worth more, to be better. Valoir mieux. 

You are worth more (better) than he. Vous valez mieux que lui. 



* The use of the past indefinite for the past definite takes place by a kind of syllepsis 
with the word recently, or some one equivalent; hence when the time is meant to be defi- 
nitely and prominently stated, the change is not made. 

t In continued narration of events, even of the present day, the past definite may be 
used, as seen in the following: 



This morning I met Mr. A. in the park, 
I saluted him, he returned my politeness, and 
continued his way ; I followed him with my 
eyes. At the moment when he arrived in 
Beacon-street, I saw him overthrown by a 
horse which was excited. I was very much 
frightened. I ran up the steps, I rushed to- 
ward my friend, I raised him, and asked him 
if he was not wounded. " No," be replied to 
me, laus:hin<r, "thank God, I have had no 
harm but the harm of fear. 1 ' 



Ce matin j'ai rencontre monsieur A. dans 
le pare, je 1'ai salue, il ma rendu ma politesse, 
et il a continue son chemin. Je le suivis des 
yeux. Au moment ou il arriva dans Bea- 
con-street, je le vis renverser par un cheval 
qui s'etait emporte. Jefus tres-effraye, je 
montai Tescalier en courant, je me precipi- 
tai vers mon ami. je le relevdi, et je lui de- 
manded s'il n'etait pont blesse. "Non," mo 
repondit-U, en riant, "Dieumerci, je n'ai au- 
cun mal que le mal de peur." 



1 15 5 21 5 1 17 6 12 4 7 4 1 6 12 1 7 1 3 14 5 5 

Na-po-le-on, Ce-zar, G-aule, E-gypt, re-mede, re-gar-der, ri-vage, mer, sa-van£, in-te-res- 



santf, in-ge-nieua;, peine, in-su. 



244 



THE SEVENTIETH LESSON. 



He is worth fifty thousand dollars. II est riche de cinquante mille dollars. 
He is worth more (better) than his II vaut mieux que son frere. 
brother. 

1. Avez-vous lu mon nouveau livre ? 2. Oui, quand j'etais a 
la campagne l'ete dernier, je le trouvai cliez mon ami, et je le lus. 
3. Quand avez-vous fini d'ecrire votre theme 1 4. Hier, pendant 
que vous recitiez votre lecon, je le finis. 5. Avez-vous des chevaux? 
6. Je n'en ai pas a present, j'en avais trois le mois passe ; mais, 
j'en vendis un la semaine derniere, j'en donnai un aussi dimanche 
a mon ami et i'on m'a vole le troisieme hier au soir. 7. Que re- 
gardez-vous ? 8. Je regarde ces tableaux. 9. N'avez-vous pas tort 
de parler a cet homme? 10. Non, j'ai raison de lui parler, parce 
qu'il est mon ami. 11. Est-ce que je ne vaux pas autant que mon 
frere? 12. Vous valez mieux que lui. 13. Oii desirez-vous aller? 
Je desire aller le long du rivage de lamer. 14. Avez-vous demeure 
longtemps a New York ? J'y ai ete a peine deux jours. 15. Le 
malade a-t-il pris son bain? 16. II le prit (l'a pris) hier matin. 
17. Cet homme est-il savant? 18. II est fort savant dans l'histoire. 
19. Mon cousin partit hier a mon insu. 

1. Do you sometimes go along the shore of the sea? 2. Yes, 
-—-sir, I often go on the shore of the sea ; I like to look at the sea and 
the sky. 3. Have you thrown away your gloves? 4. Yes; I threw 
them away yesterday, because they were worth nothing. 5. That 
man is studious ; is he not learned ? 6. Yes, he is well versed 
v (verse) in history. 7. Who broke that glass ? 8. That child let it 
fall yesterday. 9. That lady looks interesting. 10. Yes, she is 
interesting and beautiful ; she is not so tall as she appears, but her 
brother is taller than he appears. 11. Has the sick man taken the 
remedy? 12. He took it day before yesterday, and it has done 
him good. 13. Am I not worth as much as my cousin ? 14. You 
are worth more than he. 15. Will you be long in the country? 
— 16. I shall be there hardly two days. 

17. Is that workman ingenious? 18. He is very ingenious. 

19. Did your brother buy that horse without your knowledge? 

20. He bought him without my knowledge, and without the knowl- 
edge of my father. 21. When thou wast dining with (chez) the 
general on Saturday, didst thou taste his best wine ? 22. I did 
not taste it, because I never drink wine ; but the captain drank of 
it, and found it very good. 23. That man looks interesting ; are 



THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



245 



you acquainted with him ? 24. Yes, sir ; he is learned, ingenious, 
and interesting. 25. Madam, are you sick? 28. I am. 27. Are 
you the wife of the captain? 28. I am. 29. Gentlemen, are you 
physicians? 30. We are. 31. Are you the physicians of the 
king I 32. We are. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. London is the principal (principale) city or the capital (la 
capitals) of England. 2. Edinburgh (Edinbourg) is the capital of 
Scotland, and Dublin is the capital of Ireland. 3. These three 
kingdoms belong to the same prince, whom they call (appelle) king 
of England. 4. To the east of England one finds Denmark, of 
which the capital is Copenhagen ( Copenhague). 5. The capital of 
Sweden is Stockholm. 6. To the east of Sweden one finds Kussia, 
which is a very large country, of which the capital is Moscow. 

7. Where were you yesterday evening ? I looked for you every 
where. 8. I was at the theater ; had you need to see me ? 9. No ; 
I had nothing to do, and I desired to take a walk (/aire ane prome-y^ 
nade). 10. Where did you wish to go? 11. I had a desire to go 
and see the Miss C.'s. 12. Well, let ns go there this evening. 13. 
Very willingly; have you seen them lately (dernier ement)^ 14. I 
saw them the past week in the street, as they Were going to my 
sister's. 15. I have not had the time to go and see them often this 
winter. 16. I am very much occupied (tres-occupe) all day, and 
often it is necessary for me to pass the evening in writing (a ecrire)^— 



71.— SOIXANTE-ET-ONZIEME LEQON. 



VOICI AND VOILA. 
1. When something present is pointed out, there is, there are, here is, here are, this is, 
that is, these are, those are, are rendered as follows : 

Here is, here are, this is, these are, be- 
hold. 

There is, there are, that is, those are, 



Voici (contraction of vois ici). 
Voila (contraction of vois la). 



behold. 

There is your cloak. There it is. 
Here are your spectacles. Here they 
are. 

There he is. There is some. 
Here I am. Here Ave are. 
He is looking for the towel which is 
here. 

I seek him who is there. 
Here she comes. 



Voila votre manteau. Le voila. 
Voici vos lunettes. Les voici. 

Le voila. En voila. 

Me voici. Nous voici. 

II cherche l'essuie-main que voici. 

Je cherche celui que voila. 
La voici qui vient. 



20 12 £0 l 

voi-ci, voi-la. 



246 



THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 



There is what he wishes for. Voila ce qu'il veut. 

To fatigue, to tire. Yes, indeed. Fatiguer. Si or si fait. 

2. Si fait is used familiarly (and rather inelegantly) to affirm a fact which another de- 
nies or calls in doubt; as we use yes, it is; yes, he does, etc. It is regarded bv some as a 
vulgarism; and si alone, or pardonnez-moi, is to be preferred. 
You have not seen my brother. Yous n'avez pas vu mon frere. 

Yes, I have ; I saw him this morning. Si (or si fait), (or pardonnez-moi) ; je 

l'ai vu ce matin. 

You do not know me. Vous ne me connaissez pas. 

Yes, I do ; I know you well. Si, madame, je vous connais bien. 

I believe that he never comes here. Je crois qu'il ne vient jamais ici. 
Yes, he does ; he comes here often. Si, monsieur (or pardonnez-moi), il y 

vient souvent. 

At your service, at your disposal, at A voire service, a voire disposition, d- 

your command. vos ordrcs. 

From time to time, occasionally. De temps en temps. 

At least. Some good spectacles. Au moins. De bonnes lunettes. 

TJie grain. To accept. Le grain, les grains. Accepter. 

8. Gram, as a collective noun, is used in the plural to express different qualities or 
kinds of grain. 

A dollar wore. A dollar less. Tin dollar de plus. Tin dollar de moins. 

A sou too much. A sou too little. Un sou de trop. Un sou de moins. 

Do not give him a cent more, nor a Ne lui donnez pas un sou de plus ni 

cent ess. un sou de moins. 

He has neither too much nor too little. II n'a ni trop ni trop peu. 
A rock. What distance, how far? Un rocher. Quelle distance 

A quarter. An hour. Un quart. Une heurc. 

A step, pace. Half. Un pas. Demi. 

Almost. Come then. Presque. Yenez done. 

4. Done is sometimes used for mere emphasis. 

Far. About, nearly. Loin. Environ. 

How far is it from here to that rock ? Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici a ce 

rocher ? 

5. In speaking of the distance to any place, meauing/rom here to the place, d'ici must 
not be omitted in French, unless jusque be used. 

Is it far to the hotel ? Y a-t-il loin d'ici a V hotel ? 

It is about two miles and a quarter. II y a environ deux milies et (un) 

quart. 

I am going as far as the river. Je vais jusqu'a la riviere. 

6. Demi is an adjective, and is invariable when placed before its noun, to which it is 
then always joined by a hyphen; when placed after the noun, it agrees with it in gender, 
and is always singular ; as, 

Half an hour. An hour and a half. Une demi-heure. Une heure et demie. 
1. Yous cherchez cle l'eau pure, en voici. 2. Quel livre voulez- 

1 1-2 6 7 12 14 1 5 6 15 5 12 3 1 11 1 4 12 20 14 

fa-ti^er, ser-vicr, grain, ak-cep-ter, ro-chcr, dis-tance, kart, heurs, pas, de-mi, loin, 

3 12 21 " 17 5 

en-vi-ron, ho-tel. 



THE SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON. 247 

vous ? 3. Je veux celui que voila. 4. Voici ce que je cherche. 
5. Voila un arbre sur lequel il y a des oiseaux. 6. Voici un jardin 
ou il y a du fruit. 7. Voila votre ami ; est-il venu ici ce ma- 
tin ? 8. II y est venu de tres-bonne lieure. 9. Voici cle l'eau 
pure et fraiche ; en voulez-vous ? 10. Cette bomme lit-il sans lu- 
nettes? 11. Non, il ne pent pas lire sans lunettes. 12. Ce garcon 
a Pair fatigue 1 13. II est fatigue parce qu'il a couru toute la jour- 
nee. 14. Voulez-vous du vin 1 en voici a votre service. 15. Ac- 
ceptez-vous ce que je vous donne ? 1G. Je Paccepte. 17. Avez- 
vous dix dollars de plus a ma disposition? 18. Qui, j'en ai cent de 
plus, qui seront a vos ordres quand vous en aurez besoin. 19. Cette 
femme a six fils et quatre fllles. 20. Allez-vous quelquefois au 
spectacle? 21. J'y vais de temps en temps. 22. Y a-t-il loirr" 
d'ici a Photel ? 23. II y a pres d'un mille et demi. 24. II y a 
environ cent pas d'ici a, ce rocber. 

1. There is my exercise; it is short. 2. There is a pure sky 
and without a ^loud ; it is very beautiful. 3. Here is the man 
whom you are looking for. 4. Here he is. 5. Here I am. 6. 
Here we are. 7. You are looking for the servants ; there they 
are. 8. There is the school to jv£iich my brother goes. 9. Are 
you looking for the man who is here ? 10. No ; I am looking for 
him who is there. 11. Are you not fatigued? 12. I am fatigued 
because I have run all the morning. 13. There is what I have at 
your service; do you accept it? 14. I accept it. 15. Do you read 
without spectacles? 16. No, I cannot read without spectacles. 
17. Are you not wrong in buying that horse? 18. No, I am right 
in buying him, because I have need of him. 

19. Does that man still owe you money? 20. He owes me a 
hundred dollars at least. 21. Does the doctor see you sometimes? 
22. He sees me occasionally. 23. Do you ever go to the opera ? 
24. I go there occasionally. 25. Give me five dollars more. 26. 
Give him a dollar less. 27. I have given you a dollar too much, 
and you have given me a dollar too little. 28. Is there too much 
sugar in your tea? 29. There is neither too much nor too little. 
30. There is some fruit at your service ; do you accept it? 31. I 
accept it. 32. Do you wear spectacles? 33. Yes; I am near- 
sighted. 34. That countryman has at least ten goats. 35. What 
distance is it to that hotel? 36. It is about a mile and a quarter. 



24S 



THE SEVENTY- SECOND LESSON. 



r 37. Is it far to your house 1 38. It is hardly three hundred paces. 
39. It is about two miles and a quarter to the church. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I believe that you do not like music. 2. Yes, sir, I like it 
much. 3. Do you not prefer reading to music ? 4. They are both 
\ (toutes deux) good ; but if it ^necessary to choose one or the other, 
I say that it is necessary to choose the most useful. 5. You are 

__^>vrong. 6. How ! do you not like better to read than Jojisten to 
a violin ? 7. Not at all ; reading fatigues me sometimes, but music 
never fatigues me. 8. There is Mr. H. coming (qui vient) ; let us 

— see what_is his opinion {opinion). 9. Good morning (bonjour), Mr. 
H. ; come in (entrez), there is a chair. 10. You are acquainted 
with Mr. Charles, I believe. 11. Perfectly. 

12. What are you doing, gentlemen? 13. Almost, (d peu pres) 
nothing ; we are speaking of music and of reading ; tell us which 
of the two you prefer. 14. That is not difficult. 15. I prefer read- 
ing in the morning, and music in the evening. 16. I understand ; 
you love music when you are fatigued with (de) Reading. 17. 
Exactly so (tout juste). 18. But if it is necessary to choose one 
or the other, which of the two will you choose? 19. Beading, with- 
•A out doubt. 20. Mr. Albert is not of your opinion ; he gives the 
first place to music. 21. Each one to his taste ; and every thing 
ought to have its place. 22. Innocent amusements (amusements 
innocents) are without doubt very useful ; and as (comme) there is 

<. more than (de) one, everybody will not be obliged (oblige) to choose 
the same. 



72.— SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LECON. 



IRREGULAR PAST PARTICIPLES. 

1. Almost all the irregular past participles, that is, those differing 
in Lessons 23, 2S, 32, 34, 35, have now heen given. They are these : 



from the rules given 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Aequerir, Acquis* acquired. 

Courir, Count, run. 

Coudre, Cousu, sewed. 

Couvrir, Convert, covered. 

Dire, Bit, said. 

Eerire, Fa-it, written. 

Faire, Fait, done. 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Mettre, Mis, put. 

Mourir, Mort, died. 

Naitre, Ne, horn. 

Offrir, Qfert, offered. 

Ouvrir, Ouvert, opened. 

Prendre, PHs, taken. 

Eire, Mi. laughed. 



INFINITIVE. 

Resoudre 

Souffrir, 
Suivre, 
Vetir, 
Vivre, 



resolved. 



PARTICIPLE. 

Eesolu, 
Eesous, 
Souffert, suffered. 
Suivi, followed. 
Vetu, clothed. 
Veg u,-f lived. 



* The other compounds of querir, viz., eonquerir, enquerir, and requerir, form this 
participle in the same way as aequerir. 

t The following complete the list of irregular past participles : 



INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 

Asseoir, to seat, Assis, seated 

Surseoir, to respite, Sursis, respited. 

Benir, to bless, Benit, beni, blessed. 
Circoncire, to circumcise, Circoncis, circumcised. 

Clore, to close, Clos, closed. 

Frire. to fry, Frit, fried. * 



INFINITIVE. 

Zvirc, to shine, 
Moudre, to grind, 
Nuire, to injure, 
Reluire, to glitter. 
Sulfur '<?■ to suffice, 
Traire. to milk. 



PARTICIPLE. 

Lui, shone. 
Moulu, ground. 
Nui, injured. 
Relui, glittered. 
Sup, sufficed. 
Trait, milked. 



THE SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



249 



2. "Words are often repeated in French when they are not in English. The article 
and possessive adjective were spoken of, Lesson 28. We may add that adjectives generally 
which precede the noun, are to be repeated before each noun to which they belong ; as, 

I buy some good gloves and stockings. J'achete de bons gants et de bons bas. 
lie has the best butter and cheese. II a le meilleur beurre et le meilleur 

from age. 

3. The subject-pronouns, when et or ou used alone connect the verbs, may be repeated 
or not. 

I fear and hate him. Je le crains et (je) le hais. 

4. "When the verbs connected by et or ou are not in the same tense, or have many words 
intervening; or if the object of the first verb be not a personal pronoun, the subject-pronoun 
is repeated. 

I am going to see him, and shall speak Je vais le voir, etje lui parlerai. 
to him. 

I will go and tell him that you have J'irai lui dire que vous etes venu, etje 
come, and will give him your let- lui donnerai votre lettre. 

ter. 

I have received your letter, and have J'ai recu votre lettre, etje l'ai lue. 
read it. 

5. The objective pronoun is repeated in simple tenses, not usually in compound ones. 

I desire to see, persuade, and bring Je desire le voir, le persuader et Z'am- 

him. ener. 
I have seen, persuaded, and brought Je l'ai vu, persuade et amene. 

him. 

6. When the second verb is a compound of the first, the objective pronoun is not re- 
peated, except when the actions are different. 

He does it and does it again without II le fait et refait sans cesse. 
ceasing. 

He does it and undoes it without ceas- II le fait et le defait sans cesse. 
ing. 

7. The prepositions d and de are to be repeated before each of their objects. 
I speak to the man and his son. Je parle a l'homme et a son fils. 

We speak of you and him. Nous parlons de vous et de lui. 

As. Cold as ice. Comme. Froid comme glace. 

To build. A country-house. Bcitir. Une maison de campagne. 

Wh&t age ? To load. Quel age? Charger. 

A bouquet. To burn. Un bouquet. Bruler. 

A moment. Ripe. Un moment. Mur. 

To clean. To cough. Nettoyer. Tousser. 

The danger. Now. Le danger. Maintenant. 

To avoid. To arrive, happen. Eviter {de bef. inf.). Arriver. 

8. Arriver takes etre for its auxiliary.* 



^ * Of verbs taking etre for auxiliary, the following have now been given : alter, mourir, 
nattre, parvenir, revenir, tomber, venir, and arriver. 

J5 2 12 2 18 5 22 6 15 3 23 5 2012 6 13 6 3 5 14 

comme, ba-tir, hze, bou-ket, brti-ler, mo-men^mur, nei-to-yer, tous-ser, dan-ger, mainte- 

3 5 J2 6 1 12 6 

n&nt, e-vi-ter, ar-ri-ver. 

11* 



250 



THE SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 



When did you arrive ? Quand efes-vous arrive ? 

I arrived this morning. Je sicis arrive ce matin. 

9. In speaking of age, the French use the verb to Iiave, the English the verb to be. 
Row old are yoit ? Quel age avez-vous ? 

I am less than sixteen years old. J'ai moins de seize ans. 

10. Than before a number is rendered in French by de. 
He is more than fifteen years old. II a plus de quinze ans. 
More than two hours and a half. Plus de deux heures et demie. 

1. Batissez-vous une maison de briques ? 2. Nod, j'en batis une 
de bois ; mais mon voisin en batit une de brique. 3. Combien de 
milles y a-t-il d'ici k votre maison de campagne ? 4. II y a pres 
de deux milles et demi. 5. De quoi chargez-vous ce cheval? 6. 
Je le charge de grain. 7. Ce bateau est-il charge de vin ? 8. Non, 
il est charge de sel. 9. Pourquoi evitez-vous cet homme ? 10. Je 
Pevite parce que c'est mon ennemi. 11. Nettoyez-vous vos bottes 
le matin? 12. Non, le domestique les nettoie le soir. 13. Get en- 
fant tousse-t-il beaucoup ? 14. Non, il ne tousse pas beaucoup. 

15. Avez-vous un bouquet de fleurs? 16. Oui, j'ai un bouquet de 
roses et de violettes. 17. Que brule cet ecolier ? 18. II brule ses 
papiers. 19. Voila des pommes mures; en voulez-vous ? 20. J'en 
mangerai une dans un moment. $SA. Y a-t-il du danger a rester 
iei? 22. II n'y a pas de danger. 23. J'ai fmi ma tache et je vais 
maintenant chez moi. 24. Eevenez demain, je ne puis pas vous 
recevoir aujourd'hui. 25. Je n'ai jamais vu une fieur comme celle- 
la ; en avez-vous d'autres 1 26. J'en ai beaucoup. 

1. Do they build the houses of (en) stone in your village"? 2. 
They do not build many of stone, they build more of brick and of 
wood. 3. Is that scholar studious ? 4. Yes, sir, he studies as well 
as his brother. 5. Is that iron cold? 6. It is cold as ice. 7. How 
far is it to that country-house ? 8. It is more than two miles and 
a quarter. 9. What are you building 1 10. I am building a hand- 
some country-house. 11. How old are you? 12. I am hardly 
twelve years old. 13. How old is your brother ? 14. He is more 
than fifteen years old. 15. With what do they load that vessel ? 

16. They load it with cotton. 17. Give the bouquet to that lady. 
18. Make me a bouquet of roses and violets. 19. Here are some 
ripe apples ; wilhyou eat some? 20. In a moment. 21. What are 
you burning? 22. We are burning these old papers. 

23. Are those peaches ripe ? 24. m No, they are not yet ripe. 



THE SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



251 



25. Is it far to your house ? 26. It is not more than a mile and 
three quarters. 27. Wait then a moment, and I will go with you. 
28. Had the servant cleaned your boots when you spoke to him this 
morning? 29. He had cleaned them. 30. Does he clean them 
well ? 31. He does not clean them very well. 32. Do you cough 
much ? 33. No, I clo not cough much. 34. Do you avoid those 
men ? 35. I avoid them. 36. Is there danger in going on the 
river ? 37. There is no danger. 38. I have read this book, and 
now I have a desire to read that one. 39. Has your brother ar- 
rived ? 40. He has arrived. 41. When did he arrive 1 42. He 
arrived yesterday morning. 43. Is it far to those rocks'? 44. It 
is almost two miles. 45. How far is it to the hotel ? 46. It is 
about half a mile. 47. Will you be here two hours ? 48. I shall 
be here more than three hours. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. There is the moon beginning- (qui commence a) to appear. 
2. It is full moon this evening/^ 3. It is very fine weather now. 4. 
The evenings are very beautiful. 5. There is some fog in the morn- 
ing, but that is not bad. 6. We have a superb season, and there 
will be much fruit this year. 7. Yes, if it is not too dry. 8. We 
shall have some rain before one week^ 9. I believe as you that the 
weather is going to change soon. 10. There are some clouds 
around (autour de) the moorv 11. Yes, each night one sees more.; 
12. It has been very warm during three or four days. 13. Until 
(j usque) now, the nights have been cool enough. 14. Last night 
it was very warm ; there was no wind. 15. I am subject to the . 
headache when it is warm at night, and then I cannot sleep. 

16. How far is it from here to the church? 17. It is not quite 
half a mile. 18. How far is it to that rock? 19. It is only two 
hundred paces. 20. Did you not pay too much for that horse ? 
^21. I paid neither too much nor too little for him. 22. Did you 
not pay that man more than you owed him 2- 23. No; I paid him 
neither a cent more nor a cent less than his due. 24. This watch 
costs me more than it is worth ; I paid three hundred dollars for 
it. 25. Have you much money? 26. No; I have hardly five dol- 
lars. 27. Were you right in buying that horse? 28. No. I was 
wrong; for (car) the price was too high.. 



73.— SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEQON. 

HOURS OF THE DAT. 

1. For the hours of the day, one o'clodc, two o 'clock,half past two, etc., the French use 
merely the number with the hour, and say, one hour, two hours, two hours and a half. 



252 



THE SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



What o'clock is it ? 

It is one o'clock. It is two o'clock. 

It is half past three. 

Is it not five o'clock ? 

It is a quarter past ten. 



Quelle heure est-il ? 

II est une heure. II est deux heures. 

II est trois heures et demie 

N'est-il pas cinq heures ? 

II est dix heures et quart (or un quart). 



2. The fractional part of the time is always after the number in French, and joined to 
it by et, expressed or understood, when past the hour, and by moins when before it ; thus, 



It is a quarter before nine. 
It is ten minutes before ten. 
It is twenty minutes after eleven. 
It is twelve o'clock, noon, midday. 
It is half past twelve (at noon). 
It is twelve o'clock midnight. 
It is half past twelve (at night). 



II est neuf heures moins un quart. 

II est dix heures moins dix minutes. 

11 est onze heures (et) vingt minutes. 

II est midi. 

II est midi et demie. 

II est minuit. 

II est minuit et demie. 



3. Bouse heures is used only to express the period of twelve hours. 
It is twenty minutes before twelve (at II est minuit moins vingt minutes, 
night). 



II est six heures, trois quarts. 
II est sept heures moins un quart. 
Le haut, sommet. Une minute. 
Le bas, fond. Ailleurs. 
Le nombre. Une partie. 
Le num'ero. La nouveautc. 



It is a quarter to seven. 

The top. A minute. 
The bottom. Elsewhere. 
The number. A party, a game. 
The number. Novelty. 

4. Nombre is a collection of units, numero is one of a marked series. 
The number ten. Le nombre dix. 

He lives at number six. II demeure (No. 6) numero six. 

5. A noun used in an attributive sense, in apposition, or as subject predicate, takes no 
article in French, though it does in English. 



He passes for a soldier. 
"We have the king for a friend. 
Cicero, a celebrated Roman orator. 
Charles, the king of Sweden. 
I am an Englishman. 
He is a physician. 
You are a merchant. 



II passe pour soldat. 
Nous avons le roi pour ami. 
Ciceron, celebre orateur romain. 
Charles, roi de Suede. 
Je suis anglais. 
II est medecin. 
Vous etes negociant. 

6. "When the noun thus used is limited by an adjective or other word, the article is 

(See Lessons 30 and 52.) 

Cet homme est-il avocat? 
Non, c'est un riche negociant. 
II passe pour un soldat du roi. 
C'est un bon medecin. 



used, and he is, ii is, etc., are rendered c'est. 
Is that man a lawyer ? 
No, he is a rich merchant. 
He passes for a soldier of the king. 
He is a good physician. 



7. Alter verbs of motion, for is rendered iu French by chercher. 



12 22 12 12 12 2212 17 15 5 2 21 7 11 21 1 13 22 5 17 

mi-nute, mi-di, mi-nui£, haut, som-met, bas, fond, ail-leurs, nombre, par-tie, nu-me-ro, 

18 17 6 

nou-veau-te. 



THE SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON. 



253 



To go for. To come for. Aller chercher. Venir chercher. 

To send for. To rim for. Envoyer chercher. Courir chercher. 

Go for some water. I am going for Allez chercher de l'eau. J'en vais 

some. chercher. 

I come back for my book. Je reviens chercher mon livre. 

Do you send for the horses? Envoyez-vous chercher les chevaux? 

We send for them. Nous les envoyons chercher. 

8. Every before a noun of time is rendered by tout and the article with the noun plural. 

Every year. Everyday. Tous les ans. Totts les jours. 

Every hour. Every minute. Toutes les heures. Toutes les minutes. 

1. Quelle heure est-il ? 2. II n'est pas tarcl ; il est neuf heures. 
3. Est-il midi ? 4, Non, il est onze heures et demie. 5. N'est-il 
pas minuit ? 6. II est minuit et dix minutes. 7. Est-il tard % 8. 

II est dix heures trois quarts. 9. II est midi moins un quart. 10. 
Est-il onze heures ? 11. II est onze heures moins cinq minutes. 
12. Allez-vous au haut de cette montagne ? 13. J'y vais. 14. Y 
a-t-il loin d'ici au bas de la montagne? 15. II y a environ trois 
milles. 16. Vous ne trouverez pas ailleurs du fruit comme celui-ci. 
17. II y a un grand nombre de soldats sur ce navire. 18. Demeu- 
rez-vous au numero huit ? 19. Non, je demeure au numero quinze. 
20. Y a-t-il une partie de plaisir chez vous ce soir? 21. Non, il n'y 
en a pas aucune ce soir ; mais il y en aura une demain soir. 22. 
Allez-vous chercher quelque chose? 23. Jevais chercher mon livre. 
24. Envoyons chercher du vin. 25. Voyez-vous souvent le mede- 
cin? 26. Je le vois tous les jours. 27. Allez-vous a la ville tous 
les mois ? 28. J'y vais toutes les semaines. 29. Voyez-vous votre 
ami tous les jours ? 30. Je le vois tous les matins et tous les soirg 

1. Is there danger in (d) going up to the top of that mountain ? 
2. There is no danger. 3. We had arrived at the bottom of the 
mountain when we saw your friend. 4. I dwell in Dauphin-street, 
at number twenty-five. 5. We have arrived at the bottom of the 
mountain, and now we wish to ascend to the (en) top.-? 6. Is there 
elsewhere better fruit than this ? 7. There is none better. 8. Is 
that scholar going for his books? 9. No, sir, he is going for his 
papers. 10. Do not children love novelty? 11. Yes, every body- 
loves novelty. 12. What does that workman come for? 13. He 
comes for his money. 14. Have you sent for some coffee? 15. I 
have sent for some coffee and some sugar. 16. Do you cough much? 
17. I cough every five minutes. 18. That child drinks every hour. 
19. I go to the market every morning and every evening. 



254 



THE SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



20. What time is it ? 21. It is half past six. 22. At what 
hour do you breakfast ? 23. I breakfast at a quarter past seven. 
24. Is it twelve o'clock (at noon) ? 25. It is ten minutes after 
twelve. 26. Do you dine at half past two? 27. I dine at a quar- 
ter before three. 28. Did you return from the bail at midnight ? 
29. I returned at a quarter past twelve. 30. What do you buy? 
31. I buy some good gloves and stockings. 32. Our neighbor has 
the best apples and peaches. 33. I will borrow this book and read 
it to my brother. 34. Will you read that book? 35. I shall read 
and translate it. 36. To whom do you speak ? 37. I speak to that 
man and his son. 38. Do you often go to church? 39. I go there 
every Sunday. 40. Is not that sick man weak? 41. He is weak 
as a child. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What are you looking for ? 2. I am looking for my (canne) 
cane. 3. This is yours, is it not ? 4. No, it» does not belong to 
me ; mine is black. S.^hen whose (d qui) is this ? for it is not 
mine. 6.^1 saw your cousin with a cane like (comme) that. 7. 
That is true, it is his ; he left it this morning, and he has taken 
mine. 8. There is (en voild) another ; whose is it ? 9. It is mine ; 
my cousin forgot his, and he has not taken (pris) mine. 10. But 
where is yours? I put it here under the table. 11. Wait, I am 
going to ask the boy if he has seen it. 12. George, do you know 
where the gentleman's cane is ? 13. I believe that he has left it 
in the garden ; I am going for it. 14. Thank you ; I believe that 
you are right. 

15. Hadst thou arrived when the doctor came here? 16. I had 
not arrived. 17. Had your brother arrived in^the city when you 
saw him? 18. He had arrived there. 19. See the beautiful 
strawberries which I have. 20. Where did you find them? 21. I 
picked (prises) them in the garden. 22. How! I have not seen 
any there yet. 23. There are no more ripe, but there will be be- 
fore long (avant pen), wherewith to fill a plate. 24. What are you 
going to do with these? 25. Nothing; do you wish for them? 
26. If you please ; I will send them to Mrs. C. I know that she 
likes them much. 27. There are exactly (toute juste) enough. 
Send her at the same time a few flowers. 28. I am going to make 
her a bouquet. 29. Wait a moment ; I will go with you. 



74.— SOIXANTE-QUATORZlEME LEQON. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE USED. 
1. The present participle is less used in French than in English, it being, as we hare 
6een (Lesson 5S), often rendered into French by the infinitive. 



THE SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



255 



When, however, two actions are spoken of as performed at the same time, the more en- 
during of the two may generally be rendered by this participle, preceded by the preposi- 
tion en. 

He eats while he is reading. II mange en lisant. 

We talk while we are working. Nous causons en travaillant. 

You talk while you sleep. Vous parlez en dormant. 

I read the letter while dining. J'ai lu la lettre en dhiant. 

2. The participle used in this way always belongs to the subject of the verb. Belonging 
to the subject, it is sometimes used also without the preposition en. 

Doing nothing, do you hope to succeed? Ne faisant rien, esperez-vous reussir ? 
Never studying, can you learn French? N^etudiant jamais, pouvez~vous ap- 

prendre le francais? 

3. The present participle, without the preposition, may belong also to the object of the 
verb, when the connection is intimate and free from ambiguity ; but the infinitive or other 
construction is even then to be preferred. 

I saw the boy stealing my fruit. J'ai vu le petit garcon volant mes fruits, 

(or better) voler (or qui volait) mes 
fruits. 

I see them running toward the city. Je les vois courant (better courir) vers 

la ville. 

4. En, as already seen (Lesson 5S), is the only preposition in French which can be fol- 
lowed by this participle. Participles and participial nouns, therefore, following a preposi- 
tion which cannot be translated by en, as in No. 1 above, must be rendered by the infini- 
tive, or by a noun, or by a change of construction. 

Writing at night hurts the eyes. Ecrire la nuit fait mal aux yeux. 

He likes reading very much. II aime beaucoup. a lire (or la lecture). 

What do you gain by doing that Que gagnez-vous a /aire cela ? 

We study without saying a word. Nous etudions sans dire un mot. 

The past definite of etre, to be, is irregular. 

Jefus, tufus, ilfut, nous fames, vous fates, Us furent, 

I was, thou wast, he was, we were, you were, they were. 

I was too good for thee last week, but Je fus trop bon pour toi la semaine 

my brother was not good enough. derniere, mais mon frere ne lefut 

pas assez. 

Were you pleased to see the general Futes vous contents de voir le general 

on Monday? lundi? 

We were pleaded to see him, and our Rous fumes contents de le voir, et nos 

cousins were pleased also. cousins le furent aussi. 

Hie past definite of avoir, to have, is irregular. 

J' eus, tu eus, il eut, nous eumes, vous elites, Us eurent, 

I had, thou hadst, he had, we had, you had, they had. 

Thou hadst my book day before yes- Tu eus mon livre avant-hier ; n'est-ce 

terday ; hadst thou not? pas? 
I had it not, my brother had it. Je ne Yens pas, c'est mon frere qui Veut. 



22 22 

fus, eus. 



256 



THE SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



Had you my pens ? Eutes-vous mes plumes ? 

We had them not ; your brothers had Nous ne les eumes pas ; vos freres les 

them. eurent. 

To praise. To blame. Loner. Bldmer. 

Industrious. Diligent. Industrieux, laborieux. Diligent. 

A globe. The form, figure. Un globe. La forme, figure. 

Good morning, good day, good after- Bonjour. 

noon. 

Good evening. Good night. Bonsoir. Bonne nuit. 

Negligent. Strength. Negligent. La, force. 

Yonder. My faith. Zd-bas. Mafoi. 

Surprised. Pleased, much pleased. Surpris. Aise, bien aise. 

1. Futes-vous bien recu a New- York Pete dernier ? 2. J'y fus 
bien recu. 3. Nous fumes surpris cle vous voir climanche, et nos 
freres le furent aussi. 4. Mon frere fut bien aise de recevoir votre 
lettre mardi. 5. J'eus votre livre la semaine passee ; n'est-ce pas ? 
6. Non, vous eutes ma plume, et votre frere eut mon livre. 7. Ce 
chien mange en courant. 8. Ces ecoliers ne parlent-ils pas en etu- 
diant? 9. lis parlent en etudiant et en recitant leurs lecons. 10. 
Cet homme ne chante-il pas en travaillant ? 11. II chante en tra- 
vaillant et aussi en marcbant. 12. Cet bomme n'est pas bonnete ; 
je Pai surpris (volant) a voler mon fruit. 13. Ne connaissant pas 
cet bomme lui faites-vous credit? 14. Je ne lui fais pas credit. 
15. Je loue l'bomme laborieux, et je blame ceiui qui est negli- 
gent. 16. La terre a la figure d'un globe. 17. J'ai achete un bon 
cbeval ; il a beaucoup de force. 18. Pourquoi le maitre loue-t-il cet 
ecolier? 19. II le loue parce qu'il est diligent et il blame son frere 
parce qu'il est negligent. 20. J'aime beaucoup cette maison ; elle 
est tres-belle. 21. Est-iltarcl? 22. II est minuit et quelques mi- 
nutes. Bonne nuit. 

1. Good morning, sir ; I am deiigbted to see you. 2. Is tjiat 
sick man very weak ? 3. Yes, be lias lost all bis strength^ 4. 
Wbom does tbe master praise? 5. He praises that industrious 
scbolar. 6. Does be blame any one % 7. He blames bim wbo is 
negligent. 8. Is that scbolar diligent ? 9. He is diligent, but bis 
sister is negligent. 10. bias tbe sun tbe form of a globe? 11. The 
sun has tbe form of a globe, and tbe moon also. 12. Good morn- 
ing, madam ; I am much pleased to see you ; have you recovered 

18 6 2 6 14 22 12 10 1 15 12 10 12 12 3 10 16 12 23 21 18 

lou-e/% bla-mer, in-dus-tri-eucc, la-bo-rieucc, di-li-gentf, glob?, forme, fi-gure, bon-jour, 

21 £0 5 12 3 16 22 12 7 

bon-soir, ne-gli-geni, force, sur-pris, aize. 



THE SEVENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 257 

(repris) your strength? 13. Yes, sir, I am in good health now. 
14. Are there not some soldiers yonder? 15. There are a few. 
16. Do you ever read while you are eating? 17. No, I never read 
while I am eating. 18. That man talks while he is sleeping, and 
those children sing while they are studying. 

19. Wast thou not much pleased to see thy friend on Wednes- 
day ? 20. I was surprised and delighted, and my brothers were 
so likewise. 21. Had you not the master's inkstand on Friday? 
22. We had it not ; those little boys had it. 23. Hadst thou not 
his penknife ? 24. Yes, I had his penknife and his pen, and my 
brother had his pencil. 25. How old is your father? 28. He is£- 
almost (pres de) fifty years old, and my grandfather is more than 
seventy-eight. 27. Had you finished your exercise when the mas- 
ter came? 28. I had finished it. 29. Did your friend return from 
the ball at midnight ? 30. No, he returned a quarter before one. 
31. There are many people yonder. 32. Will you send for some 
wine ? 33. The servant has gone for some. 34. Have you lost 
your money ? 35. My faith, I have lost it all. 38. Is it late ? 
37. It is half past eight. Good evening. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. There will be much fruit this year, I believe. 2. All the trees 
are loaded with flowers and young fruit. 3. Your uncle dwells in 
the country ; does he not ? 4. Yes, but the house in which (where) ^ 
he dwells is not his. 5. To whom then does it belong? 6. To Mr. 
C. 7. I thought (croyais) that your uncle had a country-house of 
his own (d ha)./ 8. That in which he dwelt last year was his, but-- 
it is burnt. 9. I did not know it ; does he not intend to build 
another? 10. Yes, they were working on it (y) the last time that . ■ 
I saw him. 11. Have you seen the new house which he is build- 
ing? 12. No, I have not seen it; but my uncle has told me that 
it will be larger than the old one. 13. Is not your sight weak? 
14. Yes, sir ; I can not study as I did last year,^ 15. Is it far to 
the doctor's? 16. It is not quite a mile. 

17. Have you anything to do this evening? 18. No; why do 
you ask me that? 19. Come and pass the evening with me ; you 
will make the acquaintance of the gentleman of whom I have spoken 
to you, and who is a very amiable fellow. 20. With much pleas- 
ure ; I have nothing to do, and I shall be delighted to pass the 
evening in a manner (cVune maniere) so agreeable. 21. Bring your 
cousin with you. 22. Well, I will bring him, if I see him. I shall 
be at the store a little late. 23. We can wait for you a little. 24. 
You are very amiable. 



258 



THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



25. Does that carpenter work much? 26. Yes, he is very la- 
borious. 27. Do you see the soldiers yonder? 28. I see them. 
29. Are you a Frenchman ? 30. No, sir, I am an Englishman. 



75.— SOIXANTE-QUINZlEME LEgQN. 

PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED. 
The past definite o/faire, to make or do, is irregular; thus, 

Je fis, tu fis, Ufit, nous f lines, vous flies, ilsfirent, 

thou didst, he did, we did, you did, they did. 



I did. 

Didst thou do thy exercise well on 
Monday ? 

I did it well, and Charles did his well ; 

did you do yours well ? 
W e did them well, but those little boys 

did not do any at all 



Fis-iu bien ton theme lundi ? 



Je vis, 
I saw, 



Je le fis bien, et Charles fit bien le 

sien ; fites-x ous bien les votres ? 
Nous les fimes bien, mais ces petits 
jargons n'en firent pas du tout. 
The past definite o/yoir, to see, is irregular ; thus, 

tic vis, il vit, nous vlmes, vous vltes, Us virent, 

thou sawest, he saw, we saw, you saw, they saw. 



Did you see Prince Albert, last year, 

when you were in London ? 
I saw him, and my brother saw him 

also ; our friends saw the queen, 

but we did not see her. 
To go to meet. 

To meet. The meeting. 
To deceive. To begin. 
Thank God. Charmed, delighted. 
Yesterday evening, last evening. 
Your cousin is yonder ; let us go to 
meet him. 

1. Commence'r takes a before the infinitive when progress is denoted, de when it is not. 
He begins to speak French. II commence a parler frangais. 

He begins to dine at two o'clock. II commence de diner a deux heures. 

2. The verb aller with an infinitive expresses an immediate future ; venir de with an 
infinitive expresses an immediate past. 



Vites-xous le Prince Albert, Tannee 
passee, quand vous etiez a Londres ? 

Je le vis, et mon frere le vit aussi ; nos 
amis virent la reine, mais nous ne 
la times pas. 

Aller au devant de, or Aller a la ren- 
contre de, 

Rencontrer. La rencontre. 

Tromper. Commencer (a or de bef. inf.). 

Dieic merci. Charme (de bef. inf.). 

Hier au soir, hier soir. 

Votre cousin est la-bas ; allons au-de- 
vant de lui (or a sa rencontre). 



We are just going (will go) for our 
books. 

I am just going to (or will now go and) 

finish my exercise. 
We have just been for our books. 
I have just finished my exercise. 



Nous allons chercher nos livres. 

Je vais finir mon theme. 

Nous venons de chercher nos livres. 
Je viens de finir mon theme. 



12 12 3 21 21 6 15 3 C 7 11 5 6 

fis, vis, ren-contre, trom-per, co??i-men-cer, mer-ci, char-mc 



THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



259 



To hate. Hated. Hair (a bef. inf.). Hal. 

Jehais, tic hais, ilhaii, nous ha'issons, vous Jiatssez, ils Jia'issent, 

I hate, thou hatest, he hates, we hate, you hate, they hate. 

To sioim. An offer. Nager. TJne offre. 

To smoke. The afternoon. Ficmer. 1^ apres-midi. 

3. Midi is masculine gender, apres-midi is feminine. 

4. The present participle, like the past, used as an adjective, becomes one in all respects, 
and is varied accordingly ; but as a participle it is always invariable.* 

They are persons loving every body. Ce sont des personnes aimant tout le 

monde. 

They are loving (affectionate) persons. Ce sont des personnes aimantes. 
Read the pages following this lesson. Lisez les pages suivant cette lecon. 
Read the following pages. Lisez les pages suivantes. 

Sleeping waters are dangerous. Les eaux dormantes sont dangereuses. 

I saw them sleeping extended beneath Je les ai vus dormant etendus sous un 

a tree. arbre. 

1. Ne fites-vous pas du the samedi? 2. Je fis duthe, mon frere 
fit du cafe, et nos soeurs firent des gateaux. 3. Vites-vous le gene- 
ral, dimaDche ? 4. Nous le vimes, et nos cousins le virent aussi. 
5. Ne le vis-tu pas? 6. Je le vis samecli et mon frere le vit ven- 
dredi. 7. Allez-vous au-devant de votre oncle ? 8. Oui, je vais au- 
devant de lui. 9. Cet ecolier trompe-t-il le maitre? 10. Non, il 
ne le trompe jamais. 11. Cet enfant commence-t-il a parler ? 12. 

II commence a parler un peu. 13. Etes-vous malade ? 14. Non, 
Dieu merci, je suis en bonne sante. 15. Quand avez-vous vu le 
medecin? 16. Je le vis hier au soir. 17. Ou allez-vous? 18. Je 
vais chercher mon livre. 19. Votre ami est-il arrive '? 20. Oui, il 
vient d'arriver. 21. Fumez-vous du tabac ? 22. Non, monsieur, je 
hais le tabac. 23. Cet enfant n'a que sept ans, mais il nage tres- 
bien. 24. Ce monsieur m'a fait une belle ofFre, mais je ne puis pas 
l'accepter. 25. Serez-vous chez vous cette apres-midi? 26. J'y 
serai toute la journee. 27. Alors, j'irai chez vous cette apres-midi 
a quatre heures. 28. Nous haissons le temps froid. 29. Ce mau- 
vais ecolier n'etudie jamais ; il sera ba'i et meprise. 

1. Didst thou not make too much noise yesterday evening in thy 
room ? 2. I did not make any at all ; but the little boys made too 
much. 3. Did you make a (du) noise on Thursday ? 4. "We did 



* The learner will of course distinguish between the participle and adjective in French 
the same as in English. If the word merely express the quality of the noun, it is an adjec- 
tive; but if it takes an object, or expresses action like a verb, it is a participle. 

1 12 1 12 7 7 1 12 21 1 12 6 1 12 1 6 15 92 6 1 7 12 12 

ha-Ir, ha-i", hais, haii, ha-'is-sons, ha-is-se.3, h.a.-issent, na-ger, ofire, fu-rner", a-pres-m.i-di. 



260 



THE SEVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



not make any ; your cousin made some. 5. When have you seen 
my brother % 6.1 saw him last evening, and my brothers saw him 
on Saturday. 7. Did you see the general on Wednesday ? 8. We 
saw him on Wednesday, and the captain saw him on Thursday. 9. 

% What did you do on Friday afternoon in the country? 10. I did 
nothing. 11. Are you going to meet your friend ? 12. Yes, I am 
going to meet him. 13. Do you ever deceive the master ? 14. I 
never deceive him. 15. Did your friend arrive at noon? 16. No, 

1 he arrived in the afternoon at three o'clock. 

17. Does that child begin to walk ? 18. He begins to walk a 
little. 19. Have you many relations ? 20. No, sir, I have none 
at all ; but, thank God, I have good friends. 21. I have just seen 
your brother ; have you seen him ? 22. Yes, he has just arrived 
from the country. 23. Is that scholar ignorant ? 24. Yes, he is 
ignorant ; he plays instead of studying, and he is hated and de- 
spised. 25. Do you hate any one? 26. No, sir, I hate no one. 
27. We hate the cold, and our friends hate it also. 28. Do you like 
to swim ? 29. I like to swim sometimes. 30. Do you smoke to- 
bacco ? 31. No, sir, I do not smoke at all ; I hate tobacco. 32. Is 
that man a merchant ? 33. No, sir, he is a physician. 34. Are 
you a Frenchman ? 35. No, sir, I am a German. 36. Are you 
hungry? 37. No, sir, I have just dined. 38. It is late; good 
evening, sir. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Whose is that white horse ? is it yours ? 2. No, it is my 
cousin's ; the black one belongs to me. 3.1 find his more beautiful 
than yours. 4. Yes, he is a handsome horse ; there are few as 

— "handsome. 5. How much did he pay for him ? 6. He cost him two 
hundred and fifty dollars ; it is not dear. 7. It is a good price for 

^a horse ; but there are some horses which cost still morgan d which 
are not as good as that one. 8. He looks very gentle^ 9. What 

_^have you done with the (du) little horse that you bought of (d) 
Mr. Charles ? 10. I have him yet. 11. Have you him here ? 12. 
No, I left him in the country. 13. Do you not desire to sell him? 

14. No, I have no mind to be without a horse. I have need of one 
in winter, and I like always to have a horse of my own (a moi), 
when .the, d'esire takes me to make a tour (un tour) in the country. 

15. You are right ; I do not like horses that I am not acquainted 
with. 

16. Where is your sister ? She has gone to a party of pleas- 
ure in the city. 17. Is there danger in passing that river? 18. 
There is no danger. 19. I have hardly any money about me (sur 



THE SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



261 



moi) ; lend me a few dollars. 20. Here are three ; I can lend them 
to you. 21. Do not the French love novelty? 22. Yes, all men 
love novelty. 23. Does your friend smoke ? 24. No, sir, he does 
not like tobacco. 25. Does he know how to swim 1 26. Yes, he 
swims very well. 



76.— SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LECON. 

PAST ANTERIOE TENSE. 

1. The past anterior is formed by annexing the past participle to the past definite of 
the auxiliary ; thus, 

Past anterior of diner, to dine, and venir, to come. 
J'eus dine, tu eus dine, il eut dine, nous eumes dine, vous eutes dine, 

I had dined, thou hadst dined, he had dined, we had dined, you had dined, 

Us eurent dine, they had dined. 
Jefusvenu, lufnsvenu, ilfidvenu, nous fumes venus, vous fates venus, 
I had come, thou hadst come, he had come, we had come, you had come, 

ilsfurent venus, they had come. 

2. This tense denotes that a past action had been done immediately "before another ac- 
tion, also past. It is generally preceded by an adverb or conjunction expressing immediate 
time, and attended by another verb in the past definite or indefinite. (See previous rules, 
pages 237 and 242.) Aussitot que /eus dine je sortis ; J^ai ecrit cette lettre aujourd'hui 
aussitot quefEus dine. 

3. The adverbs and conjunctions generally preceding this tense are these: 

"When. Lorsque, quand. 
After. Apres que. 



. „ ( Aussitot que. 

As soon as, i . * 

( Sitot que. Pes que. 

Hardly. A peine. 

Yesterday as soon as I had breakfast- 
ed I went to school. 

Yesterday evening, as soon as we had 
received the news, we went home. 

This morning, when he had breakfast- 
ed, he set out. 



No sooner. Pas plus tot. 
Hier aussitot que feus dejeune j'allai a 
l'ecole. 

Hier soir, des que nous eumes re$u la 
nouvelle, nous allames chez nous. 

Ce matin quand il eut dejeune, il est 
parti. 



4. This tense may also be used without any other verb, when accompanied by some 
phrase denoting immediate time, or when it expresses the completion of an action at a pre- 
cise time. 

They had soon finished. lis eurent bientot fini. 

Vfe had finished before them. Nous eumes fini avant eux. 

5. When something continuous or habitual is spoken of, instead of this tense with the 
past definite, the pluperfect with the imperfect is used. 

He used to read as soon as he had 11 lisait aussitot qu'il avait soupe. 
supped. 

You used to go out when you had 

dined. 
To fit, to become. 
Not to fit. 



Vous sortiez quand vous aviez dine. 

Aller Men, seoir (not used in the inf.). 
Alter mal, ne pas bien aller. 



H 11 17 12 17 7 16 1 7 22 17 

aus-si-to£, si-to?, des, lorske, a-pres, plus tit. 



262 



THE SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



To salt. Any. 

The volume.* The cause. 

To enter. A revolution. 



Saler. Une ficrue. 
Le volume. La cause. 
Entrer. Une revolution. 



Entrer takes itre for auxiliary. 



Certain. A kead-dress. 
The supper. A toilet. 
To sup. Too soon. 
Immediately. Soon enough. 



Certain. Une coiffure. 
Le souper. Une toilette. 
Souper. Trop tut. 
Aussitot. Assez tot. 



Toes that head-dress fit that lady ? or Cette coiffure va-t-elle bien (sied-elle) 



1. Cette coiffure ira bien a cette dame. 2. Le gareon sera iei 
assez tot pour aller ckereher olu sel et saler les poissons. 3. Com- 
bien de volumes de cette histoire y a-t-il ! 4. II y en a trois. 5. 
Savez-vous la cause de la revolution anglaise ? 6. Je la connais fort 
bien. 7. La nouvelle est-elle certaine ? 8. Elle est certaine et tres 
agreable. 9. Cette ouvrier est-il fatigue ! 10. II est bien fatigue. 
11. A quelle heure soupez-vous ? 12. Quand j'ai bien dine, je ne 
soupe point. 13. Voila de bonne prunes et de bonnes figues, en 
voulez-vous ? 14. Je veus des figues mais non pas des prunes. 15. 
A quelle heure entrez-vous dans voire charnbre ? 16. J'y entre a 
buit beures. 17. Je fais ma toilette de bonne heure. 18. Aussitot 
que vous futes arrives la semaine passee allates-vous voir le gene- 
ral ? 19. Xon, aussitot que nous fiimes arrives, nous allames chez 
notre ami. 20. Quand avez-vous recu ma lettre? 21. Hier des 
que je fus entre dans ma charnbre je la recus. 22. Yotre frere est- 
il alle a la campagne ? 23. Oui. a peine fut-il arrive hier qu'il re- 
partit pour la campagne. 24. Yos amis sont-ils arrives ? 25. Oui, 
monsieur, ce matin, a peine eumes-nous dejeune qu'ils sont arrives. 

1. Did Charles go to school on 3Ionday ? 2. Yes, madam ; 
when he had breakfasted, he went to school. 3. Are the masons 
here ? 4. Xo ; last Saturday, as soon as they had finished their 
work, they departed. 5. Did you go to your uncle's early on Satur- 
day ! 6. TVe went there as soon as we had dined. 7. TYhat 
didst thou do yesterday ? 8. Yesterday, after I had breakfasted, 

* In books, volume denotes that which is bound into one : tome, the division of a work 
made by the author. The former may contain several of the latter. They are sometimes 
synonymous. Tome is less used. 



Does that style of hair-dressing 
become that lady ? 
It does not fit her. 



Elle lui va mal (ne lui sied pas bien). 



a certe dame ? 



1 6 13 15 23 17 3 6 5 15 r2 1221 7 14 30 3 13 6 SO 5 

sa-ler. fig-we - , vo-lum^, eauz<?. en-trer. re-vo-lu-tioa. cer-tain. coi/ : fure,- sou-per, toi-let&. 



THE SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 263 

I read; and after I had dined, I went to my aunt's. 9. As soon 
as I had received your letter, the other day, I carried it to your 
brother's. . 10. As soon as the countryman had bought those fish 
last week, did he not salt them? 11. He salted them all. 12. 
Where did you go yesterday 1 13. As soon as we had breakfasted, 
we went to the country. 14. Is the Frenchman at your house? 
15. No, sir ; when he had arrived yesterday, he went to my 
brother's. 

16. What does the cook send for? 17. He sends for some salt 
to salt the meat. 18. Has he salted the soup? 19. He has salted 
it too much. 20. That head-dress becomes that lady ; do you not 
admire it? 21. I admire it much. 22. Do you know the causes 
which brought (on) the French revolution ? I am not acquainted 
with them all. 23. Do you like figs better than peaches ? 24. No ; 
I like peaches as much as figsT" 25. That coat does not fit you. 
26. At what o'clock does the scholar enter into his room? 27. He 
enters there at eight o'clock every morning. 28. Is that house to 
be sold ? 29. No, it is to be let. 30. I do not wish to go to church 
too soon ; if we go there at eleven o'clock it will be soon enough, 
and not too soon. 31. I shall go there as soon as you. 32. My 
brother will make his toilet immediately. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. Ju» 

1. What were your brothers doing when you left them? 2. 
They were writing letters to their friends. 3. I have some letters 
to write before supper, and I had almost forgotten it. 4. I write 
my letters in the evening. 5. I cannot ; my sight is a little weak 
at present. 6. What has made your sight weak-?-""^. I believe 
that it ^is from having read too much at night, as I did the winter . 
past. 8. That is bad ; it is necessary to take care of your sight. 

9. Next week we are going to make a party of pleasure in the 
country ; you will go (viendrez) also, will you nof v" 10. Certainly 
(certainement) ; who will be of the party? 11. Miss B., George 
0. and his sister, our cousins, and several other persons. 12. That 
will be very agreeable ; where shall we go? 13. We do not know 
yet ; but I think Ave shall go to the same place where we usually 
(ordinairement) go, 14-. I know a place which is quite (tout) as 
beautiful as that where we were the last time, and I like better to 
go there (Id) this time, if the others consent to it (?/). 15. Well, 
we will see what they think of it ; as for me (quant d^ifioi), I like 
novelty. 16. That is just (tout juste) my reason ; I believe that it ' 
will be more agreeable than to go always to the same place ; and 



204 



THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



as that of which I speak to you is near the river, we shall be able 
to make a tarn (un tour) in a boat {en bateau). 17. Very well, 
we shall have one pleasure more. 



77.— SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. 

PAST ANTERIOR INDEFINITE TENSE. 

1. The past anterior indefinite has the same relation to the past anterior that the 
past indefinite has to the past definite. It is used when the accompanying words are such 
as to require the past anterior, and the time such as to require the past indefinite, i. e., not 
excluding the present day; and it is accompanied by a verb in the past indefinite. 

2. It is formed by annexing the past participle to the past indefinite of the auxiliary; 
thus, 

J'ai eu dine, tu as eu dine, il a eu dine, nous avons eu dine, vous avez eu dine, 
I had dined, thou hadst dined, he had dined, we had dined, s you had dined, 
Us avaient eu dine, they had dined. * 

"When I bad breakfasted this morn- Quand j'ai eu dejeune ce matin, je 
ing, I came here. suis venu ici. 

3. This tense, however, is but little used, and in the above phrase a different construc- 
tion would generally be preferred; as, Apres avoir dejeune ce matin, je suis venu ici. 



The past definite o/"venir, to come, and tenir, to hold, is irregulc 



Je vins, tu vins, il vint, 

I came, thou earnest, he came, 

Je tins, tu tins, il tint, 

I held, thou heldest, he held, 

Did you come here last week ? 
We came here, and our brothers came 
also. 

Didst thou come here early ? 

No, I came here late. 

Did you hold the horses? 

We did not hold them, the servants 

held them. 
Can there be ? There can be. 
There cannot be. 
To offend. Riches. 
To wish. The look. 
To take place. The ceremony. 
It takes place. Immediately. 
To try. The Up. 
Commendable. The cheek. 
The coin, change, money. 
Dangerous. 

Occupied. Places occupied. 



nous vmmes, 
we came, 

nous tlnmes, 
we held, 



vous vlntes, 
you came, 
vous tlntes, 
you held, 



thus, 

Us vinrent, 
they came. 

Us tinrent, 
they held. 



Vtntes-rous ici la semaine derniere ? 
Nous y vinmes, et nos freres y vinreni 
aussi. 

Vins-tu ici de bonne heure? 

Non, j'y vins tard. 

Tintes-vous les chevaux ? 

Nous ne les tlnmes pas, les domestiques 

les tinrent. 
Peut-il y avoir ? II peut y avoir. 
II ne peut pas y avoir. 
Offenser. La richesse, les richesses. 
Souhaiter. La mine. 
Avoir lieu. La ceremonie. 
II a lieu. Immediatement. 
Essay er (de bef. inf.). La levre. 
Louable. La joue. 
La monnaie. 

Dangereitx. Dangereuse. 
Occupe. Des places occupees. 



14 14 14 14 14 15 3 6 12 5 IS 7 6 13 5 5 15 13 

vins, vinmes, vintes, xmrent, tins, o/-fen-ser, ri-chesse, sou-Aai-ter, mine, ce-re-tno-nie, 

12 5 121 3 5 5 126 7 IS 1 19 15 7 3 10 3 10 15 22 6 

im-rae-diat-men£, es-sa-yer, levre, lou-able. joue, mo?i-naie, dange-reuce, dange-reuze, oc-cu-pe. 



THE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



265 



It will take place immediately. II aura lieu immediatement. 

I wish you a good morning. Je vous souhaite lc bonjour. 

He wishes us a good evening. 11 nous souhaite le bonsoir. 

Lend me the change of a dollar. Pretez-moi la monnaie d'un dollar. 

That roast meat looks good. Ce roti 'a bonne mine. 

He is a good-looking man. C'est un homme de bonne mine. 

4. "We have seen (Lessons 81, S3, 34, and 42), that negative partitives, when the meaning 
is affirmative, do not omit le, hut take du, de la, or des, as if affirmative. We may add fur- 
ther, that affirmative partitives, when the meaning is negative, omit the article ; they take 
de only, as if negative. This is seen in the following phrases: 

He has written his exercise without II a ecrit son theme sans faire de 

making any mistake. faute. 
He cannot write his exercise without II ne peut pas ecrire son theme sans 

making mistakes. faire des f antes.* 

5. Negative partitives which are limited by an adjective or following clause, may have 
an affirmative character, and will then take the partitive article ; thus, 

Do not lend him any change. Ne lui pretez pas de monnaie. 

Do not lend him counterfeit coin. Ne lui pretez pas de la fausse mon- 

naie.\ 

1. Etes-vous venu ici la semaine passee ? 2. J'y vins (suis venu) 
hier et mon frere aussi. 3. Vintes-vous ici la semaine derniere ? 
4. Nous n'y vinmes pas, mais nos cousins y vinrent. 5. Get homme 
n'offense-t-il pas ses amis? 6. Si, monsieur, il offense frequem- 
ment ses meilleurs amis. 7. Peut-il y avoir du danger a aller sur 
le lac ? 8. II n'y a pas le moindre danger. 9. Je vous souhaite 
une bonne sante et de grandes richesses. 10. La ceremonie aura 
lieu cette apres-midi. 11. Votre joue est enflee ; y avez-vous mal? 
12. Non, j'ai mal aus dents. 13. Avez-vous essaye votre nouvelle 
plume ? 14. Je 1'ai essayee, elle est bonne. 15. On m'a dit que 
cet homme est dangereux. 16. La fille de notre voisin est une 
demoiselle de bonne mine, elle a les joues fraiches et les levres ver- 
meilles. 17. Faire du bien a autrui est une action louable. 

1. When did you come here ? 2.1 came here on Tuesday. 3. 



* In the former of these two phrases, the idea is negative, that he makes no mistakes' 
and de only is used ; in the latter, it is affirmative, that he makes some mistakes, and the 
partitive article is used. 

t The idea in this latter phrase is affirmative in character : Lend him some money, out 
not counterfeit. 

I will make you no reproaches. Je ne vous ferai pas de reprocJies. 

I will make you no frivolous reproaches. Je ne vous ferai pas des reprochesfrivoles. 

I have no money. Je n'ai pas d" 1 argent. 

I have no money to spend madly. Je n'ai pas de V argent pour la depenser fol- 

lement. 

Here is the same distinction. First, I will make you no reproaches (negative). Sec- 
ond, I will make you rejjroaches, but not frivolous ones (affirmative in effect). Third, / 
have no money (negative). Fourth, I have money, but not to spend madly (affirmative in 
effect). Thus we see that an adjective or limiting clause may give a kind of affirmative 
meaning to negative partitives, when they take the partitive articles, du, de la, des. 

12 



266 



TEE SEVENTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



Did your brothers come also 1 4. No ; Charles came with me. 5. 
Did you come in the morning 1 6. No, we came in the evening at 
half-past seven. 7. J^iiy didst thou hold thy cousin bv the arm 
yesterday, when I saw thee in the street ? 8. I held him by the 
arm in order to speak to him. 9. Can there be danger in staying- 
here? 10. There can be much danger. 11. Have you not offended 
that lady? 12. I do not know, but I did not wish to offend her. 
13. Do you wish for great riches ? 14. No, sir ; I wish for good 

.^--health, but not for great riches. 15. Did your neighbor wish you a 
good evening ? 16. Yes, sir, and he wished me all kind (toutes 

- sortes) of prosperity (prosperite) . 17. Will the ceremony take 
place early ? 18. It will take place immediately. 19. Do not 
offend the master. 

, 20. Your cheek is swollen ; have you a pain in it ? 21. Yes, I 
have a pain in the right cheek. 22. Have you tried my knife? 
23. I have tried it, and I find it very good. 24. Does that sick 
man try to walk? 25. He tries, but he cannot walk much. 26. 
Do you do good to those who have offended you? 27. Yes, sir ; it 
is an action very commendable. 28. Does the Frenchman smoke ? 
29. He never smokes, but the German smokes all day. 30. Do 
you know how to swim? 31. Yes, sir; I swim every evening. 
32. Does that head-dress fit your cousin ? 33. It does not fit her. 
34. When will you come for your money? 35. I come for it now, 
36. I have just given some money to your brother ; you have not 
seen him ? 37. Yes, I have just seen him in the street. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. How many shall we be in all at that party of pleasure ? 2. 
Twelve or fifteen at least. 3. That is enough; when there are too 
many persons (de monde) it is not so agreeable. 4. Have you 
spoken of it to Miss B. ? 5. Yes ; she will come, and she is (doit) 
to bring her cousin. 6. I have told her that you will go for them. 
s 7. Very willingly ; they dwell on my road ; but how will they go ? 
8. On horseback. But I (moije) shall go in a carriage with my 
sister. 9. Not at all ; I shall have myself (moi-meme) the pleasure 
of conducting (mademoiselle) your sister, and she will go on horse- 
back also. 10. Then I will go on horseback ; I prefer it. 11. At 
what o'clock shall we return ? 12. A little late in the afternoon. ^ 

13. Is it not John who is coming yonder ? 14. Yes ; I am cer- 
tain that it is he. 15. He was sick the other day. 16. He is still 
weak ; let us go to meet him. 17. Good morning, John ; we are 



THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



267 



delighted to see you. 18. You have been very sick, have you not? 
19. My faith, yes ; the physician believed that I was going to die, 
but I have had the goooMortune to deceive him. 20. What was 
the matter with you ? 21. I had the fever ; and I suffered much 
from the headache during all the time that I was sick. 22. Do you 
begin to regain (reprendre) your strength ? 23. Yes, I gain some 
every day. 24. Then you are no more in danger ? 
God. 



25. No, thank 



J'ecrivis, 
I wrote, 



78.— SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITlEME leqon. 

PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED. 
The past definite of ecrire, to write, is irregular ; thus, 
tuecrivis, il ecrimt, nous ecrivhnes, voua ecrivltes, ils ecrivirent, 
thou wrotest, he wrote, we wrote, you wrote, they wrote. 

last 



Did you write to your friends 
week? 

We wrote to them, and they wrote to 



Ecrivtces-Y ous a vos amis la semaine 

derniere ? 
Nous leur ecrivimes, et ils nous ecrivir- 
ent. 

£crivis-tu a ton pere ? 
Je lui ecrivis, et mon frere lui ecrivit 
aussi. 

TJie past definite of coudre, to sew, is irregular ; thus, 
Je cousis, tu cousis, il cousit, nous eousimes, vous cousttes, ils cousirent, 

we sewed, you sewed, they sewed. 



Didst thou write to thy father ? 
I wrote to him, and my brother wrote 
to him also. 



I sewed, 



thou sewedst, he cewed, 



Didst thou sew thy copy-book yester- 
day? 

I sewed mine and Charles sewed his. 

Did you sew the buttons on your 
coats ? 

We did not sew them, the tailors sewed 

them. 
An enemy. Snoio. 
A looking-glass. A mirror (large). 
A pie. Astronomy. 
A metre. Mathematics. 
The college. For (conj.). 
Ciphering, computation. Different. 
To call. To throio, throw away. 



Cousis-tu. ton cahier hier ? 

Je cousis le mien et Charles cousit le 
sien. 

Cousites-Yous les boutons de vos ha- 
bits? 

Xous ne les eousimes pas, les tailleurs 

les cousirent. 
TJn ennemi. La neige. 
Un miroir. Une glace. 
Tin pate. ~L? astronomic. 
Un metre. Les maihematiques. 
Le college. Car. 
Le calcul. Different. 
Appeler. Jeter. 

mute. 



1. Verbs in eler and eter double the I and t when these letters are followed by 
{AcheUr and geler, we have seen, Lessons 27 and 62, are exceptions.*) 



* I have here followed the academy. 
lev, geler, harceler, and peler. 



It makes sis exceptions, acJieter, boureler, dice- 



5 12 12 18 12 5 12 7 12 50 1 2 5 1 15 15 13 5 1 5 1 

e-cri-vi.9, cou-si-s, enne-mi. neige, mi-roir, glace, pa-te, as-tro-no-mie, metre, ma-tAe-ma- 

12 15 7 1 22 12 5 3 I 6 6 

tiktf, college, cal-cul, di/-fe-ren£, appe-ler, jeter. 



268 



THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



J'appelle, tu appelles, il appelle, nous appelons, vous appelez, Us appellent, 
I call, thou callest, he calls, we call, you call, they call. 

Do you throw away your gloves ? Jetez-Yoxxs vos gants? 

I do not throw them away. Je ne les, jette pas. 

It is two hours since I finished. II y a deux heures que j'ai fini. 

It is two years since I have been there. II y a deux ans que je rc'y ai ete. 

2. Que used as above in the sense of deptiis que, since, requires ne before the following 
verb, when the phrase can be made negative in English.* 

It is an hour since I dined. II y a une heure que j'ai dine. 

It is two months since I saw him. II y a deux mois que je ne l'ai vu. 

3. The various meanings of devoir have been spoken of (Lesson 61). 

My brother is to arrive to-morrow. Mon frere doit arriver demain. 

They are to go home this evening. Us doivent aller chez eux ce soir. 

Something is to happen. Quelque chose doit arriver. 

Is there to be ? are there to be ? Doit-il y avoir ? 

There is to be, must be. II doit y avoir. 

There must have been. 11 doit y avoir eu. 

Is there to be a ball at your house ? Doit-il y avoir un bal chez vous ? 

There is to be one. II doit y en avoir un. 

The ceremony is to take place to-mor- La ceremonie doit avoir lieu demain. 
row. 

That man's lips are thick. Cet homme a les levres epaisses. 

1. Quand avez-vous ecrit votre theme? 2. J'ecrivis le mien 
hier, mon frere ecrivit le sien avant hier, et mes cousins ecrivirent 
les leurs marcli ; ecrivites-vous les votres hier ? 3. Nous les ecri- 
vimes luncli. 4. Cousis-tu ton pantalon hier? 5. Je ne le cousis 
pas, le tailleur le cousit. 6. Ne cousites-vous pas vos cahiers hier ? 
7. Nous cousimes les notres et nos cousins cousirent les leurs. 8. 
Cet homme est genereux, il fait clu bien a ses ennemis. 9. M'ap- 
pelez-vous ? 10. Je vous appelle. 11. Jetez-vous votre argent? 
12. Je ne le jette pas. 13. Que jette cet ecolier ? 14. II jette ses 
vieux papiers. 15. Qu'achete ce jeune homme ? 16. II achete un 
pate, une ^oule d'ivoire et un petit miroir. 17. Y a-t-il heaucoup 
de neige au Canada cet hiver ? 18. Oui, il y a deux pieds de neige 
sur la terre. 19. Cet el eve sait-il l'arithmetique ? 20. II sait toutes 
les mathematiques et l'astronomie. 21. Savez-vous ce qui doit ar- 
river ? 22. II doit arriver quelque malheur. 23. Quand irez-vous 



* In the former of the above phrases we cannot say with propriety, It is two hours that 
I have not finished ; but in the latter we may say. It is two years that I have notbeen there. 
So in the following we cannot say, H- is an hour that I have not dined, but we may say, It 
is two months that I have not seen him. Hence in two of the phrases ne is used. 

15 1 21 

ap-pelZ6, apj?<3-lons. 



THE SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



269 



au college'? 24. J'irai bientot, 25. La ceremonie doit-elle avoir 
lieu aujourd'hui ? 26. Non, elle doit avoir lieu demain soir. 27. 
Charles et son frere ne sont-ils pas tres-diffe rents? 28. lis sont 
tres-differents. 

1. Do you try the steel pen or the gold one ? 2. I try the gold 
one. 3. At what o'clock is the company to arrive ? 4. It is to ar- 
rive before ten. 5. Is there to be a ball at your house to-night ? 
6. There is to be one. 7. Has your friend recovered (repris) his 
strength ? 8. No, sir, he does not walk much yet ; it is more than 
two weeks since he has gone out of his room. 9. Do those lazy 
scholars try to learn their lessons % 10. They do not try much ; it 
is three days since they have learned a lesson well. 11. Is there to 
be a party of pleasure at your aunt's this evening ? 12. There is 
to be one. 13. How many metres of this cloth do you wish for? 
14. I wish for four metres of this cloth, and six of that. 15. Is 
this computation of interest exact (exact) ? 16. No, that computa- 
tion is false (faux), but this is exact. 

17. You will not find your friend at home, for he has just gone 
out. 18. Has your brother gone to college? 19. He has not gone 
yet, for he is only thirteen years old. 20. Are you studying as- 
tronomy? 21. I am studying astronomy and all the mathematics. 
22. Do you wish for some chicken pie ? 23. No, sir, I thank you ; 
I have just dined ; but this little boy wishes for some, for he is very 
hungry. 24. At what hour will you have supped ? 25. I shall 
have supped at eight. 26. Who has broken your beautiful mirror ? ~ 
27. The neighbor's son broke it with his ball. 28. Do you like' 
to throw snow-balls ? 29. I like sometimes to throw snow-balls and 
to run in the snow. 30. The metre * is the element (element) of 
all other measures (mesures). 31. Those men are very different in 
opinion (d f opinion) ; they are enemies. 32. Did you write to your 
father yesterday ? 33.1 wrote to him yesterday, and my sister 
wrote to him Saturday. 34. Did the tailors sew your coat on 
Thursday? 35. They sewed it on Friday, and the seamstress 
sewed my pantaloons on Saturday. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you seen the gentleman of whom we were speaking 

* A metre is the ten millionth part of the arc of a meridian, extending from the equator 
to the pole, and is the basis of all other measures to the French. It exceeds the English 
yard, being equal to 39.33 English inchec. 



270 



THE SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. 



yesterday ? 2. I have seen him, and asked him the question that 
you desired. 3. What says he of it? 4. He accepts the offer 
which you make him. 5. Then it is an affair settled (arrangee). 
6. I will go and see him to-day or to-morrow. 7. You know where 
he dwells 1 8. He dwells, I believe, in one of the brick houses 
which Mr. K,. had built in the spring ; but I do not know in which. 
9. It is the largest. 10. That in wXich Mr. B. lived? 11. Exact- 
ly ; it is the same. 12. I will go to his house to-morrow morning. 
13. Go there early, for he goes to his store as soon as he has break- 
fasted. 14. I will go there at half-past seven. 

15. VAen I dwelt in the country, I had always a dish of fruit 
in the morning ; and I made my breakfast on fruit and breads 16. 
There is nothing better ; but one cannot have fruit in the city. 17. 
No, it is difficult to find any good, and it is very dear^. 18. I like 
- much peaches or figs with milk. 19. I prefer strawberries with a 
little sugar and cream. 20. Have you written to the doctor? 21. 
-\-Yes, sir; on Tuesday, as soon as I had read his letter, I wrote one 
to him. 22. After the tailor had finished my coat on Monday, he 
sewed my pantaloons. 23. Is the captain at your house ? 24. No ; 
hardly had he arrived on Thursday, when he set out again for the 
country. . |- • 

( ' 

79.— SOIXANTE-DIX-NEUVlEME LEQON. 

PAST DEFINITE CONTINUED. 

TJie past definite of naItre, to be bom, is irregular ; thus, 

Jenaguis, tu naguis, ilnaguit, nous nagutmes, vous nagultes, Us naguirent, 
I was born, thou wast born, be was born, we were born, you were born, they were born. 

I was born in January, 1830. <Je naquis (or suis ne) en janvier, 

1830. 

Were you born the same year? Naquites-vovs (etes-vous nes) la meme 

annee ? 

We were born the same year. Nous naquhnes (sommes nes) la meme 

annee. 

1. In speaking of living persons, the past indefinite of nattre is more generally used ; 
but the pluperfect must be employed of those known to be dead. 

That soldier is brave, where was he Ce soldat est brave, ou est-il ne ? 
born? 

The old soldier is dead, where was he Le vieux soldat est mort, ou etait-il ne ? 
born ? 

My brothers were born in America. Mes freres sont nes en Amerique. 
His ancestors were born in England. Ses ancetres etaient nes en Angleterre. 

The past definite o/mourir, to die, is irregular ; thus, 
Je mourus, tu mounts, il mound, nous mourumes, voxis mourutes, Us moururent, 
I died, thou diedst, he died, we died, you died, they died. 

1 12 3 8 18 22 

na-kis, an-cetr<?s, mou-rus. 



THE SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. 271 

After having lived seventy years, that Apres avoir vecu soixante-dix ans, ce 

great man died. grand'homme mourut. 

His brothers died at the same time. Ses freres moururent (or sont morts) 

dans le meme temps. 
To conquer. Conquerir (as acquerir, Lesson 65). 

To vanquish. Vaincre. 



2. Conquerir applies to a country; vaincre, to an opponent or a people. 
Jevaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc, nous vainquons, vous vainquez, 

I overcome, thou overcomest, he overcomes, we overcome, you overcome, 
Us vainquent, they overcome. 

We overcome all our enemies. Nous vainquons tous nos ennemis. 

He overcomes his anger. II vainc sa colere. 

Alexander conquered Asia. Alexandre conquit l'Asie. 

3. The irregularity .of vaincre and its compounds consists in changing c into qu before 
all vowels except u. So the past definite is 

Je vainquis, tu vainquis, il vainquit, nous vainquimes, vous vainquites, 
I overcame, thou overcamest, he overcame, we overcame, you overcame, 

Us vainquirent, they overcame. 

Ccesdr vanquished the Britons. Cesar vainquit les Bretons. 

The Romans vanquished the Gauls. Les Romains vainquirent les Gaidois. 
The shade. A difficulty. Uombrage, Vomhre. Une difficidte. 

Ombrage is the object intercepting the light; ombre, the effect of such interception. 
Toicards. Thus. Vers, envers. Ainsi. 

4. Vers denotes towards in a physical sense ; envers, in a moral sense. 
He runs towards the river. II court vers la riviere. 

You are always good towards me. Vous etes toujours bon envers moi. 
On the contrary. A shop. Au contraire. Une boutique. 

5. W7ien, interrogative, is always quand; otherwise, lorsque and quand have nearly 
the same use. 

When will you have your money ? Quand aurez-vous votre argent ? 
When I shall see my partner. Lorsque (quand) je verrai mon associe. 

Rainfalls. II tombede lapluie (better il pleut). 

Snow falls. ' II tombe de la neige (better il neige). 

To trust. To oblige. Faire credit. Obligor. 

6. OUiger, to compel, takes d before the infinitive ; meaning to do a favor, it takes de. 
1 His^tH«ty obliges him to do that. Son devoir \ oblige a faire cela. 
4 You will oblige me much by doing Vous rn'obligerez beaucoup de faire cela 

that for me. pour moi. 

To do well. To do badly. Bien faire. Mai faire. 

To do good. To do evil. Faire du bien. Faire du mal. 

To foresee. Foreseen. Prevoir. Prevu. 

Generous. Genereux. Gcnereuse. 

21 5 12 14 14 ]4 21 14 6 14 1 5 3 14 12 21 

con-ke-rir, vaincre, vaincs, vain-kons, vain-kes, Yainkent, A-lek-sandre, vain-kis, om- 

1 21 12 12 22 C 7 3 7 14 12 21 7 18 12 15 12 6 5 21 5 

brag<?, ombre, dif-fi-cul-te, vers, en-vers, ain-si, con-trair<?, bou-tike, ob-li-ger, pre-voir, pre- 

22 5 5 10 5 5 10 5 1 4 21 15 14 17 20 

vu, ge-ne-reucc, ge-ne-reuze, Ce-zar, Bre-tons, ro-main, Gau-lois. 



272 



THE SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON. 



1. Ou es-tu ne ? 2. Je suis ne en Amerique. 3. Mon pere 
etait ne en Angleterre ; il mourut en janvier 1846. 4. Ses fibres 
sont-ils morts ? 5. Oui, ils moururent la meme annee. 6. Ou 
etaient-ils nes ? 7. lis etaient nes en Angleterre. 8. Ou est votre 
Jrere? 9. II vient cle sortir. 10. Napoleon vainquit beaucoup 
d'ennemis. 11. Ces arbres font un bel ombrage. 12. Je trouve 
de la difficulty a apprendre cette legon. 13. Vous pensez que cet 
officier reussira a la guerre ; moi, je pense au contraire qu'il ne 
reussira pas. 14. Ou est le charpentier ? 15. II est dans sa bou- 
tique. 16. Cette chose est-elle ainsi? 17. Elle est ainsi. 18. Le 
charpentier est alle vers sa boutique. 19. Cet homme est bon en- 
vers tout le monde. 20. Neige-t-il? 21. II tombe de la neige et 
de la pluie. 22. La pluie ne fera-t-elle pas du mal aux fruits? 
23. Non, elle fera du bien aux fruits et aux fleurs. 24. Avez-vous 
prevu cet accident ? 25. Je ne l'ai pas prevu. 26. Votre voisins 
est une femme obligeante ; n'est-ce pas ? 27. Oui, c'est une bonne 
femme, obligeant toujours ses amis lorsqu'elle peut le faire. 

1. Do you trust that man? 2. I trust him, for he is very honest. 
3. Does your father oblige you to study ? 4. He does not oblige 
me ; I study with good will./ 5. Does the neighbor oblige you 
when he lends you books ? 6. He obliges me much. 7. Those 
trees are large, and they make a tine shade. 8. Yes, and I find 
their shade (F ombre) very agreeable when it is warm. 9. I learn 
my lessons without any difficulty ; do you find difficulty in learning" 
your lessons % 10. On the contrary, I learn them very easily. 11. 
Where is the barber going? 12. He is going to his shop. 13. 
Where is his shop? 14. It is in Eoyai-street. 15. Look towards 
the east, and you will see the moon. 

16. Does the rain fall ? 17. It does not rain, but much snow 
falls. 18. Does your brother often write thus? 19. No; he never 
writes thus. 20. Do the^wise foresee events (evenements) ! 21. 
No, not always ; God alone foresees what is to happen. 22. Did 
you foresee your misfortunes ? 23. I did not foresee them. 24. Is 
not that man generous? 25. He is very generous. 26. Those 
ladies are generous toward the poor ; they give them much alms* 
27. The bad weather has done harm to the fruit, but the fine 
weather which there is at present will do it good. 28. "When did 
your father die? 29. He died March 4, 1855. 30. Was he born 



THE EIGHTIETH LESSON". 



273 



in 1800 % 31. He was bom May 5, 1798. 32. Was he born in 
England % 33. He was born in England, and died m the United 
States (les Etats-Unis). 34. Where were you bornf 35. We 
were born in New York. 36. My brothers died in Boston ; they 
were born in London. 37. Caesar vanquished the Gauls. 38. Did 
he overcome all his enemies ? 39. He did not overcome them all. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Let us go to the house ; it must be time to sup now, and I 
am going to put on another coat. 2. You can put it on after sup- 
per. 3. I like better to make my toilet before supper. 4. As you 
please ; mine is already made. 5. We shall go out as soon as we 
shall have supped, shall we not {n'est-ce ^as) ? 6. Yes ; it is neces- 
sary to go a little early to the house of those young ladies, if we 
wish to be certain to find them at home.. 7. I do not wish to go 
there too soon either (non plus)s 8. If we arrive there at eight it 
will be soon enough, and not too soon. 9. Well, it is eight o'clock 
wanting five minutes, and here is the house ; let us go in. 

10. How long (how much time) were you in* college? 11. 
About two years and a half. 12. I was not quite seventeen years 
old when I entered. 13. Then you came out (of it) before the age 
of twenty years. 14. Yes ; I finished my studies very young, that 
is to say at college, for I have always studied since. 15. How old 
are you? 16. I am twenty-eight years old. 17. When have you 
seen the professor? 18. It is eight years since I have seen him. 
19. He is dead. 20. When did he die ? 21. He died the 8th of 
February, 1858 ; he was born in Boston, 10th March, 1801. 22. 
Where were you born ? 23. I was born in New York. 



80.— QUATKE-VINGTIEME LEQON. 

IRREGULAR PAST DEFINITES. 

1. The irregular past definites, all of which have bow been given, are the following, with 
their compounds. 

INFINITIVE. PAST DEP. INFINITIVE. PAST DEF. INFINITIVE. PAST DEF. 

Avoir, eus, Les. 74. Faire, j£s, Les. 75. Vaincre, vainquis, Les. 79. 
Coudre, cousis, " 78. Mourir, mounts, " 79. Venir, vins, " 77. 

Ecrire, ecrivis, " 78. Naitre, naquis, " 79. Voir, -vis, " 75. 

Etre, fus, " 74. Tenir, tins, " 77. 

2. In English, any adjective preceded by the definite article may be used as a noun. Thi3 
cannot always be done in French. Heuce adjectives used in this way are very commonly 
translated into French by the adjective with the noun gens, homme, or some other general 
term. 

The young. The diligent. Les jeunes gens. Les gens diligents. 

The studious. The courageous. Les hommes studieux. Les gens cou- 

rageux. 

12* 



274 



THE EIGHTIETH LESSON. 



The industrious become rich. Les gens industrieux deviennent riches. 

The studious become learned. Les ecoliers studieux deviennent sa- 

vants. 

8. We have seen that the past indefinite may generally be used for the past definite. 
When, therefore, the learner is in doubt which of the two to use, it will be safe to employ 
the past indefinite, except in narratives. 

That event. Bare-headed. Cet evenement. Nu-tete or tete nue. 

Barefoot. JSfu-pieds or pieds nus. 

4. TVhen the adjective nu precedes the noun, and forms with it an adverbial expres- 
sion, it is invariable ; but when it follows the noun, and does not form an adverbial expres- 
sion, it agrees in gender and number. 

He goes out barefoot. II sort nu-pieds or pieds nus. 

The bare property of an estate. ^-La nue propriete d'un bien. 
To cut, cut off. To split. Couper. Fendre. 

To steal, take away {from). To surprise. Derober (a). Surprendre. 

Surprendre, a compound of prendre, takes d before the infinitive. 

A surgeon. A wing. TJn chirurgien. line aile. 

The beak. Very hard. Le bee. Fort dar. 

Opposite {to). Opposite to the church. Vis-a-vis (de). Vis-a-vis de l'eglise. 

Since, from. The most part, majority. Depuis. La plupart. 

From the Rhine to the ocean. Depuis le Rhin jusqu'a l'ocean. 

Since his return. Depuis son retour. 

That noise gives me a violent headache. Ce bruit me fend la tete. 

5. "When any part of a person is the object of the verb, the possessor is preceded by d 
and not de, and the pronoun is the indirect object. 

You break your mother's heart. Vous fendez le cceur d votre mere. 

You break her heart. Vous lui fendez le cceur. 

The surgeon cut off that man's arm. Le chirurgien coupe le bras a cet 

homme. 

He cuts it off. II le lui coupe. 

6. In speaking of an action or state of past time, which is still continuing, the English 
employ a past tense, but the French the present ; thus, 

Have you lived here long ? Ya-t-il longtemps que vous demeurez 

ici? or, demeurez-XQViS, ici depuis 
longtemps ? 

I have lived here a year. J'y demeure depuis un an ; or, il y a 

un an que j'y demeure. 

I have had your book a month. II y a un mois que fai votre livre ; or, 

fai votre livre depuis un mois. 

7. The French use the present also to express what is true at the present time, although 
relating to a past event. 

It was we who opened the windows. Cest nous qui avons ouvertles fenetres. 

5 5 3 22 23 18 6 3 5 15 6 22 3 12 22 12 14 7 5 4 

e-vene-meni, nu, nue, cou-per, fendre, de-ro-ber, sur-prendre, chi-rur-gien, aile, bee, de- 

2212 22 1 

puis, plu-par£. 



THE EIGHTIETH LESSON. 



275 



He told me that charity was entirely a II me disait que la charite est une ver- 
Christian virtue. tu toute chretienne. 

9. An immediate future in English, is sometimes best translated into French by aller 
and the infinitive. 

If you wish, I will show you my copy- Si vous voulez, je vais vous montrer 

book. mon cahier. 

If you have no flowers I will give you Si vous n'avez pas de fleurs je vais 

some. vous en donner. 

I will go for my book. Je vais chercker mon livre. 

1. Les sages prevoient-ils tous les evenements ? 2. Non, ils ne 
les prevoient pas. 3. Ces petits garcons sortent-ils quelquefois nu- 
piecls (or pieds nus) ? 4. lis sortent souvent nu-pieds (pieds nus). 
5. Pourquoi cet homme sort-il nu-tete ? 6. II sort nu-tete parce 
qu'il n'a pas de chapeau. 7. Que coupez-vous ? 8. Je coupe ce 
baton. 9. Que coupe le chirurgien ? 10. II coupe le bras gauche 
a cet nomine. 11. Le barbier coupe-t-il les cheveux aux enfants? 
12. II les leur coupe. 13. Ces enfants font trop de bruit, ne fen- 
dent-ils pas la tete a leur mere ? 14. Non, car elle vient de sortir, 
fort heureusement. 15. Coupez-vous le bee a cet oiseau ? 16. Je lui 
coupe le bee et les ailes. 17. J'ai lu la plupart de ces livres. 18. Cet 
oiseau a les ailes fortes et le bee dur. 19. Le chirurgien demeure 
vis-a-vis de l'eglise. 20. Eutes-vous de la neige ici la semaine der- 
niere ? 21. Nous en eumes unpeu. 22. Combien de temps y a-t-il 
que vous etudiez l'allemand ? 23. II y a six mois que je l'etudie. 
24. Depuis combien de temps avez-vous mon livre % 25. Je l'ai 
depuis trois semaines. 

1. Are you not cutting that child's hair ? 2. I am cutting it for 
him. 3. Do you know the most part of the words of your lesson ? 
4. I know them all. 5. Were you not delighted to see your father 
on Saturday ? 6. We were all delighted to see him, and he was 
delighted to see us also. 7. Hadst thou time to arrive home yes- 
terday before the rain ? 8. No ; my brother had time to arrive at 
his house, but I had only the time to arrive at Mr. B.'s. 9. Have 
you been looking at that picture long ? 10. I have been looking 
at it hardly ten minutes. 11. How long has your friend been look- 
ing at it ? 12. He has been looking at it almost an hour. 13. Do 
you split wood with that ax ? 14. I do not split wood ; the serv- 
ant cuts and splits all the wood. 

15. Is the surgeon going to cut off that boy's arm ? 16. No, sir, 
he is going to cut off his finger. 17. Do you surprise your father ? 



276 



THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. 



18. I surprise him sometimes. 19. Does that news surprise you ? 
20. It surprises me much. 21. Do you live opposite to your store? 
22. No, I live opposite to the brick church. 23. Have you read 
the most part of those books ? 24. I have read them all. 25. Who 
has stolen your cloak ? 26. A thief stole it last week. 27. These 
^trees take away from us the view of the country. 28. Is not this 
wood harder than that ? 29. No, that wood is as hard as this. 
30. Did you foresee these events ? 31. I did not foresee them. 
32. How long have you been here ? 33. I have been here hardly 
half an hour. 34. It was I who lighted the fire. 35. I have here 
a letter from your brother ; if you wish, I will show it to you. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Good evening, young ladies ; we are delighted to see you so 
gay. 2. Good evening, sirs ; we are very much surprised to see 
you. 3. We thought you in China (Chine), it is so long a (tant) 
" time since we have seen you. 4. It is not from Our fault. 5. Un- 

^.^doubtedly not (que non) ; but come in ; take some chairs. 6. We 
have had so much business that we couM only go out late in the 
evening. 7. Very well ; there must have been much business this 
season, for all the gentlemen sing the same song. 8. I see well 
that you are laughing at us. 9. We have no desire to weep this 
evening ; but it is very true that all the gentlemen must have been 
(avoir ete) very much occupied this season. 

10. By good fortune, business is not always the same (de meme)^ 
and we shall have the pleasure of seeing you occasionally. 11. Yes, 
that is (Jest) to say, gentlemen, that you will come when you have 

^-nothing better (de mieux) to do ; will you not ? we thank you much 
for your goodness. 12. Ah, truly, ladies, you are too severe (se- 
veres) ; but we are charmed to see you in (de) so fine humor, for 
you laugh at all that we say. 



81. — QUATRE-VIXGT ET UNIfcME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. TnE pkesent of the subjuxctive is formed by dropping a>tt final of the present 
participle, and annexing the terminating letters, 

E, ES, E, IONS, IEZ, ENT. 

Thus paf.lee, to speak, present participle paiilant, makes 
Que je parle, qxCil parte, que vous parliez, 

That I may speak, that he may speak, that you may speak, 

Que tu paries, que nous parlions, qu'ils parlent, 

That thou mayest speak, that we may speak, that they may speak. 



1 12 21 1 125 

par-lions, par-lies. 



THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. 



277 



Sortie, to go out, present participle soetant, makes 
Que je sorte, gu'il sorte, qu6 vous sortiez, 

That I may go out, that he may go out, that you may go out 

Que tu sortes, que nous sortions, qu'ils sortent 

That thou mayest go out, that we may go out, that they may go out. 

Yoie, to see, present participle voyant, makes 

Que je voie* gu'il voie, que vous voyiez, 

That I may see, that he may see, that you may see, 

Que tu voies, que nous voyions, qu'ils voient, 

That thou mayest see, that we may see, that they may see. 

Diee, to say, present participle disant, makes 

Queje dise, qu'il dise, que vous disiez, 

That I may say, that he may say, that you may say, 

Que tu dises, que nous disions, qu'ils disent, 

That thou mayest say, that we may say, that they may say. 

1. The subjunctive mood is so called because it is subjoined to some other verb or 
phrase, on which it depends, and to which it is connected by que or a relative pronoun. It 
does not, like the indicative, affirm its meaning as a fact, but only presents it as a concep- 
tion of the mind,i and all the uses of this mood may be reduced to this one rule, as will be 
seen hereafter. For the instruction of the learner, however, it will be useful to give mi- 
nuter rules. 

I— Verbs used interrogatively or negatively, if followed by que and a dependent verb, 
generally govern that verb in the subjunctive, provided the subject of the dependent be 
different from that of the governing verb. 

Do you say that he goes out ? Dites-vous qu'il sorte ? 

I say that he goes out. Je dis qu'il sort. 

I do not believe that he sees us. Je ne crois pas qu'il nous voie. 

I know that he sees us. Je sais qu'il nous voit. 

Do you believe that we speak French? Croyez-vousquenousjoarZzorisfrancais? 

Ko, I believe that you speak English. Non, je crois que vous parlez anglais. 

Do you think that he says that ? Pensez-vous qu'il dise cela ? 

I am sure that he says it. Je suis certain qu'il le dit. 

2. "When there is no change of subject, the French prefer to use the infinitive ; and in 
all the following rules for governing the subjunctive, it is to be understood that there must 
be a change of subject. 

Does he believe that he is learned? Croit-il etre savant? 

Do you desire that you may be rich? Desirez-vous etre riches? 

By the side of, next to. People, folks. A cote de. Des gens. 

3. Adjectives preceding gens, as seen in Lesson 13, are generally feminine; those fol- 
lowing it arc masculine. 

Wicked people. Les mechantes gens, or les gens me- 

chants. 



* "We have seen (Lesson 26) that y in the termination of verbs becomes i before e mute. 

1 1 say that lie goes out. I know that he goes out. Here that he goes out is affirmed 
as a fact, and the indicative must be used in French, qu'il sort. Do you say that he goes 
out ? I do not say that he goes out. Here it is not affirmed as a fact, and the subjunctive 
must be used, qu'il sorte. 



16 20 20 1-2 21 20 12125 17 6 3 

sorte, voie, vo-yions, vo-yiea, co-te, gens. 



278 



THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON". 



Some dangerous people. De dangereuses gens, or des gens dan- 

gereux. 

To ripen. Ripening. Murir. Murissant. 

A cigar. Magnificent. Un cigare. Magnifique. 

Lately. Precisely. Dernier •ement. Au juste. 

I will tell you precisely what that costs. Je vous dirai au juste ce que cela coiite. 

To pidl, to pluck up. To become. Arracher. Devenir (comp. of venir). 

4. Devenir, as also partir and sortir, take itre for their auxiliary. 
That man has become rich. Cet homme est devenu riche. 

My father has departed. Mon pere est parti. 

My sisters have gone out. Mes soeurs sont sorties. 

5. "When the adverb tout (quite) precedes a feminine adjective or participle beginning 
with a consonant, it is made for sound's sake to agree in gender and number with the noun. 
In other cases it is invariable. 

A cravat all dirty. TJne cravate toute sale. 

Some apples all red. Des pommes toutes rouges. 

A napkin all worn. Une serviette tout usee. 

1. Le maitre dit-il que nous etudions bien ? 2. II ne dit pas 
que vous etudiiez bien. 3. Croyez-vous que je perde mon argent? 
4. Je ne crois pas que tu le perdes. 5. Croyez-vous que le chien 
voie ces oiseaux ? 6. Je ne crois pas qu'il les voie. 7. Ce fruit 
murit-il en ete ? 8. Oui, il murit en juin. 9. Ces fruits devien- 
nent-ils rouges? 10. lis deviennent rouges en murissant. 11. Que 
fait le chirurgien ? 12. II arrache une dent a cet homme. 13. Vo- 
tre ami est-il parti ce matin? 14. Non, monsieur, il est parti hier. 
15. Votre ami est-il devenu capitaine? 16. Non, il est devenu ge- 
neral. 17. J'ai en vie d'envoyer ehercher des livres et des plumes. 
18. Cette maison est magnifique ; est-elle a vous ? 19. Demeurez- 
vous a cote de votre magasin? 20. Non, je demeure a cote de 
Peglise. 21. Avez-vous vu recemment votre ami? 22. Oui, je 
viens de le voir dans la rue. 23. Je demeure a cote de Photel, 
et mon frere demeure a cote de cbez moi. ~~ 

1. Do you believe that we speak French ? 2. No, I believe that 
you speak Spanish, but not French. 3. Do you believe that I go 
out when it rains ? 4. I do not believe that thou goest out when it 
rains. 5. Do you say that my brother writes (derive) his exercises 
well ? 6. I say that he writes them very w T ell. 7. Does the mas- 
ter say that you study well ? 8. He says that we study very well. 
9. Do you believe that the bird sees us ? 10. I am sure that he sees 

23 12 12 1 1 12 12 7 12 7 3 1 1 6 4 12 

mu-rir, ci-gare, ma-gni-fike, der-niere-men^, ar-ra-cher, deve-nir. 



THE EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. 



279 



us. 11. Does that fruit become red? 12. It becomes red in au- 
tumn. 13. Is the surgeon going to pull that child's tooth -which 
pains him ? 14. He is going to pull it because it has pained him 
a long time. 15. Does he pull teeth well ? 16. He pulls them 
well ; he is a skillful dentist (dentiste). 17. Do you dwell next that 
magnificent church? 18. No, sir, I dwell next to my brother's. 

19. Do you send for cigars ? 20. I send for cigars and wine. 
21. Those handkerchiefs arre quite dirty. 22. That cap fits that 
lady ; tell me precisely what it has cost her. 23. It has cost her 
ten dollars. 24. Does the master say that we speak French % 25. 
He says that you speak French and Spanish. 26. Did you see any 
one here on Monday ? 27. We saw nobody, 28. Did the children 
see you ? 29. They did not see us, but the daughter of the neigh- 
bor saw us. 30. Did you write your letters yesterday? 31. We 
did not write them yesterday ; I wrote mine the day before yester- 
day, and my friend wrote his on Wednesday. 32. Do you think 
that my brother writes better than I ? 33. No, I think that you 
write as well as he. 34. Do you think that we read as well as our 
cousins? 35. I think that you read better than they. 36. I have 
forgotten my book on your table ; I will go for it. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. See those clouds ; are they not beautiful ! 2. They are su- 
perb, and they change their (de) form and place at each instant 
{instant). 3. There is one which has the form of ahorse. 4. There 
is another which appears like a big fish. 5. It is long since I have 
seen clouds so beautiful. 6. I like to look at (regarder) the clouds ; 
the sight of a beautiful sky always gives^jne^ pleasure. 7. Do you 
know astronomy ? 8. I studied it when I went to college ; but I 
have almost forgotten the little that I knew. 9. What (comment) do 
they call that star which is so beautiful ? 10. It is the evening star 
(Vetoile die soir) ; they call it ( Venus) ; do they not, Mr. A. ? 11. 
Yes, it is so (e'est die), and it sometimes takes the name of the 
morning star. 

12. When Venus is the morning star, which is the evening star ? 
13. It is the only one, I believe, to which they give that name. 14. 
Astronomy is a beautiful study. 15. All studies are so ; but every 
body has not the same taste. 16. Which study do you prefer, sir? 
I like all those which make part of the mathematics. 17. You have 
a taste very strange ; I have never been able to endure (souffrir) 
ciphering. 18. Nevertheless (cependan? the mathematics are the 
only thing really certain in this world. 



280 



THE EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 



82.— QUATRE-VINGT-DETJXIEME LEgON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 
The subjunctive of etre, to be, is irregular ; thus, 
Queje sois, que tu sois, qiCil soit, que nous soyons, que vous soyez, 

That I may be, that thou mayest be, that he may be, that we may be, that you may be, 
quails soient, that they may be. 

Do ) t ou say that I am negligent ? 
I do not say that thou art negligent. 
Do you believe that we are sick ? 



I do not believe that you are sick. 
Do you say that that man is English ? 



I do not believe 
English. 



that his friends are 



Dites-vous queje sois negligent? 
Je ne dis pas que tu sois negligent. 
Croyez-vous que nous soyons malades ? 
Je ne crois pas que vous soyez malades. 
Dites-vous que cet homme soit an- 
glais ? 

Je ne crois pas que ses amis soient an- 
glais. 



The subjunctive of avoir, to have, is irregular ; thus, 
Que fate, quetuaies, qu'il ait, que nous ay oris, que vous ayez, 

That I may have, that thou mayest, etc., that he may, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., 
qu'ils aient, that they may have. 

Do you think that I have your book ? Pensez-vous quefaie votre livre ? 
I do not think that thou hast it. Je ne pense pas que tu Vaies. 



I do not believe that your friend has it. 
Do you say that we have your money ? 
We do not say that you have it. 
Do you believe that they have it ? 
I know that they have it. 



Je ne crois pas que votre ami Vait. 
Dites-vous que nous ayons votre argent ? 
Nous ne disons pas que vous Vayez. 
Croyez-vous quHls V aient ? 
Je sais qu'ils l'ont.* 



1. Interrogative and negative verbs do not govern the dependent verb in the subjunc- 
tive if the speaker looks upon what it expresses as an undoubted fact. This may be seen in 
the following. 



Charles has come. Does his brother 

know that he is here ? 
Charles is absent. Does his brother 

think that he is here ? 
That man is without sense ; he does 

not believe that there is a God. 
He is not superstitious; he does not 

believe that there are ghosts. 



Son frere sait-il qu'il 
, Son frere pense-t- 



Charles est venu 

est ici ? 
Charles est absent. 

il quHl soit ici ? 
Cet homme est insense ; il ne croit pas 

qu'il y a un Dieu. 
II n'est pas superstitieux ; il ne croit 

pas qu'il y ait des revenants. 



IL— The relatives qui, que, lequel, cluquel, auquel, dont, and oil, in like manner, when 
they do not refer to what is known and definite,t take the following verb in the subjunctive. 

There is a man who is honest. Voila un homme qui est honnete. 



* "We see in these examples that it is the uncertainty in the mind of the speaker which 
determines the use of the subjunctive mood. 

t Such relatives have an antecedent of an indefinite character, as quelqu'un, quelque 
chose, rien, or a noun with an indefinite article. 



20 20 20 1221 20 12 6 20 7 7 7 7122 7126 7 

sois, soit, so-yons, so-yes, soient, aie, &ies, ait, ayons, ayes, aient. 



THE EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 281 

I will seek a man who is honest. Je chercherai un homme qui soit hon- 

nete. 

In the former of these phrases a particular individual is referred to and known to be 
honest; in the latter he is yet to be found. So in the first of the following, the house is se- 
lected and known to be beautiful ; in the second it is yet to be selected. 

I shall buy a house which is beautiful. J'acheterai une maison qui est belle. 

I shall buy a house which is beautiful. J'acheterai une maison qui soit belle. 

Is there any one who is more studious Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui soit plus studi- 

than Charles ? eux que Charles ? 

Do you know any one who has more Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui ait plus 

money than the merchant ? d'argent que le marchand ? 

Hie subjunctive of pouvom, to he able, is irregular ; thus, 
Quejepuisse, que, iu puisses, qxCil puisse, que nous puissions, que vous puissies, 
That I can, that thou, canst, that he can, that we can, that you can, 

qu'ils puissent, that they can. 

Give me a book which I can consult. Donnez-moi un livre queje puisse con- 
suiter. 

Is there any one who can do that ? Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui puisse faire cela? 
Let us choose a place where we can Choisissons une place ou nous puissions 

remain. rester. 
Is there any thing which you can do ? Y a-t-il quelque chose que vous puis- 

siez faire ? 

Are there some persons here who can Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici qui 
do that ? puissent faire cela. 

2. When the same part of a person or thing is spoken of in several individuals, if it be 
singular with each individual, it is singular in French ; but if plural with each individual, it 
is plural in French. 

He washes the children's faces. II lave le visage aux enfants. 

He washes the children's hands. II lave les mains aux enfants. 

He washes their faces and hands. II leur lave Le visage et les mains. 

Birds have strong wings and hard Les oiseaux ont les ailes fortes et le bee 

beaks. dur. 
Their beaks are very hard. lis ont le bee dur. 

1. Crois-tu que j'aie peur de ces soldats % 2. Je ne crois pas que 
tu aies peur d'eux. 3. Pensez-vous que nous ayons moins d'esprit 
que nos cousins? 4. Je ne pense pas que vous ayez moins d'esprit 
qu'eux. 5. Y a-t-il quelqu'un qui ait plus de jugement que le doc- 
teur 1 ? 6. Croyez-vous que ces enfants aient mes papiers? 7. Je 
dis qu'ils les ont. 8. Penses-tu que je sois plus grand que ton petit 
cousin ? 9. Je ne dis pas que tu sois plus grand que lui. 10. Con- 
naissez-vous quelqu'un qui soit plus aimable que cette dame? 11. 
Pensez-vous que nous soyons riches ? 12. Je ne pense pas que vous 

2212 2212 1221 2212 126 2212 

puisse, puis-sions, puis-sies, puissent 



282 



THE EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON. 



soyez pauvres. 13. Nous ne croyons pas que ces homines soient 
riches. 14. Crois-tu que je puisse ecrire ce theme? 15. Je ne crois 
pas que tu puisses l'ecrire. 16. Je ne crois pas que l'ouvrier puisse 
finir son ouvrage aujourd'hui. 17. Pensez-vous que nous puissions 
lire ces livres? 18. Je ne crois pas que vous puissiez les lire. 19- 
Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici qui puissent parler allemand ? , 

1. I wish for a servant who is industrious and who has no fault ; 
do you know one ? 2.1 know some who are laborious ; but I know 
no one who is without fault. 3. Is there any scholar here who can 
write this exercise without a fault ? 4. There is none. 5. Will 
you please lend this child a book which he can read ? 6.1 have no 
one which he can read. 7. Do you believe that those workmen can 
do their work to-day? 8. I do not believe that they can do it to- 
day. 9. Do you believe that we are afraid of those dogs 1 10. I 
do not believe that you are afraid of them, but I am certain that 
those children are very much afraid of them. 11. Do you say that 
we are negligent? 12. I do not say that you are negligent, for I 
know that you are industrious. 

13. Do you cut off the wings of those birds? 14. We cut them 
off. 15. Do you cut off their beaks? 16. We do not cut them off. 
17. Does the servant wash the children's faces? 18. He washes 
their faces and their hands. 19. That house is magnificent ; does 
it belong to you? 20. No, sir, it belongs to my brother. 21. Have 
you seen your friend lately ? 22. No, sir, it is two weeks since I 
have seen him. 23. Has your father gone out ? 24. Yes, sir, he 
has just gone out. 25. How long have you studied French ? 26. 
I have studied it about a year. 27. When does your brother set out 
for the country ? 28. He departed this morning at half past six. 
29. I desire to buy a house which is beautiful, and where I can re- 
main all the year. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. What are you studying now? 2. I am studying German 
when I have a little time,, which is not often. 3. Have you fin- 
ished the German grammar? 4. Not yet ; I have learned only the 
^JJjalf of it. 5. Do you read more than two or three pages of Ger- 
'rnan a (par) clay? 6. No, when I find the time to read I translate 
from two to three pages a day ; but never more than three. 7. 
That is enough ; the German is difficult. 

8. Did you speak of this business to any one yesterday ? 9. I 
spoke of it to Mr. C. 10. What did he say of it ? 11. We went 



THE EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 



283 



to see his brother, but he was not at home, so we have yet done 
nothing. 12. Mr. C. and his brother will be very much pleased 
with this business, and I believe that you will not have any diffi- 
culty with them. 13. I believe so too (also). 14. Mr. C. says that 
he consents to undertake it, if his brother will (veut) undertake it 
with him. 15. I went this morning to the house of my friend 
Francis (F?*angois) f and we spoke of it together. 16. Did he fore- 
see any difficulty 1 17. No, he says that it is a very good business. 



83.— QUATRE-VINGT-TROISIEME leqgn. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 

III.— Eelatives preceded by a superlative or word having the force of a superlative, as 
le seul, Vunique, the only,' le premier, le dernier, le meilleur, le moindre, le plus, le moins, 
le mieux, when they denote comparison, govern the following verb in the subjunctive.* 
He is the only man to whom we are 

able to entrust our business. 
This is the biggest apple that they can 

find. 

Mr. C. is the most skillful physician 

that there is in New York. 
He is the best man that there is. 
France has the happiest climate which 

exists in the world. 

The present subjunctive of vottloie, to will, is irregular ; thus, 
Queje veuille, que tu veuilles, quHl veuille, que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, 
That I may will, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., 

quHls veuillent, that they, etc. 

He is the only man to whom we are 

willing to trust our money. 
Are there any persons here who are 

willing to do that ? 
Tell me the name of a book which you 

are willing to read. 
There is nothing which he will do. 
He does not believe that I am willing 

to study? 

* In these three rules thus far given, it may easily be seen that the subjunctive is not 
used when the speaker means to affirm an undoubted fact. When according to Eule I. we 
use an interrogation or negation we do not usually mean to affirm any thing positively. The 
same is true when according to Eule II. we use a relative preceded by a general or vague 
expression. So here in Eule III. the verb after a relative preceded by a superlative may 
be seen to express its meaning vaguely. 

t The id a here is, this is the'' bigg est apple of all that they can find, and the other 
apples with which this is compared are referred to A T aguely. So in all other cases, the ob- 
jects with which the comparison is made are referred to indefinitely, and the subjunctive is 
therefore used. 



9 18 12 21 18 12 5 9 

yeuille, vou-lion-s, vou-liez, reuillent. 



C'est le seul homme a qui nous puis- 

sions confier nos affaires. 
Yoici la plus grosse pomme qu'ils 

puissent f trouver. 
M. H. est le plus habile medecin qu'il 

y ait a, New York. 
C'est le meilleur homme qiCil y ait. 
La France a le phis heureux climat qui 

soit au monde. 



C'est le seul homme a qui nous vou- 
lions confier notre argent. 

Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici qui 
veuillent faire cela ? 

Dites-moi le nom d'un livre que vous 
vouliez lire. 

II n'y a rien qu'il veuille faire. 

II ne croit pas que je veuille etudier ? 



284 



THE EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 



He does not say that thou art willing 
to study. 

He is the best man that I can find. 



II ne dit pas que tu veuilles etudier. 



The governor, tutor. Wisdom. 
The United States. To live in, inhabit. 
To inform. An intention. 
To embarrass, encumber. To dance. 
A verb. An excuse, apology. 
Merit. To flatter. 
The use. Certainly. 
Instructed, learned. Well instructed. 

The present subjunctive of aller, to go, is irregular ; thus, 
Que faille, que tu allies, qiCil aille, que nous allions, que nous allies, 

That I may go, that thou mayest go, that he may go, that we may go, that you may go, 
qiCils aillent, that they may go. 

Do you think that I go to the theater Pensez-vous que faille trop souvent au 



C'est le meilleur homme que je puisse 

trouver. 
Le gouverneur. La sagesse. 
Les Etats-Unis. Habiter. 
Informer. Une intention. 
Embarrasser. Danser. 
Un verbe. Une excuse. 
Le merite. Flatter, 
hhcsage. Ccrtainement. 
Instruit. Bien instruit. 



too often ? 
I do not think that thou goest there 

very often. 
Are there any persons here who are 

going to the river ? 
I know no one who is going there. 
Do you believe that we are going to 

the country ? 
I do not believe that you are going 

there. 



spectacle? 
Je ne pense pas que tu y ailles tres- 
souvent. 

Y a-t-il quelques personnes ici qui 

aillent h la riviere ? 
Je ne connais personne qui y aille. 
Croyez-vous que nous allions k la 

campagne ? 
Je ne crois pas que vous y alliez. 



1. Get homme est-il instruit ? 2. Oui, c'est l'homme le plus 
savant qu'il y ait dans notre village. 3. Qui est cet homme ? 4. 
C'est le gouverneur cle cette province; c'est un homme de merite 
et de sagesse. 5. Votre ami habite-t-il les Etats-Unis? 6. Oui, 

11 y habite depuis trois ans. 7. Informez-vous votre pere de tout 
ce que vous faites? 8. Je 1'informe de presque tout. 9. 6tez 
votre manteau ; ne vous embarrasse-t-il pas? 10. II ne m'embar- 
rasse pas. 11. Savez-vous tous les verbes de votre lecon ? 12. Cer- 
tainement je les sais bien, et j'en connais l'usage. 13. Leshommes 
aiment ceux qui les flattent. 14. Avez-vous l'intention d'aller au 
bal ce soir? 15. Oui, monsieur; mais je n'ai pas l'intention d'y 
danser. 16. Croyez-vous que je veuille fairedumal? 17. Non, 
monsieur, je ne le crois pas. 18. Avez-vous entendu dire que mon 

18 7 11 15 5 1 C212 1 12 6 14 1C 6 14 3 1221 3 1 1 6 

gou-ver-neur, sa-gesse, Etai-zunis, Aa-bi-te?*, in-for-mer, in-ten-tion, em-bar-ras-ser, 

3 6 7 5 22 5 12 1 6 22 1 5 7 3 14 221! 1 1 1221 1 

dan-ser, verbe, ex-kuze, me-rite, flatter, u-zage, cer-taine-mentf, in-struif, aille, al-lions, a£- 

12 6 I 

lies, &i\\ent. 



THE EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON. 



285 



frere aille en Europe? 19. Je 1'ai entendu dire. 20. Croyez-vous 
qu'il veuille y aller? 21. Je ne le crois pas. 

1. Is your cousin the best scholar that there is in the school? 
2. He is the best. 3. Do you believe that those scholars are wil- 
ling to learn their lessons % 4. I do not believe that they are wil- 
ling to learn them. 5. Does the master think that we are not wil- 
ling to study ? 6. He does not think that you are willing to study 
much. 7. Do you know any one who is better than the governor? 
8. No; the governor is the best man that there is in this city; his / 
brother is also a man of wisdom and merit. 9. Does the master 
receive your excuse? 10. No, sir; he receives no excuses. 11. 
Why do you not dance? 12. I am tired; I have danced almost 
all the evening. 13. Were you born in (aux) the United States ? 
14. Yes, sir ; and my uncle who died last year was born in the 
United States also. 

15. Have you learned the verbs of your lesson? 16. Certainly; 
I have learned them all. 17. Have you the intention to flatter that 
man? 18. No ; I do not like to flatter any one. 19. Is this word 
in (de) use? 20. No, sir; it is now out of use. 21. Dost thou 
think that I am going to the theater ? 22. I do not think that thou 
art going there. 23. Have you heard that my brothers are going 
to Europe ? 24. I have not heard that they are going there ; and I 
do not believe that you are going there. 25. Are you going to buy 
that house? 26. No, it is too small ; I desire to find one which is 
large. 27. Is it not beautiful ? 28. Yes ; it is the most beautiful 
house that there is in this street. 29. Do you like this city ? 30. 
No ; we wish to find a place where we can live more contented. 

31. Do you know any one who can speak better than that orator? 

32. No ; he is the best orator that there is in our city 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Much rain has fallen this winter. 2. Yes ; and the winter 
past, on the contrary, hardly (presque pas) any fell. 3. I have re- 
ceived a letter from my cousin, and he tells me that snow fell last 
Friday in New Orleans. 4. It is extraordinary ; they do not often 
see any th&re> 1 5. Since I have been here I have seen^snow only 
once. 6. When I was a little boy I used to make (I made) snow- 
balls in winter. 7. Where were you then? 8. At St. Louis. 9. 
There a great deal falls. 

10. Have you been here long? 11. I have been waiting for 
you nearly a quarter of an hour. 12. I did not know it. 13. They 



286 



THE EIGHTY-FOUKTH LESSON. 



told me that you were in the garden, and I did not believe it proper 
(convenable) to let you be called (appeler). 14. You were wrong. 
15. Not at all ; I have not come to depart forthwith. 16. I am 
delighted at it ; I have been expecting you since day before yester- 
day. 17. Where is your horse? 18. I told the boy to put him iru 
the stable. 

19. It is very fine weather this evening. 20. The nights are 
cool, but it is too warm in the day. 21. I have suffered much 
(beaucoup souffert) from the heat (la chaleur) to-day. 22. And I 
{moi) also ; I suffered much from it. 23. I believe that it was still 
-warmer yesterday than to-day. 24. I do not know ; it has been 
very warm all day. 25. We have much need (bien besoin) of rain. 
26. We shall have some before long (peu).- — 

27. Have you seen Madam C. to-day? 28. No, sir; she came 
here this morning, but I had gone to my sister's. 29. She told me 
that she was to come and see you. 30. When I knew that she had 
come, I was very sorry for having (d'etre) gone out. 31. She was 
sick a long time. 32. Yes ; when I saw her the past week she 
coughed still. 33. She coughs scarcely any now. 



84. — QU AT RE- YI N G T - QUATRlilME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 
1. The use of the verb vouloir before nouns and verbs has been spoken of in Lessons 
18 and 25. It is often equivalent to shall. Its use may be further seen in the following 
sentences : 



I wish for my papers. 
I will have my papers. 
He wishes for that book. 
He will (is determined to) have that 
book. 

I do not wish to stay here. 
I am not willing to stay here. 

I will not stay here. 

I am willing to stay here. 

Charles wishes much to go to the coun- 
try, and his father consents. He 
will certainly go, for his mother 
is willing also. 

George will by all means go to France. 

I learn Italian because my father will 
have it so. I am willing to study 
it, and my brother will by all 
means learn it. 



Je desire mes papiers. 
Je veux avoir mes papiers. 
II desire ce livre. 
II veut avoir ce livre. 

Je ne desire pas rester ici. 

Je ne veux pas rester ici. 

Je ne consens pas a rester ici. 

II ne me plait pas de rester ici. 

Je ne veux pas rester ici. 

Je veux bien rester ici. 

Charles desire beaucoup aller a la 

campagne, et son pere y consent. 

II ira certainement, car sa mere 

le veut bien aussi. 
Georges veut absolument aller cn 

France. 

J'apprends l'italien parce que mon 
pere le veut. Moi, je veux bien 
l'etudier ; mon frere veut absolu- 
ment l'apprendre. 



THE EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



287 



IV. — Verbs which do not affirm a fact positively, but only express will, desire, doult, 
fear, command, approhaiion, and the like, if followed by que and a dependent verb, gov- 
ern that verb in the subjunctive.* 



He desires me to go out. 
He consents that we read. 
I order him to tell us his name. 
I will have you study better, and be 
more attentive to vour lessons. 



No reply, sir; you shall go to school 

to-morrow. 
I am determined that you shall obey 

your masters, and always speak 

to them with politeness. 

2. The following are some of the verbs which govern the subjunctive according to 
above rule : 



II desire que je sorte. 
II consent que nous lisions. 
Fordonne qiCil nous dise son nom. 
Je veux que vous etudiiez mieux, et que 

vous soyez plus attentif a vos 

lecons. 

Pas d'observation, monsieur; je veux 
que vous alliez a Fecole des demain. 
Je veux que vous obeissiez k vos maitres, 
et que vous leur parliez toujours 
avec politesse. 



Aimer. Consentir. 

Aimer mieux. Craindre. 

Avoir besoin. Desirer. 

Avoir envie. Douter. 

Avoir peur. Etre content. 

To forbid, to defend {de bef. inf.). 
To order. 

To command. To beware of. 
To approve. To disapprove. 
To apprehend, fear. 
To prevent, hinder. 
To tremble. To fear. 

Je crains, tu crains, il craint, 
I fear, thou fearest, he fears, 

He likes us to study much. 
We have a desire that you write to us. 

I wish them to tell me their business. 



Meriter. 
Permettre. 

Prendre garde. 
Prier. 



S'etonner. 

Souffrir. 

Souhaiter. 

Vouloir. 

Exiger. 



Prendre garde. 
Trouver mauvais. 



Defendre. 
Ordonner. 
Commander. 
Trouver bon. 
Apprehender. 
Empecher. 

Trembler. Craindre. 
nous craignons, vous craignez, Us craignent, 
we fear, you fear, they fear. " 

II aime que nous etudiions beaucoup. 
Nous avons envie que vous nous ecri- 
viez. 

Je souhaite quHls me disent leurs af- 
faires. 

He is afraid that I may lose my money. II a peur que je ne perde mon argent. 

8. Avoir peur, craindre, trembler, apprehender, empecher, prendre garde que, and 
verbs of fear and apprehension generally, when affirmative, take ne before a following sub- 
junctive. They also take de before the infinitive. 

They fear that we may deceive them. lis craignent que nous ne lestrompions. 
Beware lest he lose your money. Prenez garde qiCil ne perde votre 

argent. 



* Here again we perceive the same character of the subjunctive. To express a will, 
desire, fear, command, etc., that a thing be done, is by no means affirming that it is actual- 
ly done. 

5 12 65 15 6 75 3 53 16 15 6 15 361 5 

me-ri-ter, 6-to?i-ne>% per-mettre, prendre, de-fendre, or-do^-ner, com-man-de/% ap-pre- 

3 6 3 8 6 14 14 14 7 21 7 6 7 

hen-tier, em-pG-cher, craindre, crains, craintf, crai-gnons, crai-gnes, craignewi. 



288 



THE EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



Tlie present subjunctive o/faire, to do, is irregular; thus, 

Que je /asse, que hi fasses, qxCil /asse, que nous fassions, que vous /assies, 
That I may do, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc.. that you, etc., 

qu' 'Us /assent, that they, etc. 

I approve of your doing good. Je trouve bon quevous fassiezdn bien. 

He disapproves of our doing evil. II trouve mauvais que nous fassions du 

mal. 

He commands me to do my duty, and II commande que je fasse in on devoir, 
thee to do thine. et que tic fasses le tien. 

The master desires Charles to do this Le maitre desire que Charles fasse ce 
exercise, and his brothers to do them e-ci, et que ses freres f assent 

those. ceux-la. 

He forbids our doing that. II defend que nous fassions cela. 

1. Defendez-vous que nous fassions cela? 2. Je ne defends 
pas que vous le fassiez. 3. Desirez-vous que je fasse du feu ? 4. 
J'aime mieux que le garcon en fasse. 5. Je veux que tu fasses ton 
devoir, et que les enfants fassent le leur. 6. Votre pere ordonne 
que le domestique ait soin des chevaux. 7. Trouvez-vous bon que 
je sois ici ? 8. Je trouve mauvais que tu y sois. 9. Votre mere 
a-t-elle peur que vous ne sovez malades? 10. Elle apeur que nous 
ne soyons malades. 11. Voulez-vous que mon frere soit ici demain ? 

12. Je veux que votre frere et que votre cousin y soient demain. 

13. Voulez-vous bien que j'aie vos livres? 14. Je veux bien que 
tu les aies. 15. Ordonnez-vous que nous ayons soin de vos affaires ? 
16. Non, monsieur, je prefere que mes freres en aient soin. 17. 
Trouvez-vous bon que je vende mes livres % 18. Non, je trouve 
mauvais que tu les vendes. 

1. Is your brother afraid that I am angry? 2. He is afraid 
that thou art angry, and that thy brother is angry also. 3. Do 
you wish us to be here early ? 4. Yes ; and I wish your cousins to 
be here early also. 5. Dost thou consent that I have those fruit 
trees (arbres fruitiers) ? 6.1 consent to thy having them. 7. Do 
you approve of our having much money ? 8.1 disapprove of your 
having more than your brother. 9. What will you have me do? 
10. I will have you do your duty well. 11. What will you have 
this. boy do? 12. I will have him make some fire. 13. Are you 
afraid that those children may be lazy ? 14. No ; I am afraid that 
they are doing harm. 15. The master forbids us to go out at 
present. 16. Do you approve of the children's having your gold 
pen? 17. No; I forbid their having it. 



THE EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 



289 



18. Do you wish us to buy that house? 19. I wish you to buy 
it. 20. Are you afraid that the master may see your writing? 
21. No ; I desire him to see it. 22. Have you a desire that we 
study French ? 23. Yes ; I will have you speak French, and your 
brothers speak German. 24. Beware lest that child be sick. 25. 
Charles the Fifth ( Quint) who spoke several European (europeennes) 
languages fluently (couramment), used to say that it was necessary 
(fallait) to speak Spanish to the gods, Italian to the ladies, French 
to our friends, German to soldiers, English to geese (pies), Hunga- 
rian (hongrois) to horses, and Bohemian (bohemien) to the devil (le 
diable). 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you think ol traveling this summer ? 2. I think of going 
to Europe in a month or six weeks. 3. Is Mr. A. going there also ? 
4. No, miss ; I shall stay here all summer. 5. You do not often 
travel. 6. The year past I made a journey to Paris. 7. Are you 
not the cousin of Mr. J. whom I saw at Madam V.'s last winter ? 
8. Yes, miss, I am. 9. Is it not he (lui) who stays at present at 
Mr. D.'s? 10. Yes, it is he. 11. Does he think of staying here 
this summer? 12. No, miss; he thinks of setting out soon for 
Paris. 13. Bring him to our house. 14. He will be delighted to 
__come and pay you (vous presenter) his respects (ses respects). . 

15. Does the sick woman cough still ? 16. She coughs scarce- 
ly any now ; she is out of danger, but it is necessary to tell her to 
avoid going out in the evening, or when the weather is damp. 17. 
She goes out only when it is very fine weather. 18. Has Mr. V. 
arrived from the country? 19. He had not yet arrived when I was 
at his house to-day. 20. Has he gone for his sister ? 21. Yes, it 
is for that that he has gone. 

22. Lewis, is your exercise corrected ? 23. Yes, sir ; do you 
wish to see it ? 24. If you do your exercises well you will be re- 
warded ; but those who play instead of studying will be always 
ignorant and despised. 25. Do you like to study ? 26. Some- 
times, sir ; when I succeed in knowing my lessons well, I find much 
pleasure in study. 27. It is necessary, then, to be always diligent 
and studious. 28. There are two trees opposite to my window. 
29. The surgeon is going to cut off the sick man's arm. 



13 



290 



THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



85.— QUATRE-YXNGT-CXNQUIEME leqon. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 



To take care of. The bay. 

An orchard. To obey. 

On the other side of or over the bay. 

A fruit-tree. To be worth more. 

General Lafayette commanded the na- 
tional guards. 
1. Ordonner and commander take 

Order the servant to come. 

Order him to do that. 

Pie desires us to have the money. 

We are determined that you shall 
have it. 

I fear that you may be sick. 



Soigner. La baie. 
Un verger. Obeir (a). 
De V autre c6te de la baie. 
Un arbre fruitier. Valoir mieux. 
Le general Lafayette commandait les 
gardes nationales. 
before a person, and de before the infinitive. 
Ordonnez au domestique de venir. 
Ordonnez-foa de faire cela. 
II desire que nous ayons Targent. 
Nous voulons que vous l'ayez. 



Je crains que vous ne soyez malade. 



V.— Impersonal verbs, and il est with an attribute, followed by que, govern a following 
verb in the subjunctive, when the action its not affirmed positively. The following are of 
this kind. 



It is necessary. 

It is suitable. It is important. 
It is sufficient. It is better. 
It is to be desired. 
It is doubifid. It is possible. 
It is just. It is proper. 
It is time for me to go home. 
It is necessary that thou write a letter. 
It is sufficient that he have his due. 
It is important that we go to the mar- 
ket. 

It is better that you go. 

It is surprising that they do that. 



Tifaut. II est necessaire. 
11 convient. IJ importe.* 

11 suffit. II vaut mieux. 

12 est a desirer, or a souhaiter. 
II est douteux. H est possible. 
II est juste. 11 est a propos. 

1 est temps que faille chez moi. 
II faut que tu ecrives une lettre. 
B suffit qu'il ait son du. 
H importe que notes allions au march6. 

E vaut mieux que vous y alliez. 
11 est surprenant qu'ils f assent cela. 



The subjunctive present o/'viloir is irregular; thus, 
Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaille, que nous valions, que vous valiez, 
That I be worth, that thou be, etc., that he be, etc., that we be, etc., that you be, etc., 
quails vaillent, that they be worth. 

Do you say that I am worth more than Dites-vous que je vaille mieux que mon 

my brother ? frere ? 

It is sufficient that thou be worth as II suffit que tu vailles autant que ton 

much as thy brother. frere. 



* To say that it is necessary, it is suitable, it is important, etc., that a thing be done, is 
not to affirm it positive ; hence, as in the other rules, the subjunctive is used. 

,20 6 7 8 5 15 5 12 22 12 125 5 5 7 51 1214 14 16 22 12 18 

soi-gner, baie, ver-ger, o-be-ir, frui-tier, ne-ces-saire, con-vieni, im-porte, su/-fit, sou- 

7 6 18 10 15 12 15 17 1 1 1221 1 126 1 

foii-ter, dou-teua;, pos-sible, pro-pos, vail!<3, va-lions, va-lies, vailleritf. 



THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



291 



It is doubtful if he be worth as much II est douteux quHl vaille autant que 

as thou. toi. 

It is possible that we are worth more II est possible que nous valions mieux 

than they. qu'eux. 

I do not think that you are worth more Je ne crois pas que vous valiez mieux 

than they. qu'eux. 

Do you say that these gloves are worth Croyez-vous que ces gants vaillent une 

a dollar ? piastre ? 

I say that they are worth more than a Je dis qu'ils valent plus d'une piastre. 

dollar. 

I fear that he may do you harm. Je crains qu'il ne vous fasse du mal. 

She is afraid of thy going on the lake. Elle a peur que tu n'ailles sur le lac. : 

c L'avant-derniere nuit. 

The night before last. 3 La nuit d'avant-hicr. 

( Avant-hier soir. 
2. Soir is before bed-time ; nuit, the rest of the night. 

I supped with my father night before J'ai soupe chez mon pere avant-hier 

last. soir. 

I stayed at home very late in the even- Je suis reste chez moi tres-tard dana 

ing ; it was eleven o'clock. la soiree, il etait onze heures. 

I passed at the ball the night before last. J'ai passe au bal la nuit d' avant-hier. 

1. Dieu nous commande de l'aimer, il nous commande aussi 
d' aimer tout le monde. 2. Get homme soigne bien sa sante. 3. Le 
jardinier a-t-il des arbres fruitiers? 4. II en a quelques-uns. 5. 
Le domestique a-t-il soin de votre verger 1 6. II en a soin. 7. 
Nous devons obeir a Dieu. 8. Le domestique obeit a son maitre. 
9. Oii serez-vous demain ? 10. Je serai de l'autre cote de la baie. 
11. Croyez-vous que je vaille mieux que mon frere ? 12. Je dis que 
tu vaux autant que ton frere. 13. Pensez-vous que nous valions 
moins que nos cousins % 14. Je pense que vous valez autant qu'eux. 
15. Croyez-vous que ce livre-ci vaille mieux que ceux-la? 16. Non, 
je crois que ceux-la valent mieux que celui-ci. 17. Est-il juste que 
nous fassions cetouvrage? 18. Non, il est juste que les eleves le 
fassent. 19. Est-il a propos que je dise a quelqu'un ce que je viens 
d' entendre ? 20. II est a propos que vous le disiez a votre pere et 
a votre frere. 

1. The master orders the scholars to make no noise. 2. Gen- 
eral Washington commanded the army (armee) of the United States. 
3. God orders us above all to love him. 4. Who has taken care of 
the stranger during his sickness (sa maladie) ? 5. The doctor has 
taken good care of him. 6. Do you live over the bay ? 7. No, 
but I go over the bay every evening in summer. 8. The gardener 



292 



THE EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 



is in his orchard. 9. Has he many fruit-trees in his orchard? 
He has many. 10. The dog always obeys the voice (la voix) of his 
master. 11. Is it suitable that you go to the physician's? 12. No, 
it is better that our friends go. 13. That man is not industrious ; 
it is surprising that he is rich. 14. Is it necessary that you do 
your task to-day ? 15. It is sufficient that I do it this week. 

16. Is it important that the workman finish his work this week? 
17. Yes, it is necessary that he finish it to-morrow. 18. Has that 
scholar written his exercise ? 19. No, sir, it is doubtful whether he 
writes it. 20. Does the master say that you are worth more than 
we? 21. He says that we are worth more than you. 22. Do you 
say that this horse is worth two hundred dollars? 23. Yes, and I 
say that those are worth five hundred dollars. 24. The night be- 
fore last was very stormy (orageuse) ; the thunder (la foudre) fell 
several times between two and three in the (du) morning. 25. Is 
it possible for you to finish your task at six o'clock ? 26. No, sir, 
it is impossible (impossible) for me to finish it before eight. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is it just that my brother have my money ? 2. It is just that 
he have his, and that you have yours. 3. Is it necessary that the 
physician go to your house twice a (par) day ? 4. It is sufficient 
that he go there once a day. 5. Is it surprising that I make mis- 
takes ? 6. It is not surprising that you make some ; but it is very 
surprising that those children do not make any. 7. Is it important 
that we study French ? 8. It is important that you study French 
and Spanish. 9. Is it necessary for us to buy a horse ? 10. It is 
necessary for you to buy a horse and some cows. 11. Have you 
been to the theater this week ? 12. I went there night before last. 

13. Have you finished translating the work which I carried you 
last week ? 14. Not yet ; it is a little difficult, and I have hardly, 
any time to (pour) read it. 15. How do you like (find) it ? 16. 
It is very interesting and very well written ; how many volumes 
are there? 17. There are three; when you wish for the second, 
let me know. 18. Thank you ; I shall not need it under (avant) 
seven or eight days. 19. How much of it do you translate each 
day ? 20. I read from fifteen to twenty pages, and I do not think 
of doing more (en /aire davantage) at present. 21. You are very 
diligent ; it is enough. 22. Do you look for the words in the dic- 
tionary ? 23. Sometimes, but I knoAT them almost all. 24. The 
second volume will be easier. 25. Y\ r ithout doubt ; I do not find 
the first volume so difficult to translate now as when I began it. 



THE EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



293 



86. — QTJATRE-VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 
YL— Some conjunctions govern the subjunctive. The following ajo of this kind. 



A fin que. A moins que. 

Avant que. Bien que. 

De peur que, de crainte que. 
JPourvu que. JusqiCd ce que. 

Quoique. Pour que. 

Au cas que, en cas que. 
For more conjunctions of this kind, see Synopsis, page 476. 
1. A moins que takes ne before the following subjunctive ; also de peur que and de 
crainte que when not negative. 



In order that. Unless. 

Before. Though. 

For fear that, lest. 

Provided that. Until 

Although. TJiat, in order that. 

If in case that. 



Unless you give him money. 

Unless they be here. 
Although he knows his lesson, he does 

not recite it well. 
Provided that I be there. 
In order that he may do that. 
For fear that they may surprise us. 
I will go before you finish. 
Lest we surprise them. 
Although he cannot read. 
It is necessary to stay until he finishes. 
In order that thou mayest know thy 

lesson. 
In case I know my lesson. 
In case we know ours. 
Unless you know yours. 

VII. — Que used for any conjunction governing the subjunctive, or for a second si, takes 
the subjunctive after it. 



A moins que vous ne lui donniez de 
l'argent. 

A moins qu'ils ne soient ici. 

Quoiqu'il sache * sa lecon, il ne la re- 
cite pas bien. 

Pourvu que je sois la. 

A fin qu'Wfasse cela. 

Be peur qi£\\.s, ne nous surprennent. 

J'irai avant que vous finissiez. 

Be crainte que nous ne les surprenions. 

Bien qu^il ne puisse pas lire. 

II faut rester jusqitW ce qu'il finisse. 

Pour que tu saches ta legon. 

Au cas que je sache ma lecon. 

En cas que nous sachions les notres. 

A moins que vous ne sachiez la votre. 



Be good, in order that you may have 

friends, and that you may be happy. 
If you are good, and if you know your 

lesson, you will be praised. 
So that, in such a manner that. 

In such a way that. 

VIII. — After expressions like the above, the verb is in the indicative mood when it 
affirms its meaning positively, and in the subjunctive when it indicates its meaning po- 
tentially. 

* The verbs following such conjunction either express their meaning under a condi- 
tion of uncertainty, or they belong to a subordinate clause which the speaker passes over 
vaguely ; hence the subjunctive is used. 

1 14 1 4 13 22 20 4 2 1 21 35 1 12 7 

a-fin, crainte, pour-vu, qwoi-ke, cas, fa-con, sorts, ma-nier^. 



Soyez bon, afin que vous ayez des amis, 
et que x ous puissiez etre heureux. 

Si vous etes bon, et que vous sachiez 
votre lecon, vous serez loue. 

Be f aeon que, de sorte que, de maniere 
que. 

Be telle sorte (or maniere) que. 



294 



THE EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



You fulfill your duties so that you are Yous remplissez votre devoir de fagon 

esteemed. que vous etes estime. 

Fulfill your duty in such a manner that Remplissez votre devoir de maiiiere que 

you may be esteemed. vous soyez estime. 

Although it rain, he will come. Quoiqu'il pleuve, il viendra. 

He lives in such a manner that he does II vit de telle maniere qu'il nefait mal 

harm to no one. h personne. 

Live in such a way that you may do Vivez de telle sorte que vous ne fassiez 

harm to no one. de mal a personne. 

This respect. To present, introduce. Ce respect. Presenter, introduire. 

2. Presenter, is introducing to a person ; introduire, into a place. 

I introduced him to my friend. Je l'ai presente a mon ami. 

I introduced him into the society. Je l'ai introduit dans la societe. 

To accompany. So soon. Accompagner. Bitot. 

Gallant. On purpose. Gcdant. Expres. 

To prove. To permit, allow. Prouver. Permettre (as mettre, Les. 39). 

To seem. It seems. Sembler. II semble. 

3. U semble, without an object pronoun, governs the subjunctive ; with one, it does not. 

It seems that that child is sick. // semble que cet enfant soit malade. 

It seems to me that he is sick. II me semble qu'il est malade. 

1. Notre cousin est venu ici pour que nous allions au spectacle 
avec lui. 2. Cet ecolier restera ici jusqu'a ce qu'il sache sa lecon. 
3. Quoiqu'il soit un pen paresseux, il me semble qu'il apprend bien 
sa lecon. 4. Je veux toujours faire en sorte que le maitre soit con- 
tent. 5. Si vous voyez monsieur A, aujourd'hui, presentez-lui mes 
respects. 6. Accompagnez-vous le maitre al'ecole ? 7. Oui, mon- 
sieur, je l'accompagne tous les matins. 8. Votre pere sera-t-il ici 
demain ? 9. Non, monsieur, il ne viendra pas sitot. 10. Jeviens 
de la campagne expres pour vous accompagner au bal. 11. Vous 
etes fort galant. 12. Ce que vous elites- prouve que cet bomme est 
ricbe. 13. Oui, mais quoique il soit ricbe, il n'est pas bonnete. 
14. Le meclecin ne me permet pas ele boire de cafe. 15. II semble 
qu'il pleuve. 1C. II me semble qu'il pleut. 17. Non, je ne crois 
pas eju'il pleuve. 

1. Although. I know my lessons perfectly, 1 cannot always re- 
cite them well. 2. Is your cousin the best scholar that there is in 
the school I 3. He is not the best ; for although he can learn fast, 
he does not study much. 4. Do you wish us to know the Latin 
and the Greek? 5. I will have you know the Latin, the Greek, 

9 5 5 5 3 C 34 15 2213 1 21 1 6 30 17 1 3 5 7 18 

pleuve, res-peci, pre-zen-ter, in-tro-duire, ac-com-pa-gner, si-tit, ga-lani, ex-pres, prou- 

6 7 5 3 6 3 

xer, per-me?tr<3, sem-bler, semble. 



THE EIGHTY-SIXTH LESSON. 



295 



and the modern (modernes) languages. 6. Are you willing to lend 
us a book which we can read ? 7. Certainly ; I am willing to lend 
you one provided that you can read French. 8. In case that those 
young boys have money, will they go to the city ? 9. They will 
go if they are docile (dociles), and if_they know their lessons, 10. 
Fulfill thy duties in such away that thou mayest be esteemed. 11. 
You learn your lessons in such a manner that your masters are al- 
ways satisfied (satis/aits). 12. Charles has not come, lest we 
should blame him. 

13. Present my respects to the doctor. 14. I will present them 
to him in case that I see him. 15. I am going to his house on puy-_ 
pose to see his son. 16. Who has introduced the stranger into our 
society? 17. Your friend the German has introduced him. 18. 
Does the physician permit you to go out at night f- 19. He does 
not permit it. 20. " Has your sister who lives in the United States 
a son or a daughter," said a person to an Irishman (irlandais), his 
friend. 21. " To tell you the whole truth," answered the Irishman, 
embarrassed, " I do not yet know whether I am an uncle or an aunt ; 
but I will write to my sister to pray her to inform me in regard to 
it {en), as soon as {le plus tot) possible." 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. DicTyou go to Mrs. C.'s ball last Thursday? 2. Yes, I went 
there with Mr. and Mrs. G. ; you were not there. 3. No, I had" 
been to the country Thursday morning, and I came to the city too 
late for the ball. 4. Were there many people there ? 5. There were 
enough, and every body looked very joyous. 6. The ball season is 
ended (finie). 7. It is too hot now, and the nights are too short. 

8. Let us go and take a walk ( /aire une promenade) this even- 
ing, if it be pleasant weather. 9. Where shall we go ? 10. Let us 
go to the garden of Mr. T. 11. Very willingly ; it will be moon- 
light, and that (ce) will be very agreeable. 12. Have you been 
there lately? 13. I wenlfThere the other day ; his garden is mag- 
nificent ; there are roses of all colors. 14. There must be also other 
flowers. 15. There are many. 16. Mr. C. came near here the 
other day, but I did not see him. 17. I wished to tell him to bring 
me a few beautiful flowers to (pour) put in my garden. 18. You 
will be able to tell it to him to-morrow, and to choose those which 
you wish. 

19. What o'clock is it ? 20. I do not know precisely, but it is 
not late. 21. I am going to send for a few cigars. 22. Have you 
a desire to smoke 1 23. I smoke a little every evening. 24. It is 



296 



THE EIGHTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



not more than ei^ht o'clock ; you can send for some. 25. Has the 
servant returned ? 26. Yes, he is in his room. 27, 1 will tell him 
to go for some for me. 28. Have you some change ? 29. I have a 
half dollar ; it is the smallest coin that I have. 30. There are two 
quarters of a dollar (de gourde) if you wish for them. 31. Thank 
you. 

87. — QUATRE-VINGT-SEPTIiME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 
1. Quelque followed by que has the following meanings. 
Whatever (adj.). However (adv.). Quel que . . que. Quelque . . que. 

2. Quelque followed by a verb is written quel que, as two words, and agrees with the 
subject of the verb. 

Whatever may be the engagement. Quel que soit l'engagement. 
Whatever may be your intention. Quelle que soit votre intention. 

Whatever may be your designs. Quels que soient vos desseins. 

Whatever may be your views. Quelles que soient vos vues. 

8. Quelque belonging to a substantive, with or without another adjective, is written as 
one word, agreeing with the substantive. 

Whatever reason. Whatever efforts. Quelque raison. Quelques efforts. 
Whatever fine books you may have. Quelques beaux livres que vous ayez. 
Whatever riches he may have. Quelques richesses qu'il ait. 

4. Belonging to an adverb or adjective, it is itself an adverb, and never varied. 
However beautiful she may be, etc. Quelque belle qu'elle soit. 
However rich they may be, etc. Quelque riches qu'ils puissent etre. 

However well written may be your Quelque bien ecrit que soit votre 

exercise. theme. 

IX. — Quelque, quel que, whatever ; quelque, however ; qui que or qui que ce soit qui, 

whoever ; qui que ce soit que, whomsoever ; quoi que or quoi que ce soit que, whatever ; 
and si . . . que, however (as conj. Eule 6), govern the subjunctive. 

Whatever riches he may have, he will Quelques richesses ^w'il ait,* il sera 

always be unhappy, toujours malheureux. 

Whatever may be his misfortunes, he Quels que soient ses malheurs, il les 

supports them with courage. supporte avec courage. 

However wrong you may be, he will Quelque tort que vous ayez, il vous 

pardon you. pardonnera. 

However rich he may be, he will be Quelque riche qu^'A soit, il sera mal- 

unhappy. heureux. 

Whoever you may be, you will come Qui que vous soyez, vous entrerez. 

in. 

Whoever he may be that knocks at Qui que ce soit qui frappe k la porte, 

the door, he shall not come in. je ne veux pas qu'il entre. 



* The subjunctive in these sentences, it will be readily seen, has the same character of 
vagueness as in the preceding rules. 



THE EIGHTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



297 



Whoever it may be that you meet in Qui que ce soit que vous rencontriez 

that house, do not speak to any dans cette maison, ne parlez h, 

one. personne. 

Whatever he may do, he will be blamed. Quoi qu'il fasse, il sera blame. 

Whatever you may see, do not speak Quoi que ce soit que vous voyiez, n'en 

of it. parlez pas. 

However tall he may be, he does not Si grand qu'il soit, il ne me fait pa3 



frighten me. 



peur. 



To yield. To guess. To deny. Ceder. Deviner. Nier. 

To despair. To disown, deny. Desesperer. Disconvenir (comp. of 

venir). 

5. These two verbs take de before a noun and an infinitive. 

X. — Verbs which contain in themselves the force of a negative, as nier, desesperer, and 
disconvenir, when used affirmatively govern the subjunctive in the same way as othevc 
used negatively. 

I deny that he is here. Je nie qu'il soit ici. 

I despair of his doing his work. Je desespere qu'il fasse son ouvrage. 

He denies that they know that. II disconvient qu'ils sachent cela. 

6. Desesperer, disconvenir, douter, and nier, generally when negative, and sometimes 
when interrogative, take ne before the following subjunctive. 

I do not deny that that may be. Je ne nie pas que cela ne soit. 

I deny that that is true. Je nie que cela soit vrai. 

Do you doubt his being here ? Doutez-vous qu'il soit (ne soit) ici ? 

7. The present subjunctive of falloir, impersonal, is auCil faille. 
Do you think it necessary to do that? Pensez-vous qxCil faille faire cela? 

1. Quels que soient vos desseins vous me faites tort. 2. Ces 
hommes vous font-ils du bien ? 3. Non, monsieur, quelles que soient 
leurs intentions ils me font du mal. 4. Peuvent-ils etre vos amis % 
5. Non, monsieur, quels qu'ils soient ils ne peuvent pas etre mes 
amis. 6. Faut-il que cet homme cede a ses ennemis ? 7. Oui, quel 
que soit son courage il faut qu'il cede a la force. 8. Cet homme 
est tres-malade, et quelque remede qu'on lui donne il mourra. 9. 
Quelque belle que soit cette dame elle n'est pas aimable. 10. Quoi 
que (quoi que ce soit que) vous fassiez, vous ne pouvez pas plaire a 
cet homme. 11. Notre ami peut-il faire ce qu'il a entrepris % 12. 
Nod, si habile qu'il soit, il ne peut pas faire cela. 13. Ne deses- 
perez-vous pas que cet ecolier ne fasse son theme'? 14. Je deses- 
pere de lui, il n'apprendra jamais rien. 15. Disconvenez-vous de 
ce fait? 16. Je n'en disconviens pas. 17. Je ne desespere pas 
que cet homme ne fasse son ouvrage. 

6 6 4 12 6 19 6 5 5 5 6 12 21 4 12 1 

ce-der, de-vi-ner, ni-er, des-es-pe-rer, dis-con-ve-nir, faille. 

13* 



298 



THE EIGHTY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



1. Is that man happy? 2. No, sir, for he is not virtuous ; and 
however rich and learned one may be, he cannot be happy if he is 
not virtuous. 3. Will those poor people have friends? 4. Yes, sir; 
however poor they may be, they will always have friends. 5. Can 
that man keep his riches long? 6. No, sir ; whatever riches he may 
have, he can not keep them long. 7. Is your companion (camarade) 
in good health? 8. No, he is sick ; and whatever remedy he may 
take (prenne), he will be sick a long time. 9. "Whatever may be 
the intention of your companion, has he not committed a fault ? 
10. He has committed several. 11. Whatever that young boy may 
do, he will not be blamed. 12. Do you deny that he sometimes 
makes mistakes ? 13. I do not deny that he sometimes makes many. 

14. Guess how much that cloak cost me. 15. I guess that it 
cost you twenty dollars. 16. To whom do you yield your place? 
17. I yield it to that lady. 18. Guess what I have done to-day. 
19. That is not difficult to guess ; you have been to school. 20. 
Whatever remedy that sick man may take, he will never get well 
(guerira). 21. Whatever you may §ay, they will not believe you. 
22. Whoever you may be, sir, respect my dwelling (respectez ma 
demeure). 23. Whoever I may be, fear nothing, sir, your dwelling 
shall be respected. 24. Do those scholars speak German ? 25. 
Yes, however difficult may be the phrases (phrases) that one says to 
them in that language, they always know how to translate them cor- 
rectly (correctement). 26. That child, young as he is (sijeune quHl 
soit), knows already how to read and count. 27. That man, badly 
clothed as he is, is no less for that a millionaire (millionaire). 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I have just bought a new coat ; how does it fit me? 2. It 
fits you very well; how much did you pay for it? (Lesson 68, 4.) 
3. It costs me twenty-five dollars. 4. It is not dear ; the cloth is 
very fine. 5. I sought in several stores before finding one suitable 
{conv enable). 6. Finally (enfin) you have succeeded in finding one. 
7. I am so big that I do not easily find coats ready made (tout . 
faits). 8. It is necessary to get some made (/aire /aire) for you.' 
9. Yes, when I cannot find any, I go to my tailor's. 

10. Here is a pair of spectacles which I have just bought ; how 
do you like (find) them? 11. They look good; but what will you 
. (voulez) do with spectacles ? You are too young to (pour) wear any. 
12. My sight is weak ; it is necessary for me to read and write all 
day, and even sometimes at night. 13. To read or write at night 



THE EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



299 



is not good for the eyes. 14. That tires my sight much. 15. Then 
you are not doingjsvrong to wear spectacles ; but put them on only 
•when you read. 16. It is what I intend to do. 17. If your sight 
is weak you do wrong to read at night ; nothing does more harm 
to the eyes than that. 18. I do not do it with good will, but often 
r : { I cannot do differently. 19. La&|Liear_I rea( i much at night, but 
i >W&II percSVed that my sight was suffering from it, and since I read 
I only in the day. 20. I have so much to write that I am obliged 
sometimes to write all the evening. 21. I also read much in the 
evening a year ago (il y a Ufjum), but I do it no more. 22. My 
sight is too precious to (pour) lose it thus; I prefer to take care 
of it. 



88.— QUATRE-VINGT-HUITIfcME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 

XI. — Conditional clauses beginning with si, and followed by que or a relative pronoun, 
and a second verb, take that verb in the subjunctive, if the speaker look upon what it ex- 
presses as false or doubtful, and in the indicative if there be no doubt. 

If you say that that is true, you are Si vous dites que cela soit vrai, vous 

wrong. avez tort. 

If you say that that is true, you are Si vous dites que cela est vrai, vous 

right. avez raison. 

If you think that he is honest, you do Si vous pensez qu'il soit honnete, vous 

not know him. ne le connaissez pas. 

If he thinks that you are honest, he is S'il pense que vous etes honnete, il a 

right. raison. 

1. When expressions, which with que govern the subjunctive, take cle ee que after them, 
they govern the indicative. 

( Je suis fache qu'ilfasse cela. 
I am sorry that he does that. i T . T , ,., » ., , » 

J (Je suis iache de ce quil jait cela.* 

2. The subjunctive expressing desire sometimes begins a sentence. 

May you live happy. Puissiez-v ous vivre heureux.f 

May he arrive soon. Puisse-t-il arriver bientot. 

Heaven grant that it may happen. Fasse le Ciel qu'il arrive. 

3. The subjunctive present first person singular of savoir, with a negative, has the pe- 
culiarity of beiug used like the indicative, without any governing phrase. 

I know no one who can do it like him. Je ne sache personne qui puisse le 

faire comme lui. 

4. The present of the subjunctive of pleuvoir, impersonal, is qu'il pleuve. 

I do not go out for fear that it may rain. Je ne sors pas de peur qiCil ne pleuve. 



* It is evident that the final clause after de ce qtie is stated as a fact, 
t Such phrases may be explained by supposing^ veux que,je desire que, or something 
equivalent understood before them. 



300 



THE EIGHTH-EIGHTH LESSON. 



He carries his umbrella for fear that it II porte son parapluie de crainte qiCil 

may rain. ne pleuve. 

In that manner. In such a manner. De cettc maniere. De telle maniere. 

In what way. De quelle maniere. 

5. In, in such expressions, is rendered by de in French. 

The stove. The stove-door. Le poele. La porte du poele. 

The duck. To wipe, also to experience. Le canard. Essuyer. 

The turkey. Le dindon. La dinde. 

The rest. The crop, harvest. Le reste. La recolte. 

Obliged. Differently. Oblige. Differemment. 

To tear. To astonish. . Dechirer. Etonncr {de bef. inf.). 

To conceive. A phrase. Concevoir. Une phrase. 

There is the rest of my money. Voila le reste de mon argent. 

6. Left, in the sense of remaining, at the end of a clause, is translated de reste. 
I have nothing left. Je n'ai rien de reste. 

He has some ducks left. II a des canards de reste. 

There are none left. II n'y en a pas de reste. 

A few more apples left. Encore quelques pommes de reste. 

7. To get or have something done, is expressed in French by the verb /aire with an 
infinitive; as, 

To get mended. To get washed. Faire raccommoder. Faire laver. 

To have made. To have swept.' Faire faire. Faire balayer. 

Are you getting your coat mended ? Faites-vous raccommoder votre habit ? 
I am getting it mended. Je le fais raccommoder. 

8. Faire thus used is not to be separated from the dependent infinitive. 

Did you get a coat made ? Avez-vous fait faire un habit ? 

I got one made. J'en ai fait faire un. 

Did you have those trees pulled up ? Avez-vous fait arracher ces arbres ? 
I had them pulled up. Je les aifait arracher .* 

9. Fait followed by an infinitive, as here, is never varied to agree with a preceding noun 
or pronoun, because the infinitive is its object. 

1. Si vous pensez que nous valons mieux que ces ecoliers vous 
avez raison. 2. Si vous dites qu'ils vaillent mieux que nous, vous 
avez tort. 3. Ferez-vous laver votre linge ? 4. Jeleferai laver. 
5. Ce petit garcon n'a-t-il pas fait rire ces homines ? 6. II les a 
fait rire. 7. Get homme a-t-il quelque chose de reste ? 8. II n'a 
rien de reste. 9. Mettez-vous du bois dans le poele ? 10. J'ymets 
du charbon. 11. La pluie a fait du mal a la recolte. 12. Le do- 
mestique essuie la table. 13. Concevez-vous bien ce que je vous 

* Les in this sentence is the object of arracher ; literally, I have made pnll them up. 

15 3 11 5 2212 6 14 21 14 5 5 15 15 12 6 12 5 1 3 G 

poele, ca-nard, es-su-yer, din-don, dinde, reste, re-colte, ob-li-ge, di/-fe-rem-menif, de- 

12 C 5 21 6 21 4 21 2 1 5 12 

chi-rer, e-ton-ner, con-ce-voir. pbraze, ba-la-yer. 



THE EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



301 



dis I 14. Je le concois bien et mes freres le concoivent aussi. 15. 
Cet ecolier etonne tout le monde. 16. Dechirez-vous votre livre ? 
17. Je ne le dechire jamais. 18. Etes-vous oblige de faire votre 
tache de cette maniere ? 19. Oui, je ne puis pas la faire differem- 
ment. 

1. Why does that boy tear his book % 2. He tears it because 
he has no mind to learn his lesson. 3. Why are you astonished? 
4. That news has astonished me ; I have never conceived of such 
an (une telle) affair. 5. Have you torn your cloak? 6. I have 
torn it, and I wish to get it mended. 7. Have you written all the 
Latin phrases of your lesson? 8. I have written all the Latin 
phrases and all the Greek phrases. 9. Does the maid-servant wipe 
often the mouths of those children ? 10. She wipes their mouths 
and their hands very often. 11. Why do the scholars wipe their 
slates ? 12. They wipe them because they are wet. 13. Has the 
rain done harm to the crop ? 14. It has done it good 15. Have 
you some ducks left ? 16. I have some ducks and some turkeys 
left. 17. Has that countryman some turkeys? 18. He has no 
turkeys ; he has a few ducks left. 

19. If the master says that you are worth more than we, he 
is wrong. 20. If he says that we are worth less than our cousins, 
he is wrong. 21. If you think that I can teach you French in 
three months, you are deceived. 22. My father died in eighteen 
hundred and fifty. 23. He was born the fourth of March, eighteen 
hundred and one. 24. Were you born in eighteen hundred and 
thirty? 25. I was born in eighteen hundred and twenty-eight. 
26. Is there some wood left ? 27. No, sir, I have put it all in the 
stove. 28. You do not write well ; can you not write differ- 
ently? 29. No, sir, we are obliged to write in this manner. 30. 
Have you some turkeys left ? 31. I have a few more left. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. That scholar reads while eating, and he studies also while 
walking (en, mar chant). 2. When did you find your pencil ? 3. 
Yesterday ; in looking for my pen, I found my pencil. 4. Put some 
wood in the stove. 5. Whatever may be your fortune, you ought 
not for that to believe yourself (vous) better. 6. Whatever may be 
the books that you read, you do not appeaf to profit (prqfiti) much 
by your reading. 7. Whoever may wish to do me wrong,, shall pay 
dear (for) his audacity (a udace^ 8. Whomsoever I shelter (abrite)^ 



302 



THE EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON. 



has to fear no clanger. 9. Whatever you do, do it always with 
good will/ 

10. I have a cold in the head which gives me the headache, li- 
lt is very disagreeable ; it is necessary to take a little hot tea this 
evening. 12. It is nothin^dangerous. 13. You went out in (par) 
_~ the rain ; is not your linenwet ? 14. No ; my coat is perhaps a 
little damp. 15. Go and change 16. No, it is not necessary ; 
it is not very damp. 17. Change' it, if it is not quite dry ; you 
have already a cold in the head, and if you remain with your coat 
wet, you will have a cold in the breast, and you will be perhaps very 
sick. 18. Well, I am going to change my (de) coat. 19. Here is 
one ; take off yours, and put on this. 20. No, thank you, I am 
going to my room; I wish to put on also a pair of dry stockings. 
21. You had better (vous ferez bien). 



89.— QUATRE-VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD CONTINUED. 

1. The mode of forming the present subjunctive has been given (Lesson 81); the fol- 
lowing is still more comprehensive. The first and second persons plural are, in most verbs, 
the same as those of the imperfect indicative, and the three persons singular and third per- 
son plural may be had by dropping ent of the third person plural indicative present, and 
adding the terminating letters, e, es, e, ent. 

2. All verbs in evoie, as Devoir, also Acquerir, Boire, Mourir, Venir, Tenir, and 
Prendre, form the present subjunctive according to the above rule, as exceptions to the 
general rule (Lesson 81), thus : 

Quejedoive, quetudoives, qiCil doive, quenous devious, que vous deviez, 

That I may owe, that thou mayest owe, that he may owe, that we, etc., that you, etc., 

quHls doivent, that they may owe. 
Quejedoive, -tuboives, -ilboive, -nous buvions, -vous buviez, -ilsboivent, 
That I may drink, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, etc. 
Qiteje meure, -tumeures, -ilmeure, -nous mourions, -vous mouriez, -Us meur ent, 
That I may die, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, etc. 
Queje vienne, -tu viennes, -il vienne, -nous venions, -vous veniez, -Us viennent, 
That I may come, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, etc. 

Queje tienne, -tu tiennes, -il Uenne, -nous tenions, -vous teniez, -Us tiennent, 
That I may hold, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, etc. 
Quejeprenne, -tuprennes, -ilprenne, -nous prenions, -vous preniez,-ils prennent, 
That I may take, that thou, etc., that he, etc., that we, etc., that you, etc., that they, etc. 
Que j'acquiere, que tu aequieres, etc., que nous acquerions, que vous acqueriez, etc., 
That I may acquire, that thou, etc., that we may acquire, that you may acquire, etc. 

3. Besides the above, the irregular subjunctives, previously given, are these : 



20 4 12 21 4 12 5 20 20 22 1221 22 12 5 20 11 18 1220 

doive, de-vions, de-vies, doivent, boive, bu-vions, bu-vies, boivent, meure, mou-rions, 

18 12 5 11 125 4 21 4 6 125 125 4 21 4 6 12 5 

mou-ries, meurent, vienne, ve-nons, ve-nes, \iemient, tiemie, te-nons, te-nes, tiennent, 

5 4 12 21 4 12 5 5 

pren??,<?, pre-nions, pre-nies, prennent. 



THE EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON. 



303 



INF. STJBJ. 

Aller, aille, Lesson 83, 

Avoir, aie, " 82. 

fttre, sois, " 82. 



INF. STJBJ. 

Valoir, vaille* Lesson 85. 
Vouloir, veuille, " 83. 
and their compounds.* 



INF. 6TJBJ. 

Faire, fasse, Lesson 84. 
Falloir, faille, " 87. 
Pouvoir, puisse, " 82. 

Je desire que vous buviez ceci. 
II a peur que je ne doive beaucoup. 
Je crains que tu ne meures bientot. 
II faut qu'il vienne. 

Voulez-vous que nous tenions les che- 
vaux ? 

Pensez-vous vpx'ilsprennentvotve fruit? 
Je desire que vous acqueriez des rich- 
esses. 

Un chef-d'oeuvre. Dehors. 
Prudent. Autrefois. 
Tel. Un tel fait. 
Un obstacle. Une noce. 
Les Bretons. Les Gaulois. 
Un professeur. 
Un irlandais. Son arrivee. 
JVuire (a bef. n.). Nui (past part.). 
Cet affaire a nui a sa reputation. 
Soumettre (comp. of mettre). "La. fin. 
FdcheuXi Je crois que oui, or si. 

4. In such expressions as I think so, I believe not, etc., meaning, / think that it is so, 1 
that it is not so, etc., the oui, the si, and the non, must be preceded by que in French. 

I believe not. I think so. Je crois que non. Je pense que oui, or si. 

You had better. Vousferez bien, vousferez mieux. 

5. Mieux is thus used with the future of faire when comparison is expressed ; Men, 
when it is not. Faire Men takes de before the infinitive. 

You had better study French than Vous ferez mieux\ d'etudier le francais 



I wish you to drink this. 
He is afraid that I owe much. 
I fear that thou raayest die soon. 
It is necessary for him to come. 
Do you wish us to hold the horses ? 

Do you think that they take your fruit ? 
I wish you to acquire riches. 

A master-work. Without, out of it. 

Prudent. Formerly. 

Such. Such a fact. 

An obstacle. A wedding. 

The Britons. The Gauls. 

A professor. 

An Irishman. His arrival. 

To injure. Injured. 

That affair has injured his reputation. 

To subdue. The end. 

Sad, vexing. I believe so. 



Spanish. 
Now you had better play. 
Such an affair. 

Let us go to meet our friends. 



Perhaps your brother will come soon. 



que l'espagnol. 
A present vousferez bien f de jouer. 
Une telle affaire. 

Allons au-devant (h la rencontre) de 
nos amis. 

Peut-etre votre frere viendra bientot. 
Peut-etre que votre frere viendra bien- 
tot. 

Peut-etre votre frere viendra-t-il bien- 
tot. 



* Prevaloir, a compound of valoir, makes the subjunctive private, regular. 
+ In the former of these sentences there is comparison between the study of French and 
Spanish, and mieux is used ; in the latter there is no comparison, and Men is used. 

9 4 16 22 3 17 20 5 15 I 15 15 5 11 12 3 7 

che/-d , ceuvre, de-hors,*pru-den£, autre-fois, tel, ob-stacle, noce, pro-fes-seur, ir-lan-dais, 

1 12 6 22 13 2212 18 5 2 9 14 

ar-ri-vee, nu-ire, nui, sou-mettre, fa-cheucc, fin. 



304 



THE EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON. 



1. J'admire beaucoup ce tableau ; c'est un chef-d'oeuvre. 2. Les 
hommes n'etaient-ils pas bien forts autrefois ? 3. lis n'etaient pas 
plus forts autrefois qu'aujourd'hui. 4. Cet homme a garde un si- 
lence prudent. 5. C'est une action bien prudente. 6. J'irai a la 
noce ce soir. 7. Est-il necessaire de rester ici longtemps ? 8. II 
est necessaire d'y rester jusqu'a la fin du mois. 9. Cet accident est 
bien facheux. 10. Le professeur a beaucoup de courage ; il a vain- 
cu tous les obstacles. 11. Yotre professeur est-il arrive ? 12. Qui, 
et son arrivee m'a fait grand plaisir. 13. Est-il allemand ? 14. 
Non, c'est un irlandais qui a urn-bonne reputation. 15. Est-il alle 
dehors? 16. Oui, il vient de sortir. 17. Cesar conquit l'Espagne 
et la Gaule, soumit l'Egypte et vainquit Pompee. 18. Dis-tu que 
je receive ton argent? 19. Je ne dis pas que tu le recoives. 

1. Do you believe that I owe you money? 2. I do not believe 
that you owe me much. 3. Do you think that the merchants re- 
ceive our letters ? 4. I do not think that they receive them. 5. 
Is the doctor afraid that we may die % 6. He is afraid that you 
may die. 7. Does the physician permit you to drink coffee ? 8. 
He permits me to drink coffee and tea. 9. It is time for the master 
to come ; do you believe that he is coming ? 10. I do not believe 
that he is coming before ten o'clock. 11. Do you wish us to hold 
your books ? 12. I wish you to hold my books and my papers. 13. 
Do you wish me to take your horse ? 14. I do not wish you to take 
him ; I wish the boy to take him. 15. Do you say that the doctor 
acquires reputation ? 16. I say that he acquires much. 

17. Is the professor a prudent man? 18. He is very prudent. 
19. Caesar conquered the Gauls and subdued the Britons. 20. Do 
such affairs astonish you? 21. Such affairs do not astonish me. 
22. Does the servant put the horse in the stable, or does he leave 
him out ? 23. He leaves him out. 24. Were men stronger for- 
merly than at present ? 25. My friend thinks so ; but I (moi, je) 
think not. 26. Your sister will not go to the wedding ; will she ? 
27. I think so. 28. Do you admire my father's new work? 29. 
Yes, sir ; it is a master-piece. 30. Had I better buy that horse ? 
31. You had better buy him. 32. My brother wishes to study Ital- 
ian ; had he not better study German ? 33. He had better study 
German. 34. The royal palace (palais royal) is magnificent; it 
is a master-piece. 



THE NINETIETH LESSON. 



305 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Will you pay the countryman for his horse at the end of the 
week? 2. No, I shall pay him for it at the end of the month. 3. 
Is there a wedding at your neighbor's this evening'? 4. I think so. 
5. Has not the physician injured his reputation % 6. He has in- 
jured it much. 7. Have you heard the news % 8. Yes, sir ; it is 
very sad. 9. Are you waiting for your brother to come % 10. I am 
waiting for my brothejLa^d,s„istei^to comey 11. Do you consent that 
I take these books ? 12. I consent that you take them. 13. Are 
you afraid that we may drink too much wine ? 14. I am not 
afraid that you may drink too much; but I am afraid that the son 
of our neighbor may drink too much. 15. Are you afraid that that 
sick man may die ? 16. I am afraid that he may die soon. 

17. Do you approve of my learning German ? 18. Yes ; I will 
have thee learn German and Spanish. 19. Is it necessary that I 
hold these horses? 20. No ; I will have the servant hold them. 21. 
Do you know any one who receives more letters than I ? 22. I do 
not believe that you receive so many as our neighbor. 23. Does 
the master approve of my coming here at nine o'clock? 24. Yes ; 
but he likes better that you come at eight. 25. An Irishman went 
to see a professor of music, and asked him what was the price of 
his lessons. 28. The professor replied : ''Six dollars for the first 
month, and three for the second." 27. " Then," said the Irish- 
man, " I will come the second month." 



90._QUATRE-VINGT-DIXI^ME LEQON. 

PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

1. Pronominal veebs are those -which have a pronoun for object, of the same person 
as the subject. They are either reflective or reciprocal ; as, I warm myself, he warms 
himself, they flatter each other. These verbs are much more numerous in French than in 
English, and require the especial attention of the learner. And first, 

I. — Verbs which are reflective or reciprocal in English are the same in French. 



Himself herself itself one's self them- 
selves. 

■ To wash one's self To hurt one's self. 
To shave. To shave one's self. 
To warm. To warm one's self. 
To flatter each other. 
To dress. To dress one's self. 
To undress. To undress one's self. 
To behave, to behave one's self 
To behave well. To behave badly. 



Se, before the verb. (Se becomes s* 

before a vowel or a silent h.) 
Se laver. Se faire mal. 
Baser. Se raser. 
Chauffer. Se chauffer. 
Se flatter. 

HaUller. S'habiller. 

Deshabillcr. Se deshabiller. 

Se comporter, se conduire. 

Se bien comporter. Se mal comporter. 



16 17 6 11-2 6 5 1 12 6 21 16 6 21 2213 

ra-ze/', chau/-fer, ha-bil-ler, des-fta-bil-ler, com-por-ter, con-duire. 



306 



THE NINETIETH LESSON. 



He shaves Se rase-t-il ? II se rase. 



We shave Vous rasez-vous ? Nous nous rasons. 



They Se rasent-ils ? lis se rasent. 



Dost thou shave thyself? I shave ^Terases-tu? Je me rase. 

myself. 
Does he shave himself? 

himself. 
Do you shave yourselves ? 

ourselves. 
Do they shave themselves? 

shave themselves. 

2. The pronoun in italics is the object of the verb. 
Do you flatter yourselves (or each Vous fiattez-vous ? 

other) ? 

"We do not flatter ourselve3 (or each 
other). 

Do they not flatter each other? 
They flatter each other. 
Do I not shave myself? 



Nous ne 



flattons pas. 



Ne se flattent-ils pas ? 
lis se flattent. 

Ne me rase-je pas ? or, Est-ce que je 

ne me rase pas ? 
Tu ne te rase pas. 
Vous rasiez-vous ? Je me rasais. 



Thou dost not shave thyself. 
Did you shave yourself? I shaved 
myself. 

Wilt thou not shave thyself? 
I shall not shave myself. 
Do you permit us to warm ourselves ? 

I permit you to warm yourselves. 
I am under many obligations to you. vous ai beaucoup d' 



Ne te raseras-tu pas ? 
Je ne me raserai pas. 
Permettez-vous que nous 
fions ? 

Je permets que vous votes chauffiez. 



chauf- 



To lower, cast down. To raise. 
To blush, become red. To reduce. 
To construct. A voice. 
An amusement. Dancing. 
A vail. Infinitely. 
Light. The guard. 

3. Prendre garde, to beware of, takes d 
Beware of that man. 
Beware of him. 

It is necessary to guard against robbers. 
Take care not to fall. 
Beware of losing your money. 



Baisser. Lever. 
Rougir. Reduire (d bef. inf.). 
Construire. Une voix. 
Un amusement. La danse. 
Un voile. Infiniment. 
Leger. La garde. 
before a noun and de before the infinitive. 
Prends garde a cet homme. 
Prends garde a lui. 
II faut prendre garde aux voleurs. 
Prenez garde de tomber. 
Prenez garde de perdre votre argent. 



4. Autre and autrement, like comparatives of superiority or inferiority, when not neg- 
ative, take ne before the following verb. 

She is quite different from what she was.^-Elle est tout autre qu'elle w'etait. 
He thinks quite otherwise than you II pense tout autrement que vous ne 
believe. croyez. 



6 6 4 6 18 32 5 2213 21 2213 20 1 22 3 3 20 14 12 12 

bais-ser, le-ve/\ rou-gir, re-duire, con-struire, voice, a-muze-men^, danse, voile, in-fi-ni- 

S 5 5 1 

mentf, le-ger, garde. 



THE NINETIETH LESSON. 



307 



1. Prenez garde a cet homme ; il peut vous nuire dans vos af- 
faires. 2. La semaine derniere quand cette dame etait en danger, 
la defendites-vous ! 3. Je la defendis. 4. Pourquoi ce petit gar- 
<con baisse-t-il les yeux ? 5. II les baisse parce qu'il a honte, mais 
il les leve quand on lui parle. 6. Cette jeune fille rougit-elle sou- 
vent ? 7. Elle rougit lorsqu'on lui parle. 8. Le macon construit-il 
une maison de brique? 9. Non, il en construit une de pierre. 10. 
Aimez-vous la danse ? 11. Oui, c'est un amusement tres-agreable. 
12. J'entends une voix qui m'appelle. 13. Cette dame leve son 
voile parce qu'elle veut parler a son amie ; c'est une femme infini- 
ment aimable. 14. Let barbier vous rase-t-il ? 15. II me rase qua- 
tre fois par semaine. 16. Ce bois-ci est-il plus leger que 1'eau? 17. 
II est un peu plus leger. 18. J'ai reduit le nombre de mes domes- 
tiques. 19. Ne te comportes-tu pas bien 1 20. Je me conduis bien. 
21. Ce petit garcon se comport e-t-il bien? 22. II se conduit mal. 
23. Ne vous rasez-vous pas ? 24. Nous nous rasons tous les ma- 
tins. 25. Les enfants se chauffent-ils % 26. lis se chauffent. 27. 
Cet enfant s'habille-t-il ? 28. II s'habille et il se deshabille tous 
les jours. 29. Ne vous rasiez-vous pas quand vous etiez a la cam- 
pagne? 30. Je me rasais tous les matins. 31. Ne vous chauffe- 
rez-vous pas quand vous arriverez chez vous % 32. Je ne me cbauf- 
ferai pas ; je n'ai pas froid. 

1. Why does that young girl cast down her eyes ? 2. She casts 
them down because they are looking at her. 3. Why does she 
raise her vail ? 4. She raises it because she wishes to speak to the 
merchant. 5. Does she always blush when one speaks to her? 
6. She often blushes when one speaks to her. 7. After having 
(apres avoir) lost my fortune, I reduced my expenses. 8. Did you 
reduce the number of your servants ? 9. I reduced it one-half (de 
moitie). 10. Did those workmen construct your house ? 11. They 
constructed it. 12. Did you have it constructed last autumn? 13. 
No, sir, I had it constructed last summer. 14. The dog hears the 
voice of his master. 15. Do the mountains defend your house from -f-' 
the wind f 16. They defend it from the wind and from the cold. ^ 

17. Why dost thou warm thyself % 18. I warm myself because 
lam cold. 19. Do you not warm yourselves? 20. We do not 
warm ourselves ; it is not cold. 21. Do those travelers warm them- 
selves ? 22. They do not warm themselves. 23. Dost thou shave 



308 



THE NINETY-FIRST LESSON. 



myself, or does the barber shave thee ? 24. I shave myself every 
morning. 25. Does the servant dress those children, or do they 
dress themselves (eux-memes)3 26. They dress themselves every 
morning, and undress themselves every night. 27. That sick man 
cannot undress himself. 28. Do you behave well? 29. Yes, sir, 
we always behave well. 30. Does that child always behave well ? 
31. No, sir, he sometimes behaves very badly. 32. Did you not 
shave yourself when you were in the country? 33. Yes, I always 
shaved myself. 34. Will you dress yourself early to-morrow morn- 
ing ? 35. I shall dress myself at six o'clock. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Did not your cousin behave well when he went to school? 
2. He did not behave well. 3. Did you not shave early when you 
were in the country ? 4. I always shaved early. 5. Do you dress 
yourselves several times a day (par jour ) n 6. No, sir, we dress 
but once a day. 7. What I desire is to fulfill my obligations. 8. 
What kings often like the best is flattery (la fiatterie)/ 9. The mu- 
sic which I like the best is to hear the singing of the birds. 10. 
i Will not that child hurt himself? 11. I fear that he may hurt 
himself. 12. Music is for me an amusement and not an occupa- 
tion (occupation). 13. Do you not hear the voice of some one ? 
14. Yes, it is the voice of Charles who is calling us. 15. This wood 
is lighter than water. 16. Dancing fatigues me ; I do not like it 
much. 

17. I come for my handkerchief which I left here. 18. It is in 
the other room, on the table. 19. Are you going to the wedding 
this evening? 20. Yes, I am going there. 21. At what o'clock 
is the ceremony to take place ? 22. At half past eight. 23. Is 
there to be much (grande) company^ 24. No, there will not be 
many people (there). 25. Will you return early or late this even- 
ing? 26. I do not know; but may be I shall not return before 
midnight. 27. Is there to be a ball ? 28. I believe not; but there 
will be a wedding supper (un souper de ?ioce).X29. You will not 
stay until the end ; will you? 30. I think so, if itbe not too late. 
31. Good morning ; I am going out. 32. I wish you much pleasure 
till we see each other again (au revoir). 



91.— QUATRE-VINGT-ONZIEME LEQON. 

PRONOMINAL VERBS CONTINUED. 



We love each other. 
They praise each other. 



Nous nous aimons. 

lis se loueut Tun l'autre. 



THE NINETY-FIRST LESSON. 



309 



They speak against each other. lis parlent l'un contre l'autre. 

He begins to study. II se met a etudier. 

1. Se mettre followed, by d and an infinitive may mean to begin. 
They began to drink. lis se mirent a boire. 

Every body began to laugh. Tout le monde se mit a rire 

II. — Verbs are pronominal in French, though not in English, which express one's doing 
something to any part of himself. The reflective pronoun is always placed before other 
objective pronouns. 



Te laves-tu les mains ? 

Je me les lave. 

II se lave les mains. 

Vous lavez-vous les mains ? 

Nous ne nous les lavons pas. 

Ne se lavent-ils pas le visage ? 

lis se le lavent. 

Cette jeune fille se chauffe-t-elle lea 
pieds ? 

Ne se les chauffe-t-elle pas ? 
Elle ne se les chauffe pas. 
Ne se brulent-ils pas les pieds ? 
lis ne se les brulent pas. 
Fr otter. Pardonner. 



Dost thou wash thy hands ? 
I wash them. 
He washes his hands. 
Do you wash your hands ? 
We do not wash them. 
Do they not wash their faces ? 
They wash them. 

Does that young girl warm her feet ? 

Does she not warm them? 
She does not warm them. 
Do they not burn their feet ? 
They do not burn them. 
To rub. To -pardon. 

2. Pardonner takes d before a person and de before an infinitive. 
Do you pardon that man's faults ? Pardonnez-vous k cet homme ses 

fautes ? 

I pardon them. Je les lui pardonne. 

He prevents my doing that. II m'empeche de faire cela. 

3. We have seen that empecher, craindre, avoir peur, tremoler, and apprehender, take 
ne before the following subjunctive. 

We prevent that child from doing Nous empechons que cet enfant ne 

what he pleases. fasse ce qu'il veut. 

He trembles lest thou tell his secret. II tremble que tu ne dises son secret. 
I apprehend his telling it. J'apprehende qu'il ne le dise. 

I hurt my eyes when I rub them. ^ Je me fais mal aux yeux quand je me 

les frotte. 
"** Je m'y fais mal quand je les frotte. 
Inutile. La verite. 
Le membre. L&jambe. 
Parmi. La porte de devant. 
Perriere. La porte de derriere. 
II est {c'est) dommage. II est {c'est) 

grand dommage. 
Noble, \2amiiie. 



I hurt them when I rub them. 
Useless. The truth. 
A member, limb. The leg. 
Among. The front door. 
Behind. The back door. 
It is a pity. It is a great pity. 

Noble. Friendship. 



6 1 15 6 12 22 12 5 12 6 3 3 1 12 7 12 7 15 1 

froMer, par-don-ner, i-nu-til, ve-ri-te, membre, jambe, par-mi, der-riere, dom-mag< 

16 1 12 12 5 

noble, a-mi-tie. 



310 



THE NINETY-FIRST LESSON. 



Otherwise. An obligation. 

In the mean time. 

However, nevertheless. 

How far ? Flattery. 

Among them. Behind him. 

Before the door. Behind the door. 



Autremcnt. Une obligation. 

Cependant. En attendant. 

Cependant. Pourtant. JVeanmoins. 

JusqxCou ? La Jlatterie. 

Parmi eux. Derriere lui. 

Devant la porte. Derriere la porte. 



4. We have seen (Lesson 53) that words denoting quantity generally take de -without 
the article before a following noun. La plupart, however, like Men, takes de with the ar- 
ticle ; and the verbs, participles, and adjectives following la plupart do not agree with it, 
but with the noun which it limits; thus, 



1. De quoi ces jeunes filles se couvrent-elles le visage ? 2. Elles 
se le couvrent de voiles. 3. De quoi couvrent-elles leurs livres ? 4. 
Elles les couvrent de papier. 5. Pourquoi ce garcon se frotte-t-il 
les mains? 6. II se le frotte pour se les rechauffer,.^ 7. Pardonnez- 
vous a cet homme de vous avoir offense ? 8. Je le lui pardonne. 
9. Ne vous faites-vous pas mal aux yeux quand vous vous les frot- 
tez? 10. Je ne m'y fais pas mal. 11. Apprehendez-vous que 
votre ami ne soit malade ? 12. Oui, je tremble qu'il ne meure. 
13. II y a beaucoup de cboses inutiles dans cette maison. 14. Ce 
malade n'a-t-il pas mal a la jambe 1 15. Si, tous les membres lui 
font mal. 16. Fermez la porte de devant et la porte de derriere. 
17. Aimez-vous la verite ? 18. Oui, tout le monde aime la verite. 
19. Cet homme n'est-il pas de famille noble ? 20. II est noble de 
pere et de mere. 21. Cet homme a promis de me rendre des ser- 
vices ; cependant, il en a fait tout autrement, il ne remplit pas ses 
obligations. 22. Ces homines vivent dans une grande amitie. 23. 
Jusqu'ou all ez- vous ? 24. Je vais jusqu'a la riviere. 

1. Do you begin to study early every day? 2. I begin to study 
at five every morning. 3. Does that negligent boy [petit negligent) . 
burn his shoes when he warms his feet ? 4. He burns his shoes 
and he burns his feet also. 5. Has the master pardoned that lazy 
scholar? 6. He has pardoned him. 7. Do those children wash 
their hands ? 8. They wash their hands and their faces. 9. Do 
you warm your feet ? 10. I warm my feet and my hands. 11. Do 

17 2 15 \1 1 12 21 4 3 3 1 3 3 IS 3 5 14 20 1 12 

autre-menf, ob-li-ga-tion, ce-pen-dani, ai-ten-dan2, pour-tanif, ne-an-moins, flatte-rie. 



Most men love flattery. 



La plupart des hommes aiment la flat- 



Most women are not beautiful. 
The greatest part are amiable. 



terie. 

La plupart des femmes ne sont pas belles. 
La plupart sont aimables. 



THE NINETY-FIRST LESSON. 



311 



you bum your hands when you warm them?/ 12. I do not burn 
them. 13. Do you hurt your eyes when you wash your face? 14. 
I do not hurt them. 15. Does not that learned man love the truth? 
16. He loves the truth, and defends it with more courage than you — 
think. 17. Do your limbs pain you ? 18. Yes, all my limbs pain 
me. 

19. Is the surgeon going to cut off that man's arm? 20. No, 
he is going to cut off his left leg. 21. Do you find my pen among 
your books ? 22. I find it among my papers. 23. Are you going 
to shut the front door or the back door ? 24. I am going to shut 
neither the front door nor the back door ; I am going to shut the 
window. 25. Is that man your friend? 26. Yes, he renders me 
much service f rom f riendship. 27. Does your neighbor fulfill his 
obligations ? 28. He fulfills all his obligations. 29. That man 
promised to be my friend ; nevertheless he has done quite other- 
wise. 30. Burn those papers; they are useless. 31. That scholar 
has wit, but he does not study ; it is a pity. 32. Why do you rub 
your hands ? 33. I rub them in order to warm them. 34. Those 
children are washing their faces. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. I come to ask you a question. 2. What one ? 3. It is tos^. 
tell me where the tailor lives who makes your clothes (habits). 4. 
If you wish, I will take you to his shop (set boutique). 5. I accept ; 
you do me a servicer"""^. Do you wish to change your tailor? 7. 
Yes ; the last clothes that mine made for me, were very badly sewed, 
and I have need of a coat and waistcoat for the ball which they are 
to give next Wednesday. 8. The royal palace is superb ; it is a 
master-work. 9. Have you not injured that man ? 10. I think 
not; I have not intended (had the intention) to injure him. " 11. 
That physician is able, and nevertheless he has made a great mis- 
take. 12. He is still very young, and nevertheless he is very wise. 

13. We will go to my tailor's this afternoon, if you wish ; he 
does good work, but he is a little dear. 14. That is (fait) noth- 
ing ; I do not look at (a) a few franks ( francs) more or less if the 
work is well done. 15. You are right ; those who work too cheap 
often do only very bad work. 16. How long has that house 

> -been burned? 17. It burned last Saturday. 18. It has been 

burned then seven days to-day, and I knew nothing of it. 19. Your 
brother and I (nous) went to the fire the evening that it burned. 
20. It was unknown to me^-21. Were you not in the country at 
your uncle's that evening ? 22. It is true ; I had forgotten it ; it 
is for that reason (pour cela) that I knew nothing of it. 23. They 



312 



THE NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 



broke many things ; some (les uns) carried {empor taient) the car- 
pets out of [par) the door, and others threw the looking-glasses out 
of the window. 24. It is always thus (comme cela) that they do 
when there is a (un incendie) fire ; they break almost every thing 
(tout). 25. It is better to let all burn. 



92.— QUATKE-VINGT-DOUZlfiME LEQON. 

PRONOMINAL VEEBS CONTINUED. 

III. — Pronominal verbs are used in French also, when the subject of a general charac- 
ter, as people, one, they, we, is omitted, in English, and its place supplied by the object. In 
such cases the verb is often passive in English. 

Cotton sells well. Le coton se vend bien. 

Glass breaks easily. Le verre se casse facilement. 

Stone does not cut easily. La pierre ne se coupe pas facilement. 

Dry wood burns fast.* L^bois sec se brute vite.* 

Meat is sometimes eaten raw. La viande se mange quelquefois crue. 

These books are easily understood. Ces livres se comprennent facilement. 

This writing can be read. Cette ecriture peut se lire. 

That river is named the Moselle. Cettc riviere se nomme la Moselle. 

IV. — Some verbs are pronominal in French, for which no general rule can be given, 
but which are to be learned by observation and practice ; as, 

To take possession. To abstain. S'emparer. S'abstenir (comp. of 

tcnir). 

To repent. To remember. Se repentir. Se rappeler, se souvenir 

(comp. of venir). 

1. These verbs, except se rappeler, take de before the infinitive. Se repentir is varied 
as sortir (Lesson 29). 

Dost thou abstain from wine ? T'abstiens-tu de vin? 

I do not abstain from it. Je ne m'en abstiens pas. 

We repent of our conduct. Nous nous repentons de notre conduite. 

He takes possession of the papers. II s'empare des papiers. 

2. Se souvenir takes de before its object ; se rappeler does not. 

( Vous souvenez-vous de vos promesses ? 
Do you remember your promises ? j Voug rappelez _ vous vos promesses ? 

_ ( lis se souviennent des leurs. 

They remember theirs. j m ge rappellent leg leurg< 

3. Verbs which are always pronominal, that is, which are never used without the re- 
flective pronoun, are called essentially pronominal verbs ; and those which are used 
sometimes with and sometimes without it, are called accidentally pronominal veebs. 



* These phrases are expressed with a general subject, thus : They sell cotton well; One 
breaks glass easily ; We do not cut stone easily ; People burn dry wood fast. 



! 1 6 1 4 12 4 3 12 1 6 18 

■m-pa-rer, abs-te-nir, re-pen-tir, rappe-ler, souve-nir. 



THE NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 



313 



The above, except rajjpeler, are of the former class. Those previously given are of the 
latter. 

4. All pronominal verbs take etre for their auxiliary, the participle agreeing with the 
direct object, when that object precedes, the same as in verbs which take avoir for their 
auxiliary.* 



I have warmed myself. 

Has he warmed himself? 

She had dressed herself. 

We shall have shaved. 

Yesterday, as soon as you had shaved, 

you went out. 
They have washed themselves. 



Je me suis chauff'e, or chauffec. 

S'est-W chauff'e ? 

Elle s'etait habillee. 

Nous nous serons rases. 

Hier des que vous vous fides rases, 

vous sortites. 
lis se sont laves. 



5. When, besides the reflective pronoun, the verb has a second object, the participle 
agrees with it, according to rule, Lesson 37, provided it can be the direct object, t otherwise 
it agrees with the reflective pronoun. 

He has warmed his hands. 
He has warmed them. 
Hast thou not burnt thy hand ? 
I have not burnt it. 
She has remembered her lessons. 
She has remembered them. 
They had repented of their conduct. 



A worm. To enjoy. 
To gnaw. To gnaw a bone. 
Early in the morning. 
He enjoys good health. 
Worms gnaw wood. 



II s'est chauff'e les mains. 
II se les est chauffees. 
Ne t'es-tu pas bride la main ? 
Je ne me la suis pas brulee. 
Elle s'est souvenue de ses leeons. 
Elle s'en est souvenue.\ 
Elles s'etaient repenties de leur con- 

. duite. 
ITn ver. Jouir {de bef. noun). 
Ronger. Ronger un os. 
De bon matin, de grand matin. 
II jouit d'une bonne sante. 
Los vers ron<rent le bois. 



1. Cet ouvrage se firtit sans peine. 2. Ce verre-ci se casse-t-il 
aussi facilement que celui-la ? 3. Celui-ci se casse plus facilernent 
que celui-la. 4. La pluie nous empechera d'aller au spectacle ce 
soir. 5. Les enfants se sont-ils lave la figure ? G. II se la sent 
lavee. 7. Vous etiez-vous rase ce matin quand vous etes alle a 
la boutique'? 8. Je m'etais rase. 9. Connaissez-vous la famillede 
monsieur C. ? 10. Oui, je viens de passer quelques jours dans sa 
famille. 11. Vous abstenez-vous de the? 12. Je m'abstiens de 



* This is according to the general rule for the agreement of participles, etre being used 
idiomatically for avoir. 

t Verbs which take a preposition before the following noun govern the indirect object, 
those that take no preposition before it govern the direct object Thus we say : 11 nuit a 
son voisin ; nuire governs the indirect object. 11 hubille I enfant; Jiabillc governs the 
direct object. The reflective pronoun is always the direct object of all essentially pronominal 
verbs, except s'arroger, to arrogate. 

% In the first four ol the above phrases, the second object of the verb is the direct one, 
and chauffe, brtile, are not varied when the object follows, but agree when it precedes. In 
the last three, the second object being preceded by cle, is not the direct object, and the 
participle therefore agrees with the reciprocal pronoun which precedes. 



7 18 12 21 6 17 15 

ver, jou-ir, ron-ge/', 6s and o.s 



14 



314 



THE NINETY-SECOND LESSON. 



the et de cafe. v 13. Cet homme s'est repenti de ses fautes. 14. 
Vous souvenez de notre lecture ? 15. Je m'en souviens bien. 

1. Does coal sell dear this winter? 2. No; coal sells cheap, 
and wood sells cheap also. 3. This bread is not good; but it can 
be eaten. 4. Who has taken possession of that house? 5. The 
merchant has taken possession of it. 6. Does that writing read 
easily? 7. It reads very easily. 8. Pine [pin) wood cuts easier 
than oak. 9. For how much does grain sell this winter ? 10. It 
sells cheap. 11. Does flour sell at five dollars a barrel ? 12. It 
sells at six dollars a barrel. 13. Is fish sometimes eaten raw ? 14. 
They are eaten raw in some countries. 15. Is the Spanish lan- 
guage learned in a little time? 16. It is not learned perfectly in 
a little time. 

17. Is not this wood subject to worms? 18. It is not subject 
to worms. 19. That man enjoys (cVune) perfect health. 20. Our 
neighbor knows (how) to enjoy his fortune. 21. Are you acquaint- 
ed with his family ? 22. Yes ; it is a family very amiable. 23. 
Do you go out early in the morning ? 24. I go out at five o'clock. 
25. What is that dog gnawing? 26. He is gnawing a bone. 27. 
How long have you abstained from Avine ? 28. I have abstained 
from it six month£j 29. Have you not hurt your fojtfrt 30. I have 
hurt it^ 31. Will you have shaved when I shall come to your house 
to-morrow morning? 32. I shall have shaved. 33. Yesterday, 
as soon as you had dressed, did you not go to the shop ? 34. I 
went there. 35. Did you wash your face befor^shavin^this morn- 
ing ? 36. No, sir ; I shaved before washing my face. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you sometimes go to the theater ? 2. I go there occa- 
sionally. 3. I have a desire to go there this evening ; what say 
you ? shall we go together ? 4. I consent to go there, for I have 
nothing to do. 5. AVhat do they play this evening? 6. I do not 
know what they play ; I wish to go there in order to hear Madam 
S. sing. 7. Have you never heard her sing^ 8. No, never ; she 
has a great reputation. 9. When I dwelt in i^ew Orleans I went 
often to hear her. 10. How do you find that she sings ? 11. Very 
well ; she has an excellent voice, and she sings with much taste. 
12. We have no opera here ; it is a pity ; of all amusements, the 
opera is the one to which I am most inclined (porte)*^ 13. Do you 
not like dancing? 14. Not at all ; I see nothing in it to admire. 



THE NINETY-THIRD LESSON. 



315 



15. You mean (voulez dire) the dancing of the theater'? 16. Cer- 
tainly {sans doute) ; I like the ball well enough. 

17. Have you taken possession of the new house? 18. Yes; I 
took possession of it last week. 19. Has that man repented of his 
bad conduct (conduite) % 20. He has repented of it. 21. Did your 
friend remember his promise (promesse) ? 22. He remembered it. 
23. Does your father enjoy good health? 24. He enjoys perfect 
health. 25. The tailor goes to his shop early in the morning ; does 
he not? 26. He goes there at half-past five. 27. I always shave 
early in the morning. 



93.— QUATRE-VINGT-TREIZlfrME LEQON. 

PEONOMINAL YEEBS. CONDITIONAL TENSE. 
To sit down, to seat one's self. S'asseoir (irregular). 

Je m'assieds, t-u t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, 

I sit down, thou sittest down, he sits down, we sit down, you sit down, 

Us s'asseyent, they sit down. 
Also je m'assois, hi t'assois, U s'assoit, nous nous assoyons, vous vous assoyez, Us 
s'assoient. 

1. As the imperative mood when affirmative takes the objective pronoun after it, joined 
by a hyphen, it takes the reflective pronoun in the same way. 



Sit down in this chair. 
Sit down in it. 

Let us sit down. Seat thyself here. 
Do not sit down on the bench. 
Seat thyself on it. 

Let us not sit down on these chairs. 
Wash your hands. Wash them. 
Remember thy promises. 
Remember them. 

He has sat down, and I will sit down. 
I have been here these two years. 
We have known him these six months. 
To be or do (in regard to health). 
How do you do ? 
I am very well. 
How does your father do ? 
He is well. 

Is your mother well? 

She has taken a slight cold. 

How do your mother and sisters do ? 



Asseyez-vous sur cette chaise. 
Asseyez-vous-y. 

Asseyons-nous. Assieds-toi ici. 
Ne vous asseyez pas sur le banc. 
Assieds-y-toi. 

Ise nous asseyons pas sur ces chaises - 

Lavez-vous les mains. Lavez-les-vous. 

Souviens-toi de tes promesses. 

Souviens-t'en^ 

II s'est assis, et je m'assierai. 

Je suis ici depuis deux ans. 

Nous le connaissons depuis six mois. 

Se porter. 

Comment-vous portez-vous ? 
Je me porte tres-bien. 
Comment se porte votre pere ? 
II se porte bien. 

Votre mere se porte-t-elle bien? 
Elle s'est un peu enrhumee. 
Comment se portent votre mere et 
vos soeurs ? 



1 125 1 5ia21 1 5 12 6 1 512 

as-sie<?s, as-se-yon.s, as-se-yes, as-seye«l 



316 THE NINETY-THIRD LESSON. 

CONDITIONAL. 

1. Tub conditional present corresponds to should or icould with the verb in Eng- 
lish. It is very commonly preceded or followed by if with a verb in the imperfect tense; 
thus, If I had money, I would travel, Sifavais de Vargent,je voyageeais ; or, / would 
travel if I had money, Je voyageeais sifavais de Vargent. 

2. The present conditional is formed by changing ai final, of the first person singular of 
the future, into ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. 

Conditional of etre, future serai. 

Je serais, tu serais, il serait, nous serious, vous series, Us seraient, 

I should be, thou wouldst be, he avouM be, we should be, you would be, they would be. 

Conditional of avoir, future atjrai. 

J'aurais. tu aurais, il await, nous aurions, vous auriez, 

I should have, thou wouldst have, he would have, we should have, you would have' 
Us atiraient, they would have. 

Conditional of aimer, future aimerai. 

J'aimerais, tu aimerais, il aimerait, nous aimerions, vous aimeries, 

I should love, thou wouldst love, he would love, we should love, you would love, 
Us aimeraient, they would love. 

If thou hadst the time w ouldst thou Si tu avais le temps lirais-tu ? 
read ? 

I would read if I had the time. Je lirais si j' avais le temps. 

Would you drink if you had water ? Boiriez-vons si vous aviez de l'eau ? 
We would drink if we had water. Nous boirions si nous avions de l'eau. 

He could if he would. II pourrait s'il voulait. 

They would if they could. lis voudraient s'ils pouv 'aient. 

To dye. Since. Teindre. Puisque. 

Progress. Great progress. Du and des progres. De grands pro- 

gress. 

3. Since, an adverb or preposition of time, is depuis ; since, meaning because that, is 
puisque. 

It has rained since yesterday morning ; H pleut depuis hier matin ; et puisque 
and since the weather is so bad, I il fait si|.jnauvais temps, je ne 

shall not go out. sortirai pas. 

4. Teindre takes en before the name of the color. 

He dyes his coat black ; I get mine II teint son habit en noir ; je fais tein- 
dyed blue. dre le mien en bleu. 

1. Teignez-vous ce drap en vert ? 2. Nous teignons ce drap-ci 
en vert et celui-la en bleu. 3. Ces hommes teignent leurs gants en 
noir. 4. Je veux bien apprendre l'espagnol, puisque vous le voulez. 
5. Si tu avais le temps lirais-tu ce livre? 6. Je le lirais. 7. Si 
cet ecolier paresseux etudiait, ne ferait-il pas des progres dans ses 
etudes? 8. II y ferait de grands progres. 9. Si vous aviez de 
1' argent acheteriez-vous cette maison'? 10. Nous 1'acheterions. 



4 7 7 mi ne 7 ic 7 7 7 u 22 2 4 15 7 

se-rais, -rait, -rions, -ries, -raient, au-rais, aime-rais, teindre, puis-ke, pro-gres. 



THE NINETY-THIRD LESSON. 



317 



11. Si ces hommes avaient ce drap ne le teindraient-ils pas en vert? 

12. Non, madame, il le teindraient en noir. 13. Votre voisin 
etudierait-il mieux s'il avait moins d' argents 14. II etudierait 
mieux. 15. Comment se porte monsieur votre frere? 16. II se 
porte bien. 

1. If you drank all that wine, would you not be sick? 2. I 
should be sick. 3. If thou haclst some paper, wouldst thou write 
some letters % 4. I would write one to my father. 5. If you told 
your secret to those men, would they keep it % 6. They would not 
keep it. 7. If that lazy scholar studied, would he learn well ? 8. 
Yes, sir, he would become very learned. 9. If you had money, 
would you not buy a, horse ? 10. No, sir ; I should buy a fine house. 
11. If thou couldst see the future (Vavenir), wouldst thou be more 
happy? 12. No, sir, I should be less happy. 13. If those coun- 
try-women had this cloth, would they dye it blue? 14. No, miss, 
they would dye it brown (bruri). 15. If you had the time, would 
you study languages? 16. I would study the French and the 
German. 

17. What didst thou do yesterday? 18. Yesterday, after I had 
breakfasted, I read ; and after I had dined, I wrote some letters. 
19. Where did those strangers go on Sunday ? 20. In the morn- 
ing, as soon as they had shaved and dressed, they went to church. 
21. Are you acquainted with the family of the general? 22. No, 
madam ; I know nopnember of his family. 23. Do you enjoy good 
health ? 24. Yes, madam ; we have enjoyed excellent health since 
we have lived in the country. 25. Since your health is so good, 
you will soon be able to return to the city. 26. How far will you 
go this summer ? 27. I shall go as far as Boston. 28. Sit down 
in this chair. 29. Wash thy hands and face. 30. How do your 
father and mother do ? 31. They are very well. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is not that gentleman a surgeon ? 2. Yes, he is so ; he 
lives opposite to our house ; they say that he is very skillful. 3. 
Are you acquainted with him ? 4. Yes ; last summer we made a 
journey together to New York by sea. 5. Has he been here long ? 
6. He came here two years ago, but he did not stay long ; he went 
to New York, and returned three or four months ago. 7. When 
you were in New York did you see George C. ? 8. Yes, I saw him 
almost every day ; he came to find me the first day of my arrival. 
9. You knew hardly any people in New York? 10. No, I knew 



318 



THE NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. 



but very^eW; but I made some acquaintance while I was there. 
11. Do you intend to go there againJ^ 12. I shall go there per- 
haps this summer. 13. If you wish, I will give you letters to (pour} 
some of my friends, of -wjiom yon will not be sorry to make the ac- 
quaintance. 14. I shall be infinitely obliged to you for it. 

15. Did you go -to the baker's shop yesterday 1 ? 16. Yes, sir; 
as soon as I had dressed I went there. 17. Have you enjoyed good 
health since you have been here? 18. Yes, sir; I always enjoy 
good health. 19. The worms have gnawed the door of that shop. 
20. If your cousin went to school, would he study much ? 21. He 
would not study much. 22. Do you often go out early in the morn- 
ing ? 23. I hardly ever go out very early in the morning. 24. I 
will sell you this book since you desire it. 

25. An Irishman who had a looking-glass in (d) his~lian~cl, shut 
his eyes, and placed (plagait) it before his face. 26. Another 
asked him why he did that. 27. "My faith," replied he, "it is 
to see how I am when I sleep." 



94.— QUATRE-VINGT-QUATORZIftME LEQON. 

CONDITIONAL CONTINUED. 

II. — Sometimes the conditional is used when the condition (the if and the imperfect) 
may be looked upon as understood ; as, 

I should like to be wise.* J'aimerais a etre sage. 

He would like to be rich. II aimerait a etre riche. 

We should wish to be good. Nous voudrions etre bons. 

They ought to do their duty. Us devraient faire leur devoir. 

1. Can, used negatively, is very commonly rendered in French by the conditional of 
savoir with ne, and without pas. With %>as it means not to know. 

I can (could) not do that. Je ne saurais faire cela. 

Can (could) you not go that far? Me sauriez-xous aller jusque la? 

That can not be. Cela ne saurait etre. 

We can not endure that. Nous ne saurions souffrir cela. 

I should not know how to do it ; it is Je ne saurais pas le faire ; c'est trop 
too difficult for me. difficile pour moi. 

2. Pouvoir, oser, and cesser, also, when negative, often omit pas (especially before the 
infinitive). With these the omission is elegant, but optional. 

I cannot do it. Je ne puis (pas) le faire. 

She dare not say it. Elle n'ose (pas) le dire. 

She does not cease to speak. Elle ne cesse (pas) de parler. 

III. — When a past tense or present participle connected with past time, not governing 
the subjunctive, is followed by a verb having should or would with it in English, such verb 
is in the conditional in French. 



* The condition might be supplied thus, I would like to be wise, if I could, etc. In 
this form the sentences'become similar to those in the preceding lesson. 



16 7 

sau-rais. 



THE NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. 



319 



I foresaw that they would do it. Je prevoyais qu'ils leferaient. 

I believed that he would come. Je croyais qu'^ viendrait. 

He thought that I should believe him. II pensait que je le croirais. 

We said that you would do it. Nous avons dit que vous leferiez. 

They hoped that we should be there. lis esperaient que nous serious la. 

Believing that it would rain. Croyant qu'il pleuvr ait. 

3. The conditional of vouloir expresses a modification of the meaning of the verb often 
corresponding to wish or will in English. 

I wish (would wish) to borrow this Je voudrais emprunter ce livre. 
book. 

He wishes (would wish) to study Span- II voudrait etudier l'espagnol. 
ish. 

Will you go to the theater? Voudriez-vous aller au spectacle ? 

We wish to go there.. Nous voudrions y aller. 

4. Collective or approximate numbers are expressed in French by nouns formed from 
the numeral adjectives, by making them end in aine. Such nouns are feminine. 

About ten. Twenty (or so). Une dixaine. Unc vingtaine. 

TJiirty (or so). Forty (or so). Une trentaine. Une quarantaine. 

Fifty (or so). A hundred (or so). Une cinquantaine. Une centaine. 

5. Douzaine (a dozen) is a definite number. Quinzaine is used for two weeks; huit 
jours for one week ; un mots, for four weeks. Three weeks, five weeks, six weeks, are 
trois semaines, cinq semaines, etc. 

I shall pass a fortnight with him* Je passerai une quinzaine chcz lui. 

I have been here a week. Je suis ici depuis huit jours. 

He owes me some twenty franks. II me doit une vingtaine de franca. 

To intend to do. To mean, to signify. Vouloir faire. Vouloir dire. 

What does that signify ? Que veut dire cela ? 

That signifies nothing. Cela ne veut rien dire. 

What does that word mean ? Que veut dire ce mot ? 

I do not know what it means. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il veut dire. 

Serioits. To descend. Serieux. Descendre. 

6. Descendre and several other verbs sometimes take avoir and sometimes etre for 
their auxiliary. All these will be explained hereafter. 

He has descended from the mountain. II est descends de la montagne. 
There were some thirty of us at that Nous etions une trentaine a ce diner. . 
dinner. 

1. Combien d'assiettes avez-vous achetees? 2. J'en ai achete 
une douzaine. 3. Je passerai une quinzaine de jours a la cam- 
pagne. 4. II y a une cinquantaine d'ecoliers dans l'ecole. 5. Me 
devez-vous quelque chose ? 6. Oui, je vous dois une centaine de 
francs. 7. Eesterez-vous longtemps a la campagne? 8. J'y pas- 
serai trois semaines. 9. Avez-vous quelque chose'? 10. J'ai mal a 

18 7 14 7 3 7 1 3 7 14 3 7 8 7 14 7 6 13 

dou-zaine, vin^-taine, tren-taine, ka-ran-taine, cin-kan-tain<?, cen-taine, kin-zaine, se-n- 

10 5 3 5 3 22 

eu», des-cendre, des-cen-du. 



320 



THE NINETY-FOURTH LESSON. 



la tete, mais ce n'est rien cle serieux. 11. Le niaitro descend-il 
souvent cle sa chambre ? 12. II en descend souvent. 13. Est-il 
descendu ce inatin ? 14. II n'est pas descendu. 15. Voudriez-vous 
apprendre le francais % 16. Je voudrais apprendre le francais et 
I'allemand. 17. Je pensais qu'il ne pleuvrait pas aujourd'hui, et 
je suis venu sans parapluie. 

1. Wouldst thou like to travel in Europe ? 2.1 should like to 
travel there very much. 3. I am verjr thirsty ; I should wish to 
drink a glass of w ater. 4. Would you not like to be rich % 5. Yes, 
I should like to be rich ; but I should like better to be wise and 
good. 6. Is your boy here ? 7. Yes ; he knew that we should 
have need of him, and he came. 8. Have you brought your um- 
brella ? 9. Yes ; I thought that it would rain, and I brought it ; 
I believed also that you would be here, and I have brought yours. 
10. If it were fine weather, would you go into the country? 11. I 
would go. 12. Can you not succeed in doing that % 13. Y\ T e can 
not succeed in it without money. 14. V/hat does that word mean? 
15. I do not know what it means. 

16. We can not learn that lesson >it is too difficult. 17. How 
many apples have you bought? 18. I have bought some twenty. 
19. How many persons are there in that room ? 20. There are 
some thirty. 21. We owe the countryman some forty franks. 22. 
There are some fifty children in the street. 23. How many fruit-- 
trees are there in that orchard? 24. There are some sixty. 25. 
How long will you stay in Boston ? 26. I shall stay there one or 
two weeks. 27. That stranger looks serious. 28. Yes, he is a very 
serious man. 29. Permit me to disturb you (yous deranger) a mo- 
ment ; it is necessary for me to go to that tabler-^30. Do you wish 
to know the French perfectly ? 31. I wish much (Men) to know it 
perfectly. 32. That scholar wishes to be the first of his class (classe) ; 
but he does not wish to study enough to become so (pour y arriver). 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you know where I can find a sail-boat (bateau d voile) 
next Friday? 2. What do you wish to do with it? 3. I wish to 
go / twenty miles from here on Friday or Saturday. 4. When do 
you intend to return ? 5. I shall return Sunday evening if I can.- 
6. Mr. G. has a boat very light ; if he has no need of it on Satur- 
day, he will lend it to you. 17. I do not think that, I c an (pouvoi r) 
-have it ; he has need of it every Saturday. 8. 1 know another gen- 
tleman who has one ; it is Mr. L. 9. He has one ? I did not know 



THE NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 



321 



it. 10. Yes, his is very good, but a little large. 11. Are you 
going all alone ? 12. No ; I shall go with one of my friends. 13. 
Then this boat is suitable for you [vous convient). 14. Go and see 
Mr. L. ; he will lend it to you, I doubt not. 15. I will go and see 
him at his house to-morrow morning. 16. A king of France asked 
(demandant) a bishop one day if he was noble. 17. "Sire" (sire), 
answered' the bishop, " in Noah's ark (l'arche de Noe) there were 
three brothers ; I cannot say from which I am descended." 

18. Where do you wish me to conduct those children f 19. I 
will have you conduct them home. 20. Is it possible for you to 
descend that mountain? 21. It is not possible for me to descend 
it without falling. 22. Is that boy lame ? 23. Yes ; he has cut 
his foot. 24. A child of ten years astonished every body by the 
correctness (la justesse) of his replies (reponses). 25. One day, a 
bishop, who thought to puzzle (embarrasser) him, said to him, " My 
friendjj^promise to give you an apple if you will tell me where is 
God?" 26. "My lord" (monseigneur), answered the child to him, 
"I promise to give you two if you can tell me where he is not." 



95.— QUATRE-VINGT-QUINZI^ME LEQON. 

PAST CONDITIONAL TENSE. 

1. The past conditional is formed by joining the past participle to the present con- 
ditional of the auxiliary ; thus, 

Past conditional of avoir. 

J'aurais eu, il aurait eu, vous auriez eu, 

I should have had, he would have had, you would have had, 

Tu aurais eu, notes aurions eu, Us auraient eu, 

Thou wouldst have had, we should have had, they would have had. 

Past conditional of ETgE. 

J 'aurais ete, il aurait ete, vous auriez ete, 

I should have been, he would have been, you would have been, 

Txo aurais ete, nous aurions ete, Us auraient ete, 

Thou wouldst have been, we should have been, they would have been. 

Past conditional o/'venir. 
Je serais venu, il serait venu, vous series venus, 

I should have corne, he would have come, you would have come, 

Tu serais ven u, nous serious venus, Us seraient venus, 

Thou wouldst have come, we should have come, they would have come. 

This tense is used when the verb following if is in the pluperfect, and when should have 
or would have is used in English ; thus, 

If I had had the time, I should have Si j'avais eu le temps, f aurais he. 
read. 

2. Besides the above compound tense, there is in all French verbs a Second Past Con- 
ditional, which is formed by joining the past participle to the subjunctive imperfect of the 
auxiliary ; thus, 

Second past conditional of avoir. 
J'eusse eu, il eut eu, vous eussiez 

Tu eusses eu, nous eussions eu, 



322 



THE NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 



Second past conditional o/"etre. 
J^eusse ete, il eut etc, vous eussiez etc, 

Tu eusses ete, nous eussions ete, its eussent ete. 



Second past conditional of venir. 

ilfut venu, vous fussiez venus, 

no-us fassions venus, ilsfussent venus. 

This tense (or the pluperfect of the indicative) ought to be used after if, instead of the 
first past conditional. 



Jefusse venu, 
Tu fusses venu, 



If thou hadst studied, thou ivouldst 

have been learned. 
If he had been able, he would have been 

willing. 

Would you* have drunk, if you had had 

water ? 
We shoidd have drunk. 
If they had behaved well, they would 

have been praised. 
If you had gone there, I should have 

gone also. 
Even if. Even if he were here. 



Si tu eicsses (or avais) etudie, tu aurais 

ete savant. 
S'il eut (or avait) pu, il aurait Men 

voulu. 

Auriez-vous bu, si vous eussiez (or 

aviez) eu de Feau ? 
Nous aurions he. 

S'ils sefussevit (or s'etaient) bien com- 
portes, ils auraient ete loues. 

Si vous fussiez (or etiez) alle la, j'y se- 
rais alle aussi. 

Quand meme. Quand raeme il serait ici. 



3. In conditional phrases, when even if is expressed, or can be supplied before the sub- 
ject, quand meme is to be used, and the verb put in the conditional. 



Even if he studied, he would not 
learn. 

Even if he had said it to me, I should 

not have believed it. 
Should you try it again, you would 

succeed no better. 
To conclude. He has concluded. 



Quand meme il etudiera.it, il n'appren- 
drait pas. 

Quand meme il me V aurait dit, je ne 

l'aurais pas cru. 
Quand meme vous l'essaieriez encore, 

vous ne reussiriez pas mieux. 
Conclure {de bef. inf.). II a conclu. 



Je conclus, tic conclus, il conclut, nous concluons, vous concluez, ils concluent, 
I conclude, thou concludest, he concludes, we conclude, you conclude, they conclude. 



The medicine. The physic. 

To employ. To support. 

To govern. We have concluded the 

bargain. 
A present. A sum. 
To insist upon. To demand. 
Virtuous. At home. 
To affirm. To assure. 
To declare. Nearly. 
He insists on that point. 



Le medicament. La medecine. 
Employer. Appuyer. 
Gouverner. Nous avons conclu le 
marche. 

Un present, un cadeau. Une somme. 
Insister. Exiger, demander. 
Vertueux. A la maison. 
Affirmer. Assurer. 
Declarer. A peu pres. 
II insiste sur ce point. 



1. Si vous eussiez (or aviez) eu ce medicament quand vous etiez 

<>! 13 21 22 21 22 22 21 22 6 23 5 12 1 3 5 12 3 20 

c'on-clure con-clu, con-clus, -clu-ons, -clu-es, -cluent, me-di-ka-meni!, mede-cme, em-plo- 

6 1 22 12 6 18 7 6 5 3 1 17 21 14 32 6 5 12 6 4 3 7 

ver a»-pu-ver, eou-ver-ner, pre-sen£, ca-deau, somme, in-sis-ter, eg-zi-ger, de-inan-der, ver- 

22 W 1 12 6 Pi 22 6 5 1 6 

tu-eux, ay-fir-mer, as-su-rer, de-cla-rer. 



THE NINETY-FIFTH LESSON. 



323 



malade, l'auriez-vous employe'? 2. Jel'aurais employe. 3. Si votre 
pere eut (or avait) vu l'homme qui voulait acheter sa maison aurait-il 
conclu le march e % 4. II l'aurait bientot conclu. 5. Si vous eussiez 
(or aviez) ete boiteux vous seriez-vous appuye sur un baton? 6. Non, 
monsieur, je me serais appuye sur le bras de mon frere. 7. Si le 
general eut (or avait) ete gouverneur de cet etat l'aurait-il bien gou- 
verne ? 8. Non, monsieur, il l'aurait tres-mal gouverne. 9. Si tu 
ensses (or avais) garde ton argent, n'en aurais-tu pas eu beaucoup 1 
10. J'aurais eu ime grosse somme. 11. Si vous fussiez (or etiez) 
alles a Londres 1'ete passe, auriez-vous vu la reine? 12. Nous 
l'aurions vue. 13. Si ces negociants eussent (or avaient) vendu 
leur coton hier, auraient-ils gagne plus d' argent % 14. lis en au- 
raient gagne davantage. 

1. If the merchants had written their letters last night, would 
they have given them to you ? 2. They would have given them to 
me. 3. If we had gone to the neighbor's last evening, should we 
have seen the general ? 4. We should have seen him. 5. If thou 
hadst bought those beautiful birds which we saw at the market, to 
whom wouldst thou have given them % 6.1 should have sent them 
as a {en\ present to my sister. 7. When will the orator conclude 
his discourse (discours) ? 8. He will conclude it at half past 
eleven. 9. Even if that man should gain much money, he would 
not keep it. 10. Even if that scholar studied much, he would not 
learn the French. 11. Does the master demand that you know 
your lessons early? 12. He demands that we know them at half 
past six ; he insists upon that point. 

13. Does the master demand too much ? 14. No, sir ; he de- 
mands nothing which is not suitable {conv enable),^ 15. Do you 
believe that your brother is at home? 16. I assure you that he is 
not there. 17. Does the master affirm that you are worth more 
than we? 18. He does not affirm it. 19. Do you believe that the 
doctor is at home? 20. Yes, he is almost always at home. 21. 
My friends hope that I shall be virtuous and happy. 22. If you 
had taken this medicine, would you not have been sick ? 23. I should 
have been sick. 24. Does the queen govern well? 25. She governs 
very well. 26. The master has made me a pretty present. 27. My 
father has given me a sum of money to buy books ; I have nearly 
two thousand franks. 28. That house is worth nearly ten thousand 



321 



THE NINETY-SIXTH LESSON. 



dollars. 29. If you had seen the captain, would he not have declared 
the whole truth ? 30. He would have declared all that he knew. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Your stove is broken ; why do you not have it mended? 2. 
I have already had it mended twice this winter ; I wish to buy a 
new one. 3. You will not buy it before next autumn ; stoves will 
soon become useless. 4. Yes, we shall have only a few^c old days ; 
we shall have no need of fire after this month. 5. "We have not 
suffered much from /cold this winter ; we suffered much more from 
it the year past. 6.' It has been very dry, and there are many of 
my trees dead (de morts). 7- It will be necessary to have them 
pulled up and to have others put in their places. 8. It is what I 
intend to do soon. 9. I have given some trees to Mr. B., who lives 
next door to me (d cote de chez mo*);Y'and I still have some leftrxj — 
do you wish for them 4 10. If you please ; but do you not need 
them yourself? 11. No; I have no place in my garden to put 
them. 12. Then I will take them; how many have you ? 13. I 
do not know precisely ; some half a score perhaps. 11. I shall not 
want more. 

15. If you had seen your partner, v/oulcl you have concluded 
that bargain ? 16. I should have concluded it. 17. If the physi- 
cian had given you that medicine, would you have taken it ? 18. I 
should not have taken it. 19. That scholar is diligent ; he employs 
time well ; he is virtuous and happy. 20. Has not the countryman 
a large sum of money? 21. He has nearly ten thousand franks. 
22. Where is your pretty book ? 23. I have sent it as a present 
to my brother. 24. If the countryman had had the money, would 
he have bought that horse ? 25. He would have bought him. 26. 
If you had been thirsty, would you have drunk that water ? 27. I 
should not have drunk it. 28. Even if the captain had that book, 
he would not read it. 



96. — QUATRE-VINGT-SEIZIEME LEQON. 

AUXILIAKY J&TBE 

1. The learner has seen that all passive verbs, all pronominal verbs, and a few intran- 

sitwe verbs, always take etre for their auxiliary. The following intransitive verbs of this 

kind have already been given. 

Aller, Devenir, Mourir, Venir, 

Arriver, Disconvenir, Naitre, Eevenir, Parvenir. 

To these add the following, not before g'ven, making in all about twenty. 

Avenir (advenir), to happen. Entrer, to enter. Betourner, to return. 

Choir, to fall. Intervenir, to intervene. Bentrer, to re-enter. 

Decider, to die. Frovenir, to proceed from, lletomber, to fall again. 

Eclore, to open. Bedevenir, to become again. Survenir, to occur. 



3 6 1 12 4 18 6 20 14 7 4 12 3 G 5 5 6 15 13 4 2i 

en-trer, ad«?-nir, re-tour-ne;*, choir, in-ter-ve-nir, ren-trer, de-ce-der, prove-nir, re-tom- 

6 5 16 4 4 32 22 4 12 

be;-, e-clore, re-deve-nir, sur-ve-nir. 



THE NINETY-SIXTH LESSON. 



325 



Do you know what has happened ? 

He died at a great age. 

He has entered college. 

The flowers have opened. 

The royal authority has interposed in 

that matter. 
Hence have proceeded all the disorders. 
He has become powerful again. 
He has returned to his country. 
They have re-entered the army. 
He has relapsed into vice. 



Savez-vous ce qui est advenu ? 
II est decede a un grand age. 
II est entre au college. 
Les fleurs sont ecloses. 

autorite royale est intervenue dans 
_^ cette affaire. 

He la sont provenus tous les desordres. 
II est redevenu puissant. 
II est retoume dans son pays, 
lis sont ventres dans l'armee. 
II est retombe dans le vice. 
Un orasie est survenu. 



A storm came unexpectedly. 

2. All transitive verbs take avoir for their auxiliary. 
He has toned again the hay. II a retoume le foin'. 

She has taken in the pots of flowers. Elle a rentre les pots de fleurs. 

3. There is also a class of intransitive verbs which sometimes take avoir and sometimes 
etre for their auxiliary. The following, already given, are of this class. 



Changer, 
Demeurer, 



Monter, 
Passer, 



Degenerer, 
Eester, 



Sortir, 
Tomber. 



4. For the auxiliary with such verbs, we have the following general rule : If the mere 
action denoted by the verb be meant, let avoir be used ; but if the state resulting from it 
be meant, let etre be used ; thus, 



He changed suddenly (action). 
He has changed much of late (state). 
He lived three years in Madrid (action). 
He has remained in Madrid (state). 
He went up to his room twice (action). 
He has gone up to his room (state). 
He remained at Lyons two weeks (ac- 
tion). 

He has remained at Lyons (state). 

5. Partir, sortir, and iorriber almost alwaj 
for auxiliary ; thus, 

The gun went o(f suddenly (action) 
Vulcan fell from heaven during a 

whole day. 
What authority. Without authority. 
To confess. To sujypose. 
Suitable. Proper, Jit. 
Conformed. Like. Guilty. 
To be better off. 

When you shall have money, will you 

be better off? 
To express. Precisely, exactly. . 



II a change tout-a-coup. — . 

II est bien change depuis peu. - 

II a demeure trois ans a Madrid. 

II est demeure k Madrid. 

II a monte deux fois a sa chambre. 

II est monte dans sa chambre. 

II a reste quinze jours a Lyon. 

II est reste a Lyon. 

'3 take etre, but may sometimes have avoir 

Le fusil a parti tout-a-coup. 

Yulcain a tombe du ciel pendant urw 

jour entier. 
Quelle autorite. Sans autorite. 
Avouer. Supposer. 
Convenable. Propre. 
Conforme. Conforme a. Coupable. 
En etre plus avance. 
Quand vous aurez de l'argent, en serez- 

vous plus avance ? 
Exprimer. Precisement, exactement. 



16 16 12 6 1 18 6 22 17 6 21 1 15 21 16 18 

au-tor-i-te, a-vou-er, sup-po-zer, conve-nable, propre, con-forme, cou 

5 12 5 3 5 1 4 3 

pru-ci-se-men^, eg-zac-te-men^. 



eks-pri-mer, 



326 



THE NINETY-SIXTH LESSON. 



1. Comment le malacle se porte-t-il ? 2. Ce qu'on craignait est 
advenu ; il est decede ce matin. 3. Votre ami a-t-il reussi dans 
cette affaire? 4. Non, l'autorite royale y est intervenue. 5. Le roi 
n' a-t-il pas perdu son autorite % 6. Non, monsieur, il est redevenu 
aussi puissant (poiverful) que jamais. 7. Ce malade est-il assez 
prudent ? 8. Non, madame, il etait fort bien, mais il est retombe 
malade par son imprudence. 9. Les Ills de notre voisin se compor- 
tent-ils bien a present % 10. Non, mademoiselle, ils sont retombes 
clans les memes fautes. 11. Comment se porte le malade ? 12. II 
se portait mieux hier, mais ce matin la fievre est encore revenue. 
13. Oii est votre ami? 14. II est entre dans sa chambre. 15. Cet 
homme avoue-t-il sa faute? 16. II avoue toute la verite. 17. Sup- 
posez-vous que cet homme soit malade ? 18. Je ne suppose pas qu'il 
soit malade; je sais qu'il est fatigue. 19. Dites-vous que cet 
homme soit coupable ? 20. Je dis qu'il est coupable. 

1. Do you suppose that your horse is worth more than mine? 
2. I do not suppose that he is worth more than yours. 3. When 
that young lady shall be in the city, will she be better off? 4. She 
will not be better off. 5. When that merchant shall receive his 
money, will he be better off ? 6. He will be better off. 7. Can you 
express all that you wish in French ? 8.1 can not express it ex- 
actly. 9. Do you say that your cousin's exercise is well written ? 
10. I say that is written precisely in the same manner (de la meme 
maniere) as mine. 11. This writing is exactly like that. 12. Have 
your flowers opened ? 13. Yes, they opened this morning. 14. Has 
the stranger returned to his country? 15. He has returned to it. 
16. The master entered again into his room." 17. Is the weather 
suitable for going on the lake ? It is not suitable. 

18. That man is weak ; he is ftt _for stu dy, but he is not fit fo r 
war. 19. Has your nephew fallen again into vice ? 20. No, sir ; 
he behaves perfectly well. 21. Has your friend arrived? 22. 
Yes ; he arrived at six o'clock this morning: 23. Had that mer- 
chant become rich when you saw him in Europe ? 24. He had be- 
come very rich. 25. Had your father died when you came to this 
country? 26. No, sir; he died since I have been hereof 27. Will 
the servant have returned from the market at seven o'clock ? 28. 
He will have returned at half past six. 29. If that man recover- 
ing (convalescent) had gone out, would he not be sick at present % — 
30. He would have fallen sick again very certainly. 31. As soon 



THE NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



327 



as your father had returned on Thursday, did he not go to your 
uncle's % 32. No, sir ; he entered into his room. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

I. Did you recite your lesson yesterday? 2. Yes; as soon as 
the master had come I recited it. 3. Does the grocer open his shop 
early in the morning? 4. He opens it every morning at six. 5. 
Have you read the book which I sent you last week ? 6. Yes ; 
as soon as I had received it I read it. 7. As soon as you had 
shaved yesterday, did you not breakfast ? 8. Yes, sir ; and as soon 
as I had breakfasted I went to the shop of my grocer. 9. Why do 
you go out so early in the morning (de si grand math%)\^ 10. I 
like the morning air, and I always go out early. 

II. When will your brother receive my letter? 12. He has al- 
ready received it. As soon as he had come here yesterday I gave 
it to him ; and as soon as he had received it he read it. 1 3. Why 
can not your uncle enjo^-his property^— 14. He is always sick, 
and one can not enjoy any thing without health.- — 

15. A child entered into the shop of a baker, and asked for a 
loaf [pain) of six cents. 16. Seeing that the loaf which they gave- — 
him was not sufficiently large, he said to the baker, " This six-cent 
loaf is very small." 17. " No matter" (n'importe), answered the 
baker ; " you will have less trouble_t&_carry it." " That is true," 
said then the child ; " and as I always return politeness (politesse) -^ 
for politeness, here are four cents ; I shall have less to carry, and 
you will have less to count." 



97.— QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON. 

AUXILIARY VERBS CONTINUED. 
1. The following verbs also sometimes take avoir and sometimes etre for auxiliary, ac- 



cording to rule, Lesson 96, 4. 

To appear To disappear. 

To lower, fall. To cease. 

To descend. To descend again. 

To grow. To escape. 

To expire. To go up again. 

To sound, ring. Entire, whole. 



Apparaitre. Disparaitre. 
Baisser. Cesser. 
Descendre. Redescendre. 
Croitre. Echapper. 
Expirer. Remonter. 
Sonner.* Entier. 



* Of verbs which sometimes take avoir and sometimes etre for auxiliary, the followim 
have now been given : 

Apparaitre. Convenir. Disparaitre. Degener. 

Baisser. Croitre. Echapper. Passer. 

Cesser. Demeurer. Expirer. Kedescendre. 

Changer. Descendre. Monter. Eemo.iter. 

The other verbs of this class are the following, in all near forty : 

118 12 1 8 7656458 20 5165 12 6 

a/2-pa-raitrf, dis-pa-raitre, bais ser, ces-ser, re-des-cendre, croitre, e-chap-per, eks-pi-rer, 

4 21 6 15 6 

re-mon-ter, so»-ne>\ 



Eester. 
Sonner. 
Sortir. 
Tomber. 



328 



THE NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



God appeared to Moses (action). 
A sail has appeared far off (state). 
The boy disappeared this morning 
(action). 

He has disappeared these two months 
(state). 

Yesterday the river fell a foot (action). 
The river has now fallen (state). 



Dieu a apparu a Mo'ise. 

Une voile est apparue au loin.— 

Lc garcon a disparu ce matin. 

II est disparu depuis deux mois. 

Hier la riviere a baisse d'un pied 
La riviere est baissce a, present. 



We landed yesterday on this island. 
We have landed these two days. 



I ran to him to wish him joy. 
I have run hither to the noise. 



His property increased suddenly. 



II a dechu de jour en jour.— [~ 
II est bien dechu de son credit. 



Aboedee, to land. 

Nous avons aborde hier dans cette ila. 
Nous sommes abordes depuis deux jours. 
Accoueie, to run to. 

J'ai accouru a lui pour le feliciter. 
Je suis account au bruit. 
Aceoitee, to increase. 

Son bien a accru tout-a-coup. 
That land has increased by alluvium. Cette terre est accrue par alluvion. 

Augmentee, to augment. 
The cold augmented suddenly. Le froid a augments tout-a-coup. 

His fortune has augmented. Sa fortune est augmentee. 

Deboedee, to overflow. 
The river overflowed last year, and has over- La riviere a deborde Tannec derniere, et elle 
flowed again now. est encore debordee a present. 

Decampee, to decamp. 
They decamped at daybreak. On a decampe au point du jour. — «*" 

The Indian army fled as fast as possible. L'armee indienue est decampee au plus vito. 

Deciioie, to decline. 

He declined from day to day. 
He has declined much in his credit. 

Degeneeee, to degenerate. 
That race degenerated little by little. Cette race a degenere peu ^ peu. 

That race has degenerated. Cette race est degeneree. 

Depeeie, to diminish. 

L'armee a deperi journellement. -\ ' 
L'armee est deper'ie. 
Eciioie, to fall out, fall due. 

Mon billet a echu hier. 
Mon billet est echu. 
Embellie, to grow handsome. 
She grew handsome from day to day. Elle a embelli de jour en jour. 

She has grown much handsomer. Elle est fort embellie. 

Empieee, to groxo worse. 
The disease grew worse this morning. La maladie a empire ce matin. 

The disease has grown worse. La maladie est empiree. 

Geandie, to groto large. 

II a bien grandi Tannee derniere. 
-£l est bien grandi. 
Eajetjnie, to become young again. 

11 a rajeuni. 
II est rajeuni. 
Eesultee, to result. 

Qn^a-t-il resulte de la ? 
Qa'ew est-il resulte ? 
Demenagee, to remove. 
He removed yesterday. II « demenage hier. 

He has removed these eight days. II est demenage depuis huit jours. 

Accoucher, to bring forth, and vieillir, to grow old, may take either auxiliary, accord- 
ing to rule, Lesson 96, 4. 



The army diminished daily. 
The army has diminished. 

My note fell due yesterday. 
My note has fallen due. 



He grew much last year. 
He has grown much. 

He became young again. 
He has become young again. 

What resulted therefrom ? 
What has resulted from it ? 



THE NIXETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



329 



The fever ceased this morning (action). 
The fever has ceased these two days 
(state). 

He descended very fast (action). 
He has descended from his room 
(state). 

He went up to his room, but he has 

come down again. 
The river rose two inches yesterday. 
The river has risen much. 
He escaped twice before, and now he 

has escaped again. 
That word escaped me in a moment 

of impatience. 
My lease expired yesterday. 
My lease has expired. 
The stag. A sail. 
I am going to the hunt (shooting). 
An entire mouth. The mail, trunk. 
The employment, use. Present. 
Future. Habitual. 
In the same manner. 
It has struck twelve (at noon). 



La fievre a cesse ce matin. 

La fievre est cessee depuis deux jours. 

II a desccndu tres-vite. 

II est descendtc de sa chambre. 

II a monte a sa chambre, mais il est 
redescendu. 

La riviere a cra de deux pouces hier. 

La riviere est criie beaucoup. 

II a echappe deux fois auparavant, et 
maintenant il est encore echappe. 

Ce mot rarest echappe dans un mo- 
ment $ impatience. 

Mon bail a expire hier. 

Mon bail est expire. 

Le cerf. Une voile. 

Je vais a la chasse. 

Un mois entier. La malle. 

L'emploi. Present. 

Futur. Habituel. 

De meme. Pe la meme maniere. 

Midi est sonne. 



1. Allez-vous a la chasse au cerf? 2. Je n'y vais pas. 3. J'ap- 
percois une voile a l'korizon. 4. Le malle est arrivee de bonne 
heure. 5. Avez-vous appris l'emploi des verbes francais ? 6. J'ai 
appris l'emploi du present et du futur. 7. Mon mal de tete est 
habituel. 8. Midi est-il sonne ? 9. Oui, monsieur, midi a sonne^- 
comme vous sortiez de la maison. 10. Le cerf est echappe aux 

chiens. 11. L'annee derniere mon ami a passe deux fois en Europe, . . 

et cet ete il y est passe aussi. 12. Votre petit frere est-il sorti? 

13. Oui, il a sorti deux fois ce matin, et a present il est encore sorti. 

14. Votre pere a souvent monte dans sa chambre ce matin ; est-il 
redescendu? 15. II a redescendu, mais il est encore remonte. 

1. Has your father gone out this morning? 2. He went out 
early this morning, but he has entered again into his room. 3. 
Has not your servant disappeared ? 4. He disappeared yesterday, 
but this morning he returned. 5. Has your father come down from 
his chamber ? 6. He came down, but he has gone up again. 7. 
Has he not come down again? 8. No, he is still up there (la-haul).^ 



7 20 ] 1 3 20 5 3 92 22 1 12 22 5 8 1 12 7 

cer/, voile, chasse, malle, em-ploi, pre-sentf, fu-tur, /ia-bi-tu-el, mem«, ma-niere. 



330 



THE NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON. 



9. Have the stags escaped from~~the dogs ? 10. No ; the fox (le 
raiarffy escaped, but the stags are taken. 11. How does the sick 
man do ? has his fever ceased ? 12. Yes ; during the night past 
it ceased all at once. 13. Has eight o'clock struck? 14. Yes; 
eight o'clock struck while we were breakfasting. 15. Has the old 
soldier died? 16. Yes; he expired last week in the arms of his 
friends. 17. I perceive several sails far off in the horizon (au loin a 
Vhorizotifir 

18. The horse growsTo the age of eight or ten years. 19. The 
grass (Vherbe) grows fast; it has grown much this week. 20. Did 
God appear to Moses ? 21. He appeared to him. 22. Will you 
remain an entire month in the country ? 23.1 shall remain there 
six whole weeks. 24. Do you see that sail in the horizon ? 25. I 
see it. 26. Is not that trunk too small? 27. No, it is sufficiently 
large. 28. Has the mail arrived? 29. Yes, it has just arrived. 
30. Do you know the use of the future tense (temps) of French 
verbs? 31. I know the use of the future and of the present. 32. 
One sometimes employs the present to speak of habitual actions. 
33. Are you going to the hunt? 34. I am not going there. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Have you not a country-house (maison de campagne)% 2. 
Yes ; I have one... some, jwenty miles from here. 3. Does any one 
stay there ? 4. I have left a man there to take cfre of the trees, 
and to cultivate (cultiver) some vegetables. 5. Have you many 
fruit-trees ? 6. I have several hundred^ 7. Do they begin to bearv^ 
(donner) fruit ? 8.1 had some last year ; and if the season is good, 
I shall have still more this year*- 9. Your trees will afford (donne-^ 
ront) you much money in a few years. - 10. I hope that they will 
afford me sufficient in two years. 11. You must have a very pretty 
country-house. 12. Have you never been there? 13. No; I have 
often been over the bay, but never very far on this side, j 

14. Where will you go to-morrow ? 15. I am to go to the mill 
of Mr. S. 16. It is^nine miles from my houseTI go there often in 
summer; but I believed that Mr. S. had sold it. 17. On the con- 
trary (au cotitraire), he has bought the part (la part) of his part- — 
ner, 18. Then it is that which I had heard, but had misunder- 
stood (mal compris).^ 19. That countryman has some sixty sheep 
and twenty cows. 



THE NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



331 



98.— QUATRE-VINGT-DIX-HUITIEME LEQON. 

PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The perfect of the subjunctive is formed by annexing the past participle to the pres- 
ent subjunctive of the auxiliary; thus, 

Perfect subjunctive of avoir. 
Que f aie eu, qu'il ait eu, que vous ayez eu, 

That I may have had, that he may have had, that you may have had, 

Que tu aies eu, que nous ayons eu, quHls aient eu, 

That thou mayest have had, that we may have had, ' that they may have had. 

Perfect subjunctive of etre. 
Quefaie ete, quHl ait ete, que vous ayes ete, 

That I may have been, that he may have been,. that you may have been, 

Que tu aies ete, que nous ayons ete, quHls aient ete, 

That thou mayest have been, that we may have been, that they may have been. 

Perfect subjunctive of aller. 
Queje sois alle, qu'il soit alle, que vous soyez alle, 

That I may have gone, that he may have gone, that you may have gone, 

Que tu sois alU, que nous soyons alles, quHls soient alles, 

That thou mayest have gone, that we may have gone, that they may have gone. 

2. When the tense of the governing clause is present or future, the present subjunctive 
Is used to denote a time which is present or future to it, and the perfect to denote a time 
which is past to it ; thus, 

I fear that he goes there. 
I fear that he will go there. 

I fear that he has gone there. J'ai peur qu'il ne soit alle la. 

I shall fear his going there. 



| J'ai peur qu'il rCaille la. 



I shall fear that he will go the 



re. 



J'aurai peur qu'il n'aille \h. 



I shall fear that he has gone there. J'aurai peur qu'il ne soit alle la. 

He fears that I have lost my money. II a peur que je rfaie perdu mon ar- 
gent. 

He will fear that thou hast lost it. II aura peur que tu ne Vaies perdu. 

He approves of our having done that. II trouve bon que nous ayons fait cela. 

I do not believe that they have fin- Je ne crois pas qu'ils aient fini. 
ished. 

He will doubt your having come. U doutera que vous soyez venus. 

3. The past indefinite of the indicative is followed by the present subjunctive, to ex- 
press what is taking place at the present time, or what belongs to all time. In such cases, 
the governing clause is followed by one of the conjunctions, afin que, pour que, de crainte 
que, depeur que, quoique, Men que. 

He has deceived him, although he is II Va tromp'e, quoiqu'il soit son frere. 
his brother. 

God has made the air transparent, that Dieu a fait l'air transparent, afin que 
one may be able to see through it. l'on puisse voir a travers. 

4. The perfect subjunctive is often used also after the past indefinite. 

Has one ever seen a man who has A-t-on jamais vu un homme qui ait 
shown more courage ? montre plus de courage ? 



332 



THE NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON. 



Have you ever met with any one who 

has learned more than he did? 
The preterite. To aid. 
A narration. Myself. 
To be used to. To get used to. 
Is he used to fatigue ? 
He is used to it. 
He gets used to danger. 
To be mistaken. To amuse one^s self. 
To respect. To fatter one's self. 

The third (part). The powder. 



A W2-vous jamais rencontre quelqu'un 
qui ait appris plus que lui ? 

Le preterit. Aider. 

Un recit. Moi-meme. 

Eire fait a. Se faire d. 

Est-il fait (or accoutume) a la fatigue ? 

II y est (accoutume) fait. 

II se fait au danger.yl__ 

Se tromper. S'amuser (a bef. inf.). 

Respecter. Se fatter (de bef. inf. and 
nouD). 

Le tiers. La poudre. 



1. Croyez-vous que le docteur soit venu? 2. Je doute qu'il soit 
veim. 3. Trouvez-vous bon que nous soyons alles au spectacle % 
4. Je trouve bon que vous y alliez. 5. Le maitre pense-t-il que 
nous n'ayons pas bien etudie? 6. II pense que vous n'avez pas 
bien etudie. 7. Ne se trompe-t-il pas ? 8. II se trompe. 9. A 
quoi vous amusez-vous ? 10. Je m' amuse a lire. 11. Bespectez- 
vous le caractere de cet homme ? 12. Je le respecte. 13. Cet 
homme se flatte-t-il de savoir bien le francais ? 14. II se flatte de 
savoir bien le francais et Pespagnol. 15. J'ai peur que Ton n'ait 
rempli ce baril de poudre. 16. Le tiers de neuf est de trois, et le 
tiers de clouze est de quatre. 17. Savez-vous bien 1'emploi du 
preterit? 18. Je ne le sais pas parfaitement. 19. Aidez-vous 
cet homme? 20. Oui, je l'aide toujours dans ses besoins. 21. 
Cet homme nous a fait un recit fidele de ses malheurs % 22. Le 
maitre a-t-il ecrit ceci? 23. Non, monsieur, je l'ai ecrit moi- 
meme. 

1. Did that man aid you in your need ? 2. He aided me with 
(de) his property and with his credit. 3. Has that man finished 
the narration of his journeys ? 4. He has finished the narration of 
the first, but not of the second. 5. Are you used to labor ^- 6. I 
am not yet used to \tS~ 7. Has your companion got used to the 
fatigue of war ? 8. He has got used to it ! since he has been in it. 
9. Your brother makes great progress in the French ; did he cor- 
rect that exercise ? 10. No; I corrected it myself. 11. Does he 
know well the use of the preterite tense? 12. He knows the use 
of the preterite, the present, and the future. 13. Will it be neces- 

5 5 12 7 6 5 12 21 6 1 22 6 5 5 6 1 6 V27 18 

pre-te-rit, ai-der, re-ci£, trom-per, a-inu-zer, res-pec-ter, flatter, tiers, poudre. 



THE NINETY-NINTH LESSON. 



333 



sary for us to learn this lesson by heart (par coeur) \ 14. It will 
be necessary for us to learn it all by heart. 

15. Does the master think that thou hast written thy exercise 
correctly (correctement) ? 16. He does not think that I have writ- 
ten it properly (conv enablement) :"T 17. Dost thou think that I have 
-learned my lesson? 18. I do not think that thou hast learned it 
well. 19. Is the master afraid that those scholars have not written 
their exercises ? 20. He is afraid that they have not written them. 
21. Has your father given you money in order that you may go to 
the theater ? 22. He has given me money in order that I may buy 
books. 23. Do you doubt that that scholar has finished his task 1 
24. I doubt his having finished it. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is it possible that you have already learnt your lesson % 2. 
I have learned mine, but I fear \ that my brothers have not learned 
theirs: r 3. Do you believe that I came here this morning at eight 
o'clock ? 4. I do not doubt that thou arrivedst heig, before ten. 
5. Does the master believe that we have gone home T 6. He be- 
lieves that you have gone home, and that the other children have 
gone home also. 7. Have you known any one who has suffered 
more than I ? 8. I have known no one who has sufiered so much 
as you. 9. Are you sometimes mistaken 10. Yes, sir, every one 
is liable to be (sujet a) mistaken.-^. 11. With [a) what do you amuse 
yourself 1 ? 12. I occupy (occupe) myself with studying, and my 
cousin amuses himself with playing. 13. With what do they fill 
that barrel ? 14. They fill it with powder. 

15. Your uncle desires that we go together to the great ball 
which the governor give£~"to-morrow evening ; what say you of it ? 
does it please you that I golwith you 16. It is (suitable that you 
go with my sister. 17. Nevertheless, if my uncle wishes that it be 
otherwise, I consent to go with you. 18. Does your friend ap- 
prove of her aunt's making so long a journey without her? 19. 
No, certainly ; she is very sorry that her aunt has an intention so 
strange. 



99.— QFATRE-VINGT-DIX-N s UVl£ME LEQON. 

IMPEKFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The imperfect op the subjunctive is formed from the past definite, by changing 
the last letter (.«) of the second person singular into the termination, 

SSE, SSES, A T, SSIONS, SSIEZ, SSENT. 



334 THE NINETY-NINTH LESSON. 

Thus, Avoir, past \ndefinite second person singular eus, makes 

Quefeusse, * quHl eid, que vous eussiez, 

That I might have, that he might have, that you might have, 

Que tu eusses, que nous eussions, qu'ils eussent, 

That thou mightst have, that we might have, that they might have. 

£tee, past indefinite second person singular fes, makes 
Quejefusse, qu'il fut, que vozis fussiez, 

That I might be, that he might be, that you might be, 

Que tu fusses, que nous fussions, qu'ils fussent, 

That thou mightst be, that we might be, that they might be. 

Allee, past indefinite second person singular allas, makes 
Que fallasse, quHl alldt, qxie vous allassiez, 

That I might go, that he might go, that you might go, 

Que tu allasses, que nous allassions, qu'ils allassent, 

That thou mightst go, that we might go, that they might go. 

2. "When the tense of the governing clause is past or conditional, this tense is used to 
denote a. time which is either present or future to it. 

I was desiring that thou shouldst come. Je desirais que tu vinsses. 

He desired that I should have money. II desira que yeusse de Fargent. 

I had desired that he should be here. J'avais desire qu'il fut ici. 

He would wish us to speak. II voudrait que nous parlassions. 

I should wish you to speak. Je voudrais que vous parlassiez. 

I should have wished them to go there. 3'aurais voulu qu'ils allassent la. 

3. We thus see that this tense is used after the past and conditional, as the present sub- 
junctive is after the present and future. 

I desire you to go there. J e desire que vous alliez la. 

I desired you to go there. Je desirais que vous allassiez la. 

It is necessary for him to live well. II faut qu'il vive bien. 

It was necessary for him to live well. II afallu qu'il vecut bien. 

It will be necessary for them to come. II faudra qu'ils viennent. 

He would wish them to come. II voudrait qu'ils vinssent. 

4. This tense is to be used also after the present or future, provided it be followed by a 
conditional expression containing or implying the imperfect tense. 

I doubt whether you would be sick, if Je doute que vous fussiez malade, si 
you were prudent. vous etiez prudent. 

If we did not aid him, what would he Si nous ne l'aidions pas, que ferait-il ? 
do? 

I doubt his succeeding without you. Je doute qu'il reussit sans vous.* 

To be under obligations. Avoir des obligations. 

To act. The ear. Agir. Uoreille. 

To return, go back. The chimney. Retourner. La cheminee. 

5. Retourner always means to go back; revenir, to come bade. 
To attach, to tie. That brandy. Attacher. Cette eau de vie. 



. * Sans vous implies an imperfect, being equivalent to si vous ne Vaidiez pas. 

9 9 9 12 21 9 125 9 22 1 1 1 2 1 1 12 21 1 1 136 1 

eusse, eat, eus-sion.9, eus-siez, eussent, fusse, aZ-lasse, al-lkt, a£-la.9-sions, aZ-las-sies, a£- 

1 15 12 1 12 21 1 12 15 7 4 18 6 4 12 6 1 I 6 

lasses, ob-li-sa-tions, a-gir, o-Yeille, re-tour-ner, che-mi-nee, a.'-ta-cher. 



THE NINETY-NINTH LESSON. 



335 



A basket. The pain, trouble. 
Correct. Without pain. 
He is hard of hearing. 



Un panier. La peine. 
Correct. Sans peine. 
II a Vouie dure. 



1. Avez-vous des obligations a cet etranger? 2. Je lui ai beau- 
coup d' obligations. 3. Agissez-vous comme vous parlez ? 4. J'agis 
comme je parle, mais notre voisin agit autrement qu'il ne parle. 5. 
Ce gar con retourne-t-il souvent cbez lui? 6. II y retourne tous les 
dimanches. 7. Mettez-vous vos fleurs sur la cheminee ? 8. J'en 
mets quelques-unes sur la cheminee et quelques-unes sur la table. 
9. Ce marchand vend-il de l'eau-de-vie? 10. II vend de l'eau-de- 
vie et du vin. 11. Pensiez-vous que je fisse ma tache facilement? 
12. Je ne pensais pas que tu la fisses sans peine. 13. Croyiez-vous 
que votre theme fut correct ? 14. Je ne croyais pas qu'il fut tout 
a fait correct. 15. Qu'a cet homme? 16. .11 a l'ouie dure. 17. 
Q u' avez-vous ? 18. J'ai mal a l'oreille droite. 19. De quoi ce 
garcon a-t-il besoin % 20. II a besoin d'un cordon pour attacber 
son panier. 

1. Did the master desire that we should return home often? 
2. He desired that we should return home every week. 3. Act in,, 
such a way that you may be praised-; are you often praised ? 4. 
No, sir ; I act well toward every body, but I am not often praised. 
5. Have you the (un) ear-ache or the (un) tooth-ache %- 6. I have 
a slight ear-ache. 7.; With what do you tie your books ? 8. I tie 
them with a handkerchief. 9. Where does the carpenter put his 
hammer? 10. He puts it on the chimney. 11. Did you think 
that the servant had your basket ? 12. I did not think that he 
had it. 13. Did the physician say that I was hard of hearing ? 
14. He did not say so. 15. Did you fear that we might diel^. 16. 
I feared that you might be sick. 

17. Did you think that we could not learn this, lesson? 18. I 
did not think that you could learn it easily. 19. Did you desire 
that the traveler should come here ? 20. I did not desire it. 21. 
Were you afraid that I should lose my money? 22. No ; I was 
afraid that thou wouldst be sick. 23. Was it possible for you to 
learn all that lesson ? 24. Yes, sir ; but it was not possible for my 
brother to learn it. 25. Did the physician think that you were very 
sick? 26. He thought that I should die. 27. Did the master say 



1 12 5 7 16 5 18 13 

pa-nier, peine, cor-rect, ouie. 



336 



THE ONE HUNDREDTH LESSON. 



that my exercise was well written ? 28. He said that it was quite 
correct. 29. Where do you desire my servant to carry this basket % 
30. I wish him to carry it to the market. 31. Did you hear that 
the doctor drank much brandy? 32. No, I did not hear so. 33. 
Can you learn all that lesson? 34. I can learn it without trouble. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Did not that house formerly belong to your uncle? 2. Yes; 
but he sold it to Mr.. E. the past summer. 3. I am astonished at 
it; it is a superb house; I do not comprehend (concois)\\\hj he 
sold it. 4. It did not suit (convenait) him ; it is too large for his 
family. 5. How much may (pent) such a house as that cost4- 6. 
That one cost my uncle ten thousand five hundred dollars. 7. It 
is much money ; but it is well worth that.'* 8. Is your uncle here 
now ? 9. No ; he set out for France three weeks ago. 4— 

10. Did you see Mr. B. yesterday? 11. Yes ; I saw him at his 
house. 12. Has he received news from New York ? 13. Yes ; he 
received a letter day before yesterday. 14. What news was there ? 
15. Nothing new; Charles arrived there in good health. 16. What 
day did he arrive there ? 17. I do not know ; he wrote that he 

arrived there two weeks after his departure from here 18. Then, 

as he set out on Monday, he must have arrived (doit etre arrive) on 
Monday also. 19. When does he say that he will return ? 20. He 
says nothing about it in (en) his letter ; I think that he will stay 
in New York at least a month or six weeks. 21. Will he return 
by sea or by land ? 22. By land ; he will pass by Cincinnati, for 
he wishes to go and see his sister, who lives at St. Louis. 

23. What did you do yesterday ? 24. As soon as I had break- 
fasted I set out for the country, and I returned only in the evening,j_ 
25. Did you go there alone? 26. No; John went with me. 27. 
Why did you not come here yesterday morning ? We were expect- 
ing you. 28. I had a little fever the night before last, and I stayed 
at home all day yesterday. , / 

/ 



100. — CENTI&ME LEgON. 

PLUPEEFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. Tne plttpeefect of tiie SUBJUNCTIVE is formed by joining tho past participle to 
the imperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary. 

Pluperfect subjunctive of avoir. 

Quefeusse eu, qu'il eut eu, que votis eussies eu, 

That I might have had, that he might have had, that you might have had, 

Que tu ensses eu, que nous eussions eu, qu'ils eussent eu, 

That thou mightst have had, that we might have had, that they might have had. 



THE ONE HUNDREDTH LESSON. 



337 



Pluperfect subjunctive of etre. 
Que feusse tie, qu'il eut ete, que vous eussiez ete, 

That I might have been, that he might have been, that you might have been, 

Que, tu eusses ete, que nous eussioiis ete, qiCils eussent ete 

That thou mightst have been, that we might have been, that they might have been. 

Pluperfect subjunctive of venir. 
Que jefusse venu, qu'il fut venu, que vous fussiez venus, 

That I might have come, that he might have come, that you might have come, 

Que tu fusses venu, que nousfussions venus, quHlsfussent venus, 

That thou mightst have come, that we might have come, that they might have come. 

2. This tense is used, when the tense of the governing clause is past or conditional, to 
denote a time which is past to it. 

I wished that he had written. Je voulais qu'il eut ecrit. 

He wished that I had written. II voulut que feusse ecrit. 

We were afraid that thou hadst done it. Nous avions peur que tu ne Yeusses fait. 
He was afraid that we had gone there. II avait peur que nous nefussions alles 

la. 

We should like that you had gone Nous aimerions que vous fussiez alles 

there. la. 
I should have wished that they had Taurais voulu qu'ils fussent venus. 

come. 

3. We thus see that this tense is used after the past and conditional, as the perfect sub- 
junctive is after the present and future. 

Do you think that he has finished? Pewsez-vous qu'il aitfini? 

Did you think that he had finished ? Pe?isiez-yous qu'il eut fini ? 

Will he believe that we have studied ? Croira-t-W que nous ayons etudie? 

Would he believe that we had studied? Croirait-H que nous eussions etudie ? 

4. This tense is to be used also after the present or future, provided it be followed by a 
conditional expression, containing or implying the pluperfect tense. 

I doubt whether you would have been Je doute que vous eussiez ete malade 
sick if you had been prudent. si vous aviez ete prudent. 

If you had not helped him, what could Si vous ne l'aviez pas aide, qu'aurait-ii 
he have done ? pu faire ? 

I doubt his having succeeded without Je doute qu'il eut reussi sans vous.* 
you. 

The state. Simple. Vetat. Simple. 

Definite. Indefinite. Defini. Ind'efini. 

I believe so. Je le crois (je crois que oui). 

He believes not. II ne le croit pas (il croit que non). 

5. When venir signifies to happen, it takes d before the infinitive. 

If I happen to see your brother. Si je viens a voir votre frere. 

I come to see your brother. Je viens voir votre frere. 

To meet with. To suit, agree. Rencontrer. Convenir (comp. of venir). 



Sans vous here implies a pluperfect, being equivalent to si vous ne V aviez pas aide. 

S1H 5 12 1212 5 12 12 3 21 6 21 If. 

e-taf, simple, de-fi-ni, in-de-fi-ni, ren-con-tre/-, conve-nir. 

15 



338 



THE ONE HUNDREDTH LESSON. 



6. Convenir, meaning to suit, takes d before a noun ; meaning to agree, it takes de. In 
the former sense it takes avoir for auxiliary, in the latter, etre. 

This house suits him. It suited his Cette maison lui convient. Elle a con- 
father. We have agreed upon venu a son pure. Nous somraes 
the price. convenus du prix. 

He meets with many obstacles. II rencontre beaucoup d'obstaclcs. 

I agree to do that. Je conviens de faire cela. 

1. Le maitre croyait-il que je n'eusse pas appris ma lecon ? 2. 

II ne croyait pas que tu 1'eusses bien apprise. 3. J'ava'is peur que 
ces jeunes gens n'eussent pas dit adieu au docteur. 4. Cet etranger 
vous a-t-il cru ? 5. II m'a cru sur ma simple parole^ 6. On peut 
souvent employer le preterit indefini pour le preterit defini. 7. Si 
vous venez a rencontrer mon ami, donnez-lui cette lettre. 8. En 
quel etat avez-vous trouve cette affaire ? 9. Je l'ai trouvee en mau- 
vais etat. 10. Le preterit defini est un temps simple. 11. Pen- 
siez-vous que j'eusse fait ma tache facilement? 12. Je ne pensais 
pas que tu 1'eusses faite sans peine. 13. Aviez-vous peur que nous 
n'eussions pas appris nos lecons ? 14. J'avais peur que vous ne les 
eussiez pas bien apprises. 15. Le maitre trouvait-il bien tque les 
ecoliers eussent vendu leurs livres ? 16. Non, il ne le trouvait pas 
bien. 17. Croyiez-vous que je fusse alle chez moi? 18. Je croyais 
que vous etiez alle au spectacle. 

1. Did you think that I bad gone home ? 2. I was afraid that 
thou hadst gone home without reciting thy lesson. 3. Did you 
doubt that we had learned our lessons well ? 4. I doubted your 
having learned yours, and I was afraid that your cousins had not 
learned theirs well. 5. Did the master wish that I had come here 
earlier ? 6. He wished that you had come here at eight o'clock. 
7. Do you believe that I should have learned French without my 
master ? 8. I do not believe that your cousin would have learned 
it without his master. 9. Did our friends fear that we had been 
sick? 10. They feared that you had died. 11. Did you think 
that the traveler had come here? 12. I did not think so. 13. Is 
your exercise quite correct ? 14. I think so. 

15. Is that man useful to the state ? 1G. He thinks so ; I think 
not. 17. Is not that mason building a new stone chimney? 18. I 
believe so. 19. That man looks tipsy ; has he not drunk too much 
brandy? 20. He has drunk too much. 21. Has not that man 
some concealed (cache) sorrow? 22. Yes; he has committed faults, 
and he suffers the pain of them. 23. Has not the countrywoman a 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON. 



339 



basket of fruit ? 24. She has a basket of fruit and a basket of 
flowers. 25. If you happen to meet my friend, tell him to come 
and see me. 26. Do you desire that it may rain $ 27. No ; I de- 
sire that it may be fine weather. 28. How many states do the 
United States comprehend ? 29. They comprehend more than 
thirty states. 30. Have those men agreed to sell their houses? 
31. Yes ; and they have agreed upon the price. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is it true that the governor of the state is^dead ? 2. No ; it 
is a false„_report (nouvelle). 3. He has been very sick, and he is 
so still; but he wa&_better this morning. 4. What is the matter 
with him? 5. He has the fever. 6. Do they believe that he is 
still in danger? 7. The danger is neajl^jpassed, I believe. 8. 
There is much sickness ; is there not ? 9. I do not believe that 
there is much. 

10. Whatever I do there are always some faults in my exercise. 
11. It is necessary, however, to manageJ^/azVe) in such a way that 
there may not be any. 12. How many have you made to-day? 
13>4jruess, if you carn^, 14. Five or six. 15. I have not made a 
single one. 16. Confess_that your brother helped you. 17. He 
showed me one mistake which I had made, and which I corrected 
myself. 18. You make progress ; you have made only one mis- 
take, while I have made four. 19. I hope that I shall succeed also 
in not jma.fr in ft an y T nors. 20. I do not doubt that that may hap- 
pen (arrive) soon, provided that you always know your lesson as 
you dojit present. 21. I confess to you that I desire much to make 
progress m my studies, and above all (surtout) in_the French. 22. 
In order that you may. know it well, you must study it well. 

23. Is the preterite indefinite a simple tense ? 24. No ; the 
preterite definite is a simple tense, but the preterite indefinite is a 
compound (compose}_tenBe. 25. Did you think that I had learned 
all the tenses of the French verbs? 26. I did not think that you 
had learned them all. 27. What tenses have you learned ? 28. I 
know the use of the present, the future, the preterite definite, and 
the preterite indefinite. 



101. — CENT-ITNII5ME LEQON. 

CONNECTION OF TENSES. GENEEAL RULE. 

1. It has been seen, in the last three lessons, that the several tenses of the subjunctive 
mood are used according to the following general rule : 

When the time of the governing clause is present or future, the present of the sub- 
junctive is used to denote a time which is present or future to it, and the perfect to denote 
a time which is past ; but when the time of the governing clause is past or conditional, tho 



340 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIE ST LESSON. 



imperfect is used to denote a time which is present or future to it, and the pluperfect to 
denote a time which is past ; thus, 



I doubt whether he goes there. 
I doubt whether he will go there. 
I shall doubt whether he goes there. 
I shall doubt whether he will go there. 
I doubt whether he has gone there. 
I shall doubt whether he has gone there. 
I doubted whether he went (or would 

go) there. 
I have doubted whether he went (or 

would go) there. 
I had doubted his going there. 
I should doubt his going there. 
I should have doubted his going there. 
I doubted whether he had gone there. 
I have doubted his having gone there. 
I had doubted whether he had gone 

there. 

I should doubt whether he had gone 
there. 

I should have doubted his having gone 
there. 

2. That the present and perfect subjunctive are often used after the past indefinite, and 
the imperfect and pluperfect with a condition, after the present, has also been seen in the 
last three lessons. 

3. The imperfect of the subjunctive may also be used after a present, when such present 
would be translated by the perfect in English, as also when such imperfect has the nature 
of the conditional; as, 



Je doute qu'il aillc la. 

Je doutcrai qu'il aille la. 

Je doute qu'il soil alle la. 

Je douterai qu'il soit alle la. 

Je doutai (or doutais) qu'il y alldt. 

J'ai doute qu'il y alldt. 

J'avais doute qu'il y alldt. 

Je douterais qu'il y alldt. 

Faurais doute qu'il y alldt. 

Je doutais (or doutai) qu'il fut alle la. 

J'ae doute qu'il y fut alle. 

J'avais doute qu'il fut alle la. 

Je douterais qu'il j fut alle. 

J'aurais doute qu'il fut alle la. 



I have spoken prose more than forty 

years without my knowing any 

thing of it. 
There is no one of his subjects who 

would not hazard his own life to 

save that of the king. 



II y a plus de quarante ans que je fa is 
de la prose sans que j'en susse 
rien. 

II n'y a aucun de ses sujets qui ne ha- 
sardat sa propre vie pour con- 
server celle du roi. 



4. M:me is annexed to personal pronouns in French, as self is in English, and agrees 
with them in number. 

Myself. Thyself. Himself. Moi-meme. Toi-meme. Lui-meme. 

Herself. Ourselves. Yourselves. Elle-meme. Nous-memes. Vous-memcs. 
One's self. Themselves. Soi-meme. Eux-memes. Elles-memcs. 

5. It is used in the same way also with other words. 
This very thing. That very thing. Ceci-meme. Cela-meme. 
This very one. That very one. Celui-ci-meme. Celui-la-meme. 

The king himself. The Greeks them- Le roi-meme. Les Grecs-memes. 
selves. 

1. Qui a corrige ce theme? 2. Je l'ai corrige moi-meme. 3. 
Qui a casse ce verre? 4. Tu l'as casse toi-meme. 5. Avez-vous 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON. 



341 



vu le ministre du roi ? 6. J'ai vu le ministre et le roi lui-meme. 
7. Qui a apporte les livres de votre soeur ? 8. Ma soeur les a apportes 
elle-meme. 9. Qui a nos lettres ? 10. Vous les avez vous-memes. 
11. Nous avons fait ces affaires nous-m ernes. 12. Qui a dechireles 
livres deces enfants ? 13. Les enfants les ont dechires eux-memes. 
14. Croyez-vous que votre frere vienne ? 15. Je ne crois pas qu'il 
vienne. 16. Croyez-vous qu'il soit verm ? 17. Je ne crois pas qu'il 
soit venu. 18. Vouliez-vous qu'il vint? 19. Je voulais qu'il vint. 
20. Pensiez- vous qu'il fut venu ? 21. Je ne pensais pas qu'il fut 
venu. 22. Craignez-vous que votre associe ne meure? 23. Je 
crains qu'il ne soit deja mort. 24. Croyiez-vous que nous perdis- 
sions notre argent ? 25. Je croyais que vous l'aviez perdu. 

1. Do you not believe that we ob§v_the master? 2. I do not 
believe that you obey him. 3. Do you fear that we have not obeyed 
him? 4. I fear that you have not obeyed him. 5. Did you wish 
us to obey him ? 6.1 wished you to obey him. 7. Did you think 
that we had not^obeyed him f 8. I was afraid that you had not 
obeyed him. 9. Do you know any one who does more than I ? 10. 
I know no one who does more than you. 11. Do you know any 
one who has done more than the doctor? 12. I know no one who 
has done so muchjas he. 13, Did you know any one who studied 
more than Charles ? 14. I knew no one who studied as much as 
he. 15. Did you know any one who had studied more than he ? 
16. I knew no one who had studied so much as he. 17. However 
lazy the doctor may be, he is very learned. 

18. However rich the merchant may have been, he is now poor. 

1 9. Whatever might be his misfortunes, he supported them well. 

20. Whatever riches he might have gained, he lost them all. 21. 
Will you lend me your penknife a moment ? 22. Very willingly, 
sir ; here it is at your service. ( 23. I wish to buy a horse ; will you 
sell me yours? 24. I can notj sell him ; I have need of him every 
day. 25. I wish you to hold these papers a moment. 26. Cer- 
tainly ; I will hold them with pleasure. 27. It is necessary to take 
care of one's self when one travels, if ' one wishes to escape [aux) 
accidents. 28. Those women are vain (vaines) ; they will speak 
rather of themselves than of others. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Well, here I am. 2. You return early. 3. Yes ; I finished 



342 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON. 



the most part of my business last evening, and I Set out early this 
morning. 4. Are you going alone to the ball, or do you conduct 
some one ? 5. I am going alone. 6. Well, come for us (nous trou- 
ver) at the house at eight o'clock, and we will go in (de) company. 
7. I thank you ; that will be one pleasure morey 8^"¥DTr^efe not^ 1 - 
at the last ball, I believe ? 9. No ; I was sick. They told me 
that there were many persons there. 10. Yes ; they dancedyfol- 

most all night, until three o'clock.^, 11. I intended positively (b'ien\ - 

to be there, and to have the honor of dancing with Miss G*-- 12. 
She expected you, and she was very much surprised jto see that you 
were not there. 13. I owe her some apology (des excuses)jjb u.t it 
was not my fault if I was not of the party. 14. Well, come this 
evening at eight o'clock, or sooner if you can. 

15. Who is that gentleman? 16. It is Mr. E. ; he is a pro- 
fessor of music. 17. Is he a Frenchman ? 18. No ; he is a Ger- 
man, but he speaks the French perfectly ; he is a man of merit. 

19. It is a beautiful thing to (que dejhknow several languages. 

20. Yes ; it is useful and agreeable. 21. What I find most diffi- 
cult in the French is the verbs. 22. You do not make" many mis- 
takes. 23. I am always afraid of making mistakes, for I have 
never understood (compris) well the iise of the different tenses. 24. 
If you wish, I will give you some lessons on this point of grammar. 
25. You will render me a great service. 26. Among all my ac- 
quaintance it is you who have the most taste for French ; you will 
learn to speak it without mistakes in a little time. 27. You flatter 
me. 28. Not at all ; what I tell you is only the truth. 29. Then 
if you are willing to give me some lessons on the verbs I shall be 
much obliged to you. 



102.— CENT-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 

RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES ON VEEBS CONNECTED WITH IF. 

1. We have seen (page 322) that there is in French a second past conditional, or second 
form, — the same tense exactly as the pluperfect subjunctive ■without its que, — and that this 
form is often used to translate the pluperfect of the indicative following if, so that phrases 
which contain these tenses (as given in Lesson 95), may be expressed in several forms ; 
thus, 

' SI f avals ete vaincu faurais etc crirai- 
nel. 

Si f avals He vaincu feusse ete crirni- 
nel. 

Si feusse ete vaincu feusse ete crimi- 
nel. 

SI feusse ete vaincu faurais ete crimi- 
nel. 



If I had been vanquished I should 
have been criminal. 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON. 



343 



2. When the pluperfect of the indicative follows if, the first form of the past conditional 
is commonly used, as seen in all the examples of Lesson 95; but when the second form fol- 
lows if the same form is more commonly used also in the conditional. 

If I had seen him, I should have spoken Sije Vavais vu, je lui aurais parti. 
to him. 

If he had believed me, he would not SHI m'eut cru, il tfeut point fait dc 
have made verses. vers. 

3. "When the second form follows if however, tho first form is often used to avoid mo- 
notony of sound. 

If I had died young, I should not have Si je fusse mort jeune, je n' 'aurais pas 
known regrets. connu de regrets. 

If he had been virtuous, he would have S'il eut ete vertueux, il aurait etc heu- 
been happy. reux. 

4. We have now seen that the verb following si conditional (i. e., meaning if, not 
whether), is used in four different cases for other tenses. 

First. The present indicative for the future, Lessen 47 : 
If you go (shall go), I will go also. Si vous y allez, j'irai aussi. 

Second. The imperfect for the conditional, Lesson 93 : 
If she wrote (should write), I would Si elle ecrivait, je lirais la lettre. 
read the letter. 
Third. The pluperfect for the past conditional : 
If she had written, I would have read Si eile avail ecrit, j'aurais lu la lettre. 
the letter. 

Fourth. The second past conditional for the first : Si elle eut ecrit (and not Si elle 
aurait), etc. 

IEEEGULAK IMPEEATIVES. 



Go to thy room. Go. 

Have thou. Let us have. Have ye. 
Be thou. Let tis be. Be ye. 
Be so kind. Please. 

Let us Jc?wii'. Knoio ye. 

Know your lesson. Let us know it. 

Take care of thy books. 

Let us take care of these papers. 

Be attentive. Let us be attentive. 

Please to listen to me. 



Ya dans ta chambrc. Va [imperative 
of aller'). 

Aie. Ayons. Ayez (imp. of avoir). 
Sois. Soyons. Soyez (imp. of etre). 
Veuillez. Veuillez bien (imp. of vou- 
loir). 

Sachons. Sachez (imp. of savoir). 
Sachez votre lecon. Sachons-la. 
Aie soin de tes livres. 
Ayons soin de ces papiers. 
Soyez attentif. Soyons attentifs. 
Veuillez bien m'ecouter. 



5. The regular form of the imperative of 'couloir may sometimes bo used when strength 
of will is expressed. 

Will, and you will succeed. Toulez, ct vous reussirez. 

G. The past participle, annexed to the infinitive of the auxiliary, forms the past in- 
finitive. 

9 6 1 21 16 

veuil-les, sa-chons, sa-che^. 



344 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON. 



After having finished. Before having Apres avoir fini. Avant d'etre arrive". 
arrived. 

After having written my letter, I sent Apres avoir tcrit ma lettre, je Pai en- 
it to the post-office. voyee a la poste. 

1. Sois attentif a ce que je dis. 2. Va au magasin. et dis a ton 
frere de venir ici. 3. Ayez soin de vos livres. 4. Sois attentif a 
ton devoir. 5. Si tu eusses vu tes amis, n'aurais (or n'eusses-tu) pas 
ete heureux ? 6. J'aurais (or j'eusse) ete heureux. 7. Si vous eussiez 
eu beaucoup d'argent, n'auriez-vous pas en beaucoup d'amis ? 8. 
Nous eussions eu beaucoup d'amis. 9. Si ces ecoliers eussent bien 
etudie, n'auraient (or n'eussent) ils pas fait des progres? 10. lis 
eussent fait de grands progres. 11. Si vous aviez (or eussiez) eto 
sans amis, n'eussiez-vous pas ete malheureux ? 12. Nous eussions 
ete malheureux. 13. Va trouver Charles, et dis-lui de venir a la 
maison. 14. Aie soin de ta sante. 15. Ayons bien soin de nos 
affaires. 16. Ayez soin deces chevaux. 17. Soyez attentif a ce que 
je dis. 18. Veuillez me faire leplaisir de porter cette lettre a votre 
pere. 19. Apres avoir recite votre lecon, que ferez vous? 20. 
J'irai a la maison. 

1. Take care of thy papers. 2. Let us take care of our books. 
3. Take good care of those horses. 4. Be attentive to thy lessons. 
5. Let us be attentive to all that the master says. 6. Be attentive 
to all your duties. 7. Be so kind as to lend me this book. 8. 
Please to show me thy exercise. 9. Go and tell the servant to 
make some fire. 10. If thou hadst been cold, wouldst thou not 
have warmed thyself? 11. I should have warmed myself. 12. If 
the neighbor had offered-lio sell you his horse, should you have 
bought it ? 13. No ; even,' if/he had offered to sell it cheap, we 
should not have bought it. 14. If those scholars had been studious, 
would they not have become learned? 15. They would have 
become learned. 

16. Know well what you have to do. 17. Let us know where 

we are to go to-day. 18. Please to show me how to do that J. 9. 

Let us will to be free, and we shall be so. 20. Be attentive to 
what I am going to tell you. 21. Let us be attentive to all that 
the professor says. 22. Go to school early this morning. 23. Take 
care of your books and papers. 24. After having shaved this morn- 
ing, what did you do ? 25. After having shaved I breakfasted, and 
after having breakfasted, I read. 26. If thou hadst taken good 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. 



345 



care of thy money, would thou not have been rich? 27. I should 
have been rich. 28. If you had arrived earlier, would you not have 
seen the general? 29. We should have seen him. 30. Will that 
scholar become learned? 31. No ; even if he were studious, he 
would not become learned. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. When will you that we go and see Charles'? 2. Let us go 
there this evening, if you will. 3. I had a mind to go to the theater 
this evening ; nevertheless, if you like better that we go and see 
Charles this evening, I consent. 4. No ; if you will, we will go to 
the theater this evening, and we will go to his house to-morrow. 
5. As you wish ; that is all the same [parfaitement egal) to me. 

6. Good evening, ladies ; I have the honor to present to you 
my respects. 7. Good evening, sir ; we are delighted to see you 
back (de retourffjire were expecting you. 8. I arrived at one 
o'clock. 9. Our cousin told us that you had gone to the country, 
but that you intended to retirrnjthis afternoon. 10. It will be 
necessary for me to go there again to-morrow. 11. So soon as that? 
12. I was not able to finish what I was to do there, and I was not 
willing to lose the pleasure of accompanying you this evening to 
the ball. 13. Do you wish to make us believe that you have come 
from the country on purpose for that ? 14. Does it seem to you that 
that is something very surprising ? 15. It is very gallant, if it is 
true. 16. I pray you to believe, miss, that it is much more true 
than gallant. 17. Eeally {reellemen f), have you been to the coun- 
try ? 18. In order to prove it to you, and also to make you see 
that I have thought \>i you while I was there, allow me to offer you 
these flowers which t gathered there for you. 19. Sir, we thank 
you a thousand times ; they are very beautiful. 20. Now we are 
ready to believe all that you shall wish^Jp 



103.— CENT-TROISLftME LEgON. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

1. The first and second persons imperative of all regular forms were given in Lesson 44; 
those of irregular forms (i. e., of alter, avoir, etre, savoir, and vouloir), in the preceding 
lesson. The third person singular and plural is the same as in the present subjunctive ; 
thus, 



Let him study. Let them study. 
Let him come. Let them come. 
Let him see. Let them see. 
Let him read. Let them read. 
Let him have. Let them have. 
Let him be. Let them be. 

15* 



Qu'il etudie. QuHls etudient. 
Qu'il vienne. Qu'ils viennent. 
Qu'il voie. Qu'ils voient. 
Qu'il lise. Qu'ils lisent. 
Qu'il ait. Qu'ils aient. 
Qu'il soit. Qu'ils soient. 



346 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. 



Let him know. Let them know. Qu'il sache. Qu'ils sachent. 

Let the servant hold these horses. Que le domestique tienne ceschevaux. 

Let the boys pick up the apples. Que les garcons ratnassent les pommes. 

2. As the French have no first person singular imperative, they use the first person plu- 
ral in its place ; as, 

Let me see. Let me reflect. Voyons. Rejlechissons. 

3. The infinitive mood, when its use is attended with no ambiguity, is preferred to all 
the other moods as more concise and elegant. Hence verbs which govern other moods with 
a change of subject, take the infinitive when the subject remains the same. 

He desires that you may be rich. II desire que vous soyez riche. 

He desires that he may be rich. II desire etre riche. 

lie believes that they have lost their II croit qu'elles ont perdu leur argent, 
money. 

He believes that he has lost his money. II croit avoir perdu son argent. 

He thinks that we are learned. II pense que nous sommes savants. 

He thinks that he is learned. II pense etre savant. 

A bove, upstairs. Below, down-stairs. En haut. En has. 

As usual. Usually. Comme a Vordinaire. D 'ordinaire. 

Better than usual. Mieux qiCd Vordinaire. 

4. When a clause beginning with a relative intervenes between the verb est and its sub- 
ject ce, the ce may or may not be repeated if the verb be followed by a substantive singu- 
lar; but if the verb be not followed by a substantive singular, the ee must be repeated; as, 

What makes the merit of man is vir- Ce qui fait le merite de l'homme est 

tue. (or Jest) la vertu. 

What I desire is to see you. Ce que je desire Jest de vous voir. 

5. When ce does not begin the first clause, it is to be used with est in the second, if an 
attribute clause of some length precedes est ; as, 

The thing most dear to man after vir- La chose la plus chere a l'homme apres 
tue is friendship. la vertu c'est l'amitie. 

6. Que is used in expressions like the following for greater force . 
A battle is a terrible thing. C'est line chose terrible qu\me bataille. 

Money is a good friend. C'est un bon ami que i'argent, 

Ln the beginning. Great Britain. A u commencement. Grande-Bretagne. 

The roaring. To roar. Le rugissemcnt. Rugir. 

A lion. A proclamation. Un lion. Une proclamation. 

Frightened. Terrible. Effraye. Terrible. 

Singing. Virtue. Le chant. La vertu. 

1. Que le garcon aille an marche. 2. Que les domestiques ap- 
portent du Lois. 3. Que le cusinier fasse du cafe. 4. Que les en- 
fants aillent a la maison. 5. Que le jardmier ramasse les pommes. 
6. Que les ouvriers finissent leur ouvrage. 7. Mon frere est en 
haut, et mes cousins sont en bas. 8. Cet ecolier recite bien sa 

5 5 12 21 16 12 7 15 S 3 4 3 22 12 8 22 12 1221 

re-fle-chis-sons, or-di-nair«, com-mence-men£, Bre-tagne, ru-gissc-men£, ru-gir, li-on, 

15 1 1 1221 5 5 126 7 12 3 7 22 

pro-cla-ma-tion, e/-fra-ye, ter-ribte, chani, ver-tu. 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. 347 

lecon comme a 1' ordinaire. D'ordinaire il etudie bien. 9. Ces 
ecoliers etudient mieux qu'a, 1'ordinaire. 10. Vous etes venu de 
meilleure heure qu' a 1' ordinaire. 11. Qu'etudiez-vous ? 12. J'etudie 
les regies du chant. 13. Allez-vous a l'ecole de chant? 14. J'y 
vais tous les soirs. 15. Od est votre frere? 16. II estalle enhaut, 
et mon cousin est alle en bas. 17. Si vous aviez beaucoup d' argent, 
que feriez-vous? 18. Je voyagerais en Europe. 19. C'est une 
belle chose que d'avoir beaucoup d'amis. 20. Je voudrais bien 
savoir toutes les regies du chant. 21. Que le medecin soigne le 
malacle. 22. Qu'il le soigne bien. 

1. Let the servant make some fire. 2. Let the children go to 
school. 3. Let the pupil take care of his books. 4. Let him take 
care of his papers. 5. Let the girls recite their lessons. 6. Let 
them put their books on the table. 7. Let the child go up-stairs. 
8. Let the boys go down-stairs. 9. Let the servant go for some 
wine. 10. Let him go for some good winei. 11. Let the servants 
take care of the horses. 12. Let them take good care of them. 13. 
Let me see. 14. Let me think. 15. Is your father up-stairs? 16. 
No; he is in the room below. 17. Where can I find your cousin? 
18. Go up-stairs. and knock at the first door on thejeft. 19. Do 
you wish me to go to the market this morning as usual ? 20. Yes ; 
and I will have you return earlier than usual. 21,-1 usually return 
before eight o'clock. 

22. Will it be necessary for us to learn our exercises by heart 
(par coeur) ? 23. Yes ; and the master desires that we learn all 
the words of our lesson by heart also. 24. Do you think that your 
brother reads as well as I? 25. No ; I do not think that he reads 
as well as you. 26. The music most agreeable in a beautiful morn- 
ing of spring is the singing of the birds. 27. It is a beautiful thing 
to preserve a secret. 28. In the beginning of the American revo- 
lution, after the king of Great Britain had hurled {lance) the most 
terrible of his proclamations against the revolted (revolies) Ameri- 
cans, a member oil \Congress (congres) said to an American young 
lady, 29. " Well, miss, are you not afraid of tb^jcoaring, of the 
English lion?" 30. "Not at all, sir," answered she, "for I have 
read in natural history that the king of animals roars the most 
(then) when he is the most affrighted." 



us 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FOURTH LE.SSOX. 



OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Do you desire to begin your French lessons to-day ? 2. Yes ; 
it is important for me to know the use of the French verbs. *3. 
Well, how do they employ the present ? 4. That is easy ; they 
employ it in the same manner as in English, w T hen they speak of 
present actions. 5. Thus, they say, / read, I write, I speak, we write, 
etc. 6. Is that all ? 7. I believe so. 8. If I say, I go to church 
— Sundays, I do not speak of an action which is precisely present. 

9. That is true ; they employ also the present to speak of actions v 
l habitual. 10. They sometimes make use also of the present instead 
of the future; as when I say, Charles sets out for Boston to-mor- 
row ; The boat arrives this evening. 11. Then the present is em- 
ployed in French as in English? 12. Yes ; but there are several 
exceptions (exceptions) very important (importantes), and which use 
will teach you later. 13. There is but one form in French to ex- 
press what , they express in English by three different forms. 14. 
They can translate I write, I am writing, I do ivrite,<mly by fecris. 

15. You read too much at night; it will do you harm. 16. I 
have but little (guere) fear that that may harm me; my eyes have 
been used to it for a long timet' 17. I assure you that it is very 
dangerous. 18. I know a young man who had very good eyes, but 
who now has them very weak ; he is afraid even of becoming blind. 
19. How did that happen to him % 20. It is from having readjmd. 
written too much at night; there is nothing worse for the sight. 
21. Then I will not read so much any more ; I do not wish to lose 
my eyes. 



104. — CENT-QUATRIfiME LEQON. 

PARTICIPLES. 

The learner has long been familiar with the rule that the past participle forming part of 
an active verb agrees with the direct object of that verb when the object precedes, but when 
the object follows it remains unchanged. This rule requires some further modification. 

1. The past participle of impersonal verbs is never varied. 

The rain which has been. La pluie qu'il a, fait* (not faite). 

The heats which have been. Les chaleurs qu'il y a eu* (not eues). 

2. Sometimes the proper object of the participle is the infinitive mood, when the learn- 
er is liable to regard it as the noun or pronoun. 

That song is beautiful; have you heard Cette chanson est belle; l'avez-vous 
it sung? entcndu\ (not entendae) chanter? 

I have heard it read. Je Tai entend>i \ (not entendue) lire. 

He made them run. II les a fait \ (not faits) courir. 

* Fait and eu have here a peculiar meaning; we can not say properly of rain, that it 
was made ( faite), nor of heats, that they are (eues) had. 

t The literal meaning of these phrases, according to their grammatical relations, is, — 
Have you heard sing it ? I have heard read it. He has made run them. We may ask i a 
the first sentence, heard what? Not the song, but the singing of it. In the second, I have 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FOURTH LESSON. 349 

3. Sometimes the participle is unvaried, because an infinitive understood is its object. 

I have given him all the education that Je lui ai donne toute l'education que 
I was able (to give understood). j'ai pu (donner understood). 

4. Sometimes also the proper object of the participle is the close of the sentence pre- 
ceded by que, when the learner is liable to regard it as the pronouu. 

The letters which I knew that you had Les lettres que j'ai su * que vous aviez 

received. recues. 
The friends whom I heard that you Les amis que j'ai entendu* dire que 

had. vous aviez. 

5. The past participle, annexed to the present participle of the auxiliary, forms the 

COMPOUND PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Having gone to the market. Etant all'e au marche. 

Having received the letter. Ayant recu la lettre. 

Having finished the work. Ayant fini l'ouvrage. 

6. The past participle also, annexed to the compound past of etre, forms the passive 

COMPOUND PAST PARTICIPLE. 

Having been deceived. Ayant ete trompe. 

Having been wounded. Ayant ete blesse. 

7. The learner has seen that the past and present participles used as adjectives are va- 
ried like them.t 

A burning wind. Burning winds. Un vent brulant. Des vents brulants. 

A woman well formed. Women well Une femme bien faite. Des femmes 

formed. bienfaites. 

To exist, live. To triumph. Exister. Triompher (de bef. n.). 

The desire. An observation. Le desir. Une observation. 

Deaf. Docile. Sourd. Docile. 

Laborious. Indocile. Laborieux. Indocile. 

To profit. What. Profiter. Quoi. 

8. What, following a preposition and iu exclamations, is quoi. 
What is the matter on hand? De quoi est-il question? 

What then ! dare you speak to me in Quoi done ! vous osez me parler de 

that manner ? cette maniere ? 

Glad. Very glad. Aise. Bien aise (de bef. inf. and n.). 

1. Ayant recite toutes ses lecons il sortit pour prendre l'air. 2. 
Ayant ete trompe une fois, je ne veux pas me laisser tromper une 

heard what? Not the song, but the reading of it. In the third, he made what? Net 
them, but their running. The infinitive, therefore, in such sentences, is the object, and the 
participle remains unchanged. 

* To ascertain the object in the former of these sentences, we ask, ITcnoxo tvhat ? Not 
the letters, but that you received them; and in the latter, I heard what? Not the friends, 
but that you had them. The close of the sentence therefore is the object in each, and the 
participle is unvaried. 

t Participles are distinguished from adjectives in French as in English. The present 
participle, when it does not denote action like a verb, but merely qualifies a noun, and the 
past participle, when it does not form part of a verb, become adjectives. 

22 3 5 12 6 12 21 6 5 12 15 7 1 12 21 1? 15 12 1 15 12 10 14 15 

bru-lan£, eg-zis-ter, tri-om-pher, de-sir, ob-ser-va-sion, sourd, do-cil^, la-bo-rieux, in-do- 

12 15 12 6 20 7 

cile, pro-fi-ter, qwoi, aize. 



350 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FOURTH LESSON. 



autre fois. 3. Le vieux soldat ayant ete blesse au cerveau, devint fou. 

4. Avez-vous entendu chanter ces dames ? 5. Je les ai entenduesl 
chanter. G. Ont-elles entendu chanter ces chansons * 7. Elles les 
out entendu chanter. 8. La sagesse triomphe de tous les dangers. 

9. Je suis bien aise de vous rencontrer. 10. Cet enfant est docile ; 
il a aussi un grand desir de plaire a son maitre. 11. Ce monsieur 
a de l'esprit ; il a fait une belle observation. 12. Qu'a cet homme? 
13. II est sourd d'une oreille. 14. Cet enfant est-il docile'? 15. 
II est docile et laborieux, mais son frere est tres-indocile. 16. Cet 
homme n'est pas sage; rien ne lui profite. 17. Le biens mal ac- 
quis ne profitent jamais. 

1. Did you see your sister write that letter? 2. I saw her 

• write it. 3. Did you see the letter written"? 4. I saw it written. 

5. Have you learned the lesson which we had to learn ? 6. I have 
learned it. 7. Have you rendered that man all the services which 
you ought {avez du)$ 8. I have rendered them to him. 9. I offered 
to lend you the books which I knew that you wished to borrow. 

10. Is the carpenter here? 11. No ; having finished his work, he 
has gone home. 12. Was your father living when General Wash- 
ington died? 13. Yes, sir ; he was born the same yeajtf 14. Did 
you meet my brother when you were in Paris ? 15. I met him, 
and was very glad to see him. 

16. Is that man deaf? 17. He is not deaf; he is blind. 18. 
Was your father living at the time (d Vepoque) of the American 
revolution? 19. Yes, sir; he was living then, and he had a great 
desire to see the cause of liberty (liberte) triumphs 20. Your neph- 
ew is docile and laborious ; you do not think, do you, that he is_ 
indocile and lazy? 21. No, sir; I believe that he is laborious. 
22. Of what do you speak ? 23. We speak of the wisdom of that 
man ; he has made some fine observations. 24. The thing the most 
precious after virtue is health. 25. What I desire the most is to 
hear the voice of my friends. 26. Is the old soldier dead ? 27. 
Yes, sir ; having been wounded in the breast, he died. 

OPTIONAL EXERCISES. 

1. Is it necessary for me to tell you again how they employ the 
present ? 2. No ; I do not believe that it is necessary to tell it to 
.jne again ; I have not forgotten what you told me about it. 3. 
Well, how do they employ it? 4. They employ it to speak of what 
is present or habitual, and even sometimes instead of the future. 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTH LESSON. 



351 



5. Very well ; but you mu st know that they sometimes employ it 
instead of the past or preterit. 6. Thus, instead of saying, Every 
thing yiglded^o the fortune of Ccesar, Alexandria (Alexa?idrie) 
opened to him her gates, Egypt (Egypte) became a Roman province 
(province romaine), one can say, Every thing yields, Alexandria 
opens, Egypt becomes, etc. 7. That is easy to understand. 8. In 
order to render the .^narration more animated (anime), they speak 
of the action as present. 9. Exactly ; you understand me perfectly. 

10. Are you willing that we taste your fruit? 11. Certainly ; 
I am willing that you taste my fruit and my wine. 12. What does 
the master desire us to do? 13. He desires you to carry this letter 
to your father. 14. Does he wish us also to give him these notes? 
15. He does not desire that you give them to him. 16. Does the 
master doubt our- comprehending what he says ? 17. He doubts 
your comprehending all that he says. 18. Do you think that I can 
see your father to-morrow? 19. You can not see him, unless you 
comefhere early in the morning. 



105.— CENT-CINQUISME leqon. 

ADVEEBS, NEGATIVES, ETC. 

1. Most English adverbs in ly, formed from adjectives, have corresponding adverbs in 
French in ment, formed also from adjectives. They are formed from the feminine, when 
the masculine does not end in e mute, by adding ment, except in adjectives whose mascu- 
line ends in ant or ent, which change nt into m before ment; as, 

Entire. Entirely. Entier. Entierement. 

Equal. Equally. !Egal. figalement. 

Ordinary. Ordinarily. Ordinaire. Ordinairement. 

Quiet. Quietly. Tranquille. Tranquillement. 

Honest. Honestly. Eonnete. Honnetement. 

Elegant. Elegantly. Elegant. M'egamment. 

Prudent. Prudently. Prudent. Prudemment. 

2. Pas expresses a negative less strongly than point. It is generally employed when 
we express something accidental ; thus, 

He does not read. He does not study. H ne lit pas. II n'etudie pas. 
He does not draw. II ne dessine pas. 

That is, he is not doing these acts at present. But point is employed to express what is 
habitual or absolute ; as, 

He never reads. He never studies. II ne lit point. II n'etudie point. 
He does not draw at all. II ne dessine point. 

3. We have seen that ne used with another negative term, as Hen, jamais, personne, 
etc., omits pas. Pas is omitted also in expressions to which a negative sense may be at- 
tributed. 



3 127 3 3 1" 5 5 3 5 5 1 3 22 1 3 

en-tiere-mentf, tran-kilZe, e-le-gan^, e-le-ga?n-men£, pru-dara-rnenZ. 



352 THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTH LESSON. 

He does not see at all. II ne voit gouttc* 

I have never seen him in my life. Je ne I'ai vu de ma vie.* 

I will not speak of it to any living soul. Je n'en parlerai k ame qui vive.* 

4. In interrogations and exclamations, where the subjunctive (according to Eule I., Les- 
son 81) is used after a relative with a vague antecedent, pas may be omitted. 

Is there a man who knows not that ? Y a-t-il un homme qui ne sache cela ? 
Have you a friend who is not mine? Avez-vous un ami qui ne soit des 

miens ? 

5. When pronouns of different persons form the subject of the verb, the first person is 
preferred to the second, and the second to the third ; the objective form is then used in the 
subject, and the plural pronoun of the person preferred is generally used also, and the verb 
agrees with it. 

He and I have agreed upon the price. Lui et moi nous sommes convenus du 

prix. 

You and he have agreed upon it. Vous et lui vous en etes convenus. 

6. Subject pronouns of the third person are used as in English. 
She and he will speak to that man. Elle et lui parleront a cet homme. 

A single pronoun, when emphatic, is often repeated, as those in No. 5 above. 
They play and I study. lis jouent et moi j'etudie. 

They lose, but thou gainest. lis perdent, mais toi tu gagnes. 

We study, but he plays. Nous etudions, mais lui il joue. 

We go there, but they stay here. Nous allons la, mais eux ils restent ici. 

To commit. Commettre (compound of mettre). 

A companion. While. Un camarade, ami. Tandis que. 

To hunt. To kill. Chaster. Titer. 

A wolf. The hunt, hunting. Un loup. La chasse. 

A fox. Fishing. Un renard. La peche. 

A squirrel. A society. Un ecureuil. Une societe. 

A mackerel. Literary. Un maquereau. Litter aire. 

To go a-hunting. Aller d la chasse. 

To go a-fshing. Aller d la peche. 

1. Yotre camaracle n'a-t-il pas commis des fautes? 2. II n'en 
a pas commis. 3. W avez-vous pas trompe votre ami'? 4. Je 
ne l'ai pas trompe. 5. Ces eleves s'amusent tandis que nous 
etudions. 6. Vous avez commis plusieurs fautes, tandis que votre 
camarade n'en a pas commis du tout. 7. Allez-vous souvent a la 
peche ? 8. Je vais souvent a la peche et a la chasse. 9. Allez- 
vous a la peche du maquereau ? 10. Je vais a la peche du maquereau 
et de la morue. 11. Ce chien chasse-t-il bien % 12. II ne chasse 



* Goutte may here be considered equivalent to point, cle ma vie to jamais, and dme 
qui vive to persoime 

15 5 111 1 12 3 12 1 6 22 6 23 1 4 1 5 

com-mettre, ca-ina-rade, a-mi, tan-dis, chas-ser, tu-er, loup, chas*<?, re-nard, pecne, 

5 22 9 15 12 5 6 1 '7 '2 5 7 

e-cu-reuil, so-ci-e-te, makc-reau, lit-te-raire. 



THE ONE HUNDKED AND FIFTH LESSON. 



353 



pas bien. 13. Avez-vous chasse aujourd'hui ? 14. J'ai chasse 
toute la j'ournee. 15. Qu'avez-vous tue? 16. J'ai tue un loup et 
un renard, et raoii ami a tue des ecureuils. 17. Que desirez- 
vous? 18. Je desire que vous m'introcluisiez dans votre societe 
litteraire. 19. Ce jeune homme ainie-t-il a aller a la chasse ? 
22. II aime a aller a la chasse et a la peche. 

1. Have you hunted to-day ? 2. I have hunted all day. 3. 
What have you killed'? 4. I have killed a wolf, a fox, and a few 
squirrels. 5. Do you go a-hunting often? 6. I do not go a-hunt- 
ing often; but I go a-fishiug almost every day. 7. Do you some- 
times catch mackerel ? 8. Yes ; we catch many mackerel, and 
many (much) codfish. 9. Are there many squirrels in your woods? 
10. There are many squirrels, and there are also a few foxes and 
wolves. 11. Do you introduce your friends into our literary society ? 
12. I introduce them there. 13. Is not that young girl stupid 
(stapide) ! 14. She has not much wit, but she is not so stupid as 
she appears. 

15. Will you see your neighbor before he goes a-hunting? 16. 
I shall see him before he goes there. 17. Do not those scholars 
love each other-?-- 18. They love each other well. 19. Why does 
that boy rub his eyes ? 20. He rubs thenrybecause they pain him. 
21. Charles the twelfth, king of, Sweden, never pardoned those who 
had once offended him ; but he also never forgot a service which 
one had rendered him. 22. Do you deny that your companion is 
wrong ? 23. I deny that he has the design to do evil. 24. Do 
you say that it jsjiecessary for us to write all this exercise? 25. I 
do not say that it is necessary for you to write it all to-day. 26. 
Did you not write the exercise of that little boy? 27. No; he 
wrote it himself. 28. Who corrected your exercises ? 29. We 
corrected them ourselves. 

OPTIONAL EXEECISES. 

1. Now have the goodness to teach (enseigner) me the use of the 
preterit definite. 2. They employ the preterit definite when they 
speak of an action which has taken place in a definite time past, 
and of which nothing more remains. 3. Then I can say, / ivrote 
yesterday ; My Brotlier set out on Monday for New York ; I saw 
Mr. R. last week ; I breakfasted at eight o'clock this morning. 4. 
No ; your last phrase is not correct (juste)^b\it all the others are. 
5. How then ? eight o'clock is past long ago, for it is now five 



354 



THE ONE HUNDRED AND FIFTH LESSON. 



o'clock. 6. That is true ; but eight o'clock in the morning makes" , \* 
part of to-day, which is a present time. 7. You can say that you 
breakfasted yesterday at eight o'clock. 8. I understand ; the time 
of which one speaks ought not to make a part of the day in which 
one speaks. 9. Exactly; if you speak of an action finished in 
present time, it is necessary to employ the preterit indefinite. 10. 
Then I ought to say, / breakfasted (fai dejeune) at eight o'clock to- 
day. 11. But can I not say, I breakfasted {fai dejeune) yester- 
day? 12. Yes; it is a grammatical license \tolerance grammati- 
cale) ; one can employ the preterit indefinite instead ^of the definite, 
but never the preterit definite instead of the indefinite. 

13. Will that scholar learn the French? 14. He will learn it, 
provided he be willing to study. 15. Do you believe that I can 
learn it in a little time? 16. No ; though you may be willing to 
study, you can not learn it in a little time. 17. Your cousin wishes 
you to pay the merchant for his books. 18. I will pay him for 
them, provided you give me the money. 

[The learner who has well studied the preceding lessons must have a very good knowl- 
edge, both theoretic and practical, of the French Grammar. Those whose time will permit 
them, however, to study also the following additional lessons, will find them very useful.] 



SECOND PART. 
SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



1. — PREMIERE LEQON. 

PEOPLE NAMES. 

1. Latin and Greek proper names which in English terminate in al or is, those of two 
syllables in us, Latin terminations in um, and masculines in a, are commonly the same in 
both languages ; as, 

Juvenal. Venus. Juvenal. Venus. 

Caligula. Herculanum. Caligula. Herculanum. 

2. Feminines in a, names in as and es, and those of more than two syllables in us, gen- 
erally change these terminations into e; as, 

Diana. Socrates. Orpheus. Diane. Socrate. Orphee. 

3. Terminations in under are changed into andre, and those in o into on; as, 
Alexander. Cicero. Alexandre. Ciceron. 

4. Feminine proper names of places ending in a, change a into e mute, and terminations 
in burg are changed into bourg ; as, 



Arabia. Hamburg. 
A nail. Charitable. 
A fool. Stupid. 
Foolish. 
Above all. 

The imperfect. The hall. 
To ride on horseback. To ride a horse. 
He learns to ride on horseback. 
He rides a white horse. 
A boarder. The duration. 
To keep a boarding-house. 
A boarding-school. A boarding-house. 
To keep a boarding-school for young 
ladies. 

Each other, one another. 
We love each other. 
They hate one another. 
To explain. A sicord. 
A repast, meal. An absence. 



Arabic Hambourg. 
TJn ongle. Charitable. 
TJn sot. Stupide. 
Sot. Soite. 

Surtout, par-dessus tout. 

LHmparfait. La salle. 

Monter a cheval. Monter un cheval. 

II apprend a monter h cheval. 

II monte un cheval blanc. 

Un pensionnaire. La duree. 

Tenir pension. 

Un pensionnat. Une pension. 
Diriger une pension de jeunes filles. 
Diriger un pensionnat de demoiselles. 
L'un l'autre, les uns les autres. 
Nous nous aimons Fun l'autre. 
Us se haissent les uns les autres. 
Expliquer. Une epee. 
Un repas. Une absence. 



oo 5 l fi 22 1 15 3 1 7 22 1 IS 121 15 1 16 6 1 5 <S 

Ju-vc-nal, Ye-nus, Ca-li-gu-la, i7er-cu-la-num, Di-ane, So-crate, Or-phee, A-lek-sandre, 

in 5 21 1 1 13 14 18 21 1 12 1 22 12 15 15 22 18 14 1 7 

Ci-ce-ron, A-ra-bie, Ham-bourp, ongle, cha-ri-tabZe, stu-pide, so*, sotte, sur-tou£, ma-par-faiZ, 

t 3 1215 7 3 1221 3 1215 1 5 12 6 5 6 4 2 1 3 

calls, pen-sio?i-naire, pen-sion, pen-sio?i-na<, eks-pli-ker, epee, re-pas, ab-sence. 



356 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



A blow with a sword. 
I go to the right, and he goes to the 
left. 

I have found a boarding-house pretty 

convenient. 
He takes boarders. 

He will take boarders only for the 
table. 

Your nails are too long. 

The life of man is of short duration. 



Un coup d'epec. 

Je vais a droite, et lui il va a gauche. 

J'ai trouve une pension assez com- 
mode. 

II prend des pensionnaires. 
II ne veut de pensionnaires que pour 
la table. 

Vous avez les ongles trop longs. 

La vie de Thorn me est de courte duree. 



1. Comment expliquez-vous cette difficulty ? 2. Je ne puis pas Tex- 
pliquer. 3. Voulez-vous bien me preter votre canif pom* me couperles 
ongles? 4. Tres-volontiers, monsieur. 5. Cette dame n'est-elle pas 
charitable ? 6. Elle est tres-cliaritable envers tout le monde. 7. Cet 
enfant a Pair stupide ? 8. Oui, il est si stupide qu'on ne peut rien faire 
de lui. 9. Cet homme n'est-il pas sot? 10. Non, il n'est pas si sot 
qu'il le parait. 11. Qu'aimez-vous a faire? 12. J'aime a aller a la 
chasse et a la peche, et sur tout j'aime a monter a cheval. 13. Savez- 
vous l'emploi de l'imparfait de l'indicatif ? 14. Oui, je chantais est l'im- 
parfait du verbe chanter. 15. Cette salle est grande, elle peut contenir 
{contain) beaucoup de monde. 16. Od prenez-vous vos repas? 17. Je 
les prends chez mon pere. 18. Que ferez-vous pendant mon absence ? 
19. Je lirai et j'etudierai beaucoup. 20. Ces enfants s'aiment Pun I'autre. 

I. — 1. Do not those little girls love each other? 2. They love 
each other much. 3. Do you cut your nails before washing your 
hands ? 4. No ; I wash my hands before cutting my nails. 5. 
Why does that boy rub his hands? 6. He rubs his hands because 
they pain him. 7. Do you hurt your eyes when you wash your 
face ? 8. I do not hurt thenwff ■ 9. That man is very charitable to 
the poor; what does he do? 10. He keeps a boarding-hou§eJU H« 
Has he many boarders ? 12. He has not many. 13. Where is 
your brother? 14. At the boarding-school of Mr. Bouchet. 15. 
And your sister ? 16. At the boarding-school of Mrs. Gr. 17. Is 
not that woman- a fool? 18. Yes; I did not believe her so foolish 
as she is. 19. iTas'that workman finished his work? 20. No; he 
has left it imperfect. 

21. Is the stranger in the hall ? 22. Yes ; he has waited some, 
time in the hall. 23. Does not your friend like to ride on horse- 
back ? 24. Yes; and he always rides a white horse. 25. Will 
this fashion have much duration ? 26. It will have little duration. 

27. That man is angry ; did you not give him a blow with a sword ? 

28. No ; the soldier gave him a blow with the flat of a sword (de 
plat d'epeeft 29. How does the master explain this? 30. He 
can not explain it. 31. Have you dined to-day? 32. Yes ; I made 
a good repast during your absence. 33. What will that scholar do 
during the master's absence ? 34. He will write again his exer- 
cise. 35. Will that workman do again his work ? 36. He will 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



357 



do it again. 37. When will you come here again % 38. I will see 
you again to-morrow. 

11. — 1. I do not despair of learning the French ; I begin to un- 
derstand the use of the different tenses of the verbs. 2. I do not 
deny that you stil l ma^e some mistakes, but you make much pro- 
gress. 3. I a m under many ob ligations to you, and I hope to 
profit by the observations which you have the goodness to make to 
me. 4. Let us see if you have not forgotten what you learned. 
5. Make some phrases which may contain the preterit definite and 
the preterit indefinite. 6. Let us see if I can make them without 
mistakes. 7. My father arrived yesterday, and he departed this 
morning. 8. Very well; one more still. 9. We have read the 
books which we bought Saturday. 10. That also is correct ; it is 
useless for you to make others. 11. I see that you have understood 
well all that I have said to you. 

12. Will you please to carry my letter to your brother? 13. I 
will carry it to him, provided you send it to my house before eight 
o'clock in the morning. 14. Why do you wish me to give you 
money ? 15. I wish you to give me money in order that I may be 
able to buy books. 16. Do you consent that we buy that horse? 
17. I consent that you buy him, provided you do not ask me for 
the money. 18. Where is my cane % I cannot find it. 19. Son, 
do you know where the gentleman's cane is ? 20. Yes, papa (papa) ; 
the gentleman left it at the door. 21. Mamma (maman), can I go 
and see my cousin this afternoon 1 22. Yes, daughter, you can go 
and see her, provided you return early. 23. Do those neighbors 
love one another 1 24. Yes, sir ; they love one another well. 



2. — SECONDE LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOEDS. 



An inhabitant. Misery, want. 
The difference. 

To draw. T ? use, also to help one's self. 

To my taste. By dint of 

Against one's will. 

The conditional. A supposition. 

A partridge. 

Betxoeen. Between the two banks. 



Un habitant. La misere, le besoin. 

La difference. 

Tirer. Se servir. 

Be or a mon gout. A force de. 

A contre cceur. 

Le conditionnel. Une supposition. 
Un perdrcau. Une perdrix. 
Entre. Entre les deux rives. 



1. Plus negative, like pas, personne, rien, and other negatives, is used without tie 
when not accompanied by a verb. 



1 12 3 12 7 12 S 3 12 6 7 12 21 1212 21 5 22 17 121221 7 17 

fta-bi-tan£, mi-zere, di/-fe-rence, ti-re?', ser-vir, con-di-tio?J-nel, sup-po-zi-tion, per-drean, 

7 12 3 12 

per-dricc, entre, rives. 



358 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



No more tears. No more sorrow. Plus de larmes. Plus de chagrin. 

From that time no more studies forme. Des lors plus d'etudes pour moi. 

Does he Avash his hands ? Sc lave-t-il les mains ? 

He washes them. II S e les lave. 

Do they wash their faces ? Se lavent-ils la figure ? 

They wash them. lis se la lavent. 

I have been here these two hours. Je suis ici depuis deux heures. 

Towards. Pious towards God. Envers. Pieux envers Dieu. 

To perceive. A promise. S'apercevoir. Une promesse. 

2. Apercevoir applies to objects; s'apercevoir to circumstances. 
I perceive a man descending the J'apercois un homme qui descend la 

mountain. montagne. 
I perceive that one takes my fruit. Je m'apercois qu'on prend mon fruit. 
To take cold. To give a cold. S'enrhumer. Enrhumer. 

I have taken cold. Je me suis enrhume. 

The least change of the weather gives Le moindre changement de temps 

me a cold. m'enrhume. "-— -> 

Do you take cold often ? Vous enrhumez-vous souvent? 

I take cold often. Je m'enrhume souvent. 

That man always has a cold. Cet homme est toujours enrhume. 

He introduces himself. II se presente. 

We have introduced ourselves. Nous nous sommes presented. 

That man suffers misery. Cet homme a de la misere. 

To put to the sivord. Passer au fil de F6pie.~ 

All the inhabitants were put to the Tous les habitants furent passes au fil 

sword. de Tepee. 

1. Tronvez-vous ce vin a votre gout? 2. Non, madame, je le trouve 
tres-mauvais. 3. Cet homme fait-il son ouvrage de bon cceur ? 4. Non, 
monsieur, il le fait a contre coeur. 5. Votre voisin tient-il une pension 
de demoiselles? 6. II prend quelques pensionnaires. 7. Pourquoi le 
capitaine tire-t-il son epee ? 8. II la tire parce qu'il est fache contre ce 
soldat. "9. Comment se nomme cette riviere? 10. Elle se nomme le 
Missouri. 11. Le maltre fait-il une difference entre vous etmoi? 12. 
Non, il ne fait aucune difference entre nous. 13. Vous servez-vous du 
credit de votre ami? 14. Kon, je ne m'en sers jamais. 15. Cet homme 
gagne-t-il de l'argent? 16. II en gagne un peu a force de travailler. 

17. Le president tient son pouvoir immediatement du peuple (people). 

18. Ce verbe est au conditionnel. 19. Vous avez fait une supposition 
honorable pour vous et pour moi. 20. Allez-vous quelquefois a la 
chasse? 21. Je vais souvent a la chasse aux perdreaux. 22. Qu'avez- 
vous tue aujourd'hui? 23. J'ai tue une perdrix et deux ecureuils. 

I. — 1. Are you ari inhabitant of this country ? 2.1 am an inhab- 
itant of this city. 3. Is not the world full of misery ? 4. There is 
much misery and much pleasure in the world. 5. What is that 
river (fleuve) named ? 6. The Mississippi ; and that river is named 

the Ohio — an Indian (indien) name which means fine river. 7. Do 

<2i 

1 37 12 10 15 5 3 22626 

larmes, en-vers, pi-euar, pro-mess^', en-rhu-uie/', pas-ser. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 359 

' > many Europeans ieuropeens) come to the United States'? 8. Yes; 
many persons born in Germany, in Ireland, and in other European 
countries, come here every year. 9. That man makes his horse run 
by dint of blows. 10. Does the servant do his work over again 
with good will? 11. No, he does it against his will. 12. Is that 
coffee to your taste? 13. It is perfectly to my taste. 14. Are there 
many partridges in these woods ? 15. There are many partridges 
and a few foxes. 16. Is not that verb in the conditional ? 17. It 
is in the past conditional. 18. Our neighbor is charitable towards 
the poor ; but I have long perceived that he is not my friend (de 
mes amis). 

II. — 1. I am much pleased that you give me lessons, for I un- 
derstand better the tenses which you liave explained to me. 2. If 
there is any thing more which you wish to know, ask it of me. 3. 
How does one use the imperfect ? I find it a little difficult. 4. 
The imperfect is a past tense, and one makes use of it when he 
speaks of an action which was repeated, or which was not entirely 
.-^""finished in a certain time determined {precise) or indefinite {inde- 
termine). 5. Then you can say, I was writing when you came. 6. 
Yes ; that phrase is very correeia^ 7. It is necessary to tell you also 
that one employs it when he wishes to represent {representer) that 
the action had a certain duration, although it may be entirely fin- 
ished in the time (au moment) in which one speaks. 8. Give me 
an example (exemple) which can make me comprehend the rule 
better. 9. If I say, / wrote to my brother yesterday, I do not rep- 
resent the action of writing as an act which had duration. 10. 
Well, I understand that. 11. On the contrary, if I say, I was 

writing yesterday while you w T ere dancing, I give to understand « > 

— {-/<m voir) that the action of writing had duration, and you under- 
stand that I passed some time in (a) writing^ 12. And now, to 
finish with {pour en finir suA the imperfect, here is an example of_ 
duration and of action repeated (repetee) : When Iivas in New York 
I went every night to the theater: 

13. Are those cakes eaten without butter ? 14. Yes, sir, they 
are often eaten without butter. 15. Do you apprehend that your 
friend may. he. sick? 16. I tremble lest he be dead. 17. Does that 
man conduct (dirige) a boarding-school? 18. Yes, sir ; he has done 
so a long time : our neighbor also wishes to take a few boarders at 
his house. 19. Where did you go yesterday evening after we had 
left (quit(e) you ? 20. We went to Mr. G.'s, where we found some 
company. 21. Whom did you see at Mr. G.'s? 22. We saw there 
several gentlemen of our acquaintance. 23. George and I passed 
the rest of the evening at the club [au club), where we played chess; 
(aux echecs) until half-past ten o'clock. / 



360 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



3.— TROISIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOKDS. 



Prudently. His conduct. 
A kind- 
It may be, can be. Inpossible. 
Adieu until to-morrow. 
Adieu until ice see each other again. 

A shawl. To do without. 

He does without wine. 

Counsel, advice, an opinion. 

A cashmere. A cashmere shawl. 

That man often changes his opinion. 

You have given good advice. 



Prudemment. Sa conduite. 

Un genre. Une sorte, espece. 

II se peut. Impossible. 

Adieu, jusqu'd demain. 

Adieu, jusqu 'au revoir ; or simply, An 
revoir. 

Un chdle. Se passer de. 

II se passe de vin. 

Un conseil, un avis, une opinion. 

Un cachemire. Un chale de cachemire. 

Cet homme change souvent d'avis. 

Yous avez donne un bon avis (or con- 
seil). 

Adresser. S'adresser. 



To address. To address one's self to, 
apply to. 

1. To address, meaning to speak to, is adresser la parole d, 



I addressed my letter to Mr. B. 

To whom do you apply ? 

To whom did the master address his 

speech ? 
An order. To honor. 
To pronounce. Slowl y. 
Pronounce slower. 
The captain is at our house. 
The general will come here to-morrow. 



*Tai adresse ma lettre a M. B. 
A qui vous adressez-vous ? 
A qui le maitre a-t-il adresse la pa- 
role ? 
Un ordre. Honorer. 
Prononcer. Lentement. 
i j ononcez plus lentement. 
Monsieur le capitaine est chez nous. 
Monsieur le general viendra ici demain. 



They have injured themselves. 



2. As the past participle in active verbs agrees with the direct object preceding, and 
never with the indirect, it follows that in all verbs which have no direct object, the partici- 
ple is never varied, whether it take the rellective pronoun or not. 

She spoke to herself. Elle s'est parle (not parlee). 

We spoke to ourselves. Nous nous sommes parle (not paries). 

( lis se sont nui (not nuis). 
(Elles se sont nui (not nuies). 

1. Ces dames se sont-elles conduites prudemment ? 2. Elles se sont 
conduites prudemment envers tout le monde. 3. Blamez-vous la con- 
duite de cet homme ? 4. Je ne la blame pas, il s'est conduit tres-pru- 
demment. 5. Pourquoi votre frere n'est-il pas ici? 6. Je ne sais pas ; il 
se peut qu'il vienne. 7. II est impossible que nous restions ici plus long- 
temps. 8. Adieu, jusqu'au revoir. 9. Le fils du voisin se conduit-il 
bien ? 10. Non, il mene un genre de vie que Pon ne saurait approuver. 



22 1 3 21 2212 3 16 5 5 14 15 ]2 1 12 9 4 20 2 21 

pru-dem-men£, con-duite, genre, sorte, es-pece, im-pos-sible, a-dieu, re-voir, cliule, con- 

7 1 12 15 12 12 21 1 lli 1 5 C 1 15 16 15 15 6 15 21 6 3 

6eil, a-vis, o-pi-nion, cache-mire, a-dres-se/', pa-role, ordre, 7<o-no-rer, pro-non-ce;-, lente- 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



361 



11. Quelles sortes de livres trouve-t-on dans cette bibliotheqiie ? 12. 
On y trouve toutes sortes de livres. 13. Quelle espece de drap ce mar- 
chand. a-t-il ? 14. II a du drap de plusieurs especes. 15. Suivez-vous 
l'opinion de votre pere ? 16. Non, monsieur, son opinion n'est pas la 
mienne. 17. Vos papiers sont-ils toujours enordre? 18. Je les mets 
en ordre tous les matins. 19. N'admirez-vous pas le general ? Si, j'ho- 
nore son merite et sa vertu. 

I. — 1. Do not virtuous men act prudently? 2. They act pru- 
dently toward every body. 3. Are you satisfied with (salisfait^ 
de) my conduct ? 4. Yes ; your conduct has always been good 
(sage). 5. Is your friend here*? 6. No; he promised me to be 
here this morning, but it may be that he is not coming. 7. It is 
impossible for him to co me here / this evening. 8. It is necessary 
for me to go now to mylmcIe^sT 9. Adieu until we see each other 
again. 10. Are you acquainted with that man ? 11. We are ac- 
quainted with him, and we honor his virtue. 12. Do you wait the 
orders of the captain? 13. No ; I wait the orders of the general. 
14. Why does that man address himself to me? 15. He addresses 
himself to you to obtain a place as the (aa) best protector (protec- 
teur) that he can find. 16. It may be that your friend is sick. 
No, he is very well. 

17. Do the learned sometimes change their opinion ? Yes ; all 
men who are learned and wise sometimes change their opinion. 
18. Has that lady bought a cashmere shawl? 19. Yes; she has 
just bought a cashmere shawl and a new gold watch. 20. Do you 
do without tea? 21. No ; I do without wine and without coffee; 
but I do not do without tea. 22. Does that pupil pronounce French 
well ? 23. No, miss ; he does not pronounce it very well. 24. Wait 
a little ; it may be that your brother is coming. 25. No, it is im- 
possible for me to wait longer. 26. Adieu, until we see each other 
again. 

II. — 1. Is not that gentleman to whom you were speaking when 
I came, deaf? 2. He is a little hard _of hearin g, it must {il font) 
be confessed. 3. I see that you speaFTo hTm^very loud (hautyfcbxit 
I doubt whether he understands more than half of what you say to 
him. 4. It is a pity that it is necessary to speak so loud to him ; 
stil^ whatever one may do, he does not always understand what one 
says to him. 5. I do not like to speak to people who can not hear_, 
me well. 6. I know some deaf persons who are very amiable. 7. 

I do not deny it ; but however amiable they may be, what pleasure 
is there_in__speaking to them ? 8. It is sometimes necessary to — 
repeat the same thing to them two or three times. 9. It is true ; I 
confess that that gives a little trouble. 10. It is not the trouble . 
which that gives me, but the pain which that causes ( fait) me when 
I see that they understand badly. 11. Nevertheless, it is better to 
be deaf than blind. 12. That is very certain ; to be blind is the 
greatest of misfortunes. 
16 



362 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



13. Let us enter ; it is cold. 14. Yes ; let us go and warm our- 
selves. 15. There is a good fire in my room. 16. Will you that 
we go up there, or do you prefer that we go into the hall ? 17. We 
will warm ourselves in your room ; there is company in the hall. 
18. I have (sitis) cut my ringer with my penknife, and I fear that 
the cold may hurt it (mSy fasse mal)^- 19. It is necessary to wrap 
it (Venvelopper) with a piece of linen ; do you wish for one? 20. 
If you please ; but do not give yourself trouble to go down for that. 
21. It is no trouble ; there is some linen in that basket. 22. Well, 
will you give me a little bit? 23. There is a good one ; do you 
wish me to bind up (bande^yom finger? 24. Yes, for I can not do 
it myself. 25. Well, there it is dressed (pause) % does it hurt you 
much? 26. Not at all; thank you; where is the water? I wish 
to wash my hands. 27. Here is some, and there is a towel. 



4. — QUATRIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WOEDS. 



A melon. Newly. 
Some grapes. To serve. 
A bargain. To seize. 
A pink. Natural. 
That case. The law. 
The law, right. The natural law. 
Divine. The divine law. 
Reflective. Madness, craziness. 
Around. Around the church. 
In vain. Incessantly. 
An arm-chair. He speaks incessantly. 
His best. He does his best. 
I will do my best. 
To look as if one would or wished. 
He looks as if he wished to study. 
It looks as if it would be cold. 
It looks as if it would be foggy. 
The weather looks as if it would be 
fine. 



Un melon. Nouvellement. 
Des raisins (mas.). Servir. 
Un march'e. Saisir. 
Un ceillet. Naturel. 
Ce cas. La loi {rule). 
Le droit. La loi naturelle. 
Divin. La loi divine. 
Reflechi. La folie. 
Autour. Autour de Teglise. 
En vain. Sans cesse. 
JJnfauteuil. II parle sans cesse. 
De son micux. II fait de son mieux. 
Je ferai de mon mieux. 
Avoir fair de voidoir. 
II a l'air de vouloir etudier. 
II a l'air de vouloir faire froid. 
II a Fair de vouloir faire du brouillard. 
Le temps a l'air de vouloir se mettre 
au beau. 



1. The verb etre, followed by a and an infinitive, may be used to express bow one is oc- 
cupied, or to what he is giving attention. 

He is writing, or at his writing. 11 est d ecrire. 

He will be reading. II sera a lire. 

She is always complaining. Elle est toujours d se plaindre. 

21 18 5 3 7 14 7 12 1 6 7 12 9 5 1 22 5 2 20 4 

melon, nou-velZe-mentf, rai-sin.9, ser-vir, mar-che, sai-zir, oeil-let, na-tu-rel, cas, drotf, dc- 

14 4 12 5 5 12 15 13 17 18 14 5 17 9 14 

vin, de-vine, re-fle-chi, fo-lie, au-tour, vain, cesse, fau-teuil, plaindre. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



363 



2. In expressions of time, en means in or within the period ; dans, at the, end of it. 
Can one learn French in six months ? Peut-on apprendre le francais en six 

inuis ? 

I shall commence it in a month. Je le commencerai dans un mois. 

He will do that in three days. II fera cela en trois jours. 

He will come again in (at the end of) II reviendra dans trois jours, 
three days. 

This water-melon is good. Ce melon (Teau est bon. 

That vine bears fine grapes. Cette vigne porte de beaux raisins. 

1. B onj our, monsieur ; comment vous portez-vous ce matin? 2. Je 
me porte assez bien ; et vous ? 3. Je me porte tres-bien, merci. 4. Mes- 
demoiselles vos soeurs se portent-elles bien? 5. Elles se portent par- 
faitement bien. 6. Comment se portent messieurs vos freres? 7. lis se 
portent bien, mais mon pere est indispose. 8. J'en suis bien fache ; 
s'est41 enrhume? 9. Oui, il s'est enrhume a l'eglise dimanche soir; 
mais, j'espere qu'il se portera mieux bientot". 10. Vous vous etes en- 
rhume, n'est-ce pas? 11. Oui, je me suis enrhume hier soir au theatre. 
12. Oe domestique vous sert-il depuis longtemps ? 13. II me sert de- 
puis trois ans. 14. Cette paysanne a-t-elle des fruits et des fleurs ? 15. 
Elle a des melons, des raisins, des roses et de jolis ceillets. 16. Qui est 
ce monsieur? 17. C'est un francais nouvellement arrive dans ce pays. 
18. Hier cet enfant etait tres-fache contre son frere, il saisit une pierre 
et la lui lanca {threw\^ 19. Avez-vous appris le verbes reflechis? 20. 
Oui, je les sais assez bien. 21. Cet ouvrier travaille en vain; il ne peut 
faire cet ouvrage. 22. Ce jeune homme est tres-imprudent, je le plains 
et je blame la folie de sa conduite. 23. Je viens de rencontrer M. B., 
mais je n'ai pas eu le temps de lui adresser la parole. 

I. — 1. Good morning-, sir ; how do you do this morning % 2. I 
am very well, I thank you ; and you — are you well % 3. I am not 
perfectly well ; I have taken a cold. 4. Where did you take cold ? 
5. I took cold last evening at the church ; it was very cold. 6. 
How long have those Irishmen served you ? 7. They have served 
me these five years. 8. The doctor promised me to be here at 
noon, but it may be that he is not coming ; in that case it will be 
necessary for me to go to his house this evening. 9. Does not the 
divine law oblige us to honor father and mother % 10. Yes ; the 
divine and the natural law oblige us to honor them. 11. I am 
glad to see you ; have you been well ! 12. I have been well. 13. 
Come in ; sit down in this arm-chair. 14. I can not stay; adieu 
until I see you again. 

15. Have not the kings of Europe many soldiers around them? 
16. They have many around them. 17. Those men blame each 
other ; are they friends f " 18. No, they are enemies. 19. Did 
your brother go out on Sunday morning when he had shaved | 20. 
Yes ; as soon as he had shaved he went out. 21. At the recitation 
{recitation) yesterday, did not the master speak to you first (d'a- 
bord) ? 22. No ; he spoke to you first, and then (et puis) to me, 
and my brother. 23. Has that merchant made a good bargain ? 



364 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



24. Yes, sir ; he always makes good bargains. 25. Does that car- 
penter work much ? 26. Yes, he always does his besU 27. Shall 
you learn that lesson well? 28. I shall do my "Best. 29. My 
cousin studies in vain ; he can not learn his lesson. 30. It looks 
as if it would be fine weather, 31. Does that arm-chair belong to/ 
you ? 32. No, sir ; it belongs to the master. 

II. — 1. I begin to see what you wish to make me understand. 
2. Permit me to ask you. a question. Ask it. 3. What difference 
do you make between, We ivere supping when you came, and, We 
supped when you came ? 4. The difference is great ; by the first 
phrase I denote (fais voir) that we were at supper (d soaper) when 
the person to whom I speak came ; by the second, I express that 
we supped when r that is to say at the moment,__h£ arrived. 5. I 
understand ; when an action takes place (arnVe)*«while another is 
doing (se fait),}it is necessary to put the longer action in the im- 
perfect. 6. Yes, that is what I desire you to understand well. 7. 
I believe that I understand it. 8. They make use also of the im- 
perfect sometimes, instead of the conditional, after the conjunction 
{conjunction) if: If I had money, If that scholar studied bet- 
ter, etc. 9. But you will understand that better when we shall 
have arrived at the conditional. 10. They make use of the imper- 
fect in the same manner in English. 

11. Let us make a hunting party [une par tie de chasse) to-mor- 
row. 12. I am willing ; where shall we go ? 13. Let us go over 
the bay ; one always finds there something (de quoi) to hunt. 14. 
There are many partridges there ; are there not ? 15. Yes, and I 
know a place where there are many squirrels. 16. That is excel- 
lent; how shall w^go? 17. Let us take the boat which is .go.ingA 
this afternoon ; we shall be there at seven o'clock, and to-morrow ' 
morning we can begin our hunt early. 18. Very well ; at what 
o'clock does that boat leave (part) % 19. At five o'clock. I am 
going to do some little business, and I shall be ready to set out. 



5.— CINQUIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WORDS. 
1. Jl est, impersonal, followed by an adjective, takes de before the infinitive. 



It is good to know that 

It is just to praise the good. 

It is generous to pardon our enemies. 

To go to bed, lie down. To rise. 
Lately. A short time since. 
To advance. To retard. 



II est bon de savoir cela. 

II est juste de louer les bons. 

II est genereux de pardonner & nos 

ennemis. 
Se coucker. Se lever. 
Depids peu. Depuis peu de temps. 
Avancer. Retarder. 



cou-cber, a-van-cer, re-tar-de/* 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



365 



My watch goes too fast. 
Your watch goes too slow. 
The future. To -penetrate. 
He penetrates into the future. 
At present. In future. 
The delirium. The extremity. 
To bleed. Suddenly. 
Famous. & promenade. 
A subject. To complain. 
To rain. It begins to rain. 
Sure. To happen to be. 
Your servant. 

I happened to be at his house. 
You complain without cause. 
They bleed the sick man. 
The disease attacked him suddenly. 
He takes a walk every afternoon. 

We go to bed early. 
He rises late. 

I went to bed last night at ten. 
They rose this morning at six. 



Ma montre avance. 
Votre montre retarde. 
Vavenir. Penetrer. 
II penetre dans l'avenir. 
A present. A Vavenir. 
Le delire. Uextremite. 
Saigner. Tout-d-coup. 
Farneux. Une promenade. 
Un sujet. Se plaindre. 
Pleuvoir. II commence a pleuvoir. 
Sur. Se trouver. 
Votre serviteur. Votre servante. 
Je me suis trouve chez lui. 
Vous vous plaignez sans sujet. 
On saigne le malade. 
La maladie l'a pris tout-a-coup. 
II fait une promenade toutes les apres- 
midi. 

Nous nous couchons de bonne heure. 
II se leve tard. 

Je me suis couche hier soir a dix heures. 
lis se sont leves ce matin a, six heures. 



1. Alter, as well as se porter, is sometimes used in reference to health. 

( Comment va votre sante ? 



How is your health ? 

Admirably well, and (how are) you ? 
How are they at your house? 
Every body is well, thank God. 
And (how are they) at your house ? 
The sick man is in a delirium. 
He is in his last moments. 



\ Comment cela va-t-\\ (familiar) ? 
A merveille, et vous-merne? 
Comment va-t-on a la maison ? 
Tout le monde va bien, Dieu merci. 
Et chez vous ? 

Le malade est dans le delire. 
II est a Textremite. 



1. Get ecolier etudie en vain ; il n'apprendra jamais le francais. 2. 
Asseyez-vous sur ce fauteuil. 3. Avez-vons pris votre medecine ? 4. 
Oui, monsieur, je l'ai prise ; c'est un bien mauvais medicament, et je ne 
me porte pas mieux. 5. A quelle heure vous couehez-vous ? 6. Je me 
couche a dix heures, et je me leve a six heures et demie. 7. Me faut-il 
prendre ce medicament ? 8. II faut que vous le preniez. 9. Cet ecolier 
etudie-t-il bien? 10. Oui, monsieur, il fait de son mieux. 11. Qui est 
cet homme? 12. C'est le fameux medecin de notre ville. 13. £tes- 
vous sur que le capitaine soit arrive ? 14. J'en suis sur. 15. J'ai l'hon- 
neur de vous saluer (to boio), madame. 1G. Bonjour, monsieur, veuil- 
lez vous asseoir. 17. Fait-il beau temps? 18. Non, monsieur, il a Pair 
de vouloir pleuvoir. 19. Votre montre n'avance-t-elle pas? 20. Ma 
montre va bien, mais la votre retarde. 21. Faites-vous une promenade 



1 12 5 5 6 5 11 5 5 J2 5 7 6 18 1 18 

ave-nir, pe-ne-tre^, de-lire, ex-tre-mi-te, sai-gner, tou-ta-coup, 

5 M 9 20 12 7 12 11 7 7 

jet, plaindre, pleu-voir, sur, ser-vi-teur, mer-veilte. 



-meucc, prome-nade, su- 



366 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



le matin ? 22. Je fais une promenade tous les matins avant de dejeu- 
ner. 23. Dieu ne lit-il pas dans le coeur des homines ? 24. II penetre 
les pensees les plus secretes. 

I. — 1. Your servant ; are you well this morning ? 2. I am not 
very well ; I have the toothache. 3. I am very sorry for it ; sit 
down in this chair. 4. How do your mother and sisters do? 5. 
They are perfectly well. 6. Will you not sit in, this arm-chair ? 

7. No, sir, I will sit here. 8. Will not the little boy sit here in 
this chair? 9. No, sir, he will sit there on the bench. 10. Do you 
understand Italian when one speaks it slowly? 11. I understand 
it when one speaks it very slowly. 12. Do you always go to bed 
early? 13. I always go to bed early, and I always rise early. 14. 

I do always go to bed early, and I always rise early. 15. How is — 
the weather? 16. It looks as if it would be foggy. 17. Your 
friend looks as if he wished to study, and his cousin looks as if he 
wished to play. 

18. Is not your cousin a little lazy? 19. He has been negli- 
gent, but at present he is industrious, and in future he will study 
well. 20. Napoleon was the most famous general of his age (siecle)^ 
did you see him when you were in France? 21. I saw him several 
times. 22. Do the wise penetrate the future? 23. No ; God alone 
can penetrate the future. 24. The famous physician Chirac was 
in his last moments. 25. After some days of delirium, his senses 
(sa raison) returned to him in part (« moitie).-- 26. Suddenly he 
feels his pulse (se Idle la pouls). 27. " I have been called too late," 
said he ; " have they bled him ? " 28. " No," replies one to him. 
29. "Well," said he, " he is a dead man." And he said true. 

II. — 1. I am looking for John ; but I can not find him any 
where. 2. What do you wish of him ? I have just seen him ; he 
was going home. 3. I lent him my gun last week, and he has not 
returned it to me. 4. If you do not find your gun, I have one 
which is at your service. 5. I am infinitely obliged to you ; if I 
can not have mine, I shall be delighted to have yours. 6. If you 
find John, askjiim if he wishes to go (venir) with us ; it may be 
that he will come. 7. I doubtj)f _it, for it is necessary that he be 
in the city to-morrow, and he will be very much occupied all day. 

8. It is a pity, for he loves hunting very much. 9. He will be very 
sorry QoJJx)j3e able to go with us. 10. Ask him, however (loii^ 
jours) ; it is not impossible that his business can wait. 11. No, 
that is hardly possible ; but I will ask him. 12. You have good 
dogs; have you not? 13. I have only one which I can take to- 
morrow. 14. I will see if I can have John's ; is he not good ? 15. 
Yes, I know him ; he is a white dog with red spots. 16. It is the 
(cela) same.' 17. He is excellent for partridges ; bring him if you 
can ; I have already hunted with him ; there is none better. 18. 
If I see John, I shall have the dog. 19. Adieu; I shall be at the 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



307 



boat at a "quarter before five. 20. Well, I shall be there at the 
same time as you. Adieu untiHhen (Id). 

21. I received last week a letter from my cousin, who departed 
for France two years ago. 22. What did he write you interesting? 
23. He gives me a history of his journey, which interested (inte- 
resse) me much. 24. Did you reply to his letter ? 25. Yes ; I 
wrote to him forthwith (tout de suite) ; but I know not whether my 
letter will find him still in France, for he is soon to leave (quitter) 
Paris to go and travel in Italy. 



G.— SIXIfcME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WOED3. 

1. Aimer miewx, takes que before a second infinitive to denote preference of taste, and 
que de to denote preference of will. 



J'aime mieux lire que penser. 
J'aime mieux pardonner que de punir. 
Elle aime mieux dancer que chanter. 
Nous aimons mieux louer que de bla,- 
mer. 

Conseiller. Lejuge. 



I like better to read than to think. 
I like better to pardon than to punish. 
She likes better to dance than to sing. 
We like better to praise than to blame. 

To advise, counsel. The judge. 

2. Conseiller takes d before its indirect object, and de before an infinitive. 

I advise the sick man to take that Je conseille au malade de prendre ce 

medicine. , medicament. 

I advise the sick to patience. Je conseille la patience aux malades. 

In like manner. Constantly. Pareillement. Constamment. 

A theft. A resuming. Un vol. Une reprise. 

At several times, by piecemeal. A plusieurs reprises. 

3. Reprise denotes the resuming of what had been discontinued ; fois is synonymous 
with the English word time joined to a number. 

That wall was made at several times. Ce mur a ete fait h plusieurs reprises. 
This letter has been written by piece- Gette lettre a ete ecrite a plusieurs re- 



meal. 

I have read it several times. 

A fash (of lightning). By swimming. 

Common. To accuse. 

They accuse him falsely of theft. 
They accuse him of having made that 
satire. 

To refresh. 

To pass over. Falsely. 



prises. 
Je 1'ai lue plusieurs fois. 
Un eclair. A la nagc. 
Commun. Accuser {de bef. inf. and 

noun). 

On l'accuse faussement de vol. 
On l'accuse d'avoir fait cette satire. 



Eafraichir. 
Traverser. 



Faire rafrahhir. 
Faussement. 



21 5 6 23 1 7 3 21 1 3 4 13 5 7 1 15 241 

con-seil-le;', j uge, pa-reille-men£, con-stam-mentf, re-prize, e-clair, nage, com-mun, ac- 

22 6 1 8 12 1 76 17 3 

cu-zer, ra-frai-chir, tra-ver-ser, fausse-mentf. 



308 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



A calf, veal. To contain. 

To cry. To exclaim, cry out. 
A representative. An image. 
The senate. To compose. 
The people. The republic. 
The congress. A member of congress. 
The house of representatives. 
Tell me, cousin, where is your bro- 
ther? 

I pass over that river by swimming. 
That room contains a thousand per- 
sons. 

The Roman republic. 



Un veau, du veau. Contenir (comp. of 

tenir). 
Crier. & eerier. 
Un representant. Une image. 
Le senat. Composer. 
Lepeuple. La republique. 
Le congres. Un membre du congres. 
La chambre des representants. 
Mon cousin, dites-moi, ou est votre 

frere ? 

Je traverse cette riviere a la nage. 
Cette chambre contient mille person- 
nes. 

La republique romaine. 



1. Que conseillez-vous a votre ami de faire? 2. Je lui conseille 
d 1 etudier Pallemand. 3. Comment le docteur passe-t-il son temps ? 4. 
II le passe a etudier. 5. Cette femme se plaint-elle beauconp ? 6. Elle 
se plaint toujours sans sujet. 7. Cet ecolier est toujours a etudier, et 
son frere est toujours a travailler. 8. Bonjour, madame, j'ai Phonneur 
de vous saluer ; ou. est mademoiselle Julie ? 9. Elle est a etudier (prac- 
ticing) son piano. 10. II tonne (thunders) ; n'a-t-il pas fait des eclairs? 
11. II a fait de grands eclairs toute la nuit. 12. Les meilleures choses 
ne sont-elles pas aussi les plus communes? 13. Si, monsieur, Pair, la 
lumiere^ et Peau sont les meilleures choses, et sont aussi les plus com- 
munes. 14. Pourquoi mene-t-on cet homine devantle juge? 15. Parce 
qu'on Paccuse de vol. 16. N'avoue-t-il pas le fait? 17. Non, il le nie 
constamment. 18. Pourquoi ce garcon crie-t-il de douleur ? 19. Parce 
qu'on lui arrache une dent. 20. Le congres des Etats-Unis se compose 
(Pun senat et d'une chambre des representants. 21. Le senat et le peu- 
ple composaient la republique romaine. 22. Ces ouvriers sont fatigues ; il 
faut les faire rafraichir. 23. Le sommeil est Pimage de la mort (death). 

I. — 1. Good morning, madam ; how is your health ? 2. Admi- 
rably well, sir ; and you, how are you? 3. Tolerably well, I am in- 
finitely obliged to you. 4. How are they at your house? 5. Every 
body is well, thank God. 6. And how is your sister? 7. She was 
well the last time that I saw her. 8. I am delighted at it ; where 
is she? 9. She is in the country. 10. It is necessary to refresh 
those workmen; are they not tired? 11. No, sir; they have re- 
freshed themselves. 12. Of what do they accuse that man? 13. 
They accuse him of theft, and they will take him before the judge. 
14. How will you pass over that river? 15. I shall pass over it by 
swimming. 1G. How many persons will that hall contain? 17. It 
will contain more than three thousand. 18. Why does that man 
cry out? 19. He cries out from pain, because the surgeon is cut- 
ting off his left arm. 

17 126 4 5 3 3 12 1 5 1 21 17 6 9 5 22 12 21 7 

veau, cri-er, re-prc-zan-tani, i-mage, se-nai, com-po-zer, peuple, re-pu-blike, con-gres, 
ru-maine. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



369 



20. Do you like veal better than mutton? 21. No, sir ; I like 
mutton qujte_as_vvell as veal. 22. Ah (ah) ! mother, exclaimed the 
child, do not go there ; there is danger. 23. Are not the United 
States a great republic ? 24. They form (forment) the greatest re- 
public in the world. 25. Is not your uncle a member of congress ? 
26. Yes, sir ; he is a member of the house^ofTepresentatives. 27. 
I have seen the daughter of our neighbor ; she is the living portrait 
(portrait) of her mother. 28. My friend desires some good fruit, 
and I desire some in like manner. 29. Our neighbor is^constantly 
complaining without cause. 80. Do the people of this country 
choose their representatives every year? 31. They choose them 
every two years. 32. My watch is too fast and yours is too slow, 
although the watchmaker has cleaned them Jboth several times. 
33. They have accused that man falsely ; what do you advise him 
to do ? 34. I advise him to go before the judge. 

II. — 1. By dint of studying one comes at last (finit par) to 
learn. 2. Nothing prevents your knowing the French as well as I. 
3. Languages are not easily learned, and the French above all is 
difficult. 4. When one has the desire to learn, he always succeeds 
in it ; I do not apprehend your finding difficulties which you can 
not surmount (surmonter). 

5. Were not the Gauls conquered by the Eomans (romains)&. 

6. Yes ; the Romans rendered themselves masters of France, of 
Spain, and of Great Britain (Grande-Bretagne). 7. I saw Charles 
yesterday, and he spoke to me of you. 8. What did he say to you 
of me ? 9. He told me that day before yesterday you promised to 
come and see him, and that he waited for you yesterday all the 
evening. 10. Yesterday evening I conducted my sister to the 
theater ; but I will go and see Charles to-morrow, ifljcan. 

11. I like your writing much. 12. I do not t^m£~{trouve) it 
beautiful. 13. What I admire injt^the most is that it is very easy- 
to read. 14. Yes, I do not believe that it is difficult to read. 15. 
Do you remember the writing of my cousin % 16. Yes, I remember 
it well ; he wrote better than any of the scholarsjn our school. 17. 
Charles was a good fellow when anger did not take-possession of 
him ; under that sadjnfluence (influence) he hardly acted prudent- 
ly. 18. When I saw that he was not inj-good humor, I abstained 
from speaking to him. 19. When his anger was passed, he always 
repented of his bad conduct, and he promised to act better toward 
every body. 20. Yes, he had that good (cela de bon), but he did 
not often remember his promises. 21. Anger is a kind of insanity, 
which makes us (often) do things of which we repent afterwards. 
16* 



370 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



7.— septiEme leqon. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WORDS. 

1. Nouns governing the infinitive in English govern it also in French, generally with 
de, if used in a definite or in a general sense, and with & if used in a partitive sense. To 
this rule belong a large class of nouns denoting time, power, will, affections, and qualities, 
which the learner can readily distinguish ; also, peur, honte, raison, and tort. 



He has the courage to do that. 

lie has courage in doing that. 

He is ashamed to do that. 

She has the politeness to do that. 

She has politeness in doing that. 

She is afraid to speak. 
They have the generosity to give us 
that. 

They have generosity in giving us 
that. 

You are right to refuse that offer. 

To charm, to delight. 

The semblance. A watch marking 

seconds. 
The means. By sea. 
To pretend, to make pretense. 
To have the means, to afford. 
Fire-wood. Lightly, slightly. 
The dentist. Distinctly. 
Indisposed. To invite. 
The dish, food. To carry away. 
To wind up a watch. 
To soil. To spread, extend. 
To destroy. A battle. 
A pigeon. An island. 
To be plectsed. 
To be displeased. 

I am pleased with that man for what 

he has done 
I am pleased with him for it. 
To knock. A crown. 



II a le courage de faire cela {definite 

sense). 

II a du courage a faire cela (part, sense). 
II a honte de faire cela {gen. sense). 
Elle a la politesse de faire cela (def. 

sense). 

Elle a de la politesse a faire cela (part. 

sense). 

Elle a peur de parler yyeneral sense). 
lis ont la generosite de nous donner 
cela. 

lis ont de la generosite a nous donner 
cela. 

Vous avez raison de refuser cette offre. 

Charmer (de bef. inf. and noun). 

Le semblant. L T ne montre a secondes. 

Le moyen. Par mer. 
Faire semblant (de bef. inf.). 
Avoir les moyens (de bef. inf.). 
Du bois a bruler. Legerement. 
Le dentiste. Distinctement. 
Indispose. Inviter (a bef. inf. and n.). 
Le mets. Emporter. 
Remonter (or monter) une montre. 
Salir. Etendre. 
Detruire. Une bataille. 
Un pigeon. Une tie. 
Savoirgre or bon gr'e, ) a bef. persons, 
Savoir mauvais gr'e, ) de bef. things. 
Je sais gre a cet homme de ce qu'il a 
fait. 

Je lui en sais bon gre. 
Frapper. Une couronne. 



35 12 5 5 5 17 12 6 1 6 3 3 20123 5 7 3 3 12 VI 

Do-li-tesse ee-ne-ro-si-te, char-mer, sem-blan£, mo-veu.«, le-gere-meni. den-tiste, dis- 

14 1 4 3 14 12 17 6 14 12 6 5 3 16 G 4 21 G 21 1 12 5 3 

tinc-te-men/ in-dis-po-se, in-vi-ter, mets, em-por-ter, re-mon-ter, montre, sa-hr, e-tendre, 



de-truire, ba-taille, pi-geon, He, frap-per, cou-ron?ze. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



371 



A crown of flowers. 
He pretends to sleep. 



Une couronne de fleurs. 

II fait semblant de dormir. 

On croit qu'il n'a pas les moyens d'ache- 



It is believed that he cannot afford to 



buy that house. 
Knock at the door. 



ter cette maison. 
Frappez a, la porte. 
Je remonte ma moutre tous les matins. 
Je l'ai vu depuis peu. 



I wind up my watch every morning. 



I saw him recently. 



1. Cette dame charme tons ceux qui la regardent. 2. Cet enfant ne 
prononce pas assez distinct ement. 3. Dites an domestique d'emporter les 
inets. 4. Cet enfant salit ses habits. 5. La blancliissense etend le linge 
pour le secher. 6. J'ai achete des pigeons ce matin au marche. 7. Re- 
montez-vous votre montre tous les jours ? 8. Je la remonte tous les 
matins. 9. Avez-vous eu la patience de lire ce journal ? 10. Oui, mon- 
sieur, je Pai lu a plusieurs reprises. 11. Sortirez-vous par la pluie sans 
parapluie? 12. Monsieur a la politesse de m'offrir son parapluie. 13. 
Votre montre va-t-elle bien? 14. Non, monsieur, elle retarde. 15. 
Irez-vous a New York par mer ? 16. J'irai par un bateau a vapeiir. 17. 
Avez-vons vu le general aujourd'hui? 18. Oui, monsieur, il est legere- 
ment indispose ; mais il nous invite a diner pom* Jrois .Jieures. 19. Le 
temps detruit les plus solides edifices. 20. Napoleon a-t-il gagne beau- 
coup de batailles ? 21. II a gagne la bataille d'Austerlitz, de Marengo et 
beaucoup d'autres grand.es batailles. 22. Y a-t-il une ile dans ce lac ? 
23. Oui, il y en a plusieurs. 

I. — 1. Are you displeased with me for what I have done ? 2. 
No, sir ; I am pleased with yon for it. 3. Is the servant carrying 
off the dishes ? 4. He is carrying them off. 5. Does the French- 
man pronounce Spanish distinctly % 6. He pronounces it distinctly 
and well. 7. Why do they punish, that child ? 8. They punish 
him because he soils his clothes. 9. Where does the maid-servant 
spread the linen ? 10. She spreads it on the grass (Pkerbe). 11. 
Does not age destroy beauty? 12. Yes; time destroys all things. 
13. Is there news from Europe? 14. Yes ; there has been a great 
battle. 15. What did you buy at the market? 16. I bought a 
pair of pigeons. 17. Is it not cold in the islands of the north ? 
18. It is cold in the islands of the north, and it is warm in the 
islands of the south. 19. I admire that lady ; her beauty charms 
all hearts. 

20. Miss, I have the honor to salute yon ; how do you do this 
evening? 21. Admirably well ; and how are you? 22. Perfectly 
well, I am infinitely obliged to you. 23. How is your uncle ? 24. 
I believe that he is well ; he is in the city. 25. And how is your 
aunt? 26. She is slightly indisposed. 27. I am sorry for it, and 
I hope it will be nothing. 28. Will yon buy those beautiful horses ? 
29. I can not afford to buy them. 30. That dentist has had the 
goodness to clothe many poor ; can he afford to do it ? 31. He can 
.^afl&ttdati; he is very rich. 32. What o'clock is it? 33. It is two 
by (a) this clock, and it is a quarter after two by my watch. 34. 
Who knocks at the door ? 35. No one knocks at it. 36. That 



372 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOxXS. 



boy is in good health, but he pretends to be sick. 37. That young 
lady has a beautiful crown of roses on her head. 38. I have invited 
company to dine at four. 

II. — 1. I find nothing difficult in the future. 2. No ; it is em- 
ployed as in English. 3. Yes, but in English they make use of 
two verbs to express a future action, although in French they make 
use of only a single word. 4. That is to say (that) the verbs in 
English have no future, and they are obliged to make use of two 
verbs, of which the one shows the action, and the other serves only 
to denote (/aire voir) that it is future. 5. I believe that I kno\y^ 
sufficiently well the futures of French verbs ; there are not many 
which do not follow the rule. 6. There are many more reflective 
verbs in French than in English. 7. Yes ; in the first place, they 
make use of reflective verbs in all the cases where they ought to 
make use of them in English ; but they make use of them in French 
also, when one speaks of a^par£ of his body ; because an action 
which one does to his body, is an action which one does to himself. 
8. There is reason in tha-fe-, 9. It is not necessary to speaFof them 
—further to-day ; you will easily learn to make use of them in (au) 
need. 

10. After the battle of Waterloo, which the French lost in 1815, 
they exiled (exila) Buonaparte to St. Helena (Helene), where he 
died in 1821. 11. I was born the year of his death. 12. He had 
married (epouse) in his first nuptials (en premieres noces) Josephine 
Beauharnais, -£nm vvhonx, unhappily, he afterwards separated (se 
separa par la suite). 



8.— HUITIfcME LEgON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WORDS. 

1. Penser, followed by an infinitive, sometimes means to be on the point of, or near, and 
sometimes to intend, in which cases the infinitive takes no preposition before it. 

I was near dying. J'ai pense mourir. 

He was near being killed. II a pense etre tue. 

I intend to go to France. II pense aller en France. 

2. Penser, to think of, meaning not to forget, we have seen, is penser a; to have an 
opinion or sentiment of, is penser de. 

Have you thought of (not forgotten) Avez-vous pense au livre ? 
the book ? 

What do you think of this book ? Que pensez-vous de ce livre ? 

To spill, diffuse. To spread. Repandre. Se repandre. 

A space. To feign. Un espace. Feindre (de bef. inf.). 

3. Feindre is conjugated as craindre, Lesson 84. 
The hero. To overthrow. Le heros. Renverser. 

The British isles. Les ties hritanniques. 



5 3 5 1 14 5 17 3 7 6 11 1 ,12 

re-pandre, es-pace, feindre, heros, ren-ver-se/% bri-tan-nikes. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



373 



The warlike Gauls. The arms (mili- 
tary). 

A century, age. Fire-arms. 

An object. At the same time. 

A historian. As conqueror. 

A model. The model of historians. 

The burden. To support, maintain. 

A treasure. To conceal. 

A corner, wedge. The corner of a 

gardeD. 
To put back, to postpone. 
He shed tears. 

Light spreads much faster than sound. 

He feigns joy. 

They feign to be angry 

He conceals his name. 

Put back the sword into the scabbard. 

However long my task may be, I will 

try to accomplish it. 
That column supports all the building. 
He has overturned the table. 
"We can not do every thing at once. 
I have found a hidden treasure. 



Les Gaulois bclliqueux. Les armes. 

Un siecle. Des armes d feu. 

Un objet. A lafois. 

Un historien. En conquerant. 

Un modele. Le modele des historiens. 

Le fardeau. Soutenir (comp. of tenir). 

Un tresor. Cacher. 

Le coin. Le coin d'un jardin. 

Remettre (comp. of mettre). 

II a repandu des larmes. 

La lumiere se repand beaucoup plus 

vite que le son. 
II feint de la joie. 
lis feignent d'etre en colere. 
II cache son nom. 
Remettez Tepee dans le fourrcau. 
Si longue que ma tache soit, je tdche- 

rai d'en venir a bout. 
Cette colonne soutient tout le bdtiment. 
II a renverse la table. 
On ne peut pas tout faire a la fois. 
J'ai trouve un tresor cache. 



1. Ce garcon a-t-il apporte l'eau? 2. Non, il l'a repandue sur la 
terre. 3. La lumiere ne se repand-elle pas partout ? 4. Elle se repand 
partout. 5. Cette homme feint-il d'etre malade? 6. II feint d'etre 
dans le delire (d'avoir le or du) delire. 7. Ce garcon ouvre-t-il la porte 
quand on frappe ? 8. II l'ouvre toujours. 9. Cet homme ivre n'a-t-il 
pas reDverse la chaise? 10. II a renverse la chaise et la table. 11. 
Cesar a-t-il gagne beaucoup de batailles ? 12. Oui, c'etait le heros de son 
siecle. 13. Que fait cette jeune fille? 14. Elle fait une couronne de 
fleurs. 15. Cesar ne traversa-t-il pas toute l'ltalie? 16. II traversa 
toute l'ltalie et pcnetra jusqu'en Allemagne ; c'etait un grand conque- 
rant. 17. Le domestique ne peut pas porter jnisi^pjesant (heavy) far- 
deau. 18. Remettez-vous le tresor dans le COTr^mrTdu marchand? 
19. Je l'y remets. 20. Oil le petit garcon s'est-il cache ? 21. II s'est cache 
dans le coin de la chambre. 22. II veut que nous remettions sa lecon a_ 
lundi. 23. II y a cette difference entre l'objet lumineux (luminous), et 
l'objet eclaire (illuminated), que le premier contient en soi la lumiere 
et que l'autre la recoit. • -- — ^ 

I. — 1. If you ordered that boy to work, what would he do ? 2. 
He would feign to be sick. 3. If the general gained many battles, 
would he not become a hero % 4. He would become a hero and a 
great conqueror. 5. Has France produced many historians % 6. 

17 00 5 12 10 1 12 5 15 5 12 15 1214 21 5 3 15 5 1 17 

gau-lois, bel-li-keucc, arm^s, siecle, ob-je^, 7tis-to-rien, con-ke-rantf, mo-dek, far-deau, 

18 J2 5 16 i 6 )8 14 4 5 2 12 3 15 15 

Boute-nir, tre-zor, ca-cher, co-in, re-mettre, ba-ti-mentf, co-lon?ie. 



374 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



It has produced many good historians. 7. Does not the general's 
brother acquire some military glory (gloire militaire) ? 8. Yes ; 
his name is_spread through"^ all Europe. 9. If that child had 
milk in his cup, would he not overturn it? 10. No, sir; he would 
drink it. 11. Are not the French a very warlike people? 12. 
They are very warlike ; they have gained many battlesJj£_Ltijs cen- 
tury. 13. Is there sufficient space in the garden for all these trees? 
14. There is sufficient. 15. I have been four times to Europe in 
the space of six months. 

16. Good morning, sir ; how do you do? 17. Sufficiently well, 
I thank you; and you? 18. Admirably well, I am obliged to you. 
19. Did you sleep well last night? 20. No, sir ; my teeth pained 
me so much, and the dogs made so much noise, that I could not 
sleep. 21. Iam sorry for it; how does your mother do? 22. I 
believe that she is well ; here she comes. 23. Madam, I am your 
very humble servant. 24. Good morning, sir ; how do you do 
since you have been in Boston ? 25. Very well, I thank you. 26. 
Was not Caesar a great conqueror ? 27. He was a hero, a con- 
queror, and the model of the historians of his age ; he was also a 
great orator. 

II. — 1. Good morning, Mr. A. ; how do you do to-day? 2. Not 
very (trop) well ; I took cold last evening, and I have coughed 
almost all night. 3. I am very sorry for it ; I hope that it will be 
nothing ; but it is necessary that you give attention when you go 
out. 4.J£t will be nothing, but it (cela) prevents me from sleeping. 
5. If you are willing to follow my advice, you will drink a cup of " 
hot tea to-night, when -you go to bed. 6. I will do it ; I have not 
had such a cold this long time. 7. To whom can I apply to find 
a good horse? 8. Do you wish to buy ,y.Qu one? 9. Yes ; I have 
need of one, and I shall be very glad if I^caj} find one. 10. Have 
you applied to Mr. C. ? he often has some to sell. 11. No, I hach- 
not thought of him ; it will be necessary for me to go and see him 
this very day (aujourd'bui meme). 12. Do you know where he 
dwells ? 13. Next to the wine-store on Conti-street ; is it not ? 14. 
Yes, it4§Jher^ ; you will find him there at all hours (a toute heure), 
for his business obliges him to be there from morning until evening. 

15. We have just seen Mr. S. 16. How does he do? 17. He 
has not been very well since he returned from Charleston ; he has 
even been obliged to keep iisLbed during two or three days. 18. 
I knew it only to-day ; my cousin has just told it to me ; but Mr. 
S. is better ; is he not ? 19. A little better, but he suffers still (tou- 
jours). 20. I am very sorry for it ; Mr. S. is a very good (digne) 
man. 21. Yes, it is very true ; there is no better man than he in 
all the country ; I must go and see him this evening. 22. Go there— *~~ 
early if you wish to see him, for he goes to bed early. 23. I will 
go between five and six o'clock. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



375 



9.— NEUVlEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WORDS. 

1. Attributes of designation are generally preceded by d in French. 
The man with the white hat. L'homme au chapeau blanc. 
The lady with the small hands. La dame aux petites mains. 
The boy with the wide forehead. Le petit garcon au front large. 
The house with the large windows. La maison aux grandes fenetres. 

2. Long, referring to time, we have seen, is longtemps in French. 



Will he be long absent ? 
He can not live long. 
He is very long in returning. 
Longer. As long as. 
A discourse. His eloquence. 
The honey. Eloquent. 
The rice. To lie. 
The compliment. To reply. 
To press, hurry. To walk, go (for di- 
version). 

She plays on the piano. 

The best in the world. 
To wear out. Used, room. 
To use, to make use of. 
The elbow. At first. 
The end. 



Sera-t-il longtemps absent ? 
II ne saurait vivre longtemps. 
II est bien longtemps a, revenir. 
Plus longtemps. Aussi longtemps que. 
Un discours. Son eloquence (fem.). 
Le miel. Eloquent. 
Le riz. Mentir (varied as sortir). 
Le compliment. R'epliquer. 
Presser. Se promener. 

(Elle joue piano. 
I Elle touche du piano. 

Le mieux du monde. 

User. Use. 

User de,faire usage de, se servir de. 
Le coude. D^abord. 
Le bout. La fin. 



END = Fin corresponds to commencement ; tout to another bout. 



The end of the day. 

God has neither beginning nor end. 

The two ends of a stick. 

He presented to him the end of the gun. 

Heavy. 

The skill. The address. 
He wears out many shoes. 
He supports himself on his elbow. 
He supports his opinion with excellent 
reasons. 

That man has skill ; he has gained a 

large sum of money. 
Ananias and Sapphira lied to the Holy 

Spirit. 



La fin du jour. 

Dieu n'a ni commencement ni fin. 
Les deux bouts d'un baton. 
II lui presenta le bout du fusil. 

Lourd. 

Le savoir-faire. Uadresse.' 
II use beaucoup de souliers. 
II s'appuie sur le coude. 
II appuie son opinion sur d'excellentes 
raisons. 

Cet homme a du savoir-faire ; il a gagne 
une grosse somme d'argent. 

Ananias et Saphira mentirent au Saint- 
Esprit. 



1. Votre ami sera-t-il absent plus longtemps que vous? 2. Non, je 
serai absent aussi longtemps que lui. 3. Avez-vous plus de miel que de 

12 18 6 15 3 125 5 15 3 12 3 12 21 12 3 5 12 6 5 6 

dis-cour.s, 6-lo-kenee, miel, e-lo-ken^, ris, men-tir, com-pli-men£, re-pli-ker, pres-ser, 

15 6 12 1 17 22 G 22 6 19 1 16 IS 19 1 5 

prome-uer, pi-a-no, u-zer, u-ze, coud<?, d'a-bortf, bou£, lourd, a-dresse. 



376 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



riz ? ^ 4. Non, j'ai jout autant cl e riz que de miel. 5. Oil irez-vous ? 6. 
J'irai d'abord au bout de cette~rue. 7. Cet orateur n'est pas tres-eloquent 
n'est-ce pas? 8. Si, monsieur, il vient de faire un discours plein d'elo- 
quence. 9. Le docteur a-t-il repondu au compliment ? 10. II y a bien 
repondu. 11. Si cet homme vous disait son liistoire, le croiriez vous ? 12. 
Je ne le croirais pas ; il ne fait que mentir. 13. Votre pere est-il presse ? 
14. II est bien presse. 15. Vous promenez-vous tons les jours? 16. Je 
me promene tous les matins et tous les soirs. 17. Connaissez-vous cet 
homme au chapeau blanc? 18. Oui, monsieur, c'est mon cousin, et le 
jeune homme a la cravate bleue est son frere. 19. Avez-vous donne 
votre adresse a cet liomme ? 20. Je la lui ai donnee. 21. Quoi que vous 
ayez ; soignez-le bien. 22. J'acheterai cette maison quoi qu'elle puisse 
couter. 

I. — 1. I believed that the servant would carry that heavy bur- 
den ; you believed that he would not carry it. 2. The thief be- 
lieved that he should conceal the treasure. 3. He had said that he 
would put it back in its place. 4. You believed that we should 
support those heavy burdens. 5. Do you wish for honey with your 
rice % 6. No, sir, I prefer butter. 7. Does that child like honey % 
8. Yes, sir ; he eats quite as much honey as rice. 9. Where did 
the thief conceal himself? 10. He concealed himself at the end of 
the garden. 11. Does your father dwell at the corner of this 
street ? 12. No, sir ; he dwells at the end of it, and the trees con- 
ceal the view of his house. 13. Did Miss S. play on the piano 
last evening? 14. Yes, madam ; at first she sang with her cousin, 
and after that (ensuite) she played on the piano. 

15. Have you been well since I saw you? 16. No, sir; I have 
been very sick ; I came near dying. 17. Is not the representative 
from our state an eloquent man ? 18. Yes ; he has just made a 
speech full of eloquence. 19. Does that man always tell the truth ? 
20. No, sir ; he does nothing but lie. 21. Does he always lie when 
he speaks? 22. He lies always. 23. Have you made your com- <^-^ 
pliments to that man on the success (succes) of his works ? 24. I 
have made them to him. 25. Are you hurried ? 26. I am much 
hurried. 27. Why do you support yourself on your elbow ? 28. 
Because I have the headache. 29. That man has skill; he has 
gained a large sum of money. 30. Give me your address ; I will 
write you at the end of this month. 

II. — 1. Good morning, sir ; how do you do this morning ? 2. 
Admirably well ; and how are you ? 3. Tolerably (assez) well, I 
thank you ; you are very good. 4. I am glad to see you in good 
health. 5. How are they at home ? 6. Every body is well ; and 
at your house? 7. Perfectly well, thank God. 8. And how is 
your brother? 9. He was well last evening. 10. Are you sure 
that your exercise is correct? 11. I am sure of it. 12. I hap- 
pened to be (je me suis trouve) at the house of a friend yesterday, 
where I saw the general. 13. Do those children wear out many 
shoes ? 14. They wear out many shoes and many hats. 15. Is 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



377 



that handkerchief new ! 16. No, sir, it is worn ; and these stock- 
ings are worn also. 

17. What do you advise that sick man to do ? 18. I advise 
him to send for the physician. 19. Do you advise him to take this 
medicine ? 20. I do not advise him to take it. 21. I happened to 
be at market this morning, and I saw your brother ; what was he 
doing there ? 22. He had gp^therejgx_.pears, plums, and grapes. 
23. Does that man gain his living by working *? 24. No ; he lives 
by his skill. 25. A lady asked a Frenchman, who did not pro- 
nounce the English well, why a young Italian, newly arrived in 
New York, put out (sortait) incessantly his tongue when he spoke. 
<; I suppose," said the Frenchman, " he is trying, as I have done 
but in vain, to seize the English accent" {accent). 



10.— DIXIEME leqon. 



MISCELLANEOUS EXILES AND WOED3. 

1. Avoir with d before the infinitive denotes obligation or purpose. 

What have you to do ? Qu'avez-vous a faire ? 

I have a visit to make. J'ai une visite a faire. 

He has letters to write. II a des lettres a ecrire. 

We have to thank you. Nous avons a vous remercier. 

A sign. Un signe. Une enseigne. 

To make a sign, to beckon. Faire signe {de bef. inf.). 

To fail, to lack. Manquer. 

2. Manquer, followed by d, denotes failure in duty ; followed by de, it denotes defi- 
ciency in something else. 



He fails to fulfill his duty. 

He will not fail to find them. 

He has failed in his promise. 

He does not lack appetite. 

He lacks money. 

They have not failed to come. 

A post, position. The post-office. 

Carry these letters to the post-office. 

He guards his post. 

I beckoned him to come. 

The barber has put a sign at his door. 

A vice. Xa cage. 

An engagement. The authority. 



II manque a remplir son devoir. 

II manquera pas de les trouver. 'T>-<* 

II a manque a sa promesse. 

II ne manque pas <f appetit. 

II manque cPargent. 

lis n'ont pas manque de venir. 

Un poste. La poste. 

Portez ces lettres a la poste. 

II garde son poste. 

Je lui ai fait signe de venir. 

Le barbier a mis une enseigne a sa 

porte. 
Un vice. La cage. 
Un engagement. Uautorite. 



12 3 7 3 6 15 12 1 3 1 3 16 16 12 6 

signe, en-seigne, rnan-ker, poste, vice, cage, en-gage-men^, au-to-ri-te. 



378 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



Powerful. That imprudence. 

Absent. A visit. 

The farmer. To meet, face. 

He meets all dangers. 

His house faces mine. 

He fails in his engagements. 

Honorable. An honorable place. 



Puissant. Cette imprudence. 
Absent. Une visite. 
~Lc fermier. Faire face (d bef. n.). 
II fait face a tous les dangers. 
Sa maison fait face a la mienne. 
II manque a scs engagements. 
Honorable. Une place honorable. 



1. Connaissez-vous cet homme an chapeau blanc? 2. Oui, mon- 
sieur, e'est mon voisin. 3. Ces rois sont-ils puissants ? 4. lis sont fort 
puissants. 5. Ont-ils conclu la paix ? 6. lis ont conclu la paix et une 
alliance. 7. Si votre pere avait vu l'homme qui voulait acheter sa mai- 
son, aurait-il conclu le marche? 8. II Petit bientot conclu. 9. Si 
vous aviez ete boiteux, vous seriez-vous appuye sur un baton ? 10. Non, 
monsieur, je me serais appuye sur le bras de mon ami. 11. Si tu avais 
garde ton argent, n'en aurais-tu pas eu beaucoup ? 12. J'aurais eu une 
grosse somme. 13. Avez-vous conclu votre affaire ? 14. Je ne Pai pas 
conclue. 15. Yous etes-vous fait mal? 16. Je me suis fait mal au 
coude gauche. 17. Ce poste est-il bien choisi? 18. Non, monsieur, e'est 
un poste tres-dangereux. 19. Votre ami est dans un poste honorable. 
20. Le lion est dans sa cage de fer. 21. Le fermier est alle a la ville; 
il sera longtemps absent. 22. Le ministre n'est pas puissant ; il a perdu 
son autorite. 

I. — 1. If you had written your letters last night, would you have 
given them to me? 2. No, sir; I should have carried them to the 
post-office. 3. If I had beckoned to you sooner, would you have 
come ? 4. We should have come immediately. 5. Is that horse 
good ? 6. He is very good ; he has no vice. 7. Has not that 
man committed an imprudence? 8. He has committed a great 
imprudence. 9. If thou hadst had those beautiful flowers which 
we saw at the market, to whom wouldst thou have given them ? 
10. I should have sent them as a (en) present to my neighbor. 11. 
Will the orator conclude his discourse this morning ? 12. He will 
conclude it early. 13. Even if that man should have much money, 
he would not buy this house. 

14. Do those children wear out many coats ? 15. Yes, sir; and 
they wear out many pantaloons also. 16. Are your books new or 
worn? 17. They are very much ; worn. 18. That man supports 
his elbow on the table because he has a severe (grand) headache. 
19. Has the doctor skill? 20. No, sir; the doctor is learned, but 
he lacks skill ; his brother, on the contrary, has much skill. 21. 
Drunkenness (ivrognerie) is a foul (vilain) vice. 22. Where is the 
farmer? 23. He is absent in the country. 24. He is an honest 
and honorable man ; he fails in none of his engagements. 25. 
What have you to do? 26. I have visits to make. 

II. — 1. You have many grapes this year. 2. Yes ; when they-- 
are good to gather you must come and eat some. 3. I will come, 



22 12 3 14 22 3 1 3 12 12 7 12 5 1 15 15 1 

puis-san^, im-pru-dence, ab-sen£, vi-zite, fer-mier, faw-, /io-no-rabk. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



379 



do not (rtayez pas) doubt ; there is no fruit that I like so much as 
the grape. 4. It is very healthy. 5. All fruits are so if they are 
not eaten green. 6. The pear is one of the best fruits, but we do 
not often see good ones here. 7. We shall see some here in a few 
years. 8. They begin to bring some to market now. 9. It looks 
as if it would rain. 10. Yes, I believe that it will rain soon. 11. 
That will do no_harm ; we have muchjneed of a good shower (ondee). 

12. Have you learned any news of the war in Europe? 13. 
There has come some this morning. 14. What do they say new ? 
15. They say that there has been a great battle ; but they do not 
yet know any thing of it certaiffi^" 16. I hope that this war will 
soon be finished ; it has already done harm (tort) enough to busi- 
ness. 17. They were talking of peace in France when the steamer 
(vapeur) left. 18. I am delighted at it ; I desire much to see peace 
made. 19. When the next steamer arrives we shall have certain 
news. 20. I desire much that we may receive some good. 21. 
There must (doit) be much suffering (misere) in Europe now. 22. 
- -Wars do not always end as easily as they are begun,- 23. A gen- 
tleman sent his servant one day to the city, with a present of nine 
ducks in a cage, on which was the following address : "To the 
honorable judge Tour, with rx ducks." 24. The servant, who was 
more cunning (ruse) than honest, stole away three ducks, and 
drew (traqa) the letter S before the Eoman numeral (chiffre romain) 
ix. The address was then thus : " To the honorable judge Tour, 
with six ducks." 



11.— ONZIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOEDS. 



The game. The game of cards. 

By heart. The heat. 

An apple-tree. Properly. 

An insect. As it sltoidd be. 

& pear-tree. And then. 

He reads and then he sleeps. 

He spoke to us, and then he went out. 

He learns by heart. 

He reads properly. 

He is a well-bred man. 

She is a lady-like woman. 

This bonnet looks quite fashionable. 

He likes the game of cards. 
The hay. To discourse. 



Lejeu. Lejeu de cartes. 

Par coeur. La chaleur. 

Un pommier. Convenablement. 

Un insecte. Comme il faut. 

Un poirier. Puis. 

II lit, puis il dort. 

II nous parla, puis il sortit. 

II apprend par coeur. 

II lit convenablement. 

C'est un homme comme il faut. 

C'est une femme comme il faut. 

Ce chapeau a fair tout a fait comme 

il faut. 
II aime le jeu de cartes. 
Le foin. Discourir. 



9 11 1 11 15 125 14 6 22 12 5 2212 13 14 12 18 12 

jeu, coeur, clia-leur, pora-mier, in-sect<3, poi-rier, puis, foin, dis-cou-nr. 



380 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 

The merit, lo grant. Le nierite. Accorder. 

A plum-tree. A pocket. Un prunier. Une poche. 

1. Se connaitre, followed by d or en, means to be a judge of, to be skilled in. 

To be skilled in, to be a judge of. Se connaitre en (or a). Etre connais- 

seur en. 

He is skilled in precious stones. II se connait en pierrerics. 

Are you a judge of pictures? Vous connaissez-vous en tableaux ? 

Are you a judge of that ? Vous connaissez-vous & cela ? 

I am a judge of them. Je m'y connais. 

You are a good judge of horses. Vous etes bon connaisseur en chevaux. 
The professor is discoursing on the Le professeur discourt sur Yimmorta- 

immortality of the soul. lite de Vtlme. 

A pocket-handkerchief. Un mouchoir de poche. 

The front orchard. Le verger de devant. 

The back orchard. Le verger de derriere. 

The mail has arrived. La malle est arrivee. 

To reappear. He has reappeared. Reparaitre. II a reparu. 

The enemy will not reappear. Les ennemis ne reparaitront pas. 

I am incommoded by the heat. Je suis incommode par la chaleur. 

I grant you that favor. Je vous accorde cette faveur. 

1. Y a-t-il des pommiers dans ce verger? 2. II y a des pommiers 
des poiriers et des pruniers. 3. La chaleur fait-elle du mal aux insectes ? 
4. Elle ne leur fait pas de mal. 5. Accordez-vous que le president ait du 
merite ? 6. J'accorde cela, mais je n'admets pas comme verite tout ce 
qu'il a dit. 7. De quoi cet homme parle-t-il done si souvent ? 8. II dis- 
cours toujours de ses affaires. 9. Qu'est-ce que le fermier a a faire ? ' 10. 

II a du foin a faire. 11. L'irlandais est-il parti ? 12. II partit la semaine 
derniere, mais il a reparu au moment ou je le croyais bien loin. 13. Y 
a-t-il des. pruniers dans le verger ? 14. II y a des pruniers dans le ver- 
ger de devant, et des poiriers dans le verger de derriere. 15. Dans no- 
tre verger il y a une cinquantaine de pommiers, une quinzaine de poi- 
riers et une douzaine de pruniers. 16. Je viens d'acheter des mouchoirs 
de poche et une balle a jouer. 17. J'irai a la campagne a l'epoque (time) 
des chaleurs. 

I. — 1. Are not the United States powerful? 2. Yes ; and Kus- 
sia, France, and England are powerful also. 3. Is that young man 
without vices ? 4. No, sir ; he conceals his vices, but he has many 
of them. 5. Do you learn all your lessons by heart? 6. No; I 
learn some of them by heart, but not all. 7. Does the farmer make 
hay and cider (cidre) ? 8. He makes much hay and much cider. 9. 
Is he a man of merit? 10. He has more merit than good fortune. - 
11. Is the master a judge of music? He is a judge of it. 12. 
Your brother went up to his room twice before jireakfast ; has he 
not come down again? 13. He came down again, but he has re- 
ascended. 14. The Frenchman looks like a well-bred man ; are 



5 12 1 16 6 22 125 15 7 11 12 7 13 12 16 1 12 6 2 

me-rite, ac-cor-der, pru-nier, co?i-nais-seur, pierre-ries, im-mor-ta-li-te, &uxe. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



381 



you acquainted with him? 15. Yes, sir; he is a man of merit, 
and his wife is a well-bred lady. 

16. As soon as it had struck two, the mail arrived. 17. Do you 
like to play.ball better than to play cards'? 18. I like sometimes 
to play cards as much as to play ball. 19. When will you go to 
the city? 20. We shall depart this evening after the heat. 21. 
Does that child behavo" properly? 22. Yes, sir; he is a very good 
child. 23. Do insects love cold? 24. No, sir; insects love heat, 
but cold destroys them. 25. What will you do this evening ? 26. 
I shall learn my lesson, and then I shall go to bed. 27. On what 
does the master discourse ? 28. He discourses on the studies of his 
pupils. 29. Where is your penknife ? 30. I have it here in my 
pocket. 

II. — 1. It is cold ; bring some wood; I wish to make some fire. 
2. Have you dined well? 3. Yes, sir; all the dishes were excel- 
lent. 4. Will you take a walk with the children this afternoon ? 
5. No ; they have soiled their clothes ; they will stay at home. 6. 
What is the servant doing? 7. He is spreading the cloth on the 
turf (gazon). 8. What has the countryman to sell ? 9. He has 
some pigeons and some partridges. 10. Are you displeased with 
that man for (de) what he has said? 11. No, I am pleased with 
him for it. 12. "Cousin," said a lady to a gentleman, who hap- 
pened to be with her in a numerous (nombreuse) company, " I am 
not mistaken, am I, in saying that I am only forty years old ?" 
13. " No, certainly, my dear cousin," said the gentleman, " and I 
can not doubt it myself, for I have heard you say that for more 
than ten years." 

14. An honest man, falsely accused of theft, was brought be- 
fore a judge. 15. As soon as the judge saw the accused, he said in 
the ear of one of his neighbors, " I see all the traits (traits) of a 
thief upon that face." 16. "Do you think, then," exclaimed the 
prisoner (prisomiier), who had heard him, " that my face is a 
mirror ? " 

17. A Kussian countryman who had never seen asses ((Panes), 
met with several in France, and exclaimed, " Heavens (mon Dieit), 
what large hares there are (qu'il y a de grandes lievres) in this 
country ! " 



12. — DOUZIiSME LEgON. 

MISCELLANEOUS KULES AND WOEDS. 

L After laisser and /aire, reflective with an infinitive, as after passive verbs, de refers 
to the sentiments of the heart, par to physical or mental action. 

He makes himself loved by every body. II se fait aimer de tout le monde. 
He gets beaten by every body. II se fait battre par tout le monde. 



382 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



A hackney-coach, coach. Un fiacre. 

To breathe. To go to bed. Respirer. Aller se coucher. 

To shine. Briller. Luire. 

To lock. To snow. Fermer a clef. Keigcr. 

To hail. To thunder. Greler. Tonncr. 

It snows. It hails. It thunders. H neige. 11 grele. 11 tonne. 

2. Se promener means to go for mere exercise or amusement, whether it be by riding 
or walking, and the particular mode is expressed by the adjuncts d pied, d cheval, etc. 

I take a walk. Je me promene a pied. 

He takes a ride. II se promene a, cheval. 

They take a drive. lis se promenent en voiture. 

We have taken a sail. Nous nous sommespromenes en bateau. 

The brook flows slowly in the meadow. Le ruisseau se promene lentement dans 

la prairie. 

My looks wandered over the rich Mes regards se promenaient sur les 

plains. riches campagnes. 

The complexion. The manufacture. Le teint. La manufacture. 

Really. My own manufacture. Reellement. Ma propre manufacture. 

Evidently. Painting. Evidemment. La peinture. 

The departure. Imprudent. Le depart. Imprudent. 

A stay. The smoke. Un sejour. La fumee. 

It is so hot that one can hardly breathe. Ii-fait si chaud, qu'on ne saurait pres- 

que respirer. 

He is going to bed. II va se coucher. 

The sun shines. Le soleil luit. 

This diamond glitters more than that. Ce diamant brille plus que celui-la. 

He is a connoisseur in painting. II est connaisseur en peinture. 

1. Cet homme est-il venu ici dans un fiacre ? 2. Oui ; sa voiture s'est 
rompue (broke), et il a ete oblige de prendre un fiacre. 3. Fait-il jour? 
4. II fait jour, et le soleil commence a luire. 5. Ce malade a de la peine 
a respirer. 6. Fermez-vous la porte a clef quand vous allez vous cou- 
cher ? 7. Je la ferme a clef quelquefois. 8. Vous promenez-vous sou- 
vent a cheval ? 9. Je me promene a cheval tous les matins, et je me 
promene en voiture tous les soirs ; je ne me promene pas souvent a pied. 

10. Cette demoiselle a le teint fort beau ; o'est la fille de notre voisin. 

11. Cette histoire est reellement interessante ; il faut que vous la lisiez. 

12. Ce vaisseau part-il bientot? 13. Oui; il n'attend que le vent pour 
mettre a la voile. 14. Cet homme n'est-il pas imprudent? 15. Si, il est 
fort imprudent. 16. Votre frere fera-t-il un long sejour a Boston ? 17. 
Non, il reviendra demain. 18. Fait-il souvent dew la fumee dans cette 
chambre? 19. II y fait quelquefois de la fumee, mais pas souvent. 

I. — 1. Whence comes this smoke? 2. The chimney smokes, 
and the room is full of smoke. 3. Did your stay in London please' 
you ? 4. Yes, sir ; but my stay in Paris pleased me more. 5. Do 
you breathe easily? 6. I have trouble in breathing ; I have taken 

12 1 5 12 6 12 6 2213 7 6 5 6 15 6 7 5 15 14 1 

fi-acre, res-pi-re?", bril-ler, luire, nei-ger, gre-le?*, tow-ner, nei<re, grele, tonne, teinc, ma- 

22 1 23 5 5 3 5 12 1 3 14 23 5 1 14 22 3 5 IS 22 6 

nu-fac-ture, re-eUe-ment, e-vi-dem-men£, pein-ture, de-par£, im-pru-denJ, se-jour, fu-mee. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



383 



cold. 7. Do you take a walk in the morning ? 8. No, sir ; I take 
a ride on horseback every morning, and I take a ride in a carriage 
every evening. 9. Do your neighbors often take a ride in a car- 
riage ? 10. No; they ride every day on horseback. 11. Does it 
snow t ■ 12. It does not snow ; it hails. 13. Does it thunder much 
in this country ? 14. No, sir ; it snows and hails much ; but it 
Jhardj^L.e.y£^ thunders: ~~ 

15. Is that child well? 16. No, sir; he is evidently sick. 
17. On what instrument do you play? 18. I play on the piano. 
19. What coat do you wish to buy ? 20. I wish to buy one which 
looks fashionable. 21. Do you wish for one in the French fashion? 
22. No, sir ; I wish for one in the English fashion. 23. What do 
you do in the morning ? 24. As soon as I dress, I take my coffee, 
and then I go out. 26. Do you carry two pocket handkerchiefs? 
26. No, sir ; I carry only one pocket handkerchief and one pair of 
gloves. 27. Do you always lock your door when you go out? 28. 
I do not always lock it. 29. Did you see my brother before his 
departure ? 30. Yes, sir ; I saw him twice. 

II. — 1. Let us sit down on this bench. 2. I do not wish to sit 
down; I do not feel myself fatigued. 3. But I am; I have walked 
incessantly since this morning. 4. Seat yourself ; I will sit down 
'n a moment. 5. I wish to gather ^some plums ; do you wish me to 
gather you some also ? 6. No, thank you ; I do not often eat any. 

7. A French officer had invited much company to dinner. 8. 
His son, who was only six years old, came and sat down (vint se 
mettre) at the table, but his father sent him away (le repoussd), 
telling him that his beard was too short to dine with his father. 
9. His mother had a little table prepared (fit dresser) for him, and 
ordered him to be well served. 10. In the mean time an old cat 
tried (at) several times to carry off his food ; upon which the child, 
out of patience, exclaimed, " Go and eat with my father ; thy beard 
is sufficiently long." 

11. " What difference is there," asked the duchess (duchesse) 
of Maine to the writer (ecrivain) La Motte, " between me and a 
clock?" 12. "Duchess," answered La Motte, "a clock marks 
(marque) the hours, and your highness (altesse) makes one forget 
them." 

13. One day a person of the court asked Lord Chesterfield what 
he thought of Lady Coventry, whose complexion was evidently the 
work (Vouvrage meme) of that lady. 14. " Keally," replied his 
lordship (seigneurie), " I am not a judge of painting." 



384 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



13.— TREIZIfcME LEgON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WORDS. 

1. The French verb aller is not used vaguely like the English verb to go. We say in 
English, / am going, he has gone, etc., meaning going or gone away. The French in all 
such cases use the verb den aller. 



To go away. 1 am going away. 
Thou art going away. 

away. 
We are going away. 
You are going away. 
They are going away. 
Art thou going away ? 

away ? 
Are you going away ? 
Are they going away? 



S'en aller. Je vrCen vais. 
He is going Tu fen vas. II s'en va. 

Nous nous en allons. 
Vous vous en allez. 
lis (elles) s'en vont. 
Is he going T'en vas-tu ? S'en va-t-il ? 

Yous en allez-vous ? 
S'en vont-ils ? 

2. In the compound tenses, en immediately precedes the auxiliary. 



Has she gone away ? 

She has not gone away. 

When will you go away ? 

I shall go away to-morrow. 

Had they gone away when you ar- 
rived? 

They had not gone away. 

Do you believe that he has gone 
away ? 

I fear that he has gone away. 
Go away. 

The emperor. The lock. 

A prisoner. Reason. 

A conqueror. A debt. 

Important. A victory. 

To dare. Regularly. 

Married. Whoever. 

To cure, to get well. He will get well 

soon. 
He cures the sick. 

As, in capacity of. He acts as a god- 
father. 

She acts as an ignorant person. 
We dare not go to the top of that 
mountain. 



S'en est-elle allee ? 

Eile ne s'en est pas allee. 

Quand vous en irez-vous ? 

Je m'en irai demain. 

S'en etaient-ils alles quand vous etes 

arrive ? 
lis ne s'en etaient pas alles. 
Croyez-vous qu'il s'en soit alle ? 

Je crains qu'il ne s'en soit alle. 
Va-t' *en, or allez-vous-en. 
Uempereur. La serrure. 
Un prisonnier. La raison. 
Un vainqueur. Une dette. 
Important. Une victoire. 
Oser. Regulierement. 
Marie. Quiconque. 
Guerir. U guerira bientot. 

II guerit les malades. 
En. II agit en bon pere. 

Elle agit en ignorante. 
Nous n'osons aller au haut de cette 
montagne. 



3 1 6 1 3 3 11 7 23 12 15 125 7 21 14 11 5 14 in 

s'en-aZ-ler, va-t-en, empe-reur, ser-rure, pri-zon-nier, rai-zon, vain-keur, dette, im-por- 

3 12 '. 17 6 5 22 1"7 3 1 22 6 12 21 5 12 5 12 1 

tan<, vic-toire, o-zer, re-gu-liere-men<, ma-ri-e, ki-conke, gwe-rir, gwe-ri-ra. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



385 



1. Ten vas-tu? 2. Je m'en vais. 3. Vous en allez-vons? 4. Nous 
ne nous en allons pas. 5. Oe monsieur s'en va-t-il ? 6. II ne s'en va 
pas. 7. Ces dames s'en vont-elles ? 8. Elles ne s'en vont pas. 9. Vous 
en irez-vous demain? 10. Je m'en irai et mon ami s'en ira aussi. 11. 
Quand vous en irez-vous ? 12. Nous nous en irons demain. 13. Le 
docteur s'en est-il alle? 14. II s'en est alle hier matin. 15. S'en etait- 
il alle quand la malle est arrivee ? 16. Non ; aussitot que la malle fut ar- 
rivee, il s'en alia. 17. Pensiez-vous que je fusse chez moi ? 18. Je pen- 
sais que vous vousjen_£tiez alle. 19. Les soldats osent-ils blamer Pem- 
pereur ? 20. lis ne l'osent pas. 21. Le general a-t-il gagne une vic- 
toire ? 22. II a gagne une victoire importante, et il a fait beaucoup de 
prisonniers. 23. Ou. est la clef de cette porte ? 24. Elle est a la serrure. 
25. Avez-vous des dettes ? 26. Non ; je n'ai pas un sou de dettes. - 27. 
Je dinais regulierement a trois heures pendant mon sejour en ville. 28. 
Le general est entre en vainqueur dans la ville. 29. Quiconque passe 
par la doit payer six sous. 30. Cette femme est mariee. 

I. — 1. Does your friend go away to-day? 2. Yes, sir; he goes 
away immediately. 3. Dost thou go away to-day? 4. No ; I shall 
go away to-morrow at six o'clock. 5. Will your cousins go away 

^itU4he same time? 6. No, sir; they are going away to-day. 7. 
Are you going away already ? 8. No, sir ; we are not going away ^ 
yet. 9. Have the Germans gone away? 10. Yes, sir ; they went 
away last week. 11. Do you believe that the soldiers are going 
away ? 12. I believe that they have gone away already. 13. Does 
any one dare to blame us ? 14. No one blames us. 15. Did the 
sick man believe that I cpail&_cjyLie him ? 16. He believed that the 
physicians w r cuihLcuje him. 17. Did you believe that he :wj)uld_ 
get well ? 18. I did not believe that he would get well. 19. The 
Frenchman always acts as a wise and prudent man. 

20. Is it muddy ? 21. It is very muddy. 22. Was it not dusty 
yesterday? 23. Yes, sir; the dust arose and penetrated every 
where. 24. That merchant dares undertake nothing ; he will never 
succeed. 25. We ought always to consult {consulter) reason in 
every thing. 26. Is not your neighbor imprudent? 27. He is 
very imprudent. 28. Is there a lock on your door? 29. There 
is one ; and I always lock the door w T hen I go to bed. 30. That 
man will get well ; will he not? 31. I think that the physician 
will cure him. 32. Do you rise regularly at the same hour every 
day ? 33. Yes, sir ; I rise regularly at six every day. 34. Is your 
brother married? 35. Yes, sir; he has been married these five 
years. 36. Y&fce the emperor of France a prisoner ? 37. Yes ; he 
was a prisoner several yoais^ 38. Whoever passes this bridge (ce 
pont) has to pay three cents. 

II. — 1. In the space of fourteen years, Caesar reduced the war- 
like people of Gaul, and conquered Spain twice ; he passed over, as 
conqueror, all Italy ; he penetrated as far as Germany, and into the 
British isles. 2. He overthrew the power of the great Pompey 
(Pompee) ; he subdued Egypt ; he met and beat Pharnaces (Pkar- 

17 



386 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



nace), son of Mithridates (Mithridate). 3. He vanquished in Africa 
the great name of Cato, and the arms of Juba, and he engaged in 
(livra) fifty battles, which cost the lives of eleven hundred and 
ninety-two thousand men. 4. This hero was at the same time the 
model ofjiistorians, and the greatest orator of his age after Cicero. 

5. Are you willing to carry that heavy burden? 6. No, sir, I 
am tired ; you are not, carry it yourself. 7. Can you learn the 
French in six months'? 8. I can^Jearn .a great deal <s^jX in six 
months. 9. When will you begin to study Spanish ? 10. I shall 
begin in two months. 11. Are these affairs important ? 12. They 
are very important. 13. God has given reason to man in order to 
make him distinguish (discerner) good from evil, the true from 
(d'avec) the false. 14. An Irishman was comparing (comparait) 
his watch with the clock, and as he burst out (eclata) with laughter 
J (de rire), some one asked him at what he was laughing. 15. " And 
(Eh) how can I prevent it (rrCen errfpecher) 1 " cried he, " when my 
little watch, which ^w^s^made by my cousin at Cork, and which cost 
me only ten dollars, has beaten your big clock at New York about 
an hour and a quarter only since yesterday morning." 



14.— QUATORZlfcME LEgON. 

MISCELLANEOUS ETJLES AND WOEDS, 
1. Pour takes the definite article before the names of countries. 
He sets out for England and Italy. II part pour l'Angleterre et pour 

ritalie. 

He has set out for France. II est parti pour la France. 

2. When a noun of place comes between aller and a following infinitive, sometimes 
there is no preposition between them, but the infinitive may be preceded by pour, which 
then forms a stronger expression, stating the motive for going out. 

I am going home to see my friends. Je vais chez moi voir mes amis. 

He is going to the market to buy II va au marche pour acheter du fruit, 
fruit. 

We are going to the store to buy some Nous allons au magasin pour acheter 

flour. de la farine. 

3. Pour aller must be used after soriir, when we express the purpose of going out. 
He is going out for wood. II sort pour aller chercher du bois. 
They are going out for wine. II sorteut pour aller chercher du vin. 
I am going out for water. Je sors pour aller chercher de l'eau. 

4. Long and large, as well as haut, are sometimes used as nouns. 

Length. Long. La longueur. 

Breadth. Large. La largeur. 

Height. Haut. La hauteur. 

A well. The depth. Un puits. L&profondeur 

To Jig, ran away. Youth. S'enfuir. Lnjeunesse. 

21 21 11 1 1 11 17 11 22 12 15 21 11 3 2212 9 5 

long, lon-g?<eur, large, lar-geur, hau-teur, puits, pro-fon-deur, s'en-fu-ir, jeu-nes??. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



387 



To bid adieu. Old age. 
A. philosopher. The soul. 
A family teacher, tutor. Honesty. 
Extreme. Extremely. 
Immortal. To send again, send back. 
Ally. An army. 
The fist. In order to. 
Obey God. Let us obey him. 
A blow with the fist. 
A blow with a stick. 
That house is sixty feet long by forty 
wide. 

That picture is six feet high by five 
wide. 

TVhat is that good for ? 

That is good for nothing. 

A prisoner on parole. With ice. 

A glass of ice-water. 



Dire adieu. La vieillesse. 

Un philosophe. Udme. 

Un precepteur. Uhounetete. 

Extreme. Extremement. 

lmmortel. Renvoyer. 

Un alli'e. Une armee. 

Le poing. Afin de, pour que. 

Obeissez a Dieu. Obeissons-luL 

Un coup de poing. 

Un coup de baton. 

Cette raaison a soixante pieds de lon- 
gueur sur quarante de largeur. 

Ce tableau a six pieds de haut sur 
cinq de large. 

A quoi cela est-il bon? 

Cela n'est bon a, rien. 

Un prisonnier sur parole. A la glace. 

Un verre d'eau a la glace. 



1. Yotre maison est elle grande? 2. Elle a cinquante pieds de lon- 
gueur (de long), et quarante pieds de hauteur (de haut). 3. Pourquoi 
ce garcon s'enfuit-il ? 4. II s'enfuit parce qu'il a peur de rester ici. 5. 
Le voleur est-il en prison ? C. ISTon, monsieur, il s'est enfui. 7. Qu'a 
fait cet liomme dans sa jeunesse ? 8. II a passe sa jeunesse dans les 
plaisirs ; a present qu'il est vieux, il est dans une extreme misere. 9. 
Allez-vous dire adieu a vos amis ? 10. Je leur ai dit adieu ce matin. 
11. Quelle profondeur ce puits a-t-il ? 12. II a cinquante pieds de pro- 
fondeur. 13. Que croit ce philosophe ? 14. II croit que l'ame est im- 
mortelle et que Thonnetete est la premiere vertu de l'homme. 15. Votre 
precepteur ecrit-il vite ? 16. II ecrit extremement vite. 17. Pourquoi 
renvoyez-vous ce drap ? 18. Je le renvoie parce qu'il est trop gros. 19. 
Votre pere est-il parvenu a la vieillesse ? 20. Oui, et mon grand-pere 
est mort de vieillesse. 21. Ce soldat est prisonnier sur parole. 22. 
L'armee des allies a gagne plusieurs victoires. 23. J'ai pris ce livre 
pour le lire. 

I. — 1. What is that gun good for? 2. It is good_toJdll birds 
and squirrels. 3. Why do those children run away ? 4. They run 
away because they are afraid. 5. Has old age always more reason 
than youth ? 6. No ; youth has sometimes as much reason as old 
age. 7. Does that traveler set out to-morrow? 8. Yes, sir; he 
has just bid adieu to his friends. 9. That house is extremely large ; 
•^bmy long it ? 10. It is a hundred feet long by fifty high. 11. 
How deep is that well ? 12. It is more than sixty feet deep. 13. 
Do we understand the operations (operations) of the soul? 14. We 
can not understand them perfectly. 15. Is your tutor learned and 
wise % 16. Yes, sir ; he is a true philosopher. 17. The tutor of 

137 S 12 15 15 2 5 5 11 15 8 6 5 8 5 % 3 IS 

viei-llesstf, phi-lo-soph*?, ame, pre-cep-teur, Ao«-nete-te, ex-trem?, ex-trome-men^, im- 

16 6 3 20 1C6 1 126 1 6 1814 

mor-tel, ren-vo-ver, aZ-lie, ar-m6e, poin^. 



388 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONB. 



Alexander the Great was a great philosopher. 18. He believed 
that the soul was immortal, but he did not believe that the works 
of man were immortal. 



ten high. 21. Is that man honest'? 22. I dou^tjlie honesty of 
his soul, 23. Do you wish for a glass of wine or of ice-water ? 
24. A glass of ice-water, if you please. 25. Is your friend a 
prisoner? 26. He is a prisoner on parole. 27. Did the armies of 
the allies en tep.Paris ? 28. They entered it in 1815. 29. Why 
does that boy weep % 30. Because some one has given him a blow 
with the fist. 31. Why do you buy those flowers ? 32. I buy them 
in order to send them to my sister. 33. Can one learn French by 
^,-rules only ? 34. No, sir ; no language is learned without much 
exercise. 

II. — 1. Madam, I have the honor to salute you ; how do you 
find yourself this morning? 2. JEhe best in the world, I thank you 
much ; and you ? 3. Admirably well, thank God. 4. Take the 
trouble (la peine) to sit down. 5. I can not have that pleasure, 
madam ; I have not the time. 6. You are very much hurried. 7. 
I will come again to-morrow. I came only to know-how you di^ 
after your indisposition of yesterday evening. 8. Make my compli- 
ments to your sister. 9. Adieu, sir ; I thank you fqp-this visit. 

10. I have been told that your brother-in-law wishes to get a 
brick house built. 11. Yes ; he wishes to get one built before long 
_ (pea). 12. Where will it be ? ASr^About a mile and a quarter, 
or a mile and a half, from the river. 14. It will not be far from 
your house ; will it % 15. Not very far ; I shall be able to go to his 
house ija, a quarter of an hour. 16. That will be a short walk; I 
make a ionger one almost every morning. 17. It is good walking 
in the morning early, and late in the evening ; but in the middle 
of the day it is too warm to walk. 18. I have not the time to walk 
in the day ; but I am obliged to go much in the sun to look after 
(vaquer a) my business. 19. When one has business, it is neces- 
sary to do his best. 20. Yes ; if I had business, I should be very 
industrious. 

21. A Frenchman, wishing to pay (make) a compliment to a 
lady who had no great pretensions (pretentions) to beauty, said to 
her, " Truly, madam, you are the most beautiful of the flowers of 
your sex (sexe)" 22. The lady, who was not very polite, answered 
him, " I thank you for your compliment, and I should wish to be 
able to say as much of you." 23. "Yo u can (do) so^ m adam," re- 
plied the Frenchman immediately, " if you can lie as easily (aise- 
ment) as I." 




20. It is six hundred feet long by 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



389 



15.— QUINZTtME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AjSfD WORDS. 

1. The learner has seen that when we speak of any thing begun in past time and still 
continued, the verb, though past in English, must be present in French, preceded by il y «, 
or followed by depuis. Depuis and il y a CAN NOT both be used with the same phrase. 

\ 11 y a deux mois que je suis a Boston. 

I have been in Boston two months. 



Je suis a Boston depuis deux mois. 

( 77 y a six mois que ^etudie l'espagnol. 
I have studied Spanish six months. i x ,,. n , , 7 • • m • 

1 ( 3 etudie 1 espagnol depuis six mois. 

The above form implies that I am still in Boston, that I am still studying Spanish. 
But if the action or state no longer continues, the verb is past in French as well as English.* 

I was in Boston two months. J'ai ete deux mois a Boston. 

I studied Spanish six months. J'ai etudie l'espagnol six mois. 

A" comedian. Avarice. Un comedicn. L 1 avarice. 

The sound. The bell. Le son. La cloche. 

A glance. Obedient. Un coup cVoeil. Obeissant. 

A kick. Disobedient. Un coup de pied. Desobeissant. 

A debtor. The thickness. Un debiteur. Uepaisseur. 

A creditor. The circumference. Un creancicr. La cir conference. 

A horse-shoe. To shoe a horse. Un fer a cheval. Ferrer un cheval. 

A Christian. To bring near. Un chretien. Approcher (de bef. u.). 

Attentive. To approach. Attentif. S'approcher (de bef. noun). 

To withdraw (from). eloigner (de bef. noun). 

Bring that chair near me. Approchez cette chaise de moi. 

Draw near the fire. Approchez-vous du feu. 

Withdraw from the fire. Eloignez-vous du feu. 

He approaches it, I withdraw from it. II s'en approche, je m'en eloignc. 

Cast a glance on that. Jettez un coup d'oeil sur cela. 

2. Verbs, adjectives, and prepositions of different regimen can not take a common object. 

They love and obey their father. lis aiment leur^cVe et ils lui obeissent. 

He hates and injures them. II les hait et il leur nuit. 

Here obeir and nuire, which take the indirect object, can not have the same object as 
aimer and hair, which take the direct. 

1. Entendez-vous le son de la cloche ? 2. Je Pentends. 3. Get enfant 
est-il obeissant ? 4. Non, madame, sa sosur est obeissante, mais, lui, il 
est tres-desobeissant. 5. Cet liomme a tue son chien d'un coup de hache. 
6. Le maitre a battu ce petit garcon parce qu'il a donne un coup de pied 
a son camarade. 7. Cet liomme est-il votre creancier ? 8. Non, mon- 
sieur, e'est mon debiteur. 9. Quelle epaisseur cette pierre a-t-elle ? 10. 

* "When tbe friends of Lazarus said to Christ, lie has been dead three days, it would 
have been in French, II y a trois jours qu'il est mort, or 17 est mort depuis trois jours. 
But Lazarus himself after his resurrection, being no longer dead, might have said, J'ai ete 
mort trois jours. 

15 S 1214 1 1 12 15 15 5 12 3 5 15 5 12 3 5 12 11 6 7 11 5 3 

co-me-dien, a-va-rice, cloche, o-be-i-san^, de-zo-be-i-san£, de-bi-teur, e-pais-seur, cre-an- 

125 J 2 21 5 3 7 6 5 1214 1 15 6 1 3 12 5 21 6 

cie/*, cir-con-fe-rence s fer-ror, chre-tien, aj9-pro-cher, ai-ten-tif, e-loi-gner. 



390 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



Elle a deux pieds d'^paisseur et dix pieds do circonference. 11. Co 
comedien joue-t-il bien ? 12. II jouc assez bien. 13. Oct homme se 
refuse beaucoup par avarice, n'est-ce pas ? 14. Oui, il se refuse tout par 
avarice. 15. Que fait ce forgeron ? 10. II fait des fers a cheval pour 
ferrer ce cheval. 17. Vous leviez-vous de bonnp quand vous etiez a la 
campagne ? 18. Je me levais de bonne heure lorsque je m'etais couche 
de bonne heure. 19. Les ecoliers sont attentifs au discours du maitre. 
20. Le vieux soldat est mort en bon chretien. 

I. — 1. Does that comedian play well? 2. He plays very well in 
the comic (comique). >~3. That man refuses himself every thing from 
avarice. 4. That merchant is very attentive to his business. 5. I 
hear the sound of the bell ; it is twelve o'clock. 6. Why has tho 
master beaten that boy? 7. Because he gave his companion a blow 
with his fist. 8. Why do you give that dog a kick ? 9. Because 
he is here in the room, and I wish him to go away. 10. Have you 
cast a glance upon the newspapers? 11. No, sir ; I have not seen 
the newspapers to-day. 12. Is that scholar obedient? 13. No, 
sir ; he is very disobedient ; he obeys no one. 14. Is that man your 
creditor? 15. No, sir; he is my debtor. 

16. That stone is four feet in breadth, by tw T o in thickness ; it 
is twelve feet in circumference. 17. I take the newspaper in order 
to read it. 18. Is the blacksmith shoeing your horse? 19. He is 
making horse-shoes in order to shoe him. 20. Bring that chair 
near the table. 21. Approach the fire; are you not cold? 22. 
No, sir, I am too warm ; I will withdraw from it. 23. Was our 
general a Christian ? 24. Yes, sir ; he died as a good Christian. 
25. Have you come in order to read the newspapers ? 26. I have 
come in order to borrow them.- 27. Do you believe that your friend 
is coming here this evening? 28. It is possible that he has come 
already. 29. Did his brother think that he was coming? 30. He 
did not think that he was coming. 31. Did he think that he had 
come ? 32. He did not think that he had come. 

II. — 1. Do they use much wood in this house? 2. No, sir; 
they have good stoves, and they do not use much wood. 3. Are not 
those boots worn ? 4. No, sir ; they are new. 5. Does that lame 
man support himself on a stick ? 6. No, sir ; he supports himself 
on me. 7. Did you beckon to the servant to come to you ? 8. No, 
sir ; he came to me, but I had not beckoned to him. 9. Do you 
go to the post-office often ? 10. I go to the post-office and to the 
market every morning. 

11. If you had had no boat, would you have been able to pass 
over that river ? 12. Yes, sir; I should have passed over it by 
swimming. 13. Does the post-master (maitre de poste) live in this 
street? 14. He lives at the end of the street, opposite the church. 
15. Is the congress of this republic composed (se compose) of more 
than one house (chambre) ? 16. It is composed of a senate and 
house of representatives. 17. Has that man friends? 18. No, 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



391 



sir ; as he never does his duty, he has no friends. 19. Has that 
Spaniard wit ? 20. He does not lack wit, but he has no skill. 

21. Were the children hungry yesterday at school? 22. Yes, 
sir ; if they had had bread they would have eaten. 23. Were you 
not cold yesterday l ? 24. No, sir ; if we had been cold we should 
have warmed ourselves. 25. Is the servant absent? 2G. Yes, sir; 
he has gone to carry a beautiful cage as a present to our neighbor. 
27. Have you some visits to make ? 28. I have a few to make. 

29. I am delighted to see you, sir ; how do they do at your house ? 

30. Every body is well, I thank you ; and at your house ? 31. My 
sister is slightly indisposed. 32. I am very sorry for it, and I 
hope that it will be nothing. 33. I have invited Mr. B. to dinner ; 
will you dine with us also? 34. Yes, sir ; you are very good; I 
shall not fail. Adieu (ait revoir). 



10.— SEIZIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOEDS. 

1. Adjectives and past participles, which refer to a part of a larger number or quantity, 
are generally preceded by de in French. 

There were two hundred men killed, II y eut deux cents homme de tries, et 

and five hundred wounded. cinq cents de blesses. 

How many bottles are there ? Combien de bouteilles y a-t-il ? 

There are six full and six empty. II y en a six de pleines et six de vides. 

2. Often, however, the de is suppressed. 



There are four broken. 

How many stockings have you ? 

I have six white and four black ones. 

To take it into one's head, to think (of). 
To recollect. 

A. fellow-man. Similar, like. 

Aloud. A class. 

The right. The nation. 

The diameter. An ice-cream. 

A vanilla ice-cream. 

To reclaim, claim. A fly. 

The principal. To frighten. 

The government. Science. 

This f eld. An epigram. 

To measure. To melt. 



II y en a quatre cassees (or de cassees). 

Combien de bas avez-vous ? 

J'en ai six (de) blancs et quatre (de) 

noirs. 
S'aviser (de). 

Se rappeler, se souvenir (de bef. inf.). 

Un semblable. Semblable. 

Hant, a haute voix. Une classe. 

Le droit. La nation. 

Le diametre. Une glace. 

Une glace a la vanillc. 

Reclamer. Une mouchc. 

Le principal. Faire peur d. 

Le gouvcrnement. La science. 

Ce champ. Une epigramme. 

Mesurer. Fondre. 



20 1 13 i O l ITS o i o w 

s a-vi-zer scm-blabk, clas.s<?, dro«, na-tion, di-a-metre, va-nille, re-cla-me>\ mouchc, 

14 12 1 13 7 4 3 12 3 3 5 12 1 " . 2l , 

prin-ci-pal, gou-vcrne-rnentf, sci-ence, champ, e-pi-grainm?, mezu-re?% fondiv?. 



392 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



A wall. A pane of glass. 
To instruct. To teach. 

He plans nothing, 
lie took it into his head to rob me. 
It is necessary to speak aloud. 
You frighten the little boy. 
He takes good care of his health. 
They have gone away. 
You had gone away. 
We shall have gone away. 
Does he fear that I have gone away ? 
He fears that you have gone away. 
Did you believe that she had gone 
away ? 

I knew that she had gone away. 
The snow has melted. 
She instructs her children well. 
He teaches mathematics. 
They are measuring the wall. 



Un mur. Une vitre. 

Instruirc (a bef. inf.). Enseigncr (<1 

bef. inf.). 
II ne s'avise de rien. 
II s'est avise de me voler. 
11 faut parler haut (or a haute voix). 
Vous faites peur au petit garcon. 
II soigne bien sa sante. 
lis s'en sont alles. 
Vous vous en etiez alles. 
Nous nous en serons alles. 
Craint-il que je m'en sois alle? 
II craint que vous ne vous en soyez alle. 
Croyiez-vous qu'elle s'en fut allee ? 

Je savais qu'elle s'en etait allee. 
La neige est fondue. 
Elle instruit bien ses enfants. 
n enseigne les mathematiques. 
On mesure ce mur. 



1. Vous rappelez-vous les faits dont je parle? 2. Je me les rappelle 
parfaitement. 3. Ces deux freres se ressemblent beaucoup. 4. Oui ; ils 
sont tout a fait semblables. 5. Nous devons faire du bien a nos sembla- 
bles. 6. Ce petit garcon apprend-il bien? 7. Oui, madame, il est le 
premier de sa classe. 8. Ce voyageur a visite plusieurs nations etran- 
geres. 9. Le juge n'a pas le droit de vie et de inort sur les prisonniers. 
10. Je vais reclamer le cheval qu'on m'a pris. 11. Cet arbre a trois 
pieds de diametre. 12. La mouche commune n'a que deux ailes. 13. 
Le precepteur instruit-il le prince ? 14. II l'instruit dans la science du 
gouvernement. 15. Que fait cet homme? 16. II mesure ce champ. 
17. Cette glace au chocolat est bien bonne. 18. Le soleil ne fond-il pas 
la neige aujourd'hui ? 19. II la fond vite. 20. Ce mur a deux pieds 
d'epaisseur. 21. Que le domestique nettoie les vitres de ma cbambre. 
22. Qu'est-ce que le maitre enseigne a ses eleves ? 23. II leur enseigne 
a parler francais et espagnol. 

I. — 1. Do you recollect your visit to Mr. White's in London? 
2. I recollect it perfectly. 3. What has frightened that cat? 4. 
The dog has frightened him. 5. How many classes are there in 
your school? 6. There are six. 7. Is not England a powerful na- 
tion ? 8. Yes ; England and France are very powerful nations. 
9. That tree is more than six feet in diameter and nearly twenty 
feet in circumference. 10. Are there many flies in autumn? 11. 
Yes ; in autumn every thing is full of flies. 12. Is your house 
similar to mine? 13. It is quite similar. 14. The professor is 
going to the merchant's to claim his money. 15. In order to learn 



11 11 14 2213 3 7 6 1 5 1 12 

mur, vitre, in-stru-ire, en-sci-gnc/\ ma-t7ie-ma-tikcs. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



393 



French, is it necessary to speak it aloud? 16. It is necessary to 
speak it aloud, and to speak it much. 17. That boy is very wick- 
ed ; he took it into his head yesterday to break my windows. 

18. Humanity (riiumanite) obliges us to have pity on (avoir 
pitie de) our fellow-men. 19. The Romans had the right of life 
and death over their slaves (esclaves). 20. This vanilla ice-cream 
is very good. 21. Does the diameter of the circle (du cercle) di 
vide (divise) the circumference into_ two equal (egales) parts'? 

22. Yes ; it always divides the circumference into two equal parts. 

23. Do you know the science of government % 24. I do not know 
it perfectly. 25. Have they measured the diameter of this circle ? 
26. They have measured this circle and that field. 27. Those 
panes of glass are very large. 28. Yes ; they are very large and 
very clear (claires). 

II. — 1. Let the boy make some fire. 2. Let the servant wash 
the panes of glass in my room. 3. Let the children go to bed. 4. 
Is your father up-stairs or clown-stairs ? 5. He is yonder in the 
field. 6. Is the servant above or below % 7. He has just gone up- 
stairs. 8. After having breakfasted, did you go to the post-office ? 
9. No, sir ; the mail had not then arrived. 10. I went first to my 
room, where I read the newspaper, and then I went to the post- 
office. 11. Have you some presents to send to your friends? 12. 
I have many to send to them. 13. Has your friend money enough 
to meet all his expenses ? 14. Yes, sir ; he is in a condition (en 
etat) to fulfill all his engagements. 15, Does your house face the 
north? 16. No, sir; it faces the south. 

Yhr-Ai the north they build many houses of stone, but here I 
see that all the houses are of wood or of brick. 18. Yes ; we have 
no stones near here, and wooden houses are very good in this cli- 
mate. 19. There are some houses here which are built with much 
taste. 20. How do you like (find) our city? 21. It is very pretty. 
The environs (environs) above all are very agreeable. 22. Have 
you ever been far in (d) the country ? 23. I have been as far as 
Mr. B.'s, who dwells (d) six miles from here. 24. Mr. B. has a 
beautiful country-house. 25. As soon as we „ have the time let us 
go there. 26. With pleasure ; in one or two weeks I shall have 
more time. 27. What o'clock is it? 28. It is near seven o'clock. 
29. Is not your watch too fast ? 30. On the contrary. I believe 
that it is too slow by (de) some minutes. 



17.— DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EXILES AND WOEDS. 

1. The learner will readily perceive, from the meaning of the following verbs and con- 
junctions, that they govern the subjunctive. Their signification is such that the dependent 
verb can hardly affirm its meaning positively. 

17* 



394 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



To approve. To merit. 
To wonder. To pray. 
Though, although'. 
However little. Without. 
He approves of our having this money. 
He deserves to he taken care of. 
I wonder that he sees no danger where 
he is. 

Although he is young, he does not fail 

to be good. 
However little care you take of it, the 

business will succeed. 
He has done it without being told. 
To threaten. His idea. 
To incommode, annoy. Annoyance, 

pain. 

This shoe pinches me. 

He seems always under constraint in 

the house of his friends. 
That man annoys me (or is in my way). 
He was quite too free. 
I am pressed for money. 
We were much incommoded in that 

carriage. 

I experience always a little constraint 

in his presence. 
An elephant. The infantry. 
The subjunctive. To mark. 
Interrogative. Negative. 
So much the better. A plain. 
An earthquake. 
It is subject to earthquakes. 

So much the better for us. 

He threatened him with the cane. 



Approuver. Meriter. 

S'etonncr. Prior. 

Encore que (quoique, bicn que). 

Pour peu que. Sans que. 

II approuve que nous ayons cet argent. 

II merite qu'on ait soin de lui. 

Je m'etonne qu'il ne voie pas du dan- 
ger ou il est. 

Encore qu'il soit jeune, il ne laisse pas 
d'etre sage. 

Pour peu que vous en preniez soin, 
l'affaire reussira. 

II l'a fait sans qu'on le lui ait dit. 

Menacer {de bef. inf.). Son idee. 

Gener. La gene. 

Ce Soulier me gene. 
II semblc toujours a la gene chez sea 
amis. 

Cet hommc me gene. 
II etait sans gene. 
Je suis gene (or dans la gene). 
Nous etions bien genes dans cetto voi- 
ture. 

J'eprouve toujours un peu de gene en 

sa presence. 
Un elephant. IS infanterie. 
Le subjonctif. Marquer. 
Interrogatif. Negatif. 
Tant mieux. Une plaine. 
Un tremblement de terre. 
Elle est sujette a des tremblements de 

terre. 

Tant mieux pour nous. 
II Fa menace du baton. 



1. Le maitre enseigne aux ecoliers a exprimer leurs idees. 2. Cet 
liomme vous a menace de coups de baton. 3. Nous ne sommes pas ge- 
nes ici, mais dans cette voiture nous l'etions horriblement. 4. Votre 
pere approuve-t-il que vous vendiez cette maison? 5. II n'approuve pas 
que je la vende a si bon marche. 6. Cet eleve merite que nous le re- 
compensions. 7. Vous etonnez-vous que j'aie enseigne 1'arithmetique a 
ces enfants? 8. Non, je m'etonne que vous leur ayez enseigne les sci- 
ences. 9. Get liomme m'a prie de lui expliquer les principes (princi- 
ples) de notre gouvernement. 10. Encore qu' (or bien qu') (orquoiqu') 



1 18 6 5 12 6 1 6 11 6 8 6 8 5 5 3 14 3 13 22 21 

aj9-prou-ver, me-ri-ter, mena-cer, i-dee, ge-ner, gene, c-lc-phan^ in-fante-rie, sub-jonc- 

32 1 6 14 6 15 1 19 5 1 12 7 3 4 3 

tif, inar-ker, in-tc-ro-ga-tif, ne-ga-tif, plaine, trem-ble-menJ. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



395 



il soit jeune, il est sage et prudent. 11. Pour peu que je boivc du vin, 
— -~uela me fait mal. 12. On se servait autrefois des elephants a la guerre. 
13. Cet homme est soldat d'infanterie. 14. Savez-vous tous les temps 
du subjonctif? 15. Je les sais assez bien. 16. Qui a marque ces ser- 
viettes ? 17. La servante les a marquees. 18. Les verbes interrogatifs 
et negatifs gouvernent le subjonctif. 19. La Pologne est un pays de 
plaines. 20. La Sicile est sujette a de grands tremblements de terre. 

I. — 1. Do they teac]ijhe dumb (muets) to express their ideas? 
2. They teach them to express their ideas with their fingers. 3. 
Did the master threaten that little boy? 4. He threatened him 
with blows of a stick. 5. Is the subjunctive placed after negative 
verbs % 6, It is placed after negative and, interrogative verbs. 7. 
Does our neighbor approve of what his son has done ? 8. No ; he 
can not approve.. of,(une) conduct so strange. 9. Does that boy do 
his duty well ? 10. Yes ; he deserves praise (des louages). 11. Did 
not the master threaten that pupil ? 12. No ; far from threaten- 
ing him, he always praised him. 13. Did they formerly make use 
of elephants in war? 14. Yes ; and they make use of them still in 
the East Indies (Indes orientales). 15. Is not the French infantry 
very brave? 16. Yes, sir ; and the English infantry is brave also. 

17. Does this plain extend far? 18. It extends as far as the 
mountain. 19. In New Orleans it hardly ever snows, and when it 
does, the snow usually melts as soon as it has fallen. 20. Did the 
servant break those panes of glass? 21. He broke several panes 
(carreaux) in washing them. 22. That wall is two feet and a half 
thick, and ten feet high. 23. Is that minister well instructed? 
24. He is well versed (verse) in the science of government. 25. 
What do they teach your brother ? 26. They teach him grammar 
and arithmetic. 27. Does your father go away to-day? 28. He 
has gone away already. 29. When did he go away? 30. He and 
my brother went away on Thursday. 31. Had they gone away when 
you arrived? 32. No; as soon as I had arrived, they went away. 

II. — 1. Did you break those panes of glass ? 2. I did not break 
/ them, but I saw them broken. 3. Where is your sister ? 4. I am 
/ afraid that she has gone away with my father. 5. Did she say that 

she was going away ? 6. She did not say that she was going away ; 
and my brother did not say that she had gone away. 7. Have 
many great men appeared in the world? 8. A few only have ap- 
peared at long intervals (inter valles). 9. Have your cousins come 
down from their room ? 10. They came down, but they have gone 
up again. 11. Have they not come down again? 12. No, sir; 
they went up, and have remained in their chamber. 13. Has 
twelve o'clock struck ? 14. Yes ; twelve o'clock struck when we 
were in the street. 

15. Has any one wound up (remonte) the clock ? 16. I wound 
it up this morning. 17. Did you come here yesterday? 18. 1 came 
here yesterday as soon as I had shaved. 19. Has not your cousin 



396 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



hurt his arm ? 20. Yes, sir ; in falling from his horse, he broke 
his arm. 21. Will you have the goodness to put this letter in (d) 
the post-office ? 22. With much pleasure. 23. Have you paid the 
farmer for his carriage ? 24. I have paid him for it. 25. When 
and how much did you pay him for it 1 ? 26. I paid him five hun- 
dred dollars for it yesterday. 27. Does your brother play on the 
violin? 28. He plays on the violin and on the flute. 29. Do you 
like to play cards'? 30. No, sir; I like better tg^pjay ball. 

ST. Some children, one of them blind of one eye, discoursed 
thus on the merit of their masters. 32. " How many hours does 
yours grant you for sleeping ? " said one child, who appeared to like 
the labor ready made (tout fait). 33. " Twelve hours," answered 
the child interrogated (interroge). 34. " Twelve hours ! " exclaimed 
the one-eyed one ; " my master (a moi) grants me only six ! " 35. 
" That is just," replied another child, " for you have only one eye 
to shut, and my friend has two." 



18.— DIX-HUITIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOEDS. 

1. In English we often say that a person does a thing, meaning that he causes it to be 
done ; as, He lias built a house, meaning he has caused one to be built, or hired carpenters 
to build one. In such cases the French use very commonly the verb /aire before the infin- 
itive ; thus, 

He has built a large store. 
We are making a fine garden. 
I am repairing my house. 
As soon as I had bought those woods, 

I cut them down. 
Our neighbor cultivates his fields well. 



II a, fait bdtir un grand magasin. 
Nous faisons /aire un beau jardin. 
Je fais reparer ma maison. 
Sitot que j'eus achete ces bois, je les 

fis exploiter. 
Notre voisin fait bien cultiver ses 
champs. 

2. When the labor is actually done by the person spoken of, the French expression cor- 
responds to the English. 



The carpenter builds himself a good 
house. 

The gardener is making a fine garden. 
And I also. And thou also. 
And he also. And she also. 
And they also. 

A substantive. The herb, grass. 

To awake, rouse up. 

To awake (one's self). 

The author. The dancing-school. 



Le charpentier se batit une bonne mai- 

6011. 

Le jardinier fait un beau jardin. 
Et moi aussi. Et toi aussi. 
Et lui aussi. Et elle aussi. 
Et eux aussi. Et elles aussi. 
Un substantif. Vherbe. 
Eveiller, reveiller. 
Reveiller, se reveiller. 
L'auteur. Uecole de danse. 



22 3 12 7 576576 17 11 3 

eubs-tau-tif, herbs, e-veil-lc/', re-veil-ler, au-teur, danse. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



397 



The poet. To dream. 

A marriage. To prepare. 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Tolerably. To delay, to be long. 

My leisure. This occupation. 

Sacred. To relate. 

To manifest. The approach. 

It is necessary not to delay a moment. 

They have delayed too long. 



Le poke. Rever (de bef. noun). 
TJn mariage. Preparer {a bef. inf.). 
Masculin. Feminin. 
Passablement. Tarder (a bef. inf.). 
Mon loisir. Cette occupation. 
Saint. Raconter. 
Manifester. Uapproche. 
II ne faut pas tarder un moment. 
On a trop tarde. 



1. Allez-vous reveiller le capitaine? 2. Non, monsieur, il a defendu 
qu'on le reveillat. 3. Votre frere va-t-il a l'ecole de danse ? 4. II y va, 
et moi aussi. 5. Vous eveillez-vous de bonne heure le matin ? 6. Je 
m'eveille tons les matins a cinq heures, et toi aussi. 7. Bevez-vous plus 
souvent que votre frere ? 8. Je reve souvent, et lui aussi. 9. Votre soeur 
n'a-t-elle pas plus de loisir que vos freres? 10. Elle a.bien du loisir, et 
eux aussi. 11. Tousles substantifs de votre lecon sont-ils masculins? 
12. Non, quelques-uns sont masculins et les autres feminins. 13. Le 
domestique donne de l'herbe fraiche au cheval. 14. Avez-vous bien 
dormi la nuit passee ? 15. Non, monsieur, je me suis reveille trois ou 
quatre fois. 16. Yous eveillez-vous facilement ? 17. Oui, monsieur, le 
moindre bruit m'eveille. 18. Le tonnerre m'a reveille plusieurs fois la 
nuit derniere. 19. Cet auteur est poete ; n'est-ce pas? 20. Oui, c'est 
un bon poete. 21. II y aura un mariage chez nous ce soir. 22. Je me 
prepare a recevoir mes amis ; ils tardent beaucoup a venir. 23. Les 
Saintes Ecritures racontent Fhistoire des Juifs (Jews). 24. Yous ecrivez 
passablement bien. 

I. — 1. At what o'clock did you awake this morning ? 2. I 
awoke at five. 3. Did your father forbid any one to wake him ? 
4. Yes ; but the noise of the thunder woke him very early. 5. Is 
that substantive masculine or feminine ? 6. It is feminine. 7. Is 
that man an author ? 8. Yes, sir ; he is a great poet. 9. Does 
that animal eat grass ? 10. He eats grass and grain. 11. What 
is the physician preparing'? 12. He is preparing this medicine for 
the patient. 13. Will you please give me a glass of ice-water ? 
14. I recite my lessons tolerably well, and you also ; but that lazy 
scholar makes many mistakes. 15. What are now your occupa- 
tions ? 16. I am at present without occupation. 17. Did an 
earthquake manifest to the prophet Elijah {projpliete EUc) the ap- 
proach of God? 18. No ; God was neither in the earthquake nor 
in the hurricane \ but a gentle zephyr (zephyr) was felt (se Jit sen- 
tir), and God manifested himself in the zephyr. 19. In_ the same 
way also did he manifest himself in Jesus Christ. 

20. W T hat would you do if you had much money? 21. I would 
build a beautiful house. 22. Would you cultivate a garden? 23. 
Yes ; I would make a fine garden. 24. Are you going away this 

15 7 8 6 1 121 5 1 6 1 22 14 5 12 14 1 1 4 8 1 6 20 

po-ete, re-ver, ma-ri-age. pre-pa-rer, mas-cu-lin, fe-mi-nin, pas-sa-ble-menr, tar-der, loi- 

12 15 22 1 1221 14 1 21 6 J 12 5 6 1 15 

zit\ oc-cu-pa-sion, sain£, ra-con-ter, ina-ni-fes-ter, ap-proche. 



398 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



evening'? 25. I am going away at four o'clock. 26. Are your 
friends going away with you ? 27. They have gone away already. 
28. When did they go away ? 29. They went away last week. 

30. Had they gone away when I arrived? 31. Thpy Vm.r) jnsl g one 

away. 32. Does your father believe that we are going away? 33. 
He thinks that you have gone away. 34. The sacred Scriptures 
relate the history of Jesus Christ. 

II. — 1. Do you like to take a ride in a carriage better than on 
horseback? 2. Yes, sir; but my brother likes to take a ride on 
horseback better than in a carriage. 3. Do you go to bed early or 
late ? 4. I go to bed late, for I can not sleep when I go to bed 
early. 5. Does it thunder ? 6. It thunders and r ains. 7. Does 
it often snow here ? 8. Yes ; and it often hails also in winter. 9. 

Does that man flatter himself that we have come to make him a. , 

visit? 10. Yes; he believes that we have come to see him. 11. 
That man flatters himself that he is, learned; do you believe that 
-.he is? 12. "No; I believe that he is mistaken. 13. Will the moon 
shine to-night ? 14. It will shine almost all night. 15. Have you 
locked your door ? 16. No, sir ; I shut it, but I have not locked it. 

17. Your servant, sir; where are you going? You look as if 
you were very much hurried. 18. Not exactly; I am going to the 
house of my cousin, Mr. Cook. 19. Is not his lacly sick ? 20. She 
has been very sick ; but she feels herself much better now. 21. I 
am delighted at it. What is the news ? have you read the news- 
papers ? 22. Yes ; but there is nothing interesting. 23. Apropos, 
.'I have a piece of news (une nouvelle) to inform . {apjyrendre) you of: 
Mr. Brown marries (epouse) Miss Hewes. 24. Is it possible ! I 
should never have thought (songe) of such a marriage. 25. Nor I 
either (moi non plus) ; it is very strange. 26. My cousins have 
begun to study Spanish, and I also. 27. I like that language 
much, and they also. 28. This wine is tolerably good. 29. Is the 
merchant building a new store ? 30. Yes, sir ; he is building a 
new store and a new house. 



19.— DiX-NEUVIEME LEgON. 

MISCELLANEOUS EULES AND WOKDS. 
1. Prepositions compounded with d are generally followed by de. 
Around. Above. Autour de. Au-dessus de. 

Beside. Beyond. A cote de. Au-deld de. 

Even with. Unknown to. A fleur de. A I'insu de. 

Even with the ground. A fleur de terre. 

On a level with the water. A fleur d'eau. 

Above the clouds Au-dessus des nuages. 



17 1 

aude-la. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



399 



Beyond all belief. 
To confess. To pour. 
A story. A wheel. 
The lot, fate, destiny. 
To decide. That decides the question. 
To attack. To break. 
Those children break every thing. 
By means of. Afterward. 
A bridge. The throat. 
The plan. To execute. 
To employ to advantage. 
He employs his talents to advantage. 
To decide the fate. 
Pour some water on my hands. 
A house of two stories. 
A four-wheel carriage. 
The conductor. His presence. 
Let us study first, and after that we 
will read. 

By means of his money he will suc- 
ceed. 

Are you a judge of goods? 

I am not a judge of them. 
The merchant is abetter judge of them 
than I. 



Au-dela de toute croyance. 

Confesser. Verser. 

Un Stage. Une roue. 

Le sort, le destin, la destinee. 

Decider. Cela decide la question. 

Attaquer. Rompre. 

Ces enfants rompent tout. 

Au moyen de. Ensuite. 

Un pont. La gorge. 

Le plan. Exhuter. 

Faire valoir. 

II fait valoir ses talents. 

Decider du sort. 

Versez-moi de l'eau sur les mains. 
Une maison a deux etages. 
Une voiture a quatre roues. 
Le conducteur. Sa presence. 
Etudions d'abord, nous lirons ensuite. 

Au moyen de son argent il reussira. 

Yous connaissez-vous en marchan- 

dises ? 
Je ne m'y connais pas. 
Le negotiant s'y connait mieux que 

moi. 



2. To know oy is connaltre d in French. 



I know the conductor by his voice. 
By what do you know that man? 
I know him by his white hat. 
Your presence is necessary here. 



Je reconnais le conducteur a la voix. 
A quoi reconnaissez-vous cet homme ? 
Je le reconnais a son chapeau blanc. 
Yotre presence est necessaire ici. 



1. Ce petit gar^on confesse-t-il sa faute? 2. II confesse toute la 
verite. 3. Versez-moi un peu d'eau, s'il vous plait. 4. Je viens d'acheter 
une maison a trois etages et une voiture a quatre roues. 5. Cet homme 
est rualheureux, je plains son sort. 6. Avez-vous decide d'alier a la 
campagne ? 7. Oui, monsieur, j'ai decide de partir Remain. 8. Le 
general va-t-il attaquer les ennemis ? 9. Oui, il rompra le pont, et en- 
suite il les attaquera. 10. Pourra-t-il executer son plan ? 11. II l'exe- 
cutera facilement. 12. Ce malade a-t-il mal a la gorge ? 13. Oui, il a 
la gorge bien enflee. 14. J'ai donne du fruit aux enfants; chacun a sa 
part. 15. Cet homme reussira, il sait faire valoir ses talents. 16. Vous 
serez riche, vous savez faire valoir votre argent. 17. Le general est-il 
grand? 18. Oui, sa taille (stature) est fort au-dessus de la taille ordi- 
naire. 19. Avez-vous reussi a apprendre l'espagnol? 20. Oui, j'ai 
reussi au dela de mes esperances (hopes). 

20 12 3 21 5 6 7 6 5 1 ]9 16 5 14 5 12 6 5 12 6 1 1 6 

cro-vance, con-fes-se?*, ver-ser, e-tas', roue, sort, des-tin, des-ti-nee, de-ci-der, a£-ta-ker, 

21 20 12 14 3 2212 21 16 3 5 5 i2 6 21 22 11 5 3 

rompre, mo-yen, en-suite, pontf, gorge, plan, eg-ze-cu-te;', con-duc-teur, pre-zence. 



400 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



I. — 1. Please to pour a little water on my hands. 2. Has the 
thief confessed his crime? 3. He has confessed all. 4. What does 
that lady wish to sell? 5. She wishes to sell this three-story house, 
and her new four-wheel carriage. 6. How far is it to that bridge ? 
7. It is almost _two miles. 8. The foundations (fondements) of 
that building (edifice) are already even with the earth. / 

9. There were seen (on vit) ^on^ the plains of Zama, the two 
greatest generals of their time to engage in (donner) a battle, which 
was to decide 4hi3 fate of Kome and of Carthage. 10. Scipio op- 
posed (oleosa) the flower of his army to the weakest part of the 
army of the enemy. 11. Hannibal (Annibal) intended to break 
the Koman lines by means of his elephants, and to attack afterward 
upon all points (points) at once. 12. Scipio perceived his inten- 
tion, and placed his light infantry opposite to the elephants. 13. 
At the moment when these terrible animals took their start (elan) ~H 
the infantry of Scipio opened to the right and left. 14. The ele- 
phants, which their conductors could not stop, passed the openings 
(intervalles) which Scipio had provided (menages) for them, and 
which closed again (renfermereni) immediajtsly. 15. Then the 
Eoman general executed his plan with much presence of mind. 
16. It was five hundred and fifty years after the founding (la fon- 
dation) of Eome, that P. Cornelius Scipio conquered at Zama the 
only republic that could struggle (hitter) against the rising (nais- 
sante) greatness of Kome. 

II. — 1. What does your father do in the morning'? 2. As soon 
as he. has shaved and dressed, he takes his coffee, and then he goes 
out. 3. Do you wish us to play on the piano ? 4. No, miss ; I 
prefer that you sing. 5. Are you acquainted with madam B.? 
6. Yes, miss ; she is a well-bred lady. 7. Where were you when 

we called you ? 8. I was in my room writing (a ecrire) a letter 

9. Have you finished it? 10. Yes ; I had almost finished it when 
I heard you, and I finished before coming. 11. You did well ; have 
you nothing to do at present? 12. No; I have entirely (to ut-d- 
fait) finished myvwoxk^; I have nothing to do until to-morrow. 13. 
Well, let us go and see Charles. 14. With (de) all my heart ; I 
told him that I intended to go to his house this evening. 15. How 
was he when you saw him? 16. He coughed a little, but he was 
well otherwise (de teste). 17. Every body coughs now. 

18. Are you a judge of music? 19. I am not a judge of it at 
all. 20. Is Charles a better judge of it than you? 21. No; I am 
as good a judge of it as he. 22. By what do you know that man ? 
23. I know him by his^cravat. 24. Do you know the Spaniard by 
his voice? 25. No ; I know him by his coat. 

26. Some one said before an Englishman, newly arrived in 
France, that his knife cut like a razor (comme un rasoir). 27. The 
Englishman asked some one of his acquaintance what comme an 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



401 



rasoir signified (signified^}. 28. They told him without other ex- 
planation {explication) that_it signified very well. 29. The next 
day (le lendemainjLa, lady asks him how he does. 30. "You are 
very good," cries lie ; " like a razor." 



20.— VIXGTIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WOEDS. 

1. In exclamations beginning with how and an adjective, hoio is rendered by que, and 
sometimes by comme, in French, and the adjective placed at the end of the clause ; as, 

How tall you arc ! Que (comme) vous etes grand ! 

How beautiful that lady is! Que cette dame est belle! 



How black those clouds are 



Que ces images sont noirs ! 
Que vous avez le pied petit ! 
Comme il est change ! 



How small your foot-is ! 
How changed he is ! 

2. In speaking of a cup or vessel which takes d to denote its use, we commonly use the 
article when we mean the contents also : de is used to denote the vessel full, or quantity. 



The milk-cup. The pepper-box. 

A milk-pot. A pepper-box. 

A pot of milk. A box of pepper. 

Give me the vinegar-bottle. 

Give me a vinegar-bottle. 

Give me a bottle of vinegar. 

That food. The memory. 

Amusing. Free. 

Christ. The birth. 

A catholic. To create. 

A pail, bucket. A prayer. 

The hearth. The tongs. 

A railroad. That epoch, time. 

Ignominious. A cross. 

His rank. To leave. 

Nor I either. Nor we either. 

Nor thou either. Nor you either. 

To preserve. The Christian era. 

Nor he either. Nor she either. 

Nor they either. 

Go thou away. Let him go away. 
Go away. Let us go away. 



he pot au lait.* La boite au poivre. 

TJn pot a lait. Une boite a poivre. 

Tin pot de lait. Une boite de poivre. 

Donnez-moi la bouteille au vinaigre. 

Donnez-moi une bouteille a vinaigre. 

Donnez-moi une bouteille de vinaigre. 

Cet aliment. La memoire. 

Amusant. Libre (de bef. inf.). 

Le Ch7'ist. La naissance. 

Un catholique. Creer. 

Un scan. Une priere. 

he foyer, Vdtre. Les pincettes. 

Un chemin defer. Cette epoquc. 

Ignominieux. A travers. 

Son rang. Quitter. 

Ni moi non plus. Ni nous non plus. 

Ni toi non plus. Ni vous non plus. 

Conserver. h'ere chretienne. 

Ni lui non plus. Ni elle non plus. 

Ne eux non plus. Ni elles non plus. 

Va-t-en. Qu'il s'en aille. 

Allez-vous-en. Allons-nous-en. 



* At the table we may say, donnez-moi le pot au lait, when we want the milk ; at the 
crockery-sliop we say, donnez-moi un pot d lait, when we want the vessel merely. 

17 1 12 3 C 20 1 22 3 12 12 7 3 1 15 12 5 6 7 

po£, a-li-mcni5, me-mohv, a-mu-zantf, libre, Christ, nai.s-sance, ca-t/fo-like, cre-er, seau, 

12 7 20 !25 2 14 5 5 15 12 15 12 129 1 7 3 12 6 21 7 C 

ri-6iv, fo-yer, atre, pin-cette, e-poke, i-gno-mi-nieua*, tra-vers, rang, kii-ter, con-ser-ver, 



ore, chre-ti-enne. 



402 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



Are you displeased with me for that ? Me savez-vous mauvais gre de cela ? 

No, I am pleased with you for it. Kon, je vous eu sais bon gre. 

We are pleased with you for what you Nous vous savons bon gre de ce que 

have said. vous avez dit. 

We are much pleased with you for i\,./£ovlS vous en savons bcaucoup de gre. 
He goes away by the railroad. II s'en va par le chemin dc for. 

1. II est amusant de joner aux cartes, mais souvent j'aimc mieuxlire. 
2. Ce malade a perdu la memoire. 3. Quels aliments sont les meilleurs? 

4. Les aliments les plus simples sont les plus sains et les meilleurs. 

5. Ce soldat est-il libre ? 6. Oui, monsieur, il etait prisonnier, mais a 
present il est libre. 7. Dieu a cree le ciel et la terre. 8. Cette femme 
a grand soin de conserver sa beaute. 9. Le Christ est Tauteur de notre 
religion. 10. Je veux la pelle et les pincettes pour arranger le feu. 11. 
Elles sont la sur le foyer. 12. Le domestique est alle chercher un seau 
d'eau. 13. Est-il catholique ? 14. Oui, c'est un catliolique qui remplit 
tous ses devoirs. 15. Quel livre avez-vous? 16. C'est un livre de prieres. 
17. La naissance de Jesus-Christ est l'epoque ou commence Tere chre- 
tienne. 18. Annibal sut echapper a une captivite ignominieuse. 19. 
Allez-vous a travers les champs ? 20. Non, je vais a travers ces bois. 
21. Auguste etait admis (admitted) au rang des dieux. 22. Le general 
vient de quitter la ville. 23. Votre pere l'a-t-il vu ? 24. II ne Pa pas 
vu, ni moi non plus. 

I. — 1. Where are the shovel and tongs? 2. They are ift-4he__ 
chimney-corner ; do you need them? 3. Give me the tongs. 4. I 
have taken a little cold, and I have a sore throat. 5. Do you like 
simple food ? 6. I always prefer the most simple food, because it 
is the most healthy. 7. Christ has commanded us to do good to 
our enemies. 8. Did not God create the heavens and the earth ? 
9. Yes ; he is the creator (createur) of all that we see ; he is 
always creating something new. 10. You set out for Charleston 
to-day; do yoa go there by the railroad or by the steamboat? 11. 
I go there by the railroad. 12. Tell the servant to bring a pail of 
water. 13. Is the doctor a catholic or a protestant (2 oroiestan t) ° l - 
14. I do not know. 15. What book has he? 1G. It is a prayer- 
book ; he says his prayers morning and evening. 

17. Are there any persons who are entirely free ? 18. There 
are very few; I am not entirely free, nor you either. 19. Have 
you and your brothers read that amusing book ? 20. No, sir ; I 
have not read it, nor they either. 21. Do you and your sister pre- 
serve all your letters ? 22. No, sir ; I do not preserve them, nor 
she either. 23. Do not you and your cousins lack memory ? 24. 
No ; they do not lack memory, nor we either. 25. Are you dis- 
pleased with me for what I have done? 26. No, sir; I am pleased 
with you for it. 27. We are much pleased with you for having kept 
our secret. 28. That man is displeased with me for having told 
him the truth. 29. How beautiful that lady is ! How good she is ! 
30. How generous you are ! 31. How black those clouds are! it 
is going to rain. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



403 



11. — 1. Give me the pepper-box. 2. Pass me the milk-cup. 
3. What has the servant broken ? 4. He has broken a vinegar 
bottle. 5Y From the birth of Jesus Christ until now is more than 
1860 years^ 6. Caesar Augustus lived at the commencement of the 
Christian era/" 7. Have you and your brother written this exercise ? 
8. No, sir/I have not written it, nor he either. 9. What have you 
bought Y 10. I have bought a butter-cup (pot) and a pot of mus- 
tard. 11. There are several bridges in London, and some are of 
iron. 

12. Hannibal was able (sut) to escape an ignominious captivity 
by swallowing (en avalant) the poison (poison) which he carried 
.always about (sur) him. 13. Such was the end which fortune re- 
served (reservait) to this great man for _ the ...price of the passage of 
the Alps (Alpes) and of the victories of Trebia, of the lake of 
Thrasimenus, and of Cannse ( Cannes). 14. At the same time the 
conqueror of Hannibal left Eome which he had saved (sauvee), and 
went to live at his country-seat (sa campagne) near Linternum ; 
carrying into his retreat (sa retraite) only that which envy could not 
take from (en lever) him, his personal dignity (dignite personhelle). 
15. There he died. 16. The inhabitants of the place, persuaded 
(jiersuadcs) that he had been admitted to the rank of the gods, 
whom he had served, affirmed fe'assuraient) that a miraculous ser- 
pent (serpent miraculeiix) guarded the approach to his tomb (de- 
fendait Faeces de son tombeau) placed under a myrtle (myrte) which 
he had planted (plante) himself, and under the shade of which he 
came often to repose (se reposer). 



21.— VINGT-ET-UNIEME LE£ON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WOEDS. 

1. Some adjectives vary their meaning as they are placed before or after their substan- 
tives; thus, 

Un grand hovunc. A great man. Un homme grand. A tall man. 

Un pauvre homme. A man to be Un homme pauvre A man in poverty, 
pitied. 

Un brave homme. A worthy man. Un homme brave. A brave man. 
Un honntte homme. An honest man. Un homme honnete. A polite man. 
Un gal ant homme. A man of honor. Un homme galant. A gallant man. 

2. A simple man is bonhomme, commonly written as one word; a good man, homme 
ion, or brave homme, homme de Men, etc. 

The first quality in society is to be a La premiere qualite dans la societe 
good man. est d'etre un homme bon (better 

homme de bie?i). 

He is a simpleton, whom they make C'est un bonhomme, h qui Ton fait 
believe whatever they please. croire tout ce qu'on veut. 

For more on this subject, see page 485. 



404 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



A stair-case. The day before, eve. 
A safety-railing. The old woman. 
A fireman. A. limit. 
Christmas. Christmas eve. 
The parlor. To get drunk. 
A preacher. To preach. 
A priest. According to. 
A chill. The lightning. 
To direct. The retreat. 
A protestant. 



Un escalicr. La w*7/e. 

Un garde-foa. La vieille. 

Un pjompicr. Une borne. 

Notl. La m/Ze efe Aoe7. 

Le salon. S'enivrer. 

Un predicateur. P richer. 

Un pretre. Selon. 

Un frisson. La foudre. 

Diriger. La retraite. 

Un protestant. Une yrotestante. 



3. We have already seen that in some phrases the English verb fo £eep is rendered in 
French by £eni/\ Such phrases are very numerous. 



He acts according to circumstances. II agit selon les cir Constances. 



A safety-railing is necessary on this II faut un garde-fou sur ce pont. 



1. Connaissez-vous madarae S. ? 2. Oui, c'est une bonne vieille. 3. 
Monsieur A. preche-t-il bien? 4. Oui, niadame, c'est un predicateur 
tres-eloquent. 5. Agissez-vous touj ours selon votre opinion? 6. Non, 
je suis oblige quelquefois d'agir selon les circonstances. 7. Cette petite 
fille a-t-elle peur de la foudre ? 8. Elle en a bien pern*. 9. Quand irez- 
vous a la ville? 10. J'irai la veille de Noel. 11. Peut-on touj ours etre 
lieureux ? 12. Non, monsieur, on ne pent echapper a sa destinee. 13. 
Ce pretre preche-t-il bien ? 14. II preche tres-bien. 15. N'avez-vous pas 
des livres dans le salon? 16. J'y en ai quelques-uns. 17. L'Espagne a 
pour bornes deux mers et les Pyrenees. 18. Notre general n'a-t-il 
pas trop d'ambition? 19. Oui, son ambition n'a point de bornes. 20. Ou 
dirigez-vous cet etranger ? 21. Je lui indique le chemin de l'hotel. 22. 
Ce salon est bien eclaire. 23. Cet arbre est tres-grand ; il s'eleve au- 
dessus de tous les autres. 

I. — 1. Did the firemen go up those stairs % 2. They ascended 
them, but they came down again. 3. Is that man a priest 1 ? 4. 
No ; he is a doctor. 5. Are there two parlors in this house ? 6. 
There is a large one and a small one. 7. Does that man get drunk 



5 1 125 5 1 4 18 125 21 12 C 16 17 5 1 21 3 12 6 5 12 1 

es-ca-lier, veille, gar-de-fou, •vieille, pom-pier, born£, 7i6-tel, sa-lon, en-i-vrer, pre-di-ca- 

11 8 21 12 21 18 12 12 6 i 7 15 5 3 12 21 3 

teur, pretre, selon, fris-son, foudre, di-ri-ger, re-traite, pro-tes-tantf, cir-con-stances. 



He keeps a hotel, a tavern. 
The sick man keeps his bed. 
She keeps school. 
I keep the door open. 
I keep my word, promise. 
Keep your eyes shut. 
The chill has attacked him. 



II tient un hotel, une auherge. 

Le malade tient (better garde) le lit. 

Elle tient ecole. 

Je tiens la porte ouverte. 

Je tiens ma parole, promesse. 

Tenez les yeux fermes. 

Le frisson Fa pris. 



The fireman ascends the stairs. 
He gets drunk on brandy. 
The parlor is lighted. 



Le pompier monte l'escalier. 
II s'enivre d'eau de vie. 
Le salon est eclaire. 



bridge. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



405 



often ? 8. Yes ; he is a drunkard ; he gets drunk every day on 
brandy, wine, or beer. 9. Does the master pay the workmen ac- 
cording to their work ? 10. He pays each one according to his 
work. 11. Is your preacher eloquent? 12. He is extremely elo- 
quent. 13. Does he preach twice on Sunday? 14. He preaches 
three times every Sunday. 15. Are there many churches in your 
village ? 16. There are only two, one catholic and one protestant. 
17. Is that old woman rich ? 18. She is not rich ; she is poor. 
19. That poet likes retirement (la retraite). 20. Yes ; he has a 
taste for retirement. 

21. Will you be here on Christmas ? 22. I shall be here on 
Christmas eve. 23. That tree is struck with lightning. 24. The 
fever is usually preceded by a chill. 25. What is the matter with 
that sick man % 26. The chill has attacked him. 27. Who directs 
your studies? 28. The master directs them. 29. What makes so 
much noise? 30. The firemen make it. 31. Why does that child 
cry? 32. Because he has fallen from the top of that staircase. 33. 
Is it necessary to obey the laws ? 34. Yes ; whosoever shall not 
obey them will be punished. 35. Was it necessary that the sick 
man should take a ride on horseback? 36. No; it was suitable 
that he should take a ride in a carriage. 37. Has your brother 
debts ? 38. Yes ; but he will pay his debts soon. 39. Why do 
you keep your windows open ? 40. I keep them open because it is 
warm. 

II. — 1. Why do you keep your eyes shut ? 2. I keep them 
shut because they pain me. 3. What does that Frenchman do ? 
4. He keeps a dancing-school. 5. Did your friend think that you 
had been sick ? 6. He was afraid that I had died. 7. Was your 
door locked last evening ? 8. No ; although I had gone out, my 
door was not locked. 9. Your father came down from his room 
this morning; has he not gone up to it again? 10. He went up 
again, and has again come down. 11. Does the master grant you 
much time ; to play ? 12. We can always play, provided we have 
finished ourTessons. 13. Has your friend succeeded in paying that 
man for the house ? 14. Yes, sir ; but I doubt his having succeeded 
without you. 15. Did not those men run away the other day as 
soon as they had seen the enemy? 16. They ran away before the 
enemy had come. 

17. Malek, general of the calif (calif e) Mostali, in the last im- 
portant victory which he gained over the Greeks, made prisoner 
the emperor Alexis. 18. Malek asked the prince what treatment 
(traitement) he expected from his conqueror. 19. "If the calif 
makes war as a king," answered the emperor, " he will send me 
back (renverra) without ransom (ranqori) ; if he makes it as a mer- 
chant, he will sell me ; if he makes it as a butcher (boucher), he 
will cut my throat (m'egorgera)." 20. The general, admiring the 



406 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



noble boldness (aaclace) of the emperor, sent him back without 
ransom. 

21. A thief having introduced himself (s'etant introduit) during 
the night into the room of a poor man, looked for something to 
steal, but found nothing. 22. The poor man, who was not sleep- 
ing, said to him laughing: "Thou hast mistaken, my friend, in 
coming during the night to look for something here, where / can 
find nothing during the day." 



22.— VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON. 

MISCELLANEOUS RULES AND WORDS. 
1. Cest, with d before the infinitive, denotes turn ; with de, right or duty. 
It is your turn to begin. Cest a vous a commencer. 

It is my turn to recite. (Test a moi a reciter. 

It belongs to the master to teach. Cest au maitre c^'enseigner. 

It belongs to the scholar to learn. (Test a l'ecolier eTapprendre. 

2. What with an infinitive is translated by que, and if the sentence be negative, pas is 
omitted. 

I do not know what to do. Je ne sais que faire. 

He does not know what to say. II ne sait que dire. 

A presbyterian. To embrace, kiss. Un presbyterien. Embrasser. 

Episcopal. 3fethodist. Episcopal. Methodiste. 

The poison. An existence. Le poison. L T ne existence. 

A fish. Unitarian. Un poisson. Unitaire. 

A romance, novel. To separate. Un roman. Separer. 

A department. Executive. Un departement. Executif. 

Legislative. Judicial. Legislatif. Judiciaire. 

An adviser. Supreme. Un conseiller. Supreme 

Inferior. A tavern. Inferieur. Une taverne, un cabaret. 

3. The imperfect tense of venir, followed by de and an infinitive, denotes that the ac- 
tion of the infinitive had just been done. 

I had just arrived. Je venais cTarriver. 

He had just gone away. II venait de s'en aller. 

4. When a collective noun, followed by de and another noun, form the subject, the verb 
agrees with that one of the two nouns which forms the leading idea. 

A troop of assassins entered the room. Une troupe d'assassins entra dans la 

chambre. 

A troop of nymphs crowned with flow- Une troupe de nymphes couronnees de 

ers followed her. fleurs la suivaient. 

A dozen men have come. Une douzaine oVhommes sont venus. 

5 12 5 1214 8 1 6 5 12 15 1 5 15 12 20 21 5 12 3 22 12 7 

ores-bv-te-rien, em-bras-ser, e-pis-co-pal, me-t7u>-dist<?, poi-zon, eg-zis-tenc<?, u-ni-taire, 

15 3 5 16 5 4 3 5 5 22 12 5 12 1 19 22 12 12 7 21 5 5 22 

ro-man, se-pa-rer, de-par-te-men*, eg-ze-cu-tif, le-gis-la-tif, ju-di-ciaire, con-seil-ler, su- 

8 14 5 12 11 17 116 

prem*, in-fe-rieur. ta-verne, ca-ba-ret. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



407 



Your dozen of apples is on the table. 



Votre douzaine de pommes est sur la 



What is that ? 



table. 

Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela ? or, Qu'esi- 



I do not know what that is. 

I do not know what it is. 

What a pity ! 

What a beautiful day ! 

To be familiar with, 

I am familiar with that. 

She is familiar with housekeeping. 

My watch is ten minutes too fast. 

Yours is half an hour too slow. 



ce que cela? or, Qu'est cela? 
Je ne sais pas ce que c'est que cela. 
Je ne sais pas ce que c'est. 
Quel dommage ! 
Quelle belle journee ! 
Eire au fait de. 
Je suis au fait de cela. 
Elle est au fait du menage. 
Ma montre avance de dix minutes. 
La votre retarde d'un quart d'heure. 



I have set that clock forward an hour. J'ai avance cette pendule d'une heure. 



1. Oh. est le nouveau roman que vous avez achete? 2. II est dans 
le salon sur la table. 3. Combien d'eglises y a-t-il dans votre village ? 
4. II y en a cinq, une catliolique, une presbyterienne, une episcopale, une 
methodiste et une unitaire. 5. Get ecolier a Pesprit capable d'embras— — 
ser toutes sortes de sciences. 6. La mer separe la France de PAngle- 
terre. 7. Tout ce qui est au monde tient son existence de Dieu. 8. Y 
a-t-il du poisson sur la table ? 9. II y a du poisson frais et du sale. 10. 
Votre ami est-il arrive? 11. Oui, monsieur, il venait d'arriver quand je 
Pai vu ce matin. 12. Aviez-vous dejeune quand je vous ai vu ce matin ? 
13. Oui, je venais de dejeuner. 14. C'est a vous a reciter ; n'est-cepas? 
15. Non, monsieur, c'est a Charles. 16. II y a trois departements de 
notre gouverneraent, Fexecutif, le legislatif, et le judiciare. 17. Les 
conseilleurs da president se nomment le cabinet. 18. On est votre che- 
val? 19. Je Pai laisse a l'auberge. 20. Je suis au fait de ces affaires. 

I. — 1. It is my turn to recite; is it not? 2. No; it is your 
brother's. 3. It is my right to go out to-day; is it not? 4. Yes, 
it is yours. 5. Where were your brothers, when I met you yester- 
day ? 6. They had just set out for the country. 7. How many 
churches are there in this village ? 8. There are eight ; two Pres- 
byterian, two Catholic, two Methodist, one Episcopal, and one Uni- 
tarian. 9. If you took that poison, would you die ? 10. I should 
die. 11. Did the mother find her child ? 12. She found him, and 
embraced him tenderly {tendremeni). 13. What did your boy buy 
at the market 1 14. He bought some salt fish and some fresh. 
15. Have you read this new novel? 16. No, sir; I never read 
novels. 17. Does Europe touch Africa? 18. No ; Europe touches 
Asia, but the sea separates it from Africa. 

19. That man does not know what to do with his money. 20. 



Put your watch back five minutes. 
"Wind up that watch and set it. 



Retardez votre montre de cinq minutes. 
Montez cette montre et mettez-la a 



They have set that clock (right). 



l'heure (or reglez-la). 
On a, mis cette horloge a l'heure. 



5 1 

me-naga. 



408 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



Do not all animals hold their existence from God? 21. Yes ; all 
that there is in the world holds its existence from him. 22. Had 
I better read this novel? 23. No; you had better read this his- 
tory. 24. What a beautiful day ! 25. Yes ; the weather is su- 
perb ; it is long since we have had a time so beautiful and so healthy. 
26. Did you go to the play last night ? 27. Yes ; and I stayed 
there until eleven ; I amused myself much. 28. And you ; how 
did you pass the evening? 29. I heard Miss L. 30. How did you 
like her? 31. Oh ! I assure you that she merits well the name of 
Queen of Song. 32. It belongs to the master to teach; does it 
not? 33. It belongs to the master to teach, and to the scholars to 
learn. 34. I had just finished my exercise when the master came. 
35. Is that young girl familiar with housekeeping ? 36. She is 
very familiar with it. 

II. — 1. The government of the United States is divided [divist) 
into three departments ; the executive, the legislative, and the ju- 
dicial. 2. The executive consists of (consiste en) a president and 
his advisers, called, the cabinet ; the legislative consists of a senate 
and house of representatives; the judicial is j^>TnpogfH ^ of m'np! 
judges of the supreme court, with several judges of the inferior 
courts. 3. The senate is composed of two members furnished 
(fournis) by each state. 4. The vice-president of the United 
States isj)resident of the senate. 5. The house of representatives 
is composed of representatives sent by each state according to the 
number of its inhabitants. G. Is not your watch too fast? 7. 
No, sir ; it is about ten minutes too slow. 8. Have you wound up 
your watch to-day? 9. I have wound it up, and set it. 

10. That clock is too slow. 11. Put it forward half an hour. 
12. My watch is too fast. 13. Did you wind it up this morning? 
14. Yes, sir; I wound it up at six o'clock. 15. A man had two 
sons ; the one loved to sleep late in the morning, and the other was 
very industrious, and always rose very early. 16. The latter, hav- 
ing gone out {etant sorti) one day early in the morning, found a 
purse [une bourse) full of money. 17. He ran to his brother to 
communicate (/aire part de) to him his good fortune, and said to 
him: " See, Lewis, what one gains J3j_rising early." 18. "My 
faith ! " answered his brother, " if he. toTVhom the purse belongs 
had not risen earlier than I, he would not have lost it." 



23. — VINGT-TROISI15ME LEQON. 

WOEDS AND IDIOMS. 
It wants, it lacks. Il s'en faut {governs the subjunctive). 

1. H s'en faut, used in reference to quantity, takes de after it ; used of moral qualities, 
not regarded as quantity, it omits de. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



409 



There are not a hundred dollars on 
that table ; it lacks much of it. 

The country is not peopled in propor- 
tion to its extent ; it lacks much 
of it. 

Charles is not so good as his brother ; 

it lacks much of it. 
The author is not my friend ; it lacks 

much of it. 



II n'y a pas cent dollars sur cette ta- 
ble ; il s'en faut de beaucoup. 

Le pays n'est pas peuple a proportion 
de son etendue ; il s'en faut de 
beaucoup. 

Charles n'est pas si sage que son frere ; 
il s'en faut beaucoup. 

L'auteur n'est pas mon ami ; il s'en 
faut beaucoup. 



2. II s'en faut, used interrogatively or negatively, or accompanied by a word having the 
force of a negative, as guere, peu, presque rien, etc., takes ne before a dependent subjunctive. 
It does not want much of their num- II ne s'en faut pas de beaucoup que 

ber's being complete. leur nombre ne soit complet. 

It wants much of Charles being as II s'en faut beaucoup que Charles soit 

good as his brother. aussi sage que son frere. 

It wants little of this vase's being full. Jr's'en faut de peu que ce vase ne soit 

plein. 



TO CALL ONE THOU AND THEE. 

They call each other thou and thee. 
He is familiar; he calls every body 
thou and thee. 

To MARRY. 



Tut oyer. 

lis se tutoient. 

II est familier : 



il tutoie tout le monde. 



Marier, se marier, epouser. 



To marry, meaning to give or join in marriage, is marier ; meaning to take for hus- 



band or wife, is epouser or se marier avec, 
marier. 

Your uncle marries his daughter to 

my brother. 
Your cousin marries my brother. 

Your cousin married yesterday. 

To fight. Since. 

Jealous. To get angry (with). 

To entreat. A favor. 

He is jealous of your glory. 

T/ierefore, for that reason. Complete. 

At all events, however it may be. 

He is sick, he has no time, it rains in 

torrents, at all events he will 

come. 
He is admirably well. 
It is the finest weather in the world. 
At what point ? At what point are we ? 
Where did we stop ? 
There is where we stopped. 
He fights with his neighbor. 



intransitive, meaning to get married, is se 

Yotre oncle marie sa fille a (avec) mon 
frere. 

Yotre cousine epouse (se marie avec) 

mon frere. 
Yotre cousine s'est mariee hier. 
Se battre. Puisque, depuis que. 
Jaloux. Se fdcher (contre). 
Supplier. Une grace. 
II est jaloux de votre gloire. 
Cest pourquoi. Complet. 
Quoi quHl en soit. 

II est malade, il n'a pas le temps, it 
pleut a verse, quoi qu'il en soit il 
viendra. 

II se porte a merveille. 

II fait le plus beau temps du monde. 

Ou en ? Ou en sommes-nous ? 

Oii en sommes-nous restes ? 

Yoila ou nous en sommes restes. 

H se bat avec son voisin. 



22 20 126 1 126 5 18 1 18 2 6 22 12 6 2 21 S 

tu-to-yer, ma-rier, e-pou-zer, ja-loucc, fa-cher, sup-plier, grace, com-plei. 



18 



410 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



1. Le nombre d'eleves de votre ecole est-il complet? 2. Non, mon- 
sieur, il s'en faut de beaucoup que leur nombre soit complet. 3. Cet ou- 
vrage n'est-il pas presque fini ? ^J^il ne s'en faut guere qu'il ne soit nn4r" 

5. Ce monsieur et cette dame se'niarieront-ils ? 6. Oui, ils se marieront 
bientot. 7. Le fils de votre voisine se mariera-t-il avec (epousera-t-il) sa 
cousine ? 8. Oui, ils se marieront la semaine prochaine. 9. Puisque mon 
pere le veut j'apprendrai le francais. 10. Cet liomme se fache contre 
moi. 11. Oes homines se tutoient, ce sont d'anciens camarades. 12. Ces 
petits garcons sont tres-mechants ; ils se sont battus a plusieurs reprises. 
13. Le vieux soldat est malade; je vous supplie, monsieur, d'aller le 
voir. 14. Faites-moi la grace de me preter votre canif un moment. 

15. Cet liomme est jaloux de votre gloire; c'est pourquoi il vous halt. 

16. Votre montre est-elle juste ? 17. Non, elle avance de quinze minutes. 

17. II pleut depuis liier soir; et, puisqu\\ fait si mauvais temps, je ne 
sortirai pas ce matin. (The two different acceptations of since.) 

I. — 1. Do you want much, of having finished that lesson? 2. I 
-want little of having finished this lesson, but I have not begun ter~* 
study the other. 3. Does it want much of your being as tall as 1 1 
4. No, sir; it wants an inch of your being as tall as I. 5. Will 
that gentleman and lady marry ? 6. Yes, sir ; they will marry the 
day before Christmas. 7. Will your sister marry my cousin ? 8. 
They will marry next month. 9. Do not those boys behave badly? 
10. Yes, sir; they have fought several times. 11. Does that man 
fight with his friend? 12. He fights with him sometimes. 13. 
Will your neighbor travel this summer? 14. Yes; since he has 
sufficient money, he will travel. 15. What do you intend to study ? 
16. Since the master desires it, I will study German. 

17. With whom does your neighbor get angry? 18. He gets 
angry with everybody. 19. Does he get angry with you? 20. 
He often gets angry with me. 21. We read in this book ; where 
did we stop? 22. Here is where we stopped. 23. Do me the fa- 
vor to lend me your new novel. 24. With pleasure ; there it is at 
your service. 25. Is your cousin familiar with this business ? 26. 
He is very familiar with it. 27. When will you comedo see me ? 
28. I will come to see you Christmas eve. 29. Does that young lady 
play well on the piano ? 30. Yes, sir ; she is very familiar with _ 
(versee dazip) music. 31. John, why dost thou not call me thou and 
thee as thy brother does ? Old (anciens) school companions ought to 
call each other thou and thee. 32. I have never seen that man be- 
fore (auparavant), but he is too familiar; he calls me thou and thee 

II. — t^While you were staying in the country, did you some- 
times write-JJrench^? 2. No, never; it was impossible for me to 
write any, since I had not my books. 3. It is a pity ; you will 
forget all that you have learned. 4. I believe not, for I speak 
French pretty (assez) often. 5. That is not enough ; it is neces- 
sary to write French also ; in writing, you learn the rules better. 

6. In speaking every day one ought to learn also. 7. Yes ; if one 
speaks distinctly, and if one pays_£<p'oft fasse) attention to the 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



411 



mistakes which he makes, there is no doubt that one learns ; but if 
you have the patience to speak, to read, and to write a little every 
day, you will learn in a very little time. 

8. A poor comedian, who had much wit, but little money to pay 
for his dinner, went to. make, a visit to a banker celebrated (ban- 
quier celebre) for his riches and his avarice, and proposed (proposa) 
to him an operation {operation), in which there was, he said, a hun- 
dred thousand francs to be gained. 9. The banker, who was going 
to seat himself (se vie tire) at the table, invited the comedian to dine. 
10. The latter accepted. 11. After dinner the banker asked the 
comedian some particulars regarding (des details- sur) the operation 
of which he had spoken. 12. " Sir," said the comedian, " I have 
been told that you give two hundred thousand francs as a dowry (en 
mariage) to your daughter. 13. Well, I (moi, je) will take her for 
half that sum ; it is then, clear that, in granting me the hand of 
your daughter, you gain a hundred thousand francs." 

14. An Englishman, on his first visit to France, met in the 
streets of Calais a very young child, who spoke French fluently 
(couramment). 15. " Good heavens (mon Dieu) ! is it possible ! " 
cried he, " that even the children here speak French so purely." 



24.— YINGT-QUATRI^ME LEQON. 

WOEDS AND IDIOMS. 



To have a grudge against some one. 
Have you not a grudge against that 
man? 

He has a grudge against you. 

He has a grudge against every body. 

To lay blame on some one. 

He lays the blame of that evil on me. 

I shall lay the blame on you for all 

that can happen. 
To manage, to set about. 
He manages badly. 
You manage well. 

He sets about it like one who under- 
stands it. 
They manage properly. 
I set about it in this way. 
To find fault with, to blame. 
He finds fault with what I do. 
I find nothing to blame in that work. 



En vouloir a quelqv)un. 

N'en voulez-vous pas h cet homme ? 

II vous en veut. 

II en veut a tout le monde. 

8' en prendre a quelgu'un. 

II s'en prend a, moi de ce mal. 

Je m'en prendrai a vous de tout ce qui 

pourra arriver. 
$'y prendre. 
II s'y prend mal. 
Vous vous y prenez bien. 
II s'y prend en homme qui s'y entend. 

lis s'y prennent comme il faut. 
Je m'y prends ainsi. 
Trouver & redire. 

II trouve a redire a ce que je fais. 
Je ne trouve rien a redire dans cet 
ouvrage. 



4 13 

re-dire. 



412 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



There is nothing to blame in his con- 
duct. 

I have no quarrel with that practice. 

Hie strife is who. 

The strife is who shall play. 

The strife is who shall have it. 

The strife is who shall dance with her. 

To be at stake. His life is at stake. 

Consider that your fortune is at stake. 

His all is at stake. 

It is an affair in which the public in- 
terest is at stake. 
To long. 

I long to have my house built. 

He longs to finish his work. 

I longed to see you. 

To aim at (with a gun). 

I aim at the bird. 

He was aiming at me. 

To fire a gun. 

The trunk. In emulation. 

A whirlwind. To obscure. 

A shot. To yield. 

Stormy. A pyramid. 

The fir-tree. Its fury. 

To oppose. To bend. 

A branch. Flexible. 



II n'y a rien a redire a sa conduite. 

Je ne trouve point a redire a cette 

coutume. 
Ccst a qui. 
C'est a qui jouera. 
C'est a, qui l'aura. 
C'est a, qui dansera avec elle. 
Y aller de. II y va de sa vie. 
Songez qu'il y va de votre fortune. 
II y va de son tout. 
C'est une affaire ou il y va de l'interet 

public. 

Tarder (impersonal), {de bef. inf.). 

II me tarde que ma maison soit batie. 

II lui tarde de finir son ouvrage. 

II me tardait de vous voir. 

Voucher en joue, mettre ehjoue. 

Je couche l'oiseau en joue. 

II me couchait en joue. 

Titer un fusil. 

Le tronc. A Venvi. 

Un tourbillon. Obscurcir. 

Un coup de fusil. Se rendte. 

Orageux. Une pytamide. 

Le sapin. Sa furie, fureur. 

Opposer. Ployer. 

Un tameau. Flexible. 



1. Cet homme nVt-il pas d'ennemis? 2. Si, monsieur, les gens ja- 
loux de sa fortune lui en veulent. 3. Quelqu'un a casse ces fenetres et 
l'on s'en prend amoi comme si je l'avais fait. 4. S'il j a du mal prenez- 
vous en~a vous meme. 5. Comment le domestique s'y prend-il pour 
allumer le feu ? 6. II s'y prend assez bien. 7. Trouvez-vous a redire a la 
conduite de cet homme ? 8. Je trouve a redire a tout ce qu'il fait. 9. Trou- 
vez-vous a redire au plan de cet ouvrage ? 10. Je n'y trouve rien a redire. 

11. Ces hommes font beaucoup de bruit, c'est a qui parlera le plus haut. 

12. Ces ecoliers etudient a l'envi les uns des autres, c'est a qui sera le 
premier. 13. Cet homme ne courj&it-il pas un grand danger en atta- 
quant ce loup furieux? 14. Si, monsieur, il y allait de sa vie. 15. Sou- 
venez-vous qu'il j va de votre honneur et de votre vie. 16. II me tarde 
bien que mon ami soit hors de cette affaire. 17. H me tarde d'achever 
mon ouvrage. 18. Mon frere a mon fusil pour le tirer. 19. Veut-il 
tuer quelque chose ? 20. II couche cet oiseau en joue. 21. Cet homme 
couche-t-il le voleur en joue? 22. Oui, madame, il lui tirera un coup 
de fusil s'il ne se rend pas. 



21 1 3 12 18 12 21 15 22 12 15 1 10 12 1 12 1 14 22 13 22 11 

tronc, a-l'en-vi, tour-bil-lon, obs-cur-cir, o-ra-geuaj, py-ra-mide, sa-pin, fu-rie, fu-reur, 

15 17 6 20 12 6 1 17 5 12 

op-po-zer, plo-yer, ra-meau, flek-sible. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



413 



I. — 1. The winters of Siberia are subject to storms. 2. Often 
at the moment-when- the sky appears the most serene {serein) terri- 
ble hurricanes come suddenly, to obscure it. 3. Issuing (partis) 
from two opposite points of the horizon, the one comes loaded with 
the ices of the North Sea, and the other with the stormy whirlwinds 
of the Caspian (Caspienne). 4. If they meet, if they strike each 
other (se choquent), the fir-trees oppose in vain to their fury their 
robust (robustes) trunks, and their long pyramids ; in vain the 
birches (bouleaux) bend even to the earth their flexible branches, 
and their trembling foliage (mobile feuillage) ; every thing is broken, 
every thing is overthrown, and immense spaces are covered with the 
ruins (mines) of nature. 

5. General Dumesnil commanded the place of Vincennes, when 
the Eussians and the armies of the allies rendered themselves 
masters of Paris in 1814. 6. The citadel (la citadelle) of Vin- 
cennes being only (d\ three miles from Paris, the allies believed that 
it would be easy for them to take it. 7. The Eussians summoned 
(sommerent) Dumesnil several times t&surrender (rendre) the place. 
8. But the French general, who had lost a leg in^the campaign of 
Eussia, answered them always gaily (avec gaite) : " I have left my 
left leg in your country ; send it back to me and I will surrender to 
you the place." 

II. — 1. A doctor, very avaricious, was called to attend the sick 
wife of a poor man. 2. The latter, believing that he perceived that 



the doctor was afraid that he would not be paid for (de) his trouble, 
said to him, " I have ten pounds sterling (sterling) ; and if you kill 
or cure my wife, I will give them to you." 3. The woman died. 
4. Some days after, the doctor went to claim the ten pounds ster- 
ling. 5. The poor widower asked him, "Have you killed my wife?" 
6. " No," answered the doctor. 7. " Have you cured her ? " 
"No." 8. "Then you have no right to that sum, and I think 
(trouve) it very astonishing that you come to claim it." 

9. Voltaire and Piron had been invited to pass some weeks in a 
castle (im chateau). 10. These two celebrated waiters (celebres ecri- 
vains) amused themselves sometimes in composing little epigrams 
against each other. 11. One day Piron wrote on the door of Vol- 
taire Eogue (Coquin). 12. The author (auteur) of the Henriade, 
thinking that Piron was the inventor (inventeur) of this new kind 
(genre) of epigram, went to his room (chez lui). 13. " What happy 
chance (hasard) procures (procure) me the pleasure and the honor 
of seeing you V said Piron to him. 14. " Sir," answered Voltaire, 
" I saw your name on my door, and I come to return you my visit." 

15. A Gascon used to say, " The mud of Paris has two great 
inconveniences (inconvenients). 16. The first is to make black 
spots on white stockings ; the second to make white spots on black 
stockings." 



4U 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



25.— YINGT-CINQUIEME LECON. 

WOED9 AND IDIOMS. 



To be in vain. It is in vain for you 
to study, you will never learn 
French. 

It is in vain for that man to work, he 

can not finish his task. 
It is in vain for us to solicit, he will 

not grant us that favor. 
To overlook, to command a view of. 
Your window overlooks the garden. 
My windows overlook the street. 
To leave it to. 
I leave it to yourself. 
He leaves it to what you shall say. 
To abide by. 

I abide by your decision. 
What is your friend's decision ? 
He abides by our opinion. 
He abides by his word. 
To fail of satisfying. 
He fails much of satisfying. 
She is defective in nothing. 
It is all over with. 
It is all over with us. 
It is all over with him. 
To bear the stamp of. 
That work bears the stamp of genius. 
Of course, that is understood. 
Will the master explain all difficul- 
ties ? 

Certainly ; that is understood. 
Real. A definition. 
The mayor. Admirable. 
A passport. To describe. 
A remembrance. A handfull. 
The duke. The menagery. 
Despair. To precipitate. 



Avoir beau. Yous avez beau etudier, 
vous n'apprendrez jamais le fran- 
cais. 

Get homrae a beau travailler, il ne pout 

finir sa tache. 
Nous avons beau soliciter, il ne nous 

accordera pas cette grace. 

Bonner sur. 

Yotre fenetre donne sur le jardin. 

Mes fenetres donnent sur la rue. 

S'en rapporter d. 

Je m'en rapporte a vous meme. 

II s'en rapporte a ce que vous direz. 

S'en tenir a. 

Je m'en tiens a votre decision. 

A quoi votre ami s'en tient-il ? 

lis s'en tient a notre opinion. 

II s'en tient a son mot. 

Laisser a desirer. 

II laisse beaucoup a desirer. 

Elle ne laisse rien a desirer. 

Cen est fait de. 

C'en est fait de nous. 

Cen est fait de lui. 

Etre frappe (or marque) au coin de. 

Cet ouvrage est frappe au coin de genie. 

Cela va sans dire, cela s'entend. 

Le maitre expliquera-t-il toutes les 

difficulty ? 
Certainement ; cela va sans dire. 
Reel. Une definition. 
Le maire. Admirable. 
Un passe-port. Depcindre. 
Un souvenir. Une poignee. 
Le due. La menagerie. 



Le descspoir. Pr'ecipiter. 

1. J'ai beau parler, vous ne m'ecoutez pas. 2. J'eus beau faire et 
beau dire, il persista dans sa resolution. 3. Ce garcon a beau etudier, 
il n'apprendra rien ; il n'a point de memoire. 4. Mes fenetres donnent 
sur le jardin de notre voisin. 5. Je veux acheter cette maison, et je 

1 16 6 5 5 5 12 1212 21 7 1 12 1 2 16 5 14 18 12 

raw-por-ter, re-el, cle-ft-ni-sion, maire, ad-rni-rabk, passe-por?, de-peindre, souve-nir, 

20 "6 22 5 1 13 5 5 20 5 12 -12 6 

poi-gnee, due, me-nage-rie, de-zes-poir, pre-ci-pi-te>\ 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



415 



m'en rapporte au charpentier pour le prix. 6. A quoi votre frere s'en 
tiendra-t-il ? 7. II s'en tiendra a votre opinion. 8. Des que ce mar- 
chand vous a dit le prix, il s'en tient a son dernier mot. 9. A qui vou- 
lez-vous que nous , en rapportions? 10. Je m'en rapporte a vous- 
memes. 11. Cette lettre est charmante, elle ne lais.se rien a desirer. 
12. Votre livre est agreable a lire, mais il laisse beaucoup a desirer. 13. 
Le vieux soldat est blesse a mort ; e'en est fait de lui. 14. Le malade 
va mourir ; e'en est fait de lui. 15. Cet ouvrage a du merite, cependant il 
laisse beaucoup a desirer. 16. Votre ouvrage a beaucoup de merite, il 
est marque au coin de la logique (Jogique) et de l'esprit francais. 17. 
Si vous voulez apprendre le francais, n'etudierez-vous pas beaucoup ? 
18. Oertainement, cela va sans dire. 19. Je garderai un ettrnel souvenir 
du service que vous m'avez rendu. 20. Qu'a ce garcon dans la main ? 
21. II a une poignee d'argent. 

I. — 1. What do you find difficult in that lesson? 2. It is the 
subjunctive. 3. That is not very easy,, it is true ; but give atten- 
tion, and let us see how you will translate this. 4. Do you affirm 
that I take your fruit? 5. Well, why do you put premie, which 
is the subjunctive of to take ? 6. Because when the verb is inter- 
rogative or negative it marks doubt. 7. You answer admirably 
well. 8. How ought one to say this? 9. He fears that his broth- 
er is (soil) sick. 10. .Not quite correct (juste). 11. What fault 
have I committed % 12. Craindre, avoir pear, and all adverbs and 
conjunctions which express the idea of fear, require (demandent) 
that one put ne before the subjunctive which follows them. 13. 
Then it is necessary to say, He fears that his brother may be (ne 
soit) sick. 14. Can you give me a general rule which can make 
me see when one ought to make use of (se servir) the subjunctive ? 
15. It is not always very easy. 16. It will be necessary for you to 
remember words and phrases, which require it. 17. Shall I not 
find that very difficult? 18. Not so muchi so as you believe. 19. 
I advise you to make many phrases like those which you have just 
made, and by dint fa- force) of making them (en) you will learn. 

20. The mayor of a small village in France, being obliged to 
give a passport to a distinguished personage (personnage distingue), 
who was blind of one eye, was afraid of .joffending him by mention- 
ing (menlionnant) his deformity (sa difformite), when he would de- 

■ scribe his person . 21. To avoid this, and to fulfill at the same time 

the rigorous (rigoureuses) obligations of his charge (sa charge), he 
employed the following expedient (expedient). 22. He wrote on 
the passport, Large and beautiful black eyes, one of which is absent. 

II. — 1. " Politeness," says President Witherspoon, " is real 
goodness expressed with goodness ; " an admirable definition, and 
so brief (breve) that one can retain (retenir) it easily. 2. Put it in 
practice, and every body will be charmed with your manners. 

3. A mayor, benefactor (bienfaiteur) of his district (sa commune), 
having died on (clans) a journey which he made to Paris, his people 
(administres) raised to him a tomb (tombeau), on which they had 



416 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



engraved {graver) in Jarge letters, " Here lies (ci git) Mr. B., buried 
(enterre) in Paris." 

4. A lion of the grand duke of Tuscany (Toscanfy* having got 
out of the menagerie, entered into the city of Florence, and spread- 
there much panic (cpouvante). 5. Among the fugitives (fugitifs) 
there happened to be a woman who was carrying her child in her 
arms, and who let him fall. G. The lion seized him (s'en saisit), 
and appeared ready to devour (devorer) him ; when the mother, 
transported (ira)isportee)^)j the most tender (tcndre) impulse (mouvc- 
ment) of nature, returned upon her steps, threw herself at the feet 
of the lion, and asked of him her child. 7. He looked upon her 
fixedly (fixement) ; her cries (cris) and her weeping (pleurs) 
seemed to touch him ; at last (enfin) he put the chil d on the ground, 
without having done him the least harm. 8. Unhappiness and de- 
spair have then an expression which makes itself understood by_ 
monsters (monstres) the most fierce (f avouches). 9. But what is 
without doubt the most admirable, is that blind and sublime im- 
pulse which precipitates the mother on the steps of the ferocious 
(feroce) animal before which all fiy. 



26.— VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON. 

WOEDS AND IDIOMS. 



To escape with, to get clear for. 

I shall get clear for a hundred dollars. 

He has escaped with a reprimand. 

To get of. 

He has got off. 

You will never get off. 

To submit to, acquiesce in. 

I will submit to the opinion of our 

neighbor. 
He will submit to all that you say. 
To communicate to, to impart. 
Will you communicate that to your 

father ? 

"Will you communicate to me the 
news ? 

To be contending, to be at it. 

He is contending with able captains. 

The little boys were just now speaking 
of fisty-cuffs, and now they are 
at it. 



En etre quitte pour. 

J'en serai quitte pour cent gourdes. 

II en a etc quitte pour une reprimands 

S'en tirer. 

II s'en est tire. 

Yous ne vous en tirerez jamais. 
En passer par. 

J'en passerai par l'avis de notre 
voisin. 

II en passera par tout ce que vous direz. 

Faire part de a. 

Ferez-vous part de cela a votre pere ? 
Me ferez-vous part des nouvelles? 
Eire aux prises. 

II est aux prises avec des capitaines 
habiles. 

Les petits gar^ons parlaient tout a 
fheure de se donner des coups de 
poing, et maintenant ils sont aux 

prises. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



417 



/ know better, or tell it to others. 

He has learned French in two weeks ! 

I know better; you may get it 

believed. 
By stealth. 

He went away by stealth. 

They see each other only by stealth. 

To think much of, to value. 

That man values only money. 

That prince knows how to value men 

of merit. 
To succeed in. 

He has succeeded in marrying the lady 
in question. 

The thing is difficult, but we shall suc- 
ceed in it. 

To exceed, pass by. The race. 

Astonisldng. The stature. 

A hope. 

Exalted. To accomplish. 
A Jew. Destined. 



A d'autres* 

II a appris le francais en quinze jours ! 
A d'autres. 

A la derobee. 

II s'en est alle a la derobee. 
lis ne se voient qu'a la derobee. 
Faire cas de. 

Cet homme ne fait cas que de l'argent. 
Ce prince saifc faire cas des hommes 

de merite. 
Venir a bout de. 

II est venu h bout d'epouser la dame 

en question. 
La chose est difficile, mais nous en 

viendrons a bout. 
Depasser. La race. 
Etonnant. La stature. 
Un espoir. Une esperance. 
Exalte. Accomplir. 
TJn juif. Destine. 



1. On croyait que ce commis perdrait sa place, mais il en a ete quitte 
pour une reprimande. 2. Mon ami a un proces {lawsuit), il voudrait en 
etre quitte pour mille francs. 3. Votre frere est-il hors de sa difticulte ? 
4. Oui, il s'en est bien tire. 5. J'en passerai par Pavis de notre ami. 6. 
Yous serez oblige d'en passer partout ce qu'il voudra. 7. Quand vous 
aurez des nouvelles, faites m'en part. 8. Cet homme fait part de son 
bonlieur a tout le monde. 9. Cet homme fait part de son bien aux 
pauvres. 10. Les deux armees sont aux prises. 11. Voila deux chiens 
qui sont aux prises. 12. Les fils de notre voisin ne se battent-ils pas 
souvent? 13. Si, je les ai laisses la-bas aux prises. 14. Cet etranger 
nous aime mieux qu'il n'aime ses parents ! il nous rend tout ce service 
sans interet ! A d'autres ! 15. Nous nous voyons quelquefois a, la dero- 
bee. 16. Je fais grand cas de cet liomme. 17. On ne fait pas grand cas 
de ce qu'il dit. 18. Ce livre n'est pas interessant ; je n'ai jamais pu 
venir a bout de le lire en_entiex»_ 19. Nous avons depasse Pendroit oa 
nous voulions nous arreter (to stop). 

I. — 1. I told you that the imperfect is employed with the con- 
ditional in suppositions (suppositions). 2. I recollect it. 3. You 
know also, that in speaking of an action which may take place, one 
employs the present with the future. 4. Thus I say: If John 
comes here, we shall see him ; or, We shall see John, if he comes 
here. 5. Yes ; I understand that. 6. But we should say: If John 



* The meaning is, tell such improbable things to others; I do not believe them. Credat 
Judeus Apella. 

13 5 15 6 52G 1 5 15 3 1 23 5 ?0 553 5 161 

prizes, de-ro-bee, de-pas-ser, race, e-to-nani, sta-ture, es-poir, es-pe-rance, eg-zal-te, ac- 

21 )2 22 12 5 12 6 

com-plir, juif, des-ti-ne. 

18* 



418 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



were here, we should see him. 7. The correspondence (la corrcs- 
pondance) of tenses demands that the imperfect be followed or pre- 
ceded by the conditional, and that the future, on the contrary, cor- 
respond (soil en rapport)- with the indicative present. 

8. Macaulay has written four volumes of the history of Eng- 
land. 9. Have you read them % 10. Yes ; if you wish to read 
them, I will lend them to you. 11. I thank you much; I should 
like well (voudrais bien) to read them. 12. I have lent the first 
volume to Madam C. 13. I will lend it to you as soon as she shall 
have finished^reading it. 14. Thank you; I am not in a hurry. 
15. -I have not been able to read as much this winter as I should 
have wished. 1G. You have had too many occupations. 17. Yes ; 
I have written every evening, but now I shall have more leisure 
(loisir). 

18. A countryman having learned that another countryman, 
his debtor, was in his last moments, ran to the house of the sick 
man to get paid. 19. The insolvent (insolvable) debtor said to 
him with a voice almost extinguished, " Let me die in peace." 20. 
"By the powers (parblen), no," replied the countryman; " you 
shall not die unless I be paid." 

II.' — 1. Man takg.sjiway the lightning from heaven ; he rescues 
continents (arrache des continents) .from the sea; he raises himself 
in the air ; he measures the space which separates the stars (astres) 
from the earth ; he directs the opinions of nations, and decides their 
fate ; he embraces by a glance of the eye the events of past ages, 
and acts upon the future ; but he can not solve the great problem 
(probleme) of his existence. 2. What are we? whence come we % 
whither are we going ? 3. Does the same destiny await Cato the 
just, the good Titus, the virtuous Marcus Aurelius (Marc-Aurele), 
and the sanguinary (sanguinaire) Nero? 4. Nothing here below 
answers to our dreams (reves) of perfection. 5. The hope of a 
future without limits raises us above the visible (visible) world, and 
lets us have a glimpse (entrevoir) of an immense perspective (im- 
mense perspective) of progress towjtrds perfection. 

6. A man loaded (crible) with debts being at the point of death 
(le point de mourir), said to his confessor (confesseur), that " the 
only favor (le faveur) which he asked of heaven, was to preserve 
his life, in order that he might be ableTto pay his creditors." 7. 
"Very well," replied the priest, i: since your motive for desiring 
life is so just, I desire that your prayers may be heard." 8. " Ah ! 
my father, could (puissent) they be so ! for I am sure that if I live 
until I pay my debts, I shall never die." 

9. Voltaire wrote to a young man who persecuted (persecutait) 
him by his letters : "I am dead, sir. 10. So I shall not be able 
henceforth (desormais) to have the honor of answering you." 11.' 
The man replied to him : " To M. de Voltaire in the other world." 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



419 



Topsyturvy. 

His library is topsyturvy. 
All my papers are topsyturvy. 

To begin speaking. 
He begins to speak. 
The first who spoke was the general. 

Could you do without coffee ? 
I can do without it. 

If one cannot have any, he must do 
without it. 

To laugh in the face. 

In doing that he laughed in my face. 

Not to the purpose, unsuitable. 

That is not to the purpose. 

To style, to call. 

We call him prince. 

They called him thief. 

He called mo fop. 

I give you three guesses. 

Guess it. I give you four guesses. 

I give you six guesses. 

To give it up (in guessing). 

Do you give it up ? 

It is impossible for me to guess it ; I 
give it up. 

To break through. 

He breaks through the crowd. 

He broke through all these difficulties. 

To pass in spite of. 

We will pass in spite of them. 

He will pass in spite of all his ene- 
mies. 

To do one's best. 

I do my best. 

He will do his best. 

That affair is delayed much. 

He protracts things. 

Let us return to our 



VlNGT-SEPTLtME leqon. 

IDIOMS. 

Sens dessus dessous. 
Sa bibliotheque est sens aessus dessous. 
Tous mes papiers sont sens dessus des- 
sous. 
Prendre la parole. 
II prend la parole. 

Le premier qui prit la parole fut le 
general. 

Sauriez-vous vous passer de cafe? 
Je puis m'en passer. 
Si Ton n'en peut avoir, il faut s'en pas- 
ser. 
Eire au nez. 

En faisant cela, il m'a ri au nez. 
Hors de propos. 
Cela est hors de propos. 
Trailer de. 

Nous le traitons de prince. 
On l'a traite de voleur. 
II m'a traite de fat. 
Je vous le donne en trois.* 
Devinez-le ; je vous le donne en quatre. 
Je vous le donne en six. 
Jeter sa langue aux chiens. 
Jetez-vous votre langue aux chiens ? 
II m'est impossible de le deviner ; je 

jette ma langue aux chiens. 
Se fairc jour a tr avers. 
II se fait jour a travers le foule. 
II se fit jour a travers ces difficultes. 
Passer sur le ventre d. 
Nous leur passerons sur le ventre. 
II passera sur le ventre a tous ses en- 

nemis. 
Faire de son mieux. 
Je fais de mon mieux. 
II fera de son mieux. 
Cette affaire tralne en longueur. 
U trame les choses en longueur. 
Revenons a nos moutons. 



That is, Je vous le donne d deviner en trois fois 



.3 6 76 17 3 8 17 

sens, nez, trai-ter, tra-vers, ventre, trains, chozes. 



420 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSOXS. 



1. Cettc boite est sens dessus dessous. 2. Tons mes livres sont sens 
dessus dessous. 3. L'orateur a repris la parole. 4. Get liomme ne 
saurait se passer de vin. 5. Si vous gagnez de Pargent en serez-vous 
plus avance ? 6. J'en serai plus avance. 7. Cet liomme dit des choses 
si hors de propos qu'on . ne saurait s'empe cher de lui rire aunez. 8. Le 
maitre a traite cet eleve de fou. 9. Nous le traitons de fat. 10. Pou- 
vez-vous deviner ce qui est arrive? 11. Je vous le donne en quatre, je 
vous le donne en dix. 12. Je ne peux le deviner, je jette ma langue aux 
chiens. 13. Ces soldats se sont fait jour a travers Jes ennemis. 14. lis 
passeront sur le ventre a tous les ennemis. 15. Si je vous donne des 
lecons etudierez-vous beaucoup? 16. Oui, certainement, jeferai demon 
mieux. 17. Cet ouvrier travaille-t-il beaucoup? 18. Oui, monsieur, il 
fait de son mieux. 

I. — 1. A rich man was showing his jewels {bijoux) to a philo- 
sopher. 2. "I thank you," said the latter, "for the superb jewels 
which you are pleased {voulez bien) that JE sha re with you." 3. 
" How that you share with me ? " 4. " But you permit that I look 
at them, and what other thing do you do with them, than to look 
at them also ? '* 

5. A good old man being very sick, had his wife called, who 
was still very young, and said to her : 6. " My dear, you see that 
my last hour approaches, and that I am forced [force) to leave you. 
7. -Therefore, if you wish me to die in peace, it is necessary that 
you do me a favoxv 8. You are still young, and no doubt you will 
marry again ; I know it ; but I pray you not to take Mr. Lewis, 
for I confess that I have always been very jealous of him, and that 
I am so still. 9. I should die then in despair {desespere) if you 
did not pro mise jn e that." 10. The wife answered: " My dear, I 
jmtreat you, let not that hinder you from dying in peace ; for I as- 
sure you, that even if I wished to espouse him I could not, being 
already promised to another." 

II. Extract {extrait) from the journal {journal) of an English 
traveller: 12. "It was three days that I wandered at random 

^{errait a Vaventure) in this island, not knowing if it was desert 
{cleserte) or inhabited [habitee) 1^ savages, when I had the good 
fortune to discover (decouvrir) xi&4he shore {bord) of the sea a gal- 
lows {ime potence) with its victim {pendu). 13. i Thanks to 
heaven,' cried I, 1 here is a civilized country.' " 

II. — 1. Mahomet desired to bring back his countrymen {com- 
patriotes) to their ancient manners (moeurs). 2. He was acquainted 
with the doctrine of Moses {Moise), and that of the Christians. 3. 
He knew that the Jews flattered themselves to see appear at last -* 
the Saviour {sauveur) of Israel ; and that Jesus Christ had promised 
to his disciples to send them the spirit of truth, which would con- 
duct them into all truth. 4. His exalted (exaltee) imagination per- 
suaded him {lui persuadd) that he was destined to accomplish the 
hopes of the Jews and of the Christians. 5. At the age of forty years, 
he saw in a dream {en songe) the archangel {archange) Gabriel, who 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



421 



called him to be the prophet of the Most High (Tres-Haut). 6. 
He communicated (communiqua) that vision to his wife and to his 
cousin ; and-vdiather he deceived himself, (or) whether he wished 
to impose on them {leur en imposefy r he spoke to them with the fire 
of inspiration. 

7. Washington did not belong, like Bonaparte, to that race of 
^-Alexanders and Csesars whojkxceed the stature of the human species. 
8. Nothing astonishing attaches to his person ; he is not placed on 
a vast theatre ; he is not SQUtenrling wi^h the most able captains, 
and the most powerful monarchs of the time. 9. He does not 
traverse the seas ; he does not run from Memphis to Vienna ( Vienne), 
^aBtNipm Cadiz to Moscow. 10. He defends himself with a hand- 
ful of citizens, upon a land without remembrances, and without 
celebrity, in the najroiY circle of the domestic firesides. 

11. Washington and Bonaparte came forth from the bosom of 
a republic. 12. Born both from liberty, the first has been faithful 
to it, the second has b^tcaj^ed it. 13. Their fate, in conformity 
with (d'ajwcs) their choice, will be different in the future. 14. The 
name of Washington will spread with liberty from age to, age; it 
will mark the beginning of a new era for the human race. 15. 
Bonaparte was able to enrich equally the public domain. It3. He 
acted upon the nation the most civilized, the most intelligent, the 
most brave, the most brilliant of the earth. 17. What would be 
to-day the rank occupied by him in the world (univers) if he had 
joined magnanimity to what he had of heroic — if, Washington and 
Bonaparte &tjw£%, he had named liberty the irnWitress of his glory. 



28.— VINGT-IIUITIEME LEQON. 

IDIOMS AND PKOVEKBS 

To surpass, to have the superiority V emporter sur. 
over. 

He surpasses all in racing. II l'emporte sur tous a, la course. 

His pride prevailed over bis interest. Sa fierte l'emporta sur ses interets. 

Virgil and Horace surpass all the Yirgile et Horace l'emportent sur tous 

Latin poets. les poetes latins. 

To run away. Se sauver. 

I must run away. • II faut que je me sauve. 

He ran away at full speed. II s'est sauve a toutes jambes. 

That child shrieks and runs away at Cet enfant crie et se sauve a la vue 

the sight of a frog. d'une grenouille. 

To be half intoxicated. Etre un peu gris. 

That man is half intoxicated. Cet homme est gris. 

We were all a Httle tipsy. Nous etions tous un peu gris. 



3 16 6 17 6 12 

em-por-ter, sau-ver, gris. 



422 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



To shelter. 

We took shelter from the rain. 

He took shelter from the storm under 

a rock. 
If I were you. 

If I were you I would not accept. 

Come to the point. 

Let us come to the point. 

To put tip (in traveling). 

He puts up with one of his friends. 

Where do you put up ? 

I always put up at the New York 

hotel. 
Within reach. 

That is not within my reach. 

He advances within gun-shot. 

They are out of cannon-shot. 

He is within hearing distance. 

To acknowledge the receipt of a letter. 

I have the honor to acknowledge the 

receipt of your last. 
Please acknowledge the receipt of my 

letter. 

To build castles in the air. 

He does nothing but build castles in 

the air. 
He is a singular man. 
They have in Paris a strange idea of 

shepherdesses. 
On a level, even. 

The yard is not on a level with the 
garden. 

That terrace is on a level with the 

ground-floor. 
He is lodged on the ground-floor. 
The sun strikes in my eyes. 
The fortune of his neighbor has dazzled 

his eyes. 
Literally. 

That is to be understood literally. 

We must not always take things lite- 
rally. 

How far on are you ? 

I am at the fourth chapter. 



Mettre & Vabri. 

Nous nous mimes a fabri de la pluie. 
II se mit a l'abri de l'orage sous un 
rocher. 

Sifetais de vous. 

Si j'etais de vous je n'accepterais pas. 
Venez au fait. 
Venous au fait. 
Descendre. 

II descend chez un de ses amis. 

Ou descendez-vous ? 

Je descends toujours a l'hotel de New 

York. 
A la portee. 

Cela n'est pas a ma portee. 

II s'avance a la portee de fusil. 

lis sont hors de la portee du canon. 

II est a la portee de l'oreille. 

Accuser reception aVune lettre. 

J'ai l'honneur de vous accuser recep- 
tion de votre derniere lettre. 

Veuillez bien m'accuser reception de 
ma lettre. 

Faire des chateaux en Espagne. 

II ne fait que des chateaux en Es- 
pagne. 

(Test un drole oVhommc. 

lis ont a Paris une drole d'idee des 
bergeres. 

De niveau, au niveau. 

La cour n'est pas au niveau du jardin. 

Cette terrasse est de niveau avec le 

rez-de-chaussee. 
II est log6 au rez-de-chaussee. 
Le soleil me donne dans les yeux. 
La fortune de son voisin lui a donne 

dans l'ceil. 
Au pied de la lettre. 
Cela doit s'entendre au pied de la 

lettre. 

II ne faut pas toujours prendre les 
choses au pied de la lettre. 

Oil en etcs-vous ? 

J'en suis au chapitre quatrikme. 



1 12 16 6 5 S 1221 2 17 17 12 17 6 17 6 

a-bri, por-tee, re-cep-tion, cha-teaua?, drole, ni-veau, res-de-chaus-see. 



SUPPLEMENTARY LESSONS. 



423 



The question is. 

The question is to know who did that. 
That is not the question. 
The question is on the safety of the 
state. 

What matters it ? No matter. 

What matters it to him whether I 

come or not ? 
He blames us ; what matters it ? 
Bring me a book ; no matter which 

one. 

Give me something ; no matter what. 

/ made a slip of the tongue. 

He made a slip of the tongue. 

To pump, to sound one. 

He speaks to that man in order to 

sound him. 
Appearances sometimes deceive. 
It is not very difficult. 
A rolling stone gathers no moss. 
All is not gold that glitters. 
Sadness often succeeds quickly to joy. 
To be very talented. 

That is soon forgotten. 

He is a simpleton. 

Rude sports belong to the vulgar. 

Silence gives consent. 

There is many a slip between the cup 

and the lip. 
A good reputation is better than 

riches. 

The pot calls the kettle black. 
To reply evasively. 

The mediocre are eminent among the 
stupid. 

A burnt child dreads the fire. 
We must be all things to all men. 
Each one should look to his affairs. 
One makes his fortune gradually. 



U s'agit. 

II s'agit de savoir qui a fait cela. 
II ne s'agit pas de cela. 
II s'agit du salut de l'etat. 

QuHmportc. NHmporte. 

Que lui importe que je vienne ou que 

je ne vienne pas ? 
II nous blame ; qu'importe ? 
Apportez-moi un livre; n'importe 

leqiiel. 

Donnez-moi quelque chose ; n'importe 
quoi. 

La lange vrta tourne. 

La langue lui a tourne. 

Tirer les vers du nez d quelqxCun (fam.). 

II parle a cet homme pour lui tirer les 

vers du nez. 
Vhabit ne fait pas le moine (monk). 
Ce rCest pas la mer a boire. 
Pierre qui roule n'amassepas de mousse. 
Tout ce qici reluit n 1 est pas or. 
Tel quiritvendredi, dimanche pleurera. 
Avoir de Vesprit jusqrfau bout des 

doigts. 

Cela entre par une oreille, et sort par 
Vautre. 

U n^a pas invente lapoudre. 

Jeux de mains, jeux de vilains. 

Qui ne dit mot, consent. 

De la main d la bouche se perd sou- 
vent la soupe. 

Bonne renommee vaut mieux que cein- 
ture doree. 

La pelle se moque du fourgon. 

Repondre en Normand. 

Bans le royaume des aveugles les 
borgnes sont rois. 

Chat echaude craint Veau froide. 

II f out hurler avecles loups. 

L'ceil du ma%tre engraisse le cheval. 

Petit d petit Voiseau fait son nid. 



18 6 7 

tour-ne, vers. 



A 

SYNOPSIS OF GRAMMAR: 



INCLUDING- 

RECAPITULATIONS AND ADDITIONS. 



The parts of speech are the same in French as in English, viz., the article, 
noun, adjective, pronoun, verb, adverb, preposition, conjunction, and inter- 
jection. 

Their definitions and subdivisions, being the same as in English, need not 
here be given. 



ARTICLES. 

The articles are le, the (definite), and un, a, one (indefinite). 

Un is only the numeral adjective one. Le lias also the nature of an adjective; but it 
will be convenient to treat of these by themselves under the titles of indefinite and definite 
articles. 

DEFINITE AETICLE. 
SINGULAR. PLURAL. 

Le (masculine). La (feminine). Les (both genders). The. 

JDu. Be la. JDes. Of the. 

Au. A la. Aux. To the. 

1. This article in the singular is elided; i. e., le and la become V before a 
vowel or a silent h, as Vor, the gold ; Veau, the water ; Chomme, the man. 

2. Du is a contraction of de le, and des of de les, as da voisin, of the neigh- 
bor ; des voisins, of the neighbors. Au is also a contraction of d, le, and aux 
of a les, as au magasin, to the store ; aux magasins, to the stores. Hence, 
a le, a les, de le, de les, are never used in French. 

3. Before a vowel or a silent h, this article in the singular is always elided, 
and never contracted, as de Varbre, of the tree, a Varbre, to the tree ; de Veau, 
of the water, a Veau, to the water ; de Vhomme, of the man, a, Vhomme, to the 
man. 

4. The feminine singular article (la) is never contracted. 

INDEFINITE AETIOLE. 
singular; plural. 
Un (masculine). TJne (feminine). A, one. Tins (mas.). Unes (fem.). 

Uh8 and unes are used only in a few compound words, and have then the nature of in- 
definite pronouns, as quelques-iuis, quelques-unes, some; les una et les aulres, both. 



ARTICLES. 



425 



AGREEMENT OF THE ARTICLES. 

1. Articles agree with their nouns in gender and number ; as, 

Le garcon, the boy. La Jille, the girl. Les gargons, the boys. Lesfilles, the girls. 

Zfti homme, a man. Une/emme, a woman. 

2. Le, before plus, mieux, or moins, often forms an adverbial expression, 
and is then invariable, whether the words stand alone or precede another ad- 
verb ; as, 

Cest cettepensee qui me tormente le pltjs. That thought torments me the most. 
La femme la phis virtueuse est aimee le The most virtuous woman is loved the most 
plus tendrement. tenderly. 

3. Le is invariable also before the adverbs plus, mieux, moins, when joined 
to an adjective, provided it denote an absolute superlative without the idea 
of comparison ; but if the adjective implies comparison, the article is va- 

Cest quandje suis d la campagne que les It is when I am in the country that books 

livres me jxiraitisent le plus agreables. seem to me the most agreeable. 

Ces livres sont les plus agreables. These books are the most agreeable. 

In the former of these sentences the idea is, Books are agreeable in the 
highest degree, and no comparison is intended ; in the latter, These books are 
the most agreeable of all with which they are compared in reality or in the 
mind. In the former therefore le is invariable, in the latter it is varied. The 
following sentence affords an example of le both variable and invariable. 

Je tie vols dans sa conduite que de ces ine- I see in her conduct only those inequalities 
galites aux quelles lesfemmes les mieux to which women the best born are most 

nees sont le plus sujettes. subject. 

USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

1. The article is used in French, as in English, with nouns in a definite 
sense ; as, 

Aimez-vous le cafe queje vous donne f Do you like the coffee which I give you ? 

Connaissez-vous le jils de notre voisin f Do you know the son of our neighbor? 

2. The article is used also with nouns in a general sense ; as, 

Le sucke est doux. Sugar is sweet. 

Les hommes son t mortels. Men are mortal. 

Airnez-vous le cafe ? Do you like coffee ? 

3. This article, together with de (i. e., du, de la, de V, and des), is used 
with nouns in a partitive sense ; that is, with some or any expressed or implied 
before them ; as, 

H a du papier. He has some paper. 

lis ont de -Largent. They have money. 

Nous avons des amis. We have friends. 

4. When the partitive noun, however, is the object of a verb with a nega- 
tive, it takes de without the article ; as, 

H tCa pas de papier. He has no paper. 

lis n'ont pas tfamis. They have not any friends. 



426 



ARTICLES. 



5. Also, when the partitive noun is immediately preceded by an adjective, 
it takes de without the article ; as, 

J'ai de beaux livres. I have some handsome books. 

Votes avez de bons amis. You have good friends. 

6. If, however, the adjective preceding a partitive noun be compounded 
with it, making essentially but one word, as bon mot, grand homme, jeunes gem, 
petits pois, etc., the article is used ; as, 

Je ne connais rien de desagreable comme I know nothing so disagreeable as fops, who 
des petits-maitres qui veulent donner wish to give the tone to society. 
le ton d la societe. 

*7. If the adjective preceding the partitive noun also be emphatic, so as to 
give it a precise and particular sense, the article is used ; as, 

Yoild de la vraie poesie. There is some real poetry. 

J'ai du bon vin. I have some (really) good wine. 

8. In interrogations, when a negative partitive is affirmative in idea, the 
article is used ; and when negative in idea, de without the article is used ; as, 

Pourquoi vous croyez-vous malheureux? "Why do you fancy yourself unhappy? havo 
rCavez-xous pas de la consideration, you not respect, money, and friends ? 

de Sargent et des amis ? 

Pourquoi Vetranger ne continue-t-il pas Why does not that stranger continue his 
son voyage t n'a-t Upas d 'argent t journey ? has he no money ? 

N'a-t4l pas j>amis ? Has he no friends ? 

9. When a negative partitive is followed by an adjective, relative pronoun, 
or any clause which effectually limits its meaning, the article is used ; as, 

Je ne vous ferai pas des reproches frivoles* I will make you no frivolous reproaches. 
On ne soulage pas des douleurs qu'on me- We do not console griefs which we despise. 
prise. 

10. The definite article is used in preference to the possessive adjectives 
mon, ton, son, etc., when the possessor is otherwise sufficiently denoted ; but 
if not, the adjective is to be used; as, 

J'ai mal d la tete.f I have a pain in my head. 

Je vois que nAjambe s'enjle.f I see that my leg swells. 

Eem. — In speaking of parts of the body, possession is expressed by the verb rather than 
by the possessive adjectives ; as, 

Elle a les yeux bleus. LTer eyes are blue. 

E Ale pied petit. His foot is small. 

11. The possessive adjective, however, is generally used instead of the 
article, speaking of any part of the body, to denote something continuous or 
zcsual : 

Son epaule luifait mal. His shoulder pains him. 

Cest sa goutte que le tourmente. His gout torments him. 

Ma tete me fait toujours mal. I have always a pain in my head. 

J'ai encore ma migraine. I have still my headache. 

In these examples it is meant that the evil is permanent or returns periodically. 

* If the speaker means, I will make you no reproaches { frivolous things), he would 
employ de reproches frivoles, because the adjective does not effectually limit the noun ; 
but if he means, J will make you no frivolous reproaches {but some of importance), it 
effectually limits the noun, and he would employ des reproches frivoles. 

t In the first of these sentences the possessor is sufficiently indicated. I can have a 
pain in no one's head but my own, hence la is used ; but I can see another's leg swell as well 
as my own, hence ma is used in the second sentence. 



ARTICLES. 



427 



12. The definite article is used also with the titles and epithets prefixed to 
proper names ; as, 

Le docteur Smith. Doctor Smith. 

Le general Taylor. General Taylor. 

Louis le grand. Lewis the Great. 

13. This article is sometimes used to denote what is habitual ; as, 
Jlprend le the. He takes tea. 

Em d feglise le dimanche. He goes to church Sundays. 

14. This article is generally used before the names of countries ; as, 
La France est plus grande que la Suisse. France is larger than Switzerland. 
UAsie touche d -CAJrique. Asia touches Africa. 

15. Countries having the same name as their capital omit the article ; as, 
Naples et Corfou sont des pays deliceux. Naples and Corfu are delightful countries. 

16. After prepositions meaning to, from, or in, the names of countries 
which are feminine generally omit the article, and those which are masculine 
generally retain it. 

H va en Espagne. He goes to Spain. 

Nous xenons d'Angleterre. We come from England. 

H est au Canada. _ He is in Canada. 

11. Masculine names of countries, all those containing an adjective, and the 
following feminines, are seldom used without the article : La Guadaloupe, la 
Jama'igue, la Louisiane, V Abyssinie, la Guin'ee ; as, V empire du Br'ezil, dans 
la Nouvelle Grenade, d la Guyane. 

18. The names of rivers, lakes, and mountains take the article; as, IS Hud- 
son, le lac George, les Alpes. 

OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE AETICLE. 

1. The definite article is omitted with the names of cities ; as, 

II vient de Londres. He comes from London. 

Jl va d Boston. He is going to Boston. 

2. Names of cities, however, derived from common nouns, or having an 
adjective or its equivalent for part of the name, take the article ; as, 

H demeure au Havre* He dwells at Havre. 

U est d la Nouvelle Orleans. He is in New Orleans. 

3. It is generally omitted with a noun forming one idea with a verb ; as, 

J^aibesoin. II prend garde. I need. He takes care. 

llsontfroid. Vous avez honte. They are cold. You are ashamed. 

4. It is omitted with a noun which, with a preposition, qualifies another 
noun ; as, 

Un habit de drap. A cloth coat. 

Tine maison de pierre. A stone house. 

Un bateau d vapeur. A steamboat. 

5. Also with a noun which, with a preposition, forms an adverbial phrase ; as, 
En verite. Par cozur. Avec courage. In truth. By heart. "With courage. 



Havre formerly meant harbor. 



428 



NOUNS. 



6. Also with a noun which follows de after an adverb or noun of quantity ; as, 

Beaucoup d'argent. Peu d'amis. Much money. Few friends. 

Une douzaine d'hommes. A dozen men. 

7. JBien, la plupart, and le plus grand nombre, although terms of quantity, 
always take the article before a limiting noun ; as, 

BiendeV argent. La p>lupart des gens. Much money. Most people. 

8. The articles definite and indefinite are omitted in French with nouns 
in apposition with a preceding noun or sentence, when the article can be omit- 
ted in English ; as, 

TJlysse, pere de Telernaque. Ulysses, (the) father of Telemachus. 

Le misanthrope, comedie de Moliere. The misanthrope, (a) comedy of Moliere. 

9. They are sometimes omitted, especially in proverbial and enumerative 
phrases, to give energy or rapidity to discourse ; as, 

Pauvrete n'est pas vice. Poverty is not a vice. 

Jeunes et vieux, riches et pauvres, tout le Young and old, rich and poor, every body 
monde etait admis. was admitted. 

10. The indefinite article is omitted before a noun in the predicate qual- 
ifying the subject like an adjective ; as, 

LI est soldat. Je suis frangais. He is a soldier. I am a Frenchman. 

11. When the noun in the predicate has not the nature of an adjective, as 
when qualified by an adjective or additional phrase, it takes the article; as, 

Cest un soldat du roi. He is a soldier of the king. 

Cest vm> ton soldat. He is a good soldier. 

12. The articles are repeated before each noun in the same construction, 
and before each adjective belonging to a separate noun ; as, 

Le cozur, Vesprit, les mozurs, tout gagne d The heart, the mind, the manners, all gains 

la culture. by cultivation. 

Le vieux et lejeune soldat. The old and the young soldier 

Le vieux et le brave soldat. The old and brave soldier. 



NOUNS. 

GENDEE OF NOUNS. 
There are two genders in French, the masculine and the feminine. In al- 
most all cases the names of males are masculine, and those of females feminine. 
The gender of inanimate objects can not be reduced to rules, and the attempt 
to teach them in this way would be an unprofitable waste of the learner's time. 
The following brief rules, however, may be useful. 

I. — MASCULINE NOUNS, 

1. Are those not ending in e mute generally; as, Le chapeau, le pain, le 

lendemain. 

2. Those ending in age, ege, uge, and ange ; as, Le fromage, le jardin.age, 
le siege, le refuge, le deluge, le change. 

La rage, la nage, la cage, la page, are exceptions. 



NOUNS 



429 



3. Those ending in ment and oir ; as, Le chdtiment, le bdtiment, le parloir. 

4. Names of the seasons, days of the week, and months ; as, Le printemps, 
le lundi ; Avril est pluvieux. 

5. Other parts of speech used as nouns ; as, Le beau, le manger, le devant. 

II. — FEMININE NOUNS, 

1. Are those ending in e mute generally; as, La chaise, la pomme, la veille. 

2. Those ending in cion, tion, sion, xion, ure, oire, eur ; as, La coercion, 
la version, V attention, la reflexion, la brulure, Vecritoire, la chaleur. 

3. Most of those ending in son, and te or tee ; as, La raaison, la moisson, la 
charite, V assiettee. 

4. Names of abstract qualities generally ; as, ^indulgence, la vertu, la me- 
chancete, Vavarice. 

5. Names of festivals generally, because the feminine word fete is under- 
stood ; as, La pdque, la St. Jean, for la fete de pdque, la fete St. Jean, etc. 
"When the word fete is not understood, they follow the general rule ; as, le car- 
naval, le careme, le notivel an. 

in. 

1. Animals have distinct names for the male and female, when the sex is 
easily distinguished; as, Le coq, la poide ; le cheval, la jument ; le lion, la li- 
onne ; but in speaking generally, the masculine is always used. 

2. The names of animals, when the male and female are not easily distin- 
guished, follow the rules of inanimate objects; as, Le renard, le rossignol, la 
belette, la grive, la sardine. 

IV. 

Many nouns, denoting living beings, form the feminine like adjectives ; as, 
Le voisin, la voisine ; le jardinier, la jardiniere le due, la duchesse ; le juif, 
lajuive. 

v. 

xhere are some eighty or more nouns in the French language which are 
masculine in one sense, and feminine in another ; as, 

Un Uvre, a book ; une livre, a pound. Un manche, a handle ; une manche, a sleeve. 

Unposte, a station; une poste, a post-office. Tin page, page of a prince; unepage, of a book. 
Un tour, a turn ; une tour, a tower. Un voile, a veil ; una voile, a sail. 

Such words are set down as different ones in the dictionary, and need not 
here be given. 

VI. 

The following nouns have some peculiarities of gender : 

Aide, referring to persons, is masculine or feminine according to the sex 

of the person ; meaning assistance, it is always feminine ; as, 

Son aide, Ms assistant ; aide prompte, prompt assistance. 
Aigle is generally masculine ; but when the female is particularly referred 

to, the feminine is to be used ; as, 

Eaigle est remplie de tendresse pour ses The eagle is full of tenderness for her little 
petits. ones. 

Aigle, a standard, is always feminine ; as, L? aigle romaine, V aigle americaine. 



430 



NOUNS. 



Amour in the singular is masculine ; in the plural, it is feminine in the 
sense of passion ; meaning little figures, statuettes, it is always masculine. 
Automne, formerly feminine, is now always used as masculine. 
Deuce is masculine in the singular, and feminine in the plural ; as, 

Quel delice 1 -what delight ! Toutes ses delices, all his delights. 

Enfant is generally masculine ; but when it denotes a girl it is feminine. 
Foudre, thunder, is usually feminine ; in the sublime style, it can be mas- 
culine. 

Gens, meaning men, persons, originally feminine, has the adjectives and 
participles following it always masculine ; those which precede it are, for 
sound's sake, feminine, unless they are common gender, or have the same 
sound in the masculine as in the feminine; as, defines (/ens, des gens bienfins. 

When the adjective preceding gens has the same sound in the masculine as in the femi- 
nine, either may be used ; as, quelles gens, or quels gens. 

Tous, with an adjective of common gender, or alone before gens, limited by a word or 
phrase, is used in the masculine; as, Tous les honnetes gens; tons les gens senses, tous 
les gens queje connais. 

All the compounds of gens are masculine ; as, Gens de lettres, gens d'affaires, gens de 
robe, gens de Men, gens de coeur, gens de guerre, jeunes gens. 

Htmne for the church is feminine ; all others are masculine. 

Les belles hymnes de Santeuil. The beautiful hymns of Santeuil. 

Les hymnes harmonieux d 'Horace. The harmonious odes of Horace. 

(Euvre is always feminine in the plural, and in its ordinary acceptation in 
the singular ; as, Cette (euvre est achevee, that work is finished. 

An extraordinary act, or uncommon production, is sometimes masculine in the singu- 
lar ; as, Un cettvke de genie. In terms of alchemy, and in works of sculpture and music, 
it is masculine. 

Orge is feminine, except in the expressions orge monde, barley hulled, and 
orge perle, barley pearled. 

Orgue, an organ, is masculine in the singular, and feminine in the plural ; 
as, Tin orgue excellent, an excellent organ ; de bonnes orgues, good organs. 

Paque, the Jewish Passover, is feminine, and takes la ; Pdques, Easter, is 
generally feminine plural, but is also used in the masculine singular and omits 
the article ; as, La Paque des Juifs, the Passover of the Jews • Quand Paque 
sera venu, when Easter shall have come. 

Periode is masculine when it denotes the highest point which any thing 
can attain ; in other senses it is feminine ; as, 

Jl a porte Teloquence d son plus haut He has carried eloquence to its highest point. 
periode. 

Une periode longue. Une periode courte. A long period. A short period. 

Personne, person, is feminine ; in the sense of no one it is masculine. 

Ce sont des personnes Men clieres. They are persons very dear. 

Je ne connais personne tout a fait heureux. I knew no one entirely happy. 

Quelque chose, meaning something, is masculine ; meaning whatever thing 
is feminine ; as, 



NOUNS. 



431 



Quelque chose de ton. Something good. 

Quelque chose que vous lui offriez, il la re- Whatever you may offer him he will decline. 
fusera. 

Autre chose is also masculine when it means something, or any thing else ; 
but feminine when it means another thing ; as, 

Autre chose vous contrarie-t-il? Does any thing else annoy yon ? 

I? autre chose est tres-bonne. The other thing is very good. 

Espace, space, is generally masculine, but in printing it is feminine ; as, 
Le grand espace qui separe la ierre des The broad space which separates the earth 

astres. from the stars. 

Espaces fines. Narrow spaces (in printing). 

THE PLU2AL OF NOUXS. 

1. The plural of nouns is generally formed in French as in English, by add- 
ing s to the singular ; as, Lhomme, les homines ; la femme, lesfemmes. 

2. Nouns terminating in s, x, or z, are unchanged in the plural; as, Le has, 
les has ; la noix, les noix ; le nez, les nez. 

3. Nouns ending in al, change al into aux for the plural ; as, cheval, che- 
vaux ; general, generaux. 

4. Those in au and eu add x for the plural ; as, chapeau, chapeaux ; feu, 
feux. 

The following are exceptions, many of which have been given before : 

1. Seven in ou take x for the plural : Bijou, a jewel ; caillou, a pebble ; 
chou, a cabbage ; genou, the knee ; joujou, a toy ; hibou, an owl ; and pou, a 
louse. 

Landeau, a kind of carriage, has the plural landaus. 

2. The following in al take s in the plural : bal, a ball ; cal, a callosity ; 
cantal, a kind of cheese ; carnaval, a carnival ; ceremonial, ceremonial ; pal, a 
pale ; regal, an entertainment ; also, names of plants and animals (except che- 
val) ; as, chacal, a jackall ; narval, a narval ; nopal, a kind of plant ; sandal, 
sandal wood. These make in the plural, bals, cals, etc. 

3. The following in ail have aux in the plural: bail, lease : corail, coral; 
email, enamel ; plumail, a feather-brush ; soupirail, vent ; vantail, leaf of a 
door ; vitrail, a large pane of glass for churches, seldom used in the singular. 
Travail, labor, has the plural travaux; travail, a machine in which horses are 
shod, also the accounts rendered by public ministers, has the plural travails. 

A'ieul, meaning ancestor, has plural a'ieux ; meaning grandfather or ma- 
ternal ancestor, a'ieuls. 

Ail, garlic, as a vegetable, has the plural aulx; as a term in botany, its 
plural is ails. 

Betail and bestiaux have the same signification, cattle ; the former has no 
plural, the latter no singular. 

Ciel, heaven, has the plural cieux ; del, tester of a bed, sky in painting, or 
meaning climate, has the plural ciels. 

(Eil, eye, the organ of vision, has the plural yeux ; ceil, a term of art, has 
the plural ceils. 



432 NOUNS. 



PLUEAL OF PEOPEE NAMES. 

5. Proper names are generally unchanged in the plural ; as, 
Les deux Seneque. The two Senecas. 

Les deux Cobneille. The two Corneilles. 

6. When, however, proper nouns are used like common nouns, to denote 
classes rather than individuals, they take the plural termination ; as, 

La France a eu ses Cesaes. France has had its Caesars. 

La Seine a ses Bourbons. The Seine has its Bourbons. 

PLUEAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

Some compound nouns form their plural by varying both parts of the com- 
pound, others by varying one, and others by varying neither. 

1. Compounds formed of two nouns generally vary both parts in the plu- 
ral ; as, 

Un oiseau-mouche, des oiseaux-mouches. A humming-bird, humming-birds. 
Un chou-Jleur, des chouxfleurs. A cauliflower, cauliflowers. • 

Un chien loup, des chiens loups. A wolf-dog, wolf-dogs. 

2. Sometimes, however, from the nature of its signification, one or both of 
the parts are unchangeable. The following are of this kind : 

Un Hotel-Dieu, des Hotels Dieu. A hospital, hospitals. 

Un bain-marie, des bains marie. A wet bath, wet baths. 

Un garde-chasse, des gardes-chasse. A game-keeper, game-keepers. 

Un breche-dents, des breche-dents. 

Un eolin-maillard, des colin-maillard. Blind-man's buff. 

Un bec-figues, des bec-Jigues. A fig-pecker, fig-peckers. 

Un appui-main, des appui-main. A resting-stick, resting-sticks. 

3. When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, both words vary 
their terminations for the plural; as, 

Une basse-cour, des basses-conr A poultry -yard, poultry-yards. 

Une fausse-clef, des fausses-elefs. A skeleton-key, skeleton-keys. 

Except des ierre-pleins, where the sense does not admit terre in the plural ; des grand" • 
meres, des grand" messes, so written for euphony ; un or des chevau-legers, and a few others 
where the nature of the words prevents one or both changing for the plural. 

4. When two nouns united by a preposition make a compound, the first 
alone is varied to form the plural ; as, 

Un cJief-d'ozuvre, des chefs-d^ozuvre. A master-piece, master-pieces. 

Un arc-en-ciel, des arcs-en-ciel. A rainbow, rainbows. 

Except des coq-d-Vdne, cock-and-bull stories ; des pied-d-terre, temporary lodgings ; 
and des tete-d-tete, privato interviews, where the sense does not admit the plural nouns. 

5. When a noun joined to a verb, preposition, or adverb, forms a com- 
pound, the noun is varied to form the plural; as, des contre-coups, rebounds ; 
des avant-gardes, vanguards ; des garde-robes, wardrobes. 

But the following take no s because there is unity in the idea : des serre-tete, 
head-bands ; des reveille-matin, alarm-clocks ; des contre-poison, antidotes ; des 
abat-jour, trunk-lights ; des chasse-maree, fish-carts ; des coupe-gorge, cut-throat 
places. 



NOUXS. 



433 



The following take s both in the singular and plural, because there is plu- 
rality in the idea : un or des essuie-mains, a towel, or towels ; un or des cure- 
dents, a tooth-pick, or tooth-picks ; un or des couvre-pieds, a coverlet, or cover- 
lets ; un or des porte-mouchettes, a snuffer-tray, or snuffer-trays ; un or des 
porte-clefs, a turnkey, or turnkeys. 

6. Nouns compounded of invariable words are not varied to form the plu- 
ral ; as, des pour-boire, drinking-nioney ; des pince-sans-rire, malicious per- 
sons ; des passe-partout, master-keys. 

V. A noun preceded by a preposition and limiting another noun is singu- 
lar or plural according to the sense. When the noun is used in a general 
sense, it is commonly singular ; in an individual sense it is plural. 

Des amfs depotrie, some heirs eggs. Des oeufs d'oiseaux, some eggs of birds. 

Un marchand de drop, a cloth-merchant. Un marchand de draps fins, a merchant of 

fine cloths. 

Sometimes the number of such a noun is determined by the number in 
which it is used generally; as, 

Un marchand de poisson. A dealer in fish. 

Un marchand de harengs. A dealer in herring 

"When such a noun, in an individual sense, denotes the material of which a 
thing is composed, if the material has lost its original form it is singular ; if it 
has not, it is plural ; as, 

De la gelee de pomme, apple-jelly. Un panier de pommes, a basket of apples. 



CASES. 

1. French nouns have no distinction of cases. It is convenient, however, 
to denote their relations to the verb by the following terms : subject, corres- 
ponding to the nominative ; direct object, corresponding to the accusative or 
objective case ; and indirect object, corresponding to the genitive, dative, and 
ablative cases. 

2. The subjf.ct is that in regard to which something is affirmed, or a ques- 
tion asked by the verb ; thus, J^aime Dieu, I love God. Faites-YOTis voire 
devoir ? do you do your duty ? La modestie plait, modesty pleases. Here 
Je, vous, and modestie are the subjects. 

3. The direct object is the object of a transitive verb, or that which com- 
pletes the meaning of the verb, without the help of any other word ; as, J\s- 
time les gens vcrtucux, I esteem virtuous people. J^aime Vetude, I like study. 
Here gens and etude are direct objects. 

4. The indirect object is that which completes the meaning of the verb 
by the help of one of the prepositions, d, de, pour, darts, etc. ; as, II parle & 
Pierre, he speaks to Peter. 77 repond de vous. Here Pierre and vous are in- 
direct objects. 

19 



434 



ADJECTIVES. 



ADJECTIVES. 

PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

Some adjectives are almost always placed before the noun, others after it, 
and others again either before or after, as clearness or harmony may require. 
The following rules, though not a perfect guide in all cases, will be of use to 
the learner. 

ADJECTIVES PLACED BEFORE THE NOUN. 

1. Possessive, demonstrative, numeral, and indefinite adjectives always pre- 
cede the noun ; as, Mon livre, cet homme, le premier ecolier, quelques pommes. 

2. Adjectives expressing immaterial qualities, or those not the objects of 
our senses, are generally placed before the noun ; as, Le mauvais beurre. 

3. Also, most short adjectives, those shorter than their nouns; as, Le bon 
homme, le vieux cheval. 

In accordance with the two last rules, the following adjectives, used in their ordinary 
sense, are generally placed before their nouns : Beau, bon, brave, cher, digne, grand, gros, 
jeu?ie,joli, mauvais, mediant, meilleur, meme, moindre, petit, saint, sot, vieux, vrai. 

ADJECTIVES PLACED AFTER THE NOUN. 

1. Adjectives expressing material qualities, or those which are the objects 
of our senses, as color, shape, taste, etc., are placed after the noun ; as, Le drap 
noir, Vencrier carre. 

2. Also, long adjectives, those longer than their nouns ; as, line maison 

MAGNIFIQUE. 

3. All participles, present or past, used as adjectives; as, Des inscctes vi- 
vants, Des eaux dormantes, Un habit Men fait, line maison bien situee. 

4. National and denominational adjectives: as, Un cheval anglais, Leglise 

PRESBYTERIENNE. 

5. A great many adjectives ending in ant, ent, able, ible, al, He, age, eux, if y 
ique ; * as, Un homme prudent, un temps agreable. 

6. Adjectives having regimens are always after their nouns ; as, Un enfant 
cher a sonpere. 

1. Adjectives, qualifying two or more nouns, follow them ; as, Un cheval et 

WI boZllf MECHANTS. 

8. Two or more adjectives expressing similar qualities, belonging to one 
noun, generally follow it ; expressing dissimilar qualities, they are placed ac- 
cording to the previous rules ; as, Une chose bonne et agreable, Un beau 
bdtiment symetrique, Une petite voiture neuveT 

9. When the numerals are used as titles or quotations, and without the 
article, they may come after the noun ; as, Chapitre premier, chapter first ; 
chapitre deux, chapter second. In this case the cardinal numbers are used, 



* This rule is much the same in eifect as 2, for almost all adjectives with these termina- 
tions are long. 



ADJECTIVES. 



435 



except for the first {premier). Cardinal numbers are also used after the noun 
to distinguish sovereigns ; as, Charles dix, Charles the tenth. 

10. Adjectives joined to a proper name precede it when they express mere 
qualities ; as, Le bon Henri ; but when they express a permanent title, they 
come after it with the article, Henri le ton, Pierre le grand. 

Rem.— From the above rules it appears that the greater number of French adjectives 
are placed after their nouns ; but those placed before them are more frequently used. 

11. Some adjectives vary their signification as they are placed before or 
after the noun. A few of these are given in Lesson 21, page 403 ; to these may 
be added the following : 



Tin petit homme, a small man. 
Une grosse femme, a big woman. 
Une certaine nouvelle, a particular piece of 
news. 

Le grand air, the open air. 
Un gentilhomme, a nobleman. 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous man. 

Une sage femme, a mid-wife. 

Un cruel homme, an insupportable man. 

Un mauvais air, an ignoble look. 

Du mort bois, worthless wood. 

D'une commune voix, unanimously. 

Unefausse clef, a false key. 

Un faux jour, a wrong light. 

Unefausse porte, a secret door. 

Un nouvel habit, a different coat. 

Un nouveau livre, a newly-obtained book. 

Un haut ton, a proud tone. 

Une mechante epigramme, a poor epigram. 

Unfurieux menteur, a prodigious liar. 
Deux mortels volumes, two large volumes. 
Un seul Iwmme, one only man. 



Un homme petit, a mean man. 

Une femme grosse, a pregnant woman. 

Une nouvelle certaine, sure news. 

Vair grand, the noble look. 

Un homme gentil, a pretty good fellow 
(familiar or ironical). 

Un homme plaisant, a facetious man. 

Une femme sage, a wise woman. 

Un Iwmme cruel, a cruel man. 

Un air mauvais, a wicked look. 

Du bois mort, dead wood. 

La voix commune, the general opinion. 

Une corde fausse, a discordant string. 

Un jour faux, wrong shading. 

Une porte faicsse, a sham door. 

Un habit nouveau, a new-fashion coat. 

Un livre noztveau, a newly-published book. 

Un ton haut, a loud tone. 

Une epigramme mechante, a malicious epi- 
gram. 

Un lion furieux, a furious lion. 
Poison mortel, mortal poison. 
Un homme seul, a man alone. 



GENDER AND NUMBER OF ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives have neither gender nor number in themselves, but take those 
of the noun to which they belong ; that is, adjectives agree in gender and 
number with their nouns ; as, 

Un homme coxiragenx. Une femme cou- A courageous man. A courageous woman. 
rageuse. 

Des hommes prudents. Des femmes pru- Prudent men. Prudent women. 
dentes. 

FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES FORMED. 

1. All French adjectives end in e mute in the feminine. 

2. Masculine adjectives ending in e mute are unchanged in the feminine ; as, 
Le pauvke homme. La pat/vee femme. The poor man. The poor woman. 

3. Those not ending in e mute annex one for the feminine ; as, 
Mon petit frere. Ma petite soeur. My little brother. My little sister. 



436 



ADJECTIVES. 



4. Those ending in el, eil, ten, on, as, os, et, and ot, double the final con- 
sonant before e mute ; as, Tel, telle ; pareil, pareille ; ancien, ancienne ; bon, 
bonne ; gras, grasse ; gros, grossc ; muet, muette ; sot, sotte. 

5. Those in /make their feminine in ve, and those in x in se ; as, Kcuf, 
neuve ; heureux, keureuse ; jaloux, jalouse. 

6. Qu is the equivalent of c before i or e. Hence, adjectives ending in c 
change it to qu before e of the feminine ; as, Public, picblique ; caduc, caduqne. 

7. Beau, nouveau,fou, and mou, become bel, nouvel, fol, and mol, and vieux 
generally becomes vieil, before a vowel or a silent h ; and from these latter the 
feminines are formed according to the above rule 4, making Belle, nouvelle, 
folle, molle, and vieille. 

8. Nouns expressing qualifications and professions generally form their 
feminine as adjectives. 

The following are exceptions to the above rules : 

Complet makes the feminine complete; concret, concrete ; discret, discrete ; 



inquiet, 


inquiete ; replet, replete; secret, secrete. 






MAS. 


FEM. 


HAS. 


FEM. 


MAS. 


FEM. 


Absous, 


absoute. 


Faux, 


fausse. 


Mulatre, 


mulatresse. 


Aigu, 


aiguo. 


Frais, 


fraichc. 


Negre (adj.), negresse (n.). 


Ambigu, 


ambigue. 


Favori, 


favorite. 


Oblong, 


oblongue. 


Benin, 


benigne. 


Franc, 


francbe. 


Frefix, 


prefixe. 


Blanc, 


blanche. 


Jouvenceau, 


jouvencelle. 


Eesous, 


resolue. 


Coi, 


coite. 


Jumeau, 


jumelle. 


Eoux, 


rousse. 


Contigu, 


contigne. 


Long, 


longue. 


Sec, 


secbe. 


Devin, 


devineresse. 


Maitre, 


maitresse. 


Suisse (adj.), suissesse (n.). 


Dissous, 


dissoute. 


Mai re, 


mairesse. 


Tiers, 


tierce. 


Doux, 


douce, 


Malin, 


maligne. 


Traitre, 


traitresse. 


Exigu, 


exiguo. 











The following also double the last consonant before e mute of the femi- 
nine : 



]£pais, 

Expres, 

Gentil, 



expresse. 
gentille. 



Grec, 
Nul, 



grecque. 
nulle. 



Paysan, 
Profes, 



paysanne. 
professe. 



9. Adjectives in eur, and nouns expressing qualifications, have the feminine 
as follows. Those formed from present participles, by turning ant into eur, 
change r into se for the feminine : as, 



PART. MAS. FEM. 

Baillant, bailleur, bailleuse. 

Dansant, danseur, danseuse. 

Trompant, trompeur, trompeuse. 



PART. MAS. FEM. 

Chantant, cbanteur, chanteuse. 

Mentant, menteur, menteuse. 

Vendant, vendeur, vendeuse. 



But bailleur, a lessor; demandeur, a plaintiff at law ; chasseur, a hunter; defendeur, 
a defendant at law ; enchanteur, an enchanter ; pecheur, a sinner ; vendeur, a vendor (in 
law) ; vengeur, avenging,— change eur into eresse, making bailleresse, demanderessc, chas- 
seresse. defender esse, enchanter esse, veng eresse. 

Also, debiteur, a debtor, executeur, inspecteur, inventeur, persecuteur, change teur 
into trice ; making debitrice, executrice, inspectrice, etc. Chanteur, a vocalist, besides 
chanteuse, has feminine cantatrice ; ambassadeur makes ambassadrice ; gouvemeur and 
serviteur make gotivernante and servante. 



ADJECTIVES. 



437 



10. Other adjectives in teur, not formed from present participles, have also 
the feminine in trice ; as, accusateur, accicsatrice ; conducteur, conductrice ; cre- 
ateur, creatrice, etc. 

11. Those in erieur, also majeur, meilleur, mineur, form the feminine reg- 
ularly ; as, exterieur, exterieure ; inf erieur, inferieure ; majeure, meilleure, etc. 

12. When the masculine ends in er, the feminine takes the grave accent on 
the penultimate e ; as, fier, fiere ; oilier ; altiere; etranger, etrangere. 

PLUEAL OF ADJECTIVES FOE MED. 

1. The plural of adjectives, like that of nouns, is generally formed by add- 
• ing s to the singular ; as, petit, petits ; grand, grands. 

To this rule there is no exception in the feminine, as it ends in e mute. 

2. Adjectives ending in s or x are unchanged in the plural; as, gros, vieux. 

3. Those in al generally change al into aux for the plural ; as, national, 
nationaux; liberal, liberaux. 

4. Those in aic add x for the plural ; as, beau, beaux ; nouveau, nouveaux. 

5. Many, however, in al add s for the plural ; as, amical, austral, bancal, 
boreal, doctoral, ducal, fatal, final, filial, frugal, glacial, initial, jovial, labial, 
matinal, nasal, naval, pascal, penal, thedtral. 

Tout drops t in the plural, and forms tons. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. Adjectives and participles agree with their nouns in gender and num- 
ber ; as, 

Le beau jardin, the fine garden. Les beaux jardins, the fine gardens. 

La belle maison, the fine house. Les belles maisons, the fine houses. 

2. An adjective qualifying several nouns in the singular is plural; as, 
Cet homme et son enfant sont malades. That man and his child are sick. 
J^ai un chapeau et un manUau neots. I have a new hat and cloak. 

3. An adjective qualifying several nouns singular of different genders must 
be masculine plural ; as, 

Hon pere et ma mere sont contents. My father and my mother are contented. 

Voire smir et voire frere sont vekus. Tour brother and sister have come. 

4. When nouns of different genders are qualified by a following adjective, 
the sound requires the masculine noun to be placed last ; that is, next to the 
masculine adjective. 

Une grandeur et un^ merite par/aits ; not A greatness and a merit perfect. 

un merite et une grandeur par/aits. 
Une prudence et un courage etonnants. A prudence and a courage astonishing. 

5. But when the adjective has the same sound in the masculine as the fem- 
inine, it can be placed next to the feminine noun ; as, 

Vordre et Vutilite publics. The public order and utility. 

6. When the adjective qualifies several nouns of the same or similar mean- 
ing, or nouns which form a climax, so that the last includes the force of the 
others, or when the attention is fixed particularly on the last (in all which cases 
the conjunction et should always be suppressed in French) ; as, 



438 



ADJECTIVES. 



Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, qxCune All his life has been only a labor, an occupa- 

occupation continuelle. tion incessant. 

Le fee, le bandeau, la flamme est toute The fire, the bandage, the flame, is all ready. 

PEETE. 

7. When the adjective qualifies two preceding nouns united by ou, it agrees 
with the latter ; as, 

Us dblinrent Vestime ou la confiance pu- They obtained the esteem o:- the confidence 
blique. of the public. 

But when such an arrangement presents some ambiguity, the adjective 
must be plural ; as, 

Vn homme ou unefemme ages. An aged man or woman. 

8. "When an adjective is placed after two nouns connected by a preposi- 
tion, it may agree with either noun, according to the sense ; as, 

Des bas de coton bleus. Some blue cotton stockings. 

Des bas de coton ecru. Some stockings of unbleached cotton. 

Une masse de inaisons desageeable d la Amass of houses disagreeable to the sight. 
vue. 

Uhe masse de maisons consteuites en A mass of houses built of brick. 
briques. 

9. Nu before a noun, without the article, forms a kind of adverbial phrase, 
and is invariable ; as, Nu-bras, bare-armed ; nu-cou, bare-necked ; nu-jambes, 
bare-legged ; nu-pieds, bare-foot ; nu-tete, bare-headed. But if the noun fol- 
lowing nu is accompanied by the article, or by a limiting adjective, it agrees 
with the noun; as, La nue propriety lesjambes nues, une epee nue. 

10. Demi is invariable when placed before its noun, to which it is then 
joined by a hyphen ; as, Une DEin-hcure, une vvxii-livre. When placed after 
the noun, it agrees with it in gender, and is always singular ; as, Une heure et 
demie, trois metres et demi. 

11. The adjective feu (late, deceased), when immediately preceding the 
noun, agrees with it ; but when separated by the article or possessive adjec- 
tive, it is unchanged ; as, La fette reine or feu la reine, the late queen ; voire 
feue mere or feu voire mere, your late mother. 

12. Attendu, ci-inclus, ci-joint, excepte, passe, suppose, compris, franc de 
port, when they are before a noun, are used as prepositions or adverbial ex- 
pressions, and are invariable ; after the noun they are used as adjectives, and 
are variable ; as, 

Vous trouverez ci-inclus copie du contrat Tou will find included a copy of the contract. 
La lettre ci-incluse, or ci-jointe. The inclosed letter. 

Vous trouverez ci-joint (or ci-inclus) copie Tou will find annexed the copy of the agrce- 

(or la copie du traite). ment. 
Vous recevrez franc de tort ces lettres. You will receive these letters free of postage. 
Ces lettres sont feancues de port. These letters are free of postage. 

13. Possible, belonging to a noun, agrees with it ; hut it sometimes be- 
longs to an infinitive understood, and is then invariable ; as, 

Cela est dans les Glioses possibles. That is among the things possible. 

II exiermine le plus d'hommes possible. He exterminates the most men possible. 
Possible, in this last phrase, belongs to exterminer understood, and is invariable. 

14. Proche is sometimes an adjective and sometimes a preposition. When 



ADJECTIVES. 439 

preceded by the verb etre, expressed or understood, it may be used as either, 
but preceded by other verbs it is invariable ; as, 

Les maisons peoches de la riviere. The houses near the river. 

Les maisons qui sont peoche de la ville. The houses which are near the city. 

Les maisons que I' on construct peociie du The houses which they build near the wall. 
mur. 

15. Adjectives used as adverbs are not varied; as, 

Ces fleurs sentent box. These flowers smell good. 

Ces livres content ciiee. These books cost dear. 

16. Two adjectives forming a compound are both varied to agree with the 
noun. Such are, aveugle-ne, premier-ne, mort-n'e, ivre-mort y sourd-muet ; as, 
Des Jiommes ivees-moets. Some men dead drunk. 

Desfemmes souedes-mouettes. Some women deaf and dumb. 

Des roses fraiches cueillies. Eoses freshly gathered. 

Desfemmes toutes-puissantes. Some women all-powerful. 

Rem. — Nouveaxi, masculine, in such compounds, is often considered an adverb, and is 
not varied; as, Un enfant nouveau-ne, des enfants nouveau-nes. 

17. If the first of such adjectives, however, be mi, demi, or semi, the sec- 
ond only is changed ; as, 

Despeuples demi-civilises. People half civilized. 

IS. Two adjectives, of which the first qualified the second, are both inva- 
riable, the first being taken substantively ; as, 

Des cheveux ciiatain-claie. Hair of a light chestnut (color). 

Des etoffes eose-tendee. Cloth of a delicate rose (color). 

19. The variation of other compound adjectives will be sufficiently obvious 
from their nature ; as, bien-aime, bien-aimes, well-beloved. 

20. Adjectives following the word air, if they refer especially to air, agree 
with it, otherwise with the subject of the verb (d'etre being either expressed 
or understood). 

Cettefemme a l'aie chaemant. That woman looks charming. 

Cette pomme a l'aie {d'etre) cutte. That apple looks cooked. 



DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

1. There are in French, as in English, three degrees of comparison, the 
positive, comparative, and superlative. 

2. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aicssi before and que 
after the adjective or adverb compared ; as, 

Ma maison est axjssi belle que la vbtre. My house is as beautiful as yours. 
Cet homme est aussi modeste que savant. That man is as modest as learned. 
Jl parte aussi eloquemment que les autres. He speaks as eloquently as the others. 

3. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing plus before and que 
after the adjective or adverb compared ; as, 

Cet femme est plus aimable que ses com- Ttat Avoman is more amiable than her com- 

pagnes. panions. 
Elles sont plus aimables qv^honnetes. They are more amiable than honest. 

Nous Vavons compris plus faeilement que We have understood it more easily than you. 

vous. 



440 



ADJECTIVES. 



4. The coynparative of inferiority is formed cither by placing moins before 
and que after the positive, or by rendering the comparative of equality nega- 
tive ; as, 

Ces Uvres sont moixs chers que les miens. Those books are less dear than mino. 
Ma soiur n'est pas si (or aussi) belle que My sister is not so beautiful as good. 
bonne. 

Je ne traduis pas si (or aussi) Men que mon I do not translate so well as my neighbor. 
voisin. 

2Toics les trouverons moixs aisement Qu'a-w- "We shall find them less easily than before. 
tvefois. 

5. A few adjectives and adverbs have irregular comparatives. 

POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. 



Bon, good (adject.). Meilleur (adj.), better. 

Petit, little, " Moindre, " less. 

Mauvais, bad, " Pire, " worse. 

Bien, well (adverb). Mieux (adv.), better. 

Peu, little, " Moins, " less. 

Mai, bad, " Pis, " worse. 

Plus mal is used most generally for euphony instead of pis. 

Beaucoup, much or many. Autant, as much or as many. 

Plus, more. Davantage, more. 



Davantage is always used absolutely, and at the end of a clause. 

6. When quantities are compared, the noun must be preceded by de, ac- 
cording to the rules for words of quantity ; as, 

Nous avons autakt de Uvres que ve plumes. "We have as many books as pens. 
Avez vous plus de patience que mon cousin. Have more patience than my cousin. 
Cet homme possede moins de maisons que That man possesses less houses than land. 
de terre. 

V. The superlative is of two kinds, absolute and relative. 

8. The superlative absolute is formed by prefixing tres, bien, fort, extraordi- 
nairement, extrememeyit, etc., to the adjective or adverb ; as, 

Cela est TRES-^eaw. That is very fine. 

Vous etes bien bon. You are very good. 

9. The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the definite article or an 
adjective pronoun to the comparative of superiority or inferiority ; as, 

Cetait le meilleur de tous. It was the best of all. 

La plus belle maison. The handsomest house. 



INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 



Aucun, 


no, not any. 


Pas un, 


not one. 


Autre, 


other. 


Plusieurs, 


several. 


Chaque, 


each, every. 


Quel? 


what ? or which? 


Certain, 


certain. 


Quel que, 


whatever. 


Maint, 


many a. 


Quelque — que, 


whatever, whoever. 


Meme, 


same, self, very. 


Quelque, 


some. 


Nul, 


no, not any. 


Quelconque, 


whatever. 



ADJECTIVES. 



441 



Tel, such. Tous, every. 

Tel que, such as. Tout, any. 

Tel quel, such as it is. Tout (absolutely), every thing. 

Tout, whole. Tout deux, both (together). 

Tous, all. Tous les deux, both. 

2. Chaque is used with a noun; chacun, without one. 

Chaqtte homrne pour rait etre utile; cha- Each man could be useful; every one has his 
ctm a son merite. value. 

3. Quelque, quelques (some — any — a few). 
Quelques braves gens. Some honest people. 

Pretes-moi quelque bon livre — quelques Lend me some good book — a few dollars. 
dollars. 

4. Quelconque is always after the noun. 

D'une maniere quelconque. In any way whatever. 

5. Quel que followed by a verb is written as two words, quel agreeing with 
the subject of the verb ; as, 

Quels que soient les humains. Whatever men may be. 

6. Quelque — que before a noun is an adjective, and agrees in number with 
it; as, 

Quelques raisons qv'ils aient, etc. Whatever reasons they may have. 

7. Quelque, referring to a qualifying word, is an adverb, and invariable; as, 

Quelque imposantes que soient vos demon- However imposing may be your demonstra- 
strations. tions. 

8. Tout, when it modifies an adjective, is an adverb, and invariable ; as, 
Une valeur tout hero'ique. A bravery quite heroic. 

9. But if the adjective be feminine, and begin with a consonant or aspi- 
rated h, euphony requires that tout be varied as an adjective ; as, 

Sa mire est tout aimable ; elle est toute dis- His mother is quite amiable ; she is quite 
posee d lui pardonner. disposed to pardon him. 

10. Tout before the proper name of a city is always masculine, because it 
belongs to peuple understood ; as, 

Tout Smyrne ne parlait que d^elle. All Smyrna spoke only of her. 

Tout Home etait consterne. All Eome was dismayed. 

Eem.— When the name is accompanied by an adjective, tout is generally feminine ; as, 
Toute Vancienne Rome. All ancient Eome. 

11. A ucun and nul are essentially singular : but when they belong to a 
noun which has no singular, or which denotes particularly the plural, they take 
the plural number ; as, 

II ii e gao tie aucuns (/ages. He gains no wages. 

In'ulles troups ne sont mieux exercees. No troops are better exercised. 

Eem. — 2ful after the noun means null, void, and follows the general rule. 

12. Heme is an adjective, and variable when it refers to only one noun, and 
when it is annexed to a pronoun, in which case it means same, self, very; as, 

Les memes vertus. Les memes vices. The same virtues. The same vices. 

Moi-uKME. 2?w£C-meme8. Ceux memes. Myself. Themselves. Those very ones. 

Les pier res memes. The very stones. 

17* 



442 



ADJECTIVES. 



13. It is an adverb, and invariable when it modifies a verb or an adjective, 
or is placed after two or more nouns ; in which case it means even, also; as, 
On doit secourir meme les mediants. We ought to help even the wicked. 

Hous demons obeir aux lois meme ivjustcs. We ought to obey even unjust laws. 
Lesanimaux, les plantes meme etaient au Animals and even plants were among the 

nombre des diviniies eg yptie lines. number of the Egyptian divinities. 

NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
For Cardinal and Ordinal, see Lesson 33, page 147. 

1. The ordinal numbers take the gender and number of their nouns; as, 
Les peemieks Chretiens. La seconde lec on. The first Christians. The second lesson. 

2. The cardinal numbers are invariable, except vingt and cent. 

TTn has both genders, and can be plural when used with quelque or the articles to form 
the pronouns quelqu'un, quelques-uns, quelques-unes, run, rune, les uns, les unes. 

3. Vingt and cent take s when preceded by a number which multiplies 
them ; as, 

Quatre-rixGi3 ans. Trois cents ans. Eighty. Three hundred years, 

4. Vingt and cent are invariable, however, when followed by another num- 
ber, and when used for ordinal numbers ; as, 

Quatre-vingt-cinq. Six cent irente. Eighty-five. Six hundred and thirty. 

L? an cinq cent. Page quatre-vingt. The five-hundredth year. The eightieth 

page. 

5. Mille becomes mil in the computation of years of the Christian era less 
than two thousand, in all other cases it is unabbreviated ; as, 

En mil huit cent de Tere chretienne. In one thousand eight hundred of the Chris- 

tian era. 

Van deux mille de la creation. The year two thousand from the creation. 

6. Mille takes s only when it is a noun and signifies miles. 

Cinq mille prisonniers. Cinq milles. Five thousand prisoners. Five miles. 

1. From numeral adjectives are formed numeral nouns by annexing aine, 
with such other slight changes as euphony requires ; as, 

Dizaine, ten. quarantaine, forty. 

douzaine, a dozen. cinquantaine, fifty. 

quinzaine, fifteen. soixantaine, sixty. 

vingtaine, a score. quatre-vingtaine, eighty. 

trentaine, thirty. tine centaine, a hundred. 

Such nouns (except line douzaine, 12), may have some vagueness of meaning, implying 
nearly, about; as, J'ai line centaine d"ecus, I have some hundred crowns, or, about a 
hundred crowns. 

8. The fractional numerals are these : 

La moitie, the half. un cinquieme, one-fifth. 

le tiers, the third. quatre cinquiemes, four-fifths. 

deux tiers, two thirds. un sixieme, a sixth. 

un quart, a fourth. un dixibne, a tenth. 

trois quarts, three-fourths. un centieme, a hundredth, etc. 



PRONOUNS. 



443 



DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
MASCULINE. FEMININE. BOTH GENDEES. 

1. Ce, Cette. This, that. Ces. These, those. 

2. Ce becomes cet before a vowel or a silent h. 

Ce soldat, this soldier. Ces soldats, these soldiers. 

Cet enfant, that child. Ces enfants, those children. 

Ceite dame, that lady. Ces dames, those ladies. 

3. When it is necessary to distinguish this and that, ci and Id are annexed 
to the nouns ; as, 

Ce livre-ci, this book. Ce livre-ld, that bcok. 

Ces Uvres-ci, these books. Ces livres-ld, those books. 

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 



MASCULINE. 


FEMININE. 


PLURAL. 




Mon, 


ma, 


mes, 


My. 


Ton, 


ta, 


tes, 


Thy. 


Son, 


sa, 


ses, 


His, her, its. 


Notre, 


notre, 


nos, 


Our. 


Votre, 


votre, 


vos, 


Your. 


Leur, 


leur, 


leurs, 


Theirs. 



1. Ma, ta, sa, become mon, ton, son, for the sake of euphony, before a 
vowel or a silent h ; as, 

Mon ardoise, ton encre, son humeur. My 6late, thy ink, his humor. 

2. The demonstrative and possessive adjectives, like the article, are re- 
peated before each noun in the same construction, and before each adjective 
belonging to a separate noun. 

MoN^ere et ma mem. My father and mother. 

Mon grand et mon petit cheval. My large and my small horse. 

Mon grand et beau cheval. My large and handsome horse. 

Mon is not repeated in this last sentence because both adjectives belong to cheval. 



PRONOUNS. 

AGREEMENT OF PRONOUNS. 

1. Pronouns agree with their antecedents in gender, number, and per- 
son ; as, 

L"homme auquel^ m'adresse. The man whom I address. 

Les personnes auxquelles^ m'adresse. The persons whom I address. 
Ma mere vous appelle, elle a besoin de My mother calls you, she needs you. 
vous. 

2. Pronouns relating to two or more nouns follow the same rule as adjec- 
tives. See page 43*7. 

3. A pronoun must have for its antecedent a definite noun, that is, a noun 
accompanied by an article or adjective ; as, 

Jl nous a fait une peue, dont nous nepou- He has caused us a fear from which we can 

vons revenir. not recover. 

Ce criminel demande sa gea.ce, mais il ne That criminal asks for his pardon, but he 

■CoUiendra pas. will not obtain it. 



444 



PRONOUNS. 



In the former of these phrases, peur without une, and in the latter, grace without sa, 
could not be the antecedent of the pronoun. So in Avoir besoin, avoir froid, avoir /aim, 
etc., the noun can not stand as antecedent to a pronoun. 

4. Pronouns must have antecedents which are unequivocal ; as, 
H y a dans Pline des Icitres (and not des lettres dans Pline) dont le style, est ad- 
mirable. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



I. — SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE. 

1. The following are used as the subject of a verb expressed ; as, 

Je, I. nous, we. il, he, it. Us, they (mas.). 

tu, thou. vous, you. elle, she, it. elles, they (fem.). 

2. The following are used as subject when the verb is understood ; as, 
Moi, L nous, we. lui, he. eux, they (mas.). 
toi, thou. vous, you. elle, she. elles, they (fem.). 

3. These latter are also used as the predicate of etre, to be ; as, 
Est-ce moi t is it I ? Ce sont eux, it is they. 

4. Also as pleonasms to emphasize the subject, and when the action of the 
verb or verbs is attributed to several subjects successively ; as, 

Toi, leferais-tu ? "Wouldst thou do it ? 

dfoi, que faille Id ! I, I go there ! 

Noi,/irai au spectacle, lui et eux iront I shall go to the play, he and they will go 
aussi, mais toi tu nHras pas. also, but thou wilt not go. 

5. Also with a noun or pronoun to form a compound subject, in which 
case the pronouns of the first and second persons are repeated in the plural, 
but when the pronouns are all of the third person, no repetition is used. 

Yous et moi, nous irons d lapeche. You and I will go a-fishing. 

Ton pere,toiet elle, YQu&viendrezehez nous Thy father, thou and she will come to our 

demain. house to-morrow. 

Lid, elle et eux viendront. He, she and they will come. 

Eem.— "When pronouns of different persons are subject of the same verb, the first per- 
son is placed last, as in English. 

Vous et moi nous partirons demain. Tou and I will set out to-morrow. 

Lui et moi nous sommes freres. He and I are brothers. 

II. — OBJECT, OR ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE CASE. 

Before the verb. 

1. The following are used for the object of the verb and placed before it : 
Me, me, to me. nous, us, to us. lui, to him, to her. leur, to them. 
te, thee, to thee. vous, you, to you. ( himself, herself, 
le, it, him. les, them (mas.). J itself, to him- se, them- 

la, it, her. les, them (fem.). ' j self, to her self, selves, to 

V to itself. themselves. 
y, to it, to them, {there, here). en, of it, of them, from it, from them, 

{hence, from there). 



PRONOUNS. 



445 



2. Of these, the following are used as the direct object : Me, moi, te, toi, 
le, la, nous, votes, les, se. 

3. The following are used as the indirect object : Me, moi, te, toi, lui, 
nous, vous, leur, se, en, y. 

III. — OBJECT AFTER THE YERB, OR AFTER A PREPOSITION. 

Moi, d moi, me, to me. nous, d nous, us, to us. 

toi, d toi, thee, to thee. vous, d vous, you, to you. 

lui, a lui, him, to him. eux, d eux, them, to them. 

elle, d elle, her, to her. elles, a elles, them, to them. 

soi, himself, herself, itself. soi, themselves. 

d soi, to himself, to herself, to itself. d soi, to themselves. 

PLACE OF PEESONAL PEONOTJNS. 
I. — SUBJECT PRONOUNS. 

1. The subject pronouns are placed before the verb ; as, Je park, vous 
ecoutez, nous ecrivons. 

Eem. — The indefinite pronoun on takes the same place as a personal pronoun. 

2. In questions, however, the subject-pronoun is placed after the verb, in 
the simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in the compound tenses. 

Parles-votis ? Do you speak ? Vient-il t Does he come ? 

A-t-il fini ? Has he finished ? Sont-ils venus ? Have they come ? 

Parle-t-on bien d Paris ? Do they speak well at Paris? 

Eem.— When the verb ends and the pronoun begins with a vowel, a t between two 
hyphens is placed between them for better sound, 

3. In some exclamations also ; as, 

Est-il cruel ! How cruel he is ! Est-ce ennuyeux ! How tedious it is ! 

Entendez-vous ! You hear ! 

4. Also, when the verb is in the subjunctive without a conjunction (which 
takes place often with Pouvoir and Devoir) ; as, 

Pttisse-je de mes yeux y voir tomber lafoudre ! 
Dusse-je apres dix ans, voir inon palais en cendres. 

5. Also, with a verb announcing a quotation, when the verb is not at the 
beginning of the words quoted. 

" Je ne serai Tieureux^ disait-il, " que lorsquHl sera loin." 

6. In general, though not necessarily, when the verb is preceded by Aussi, 
peut-etre, encore, toujours, en vain, du moins, au moins ; as, 

Attssi est-il voire ami. Peut-etre avez-votjs raison. 

7. When the subject-pronouns follow the verb, they must be joined by a 
hyphen. 

8. Whenje follows a verb ending ine mute, the e is for euphony changed 
into e ; as, Aime-je, dusse-je. In questions, Est-ce que is, for the sake of eu- 
phony, often prefixed to the first person singular in most verbs of one sylla- 
ble ; as, Est-ce que je dors ? not dors-je ? Est-ce queje cours ? not cours-je ? 

Eem.— This last form is used with other French verbs to show some emotion ; as, Est-GQ 
que Charles est blesse ? Est-ce qu'il est tue ! 



446 



PRONOUNS. 



II. — PLACE OF THE OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

1„ The objective pronouns, when used without a preposition,* are placed 

immediately before the verb ; as, 

Je les vols, I see them ; Nous leur parlons, Ave speak to them ; 
Vous connaissent-ite ? 

2. With the imperative affirmative, however, the objective pronouns fol- 
low the verb, and are joined to it by a hyphen; as, Ecoutez-hs., listen to him ; 
Fiez-vous-y, trust yourself to it ; Donnez-le-moi, give it to me. "When the im- 
perative is negative, the pronoun is placed according to the general rule : Ne 
le hd donnez pas, do not give it to him. 

Kem.— Two imperatives joined by et or ou formerly might take the object of the second 
verb before it but now it is placed after the verb. 

Laissez-moi rhonneur, ou vtez-moi la vie. Leave me honor, or take away my life. 
Prenez ce livre, lisez-le, et remettes-le d sa Take this book, read it, and put it back in 
place. its place. 

3. Also, when a pronoun, with a noun or another pronoun, form a com- 
pound object, they follow the verb, and a pronoun representing the same ob- 
ject is placed before the verb ; as, 

Nous les cherchons eux et leues amis. "We seek them and their friends. 

11 notts comprend vous et moi. He understands you and me. 

11 nous parle k vous et k moi. He speaks to you and me. 

Je vous ecoute toi, lui et elle. I hear thee, him, and her. 

Eem.— "Wc see in the above, that in objective pronouns, the first person is preferred to 
the second, and the second to the third. 

4. Most intransitive and reflective verbs, being followed by a preposition, 
require that preposition and its object, the pronoun or pronouns, after the 
verb ; as, Aller, venir, courir, songer, penser, rever, se souvenir, se glorifier, etc. 

Nous allons k vous. We are going to you. 

lis songent k nous. They think of us. 

Petisez-vous k moi ? Do you think of me ? 

It se souvient de nous et d'elle. He remembers us and her. 

Parlez-vous de moi ? D) you speak of me ? 

Nous marchons contee eux. We march against them. 

5. When one of the prepositions a, de, pour, par, etc., has several objects, 
it is generally repeated before each ; as, 

Paries d'eux et de nous. Speak of them and of us. 

Je travaille four vous et pour moi. I work for you and for me. 

III. — RELATIVE PLACE OF DIFFERENT PRONOUNS. 

1. Subject-pronouns, either before or after the verb, precede those which 
are the object ; as, 

Je TKparle. I speak to thee. Pense-t-il k nous ? Is he thinking of us ? 

2. When there are two objective pronouns of different persons, the first 
and second precede the third ; as, 



* The preposition d is the only one, except de and en, which can be understood with a 
pronoun or implied in it. 



PRONOUNS. 447 

Tu nous les apporteras. Thou wilt bring them to us. 

Je vous le recommande. I recommend him to you. 

3. When these pronouns are of the same person, the direct object precedes 
the indirect ; as, 

Vous le lui direz. You will say it to him. 

Je les Y mine. I take them there. 

4. In the imperative affirmative the direct object always precedes the in- 
direct, without regard to persons ; as, 

Donnez-le-moi, give it to me. Amene-les-nous, bring them to us. 

Promene-Vy* walk there. 

5. En and y always follow the other objective pronouns, and when they 

come together, y precedes en ; as, Je t'en prie, I pray thee for it. 

Nous les y conduirons. We will conduct Laisses- y-en,* leave some there, 
them there. 

(3. Se and all the reflective pronouns always precede the other objective 
pronouns ; as, 

Tu te le promets, thou promisest it to thyself. Us se xtimaginent, they imagine it. 

7. According to the above rule the objective pronouns come together in 
the following order : 

Me le, me la, we les. Nous le, nous la, nous les. 

Te le, te la, te les. Vous le, vous la, vous les. 

Le lui, la lid, les lui. Se le, se la, se les. 

Le lew, la leur, les leur. it/'y, nous y, fy, vous y. 

Vy, les y, s'y. M^en, nous en, fen, votes en. 

Nous y en, voics y en, leur y en. E'en, les en, s'en, lui en. 



IV. — REPETITION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The subject-pronoun is to be repeated before each verb, connected by 
any other conjunction than et and ni; as, 

II est bon, mais il est faible. He is good, but he is weak. 

Nous Vavons connu et estime. We have known and esteemed him. 

Nous Vavons connu, mais nous ne Vavons "We have known, but have not esteemed 

pas estime. him. 
Je ne vous loue ni ne vous blame. I neither praise nor blame you. 

2. When the subject-pronoun is not repeated, the successive verbs must 
be either all affirmative or all negative, and even then the repetition is often 
preferable. 

3. The objective pronoun must be repeated with each verb, except in com- 
pound tenses, where the auxiliary is omitted ; as, 

Mes amis les verront et les felieiteront. My friends will see them and will congratu- 
late them. 

Nous leur a von 8 parte et leur avons de- "We have spoken to them and have asked 
mande de vos nouvelles. them news of you. 



* When y with another objective pronoun, especially moi, toi, le, la, come after the im- 
perative, it is better for euphony to replace it by an equivalent, Id, dans ce lieu, etc. ; as, 
Promene-toi Id ; Reposez-vous dans ce lieu. 



448 



PRONOUNS. 



2?ous les avons attaques et les avons fain- ) 

cus ; or, nous les avons attaques et I We have attacked and vanquished them. 



vaincus. 



V. 

1. When le, used as so in English, represents an adjective, or a noun used 
as an adjective, it is invariable; as, 

Madame, etes-vous malade ? Madam, are you sick ? 

Je le suis. I am so. 

Ces homines sont-ils militaires ? Are those men soldiers ? 

Ms ne le sont pas. They are not. 

2. But when it represents a noun, or an adjective used as a noun, it agrees 
with it in gender and number ; as, 

Etes-vous les sold ats du prince ? Are you the soldiers of the prince? 

Nous les sommes. We are so. 

Etes-vous la mala.ce ? Are you the sick woman ? 

Je la suis. I am so. 

VI. 

1. Soi is of both genders and the singular number, and applies to both per- 
sons and things. When used of persons, it refers, in general, only to an inde- 
terminate subject, or is used with an infinitive ; as, On doit parler rarement de 
soi. Chacun travaille pour soi. Ne vivre que pour soi, c'est etre dejd mort. 
When used of things, it refers to a particular subject: Un bienfait porte sa 
recompense avec soi. 

2. To avoid ambiguity, soi is sometimes used of persons in reference to a particular 
subject; as, En remplissant les volonUs de son pere, ce jeune homme travaille pour soi 
Only in the phrase etre soi, to preserve one's own character, is soi used without a preposi- 
tion ; as, Tl faut toujours etre soi. 

VII. 

1. En, in a partitive sense, some or any, refers alike to persons and things; 
as, Avez-vous des amis? J' 1 en ai. Avez-vous de V argent? J~*en ai. In other 
cases it refers more particularly to things, and de lui, delle, d'eux, d'elles, to 
persons ; as, Ce gargon est malade ; avez-vous soin de lui ? J'ai un couteau, 
etje m'EN sers. En may be used, however, for persons, but is less definite and 
emphatic ; and on the other hand, de lui, etc., are sometimes used for things, 
but then they receive a kind of personification : Lejeu est un vice affreux; de 
lui provient la ruine de bien des families. 

2. En is not to be used when reference is made to the subject of the governing verb ; but 
its, of it, etc., are to be rendered by son, sa, ses, leur, or leurs. These adjective pronouns 
are also to be used when persons are referred to. But when the reference is to things which 
precede the subject, en with the definite article must be employed: Chaque travail a sa 
fatigue. Here sa is used because the reference is to travail, the subject. Ces ouvrages 
ont leur merite, chacun en apprecie la valeur. Here, again, leur is used because it re- 
fers to ouvrages, the subject of its governing verb ; and en with the article in the second 
clause, because it does not refer to the subject of its governing verb, chacun, but to ouvra- 
ges, which precedes. Get homme est fort aimable; chacun recherche sa societe. Here 
sa is used because it refers to a person. 

5. The possessive adjective is used, also, in agreement with the object of a preposition ; 
as, Paris est une ville remarquable ; les etrangers admirent la leaute de ses edifices. 



PRONOUNS. 



449 



VIII. 

Y, like en, is commonly used in reference to things. Lui and leur, how- 
ever, may be used in reference to things instead of y, by a kind of personifica- 
tion; as, Le travail est mon sauveur,je lui dois la vie. Fis sometimes applied 
to persons, but then they are alluded to in the character of things, or desig- 
nated vaguely ; Cest un honnete homme ; fiez-vous-Y. That is, fiez-vous a cela, 
& ce que je vous dis. Usage, also, sanctions y in a few other cases ; as, Pen- 
sez-vous & moi ? J y y pense. 

x. 

1. Nous in French, like we and us in English, is sometimes used in refer- 
ence to a single person, and the adjective and participle belonging to it must 
then be singular ; as, 

A writer says of himself, Nous sommes force de nous arreter id. 

2. Vous, used to address one person, follows the same rule ; as, 

Madame, vous etes hienfatiguee. 



POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 



SINGULAR. 

Masculine. Feminine. 



PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. 



Le mien, 
le tien, 
le sien, 
le notre, 
le voire, 
le leur, 



la nueiine, 
la tienne, 
la sienne, 
la notre, 
la voire, 
la leur, 



les miens, 
les tiens, 
les siens, 
les notres, 
les votres, 
les leurs. 



les miennes, 
les tiennes, 
les siennes, 
les notres, 
les votres, 
les leurs, 



mine. 

thine. 

his, hers. 

ours. 

yours. 

theirs. 



1. These pronouns are never used before a noun, and always begin with 
the article. 

2. Notre and votre, when preceded by the article (i. e. when they are pro- 
nouns) always have a circumflex accent over o, as above. 

EELATIVE PEONOTJNS. 



PLURAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. 



lesquelles, who, which, that. 
desquelles, whose, of which. 
auxquelles, to whom, to w 7 hich. 
lesquelles, whom, which, that. 



BOTH NUMBERS SINGULAR. 

and genders. Masculine. Feminine. 
JSom. Qui, Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, 

Gen. de qui, dont, duquel, de laquelle, desquels, 
Dat. d qui, d quoi, auquel, d'laquelle, auxquels, 
Acc. que, lequel, laquelle, lesquels, 

Oil, in which (place), where. 

D'oii, from which (place), from where, whence. 

Par oil, by or through which (place), where. 

2. Qui, que, dont, adopt the gender and number of their antecedent, al- 
though invariable in form. They apply either to persons or things. 

3. Qui, as a relative pronoun, is always nominative, or the object of a prep- 
osition. In this last case it applies only to persons. The corresponding word 
for things is lequel. Que is used only before the verb, and never with a prep- 
osition : as, 



450 



PRONOUNS. 



Croit-on toxijours ceux qui parlent beaucoup ? 
Connaissez-vous les personnes que notes avons rencontreesf 
Nous avons apporte tout ce dont nous avons besoin. 
Les fabricants pour qui vous travaillez 

Cest encore ici une ales raisons {pour laquelle)je veux alter d la campagne. 

4. A relative pronoun can not have for antecedent an adjective, except 
when the latter is used as a noun, — i. e., preceded by an article or determina- 
tive adjective ; as, 

Nous etions deux ou trois voyageurs qui "We were two or three travellers who wero 

etaient du mime avis. of the same opinion. 

Vous etes le seul qui ait reussi. You are the only one who has succeeded. 

5. Lequel, duquel, are used instead of qui, que, dont, to avoid an ambigu- 
ity ; as, J'ai vu le mari de voire sceur, lequel viendra me voir, Je dois rece- 
voir une lettre de mes enfants, laquelle f attends avec impatience. La bonte de 
Dieu de laquelle je connais la grandeur. Qui, que, and dont, in these sen- 
tences, would cause ambiguity ; when they would not, they are to be used. 
Duquel is used for dont also, when its antecedent is followed by a preposition ; 
as, Uhomme d la reputation duquel vous voulez nuire ; and not Vliomme d la 
reputation dont vous voulez nuire. 

Dont, of whom, of xchich, from whom, from which, zcliose, is preferred to duquel, de 
laquelle, etc., where there is no interrogation, and when no ambiguity arises from its use. 
It is employed for both persons and things and animals. 

6. "With a preposition, lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, are generally pre- 
ferred to quoi ; as, 

Les raisoris sur lesquelles (better than sur The reasons on which you support your ar- 
quoi) vous appuyez votre raisonnement. gument. 

*1. After a demonstrative pronoun or noun, qui, que, dont only are used, 
unless a preposition precede, in which case lequel, etc., can be used. 

Celui qui vous parle. The one who speaks to you. 

Ceux que vous connaissez. Those whom you know. 

Celui a qui or auquel vous parlez. He to whom you speak. 

8. When the antecedent is indefinite (as ce, rien, quelqu'un, quelque chose), 
qui, que, dont, and not lequel, must be used. With a prepositioD, and when 
the antecedent is understood, qui or quoi must be used. 

Voild ce que Von, gagne. Behold what one gains. 

Avouez ce qui vous embarrasse. Confess what embarrasses you. 

Cherchez ce dont vous avez besoin. Seek that of which you have need. 

Je ne sais ce a quoi vous vous occupez. I know not in Avhat you are occupied. 

Cherchez a qui vous plaindre. Seek some one to complain to. 

Quoi qu'on en dise. "Whatever one may say. 
Qui sert Men son pays sert souvent un in- He who serves his country well often serves 
grat. an ungrateful one. 

9. Que, whom, which, that, either relative or conjunction, connecting a de- 
pendent to a principal clause, though often understood in English, must always 
be expressed in French ; as, 

L'homme quel's vols. The man (whom) I see. 

Le livre que vous avez est d moi. The book you have is mine. 

Je crois qtfil viendra. I believe (that) he will come. 



PRONOUNS. 



451 



10. Ou, (foik, par oil, carry with them some idea of motion and locality ; as, 
Le peril d'ou il est sorti. La ville d'ou^'e viens. When extraction of race is 
spoken of, dont is employed : 

La maison s>*ovje sors. The house from which I go out. 

La maison dont^'s sors. The house from which I am sprung. 

Which, preceded by a preposition, and referring to a noun implying local- 
ity, is translated ou, oVou, par ou. When locality is not implied, it is as in 
English. 

INTEEEO G ATIVE PEONOTTNS. 

1. Qui? who, whom? is used for persons and personified things only. It 
can be in any case, and either before or after the verb ; as, 

Qui ? Qui c/ierchez-vous ? Who ? Whom do you seek ? 

De qui paries vous t Of whom do you speak ? 

Sur qui comptez-vous ? On whom do you rely ? 

2. Que, quoi ? what, which ? are used for things only. Que is used before 
the verb ; quoi ? alone, after the verb, or with a preposition. Que can not be 
used in the nominative ; but what, which? in that case must be rendered by 
Quest-ce qui? as, 

Que veut cet liomme ? What does that man wish for ? 

Que pensez'vous de ce litre ? What do you think of that book ? 

Quoi? Savez-voits quoi ? What? Do you know what? 

A quoi pensez-vous ? Of what are you thinking ? 

Sur quoi se repose-i-il ? On what does he repose ? 

Qu'est-ce qui fait tant de bruit ? What makes so much noise ? 

8. Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles ? which one, which ones ? are 
used to distinguish one or more individuals from others of the same kind, and 
are employed either with or without a preposition ; as, 

Lequel des deux prefer 'ez-vous ? Which of the two do you prefer ? 

De laquelle parlez-vous ? Of which one do you speak ? 

Auxquels fadresses-tu ? To which ones dost thou address thyself? 

Pour lesquelles vous declar ez-vous 1 For which ones do you declare ? 

4. Ou ? where, in which place ? 

D'ou? Whence? where from? from what place? 

Par ou ? Which way ? through or by what place ? 

Ou vont ces hommes ? Where are those men going ? 

D'ou vient-il ? Whence does he come ? 

Pae ou a-t-il disparu t Which way has he disappeared? 

DEMONSTE ATIYE PEONOUNS. 

SINGULAR. PLUEAL. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

1. Celui, celle, this, that, the one. Ceux, celles, these, those, the ones. 
celui-ci, celle-ci, this, this one. ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 

celui-ld, celle-ld, that, that one. ceux-ld, celles-ld, those. 

2. Ce, this, that. Ceci, this (thing). Cela, that (thing). 

3. Celui, ceux, celle, celles, are definite ; i. e., always relate to a person or 



452 



PRONOUNS. 



thing mentioned before, or specified in the sentence, often in the following 
clause, and can never be understood, as in English, with the possessive case. 

Mon livre et celui de mon frere. My book and my brothers. 

Je parle de ceux que vous voycz. I speak of those whom you see. 

4. He, him, she, her, then, them, the one, when followed by a relative pro- 
noun, are always rendered in French by demonstrative pronouns ; as, 

Je connais celui que vous verrez. I know him whom you will see. 

Apporiez ceux qui sont sur la table. Bring those which are on the table. 

5. In distinguishing different persons or objects, this, these, the latter, are 
rendered by demonstrative pronouns with ci annexed ; and that, those, the for- 
mer, by the same, with la annexed ; as, 

Celui-ci est bon, ceux-la sont meilleurs. This one is good, those are better. 

6. Ceci and cela are used absolutely ; that is, not relating to a person or 
thing named before. 

Ceci est de Vor ; cela est du cuivre. This is gold ; that is copper. 

7. Ce, with one of the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, or quoi with a prep- 
osition, means that which. What, meaning that which, therefore, is always 
ce qui, ce que, ce dont, or ce a quoi. 

Ce qui est lyossible, what (that which) is pos- Ce queje desire; what (that which) I de- 

sible. sire. 
Ce dont il agit, what is at stake. Ce d quoi je pense, what I think of. 

8. When the verb etre is followed by a pronoun, a definite noun, a prepo- 
sition, an adverb, a numeral, a verb, or an adjective referring to a proposition 
just stated, or used as a noun, then the pronouns it, that, lie, she, they, we, you, 
are translated by ce ; as, Cest lui, it is he ; e'est nous, it is we ; ce sont eux, it 
is they ; e'est un livre, it is a book ; e'est pour vous, it is for you ; e'est pru- 
demment pense ; e'est le vingt-cinq aout, it is the twenty-fifth of August ; 
e'est agir en honnete homme, it is to act as an honest man ; e'est a gr cable, it is 
agreeable. 

C*est Thomme quefestime. lie is the man whom I esteem. 

Ce sont les seuls queje connaisse. They are the only ones whom I know. 

Cest contre vous qxCil parle. It is against you that he speaks. 

9. When the predicate consists merely of etre, with a past participle, an 
adjective, or a noun used as an adjective, the personal pronoun is used for 
the subject ; as, 

Il est grand. Elle est belle. He is tall. She is beautiful. 

Il est homme de bien. Elles sont act/rices. He is an honest man. They are actresses. 

When it refers to what follows, and not to a proposition just stated, it is 
translated by il and not by ce ; as, 

Il est utile d Vhomme de se taire. It is useful to man to remain silent. 

Il est certain que vous reussirez. It is certain that you will succeed. 

Il est de mon devoir d'agir en cette affaire. It is my duty to act in this affair. 

Eem. — "When ftre is followed by a definite noun, as an attribute to a person or thing 
mentioned before, usage authorizes e'est, ce sont, or il est. Us sont, etc., though ce is prefer- 
able ; a3, 

Vous aimez Jean, c'est (il est) mon ami. Tou love John ; he is my friend. 
Vous connaissez ces dames, ce sont (elles You are acquainted with those ladies ; they 
sont) nos parentes. are our relations. 



PRONOUNS. 



453 



10. Ce is used as a pleonasm in the second member of a sentence before 
$tre. First, when the first member begins with ce and a relative pronoun ; as, 

Ce qui importe d Vhomme c'est de remplir "What is important to man is to fulfill his du- 

ses devoirs, ties. 

Ce qui est certain, c'est que le monde est de What is certain is that the world is out of 

tracers. order. 

Secondly, after a clause of some length, and which is the predicate of 
etre ; as, 

Le plus beau present qui ait etc fait aux The most beautiful present which has been 
hommes c'est Vamite. made to men is friendship. 

Eem.— In such cases ce may sometimes be omitted, but it is indispensable when etre is 

followed by a plural noun ; as, 

Ce qu'il aime est (or c'est) la gloire. "What he loves is glory. 

Ce qu'il desapprouve, ce sont nos defauts. "What he disapproves of is our faults. 

Lapartie la plus vevante de toute V affaire, The part the most vexing of all the affair, are 
ce sont les injures. the wrong3. 

Thirdly, after several infinitives, or between two ; as, 

Manger, boire, dormir, c'est toute sa Die. To eat, drink, and sleep, is all his life. 
Epargner les plaisirs, c'est les multiplier. To spare pleasures is to multiply them. 

INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 
RECAPITULATION — PARTICULARS. 

Some of the words commonly ranked under this head can not strictly be 
considered as pronouns ; but from their relation to other words which are so, 
they are best treated of here. Indefinite pronouns are accordingly ranged in 
four classes : 

1. Those which are never joined to a noun. 

2. Those which are always joined to a noun. 

3. Those which are sometimes with and sometimes without a noun. 

4. Those which are followed by que and qui. 

I. — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS WHICH ARE NEVER JOINED TO NOUNS. 

1. On, they, one, people. Quiconque, whoever, whosoever. 

QuelqxCun, somebody. Quelqu'un, quelqiCune, some one. 

Chacun, chacune, each one. Quelques-uns, qitelques-unes, some, a 

Vun Vautre, one another, each few. 

other. Tout le monde, every body. 

Personnc, nobody. Hun — Vautre, one — the other. 

Rien, nothing. 

2. On and quiconque, though essentially masculine singular, have the ad- 
jective feminine when applied expressly to females ; as, On n'est pas toujours 
jeune et belle. Mesdames, quiconque de vous sera assez hardie pour medire 
de moi,je Venferai repentir. On is employed in the same manner in the plu- 
ral ; as, On n'est pas des esclaves pour souffrir xcn si mauvais traitement ! 

3. Hon is often used for on after et or a vowel, for euphony ; as, Si l'on 
voit ; Ou l'on voudra ; Et l'on decida, etc. 



454 



PRONOUNS. 



Rem.— This euphonic I is not necessarily used, and must be carefully avoided when on 
is followed by I; as, Si Von Les voyait, etc. 

4. On is to be repeated before every verb of which it is the subject. 
On Valine, et on le loue. One loves and praises him. 

5. In regard to place, this pronoun follows the rules of the subject perso- 
nal pronouns. 

5. Quiconque relates only to persons, and is never plural. It governs the 
indicative and the second verb without a subject ; as, 

Quiconque a dlt cela, n'apas dlt la verlte. Whoever said that did not tell the truth. 
Qulconque est rlche est estiml "Whoever is rich is esteemed. 

Ce dlscours s'adresse d quiconque est cou- This discourse is addressed to whoever 'u 
pable. guilty 

7. Quelqu'un, (some one, somebody, any body, any one), when not referring 
to a noun, is masculine singular ; as, 

Quelqu'un me Va dlt. Somebody told me so. 

Est-ll venu quelqu'un me demander an- Has any one come and asked for me to-day 
jourcPhwi ? 

(1.) It can be feminine and plural only when subject of the verb. 
Quelqu'une de rows mesdames a-Uelle lu Has any one of you ladies read that work ? 
cet outrage f 

Quelques-uns assurent que le general est Some affirm that the general has come. 
venu. 

(2.) Eeferring to a noun it means some of, any of; it refers to persons or things, and 
may be of either gender and number. 

Je eonnals quelqiCune (or quelques-unes) I know some one (or some) of those ladies. 
de ces dames. 

Quelqti'tm de ces messieurs, quelques-uns Some one of those gentlemen, some of those 
de ces livres.- books. 

Rem. — Some of any of before a noun singular preceded by a possessive or demonstra- 
tive adjective, is unpen de; as, 

Donnez-moi un pen de votre (or ce) pain. Give me some of your (or that) bread. 

8. Chacun, chacune, each, each one. 
Tout le monde, every one, every body. 

Chacun means all the persons spoken of, but taken individually, one after another. 
Tout le monde means all taken together. 

llfaut que chacun pale son ecot. Each one must pay his share. 

Tout le monde le dlt. Every body says so. 

(1.) Tout le monde is always masculine, as is also chacun when used as above in refer- 
ence to persons and in an indeterminate manner. 

Tout le monde etalt fort embarrasse. Every body was much embarrassed. 

Chacun prend sonplaisir oic 11 le trouve. Each one takes his pleasure where he finds it. 

(2.) Chacun, not used indeterminately, as above, may refer to persons or things, and 
may be of either gender ; as, 

Chacun de ces messieurs; chacune de ces Each one of those gentlemen; each one of 

dames. those ladies. 

Chacun de ces livres ; chacune de cesfleurs. Each one of these books ; each one of these 

flowers. 

(3.) Each o/is always chacun de; as, Chacun de nous, each of us. 

(4.) The possessive adjective referring to cliacun is sometimes son, sa, sec, and some- 



no plural. 



PRONOUNS. 



455 



each other, one another. 



times leur, leurs. It is son, sa, ses, when chacun comes after the direct object of the verb, 
and when the verb has no direct object; but, when chacun precedes such object, it is leur, 
leurs; as, 

Les deux rois firent chanter des te-deum, The two kings had te deums sung each in 

chacun, dans son camp. his camp. 

Tons les juges out opine, chacun, selon ses All the judges gave their opinions each ac- 

lumieres. cording to his knowledge. 

Tous les peuples ont, chacun, leurs defauts All people have each their faults and their 

et leurs prejuges. prejudices. 

9. AuTitur, (other people, others), is used only for persons, meaning your 
like, your neighbors ; it has no variation of gender or number, and is always 
the object of a preposition ; as, 

N" 1 envies pas le Men d"autrui. Envy not the good of others. 

Faites d autrui ce que vous voudries qu'on Do to others what you would that they 

vous fit. should do to you. 

(1.) Son, sa, ses, leur, leurs, are not to be used in reference to autrui, except when the 
noun to which they belong is preceded by a preposition, but en is used in their place. En 
epousant les interets autrui, nous ne devons pas en epouser les passions. 

10. L'tJN L 1 AUTRE, LES UNS LES AUTRES, 
L'UNE L'AUTRE, LES UNES LES AUTRES, 

This pronoun denotes reciprocity ; it applies to persons and things, and is of either 
gender and number. 

lis s'aident Pwt Vautre. They aid each other. 

Ces arores se nuisent les uns aux axdres. Those trees injure each other. 

11. TJn or l'un — l' autre, (the one — the other), is applied to both persons 
and things, and is of either gender and number. 

JJn (or Tim) chantait, Vautre dansait. One sang, the other danced. 

Les uns riaient, les autres pleuraient. Some laughed, the others wept. 

12. Personne, (nobody, no one), a pronoun, is always masculine singular; 
personne, person, a noun, is feminine, and may be plural. 

Personne n'est venu. No one has come. 

Lafierle ne convient d personne. Pride becomes no one. 

Personne ne sait oil il va sur cette terre de No one knows where he is going in this 

miseres. world of misery. 

La personne est venue. The person has come. 

Les personnes qui sont venues. The persons who have come. 

13. Rien, (nothing, not any thing), is a noun or pronoun. As a noun it 
may be plural ; as, 

Jl s" 1 amuse d des riens. He amuses himself with trifles. 

As a pronoun it is always masculine singular. 

(1.) Quelqu'un and quelque chose can be used with a negative only in questions, and 
when one expects an affirmative answer ; in other cases, personne and rien must be em- 
ployed. 

ITavez-vous pas quelqu'un d recomman- Have you not some one to lecommend? 
dert 

Nousnavons personne. "We have no one. 

IPy a-t-il pas quelque chose Id dedans ? Is there not something within there ? 

11 riy a rien de deau ni de don. There is nothing. 

(2.) Peesonne, (any body) ; eien, (anything), without ne, are used when the verb is 
understood, when it is interrogative, and in phrases expressing uncertainty. 



456 



PRONOUXS. 



Personne a-t-il jamais raconte plus naive- 

ment? Personne. 
P vaut mieux que personne que je connais- 

se. 

Je doute que rien vous convienne mieux. 



Did any one ever relate more simply ? No 

one. 

He is worth more than any one whom I 
know. 

I doubt whether any thing would suit you 
better. 



II. — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS ALWAYS JOINED TO A NOUN, PROPERLY INDEFINITE 
ADJECTIVES. 

Quelque, some. Chaque, each, every. 

Quelconque, whoever, whatever. Certain, certain. 

1. Quelque, quelques, (some, any), masculine and feminine, denote one or 
several in a number of persons or things. 

Quelque sot a dit cela sans doute, et quel- Some stupid one, no doubt, said that, and 

ques mechantes langues font repete. some evil tongues have repeated it. 

Avez-vous des nouvelles d nous donnert Have you any news to impart to us? 

2. Chaque, (each, every), has no plural, and is used of persons and things. 
Each, every, before a noun in a distributive sense, is chaque ; as, 

Chaque age a ses devoirs d remplir Each age has its duties to fulfill. 

A chaque jour suffit sa peine. Sufficient for each day is its evil. 

(1.) Each, every, before a noun implying plurality or habit, is tous les. 

Je le vois tous les jours. I see him every day. 

Toutes les dames qui etaient Id, etc. Every lady who was there, etc. 

3. Quelconque, (whoever, whatever), may be either gender, and follows 
the noun, meaning whomever one (he, she, it, etc.), may le. 

Donnez-moi un livre quelconque. Give me a book, whatever (one it may be). 

M vty a homme quelconque qui ne sache There is no man whatever who does not 
cela. know that. 

4. Certain, (certain). 

Certain auteur a dit. A certain author has said. 

Certaines personnes disent. Certain persons say. 

Eem. — Certain frequently means sure, and is then placed after the noun ; as, Un cer- 
tain fait, a certain fact ; Vnfait certain, a positive fact. 



III. — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS SOMETIMES JOINED TO NOUNS, SOMETIMES NOT. 

Nid, no, no one, none. Aucun, no, not one. 

Pas un, no, none, not one. Autre, other. 

I?un et V autre, both. Hun ou V autre, either. 

Ni Vun ni F autre, neither. Mime, same. 

Tel, such. Plusieurs, several. 

Tout, all, every thing. Le tout, the whole. 

Tous, toutes, All of them, 

1. Nul, (none, no one, no), has no plural, and is used with ne. As an in- 
definite pronoun it is masculine, and used as subject only ; as, 
Nul ne sait ce qu"il /era demain. No one knows what he will do to-morrow. 

(1.) As an adjective or pronoun in a more definite sense it may be of either gender; as, 



PRONOUNS. 



457 



2Tul homme nepeut Vintimider. No man can intimidate him. 

Nulle mauvaise raison ne peut le perstia- No bad reason can persuade him. 
der. 

Nul d'eux (or nulle d'elles) ne Va rencontre. No one of them has met him. 

2. Aucun, (no, not one, none), as a pronoun, is always singular ; it is used 
with ne, and always relates to persons or things spoken of; as, 

Avez-vous vu ces messieurs f— Aucun n'est Have you seen those gentlemen ?— No one 

venu. has come. 

Avez-vous parte d une de ces dames ?—A Have you spoken to one of those ladies ? 

aucune. — To no one. 

(1.) As an adjective, also, it is generally singular; it is used with ne, and is of either 
gender. 

Je ne hais aucun homme. I hate no man. 

Je n'ai aucun livre. I have no book. 

Je ne connais aucune de ces dames. I know no one of these ladies. 

(2.) In interrogative sentences it is used without ne. 
Aucun peuplefut-il jamais plus heureux ? "Was any people ever more happy ? 

Eem. — It is sometimes plural ; as, 
11 ne nCa rendu aucuns soi?is. He has paid me no attentions whatever. 

3. Pas un, (no one, not one), as a pronoun, is always masculine, and used 
only as subject ; as, 

Pas unne le croit. No one believes it. 

Pas un ne le dit. No one says so. 

As an adjective it has either gender, but no plural. 
II rfy a pas une erreur dans cet ouvrage. There is not one error in that work. 
Je ne connais pas un de vosjuges. I know not one of your judges. 

Eem.— Nul is stronger than pas un which, it-self, also expresses a more general exclu- 
sion than aucun. 

4. Autre, (other), both pronoun and adjective, takes either gender and 
number; as, 

Je vous prenais pour un atjtee or tjne I took you for another. 

ATJTEE. 

Si vous avez perdu voire livre, achetez-en If you have lost your book, buy another. 
un atitre. 

II y a d'autres messieurs et d/autres dames There are other gentlemen and other ladie3 
dans lejardin. in the garden. 

5. L'un et l'autre, (the one and the other, both), is of either gender and 
number. Speaking of only two, the singular is used ; of more than two, the 
plural. 

Vun et V autre ont ecrit d leur pere. Both have written to their father. 

Les uns et les autres viendront. All of them will come. 

II peut ecrire de Pune et de V autre main. He can write with either hand. 

6. Plusiecrs is used as a pronoun and as an adjective, is never varied, 
and is always plural. Plusieurs ont cru le monde eternel. 11 est arrive phi- 
sieurs bdtiments. Avoir plusieurs affaires. 

IV. — INDEFINITE PRONOUNS FOLLOWED BY QTTE OR 

Qui que, whoever. Quel que, ~\ 

r whoever, Quelle que, f whoever, 

Qui que ce soit qui, \ whosoeyePj Quels qu6j f whatever . 

Qui que ce soit que, J whomsoever> Qudles ?Me> ) 

20 



458 



PRONOUNS. 



Quoi que, whatever. 

whatever. 



whatever. 

such as. 



Quoi que ce soit qui, 
Quoi que ce soit que, 

Quelque que, ) h a t ever ^ ^ U6) te ^ s Q U€ ' i 

Quelques que, ) ' Telle que, telles que, ) 

Tout que, toute que, however. Quelque-que, si-que, however. 

1. Qui que, qui que ce soit qui or que (whoever, whoever it may be, who- 
soever, whomsoever), governs the subjunctive. 

Qui que vous voyiez cJiez cet homme, taisez- "Whomsoever you may seo at the house of 



that man, be silent. 
Whoever you may be, fear idleness. 
"Whoever may speak to you, do not reply. 



Whoever you may meet there, do not get 
angry. 



Qui que vous soyez, craignez Voisivete. 
Qui que ee soit qui vous parte, ne repondez 
pas. 

Qui que ce soit que vous rencontriez Id, ne 

vous fdchezpas. 

Eem. — Negatively, this pronoun may be as follows : 
Je rCai vu qui que ce soit, or Je n'ai vu per- I have seen no one whatever. 

sonne que ce soit. 

2. Quoi que, quoi que ce soit, quoi que ce soit qui (subject), and quoi 
que ce soit que (obj.), govern the subjunctive. 



Quoi quHl derive, il fait toujour s de bonnes 

compositions. 
Quoi que ce soit, vous Taurez. 
Quoi que ce soit qui vous tente dans son 

off re, ne Vacceptez pas. 
Quoi que ce soit que vous entrepreniez 

vous reussissez toujours. 

Eem. — Negatively, this pronoun is as follows : 
Je n'ai vu quoi que ce soit, or Je oi'ai vu I have seen nothing whatever. 

Hen que ce soit. 

3. Quel que, quels que, quelle que, quelles que, are adjectives, govern- 
ing the subjunctive. 



Whatever he may write, he always makes 
good compositions. 

Whatever it may be, you shall have it. 

Whatever may tempt you in his offer, do 
not accept it. 

Whatever you undertake, you always suc- 
ceed. 



Quel que soit cet homme. 

Quels que soient ses ecrits. 

Quelle que soit cette personne, et quelles 

que soient ses pretentions, elle n' est pas 

belle. 



Whoever that man may be. 

Whatever may be his writings. 

Whatever that person may be, and whatever 
may be her pretensions, she is not beau- 
tiful. 



4. Quelque que, quelques que (object), Quelque qui, quelques qui 
(subject), adjectives, governing the subjunctive. 

Whatever work you undertake, you always 
finish it. 



Quelque travail que vous entrepreniez, 

vous le finissez toujours. 
Quelque beau travail QjfU fasse, on ne 

Papprecie jamais. 
Quelques belles Jleurs que vous ayez, elles 

mourront. 

Quelques plaisirs qui vous attirent dans 
le monde, restez avec voire mere. 



Whatever fine work he performs, they never 

appreciate him. 
Whatever beautiful flowers you may have, 

they will die. 
Whatever pleasures may attract you into 

the world, remain with your mother. 



6. Quelque-que, si-que, and tout-que (however), are adverbs, the two first 
governing the subjunctive, and the last, the indicative. They are of course 
invariable. 



VERBS. 



459 



Quelque savant Qu'iZsorr, or si savant <$v'il 
soit, or tout savant q,v'il est, il n'est 
pas infaillible. 

Quelque respectee qu'elle soit, or si respec- 
tee Qu'elle soit, or toute respectee qu'elle 
est, elle n' est pas aimee. 

6. Tel qui, tel que, such as, used 
wise it agrees with its noun in gender 
Tel qui rit vendredi, dimanche pleurera. 

Tel qui seme ne recueille pas toujour s. 
Tel que vous voyez sourire a souvent Men 

des larmes rentrees au fond du cceur. 
Cest un homme tel quHl nous le faut. 
Elle est telle queje vous Vai depeinte. 
J'aime les ouvrages destines au theatre tels 

que les comedies, les tragedies, etc. 



However learned he may be, he is not in- 
fallible. 

However respected she may be, she is not 
loved. 

absolutely, is masculine singular ; other- 
and number. 

Such as laugh on Friday will weep on Sun- 
day. 

Such as sow do not always reap. 
He whom you see smile has often many tears 

suppressed at the bottom of his heart. 
He is a man such as we need. 
She is such as I have depicted her to you. 
I like the works intended for the theatre, 
such as comedies, tragedies, etc. 



VEKBS. 

AGEEEMENT OF YEEBS. 

1. Every verb in a personal mood must have a subject expressed or un- 
derstood. 

2. The verb agrees with its subject in number and person ; that is, je or its 
equivalent requires the first person singular of the verb, tu or its equivalent 
the second, and any other subject singular the third ; nous or its equivalent 
requires the first person plural of the verb, vous or its equivalent the second, 
and any other subject plural the third ; as, 

Jeparle, nous voulons, Us vont. I speak, we wish, they go. 

3. General Rule. — When two or more words in the singular number form 
the subject, the verb is plural ; and if the words are of different persons, the 
verb is of the first rather than the second, and of the second rather than of 
the third ; as, 

2fi Vor ni la grandeur ne nous rendent Neither gold nor greatness makes us happy. 
heureux. 

Jean et moi nous etudions. John and I study. 

Toi et ton frere vous ires. Thou and thy brother will go. 

Vous, lui et elle, vous seres recompenses. You and he and she will be recompensed. 

La flatteeie, la pekfidie et ^'ingratitude Flattery, perfidy, ingratitude, is the charac- 

60NT le caractere de la plupart des ter of the most part of courtiers. 

courtisans. 

4. Exceptions. — (1.) When, however, several nouns singular forming the 
subject are synonymous, and used without the conjunction et, the verb is sin- 
gular; as, 

Son courage, son intrepidite etonne les His courage, his intrepidity, astonish the 
plus braves. bravest. 

5. (2.) When the words composing the subject are placed as a climax, or 
contain an expression uniting in it all the preceding words, as tout, Hen, per- 
sonne, the verb is also singular ; as, 



4G0 



VERBS. 



Ce sacrifice votre interet, voire honnettb, Thi3 sacrifice your interest, your honor, God 

Dieu Vexige. demand. 
Le temps, les bienS, la vie, tout est d la Time, property, life, all belong to one's coun- 
patrie. try. 

G. (3.) When two subjects singular are connected by ou, the verb is singu- 
lar ; as, 

Ou ton sang ou le mien lavera cetie in- Either thy blood or mine shall wash out that 
jure. injury. 

7. "When, however, the subjects singular connected by ou are of different 
persons, or taken collectively as the subject, the verb must be plural; as, 

Le temps ou la mort sont nos remedes. Time or death are our remedies. 

Yous ou votre ami ires chez leprefet. You or your friend will go to the prefect's. 

8. (4.) When two subjects are connected by one of the conjunctions comme, 
de meme que, ainsi que, aussi Men que, the verb agrees with the first, the sec- 
ond belonging to a verb understood ; as, 

La vertu, ainsi que le savoir, a sonprix. Yirtue as well as knowledge has its price. 

9. Ni Vun ni V autre, and all subjects connected by ni, take the verb in the 
plural, except when only one of the subjects can perform the action of the 
verb ; as, 

J\ii In vos deux discours, ni Tun ni Vau- I have read your two discourses; neither 

tre ne sont dons* of them is good. 

Ni Vune ni Vautre de ces dames n'est ma Neither of these ladies is my mother. 

mere* 

10. After two or more infinitives employed as subjects, the verb is plural, 
except it be the verb etre preceded by ce ; as, Bien dire et bien penser ne SONT 
rien sans bien /aire. Boire, manger, dormir, c'est toute son occupation. 

11. The verb etre preceded by ce is plural only when followed by the third 
person plural ; as, Ce sont les vices qui degradent Vhomme ; ce sont eux qui 
le rendent malheureux. C^est nous. Cest vous. Cest le travail et Papplica- 
tion, etc. 

12. When a collective noun is followed by de and another noun plural, the 
agreement of the verb is determined by the fitness of the noun to perform the 
action; as, Tine nuee de barbares desolerent le pays.\ line foule d'enfants 
encombrait la rue.\ Generally the verb agrees with the collective noun when 
it is general or preceded by the definite article, and with the following noun 
when the collective is partitive, or preceded by the indefinite article ; as, La 
nuee des barbares traversa le pays. 

13. From this illustration it may be easily understood that when there are 
two verbs in such sentences, one of them can have more especial reference to 
the collective noun, and the other to the following plural; as, La moitie des 



* In the former of these sentences the verb is plural, because both discourses might be 
good; in the latter it is singular, because only one of the ladies can be his mother. The 
same distinction may be seen in the following sentences: Ni Vor ni la grandeur ne nous 
eendent heureux. Ni mon ami ni le votre ne seka komme ambassadeur a Samt-Peters- 
oourg. 

t In the former of these sentences the verb is plural, because the act of desolating is 
more fitly referred to barbarians than to cloud ; in the latter it is singular, because the ac», 
of encumbering is more fitly referred to crowd than to children. 



VEEBS. 



461 



troupes qui flrent la guerre perit de misere. Le tiers des livres qui parurent ne 
fut pas vendu. 

14. The verb agrees with the noun following beaucoup, peu, la plupart, 
even when it is understood, the same as if it were expressed ; as, La phipart 
(des homines) soxt sujets a des injirmites. Beaucoup aiment le jeu. Peu tra- 
vaillekt avec ardcur. 

15. As the relative takes the gender, number, and person of its antecedent, 
of course in all these cases which have now been specified, the relative which 
represents these subjects will take the verb in the same number and person as 
the subjects themselves ; as, 

Cette reserve, cette retenue qui nous chaeme. 

C'est vous oumoi qui repondrons. 

Cest votre interet, voire lionneur, Dieu qui exige, etc 

C'est Tun et l'autre qui meritent des eloges. 

Ce rCest ni la fortune ni le rang qui font le bonheur. 

Ce ii'est ni Vun ni Vautre qui est monpere. 

Uhefoule de soldats qui combattent vaillamment. 

CONJUGATIONS. 

1. French verbs are divided into four classes or conjugations, which are 
distinguished bj' the termination of the present infinitive. 

2. The first and most numerous conjugation terminates in er ; as, aim-er. 

3. The second in if ; as, . fin-ir. 

4. The third, and least numerous, in oir ; as, . . . rec-cvolr. 

5. The fourth in re; as, rend-re. 

6. The stem or radical (that is, the part which precedes the above-men- 
tioned terminations) remains unchanged through the whole conjugation in all 
regular verbs. 

For the full conjugation of the verbs, see page 471 and following. 

attxiliaey veebs. 

1. There arc two auxiliary yeres in French, avoir and etre. 

2. All transitive verbs in the active voice, and most neuter verbs, take avoir 
for their auxiliary. 

3. All passive verbs, all reflective verbs, and a few neuter verbs, always take 
etre for their auxiliary. The following neuter verbs are of this class: Alter, 
arriver, choir, decedcr, eclore, entrer, mourir, naxtre, partir, r entrer, retomber, 
retourner, and venir, and its derivatives advenir, devenir, disconvenir, intervenir, 
parvenir, provenir, revenir, redevenir, survenir. 

N. B. — Prevenir and subvenir are the only ones that take avoir. 

4. Some neuter verbs take avoir for auxiliary when they refer to action, 
and etre when they refer to state ; as, 

II a cliange tout-d-coup. He changed suddenly. 

II est bien change depuis peu. He has changed much of late. 

The following sometimes take avoir and sometimes etre, according to the 
above distinction : Aborder, accoucher, acourir, accroitre, apparaxtre, augmen- 
ted baisser, cesser, changer, convenir, croitre, deborder, decamper, dechoir, dege- 



462 



VERBS. 



nerer, demenajer, deperir, descendre, disparaxtre, echapper, echoir, embellir, em- 
pirer, cxpirer, grandir, montcr, passer, rcdescendre, rajeunir, remonter, repar- 
tir, resortir, rester, resulter, sonner, sortir, tomber, vieillir. 

MOODS AND TENSES. 

1. French verbs have six moods : the indicative, conditional, imperative, 
subjunctive, infinitive, and participle. 

2. The indicative, conditioned, imperative, and subjunctive, are called per- 
sonal moods, because they admit of different persons. 

3. The infinitive and participle are called impersonal moods, because they 
do not change for the persons. 

4. Each of these moods has one or more tenses as mentioned in the fol- 
lowing paragraphs. 

INDIO ATIYE. 

1. The indicative mood is used to affirm or deny positivly, and to ask ques- 
tions, and is sometimes called affirmative ; as, 

Je parte. Tu ne vois pas. I speak. Thou dost not see. 

Avez-vous dine ? II viendra. Have you dined ? He will come. 

2. The indicative mood has the following tenses : the present, imperfect, 
past definite, past indefinite or pluperfect, past anterior, past anterior indefinite, 
future absolute, and future anterior. 

3. The present and two futures correspond to the same divisions of time 
in English, and have a similar use. The others differ from our divisions of 
time, and require careful study from the learner. 

4. The imperfect represents an action or state as unfinished in past time. 
It represents it as continuous, habitual, or repeated. It corresponds, for the 
most part, to was with the present participle, or used with the infinitive. It is 
used also instead of the conditional after si, when si cannot be rendered by 
whether — or ; 

Je parlais toute la journee, quand fetais I spoke (was speaking) the whole day, when 

d la mile. I was in the city. 

Tu travaillais quand je dormais. Thou wast working when I was sleeping. 

Jl allait d I'eglue quand tout d coup il re- He was going to church, when he suddenly 

gut une tuile sur la tete. received a tile upon his head. 

££/avais de Uargentje voyagerais. If I had money I would travel. 

5. The past definite represents an action or state as finished in some past 
time, stated or well understood by the speakers, and of which the present day 
can form no part. It is generally used in the narration of past events, and is 
therefore often called the historical tense. 

Itomzdus ttja sonfrere. Eomulus killed his brother. 

HierfxLLki d Veglise. esterday I went to church. 

6. The past indefinite represents an action or state as finished in a period 
of past time not specified, or in present time, as to-day, this week, this month, 
this year, this century, etc. 

J'ai fini mon ouvrage. I have finished my work. 

Je Vai vu ce matin, cette semaine, cette an- I saw him this morning, this week, this year, 
nee, etc. etc. 



VERBS. 



463 



7. This tense is used in conversation in preference to the past definite, ex- 
cept IN NARRATIVES. 

8. The pluperfect expresses an action or state as finished before another, 
or before a past time specified. There are two pluperfects in French, the me- 
diate and the immediate. 

9. In the ordinary pluperfect, which is called mediate, there can be a cer- 
tain time elapsed, between the two actions or times specified. It is also used 
to express something continuous, habitual, or repeated ; as, 

./'avais dejeune quand je suis alle chez I had breakfasted when I went to my broth- 

monfrere. er's. 
II avait travaille longtemps quand tu es He had worked long when yoa came. 

venu. 

Tous les jours quand nous etions revenus Every day when we had returned from hunt- 
de la chasse, nous nous reposions. ing, we used to rest. 

10. The past anterior, which is the immediate pluperfect, represents an 
action or state as finished immediately prior to some other past time ; as, 
Eier aussitot que fnus fini moil ouvrage, Yesterday, as soon as I had finished my 

fallai chez Lui. work, I went to his house 

11. The past anterior indefinite also expresses an action or state finished 
immediately before another time — according to some grammarians limited to 
the present day ; as, 

Aussitot quef\i eu ecrit ma leitre ce ma- As soon as I had finished my letter this morn- 
tin,je Vai envoyee d la poste. ' ing, I sent it to the post-office. 

But this tense is little used. (See Lesson 77, page 264.) 

CONDITIONAL. 

1. The conditional mood expresses the meaning of the verb under a con- 
dition or supposition, corresponding to should or would with the verb in Eng- 
lish. It has two tenses : 

2. The present conditional, to express a present or future ; as, 

Si favais le temps, / appeendrais U /ran- If I had the time, I would learn the French 
cats. language. (See Lessons 93 and 94.) 

3. The past conditional, to express a present or future to some past 
time ; as, 

Si favais etc le temps, /attrais appris le If I had had the time, I would have learned 
francais. the French language. 

4. The second conditional compound is used after si instead of the above. 
Si / ettsse eu (and not si /attrais eu) le If I had had the time, I would have gone to 

,je serais alle vous voir. see you. 



IMPERATIVE. 

The imperative mood has the same use in French as in English ; but the 
French, having no first person singular of this mood, use the first person plu- 
ral in its place. (See Lesson 44.) 
Soyons diligent. 



464 



VERBS. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The sunjunctive mood, so called because it follows (is subjoined to) an- 
other verb, does not affirm positively the action, but states it as subject to 
doubt, or as a mere conception of the mind, or springing from some emotion. 
It has four tenses : the present, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect. 

2. The present subjunctive is used after a present, or future of the indic- 
ative, to denote something present or future to it ; as, 

Je veux qu'il vienne ; sa mere aussi vou- I will have him come ; his mother also will 
dra qu'il vienne. have him come. 

3. The perfect subjunctive is used after a present or future of the indica- 
tive to denote something past to it ; as, 

Je ne crois pas qu'il soit arrive. I do not believe that he has arrived. 

Je ne croirai pas qu'il soit arrive. I shall not believe that he has arrived. 

4. The imperfect subjunctive is used after all the past and conditional 
tenses to denote something present or future to them ; as, 

Je voulais ) 

Je voulus y qu'il vint. I wished him to come. 

J'ai voulu ) 
J'avais voulu i 

J'eus voulu \ viNT. I ha d wished him to come. 

Je voudrais i I should wish him to come. 

J'aurais voulu j"<Z w *^viNT. I should have wished him to come. 

5. The pluperfect subjunctive is used after the same tenses to denote 
something past to them. 

J'avais peur qu'il ne fut pas ventx. I feared that he had not come. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.* 

6. Verbs which do not affirm a thing positively, all those which express 
will, desire, fear, pleasure, approbation, or any emotion, followed by que, gov- 
ern the subjunctive ; as, 

Je desire que nous y alliez. I desire you to go there. 

Je craignais qu'il n'y allut pas. I feared that he would not go there. 

7. Impersonal verbs, and impersonal expressions, which do not affirm pos- 
itively, followed by que, govern the subjunctive; as, 

II fatjt que j' Aixxre. chez moi. It is necessary forme to go home. 

8. The relative pronouns, when they are preceded by an indefinite expres- 
sion, or by a superlative, or word having the force of a superlative, govern the 
subjunctive, when they do not refer to what is known and definite; as, 

Je veux un clieval qui soit beau. I wish for a horse which may be beautiful. 

Ta-t-il quelqu'un qui pxjissv /aire cela ? Is there any one who can do that ? 

9. Conjunctions which so modify the following verb that it does not af- 
firm positively, govern that verb in the subjunctive ; as, 

Pourvu qxs'il soit id. Provided that he be here. 

Afin qu 1 ^ fasse cela. In order that ho may do that. 



* See Lessons 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, ST, 8S, 89, 99, 100, and 101. 



VERBS. 



465 



10. Verbs used interrogatively or negatively govern the subjunctive, pro- 
vided the speaker looks upon what the verb expresses as doubtful or false. 

Je ne crois pas qu'il soit mon ami. I do not believe that he is my friend. 

Pensez-vous qiCil soit honnete ? Do you think that he is honest ? 

11. Qui que, quoi que, quel que, quelque que, si que, govern the following 
verb in the subjunctive ; as, 

Qui que ee soit qui vous parte, repondez "Whoever he may be that speaks to yon 

poliment. answer politely. 

Quoi Qu r # fasse, il sera Mume. Whatever he may do, he will be blamed. 

12. That the indicative expresses what the speaker regards as a fact, or 
truth, and the subjunctive a mere conception of the mind, may be seen in the 
following sentences : 

1. Je sais qu"il va a Teglise. I know that he goes to church. 

2. Yous voulez qu'il aille d Veglise ! You will have him go to church ! 

3. P est certain que vous etediez. It is certain that you study. 

4. II est necessaire que ' vous etediiez. It is necessary that you study. 

5. Je connais vn homme qui est honnete. I know a man who is honest. 

6. Je veux trouver u?i liomme qui soit I wish to find a man who may be honest. 

honnete. 

7. Parce qu'il fait son devoir. Because he docs his duty. 

8. Pourvu qu,'il fasse son devoir. Provided he does his duty. 

9. Croyez-vous qrCil y a un Dieu ? Do you believe that there is a God ? 
10. Croyez-vous qu'il y ait des revenants ? * Do you believe that there are ghosts ? 

INFINITIVE. 

1. The infinitive mood has two tenses ; the present, to express an action 
or state in an unspecified time, or as present or future in regard to time speci- 
fied ; as, 

Hfaut faiee son devoir. One must do his duty. 

TL auraitfallu faike son devoir. One must have done his duty. 

Ufaudra faike son devoir. It will be necessary to do one's duty. 

2. The past, used to express some action or state as anterior to some 
specified act or time. 

P faut avoik fait son devoir. It is necessary to have done one's duty. 

P aurait fallu avoir fait son devoir. It would have been necessary to have done 

one's duty. 

3. The infinitive has for the most part the same use as in English. It dif- 
fers, however, in some respects. 

4. When of two verbs in English connected by and, the second denotes 
the purpose or object of the first, it is rendered by the infinitive in French ; as, 
Venez me voir. Come and see me. 

J'irai cuercuee ??ies livres demain. I will go and look for my books to-morrow. 

* In the first of the above phrases, the speaker represents going to church as a fact, and 
uses the indicative mood. In the Second, he speaks of it as a thing that he wishes merely, 
and uses the subjunctive. In the third, he speaks of studying as a fact, and uses the indica- 
tive. In the fourth, only as something necessary, and uses the subjunctive. In the fifth, 
he speaks of a man that" he knows, and uses the indicative, In the sixth, only of one he 
conceives of, and wishes to find, and uses the subjunctive. In the seventh, he speaks of 
one's doinsr his duty as a fact, and nses the indicative. In the eighth, merely as something 
that might be done, and uses the subjunctive. In the ninth, he "speaks of God, whom he 
believes to exist, and uses the indicative. In the tenth, of ghosts, which he regards as mere 
creatures of the fancy, and uses the subjunctive. 

20* 



466 



VEKBS. 



5. After any preposition except en, when the present participle is used in 
English, the infinitive must be used in French ; as, 

II apprend sans beaucoup etudier. He learns without studying much. 

Que gagnez-vous a faire cela t "What do you gain by doing that ? 

6. Verbs which with a change of subject are followed by que with the in- 
dicative or subjunctive, generally take the infinitive when the subject is un- 
changed ; as, 

II croit pouvoir faire cela. He thinks that, he can do that. 

Croyez-vous reussir ? Do you believe that you will succeed 1 



V. The following verbs govern the infinitive without 


a preposition : 


Aimer mieux, 


Croire, Faillir, 


Penser, 


Sentir, 


Affirmer, 


Daigner, Faire, 


Pouvoir, 


Souhaiter, 


Aller, 


Declarer, Falloir, 


Pretendre, 


Soutenir, 


Apercevoir, 


Deposer, S'imaginer, Publier, 


Tenioigner, 


Assurer, 


Desirer, Laisser, 


Eapporter, 


Se trouver, 


Avoir beau, 


Devoir, Mener, 


Eeconnaitre, 


Yaloir mieux, 


Avouer, 


Ecouter, Nier, 


Eegarder, 


Yenir, 


Compter, 


Entendre, Observer 


, Eetourner, 


Voir, 


Confesser, 


Envoyer, Oser, 


Eevenir, 


Vouloir, etc. 


Considerer, 


Epier, Ouir, 


Savoir, 




Courir, 


Esperer, Paraitre, 


Sembler, 




8. The following verbs, many of which have been given in the prc\ 


lessons, take & before the following infinitive : 




Abaisser, 


Avoir, 


Destiner, 


S'exposer, 


Aboutir, 


Avoir quelque chose, 


Determiner (or de), 


Se fatiguer, 


S'abuser, 


N'avoir rien, 


Se determiner, 


Se fier, 


Acceder, 


Balancer, 


Se devouer, 


Forcer (or de), 


S'accorder, 


Borner, 


Disposer, 


Gagncr, 


Accoutumer (or de), Se borner, 


Se disposer, 


Habituer, 


S'accoutumer, 


Chercher, 


Se divertir, 


S"habituer, 


S'aeharner, 


Commencer (or de), 


Donner, 


Hair, 


Adherer, 


Se complaire, 


Dresser, 


Se hasarder, 


Admettre, 


Concourir, 


Eclairer, 


Hesiter, 


S'aguerrir, 


Condamner, 


S"efforcer (or de), 


Inciter, 


Aider, 


Condescendre, 


Embarrasser, 


Incliner, 


Aimer, 


Consentir (or de), 


Employer, 


Instruire, 


Amuser, 


Consister, 


S'empresser (or de), 


S'interesser, 


S'amuser, 


Conspirer, 


Encourager, 


Inviter, 


Animer, 


Se consumer, 


S'endnrcir, 


Lasser (or de), 


S'appliquer, 


Continuer (or de), 


Engager, 


Se lasser, 


Apprendre, 


Contr-.andre (or de), 


S'engager, 


Limiter, 


Appreter, 


Contribuer, 


Enhardir, 


Se livrer, 


S'appreter, 


Convier (or de), 


Enseigner, 


Manquer (or de), 


S'arreter, 


Couter, 


S'entendre, 


Mettre, 


Arriver, 


Decider (or de), 


Essayer (or de), 


Se mettre, 


Aspirer, 


Se decider, 


Etre (or de), 


Montrer, 


Assigner, 


Defier (or de), 


S'etudier, 


Se nuire, 


S'assujetir, 


Demander (or de), 


S'evertuer, 


Obliger (or de), 


S'astreindre, 


Demeurer, 


Exceller, 


S'obstiner, 


S*attacher, 


Depenser, 


Exciter, 


S'occuper (or de), 


S'attendre, 


Se deplaire, 


Exercer, 


S'offrir, 


Autoriser, 


Desapprendre, 


S'exercer, 


S'opinifttrer, 


S'avilir, 


Desobeir, 


Exhorter, 


Parvenir, 



VERBS. 



467 



Passer son temps, 


Prendre plaisir, 


Eesister, 


Tacher (or de), 


Avoir peine, 


Preparer, 


Pester, 


Tarder (or de), 


Pencher, 


Se preparer, 


Se resoudre, 


Tendre, 


Penser, 


Presenter, 


Eetrancher, 


Tenir, 


Perdre, 


Pretendre, 


Eeussir, 


Travailler, 


Perseverer, 


Se preter, 


Eevener, 


Trembler, 


Persister, 


Proceder, 


Eever (or de), 


Trouver, 


Plaire (or de), 


Provoquer, 


Eisquer (or de), 


Venir (or de), 


Se plaire, 


Eeduire, 


Servir, 


Viser, 


Se plier, 


Se reduire, 


Songer, 


Youer, 


Porter, 


Pen oncer, 


Subvenir, 


Se vouer. 


Pourvoir, 


Eepugner (or de), 


Suffire (or pour), 




Pousser, 


So resigner, 


Surprendre, 





9. The preposition d stands before the infinitive after verbs expressing 
prompting or exciting to something, after adjectives and participles which ex- 
press inclination, fitness, determination, preparation, or custom ; as, Adroit, 
Ardent, Assidu, Attentif Dispose, Enclin, Exact, Expose, Fonde, Habile, In- 
teresse, Opinidtre, Ponctuel, Porte, Pret, Prompt, Propre, Sujet. 

10. The preposition d stands before infinitives used in a passive sense ; as, 
Cest une chose a desircr, It is a thing to be desired ; before those which fol- 
low adjectives in the superlative, or having a superlative meaning ; as, le der- 
nier a f aire son devoir ; and generally when the question, to or for what ? may 
be asked ; as, bon a manger. 

11. The preposition de, on the other hand, is used before the infinitive 
when the question what? rather than to or for what? may be asked; as, Je 
vous permets $ avoir cela ; when the infinitive stands as the direct object of a 
verb ; as, Je vous ordonne de sortir ; when it supplies the place of of with a 
noun or present participle ; as, au lieu de faire; and when il est (imp.) is fol- 
lowed by an adjective ; as, II est bon de savoir cela. 

12. The following verbs and phrases, many of which have been given in 
the previous lessons, take de after them before the following infinitive : 



S'abstenir, 


Approuver, 


Avoir sujet, 


Conclure, 


Abuser, 


Apprehender, 


Blamer, 


Conjurer, 


Accoutumer (or d), 


£tre a propos, 


Avoir besoin, 


Conseiller, 


S'accommoder, 


Arreter, 


£tre bien, 


Consentir (or d), 


Accuser, 


Attendre (or d), 


£tre bien aise, 


Consoler, 


iltre accuse, 


Attendrir, 


Avoir lo bonheur, 


Se contenter, 


S'accuser, 


Attrister, 


Avoir le bonte, 


Continuer (or d), 


Achever, 


S'attrister, 


Briiler, 


Contraindre (or a), 


S'acquitter, 


Avant, 


Censurer, 


Convaincrc, 


Affecter, 


Avantage, 


Cesser, 


Convier (or d), 


Affliger, 


Avertir, 


Avoir le chagrin, 


Convenir, 


S*affliger, 


S'aviser, 


Cbagriner, 


Corriger, 


S'agir, 


Avoir bien a coeur, 


Se cbagriner, 


Craindre, 


£tre alarmo, 


Avoir coutume, 


Charger, 


Decharger, 


Ambitionner, 


Avoir dessein, 


Se charger, 


Decider (or d), 


A moins (que), 


Avoir honte, 


Choisir, 


Decourager, 


S'amouracher, 


Avoir Tair, 


Commander, 


Dedaigner, 


Appartenir, 


Avoir la liberte, 


Commencer (or a), 


Defendre, 


S'apercevoir, 


Avoir peur, 


Commode, 


Defier (or d), 


S'applaudir, 


Avoir pitie, 


Complaisance, 


Se defier, 



468 



VERBS. 



Degouter, 


Eire (or d), 


S'informer, 


Prescrire, 


Delibcrer, 


-A, , 

Etre accuse, 


S'ingerer, 


Pressor, 


Deinander (or d), 


Etrc alarme, 


Injustice, 


Se presser, 


Se demettre, 


Etrc charmc, 


S'inquiuter, 


Presumer, 


Se depccher, 


Etre constcrne, 


Inspirer, 


Prier, 


Dependre (imp.), 


Convcnable, 


Intention, 


Priver, 


Deplaire, 


Etre effraye, 


Interdire, 


Professer, 


Desaccoutumer, 


ii,tre embarrasse, 


Inutile, 


Profiter, 


Desesperer, 


Etre en droit, 


Jouir, 


Promettre, 


So desesperer, 


Etre en etat, 


Jurer, 


Se promettro, 


Se deshabitucr, 


Etre fuchc, 


Justifier, 


Proposer, 


Lc desir, 


Etre etonne, 


Juste, 


Se proposer, 


Desirer (or without), 


Ltre frappe, 


Justifier, 


Protester, 


Se desister, 


Etre joycux, 


Laisser (or d), 


Punir, 


Desoler, 


Etre presse, 


Louer, 


Que (than), 


Se desoler, 


Etre surpris (or d), 


Mander, 


Avoir raison, 


Determiner (or d), 


Etre triste, 


Faire mal, 


Raison liable, 


Detester, 


Eviter, 


Malheur, 


Se rappeler, 


Detourner, 


Excuser, 


Manquer (or d), 


Etre rassasid, 


Se devoir, 


S'excuser, 


Medire, 


Etre ravi, 


Differer, 


Exempter, 


Mediter, 


Se rebuter, 


Dire, 


S'exempter, 


Se meler, 


Eecommander, 


Discontinuer, 


Exiger, 


Menacer, 


Eefuser (or d), 


Diseonvenir, 


Se faeher, 


Meriter, 


Eegret, 


Se disculper, 


Faiblesse, 


Mettre hors d'etat, 


Eegretter, 


Dispenser, 


Faillir (or d), 


Etre mieux, 


Eejouir, 


Se dispenser, 


Faire bien, 


Mourir, 


Se rejouir, 


Disposer, 


Faire mine, 


Se moquer, 


Eemercier, 


Dissuader, 


Faire plaisir, 


T avoir moyen, 


Se repentir, 


Divertir, 


Faire signe, 


Negliger, 


Eeprendre, 


Dommage, 


Faire semblant, 


Nier, 


Eeprimander, 


Donner lieu, 


Feindre, 


Notificr, 


Eeprocher, 


Donner ordro, 


Feliciter, 


Obliger (or d), 


Se reprocher, 


Douter, 


Se feliciter, 


S'occuper (or d), 


Eepugner (or d), 


Droit, 


Finir, 


Offrir, 


Eesoudre, 


Ecrire, 


Se flatter, 


Omettre, 


Se ressouvenir, 


Edifier, 


A force, 


Ordonner, 


Eetonir, 


S'edifier, 


Forcer (or d), 


Oublier, 


Eidicule, 


S'efforcer (or d), 


Fremir, 


Pardonner, 


Eire, 


Effrayer, 


Se garder, 


Parler, 


Eisquer (or d), 


S'effrayer, 


Avoir garde, 


Se passer, 


Eougir, 


S'emanciper, 


Prendre garde, 


Patience, 


Se saisir, 


S'emparer, 


Gemir, 


Pormettre, 


Satisfaction, 


Empecher, 


Generosite, 


Persuader, 


V avoir bon gre, 


S'empresser (or d), 


Gener, 


Se piquer, 


Se scandaliser, 


Enjoindre, 


Sa glorifier, 


Plaindre, 


Seoir, 


S"ennuyer, 


Eendre grace, 


Se plaindre, 


Servir (or d), 


S'enorgueillir, 


Gronder, 


Plaisir, 


Avoir soin, 


Enrager, 


Se basader (or d), 


Plaire, 


Prendre soin, 


Entreprendre, 


Se hater, 


Politesse, 


Sommer, 


Envie, 


Honnetete, 


Possible, 


Se soucier, 


Epouvanter, 


Honneur, 


Plutot que, 


Souffrir, 


Esperer (or without), 


Impossible, 


Lc pouvoir, 


Soubaitcr {ox without). 


Avoir resprit, 


Imprudence, 


Precaution, 


Soupconner, 


Essayer (or a), 


Imputer, 


Prcfcrer (or rcithouf). Se souvenir, 


S'etonner, 


S'indigner, 


Prendre sur soi, 


Suflire (or d), 



VERBS. 



469 



Suggerer, Tarder (or d), Tort, Valoir la peine, 

Supplier, Temps, Trembler, Se vanter, 

Tacher (or d), Tenter, Sc trouver, Venir (or d), 

Prendre a tache, £tre tente, User, Venir a bout. 

13. Several of the above verbs may take either d or de before the infini- 
tive ; but for the most part not without some difference in their signification. 

Accoutumer, used actively, takes a; when neuter, de, 

Je Vai accoutume a travailler. 11 avait accoutume frailer. 

Commencer with d means to begin something progressive ; with de, something not pro- 
gressive. 

Cei eleve commence a parler francais. II a commence d'etudier d dix heures. 
Consentir with d means to consent freely ; with de, not to oppose. 
Je consens a vous suivre. Je consens de le voir. 

Continuer with d means to continue without interruption; with de, at intervals. 

11 continuait a le /rapper. 11 coniinuait de le voir. 
Contraindre with d means to constrain to some action ; with de, from action. 

On le contraignil a marcher. On le contraignit de se taire. 

Convier with d means to invite ; with de, to beg, intreat. This distinction is not always 
observed. 

Je Vai convie d diner. Je Vai convie de /aire sa tache. 
Decider takes d as an active or passive verb ; de, as a neuter verb. 

Cette raison ma decide a partir. Koiis deciddmes de partir. 
Defter with d means to challenge to something; with de, to defy. 

Je vous defte a boire. Je vous dejie de m'en donner la moindre preuve. 
Demander with d means to demand something active or positive ; with de, something 
passive. 

II demande a boire. H demande d'etre ecoule. 
Determiner takes d with a direct object; de. without such an object. 

Je le determinai a partir. II a determine de rebdtir sa maison. 
SPefforcer with d means to attempt what depends wholly on our will ; with de, what does 
not depend wholly on our will. 
II s'efforce a parler. Elle s'efforce de plaire. 
S'empresser takes a when the action passes to an object; otherwise de. 

II s'est empress a vous rendre service. H s"est empresse de rendre service. 
Essayer takes d with reference to the efforts ; de, with reference to the object. 

Ce malade a essaye a marcher. J'ai essaye de le persuader. 
Eire with d denotes turn ; with de, right or duty. 

Cest d vous iijouer. Cest au ftls frobeir et non aupere. 
Forcer takes d when the action has an object ; de, when it has not. This distinction is not 
much observed. 
II le force a /aire sa tache. U le force de partir. 
Se hasarder d,e, when the second verb indicates an action, the cause and effect of which are 
confined to the agent ; d, when the second verb denotes an action that constitutes the 
object of the verb. 

11 se hasarde de me repondre. Je me hasarde a vous faire une proposition. 
Laisser with d means to leave, to allow ; with de, to fail, used in negations. 

Cela laisse beaucoup hpenser. 11 ne laissepas d'etre honnele. 
Manquer with d means to fail of some duty ; with de, to have like — to escape — to be near. 

H manque a remplir ses devoirs. D, a manque de vous trouver ici. II a manque 
d'etre tue. 



470 



VERBS. 



Obliger, meaning to impose necessity, d or de ; meaning to confer obligation or favor, it 
takes de only. A 

Je Voblige a etudier. Vous m 1 obliger ez beaucoup de /aire cela. Etre oblige takes de, 
S'oceuper with d means to labor at ; with de, to occupy one's thoughts with. 

U s'occupe a lire. It s'occupe de detruire les abus. 
Plaire takes a as a personal verb ; de, as an impersonal verb. 

11 se plait a lire. 11 ne me plait pas de vous obeir. 
Pepugner takes a as a personal verb ; de, as an impersonal verb. 

Je repugne a /aire cela. 11 me repugne defaire cela. 
Bisquer takes d as an active verb ; de, as a neuter verb. 

Vous risquez tout a prendre ce parti. Vous risquez de tomber. 
Servir takes d as a personal verb ; de, as an impersonal verb. 

Ce bateau sert a passer la riviere. Que sert-il de s'emporter t 
Suffire takes d or pour as a personal verb ; de, as an impersonal verb. 

Ce domestique ne saurait suffire a servir tant depersonnes. II suffit do vous le dire. 
Tucker takes d when the action passes from the subject; de, when it does not. 

11 tdche a me nuire. U tdche de se debarrasser de ses dettes. 
Tarder takes d when the object is without; de, when it is within, and with a dative. 

H tarde a vous punir. II me tarde de vous voir. 
Venir with d means to happen, to bezin ; Avith de, to have just ; with neither, to come. 

S'il vient a mourir. II vient de partir. Je viens adorer VEternel. 
Refuser takes d before diner, manger, dejeuner, etc., de quoi being understood. It takes 
de before other infinitives. 

U lui refuse a manger. U refuse dc venir. 
Desirer takes de when there is any obstacle to the desire. "When there is no obstacle, it 

governs the infinitive without a preposition. 
Esperer takes de when uncertainty is implied ; otherwise no preposition. 

J'espere bien le revoir. Peut-on esperer de vous revoir t 
Preferer takes de before an infinitive with an accessory ; otherwise no preposition. 

Je prefer e mourir. Je prefer e de mourir avec vous, plutbt que de vous trahir. 
Souhaiter takes or omits de when the action is confined to the subject; otherwise it re- 
quires the subjunctive. 

Je souhaiterais pouvoir ; or, de pouvoir vous obliger. Je souhaite qu'il vienne. 

T?ovn,for, in order to, is used before the infinitive to denote the end, design, or causo 
for which any thing is done. 

PARTICIPLES. 

The participle, so called because it participates of the nature of a verb 
and an adjective (that is, it expresses action, existence, or state, and also qual- 
ification) is variable or invariable. 

2. Present participles, used as verbs, that is, when the main idea expressed 
is action or existence, always remain invariable ; as, 

Ceshommes, keconnaissant Zemr/a-ute, s'em- Those men recognizing their mistake, hast- 
prcsserent de la reparer. ened to repair it. 

3. Participles used as adjectives, that is, to express a quality or state, are 
variable, and agree in gender and number with their nouns ; as, 

J'estime les enfants eeconnaissants. I esteem grateful children. 

Les lettres que mes amis out eceites. The letters which my friends have written. 



VERBS. 



471 



The above two rules, taken in their rail extent, comprehend the whole doctrine of the 
variation of the participle, and all its cases may be reduced to these. The learner, however, 
may find at first a clearer and easier, though less philosophic, guide in the following rules. 

PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

1. The present participle is invariable : First, when it is or can be pre- 
ceded by en ; as, 

Messieurs en agissant ainsi, vous nous of- Sirs, by acting thus you offend us. 
fensez. 

Secondly, when it has a direct object ; as, 
Nos soldats, FvEmpoktant la victoire, etc. Our soldiers gaining the victory, etc. 

Thirdly, when it can, without altering the meaning, be changed to any tense 
of the verb, preceded by qui ; as, 

Voyezvous ces navires voguant (qui vo- Do you see those vessels sailing near the 

guent) pres du rivage ? shore ? 

Nous coniemplerons la rosee bkillant (qui "We shall or will look at the dew glittering on 

bbilleka) sur les feuilles. the leaves. 

2. The present participle becomes an adjective, and is varied when it can, 
without changing the meaning, be preceded by some tense of etre and qui ; as, 

Cest unefemme obligeante {qui est). She is an obliging woman. 

U nous raconta des histoires amusantes He related to us some amusing stories. 
{qui etaient amusantes). 

PAST PARTICIPLE. 

1. Past participles used without an auxiliary may be considered as adjec- 
tives, and vary as such. 

Des habits faits d la nouvelle mode. Coats made in the new fashion. 

Des robes faites d la nouvelle mode. Gowns made in the new fashion. 

2. The following, however, when they precede the word which they qual- 
ify, are not varied : Excepte, suppose, passe, vu, ci-joint, ci-inclus ; as, Excepte 
mes amis ; suppose ces projets ; passe cette heure ; vu ces faits ; ci-joint vous 
trouverez copie ; ci-inclus vous recevrez mes lettres. 

3. The past participle accompanied by etre, in verbs not reflective, agrees 
with the subject of the verb ; as, 

Elle est kespectee. Nous sommes venus. She is respected. We have come. 

4. When accompanied by avoir in transitive verbs, and by etre in reflective 
verbs, it agrees with the direct object of the verb when the object precedes, 
but remains unchanged when the object follows ; as, 

J'ai vu les dames. Je les ai vues. I have seen the ladies. I have seen them. 

II s'est cnAUFFE les pieds. He has warmed his feet. 

Jl se les est chauffes. He has warmed them. 

5. The past participle, followed by an infinitive, is unvaried when the in- 
finitive is its object, but agrees with the preceding noun or pronoun when that 
is its object ; * as, 

* The preceding noun or pronoun may be known to be the object of the participle if the 
infinitive can be chansred to the present participle and preserve the sense: Je les ai vus 
repousser les ennemis. Here we can say, je les ai vus eepoussant les ennemis, and 



472 



VERES. 



La route, qu'il avait resolu de suivre. 

lis NOUS 01lt EMPECIIES de VeUSSit'. 

U les a fait courir. 



The route which he had resolved to follow. 
They have prevented us from succeeding. 
He made them run. 



6. Sometimes the close of a sentence preceded by que is the object of the 
participle, which is then unvaried ; as, 

La lettre que fai presume que vous rece- The letter which I presumed that you would 



7. When an infinitive is understood after the participles du, pu, voulu, and 
some others, they are not varied, their object being the infinitive understood; 
as, Je lui ai rendu tous les services que fai du, or pit, or voulu (lui rendre be- 
ing understood).* 

8. In like manner, when the close of the sentence understood is the object 
of the participle, it is not varied ; as, Je lui aurais fait tousjes vers qiCil cm- 
rait toulu (que je lui fisse being understood). 

9. The past participle following le peit, when it signifies a small quantity, 
agrees with the noun following le peu ; but when it signifies lack or destitu- 
tion, the participle is not varied ; as, Le peu d? affection que vous lui avez te- 
moignee lui a rendu le courage. Le peu, d" affection que vous lui avez temoigne 
Va decourage. In the former of these sentences, le peu d'affection denotes 
some affection, though but little ; in the latter, it denotes lack or destitution 
of affection. 

It may be taken as a general rule, that when the sense allows the suppression of lepeu, 
as in the former of these sentences, the participle is varied, otherwise not. 

10. The past participle is not varied to agree with an indirect object, nor 
is the participle of an impersonal verb ever varied ; as, Les chalcurs qiCil a 
fait pendant V'ete. 

Rem. — The participles coute, valu, pese, formerly subject to some exceptions, now fol- 
low the general rule. 

11. After these examples the learner will generally find it easy on reflec- 
tion to determine the object of the participle. Les dix ans qu'il a vecu, il les 
a vecu heureux. Here the participle is not varied, because the verb is neuter, 
and the pronouns are governed by pendant understood. L 'affaire fut moins 
serieuse queje ne Vavais pense. Here V (le) is equivalent to cela, and is not femi- 
nine ; hence the participle is unvaried. Les litres qu'il nous a pries de luipreter. 
Here qui is the object of preter, and nous of the participle. When eu and donne 
are followed by a preposition and infinitive, the object may belong either to 
the participle or to the infinitive ; as, Les obstacles que fai eus d surnionter ; 
or, que fai eu a surnionter: both are admissible. 

les is the object of vus. Je les ai du repousser par les ennemis. LTere we can not say, 
je les ai vus repoussant par les ennemis,' and accordingly repousser, not les, is the object 
of the participle. 

Remark. — Althoiurh the above sentence, ,70 les ai vus repousser les ennemis, is gram- 
matical, it is not the idiomatic grammar of the best modern French writers, who do not 
like givin? two direct objects to\i transitive verb. Instead of les, therefore, they would say, 
Je leur ai vu repousser les ennemis. 

*• The participle pu has no feminine: but du and voulu follow the general rule when 
there is no infinitive understood after them; as, It m'a paye les sommes qu'il ma dues. 
II veut fortement les choses qu'il a une fois voulues. 



vriez. 



receive. 



ADYERBS. 



473 



ADVEEBS. 

1. Adverbs are generally placed immediately after the verbs which they 
modify, except those of place and time, which stand as in English ; as, 

Je vais sottvent d lapeche. I often go a fishing. 

Otj est voire frere t "Where is your brother ? 

2. In compound tenses, the adverb is commonly placed between the aux- 
iliary and the participle, except aujourcVhui, demain, hicr, long adverbs gen- 
erally, and adverbial expressions, which are placed after the participle ; as, 

IL a svEsfait son ouvrage. He has done his work well. 

11 a beatjcoup travaille. He has worked much. 

11 Va fail adjiieablement. He has done it admirably. 

II Vafait de bon c<eue. He has done it willingly. 



NE & ATITE8. 

1. The negatives in French are ne, ne pas, and ne point. Ne is weaker 
than ne pas, and ne point is stronger. 

2. Pas is employed to express something accidental, and point, something 
habitual or permanent ; as, 

II ii'etudie pas. line lit vas. He does not study. He does not read. 

II netudie point. line lit point. He never studies. He never reads. 

3. Pas and point, in interrogations, have sometimes different senses. Pas 
may be used when the meaning is affirmative ; point always implies doubt. 
Ne le savez-vous pas ? may imply, you certainly know it: ne le savez-vous point ? 
is an emphatic inquiry, whether you do not know it. 

4. When pas, point, or any monosyllabic adverb of manner or quantity, 
as Men, mat, trop, peu, is joined to an infinitive, it almost always precedes 
it ; as, 

tlvitez les tentations afln de rty pas sue- Avoid temptations in order not to yield to 

combee. them. 
Je vous at dit de ne pas trop marcher. I told you not to Avalk too much. 

5. With two infinitives, pas may be placed between them ; but the nega- 
tion is more forcible when ne pas precedes both ; as, 

Je voudrais ne pas savoik eceiee, disait I should wish not to know how to write, 
Ner on, force de signer un arret de said Nero, when forced to sign a sentence 

mort. of death. 

6. Pas and point are always omitted when there is in the phrase any other 
negative, as aucun, nul, personne, guere, jamais, nullement, ni repeated, plus 
rien, or ne que (meaning only), etc. 

7. Pas and point are generally omitted with pouvoir, oser, cesser, and savoir, 
in the conditional (meaning pouvoir), when these verbs are followed by an in- 
finitive, and in familiar language with bouger ; as, 

II ne ptvrfaire cela. He cannot do that. 

Je ne bougerai de Id. I will not stir from there. 

Je ne sATTRAis/ouVe cela. I can not do that. 



474 



PREPOSITIONS. 



8. Pas and point are omitted also when the phrase contains an expression 
having the force of a negative ; as, 

11 ne voit gotttte. He does not see at all. 

Je ne Vai <m de ma vie. I have never seen it in my life. 

EMPLOYMENT OF NE. 

9. Yerbs of fear, as apprehender, avoir peur, craindre, trembler, not nega- 
tive, as also the expressions d moins que, de crainte que, de peter que, and que 
in the sense of sans que, take ne before the following verb ; as, 

II A peur que je ne change d'avis. He is afraid that I may change my opinion. 

De petjr qv'U ne soil malade. For fear that he may be sick. 

10. Autre, autrement, and comparatives of superiority and inferiority in 
phrases not negative, take ne before the following verb ; as, 

Je vous entends mieux que vous ne pensez. I understand you better than you think. 
II agit autrement qu'il parte. He acts differently from what he speaks. 

II est plus prudent qiCil tfetait. He is more prudent than he was. 

11. Contester, desesperer, disconvenir, douter, and nier, when negative or 
interrogative, generally take ne before the following verb ; as, On ne peut 
pas douter que les poles ne soient couverts dhene coupole de glace. Doutes-tu 
qu'il ne veuille implorer ma clemence ? 

12. Empecher, eviter, prendre garde, and segarder, meaning to employ means 
that something may not happen, take ne before the following verb ; as, Prenez 
garde qiton ne vous trompe. 

13. s'en faut, when interrogative or accompanied by a negative, or words 
having the force of a negative, takes ne before the following verb ; as does 
also il y a, followed by que in the sense of depuis que, when the phrase can be 
made negative in English ; as, 

II ne s'en faut pas de beaucoup qu'il ne It does not want much of his being rich. 

soit riche. 

Il y A deux ans queje ne Vai vu. I have not seen him these two years. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



LIST OF PEEPOSITIONS. 



A travel's, 


j. through. 


Loin de, 


far from. 


Au tr avers de, 






Attendu, 


on account of. 


Malgre, 


in spite of. 


Apres, 


after. 


Moyennant, 


by means of. 


Aupres de, 


near. 


Nonobstant, 


notwithstanding. 


Autour de, 


around. 


Outre, 


besides. 


Avant, 


before. 


Par, 


by- 


Avec, 


with. 


Par-delct, 


on the other side. 


Chez, 


at. 


Parmi, 


among. 


Concernant, 


concerninc 


Pendant, 


in time of. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



475 



Contre, 


against. 


Pres de, 


near. 


Dans, 


in. 


Pour, 


for. 


Depuis, 


since. 


Proche de, 


near. 


Perriere, 


behind. 


Sauf, 


save. 


Pes, 


from. 


Sans, 


without. 


Pevant, 


before. 


Selon, 


according to. 


Pur ant, 


during. 


Sous, 


under. 


Entre, 


between. 


Suivant, 


according to. 


Envers, 


towards. 


Sur, 


on. 


Excepte, 


except. 


Touch ant, 


touching. 


Hormis, 


save. 


Vers, 


towards. 


Hors, 


out. 


Vis-a-vis de, 


opposite. 


Jusqu'a, 


as far as. 


Voici, voild, 


behold. 



1. At, in, to, before the name of a city or of a country which is masculine, 
is d, and before one which is feminine, is en ; from, before all, is de. II est a 
Boston. 11 va au Mexique, au Canada. II est ne en Prance. 

2. In after a superlative, and equivalent to of, is de in French ; as, 
Cest Vhomme le plus riche de noire ville. He is the richest man in our city. 

3. Pans has a sense precise, en vague and indefinite ; therefore dans is 
used before a definite noun, and en before an indefinite noun ; as, 

II entre dans la prison. He goes into the prison. 

11 est en prison. He is in prison. 

4. Before a noun of time, en means the whole period of time ; dans means 
at the end of it. 

11 pent /aire cela en trois semaines. He can do that in three weeks. 

11 arrivera dans trois semaines. He will arrive in (at the end of) three weeks. 

5. A, de, and en, are generally to be repeated before each of their objects ; 

as, 

Je parte i. VTiomme et a son Jils. I speak of the man and his son. 

Nous parlous de vous et de lui. "We speak of you and of him. 

6. En, meaning while, or by, is the only preposition which can be followed 
by the present participle in French ; all others govern the infinitive ; as, 

H lit en mangeant. He reads while eating. 

Afin v'apprendre. Point voir mes amis. In order to learn. To see my friends. 

Sans etudier. A /aire cela. "Without studying. By doing that. 

Rem.— "We see from these examples that when the preposition in English governing a 
participial noun can not be rendered into French by en, the participial noun is generally to 
he translated by the infinitive. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

LIST OF THE PEINCIPAL CONJUNCTIONS 

Ainsi que, as. Mais, but. 

A moins que, unless. Ni, neither. 



476 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



Au cas que, 


in case that. 


Neanmoins, 


nevertheless. 


En cas que, 




Non que, 


not that. 


Au moins, 


at least. 


Or, 


now. 


Bu moins, 




Ou, 


or. 


A condition que, 


on condition that. 


Pourquoi, 


why. 


Bien que, 


although. 


Pourtant, 


however. 


Bicn entendu que, 


on condition that. 


Pour que, 


in order that. 


Car, 


for. 


Pourvu que, 


provided that. 


Ccpendant, 


nevertheless. 


Parce que, 


because. 


I)e sorte que, 


so that. 


Que, 


that. 


Be maniere que, 




Quoique, 


although. 


En sorte que, 




Puisque, 


since. 


Encore que, 


although. 


Si, 


if. 


Et, 


and. 


Soit que, 


whether, or. 


11 est pourquoi, 


therefore. 


Sinon, 


or, otherwise. 


Bone, 


then. • 


Toutefois, 


although. 


Sinon que, 


except {hat. 


Si ce n'est que, 


except that. 


Outre que, 


besides that. 


Vu que, 


because. 


A cause que, 


because. 


Attendu que, 


because. 



1. To avoid repetition, que is often used for parce que, pendant que, and 
other conjunctions ending in que, repeated in a second clause. It is used in 
the same way for comme, quand, lorsque, and si. 



Pendant qxj'U dejeunait, et qv'il p>arlait, 

nous Usions. 
Comme il etait tar'd et que vous rCetiez pas 

ici, fotre ami est alle chez lui. 
Quand on est riclie et qiCon est genereux, 

on ne manque pas d'amis. 
Si vous avez des amis, et que nous desiriez 

les conserver,prouvez-leur voire estime. 

2. The following conjunctions 
IY., p. 293 : 

A condition que, Gc n'est pas que, 
A Dieu ne plaise que, De crainte que, 
A ce que, De peur que, 

Afin que, Dieu veuille que, 

A la bonne heure que, Excepte que, 
A moins que, Encore que, 

Au cas que, En cas que, 

Avant que, En attendant que, 

Bien loin que, Fasse le Ciel que, 

Bien que, Hormis que, 



While he was breakfasting, and while he was 

talking, we read. 
As it was late, and as you were not here, 

your friend went home. 
"When one is rich, and when ho is generous, 

he does not lack friends. 
If you have friends, and if you desire to pre- 
serve them, prove to them your esteem. 

govern the subjunctive according to Rule 



Biors que, 
Jusqu'a ce que, 
Loin que, 
Moyennant que, 
Nonobstant que, 
Non pas que, 
Non que, 

Plaise a Dieu que, 
Pliit a Dieu que, 
Pose le cas que, 



Pour pen que, 
Pour que, 
Pourvu que, 
Quoique, 
Sans que, 
Si peu que, 
Soit que, 
Si tant est que, 
Suppose que. 



the 



Also que used for any of the above conjunctions, or a second si, 
last example above. 

The following, like the relatives, sometimes govern the subjunctive and 
sometimes the indicative : 

Sinon que. 



De- facon que, 
De maniere que. 



De sorte que, 
En sorte que, 



Tellement que, 
Si ce n'est que, 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



477 



Avoir, 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB A VOIR, TO HAVE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PAST. 



to have. Avoir eu, 



PARTICIPLES. 



PEESENT. 

Ayant, 

PAST. 

Eu (m.), eue (/.), 



'ring, 
had. 



Ayant eu, 



to have had. 



having had. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



J'ai, 
Tu as, 
II a, 

Nous avons, 
Vous avez, 
Us ont. 



J'avais, 
Tu avais, 
II avait, 
Nous avions, 
Vous aviez, 
Us avaient, 



J'eus, 
Tu eus, 
II eut, 

Nous cumes, 
Vous elites, 
Us eurent, 



J'aurai, 
Tu auras, 
II aura, 
Nous aurons, 
Vous anrez, 
lis aurout, 



J'aurais, 
Tu aurais, 
II aurait. 
Nous aurions, 
Vous auriez, 
Us auraient, 



Aie, 

Qu'il ait, 
Ayons, 



PAST DEFINITE. 



I have, 
thou hast, 
he has. 
ace have, 
you have, 
they have. 

I ha d. 
thou hadst. 
he had. 
we had. 
you had. 
they had. 

I had. 
thou hadst- 
he had- 
we had- 
you had. 
they had. 

FETEEE. 

Isliall have, 
thou wilt hare. 

he will have, 
we shull ha ve, 
you will have, 
they will ha ve. 

CONDITIONAL. 

I should have, 
thou would.st have, 
he would have, 
we should have, 
you would have, 
they would have. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

J'ai eu, I have had. 

Tu as eu, thou hast had. 

II a eu, he has had. 

Nous avons eu, we have had. 

Vous avez eu, you hare hud. 

Us ont eu, they have had,. 



PLtTPEEFECT. 



J'avais eu, 
Tu avais eu, 
11 avait eu, 
Nous avions eu, 
Vous aviez eu, 
Us ont eu, 



/ had had. 
thou hadst had. 
he had had. 
we had had. 
you had had. 
they had had. 



PAST ANTEEIOE. 

J'eus eu, I had had. 

Tu eus eu, thou hadst had. 

II eut eu, he had had. 

Nous eumes eu, we had had. 

Vous eutes eu, ' you had laid. 

Us eurent eu, they had had. 

FUTTJEE PEEFECT. 



J'aurai eu, 
Tu auras eu, 
U aura eu, 
Nous aurons eu, 
Vous aurez eu, 
Us auront eu, 



I sJiall Jiare had. 
thou wilt have had. 

he will have had. 
we shall hare had. 
you will hare had. 
iliey will have had. 



PAST CONDITIONAL. 



J'aurais eu, 
Tu aurais eu, 
II aurait eu, 
Nous aurions eu, 
Vous auriez eu, 
Us auraient eu, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



have (thou), 
let Mm have, 
let us have. 



Avez, 

Qu'ils aicnt, 



I should have had. 
thou wouldst hare had. 
he would have had. 
we should have had. 
you would have had. 
they would have had. 



have you. 
let them have. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PEESENT. 

Que j'aie, that I may have. 

Que tu aies, that thou may est have. 

Qu'il ait, that he may have. 

Que nous avons, that we may have. 

Que vous ayez, that you may have. 

Qu'ils aient, that they may have. 

INPEEFECT. 

Que j'eusse, that I m ight have. 

Que tu eusses, that thou mightest have. 

Qu'il eut, that he might have. 

Que nous eussions, that we might have. 

Que vous eussiez, that you might have. 

Qu'ils eussent, that they might have. 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aie eu, that 1 may hare had. 

Que tu aies eu, that thou mayest hare had. 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may have had. 

Que nous ayons eu, that we may hare had. 
Que vous ayez eu, that you may hare had. 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may have had. 

PLEPEEFECT. 

Que j'eusse eu, that I m ight 1 

Que to eusses eu, that thou mightest I ^ 
Qu'il eut eu, that he might I 

Que nous eussions eu, that we might f g 
Que vous eussiez eu, that you might 3 
Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might J « 



478 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE, NEGATIVELY. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Ne pas avoir, 

N'ayant pas, 
Pas eu, 



PEESENT. 
PAST. 



not to have. \ N'avoir pas eu, 
PARTICIPLES. 



not having, 
not had. 



N'ayant pas eu, 



not to have had. 



not having had. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'ai pas, 
11 n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas, 
Vous n'avez pas, 
lis n'ont pas, 

IMPEEFECT. 

Je n'avais pas, 
Tu n'avais pas, 
II n'avait pas, 
Nous n'avions pas, 
Vous n'aviez pas, 
lis n'avaient pas, 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Je n'eus pas, 
Tu n'eus pas, 
11 n'eut pas, 
Nous n'e times pas, 
Vous n'eiites pas, 
lis n'eurent pas, 



I have not. 
thou hast not. 
he has not. 
we have not. 
you have not. 
they have not. 

I had not. 
thou hadst not. 
he had not. 
we had not. 
you had not. 
they had not. 

I had not. 
t?iozi hadst not. 
he had not. 
we had not. 
you had not. 
they had not. 



Je n'aurai pas, 
Tu n'aurais pas, 
II n'aura pas, 
Nous n'aurons pas, 
Vous n'aurez pas, 
lis n'auront pas, 



Je n'aurais pas, 
Tu n'aurais pas, 
II n'aurait pas, 
Nous n'aurions pas. 
Vous n'auriez pas, 
lis n'auraient pas, 



N'aie pas, 
Qu'il n'ait pas, 
N'ayons pas, 



I shall not have, 
thou wilt not have. 

he will not have, 
we shall not have, 
you will not have, 
they will not have. 

CONDITIONAL. 

/ should not have, 
thou wouldst not have, 
he xvould not have, 
we should not have, 
you would not have, 
they would not have. 



Je n'ai pas eu, 
Tu n'as pas eu, 
II n'a pas eu, 
Nous n'avons paa eu 
Vous n'avez pas eu, 
lis n'ont pa3 eu, 



Je n'avais pas eu, 
Tu n'avais pas eu, 
II n'avait pas eu, 
Nous n'avons pas eu 
Vous n'avez pas eu, 
lis n'ont pas eu, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

Ihave not had. 
tJwu hast not had. 
he has not had. 
we have not had. 
you have not had. 
they have not had, 

PLtTPEEFECT. 

Iliad not had. 
thou hadst not had. 
he had not had. 
we had not had. 
you had not had. 
they had not had. 

PAST ANTEEIOE. 

I had not had. 
thou hadst not had. 
he had not had. 
we had not had. 
you had not had. 
they had not had. 



Je n'eus pas eu, 
Tu n'eus pas eu, 
II n'eut pas eu, 
Nous n'eumes pas eu, 
Vous n'eiites pas eu, 
lis n'eurent pas eu, 

FUTURE PEEFECT. 

Je n'aurai pas eu, I shall not have had. 
Tu n'auras pas eu, thou wilt not have had. 
II n'aura pas eu, he will not hate had. 

Nous n'aurons pas eu, we shall not have had. 
Vous n'aurez pas eu, you will not have had. 
lis n'auront pas eu, they will not have had. 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

1 should not"] 



Je n'aurais pas eu, 
Tu n'aurais pas eu, 
II n'aurait pas eu, 
Nous n'aurions pas eu, 
Vous n'auriez pas eu, you would not I § 
lis n'auraient pas eu, they would not J ^ 



thou uouldst not | 
he would not i < 
we should not f s 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



have (thou) not. 
let him, not have, 
let us not have. 



N'ayez pas, 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, 



hare (you) not. 
let them have. 



SCBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PEESENT. 

Que je n'aie pas, that I may not have. 

Que tu n'aies pas, that thou may est not have. 
Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may not have. 

Que nous n'ayons pas, that wemaynot have. 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you may not have. 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may not have. 

IMPEEFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, that Imight"] . 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou mightest I § 
Qu'il n'eut pas, that he might I $ 

Que nous n'eussions pas, that we might f^, 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you might § 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they might J 



PEEFECT. 

Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may not"] 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, that thou may est not j 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may not I 

Que nous n'ayons pas eu, thatwemay not J 
j Que vous n'ayez pas eu, thatyou may not 
' Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they may not} 

PLUPEEFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas eu, that Imight 
Que tun'eusses paseu, that thou mightest 
Qu'il n'eut pas eu, that he might 

Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, that you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that they might 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



479 



CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE, INTERROGATIVELY. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Avoir, 

Ayant, 
Eu, 



Ai-je ? 
As-tu ? 
A-t-il? 
Avons-nous ? 
Avez-vou3 9 
Ont-ils ? 

Avais-je ? 
Avais-tu? 
Avait-il ? 
Avions-nous ? 
Aviez-vons ? 
Avaient-ils ? 

Eus-je? 
Eus-tu ? 
Eut-il ? 
Eumes-nous ? 
Eutes-vous ? 
Eurent-ils ? 

Aurai-je? 
Auras-tu ? 
Aura-t-il ? 
Aurons-nous ? 
Aurez-vous ? 
Auront-ils '? 



Aurais-je ? 
Aurais-tu ? 
Aurait-il ? 
Aurions-nous! 
Auriez-vous ? 
Auraient-ils ? 



to 7iGM>e. I Avoir eu, 
PARTICIPLES. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



having, 
had. 



Ayant eu, 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



IMPERFECT. 



PAST DEFINITE. 



have I? 
hast thou ? 
has he ? 
have we ? 
have you ? 
have they ? 

had It 

hadst thou ? 
had he ? 
had we ? 
had you t 
had they ? 

had I? 
hadst thou ? 
had he ? 
had toe ? 
had you? 
had they ? 

FUTtTRE. 

shall I hare ? 
wilt thou have ? 

will he have ? 
shall ice have? 
will you have ? 
will they have ? 

CONDITIONAL. 

should I have? 
wouldst thou have ? 
would he hav-e ? 
should we ha ve ? 
would you have ? 
would they have ? 



Ai-je eu? 
As-tu eu ? 
A-t-il eu ? 
Avons-nous eu ? 
Avez-vous eu ? 
Ont-ils eu ? 



to have had. 



having had. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

have I had ? 
hast thou had ? 
has he had ? 
have we had, ? 
have you had ? 



Avais-je eu? 
Avais-tu eu ? 
Avait-il eu ? 
Avions-nous eu ? 
Aviez-vous eu ? 
Avaient-ils eu? 



have they had ? 

PLUPERFECT. 

had I had? 
hadst thou, had ? 
had he had ? 
had we had ? 
had, you had ? 
had they had ? 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Eus-je eu ? 
Eus-tu eu ? 
Eut-il eu ? 
Eumes nous eu ? 
Eutes-vous eu? 
Eurent-ils eu? 



had, I had ? 
hadst thou had ? 
had he had? 
had we had. ? 
had you had ? 
had they had ? 

FUTURE PERFECT. 



Aurai-je eu? 
Auras-tu eu ? 
Aura-t-il eu ? 
Aurons-nous eu ? 
Aurez-vous eu ? 
Auront-ils eu ? 



shall I have had ? 
wilt thou have had ? 

rcill he have had ? 
shall we have had? 
will you have had ? 
will they have had ? 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 



Aurais-je eu ? 
Aurais-tu eu ? 
Aurait-il eu? 
Aurions-nous eu ? 
Auriez-vous eu? 
Auraient-ils eu ? 



should I have had ? 
wouldst thou have had ? 
would he have had ? 
should we have had ? 
would you have had ? 
would they have had ? 



480 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



CONJUGATION OF A VOIR, NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PEESENT. 

N'ai-je pas? 
N'as-tu pas ? 
N'a-t-il pas? 
ISTavons-nous pas? 
ISTavez-vous pas? 
N"ont-ils pas ? 

IMPEEFECT. 



JTavais-je pas? 
ISTavais-tu pas ? 
N'avait-il pas? 
N'avions-nous pas ? 
N'aviez-vous pas ? 
N'ont-ils pas ? 

PAST DEFINITE. 

N'eus-je pas? 
N'eus-tu pas? 



have I not? 
hast tli o u not? 
has he not? 
Jui ce tee not ? 
have you not? 
hare ikey not? 

had I not? 
hadst thou not? 
had he not? 
had we not ? 
had you not ? 
had they not? 



N'eut-il pas? 
N'eumes-nous pas ? 
N'e Cites- vous pas ? 
N'eurent-ils pas ? 

FUTtTEE. 

N'aurai-jo pas ? 
ISTauras-tu pas ? 
N'aura-t-il pas ? 
N'aurons-nous pas ? 
N'aurez-vous pas ? 
N 1 auront-ils pas ? 



hadst thou, not? 
had he not? 
had we not? 
had you not ? 
had they not? 



shall I not have? 
wilt thou not have ? 
will he not have ? 
shall we not have ? 
will you not have ? 
will they not have ? 

CONDITIONAL. 

N'anrais-j e pas ? should Inoth a re ? 

JSTau rais-tu pas ? wou/dst thou n ot h ave ? 
N'aurait-il pas ? would he not have ? 

N'auvions-nous pas ? should, we not hare ? 
N'auviez-vous pas ? would you not hare ? 
N'auraient-ils pas ? would they not have ? 



ai-je pas eu? 
"as-tu pas eu ? 
"a-t-il pas eu ? 
'avons-nous pas eu 
"avez-vous pas eu ? 
'ont-ils pas eu ? 



avais-je pas eu ? 
'avais-tu pas eu? 
"avait-il pas eu ? 
avions-nous pas eu 
'aviez-vous pas eu ? 
'avaient-ils pas eu ? 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

have I not had ? 
hast thou not had ? 

has he not had ? 
have we not had ? 
have you not had ? 
have they not had ? 

PLUPEEFECT. 

had I not had ? 
hadst thou not had. ? 
had he not had? 
had we not had ? 
had you not had ? 
had they not had ? 



PAST ANTERIOE. 

'eus-je pas eu ? had I had ? 



eus-tu pas eu ? 
'eut-il pas eu? 
|efimes-nous pas eu ? 
eutes vous pas eu ? 
eurent-ils pas eu ? 



hadst thou not had ? 
had he not had? 
had tee not had ? 
had you not had ? 
had they not had t 



FUTITEE PERFECT. 

aurai-je pas eu ? shall I not have had ? 
auras-tu pas eu ? wilt thou not have had ? 
aura-t-il pas eu ? will he not have had ? 
aurons-nous pas eu? shallwe nothave had ? 
aurez-vous pas eu ? will you not have had ? 
auront-ils pas eu ? will they nothave had ? 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

anrais-je pas eu ? should I not} 

aurais-tu pas eu ? ehouldst thou not j "55 
aurait il pas eu ? sfioicld he not 

aurions-nous pas eu? should we not j 
auriez-vous pas en ? should you not 2 
auraieut-ils pas eu ? should they not J ^ 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



481 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB ETRE, TO BE 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

I PAST. 
to be. I Avoir ete, 



£tre, 
£tant, 



Je suis, 
Tu es, 
II est, 

Nous somines, 
Vous etes, 
lis sont, 

J'etais, 
Tu etais, 
II etait, 
Nous ctions, 
Vous etiez, 
Us etaient, 

Je fus, 
Tu fus, 
If fat, 

Nous fumes, 
Vons futes, 
Us furent, 

Je serai, 
Tu seras, 
U sera, 
Nous serous, 
Vous serez, 
lis seront, 

Je serais, 
Tu serais, 
II serai t, 
Nous serions 
Vous seriez, 
Us seraient, 



Sois, 

Qu'il soit, 
Soyons, 



Que je sois, 
Que 'tu sois, 
Qu'il soit, 
Que nous soyons 
Que vous soycz, 
Qu'ils soient, 



PRESENT. 



PAPTICIPLES. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



being, 
been. 



Ayant ete, 



INDICATIVE HOOD. 



TAST DEFINITE. 



Jam. 

thou art. 
he is. 
we are. 
you are. 
they are. 

I was. 
thou toast, 
he teas, 
we were, 
you were, 
they were. 

I was. 
thou toast, 
he was. 
we ware, 
you were, 
they 'were. 

I shall be. 
thou wilt be. 

lie will be. 
ive shall be. 
you will be. 
they will be. 



CONDITIONAL. 



I should be. 
thou wouidst be. 
he would be. 
we should be. 
you would be. 
they would be. 



Jai ete, 
Tu as ete, 
U a ete, 

Nous avons ete, 
Vous avez ete, 
Us ont ete, 



to have been. 



having been. 

PAST IK DEFINITE. 

I have been, 
thou hast been, 
he has been. 



we have been, 
you ha ve been, 
they have been. 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais ete, I had been. 

Tu avais etc, thou hadst been. 

U avait ete, he had been. 

Nous avions ete, we had been. 

Vous aviez ete, you had been. 

Us avaient ete, they had been. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

.Feus ete, I had. been. 

Tu eus ete, thou hadst been. 

11 eut ete, he had been. 

Nous euraes ete, we had, been. 

Vous eutes etc, you had been. 

Us eurent ete, they had been. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

J'aurai ete, I shall have been. 

Tu auras ete, thou wilt have been, 

11 aura ete, he will have been. 

Nous aurons ete, we shall have been. 

Vous aurez ete, you will have been. 

Us auront etc, they will have been. 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais ete, I should have been. 

Tu aurais ete, thou wouidst have been. 

II aurait ete, he would have been. 

Nous aurions ete, we should have been. 

Vous auriez ete, you xcoidd have been. 

Us auraient etc, they would have been. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

be (thou), 
let him be. 
let us be. 



Soyez, 

Qu'ils soient, 



be (you), 
let them be. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

that I may be. 
that thou mayest be. 
that he may be. 
that we may be. 
that you, may be. 
that they may be. 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je fusse, 
Que to fusses, 
Qu'il fut, 

Que nous fussions, 
Que vous fussiez, 
Qu'ils fussent, 



that I m ight be. 
that thou mightst be. 
that he might be. 
that we might be. 
that you might be. 
that they might be. 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aia 6te. that I may have been. 

Que - tu aies ete, that thou mayest have been. 
Qu'il ait ete, that he may have been. 

Que. nous ayons ete, that we may have been. 
Que vous ayez ete, that you may have been. 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may have been. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'ensse ete. that I mighty * 

One tu eusses ete, that thou mightst | | 
Qu'il eut ete, that he m ight \ 

Que nous eussions ete, that we might j g 
Que vous eussiez ete, that you might j q 
Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might] < 



'1 



482 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



FIRST CONJUGATION— in BE. 



Parler, 

Parlant, 
Parle, 



Je parle, 
Tu paries, 
II parle, 
Nous parlous, 
Vous parlez, 
lis parleut, 

Je parlais, 
Tu parlais, 
II parlait, 
Nous parlions, 
Vous parliez, 
lis parlaient, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to speak. | Avoir par!6, 
PARTICIPLES. 



to have spoken. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



speaking, 
spoken. 



Ayant parle, 



having spoken. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



/ speak, 
thou speakest. 
he speaks, 
ice speak, 
yozi speak, 
they speak. 



IMPERFECT. 



Je parlai, 
Tu parlas, 
II parla, 
Nous pari Ames, 
Vous parlates, 
lis parlerent, 

Je parlerai, 
Tu parleras, 
II parlera, 
Nous parlcrons, 
Vons parlerez, 
lis parleront, 

Je parlerais, 
Tu parlerais, 
II parlerait, 
Nous parlerions, 
Vous parleriez, 
lis parleraient, 



I was speaking, 
thou wast speaking, 
he was speaking, 
we zcere speaking, 
you were speaking, 
they were speaking. 

PAST DEFINITE. 

I spoke. 



-PAS' 



J'ai parle. 
Tu as parle, 
II a parle. 
Nous avons parle 
Vous avez parle, 
lis out parle, 



J'avais parle, 
Tu avais parle, 
II avait parle, 
Nous avions parle, 
Vous aviez parle, 
lis avaient parle, 



1' TJSlfjM'lSllTE. 

/ have 
thou hast 
he has 
, we ha ve 

you have 
they have 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had 



thou hadst 
he had, 
we had 
you had, 
they had 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



thoii spokest. 
he spoke, 
we spoke, 
you spoke, 
they spoke. 

FUTURE. 

I shall speak, 
thou wilt speak. | 

he will speak, 
we shall speak, 
you will speak. \ 
they will speak. 

CONDITIONAL. 

I should speak, 
thou wouldst speak, 
he would speak, 
we should speak, 
you woidd speak, 
they would speak. 



J'eus parle, _ 
Tu eus parle, 
11 cut parle, 
Nous eumes parl< 
Vous eutes parle, 
lis eureut parle, 



I had 
thou had^t 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



J'aurai parle, 
Tu auras parle, 
II aura parle, 
Nous aurons parle, 
Vous aurez parle, 
lis auront parle, 



I shall have 
thou wilt have 
he will have 
we shall have 
you will have 
they will have 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais parle, I should have 

Tu au-rais parle, thou wouldst have 
II aurait parle, he would hate 

Nous aurions parle, we should have 
Vous auriez parle, you would hare 
lis auraieut parle, they would have 



spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 

spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 

spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 

spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 

spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken, 
spoken. 



Parle, 
Qu'il parle, 
Parlous, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Parlez, 



speak, (thou), 
let him speak, 
let us speak. 



Qu'ils parlent, 



speak (you), 
let them speak. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

that I may 
that thou mayest 
that he may 
that we may 
that youmay 
that they may 



Que je parle, 
Que tu paries, 
Qu'il parle, 
Que nous parlions, 
Que vous parliez, 
Qu'ils parlent, 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je parlasse, that I might 

Que tu parlasses, that thou mightest 
Qu'il parlat, that he might 

Que nous parlassions, that xce might 
Que vous parlassiez, thai you might 
Qu'ils parlassent, that they might 



speak, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak. 

speed:, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak, 
speak. 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aie parle, that I may 

Que tu aies parle, that thou mayest 

Qu'il ait parle, that he may 

Que nous ayons parle, that we may 

Que vous ayez parle, that you may 

Qu'ils aient parle, that they may J 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusso parle, that I might} 

Que tu eusses parle, that thou, mightest \ 
Qu'il cut parle, that he might I 

Que nous eussions parle, that toe might \ 
Que vous eussiez parle, that you m ight 
Qu'ils eussent parle, that they might J 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



483 



CONJUGATION OF FARLER, TO SPEAK, NEGATIVELY. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Ne pas parler, 



Ne parlant pas, 
Pas parle, 



not to speak. | N'avoir pas parle, 
PARTICIPLES. 



not speaking, 
not spoken. 



N'ayant pas parle 



not to have spoken. 



not having spoken. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne parle pas, 
Tu ne paries pas. 
II ne parle pas, 
Nous ne parlons pas, 
Yous ne parlez pas, 
lis ne pari uu pus, 



PRESENT. 

I do not speak, 
thou dost not speak, 
he does not speak. 

we do not speak, 
you do not speak, 
they do not speak. 

IMPERFECT. 

Je no parlais pas, I did not speak. 

Tu ne parlais pas, thou didst not speak. 

II ne parlait pas, he did not speak. 

Nous ne parlious pas, we did not speak. 

Vous ne parlies pas, you did not speak. 

lis ne parlaient pas, they did not speak. 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Je ne parlais pas, / did not speak. 

Tu ne parlas pas, thou didst not speak. 
II ne parla pas, he did not speak. 

Nous ne parlatncs pas, tee did. not speak. 
Vous ne parlates pas, you did not speak. 
lis ne parlurent pas, they did not speak. 

FUTURE. 

I shall not speak, 
thou wilt not speak. 

he will not speak, 
we sha^l not speak, 
you will not speak 
they will not speak. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Je ne parlerais pas, I shoxdd not speak- 
Tu ne parlerais pas, thou wouldstnot spealc- 
II ne parlerait pas, he would not speak- 
Nous ne parlerions pas, toe should not speak 
Vous ne parleriez pas, you would not speak- 
lis ne parleraieut pas, they would not speak. 



Je ne parlerai pas, 
Tu ne parleras pas, 
II ne parleras pas, 
Nous ne parlerons pas, 
Vous ne parlerez pas, 
lis ne parleront pas, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

Je n*ai pas parle, I have not spoken. 

Tu n'as pas parle, thou hast not spoken. 
11 n*a pas parle, he leas not spoken. 

Nous n'avons pas parle, we hare not spoken. 
Vous n'avez pas parle, you have not spoken. 
lis n'ont pas parle, they have not spoken. 

PLUPERFECT. 

Je n'avais pas parle, / had not spoken- 

Tu n'avais pas parle, thou hadst not spoken* 
11 n'avait pas parle, he had not spoken. 
Nous n*avions pas parle, we had not spoken. 
Vous n'aviez pas parle, you had not spoken. 
lis u'avaient pas parle, they had not spoken. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je n'eus pas parle, I had not spoken. 

Tu n'eus pas parle, thou hadst not spoken. 
II n'eut pas parle, he had not spoken. 

Nous n'eutnes pas parle, tee had not spoken. 
Vous n'eutes pas parle, you had not spoken. 
lis n'eurent pas parle, they had not spoken. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

J Je n'aurai pas parle, I shall noV 

Tu n'auras pas parle, thou wilt not 

II n'aura pas parle, he will not 

Nous n'aurons pas parle, we shall not 

Vous n'aurez pas parle, you will not \ 

lis n'auront pas parle, they will not t 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

Je n'aurais pas parle, I should not ~\ =? 

Tu n'aurais pas parle, thou wouldst not ^ 
j 11 n'aurait pas parle, he would not ! 

Nous n'aurions pas parle, toe should not [ ~ 

Vous n'auriez pas parle, you would not j s> 
' Us n'auraient pas parle, they would not J .2 



Ne parle pas, 
Qu'il ne parle pas, 
Ne parlons pas, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

speak {thou) not. I Ne parlez pas, 
let him not speak. Qu'ils ne parlent pas, 
let us not speak. 



speak (you) not. 
let them not speak. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PEESENT. 

Que je ne parle pas, that J may 

Que tu ne paries pas, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ne parle pas, that he may 

Que nous ne parlions pas, that we may 
Que voiis ne parliez pas, that you may 
Qu'ils ne parlent pas, that they may 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne parlasse pas, that I might 
Que tu ne parlasses \>a.s,t7iatthou mightest 
Qu'il ne parlat pas, that he might 

Que nous ne parlassionspas,£7ja£ioe might 
Que vous ne parlassiez pas,thatyou might 
Qu'ils ne parlassent pas, that they might 



U 



PERFECT. 

Que jo n*aie pas parle, that I may) ~" 

Que tu n'aies pas' parle, that thou mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas parle, that he may ! & 

Que nous n ayons pas parle, that toe may \ | 
Que vous n'ayez pas parle, that you may j •< 
Qu'ils n'aient pas parle, that they may J | 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas parle, that I might"} =j 
Que tu n'eusses pas parle, that thou migittcst j II 
( Qu'il n'eut pas parle, that he might I * 
| Que nous u'eussions pas parle', that icemighl j g 
I Que vous n'eus-iez pas parle. that you might \ ■« 
I Qu'ils n'eussent pas parle, that they m ight] t 



484 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



CONJUGATION OF PARLER, TO SPEAK, INTERROGATIVELY. 



INDICATIVE JIOOD. 



Parle-jo ? 
Parles-tu ? 
Parle-t-il ? 
Parlons-nous ? 
Parlez-vous ? 
Parleut-ils ? 



Parlais-je ? 
Parlais-tu ? 
Parlait-il ? 
Parlions-nous ? 
Parliez-vous ? 
Parlaient-ils ? 



Parlai-je? 
Parlas-tu ? 
Parla-t-il? 
Parlames-nous? 
Parlates-vous ? 
Parterent-ils ? 



do I speak ? 
dost thou speak ? 
does he speak ? 

do %oe speak ? 
do you speak ? 
do they speak t 

IMPERFECT. 

was I speaking ? 
wast thou speaking ? 
was he speaking ? 
were we speaking ? 
were you speaking ? 
were they speaking J 

PAST DEFINITE. 

did I speak ? 
didst thou speak ? 
did he speak f 
did we speak ? 
did you speak? 
did they speak ? 



FUTURE. 



Parlerai-je ? 
Parleras-tn ? 
Parlera-t-il? 
Parlerons-nous ? 
Parierez-vous? 
Parleront-ils ? 



Parlerais-je ? 
Parlerais-tu ? 
Parlerait-il ? 
Parlerions-nous? 
Parleriez-vous ? 
Parleraient-ils? 



shall I speak ? 
wilt thou, speak. ? 

will he speak ? 
shall we speak ? 
will you speak ? 
will they speak ? 

CONDITIONAL. 

should I speak ? 
woiddst thou speak ? 
would he speak ? 
should we speak ? 
would you speak ? 
would they speak ? 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

Ai-je parte? 
As-tu parte? 
A-t-il parte? 
Avons-nous parle ? 
Avez-vous parte ? 
Ont-il 



parle ? 

PLUPERFECT. 

Avais-je parle ? 
Avais-t.ii parle? 
Avait-il parle ? 
Avions-nous parte? 
Aviez-vous parle ? 
Avaient-ils parte ? 



have I spoken * 
hast thou spoken ? 
has he spoken ? 
hare we spoken ? 
hare you spoken ? 
have they spoken ? 



had I spoken ? 
Jiadst thou spoken ? 
had he sjjoken ? 
had tee spoken ? 
had you spoken ? 
had they spoken ? 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

Eus-j e parle ? had I spoken ? 



Eus-tu parle ? 
Eut-il parle ? 
Eumes-nous parle ? 
Eutes-vous parle ? 
Eurent-ils parle? 



hadst thou spoken ? 
had he spoken ? 
had we spoken ? 
had you spoken ? 
had they spoken ? 

FUTURE PERFECT. 



shall 1 hate spoken ? 
wilt thou hare spoken ? 

will he have spoken ? 
shall we hare spoken ? 
will you hare spoken ? 
will they hare spoken ? 



Aurai-je parle? 
Auras- tu parle ? 
Aura-t-il parle ? 
Aurons-nous parle? 
Aurez-vous parle ? 
Auront-ils parle ? 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

Aurais-je parle ? should J hare spoken ? 
Aurais-tu parle ? wouldst thouhare spoken ? 
Aurait-il parle ? would he hare spoken ? 
Aurions-nous parle ? should weharespoken ? 
Auriez-vous parle ? icoufd you hare spoken ? 
Auraient-ils parle? would they hare spoken ? 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



485 



CONJUGATION OF PARLE R NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 



INDICATIVE JIOOD. 



Ne parle-je pas? 
Ne paries-til pas ? 
Ne parle-t-il pas ? 
Ne parlons-nous pas 
Ne parlez-vous pas ? 
Ne parle ut-ils pas? 

IMPERFECT 



PRESENT. 

do I n ot speak? 
dost thou, not apeak ? 
does he not speak ? 
do we not speak ? 
do yon not speak ? 
do they not speak? 



teas Inofr) *=. 
wast thou not \ 
was he not j -5 
ioere toe not [ 
were you not j S 
were they not) 



Ne parlais-je pas? 
Ne parlais-tu pas ? 
Ne parlait-il pas? 
Ne parlions-nons p-.$? 
Ne parlicz-vous pad .' 
Ne parlaient-ils pas ? 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Ne parlai-je pas ? did I not speak ? 

Ne parlas-tn pas ? (ZM^r tt-rw not speak ? 
Ne parlait-il pas ? d/cZ «o£ speak ? 

Ne parlatnes-nous pas ? we ?;o£ speak f 

Ne parlates-vous pas? you not speak? 

Ne paiierent-ils p is ? did they not speak ? 

FUTURE. 

Ne parlerai-je pas ? sforfi / ??<?i speak ? 

Ne parleras tu pas ? ^Aam speak ? 

Ne parlera-t-il pas? he not speak ? 

Ne parlerons-nous pas? shall wa not speak? 
Ne paiierez-vous pas ? will you not speak ? 
Ne parleront-ils pas? will they notspjeak ? 

CONDITIONAL. 

Ne parlerais-je pas? should I 

Ne parlerais-tu pas ? 
Ne parlerait-il pas? 
Ne parlerions-nous pas 
Ne parleriez-vous pas ? 
Ne parleront-ils pas ? 



would st thou I 
would he 
should we j* 
would you 
would they J 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

N'ai-je pas parle ? have I not spoken ? 

N'as-tu pas parle ? hast thou not spoken ? 
N'a-t-il pas parle ? has he not spoken ? 

| Navons-nous pas parle? have we not spoken? 
Navez-vous pas parle ? ha ve you not spoken ? 
N'ont-ils pas parle ? have they not spoken ? 

PLUPERFECT. 

Navais-je pas parle ? had I not spoken ? 
N'avais-tu pas parle ? hadst thou not spoken ? 
N'avait-il pas parle ? had he not spoken ? 
N'avions-nous pas parle ? had we not spoken ? 
N'aviez-vous pas parle ? had you not .spoken ? 
N'avaient-ils pas parle ? had they not spoken ? 

PAST ANTEEIOE. 

N'eus-je pas parle ? had I not spoken ? 

N'eus-tu pas parle? hadst thou not spoken ? 
Neut-il pus parle ? had he not spoken ? 
Neumes-nouspas parle ? had we not spoken ? 
N'cutes-vous pas parle ? had you not spoken ? 
Neurent-ils pas parle? had they not spoken ? 

FUTURE PEEFECT. 

N'aurai-je pas parle? shall I not~\ 'g 

N'auras-tu pas parle? wilt thou not ^ 

N"aura-t-il pas parle ? will he not I 

N'aurons-nous pas parle ? sliall we not j ** 

N'aurons-vous pas parle? will you not ] | 

N'aurout-ils pas parle ? will they not J .5 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

N'aurals-je pas parle ? should I not") 

N'aurais-tu pas parle? wouldst thou not ^ 
N'aurait-il pas parle ? would he not I 5 
N'aurions-nous pas parle? should we not j W 
N'auricz-vons pas parle? would you not I » 
Naiuaient-ils pas parle ? would they not J .3 



486 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



SECOND CONJUGATION— in IE. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Finir, 

Finissant, 
Fini, 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



to finish. | Avoir fini, 
PARTICIPLES. 



finishing, 
fin ished. 



Ayant fini, 



to have finished. 



ha ving fin ished. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit. 

Nous finissons, 
Vous finissez, 
lis finissent, 

Je finissais, 
Tu finissais, 
II finissait, 
Nous finissions, 
Vous finissicz, 
lis linissaient, 



I finish, 
thou finishest. 
he finishes, 
we finish, 
you fi n ish. 
they finish. 



IMPERFECT. 



Je finis, 
Tu finis, 
II finit. 

Nous finimes, 
Vous finites, 
lis finirent, 

Je finirai, 
Tu liniras, 
11 finira, 
Nous finirons, 
Yous finirez, 
lis fiuiront, 



I was finishing, 
thou wast finishing, 
he was finishing, 
we were finishing, 
you were finishing, 
they were finishing. 

PAST DEFINITE. 

I finished, 
thou fin ishedst. 
he fin ished. 
we finished, 
you finished, 
they finished. 

FUTURE. 

I shall finish, 
thou wiltfinish. 

he will finish, 
we shall finish, 
you will finish, 
they xoill finish. 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je finirais, 
Tu finirais, 
II finirait, 
Nous finirions, 
Vous finiriez, 
lis finiraient, 



Finis, 

Qu'il finisse, 
Finissons, 



I should finish, 
thou tcouldst finish, 
he icould finish, 
we shou ld fin ish, 
you would finish, 
they would finish. 



J'ai fini, 
Tu as fini, 
II a fini, 
Nous avons fini 
Vous avez fini, 
lis ont fini, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

I have^ 
thou hastfinished. 
lie has finished, 
we have finished, 
you have finished, 
they have finished. 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had finished, 
thou hadst finished, 
he had finished,, 
we had finished, 
you had finished. 



J'avais fini, 
Tu avais fini, 
II avait fini, 
Nous avions fini, 
Vous aviez fini, 

lis avaient fini, they had finished. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus fini, J had 'finished '. 

Tu eus fini, thou hadst finished. 

II eut fini, hehad finished. 

Nous eianes fini, we had finished. 

Vous eutes fini, you had finished. 

lis eurent fini, they had finished. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

J'aurai fini, I shall have finished. 

Tu auras fini, thou wilt have finished. 

II aura fini, he will have finished. 

Nous aurons fini, we shall have finished. 

Vous aurons fini, you will have finished. 

lis auront fini, they will have finished. 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais fini, J should, have finished. 
Tu aurais fini, thou wouldst have finished. 

II aurait fini, he would ha re fin i.\it ed. 
Nous aurions fini, we should have finished. 

Vous auriez fini, you would havefinis7ied. 

lis auraient fini, they would have finished. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD 

finish {thou). Finissez 
let him finish, 
let us finish. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Qu'ils finissent, 



finish (you), 
let them finish. 



Que je finisse, 
Que tu finisses, 
Qu*il finisse, 
Que nous finissions, 
Que vous finissiez, 



PRESENT. 

that I may finish, 
that thou may est finish, 
that he may finish, 
that we may finish, 
that you may finish. 
Qu'ils finissent, that they may finish. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je finisse, that I might fin ish. 

Que tu finisses, that thou mightest finish. 
Qu'il finit, that he might finish. 

Que nous finissions, that we might finish. 
Que vous finissiez, that you might finish. 
Qu'ils finissent, that they might finish. 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aie fini, that I may 

Que 'tu aies fini, that thou may est 

Qu'il ait fini, that he may 

Que nous ayons fini, that we may 

Que vous ayez fini, that you may 

Qu'ils aient fini, that they may 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse fini, that I might 

Que tu eusses fini, that thou mightest 
Qu'il eut fini, that he might 

Que nous eussions fini, that we might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent fini, that they might 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



487 



THIRD CONJUGATION— in OIR. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Eecevoir, 

Eecevant, 
Eegu, 



Je regois, 
Tu regois, 
II regoit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
lis regoivent, 

Je rccevais, 
Tu recevais, 
II recevait, 
Nous rccevions, 
Vous receviez, 
lis recevaient, 



to receive. \ Avoir regu, 
PARTICIPLES. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



receiving, 
received. 



Ayaut regu, 



to have received. 



having received. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



I receive, 
thou receive at. 
he receives, 
zve receive, 
you receive, 
they receive. 



tMPBRFECT. 



I was receiving, 
thou wast receiving, 
he was receiving, 
we were receiving, 
you xvere receiving, 
they were receiving. 



PAST DEFINITE. 



Je regus, 
Tu regus, 
II re cut, 
Nous rccumcs, 
Vous regutes, 
Us regurent, 

Je rccevrai, 
Tu recevras, 
II recevra, 
Nous recevrons, 
Vous recevrez, 
Us recevront, 



I received, 
thou received at. 
Jie received, 
we received, 
you received, 
they received. 



FUTURE. 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recovrais, 
U recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Vous recevricz, 
Us recevraient, 



Eegois, 
Qu'il regoivc, 
Eecevous, 



I shall receive, 
thou wilt receive. 

he will receive, 
we shall receive, 
you will receive, 
they will receive. 

CONDITIONAL. 

J should receive, 
thou wouldst receive, 
he tooufd receive, 
we should receive, 
you would receive, 
they 'would receive. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

J'ai regu, I have 

Tu as regu, thou hast 

U -i regu, he has 

Nous avons regu, we have 

Vous avez regu, you have 



Us out regu, 

J'avais regu, 
Tu avais regu, 
U avait regu, 
Nous avioQS regu, 
Vous avicz regu, 
Us avaient regu, 



they ha ve 

PLUPERFECT. 

I had 
thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had, 



PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus recu, Iliad 

Tu eus regu, thou hadst 

11 eut regu, he had 

Nous eumes regu, we had 

Vous eutes regu, you had 

Us eureut regu, they had 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

J'aurai regu, I shall have 

Tu auras regu, ihou wilt have 

II aura regu, he tcill have 

Nous aurons regu, we shall have 

Vous aurez regu, you, will have 

lis auront regu, they will ha ve 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais regu, I should have 

Tu aurais regu, thou icouldst have 
11 aurait regu, he would have 

j Nous aurions regu, zve should have 
Vous auriez regu, you would have 

I Us auraient recu, they would have 



received,, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

rece-ived. 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 

received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received, 
received. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

receive (thou), j Eecevez, 
let him receive. \ Qu'ils regoivent, 
let us receive, j 



receive (yen), 
let the in receive. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

Que je regoi ve, that I may 

Que tu regoives, that thou may est 
Qu'il regoive, thathemay 
Que nous recevions, that we may 
Que VOUS receviez, that you may 
Qu'ils regoivent, that they may 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je regusse, that I might 

Que tu regusses, that thou mighiest 
Qu'il regut, that he might 

Que nous regussions, that we might 
Que vous regussiez, that you might 
Qu'ils regussent, that they might 



receive, 
receiv. 
receive, 
receive, 
receive, 
receive. 



receive, 
receive, 
receive, 
receive, 
receive, 
receive. 



TERFECT. 

Que j'aio regu, that I may] 

Que tu aics regu, that thou mayest j 

Qu'il ait regu, that he may [ 

Que nous avons regu, that ice may i 

Que vous ayez recu, that you may 

Qu'ils aient regu, ' that they may J 

PLUPERFECT, 

Que feusse regu, that I might] 

Que tu eusses regu, that thou mightest 
Qu'il eut regu, that he might 

Que nous eussions regu, that ice mil 
Que vous eussiez regu, that you mi 
Qu'ils eussent regu, that they mi{ 



ight I 
ight \ 
ight 
ight J 



488 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION— in EE. 



Vcndrc, 

Yendant, 
Vcndu, 



Je vends, 
Tu vends, 
II vend. 
Nous vendons, 
Yous vendez, 
lis vendent, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

to sell. | Avoir vendu, 
PAKTICIPLES. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



selling, 
sold. 



Ayant vendu, 



to have sold. 



having sold. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



I sett, 
thou sellest. 
he sells, 
we sell, 
you sell, 
they sell. 



IMPERFECT. 



Je vendais, 
Tu vendais, 
II vendait, 
Nous vendions, 
Vous vendiez, 
Us vendaient, 

PAST DEFINITE, 

Je vendis, 
Tu vendis, 
U vendit, 
Nous vendimes, 
Vous vendites, 
Us vendirent, 

FUTURE. 

Je vendrai, 
Tu vendras, 
II vendra, 
Nous vendrons, 
Vous vendrez, 
Us vend rout, 



I teas selling, 
thou toast selling, 
he was selling, 
we were selling, 
you were selling, 
they were selling. 



Isold, 
thoiv soldest. 
he sold, 
we sold, 
you sold, 
they sold. 

I shall sell, 
thou wilt sell. 

he will sell, 
we shall sell, 
you to ill sell, 
they to ill sell. 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je vendrais, 
Tu vendrais, 
U vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
Us vendraient, 



Vends, 
Qu'il vende, 
Vendons, 



I should sell, 
thou wouldst sell, 
he would sell, 
we should sell, 
you would sell, 
they would sell. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



J'ai vendu, 
Tu as vendu, 
II a vendu, 
Nous avons vendu, 
Vous avez vendu, 
Us ont vendu, 

PLUPERFECT 

J'avais vendu, 
Tu avais vendu, 
II avait vendu, 
Nous avions vendu, 
Vous aviez vendu, 
Us avaient vendu, 



I have sold, 
thou hast sold, 
he has sold, 
we have sold, 
you have sold, 
they have sold. 



I had sold, 
thou hadst sold, 
he had sold, 
we had sold, 
you had sold, 
they had sold. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus vendu, I had sold. 

Tu eus vendu, thou hadst sold. 

11 eut vendu, he had sold. 

Nous eumes vendu, we had sold. 

Vous eutes vendu, you had sold. 

lis eurent vendu, they had sold. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 



J'aurai vendu, 
Tu auras vendu, 
II aura vendu, 
Nous aurons vendu, 
Vous aurez vendu, 
Us auront vendu, 



I shall have sold, 
thou wilt have sold. 

he will have sold, 
we shall have sold, 
you will have sold, 
they will have sold. 



PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais vendu, I should have sold. 

Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldst have sold. 
II aurait vendu, he would have sold. 

Nous aurions vendu, we should have sold. 
Vous auriez vendu, you woidd have sold. 
I Us auraient vendu, they would have sold. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Vendez, 



sell (thou), 
let Mm sell, 
let tis sell, 



Qu'ils vendent, 



sell (you), 
let them sell. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je vende, that I may sell. 

Que tu vendes, that thou mayest sell. 

Qu'il vende, that he may sell. 

Que nous vendions, that toe may sell. 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell. 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell, 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je vendisse, that I might sell. 

Que 'tu vendisses, that thou miglitest sell. 
Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. 

Que nous vendissions, that we m ight sell. 
Que vous vendissiez, that you might sell. 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might sell. 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aie vendu, that 1 may~\ 

Que tu aics vendu, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may I 

Que nous ayons vendu, that we may [ 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you may 
Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may J 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that I mights 

Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightest \ 
Qu'il eut vendu, that he might i 

Que nous eussions vendu, that we might [ 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might) 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



489 



CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTED VERB. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Se lever, 

Se levant, 
Leve, 



to rise. I S'otre lev 
PARTICIPLES. 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



mstng. 
risen. 



S'etant leve, 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je me lore, 


I rise. 


Tu te leves, 


tlwu risest. 


11 se leve, 


he rises. 


Nous nous levons, 


we rise. 


Vous voi:s levez, 


you rise. 


lis se levent, 


tKey rise. 


IMPERFECT. 


Je me levais, 


I was rising. 


Tu te levais, 


thou xcast rising. 


11 se levait, 


he was rising. 


Nous nous levions, 


we were rising. 


Vous vous leviez, 


you- were rising. 


Us se levaient, 


they were rising. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


Je me levai, 


I rose. 


Tu te levas, 


thou rosest. 


U se leva, 


he rose. 


Nous nous levames, 


we rose. 


Vous vous levates, 


you rose. 


lis se leverent, 


they rose. 


FUTURE. 


Je me leverai, 


I shall rise. 


Tu te leveras, 


thou wilt rise. 


11 se levera, 


' he will rise. 


Nous nous leverons, 


we shall rise. 


Vous vous leverez, 


you will rise. 


lis se lcveront, 


they will rise. 


CONDITIONAL. 


Je me leverais, 


I should rise. 


Tu te leverais, 


thou wouldst rise. 


11 se leverai t, 


he tcould rise. 


Nous nous leverions, 


we should rise. 


Vous vous leveriez, 


you would rise. 


Us se leveraient, 


they would rise. 



PAS' 

Je me suis leve, 
Tu t'esleve, 
II s'est leve, 

Nous nous sommcs leves, 
Vous vous Gtes leves, 
Us se sont leves, 



to have risen. 



having risen. 



INDEFINITE. 

I have risen, 
thou hast risen, 
he has risen, 
we ha ve risen, 
you have risen, 
they have risen. 

PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais leve, 

Tu t'ctais leve, 

U s'etait leve, 

Nous nous etions leves, 

Vous vous etiez leves, 

Us s'etaient leves, 



I had risen, 
thou hadst risen, 
he had risen, 
we had risen, 
you had rvien. 
they had risen. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je me fus leve, 

Tu te fus leve, 

II se fut leve, 

Nous nous fumes leves, 

Vous vous futes leves, 

Us se furent leves, 



I had risen, 
thou hadst risen, 
he had risen, 
toe had risen, 
you had risen, 
they had risen. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Je me serai leve, I shall have risen. 

Tu te seras leve, thou wilt have risen. 

II se sera leve, he tcill have risen. 

Nous nous serons leves, we shall have risen. 
Vous vous serez leves, you will have risen. 
Us se seront leves, they will have rise?i. 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

Je me serais leve, 

Tu te serais leve, 

II se serai t leve, 
i Nous nous serions leves, 
| Vous vous seriez leves, 
| Us se seraient leves, 



IshouldA s - 
thou would st S 
he would I "g 



we s/iould 



you would i 
they would j ^ 



Leve-toi, 
Qu'il se leve, 
Levons-nous, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Levez-vous, 
Qu'ils se 16vcnt, 



rise (thou) 
let him rise 
let us rise 



rise {you), 
let them rise. 



PRESENT. 

Que je me love, that I may rise. 

Que tu te leves, that thou may est rise. 
Qu'il se leve, that he may rise. 

Que nous nous levions, that we may rise. 
Que vous vous leviez, that you may rise. 
Qu'ils se levent, that they may rise. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je me levasse, that I might rise. 

Que tu te levasses, that thou mightest rise. 
Qu'il se levftt, that he might rise. 

Que nous nous lcvassions, that we might rise. 
Que vous vous levassiez, that you might rise. 
Qu'ils se levassent, that they might rise. 

21* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PERFECT. 

Que je me sois leve, that 7") 

Que tu te sois leve, that thou \ 

Qu'il se soit leve, r that he I. 

Que nous nous soyons leves, that we I 

Que vous vous soyez leves, that you 

Qu'ils se soient leves, that they J 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que je me fusse leve, that 7] 

Que tu te fusses leve, that thou \ 

Qu'il se fiit leve, that he {• 

Que nous nous fussions leves, that we f ■ 
Que vous vous fussiez leves, that you • 
Qu'ils se fussent leves, tha t they J 



490 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



CONJUGATION OF ARRIVER, TO ARRIVE, ETRE AUXILIARY. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PAST. 



Arriver, 



Arrivant, 
Arrive, 



PRESENT. 
PAST. 



to arrive. J £tre arrive, 

PARTICIPLES. 

arriving. 

£tant arrive, 

arrived. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PAST. 



to have arrived. 



having arrived. 



J'arrive, 


/ arrive. 


Tu arrives, 


thou arrivest. 


11 arrive, 


he arrives. 


Nous arrivons, 


we arrive. 


Vous arrivez, 


you arrive. 


lis arrivent, 


they arrive. 


IMPERFECT. 


J'arrivais, 


I arrived. 


Tu arrivals, 


thou arrivedst. 


11 arrivait, 


he arrived. 


Nous arrivions, 


we arrived. 


Yous arriviez, 


you arrived. 


lis arrivaient, 


they arrived. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


J'arrivai, 


I arrived. 


Tu arrivas, 


thou arrivedst. 


11 arriva, 


he arrived. 


Nous arrivames, 


we arrived. 


Yous arrivates, 


you arrived. 


lis arriverent, 


they arrived. 




FUTURE. 


J'arriverai, 


I shall arrive. 


Tu arriveras, 


thou wilt arrive. 


11 arrivera, 


he will arrive. 


Nous arriverons, 


we shall arrive. 


Vous arriverez, 


you will arrive. 


lis arriveront, 


they will arrive. 


CONDITIONAL. 


J'arriverais, 


I should arrive. 


Tu arriverais, 


thou wouldst arrive. 


11 arriverait, 


he would arrive. 


Nous arriverions, 


we should arrive. 


Yous arriveriez, 


you would arrive. 


lis arriveraient, 


they would arrive. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je suis arrive, 
Tu es arrive, 
II est arrive, 
Nous sommes arrives, 
Yous etes arrives, 
lis sont arrives, 



I have 
thou hast 
he has 
we have 
you have 
they have 

PLXTPEEFECT. 



J'etais arrive, 
Tu etais arrive, 
II etait arrive, 
Nous etions arrives, 
Vous etiez arrives, 
lis etaient arrives, 



lhad 
thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had 
they had 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je fus arrive, 
Tu fas arrive, 
II fat arrive, 
Nous fumes arrives, 
Vous futes arrives, 
lis furent arrives, 



lhad 
thou hadst 
he had 
we had 
you had, 
they had 



FUTURE PERFECT. 



Je serai arrive, 
Tu seras arrive, 
II sera arrive, 
Nous serons arrives 
Vous serez arrives, 
lis seront arrives, 



I sJiall have 
thou wilt have 
he will have 
we shall have 
you will have 
they xcill have 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

Je serais arrive, / should have 
Tu serais arrive, thou wouldst have 
II serait arrive, he would have 
Nous serions arrives, rce should have 
Vous seriez arrives, you would have 
lis sentient arrives, they would have 



arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived. 

arrived, 
arrived-, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived. 

arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived. 

arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived. 

arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived, 
arrived. 



Arrive, 
Qu'il arrive, 
Arrivons, ■ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

arrive {thou). \ Arrivez, 
let him arrive. Qu'ils arrivent, 
let us arrive. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



arrive (you), 
let them arrive. 



PRESENT. 

Que j'arrive, that I may arrive. 

Que tu arrives, that thou mayest arrive. 
Qu'il arrive, that he may arrive. 

Que nous arrivions, that we may arrive. 
Quo vous arriviez, that you may arrive. 
Qu'ils arrivent, that they may arrive. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que j'arrivasae, that I might arrive. 

Que tu arrivasses, that thou mightest arrive. 
Qu'il arrivat, that he might arrive. 

Que nous arrivassions, that we migh t arrive. 
Quo vous arrivassiez, that you might arrive. 
Qu'ils arrivassent, that they might arrive. 



PERFECT. 

Que je sois arrive. that I may 1 

Que tu sois arrive, that thou mayest \ 
Qu'il soit arrive, that he may \ 

Que nous soyons arrives, that ice m.ay X 
Que vous soyez arrives, that you may | 
Qu'ils soient arrives, that they may J 

PLUPERFECT 

Que je fusse arrive, that I migh t ~\ 

Que tu fusses arrive, that thou mightest ! 
Qu'il fut arrive, that he might \ 

Que nous fussions arrives, that we might X 
Que vous fussiez arrives, that you might 
Qu'ils fussent arrives, that they might J 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



491 



£tre aime, . 

£tant aime, 
£te aime, 



CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
PRESENT. PAST. 

to be loved. | Avoir etc aim6, to have been loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 



being loved, 
been loved. 



Ayant ete aime, 



having been loved. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je suis aime, 

Tu es aime, 

II est aime, 

Nous sommes aimes, 

Vous etes aimes, 

Us sont aimes, 



lam loved, 
thou art loved, 
he is loved, 
we are loved, 
you are loved, 
they are loved. 



IMPERFECT. 



J'etais aime, 
Tu etais aime, 
11 etait aime, 
Nous etions aimes 
Vous etiez aimes, 
Us etaient aimes. 



Je fus aim6, 
Tu fus aime, 
II fut aime, 
Nous fumes aimes, 
Vous futes aimes, 
Us furent aimes, 



I was loved, 
tlioic wast loved, 
he was loved, 
we were loved, 
you were loved, 
they were loved. 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Itvas loved, 
thou wast loved, 
he was loved, 
we were loved, 
you were loved, 
they were loved. 



FUTURE. 



Je serai aime, 
Tu seras aime, 
II sera aime, 
Nous serons aimes, 
Vous serez aimes, 
Us serout aimes, 



I shall be loved, 
thou tvilt be love:!. 

he roill be loved, 
we shall be loved, 
you ivill be loved, 
they will be loved. 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je serais aime, 
Tu serais aime, 
U serait aime, 
Nous serious aimes, 
Vous seriez aimes, ' 
lis seraient aimes, 



I should be loved, 
thou would st be loved, 
he would be loved, 
we should be loved, 
you would be loved, 
they would be loved. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



J'ai ete aime, 

Tu as ete aime, 

II a ete aime, 

Nous avons ete aimes, 

Vous avez ete aimes, 

Us ont ete aimes, 



I have been loved, 
thou, hast been loved. 

he has been loved, 
we have been loved, 
you have been loved, 
they have been loved. 



PLUPERFECT. 

J'avais ete aime, I had been loved. 

Tu avais ete aime, thou hadst been loved. 
U avait etc aime, he had been loved. 

Nous avions etc aimes, we had been loved. 
Vous aviez ete aimes, you had been loved. 
lis avaient etc aimes, they had been loved. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

J'eus ete aime, I had been loved. 

Tu eus ete aime, thou hadst been loved. 
II eut ete aime, he had been loved. 

Nous eumes ete aimes, we had been loved. 
Vous eutes etc aimes, iiou had been loved. 
lis eurent ete aimes, they had been loved. 

FUTUEE PEKFECT. 

J*aurai ete aime, 
Tu auras ete aime, 
11 aura etc aime, 
Nous aurons ete aimes, 
Vous aurez ete aimes, 
lis auront etc aimes, 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

J'aurais ete aime, I should have") ^ 

Tu aurais ete aime, thou wouldst have g> 
U aurait ete aime, he would have I ^ 

Nous aurions ete aimes, we should have j ^ 
Vous auriez etc aimes, you would have \ § 
Us auraient ete aimes, they would have) ^ 



I shall have") ^ 
thou wilt have ^ 

he will have \^ 
we shall have | 
you will have \ % 
they will have J 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Sois aim6, 
Qu'il soit aim6, 
Soyons aimes, 



be (thorc) loved, 
let h im be loved 
let us be loved. 



Soyez aimes, 
Qu'ils soient aimes, 



be {you) loved, 
let them be loved. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

Que je sois aime, that I may be loved. 

Que tu sois aime, that thou mayest be loved. 
Qu'il soit aime, that he may be loved. 

Que nous soyous aimes, that we may be loved. 
Que vous soyez aimes, that you may be loved. 
Qu'ils soient aimes, that they may be loved. 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je fusse aime, that I mights 

Que tu fusses aime, that thou mightest 
Qu'il fut aime, that he might j | 

Que nous fussions aimes, that wemight fi§ 
Que vous fussiez aimes, that you might * 
Qu'ils fussent aimes, that they might J 



PERFECT. 

Que j'aie ete aime, that I may' 

Que tu aies ete aime, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete aime, that he may 

Que nous ayons ete aimes. that we may 
Que vous ayez ete aimes, that you may 
Qu'ils aicnt ete aimes, that they may j 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse etc aime, that P\ 

Que tu eusses ete aime, fliat thou \ 
Qu'il eut ete aime, that he 1 • 

Que nous eussions ete aimes^ that we f . 
Que vous eussiez ete aimes,. that you j • 
Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, that they) 



492 



CONJUGATION OF 



CONJUGATION OF 



FIRST 



Infinitive Participle 

presen t. present. 

Aller, Allant, 
to go. 



Envoyee, Envoyant, 
to send. 



Cotjrir, Cotirant, 
to run. 



Cueillie, Cueittant, 
to gather. 



Dormir, Dormant, 
to sleep. 



Fttir, Fuyant, 
to fly. 



Mentir, Mentant, 
to lie. 



Participle 

pant. 

Alle, 



Indicative 

present. 



Acquerir, Acquerant, Acquis, 
to acquire. 



Assaillir, Assailant, Assailli, 
to assail. 



Bouillir, Bouillant, Bouilli, 
to boil. 



Couru, 



Je vais, 
tu <vas, 
il va. 



nous allons, 
vous allez, 
Us vont, 



Indicative 

imperfect. 



J'allais. etc., 



Envoye, Jenvoie, nous envoyons, J'envoyais, etc., 
tu envoies, vous envoyez, 



il envoie, ils envoient, 



J'acquiers, nous acquerons, 
tu acquiers, vous acquires, 
il acquiert, ils acquierent, 

J^assaille, nous assaillons, 
tu assailles, vous assaillez, 
il assaille, ils assaillent, 



Je bous, 
tu bous, 
il bout, 

Je cours, 
tu cours, 
il court, 



nous bouillons, 
vous bouillez, 
ils bouillent, 

nous courons, 
vous courez, 
ils courent, 



Cueilli, Je cueille, nous cueillons, 

tu cueilles, vous cueillez, 

il cueille, Us cueillent, 

Dormi, Je dors, nous dormons, 

tu dors, vous dormez, 

il dort, ils dorment, 

Fui, Je fuis, nous fuyons, 

tu fuis, vousfuyez, 

il fuit, ilsfuient, 

Menti, Jemens, nous mentons, 

tu mens, vous mentez, 

il ment, ils mentent, 



SECOND 

J^acquerais,etc, 

Jassaillais, etc., 
Je bouillais, etc., 
Je courais, etc., 
Je cueillais, etc., 
Je dormais, etc., 
Jefuyais, etc., 
Je mentals, etc., 



* The third person of both numbers in the imperative 
** "We are obliged to suppress que from the subjunctive mood in all irregular verbs, for 
tations. 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

THE IEEEGITLAE VEEBS. 



493 



CONJUGATION. 



Past Future and 

definite. Conditional. 



J'allai, etc., 



JHrai, etc., 
tTirais, etc.. 



Imperative. 

Va, 
allons, 
allez * 



J'envoyai, etc., tTenverrai, etc., Envoie, 

J^enverrais, etc., envoyons, 
envoyez, 

CONJUGATION. 



Subjunctive 

present. 



<Taille** 
tu ailles, 
il aille, 

J'envoie, 
tu envoies, 
il cnvoie, 



nous allions, 
tous alliez, 
Us aillent, 

nous envoyions, 
vous envoyiez, 
ils envoient, 



Subjunctive 

imperfect. 

J'allasse, 
etc. 



J'envoyasse, 
etc. 



acquis, etc., J" a cquerrai, etc., Acquiers, J'acquiere, nous acquerions, <Tacquisse, 
Jacquerrais,etc, acquerons, tu acquieres, tous acqueriez, etc 
acquerez, il acquiere, ils acquierent, 



J'assaillis, etc., Assaillirai, etc., Assaille, 


J'assaille, 


nous assaillions, 


J'assaillisse, 


Assaillirais, etc., assaillons, 


tu assailles, 


tous assailliez, 


etc. 


assaillez, 


il assaille, 


ils assaillent, 




Jebouillis, etc., Jo bouillirai, etc., Bous, 


Je bouille, 


nous bouillions, 


Je bouillissc, 


Je bouillirais, etc., bouillons, 


tu oouilles, 


tous bouilliez, 


etc. 


bouillez, 


il bouille, 


ils bouillent, 




Je courus, etc., Je courrai, etc., Cours, 


Je coure, 


nous courions, 


Je courusse, 


Je courrais, etc., courons, 


tu coures, 


tous couriez, 


etc. 


courez, 


il coure, 


ils courent, 




Je cueillis, etc., Je cueillerai, etc., Cueille, 


Je cueille, 


nous cueillions, 


Je cueillisse, 


Je cueillerais,etc. cueillons, 


tu cueilles, 


tous cueilliez. 


etc. 


cueillez, 


il cueille, 


ils cueillent, 




Je dormis, etc., Je dormirai, etc., Dors, 


Je dorme, 


nous dormions, 


Je dormisse, 


Je dormirais, etc., dormons, 


tu dormes, 


tous dormiez, 


etc. 


dormez, 


il dorme, 


ils dorment, 




Je fuis, etc., Je fuirai, etc., Fuis, 


Je fuie, 


nousfuyions, 


Je fuisse, 


Je luirais, etc., fuyons, 


tu fides, 


tous fuyiez, 


etc 


fuyez, 


ilfuie, 


ils fuient, 




Je mentis, etc., Je mentirai, etc., Mens, 


Je mente, 


nous mentions, 


Je mentisse, 


Je mentirais, etc., mentons, 


tu mentes, 


tous mentiez, 


etc. 


mentez. 


il mente, 


ils mentent, 





is always the same as in the subjunctive. 

the sake of abbreviation ; but be it remembered that the scholar must not do so in his reci- 



494 



CONJUGATION OF 



Infinitive Participle 

present. present. 

Motjrik, Mourant, 
to die. 



Ouyeir, Ouvrant, 
to open. 



Venir, Venant, 
to come. 



Vetir, Vetant, 
to clothe. 



Asseoir, Asseyant* 
to seat. 



Dechoir, (wanting), 
to fall away. 



Mouvoir, Mouvant, 
to move. 



Pouvoir. Pouvant, 
to be able. 



Satoir, Sachant, 
to know. 



Valoir, Yalant, 
to be worth. 



Yoir, Voyant, 
to see. 



Vottloir, Voulant, 
to be willing. 



Participle 

past. 

Mort, 



Ouvert, 



Indicative 

present. 



Yenu, 



Vein, 



Dechu, 



Mu, 



Pu, 



Su, 



Valu, 



Vu, 



Voulu, 



Je meurs, 


nous mourons, 


tu meurs, 


nous mourez, 


il meurt, 


ils meurent, 


Jouvre, 


nous ouvrons, 


tit ouvres, 


vous ouvrez, 


il ouvre, 


ils oworent, 


Je mens, 


nous venons, 


tu viens, 


rous venez, 


il vient, 


ils viennent, 


Je vets, 


nous vetons, 


tu vets, 


vous vetez, 


il vet, 


ils vetent, 


J'assieds, 


notes asseyons, 


tu assieds, 


vous asseyez, 


il assied, 


ils asseient, 


Je dechois, 


nous dechoyons, 


tu dechois, 


vous dechoyez, 


il dechoit, 


ils dechoient, 


Je meus, 


notes mouvons, 


tu meus, 


vous mouvez, 


il meut, 


ils meuvent, 


Je puis, peux, nous pouvons, 


tu peux, 


vous pouvez, 


il peut, 


ils peuvent, 


Je sais, 


nous savons, 


tu sa is, 


vous savez, 


il sait, 


ils savent, 


Je vaux, 


nous valons, 


tu vaux, 


vous valez, 


il vaut, 


ils valent, 


Je vois, 


nous voyons, 


tu vois, 


vous voyez, 


il voit, 


ils voient, 


Je veux, 


nous voulons, 


tu veux, 


vous voulez, 


il veut, 


ils veulent, 



Indicative 

imperfect. 

Je mourais, etc., 



J^ouvrais, etc., 
Je venais, etc., 
Je vetais, etc., 

THIKD 

J'asseyais, etc., 

Je dechoyais,etc, 
Je mouvais, etc., 
Je pouvais, etc., 
Je savais, etc., 
Je valais, etc., 
Je voyais, etc., 
Je voulais, etc., 



* This verb is also conjugated by many (and the Academic) as follows: Assoyant. — 
J'assoirai and J^asseyrai, etc. J'assoirais and J'asseyrais, etc. Assois, assoyons, 
assoyiez, quHls asseient. 

t Also, Veux, quit veuille ; voulons, 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Past Future and T 

definite. Conditional. Imperative. 



495 



Subjunctive 

present. 



Jemourus,etc, Jemourrai, etc., Meurs, Jemeure, nous mouriom, 

Jemourrais, etc., mourons, tumeures, tous mouriez, ' 

mourez, il meure, Us meurent, 

J'ouvris, etc., JWmrai, etc., Ouvre, J'ouvre, nous ourrions, 

Jouvrirais, etc., ouvro?is, tu ouvres, tous ouvriez, 




ouvrez, il ouvre, Us ouvrent, 



Je Tins, etc., 



Je viendrai, etc., Viens, 
Je Tiendrais, etc., Tenons, 
Tenez, 



Je vienne, nous tenions, 
tu viennes, tons veniez, 
ilvienne, ils viennent, 



Je vetis, etc., Je vt-tirai, etc., Vets, 
Je vetirais, etc., vetons, 
vetez, 

CONJUGATION". 



Je rite, 
tu xetes, 
il vete. 



nous retions, 
tous vetiez, 
Us vetent, 



J^assis, etc., J'assierai, etc., Assieds, J^asseie, nous asseyions, 

J'assierais, etc., asseyons, tu asseies, vous asseyiez, 

asseyez, il asseie, Us asseient, 

Je dechus, etc.. Je decherrai, —., Dechois, Je dechoie, nous dechoyions, 

Jedecherrais, — ., dechoyons, tu dechoies, vous dechoyiez, 

dechoyez, il dechoie, Us dechoient, 

Jemus, etc., Je mouvrai, etc., Meus, Je meuve, nous mouvions, 

Je mouvrais, etc., mouvons, tn meuves, vous mouviez, 

mouvez. il meuve, ils meuvent, 

Jo pus, etc., Je pourrai, etc., (wanting), Jepuisse, nous puissions, 

Je pourrais, etc., " tupuisses, tous puissies, 

" il puisse, Us p u issent, 

Je sus, etc., Je saurai, etc., Sache, Je sacTie, nous sachions, 

Je saurais, etc., sachons, tu saches, vous sachiez, 

sachez, il sache, ils sachent, 

Je valus, etc., Je vaudrai, etc., Vaux, Je vaille, nous valions, 

Je vaudrais, etc., Talons, tu Tallies, vous valiez, 

valez, il Taille, ils Taillent, 

JeTis,etc , Je Terrai, etc., Vois, Je voie, nous Toyions, 

Je Terrais, etc., Toyons, tu votes, tous Toyiez, 

Toyez, il voie, ils voient, 

Je voulus, etc., Je voudrai, etc., VeuillSl Je veuille$ nous voulions, 

Je voudrais, etc., Teuillons, tit Teuilles, vous vouliez, 

Teuillez, il Teuille, ils Teuillent, 



J'ouvrisse, 
etc. 



Je Tii 
etc. 



Je vC'tisse, 
etc. 



J'assisse, 
etc. 



Je dechusse, 
etc. 



Je musse, 
etc. 



Je pusse, 
etc. 



Je susse, 
etc. 



Je Talusse, 
etc. 



Je Tisse, 
etc. 



Je vouhme, 
etc. 



J'assois, tu assois, il assoif, nous assoyons, vous assoyez, ils assoient. J^assoyais, etc. — 
assoyez, etc. Que fassoie, que tu assoies, qu'il assoie, que nous assoyions, que vous 



voulez, qu'ils veuillent. 



496 



CONJUGATION OF 



FOURTH 



Infinitive Participle Participle 

present. present. past. 

Battre, Battant, Battu, 
to beat. 



Indicative 

present. 



Je bats, 
tu bats, 
il bat. 



nous battons, 
vous battez, 
ils battent, 



Indicative 

imperfect. 



Je battais, etc.. 



Boire, Buvant, 
to drink. 



Bu, 



Je bois, 
tu bois, 
il bo it, 



nous buvons, 
vous buvez, 
ils boivent, 



Je buvais, etc., 



Conclure, Concluant, 
to conclude. 



CotiDRE, Cousant, 
to sew. 



Conclu, Je conclus, nous concluons, 

tu conclus, vous concluez, 

il conclut, ils concluent, 

Cousu, Je couds, nous cousons, 

tu couds, do us cousez. 



Je concluais, 
nous concluions, 
vous concluiez, 
etc., 

Je cousais, etc., 



il coud, 



ils consent. 



Croire, Croyant, 
to believe. 



Cru, 



Je crois, 
tu crois, 
il croit, 



nous croyons, 
vous croyez, 
ils croient, 



Je croyais, 
nous croyions, 
vous croyiez, etc., 



Ceoitre, Croissant, 
to grow. 



Cru, 



Je crois, 
tu crois, 
il croit, 



nous crotssons, 
vous croisses, 
ils croissent, 



Je croissais, etc.. 



Ctjire, 
to cook. 



Cuisant, 



Cuit, 



Je cuis, 
tu cuis, 
il cuit, 



nous cmsons, 
vous cuisez, 
ils cuisent, 



Je cuisais, etc., 



Dire, Disant, 
to say. 



Dit. 



Je dis, 
tu dis, 
il dit, 



nous disons, 
vous dites, 
ils disent. 



Je disais, etc., 



iScRiRE, iScrivant, 
to -write. 



£crit, 



J'ecris, 
tu ecris, 
il ecrit, 



nous ecnvons, 
vous ecrivez, 
ils ecrivent, 



J'ecrivais, etc., 



Faire, Faisant, 
to make. 



Fait, 



Je fais, 
tu fais, 
il fait, 



nous faisons, 
vous faites, 
ils font, 



Je faisais, etc., 



Joindre, Joignant, 
to join. 



Joint, 



Je joins, 
tu joins, 
il joint, 



nous joignons, 
vous joignez, 
ils joignent, 



Je joignais, etc., 



Lire, 
to read. 



Lisant, 



Lu, 



Je lis, 
tu lis, 
il lit, 



nous lisons, 
vous lisez, 
ils lisent, 



Je lisais, etc. 



Mettre, Mettant, 
to put. 



Mis, 



Je mets, 
tu mets, 
il met, 



nous mettons, 
vous mettez, 
ils mettent, 



Je mettais, etc., 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



497 



CONJUGATION. 



Past 

definite. 



Future and 
Conditional. 



Imperative. 



Subjunctive 

present. 



Bub juj k ci ' ivi 

imperfect. 



Je battis, etc., 


f * x 

Je battrai, etc., 
Je battrais, etc., 


Bats, 

battons, 

battez, 


Je batte, 
tu battes, 
il batte, 


nous battions, 
vous battiez, 
ils battent, 


Je battisse, 
etc. 


Je bzis, etc.._ 


Je boirai, etc., 
Jc boirais, etc., 


Bo is, 

btivons, 

buvez, 


Je boire, 
tu boives, 
il boive, 


nous btivions, 
vous buviez, 
ils boivent, 


Je busse, 
etc. 


Je conclus, etc., Je conclurai, etc., 
Je conclurais, etc. 


Conclus, 

concluons, 

concluez, 


Je conclue, 
tu conclues, 
il conclue, 


nous concliuoBS, 
vous conclui'cz, 
ils conclucnt, 


Jeconclusse, 
etc. 


Je cousis, etc., 


Je coudrai, etc., 
Je coudrais, etc., 


Couds, 

coiisons, 

cousez, 


Je couse, 
tu couses, 
il couse, 


nous cousions, 
vous cousiez, 
ils cousent, 


Jc cousisse, 
etc. 


Je cms, etc., 


Je croirai, etc., 
Je croirais, etc., 


Crois, 

croyons, 

croyez, 


Je croie, 
tu croies, 
il croie, 


nous croyions, 
voxis croyiez, 
ils croient, 


Je cntsse, 
etc. 


Je crus, etc., 


Je croitrai, etc., 
Je croitrais, etc,, 


Crois, 

croissons, 

croissez, 


Je croisse, 
tu croisses, 
il croisse, 


nous croissions, 
vous croissiez, 
ils croissent, 


Je crusse, 
etc. 


Je cuisis, etc., 


Jo cuirai, etc., 
Je cuirais, etc., 


Cuis, 

cnisons, 

cuisez, 


Je cuise, 
tu cuises, 
il cuise, 


nous cuisions, 
vous cuisiez, 
ils cuisent, 


Je cuisisso, 
etc. 


Je dis, etc., 


Je dirai, etc., 
Je dirais, etc., 


Dis, 

disons, 

dites, 


Je dise, 
tu discs, 
il dise, 


nous disions, 
vous disiez, 
ils disent, 


Je disse, 
etc. 


J'ecrivis, etc., 


J'6crirai, etc., 
J'ecrirais, etc., 


£eris, 

ocrivons, 

ccrivez, 


J'ecrive, 
tu ecrives, 
il ecrive, 


nous ecrivions, 
vous ecrivioz, 
ils ecrivent, 


J'ecrivisse, 
etc. 


Je fis, etc., 


Je ferai, etc., 
Je ferais, etc., 


Fais, 

faisons, 

faites, 


Je fasse, 
tu fasses, 
il fasse, 


nous fassions, 
vous fassiez, 
ils fassent, 


Je fisse, 
etc. 


Jc joignis, etc. 


Jejoindrai, etc., 
Je joindrais, etc. 


Joins, 

joignons, 

joignez, 


Je joigne, 
tu joignes, 
il joigne, 


nous joignions, 
vous joigniez, 
ils joignent, 


Je joignisso, 
etc. 


Je lus, etc., 


Je lirai, etc., 
Je lirais, etc., 


Lis, 

lisons, 

lisez, 


Je Use, 
tu liscs, 
il lise, 


nous lisions, 
vous lisicz, 
ils lisent, 


Je lusse, 
etc. 


Je mis, etc., 


Je mettrai, etc., 
Je rnettrais, etc., 


Mets, 

mettons, 

mettez, 


Jo mette, 
tu mettes, 
il mette, 


nous mettions, 
vous mettiez, 
ils mettcnt, 


Je misse, 
etc. 



498 



CONJUGATION OF 



Infinitive Participle 

present. present. 



Participle 

past. 



Indicative 

present. 



Indicative 

imperfect. 



Moudre, 
to grind. 


Moulant, 


Moulu, 


Je mouds, 
tu mouds, 
il moud, 


nous moulons, 
vous moulez, 
ils moulent, 


Naitre, 
to be born. 


Naissant, 


N6, 


Je nais, 
tu nais, 
il nait, 


nous naissons, 
vous naissez, 
ils naissent, 


Paraitre. 


Paraissant, 


Paru, 


Je parais, 
tu parais, 
il parait, 


nous paraissons, 
vous paraissez, 
ils paraissent, 


Plaire, 
to please. 


Plaisant, 


Pin, 


Je plais, 
tu plais, 
il plait, 


nous plaisons, 
vous plaisez, 
ils plaisent, 


Prendre, 
to take. 


Prenant, 


Pris, 


Je prends, 
tn prends, 
il prend, 


nous prenons, 
vous prenez, 
ils prennent, 


Eesoudre, 
to resolve. 


Eesolvant, 


Ecsous 
and 
Eesolu, 


Je resous, 
tu resous, 
il resout, 


nous resolvons, 
vous resolvez, 
ils resolvent, 


Eire, 
to laugh. 


Eiant, 


Ei, 


Je ris, 
tu ris, 
il rit, 


nous rions, 
vous riez, 
ils rient, 


EOMPRE, 

to break. 


Eompant, 


Eompu, 


Je romps, 
tu romps, 
il rompt, 


nous rompons, 
vous rompez, 
ils rompent, 


Suivre, 
to follow. 


Suivant, 


Suivi, 


Je suis, 
tu suis, 
il suit, 


nous suivons, 
vous suivez, 
ils suivent, 


Traire, 
to milk. 


Trayant, 


Trait, 


Je trais, 
tu trais, 
il trait, 


nous travons, 
vous trayez, 
ils traient, 


Yaincre, Yainquant, 
to vanquish, 


Yaincu, 


Je vaincs, 
tu vaincs, 
il vainc, 


nous vainquons, 
vous vainquez, 
ils vainquent, 


YlVRE, 

to live. 


Yivant, 


Yecu, 


Je vis, 
tu vis, 
il vit, 


nous vivons, 
vous vivez, 
ils vivent, 



Je moulais, etc., 



Je naissais, etc., 



Je paraissais, etc., 



Je plaisais, etc., 



Je prenai?, etc. 



Je rdsolvais, etc., 



Je riais, etc., 



Je rompais, etc., 



Je suivais, etc., 



Je trayais, etc., 



Je vivais, etc. 



THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 



499 



Past Future and t_ t ^_,„ attvp Subjunctive BuBJUNOTrvB 

definite. Conditional, imperative, present. imperject. 



Je moulus, 


Je moudrai, etc., 
Je moudrais, etc., 


Mouds, 

moulons, 

moulez, 


Je moule, 
tu moules, 
il moule, 


nous moulions, 
vous mouliez, 
ils moulent, 


Jemoulusse, 
etc. 


Je naquis, etc., 


Je naitrai, etc., 
Je naitrais, etc., 


Nais, 

naissons, 

naissez, 


Je naisse, 
tu naisses, 
il naisse, 


nous naissions, 
vous naissiez, 
ils naissent, 


Jo naquisse, 
etc. 


Je parus, etc., 


Tarnitrai, 
Paraitrais, 


Parais, 

paraissons, 

paraissez, 


Je paraisse, 
tu paraisses, 
il paraisse, 


Nous paraissions, 
vous paraisslez, 
ils paraissent, 


Je parusse, 
etc. 


Je plus, etc., 


Je plairai, etc., 
Je plairais, etc., 


Plais, 

plaisons, 

plaisez, 


Je plaise, 
tu plaises, 
il plaise, 


nous plaisions, 
vous plaisiez, 
ils plaisent, 


Je plusse, 
etc. 


Je pris, etc., 


Je prendrai, etc., 
Je prendrais, etc., 


Prends, 
prenons, 
prenez, 


Je prenne, 
tu prennes, 
il prenne, 


nous prenions, 
vous preniez, 
ils prennent, 


Je prisse, 
etc. 


Je rcsolus, etc., Je resoudrai, etc., 
Je resoudrais, etc. 


Eesous, 

resolvons, 

rcsolvez, 


Je resolve, 
tu resolves, 
il resolve, 


nous resolvions, 
vous resolviez, 
ils resolvent, 


Je rcsolusso, 
etc. 


Je ris, etc., 


Je rirai, etc., 
Je rirais, etc., 


Eis, 

rions, 

riez, 


Je rie, 
tu ries, 
il rie, 


nous riions, 
vous riiez, 
ils rient, 


Je risse, 
etc. 


Je rompis, etc., Je romprai, etc., 
Je romprais, etc., 


Romps, 

rompons, 

rompez, 


Je rompe, 
tu rompes, 
il rompe, 


nous rompions, 
vous rompiez, 
* ils rompent, 


Je rompisso, 
etc. 


Je suivis, etc., 


Je suivrai, etc., 
Je suivrais, etc., 


Suis, 

suivons, 

suivez, 


Je suive, 
tu suives, 
il suive, 


nous suivions, 
vous suiviez, 
ils suivent, 


Je suivisse, 
etc. 


(wanting), 

u 


Je trairai, etc., 
Jetrairais, etc., 


Trais, 

trayons, 

trayez, 


Je traie, 
tu traies, 
il traie, 


nous trayions, 
vous trayiez, 
ils traient, 


(wanting), 


Je vainquis, etc. Je vaincrai, etc., 
Je vaincrais, etc. 


Yaincs, 
, vainquons 
vainquez, 


Je vainque, 
tu vainques 
il vainque, 


nous vainquions, 
, vous vainquiez, 
ils vainquent, 


Je vain- 
quisse, etc. 


Je v6cus, etc. 


Je vivrai, etc., 
Je vivrais, etc., 


Vis, 

vivons, 

vivez, 


Je vive, 
tu vives, 
il vive, 


nous vivions, 
vous viviez, 
ils vivent, 


Je vecusse, 
etc. 



500 



CONJUGATION OF THE VERBS. 



\ 



CONJUGATION OF S'EX ALLER, TO GO AWAY. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



S'en aller, 



to go away. j S'en etre alle, 
PARTICIPLES. 



to have gone away. 



S'en allant, 
En alltS 



going away, 
gone away. 



S'en etant alle, 



having gone away. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

Je m'en vais, 
Tu fen vas, 
II s'en va, 

Nous nous en allons, 
Yous vous en allez, 
Us s'en vont, 



Je m'en allais, 

Tu t'en allais, 

1 1 s'en allait, 

Nous nous en allions, 

Vous vous en alliez, 

Us s'en allaient, 



I go 
thou goest 
he goes 
we go 
you go 
they go 

IMPERFECT. 

I wen t 
thou wentest 
he went 
we we?it 
y>u went 
they icent 

PAST DEFINITE. 

Je m'en allai, I went 

Tu fen alias, thou icentest 

II s'en alia, he icent 

Nous nous en allames, we went 

Vous vous en allates, you went 

Us s'en allerent, they went 

FUTURE. 

Je m'en irai, I shall go 

Tu fen iras, thou wilt go 

II s'en ira, he will go 

Nous nous en irons, we shall go 

Vous vous en irez, you will go 

lis s'en iront, they will go 



CONDITIONAL. 



Je m'en irais, 
Tu fen irais, 
11 s'en irait, 



i" should go 
thou shouldst go 
he should go 
Nous nous en irions, we should go 
Vous vous en iriez, you should go 
Us s'en iront, they should go 



aicay. 
awa y. 
away, 
away, 
away, 
awa y. 

awa y. 
away, 
away, 
away, 
awa y. 
away. 

away, 
aicay. 
away, 
away, 
away, 
away. 



aicay. 
away, 
away, 
away, 
away, 
axe ay. 

away, 
away, 
away, 
away, 
aicay. 
aicay. 



I have] 
thou hast 
he has I 
we have | 
you have \ 
they have} 



PAST INDEFINITE, 

Je m'en suis alle, 
Tu fen es alle, 
11 s'en est alia, 
Nous nous en sommcs alles, 
Vous vous en etes alles, 
lis s'en son t alles, 

PLUPERFECT. 

Je m'en 6tais alle, I had gone away. 

Tu fen etais alle, thou hadst gone away. 
11 s'en etait alle, he had gone away. 

•Nous nous en etions alles, wehad gone away. 
Vous vous en etiez alles, you had gone away , 
Us s'en etaient alles, they had gone away. 

PAST ANTERIOR. 

Je m'en fus alle, 1 had gone away. 

Tu fen fus alle, thou Jiadst gone away. 
II s'en fut alle, he had gone away. 

Nous nous en fumes alles, we had gone away. 
Vous vous en futes alles, you had gone away. 
lis s'en furent alios, they had gone aicay. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

Je m'en serai alle, I shall have] & 

Tu fen scras alio, thou wilt have | 

Tl s'en sera alle, he will have ! § 

Nous nous en serons alles, we shall have \ o 
Vous vous en serez alles, you will have § 
Us s'en seront alles, they will have J ^ 

PAST CONDITIONAL. 

Je m'en serais alle, I should have] ?£> 

Tu fen serais alle, thou wouldst have | 

U s'en serait alle, he would have I § 

Nous nous en sevious a]\es,we should have \ g 

Vous vous en seriez alles, you would have j § 

Us s'en seraient alles, they would have j ^ 



Ya-t'en, 

Qu'il s'en aille, 

Allons-nous-en, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Allez-vous-en, 
Qu'ils s'en aillent, 



go {thou) away, 
let him go away, 
let us go away. 



go {you) away, 
let them go away. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

Que je m'en aille, that 1 may ] 

Que tu fen ailles, that thou may est 
Qu'il s'en aille, that he may ! 

Que nous nous en allions, that we may \ 
Que vous vous en alliez, that you may | 
Qu'ils s'en aillent, that they may J 

IMPERFECT. 

Que je m'en allasse, that I might] 

Que tu fen allasses, that thou mightest 
Qu'il s'en allat, that he might \ 

Que nous nous en aW&ssicms.that we might [ 
Que vous vous en aUzssiezjhat you might | 
Qu'ils s'en allassent, that they might) 



PERFECT. 

Que je m'en sois alle, that I 

Que tu fen sois alle, that thou 

Qu'il s'en soit alle, that he 

Que nous nous en soyons alles, that we 
Que vous vous en soyez alles, that you 
Qu'ils en soient alles, that they ^ 

PLUPERFECT. 

Que je m'en fnsse alle, that I 

Que tu fen fusses alle, that thou 
Qu'il s'en fut alle, that he 

Que nous nous en fussions alles, that we 
Que vous vous en fussiez alles, that you 
Qu'ils s'en fussent alles, that they 



S S i 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



501 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Impersonal terbs are those which are used only in the third person singu- 
lar, and whose subject is only il, used generally without reference to any par- 
ticular antecedent ; as, 



11 bruine, 


It drizzles, 


11 grele, 


It 7iail$, 


11 degele, 


It thaws, 


11 neige, 


It snows, 


11 faut, 


It is necessary, 


11 pleut, 


It rains, 


11 gele, 


It freezes, 


11 tonne, 


It thunders. 


lie following 


are also frequently impersonal : 




11 arrive, 


It happens, 


11 semble, 


It seems, 


11 convient, 


It suits, 


11 s'en suit que, 


It follows that, 


11 fait, 


It is, 


11 vaut ruieux, 


It is better, 


11 importe, 


' It concerns, 


ii y a, 


There is. 


11 parait, 


It appears, 








P LETT VOIR, 


Falloie, 


Y AVOIE, 




To rain, 


To be necessary, 


There to be, 


Ind. Pr. 


11 pleut, 


11 faut, 


11 y a, 


Imp. 


11 pleuvait, 


11 fallait, 


I! y avait, 


Simp. Pt 


. 11 plut, 


11 fallut, 


11 7 cut, 


Fut. 


11 pleuvra, 


11 faudra, 


11 y aura, 


COND. 


11 pleuvrait, 


11 faudrait, 


11 y aurait, 


Subj. Pr, 


QuMl pleuve, 


Qu'il faille, 


Qu'il y ait, 


Imp. 


Qu'il plut, 


Qu'il fallut, 


Qu'il y cut. 



IRREGULARITIES. 

The following slight irregularities belong to the First Conjugation : 

1. Verbs terminating in ger take a mute e before a and o, in all the persons where either 
of these letters would immediately follow the g ; as, nous mangEons, il mangEa, etc. 

2. Verbs in cer take a cedilla under the c whenever this letter precedes a or o; as, il 
menaca, nous placons, etc. 

3. Verbs in er having e acute or e mute in the penult, change it to e grave, when fol- 
lowed by a mute syllable ; as, Pepkter, je repkte. lever, je Ikvrai, etc. 

Except that verbs in eger always retain e acute ; as, Abrkger,fabrkge, etc. 

4. Verbs in eler and eter, double the I and t before e mute ; as, Appeler, fappclle. 
Jeter, je jette, etc. 

Except the following six, which take the grave accent over the penult e, according to 
the preceding rule (3). Acheter, Bourrelcr, Deceler, Geler, Harceler, and Peler. 

5. Verbs in yer change y into i before e mute ; as, Essuyer, fessuie, Essay er, il es- 
saie, etc. 

G. Verbs in yer, and those which have their participle present in yant, take an i after y 
in the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and present of the 
subjunctive; as notes essuywns— que nous essayzons, etc. 

7. Verbs in ier, and those which have their participle present in iant, double the i in 
the same persons and tenses ; as, nous prnons, nous ruons, que nous etuduons, etc. 

8. Verbs in uer take a diaeresis over the i (i) in the same persons and tenses ; as, nous 
distribu'ions, nous contributions, que nous echoulom, etc. 

9. Verbs in eer keep two e's throughout their conjugation, except before a, i, and o; 
as,je criE,je crkzrai, crkte—je- criai, nous agrhons, nous creions, nous agreions, etc. 



502 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



DEFECTIVE, 

OE SLIGHTLY IRREGULAR VEEBS, WHOSE CONJUGATION NEED NOT BE GIVEN IN PULL. 

SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Benir has two past participles, beni, blessed ; benit, consecrated; otherwise regular. 

Defaillir, to fail, is used only in the Indicative Present plural, ATous defaillons, etc. ; 
Imperfect, Je defaillais; Past Definite, Je defaillis, etc., and the infinitive. 

Faillir, to fail. Faillant. Failli. Jefaux, tit faux, il faut, nous faillons, vousfaittez, 
Us faillent. Je faillais. Jefaillis. Je faillirai. Je faillirais. It is used princi- 
pally in the infinitive, the past definite, and the compound tenses. 

Ferir, to strike, is now used only in the phrase sans coup ferir. 

Fleueie, to blossom, when it is applied to the prosperous condition of a person or state, may 
have the I.MPERFECT^orissa^, and must have its Participle Present florissant. 

Gesir, to be in bed, has only E git, nous gisons, vous gisez, il gisent ; Imperfect, Je gi- 
sais, etc. ; Present Participle, Gisant. 

Hair, to hate, is only irregular by leaving off the diseresis of the singular of the present in- 
dicative and of the imperative. 

Oui'R, to hear, is now hardly ever used except in the infinitive, and the tenses compounded 
ofoui, past participle, and Avoir. 

Queeir, to fetch, is used only iu the infinitive. 

Saillir, to project forth, to be salient, follows the model of Cueillir, used only in the third 
person. 

Suegie, to arrive at, is used only in the infinitive. 

THIPvD CONJUGATION. 

Apparoir, to appear, is used only in the Infinitive and Indicative Present, third per- 
son singular, il appert. 

CnoiE, to fall, is used only in the Infinitive and Past Participle, Chic, e. 

ICcnoiR, to chance to be, follows the form of Dechoir^ except that it is used only in the third 
person singular, and has Present Participle, JEcheant. 

Pouevoir, to provide, follows the form of Voir, except Past Definite, Pourvus ; Future, 
Pourvoirai ; Conditional, Pourvoirais ; Imperfect Subjunctive, Pourvusse. 

Peevoie, to foresee, follows the form of Voir, except Future, Prevoirai ; Conditional, 
Prevoirais. 

Seoir, to befit, is used only in the third person of some of the tenses, and follows the form 
of Asseoir, Sied, Seyait, Siera, Sierais. 

Seoir, to be seated, has only Present Paeticiple, Seant ; Past Participle, Sis. 

Surseoir, to suspend, follows the form of Voir, except Future, Surseoirai ; Condition- 
al, Surseoirais ; Past Participle, Sursis. 

FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Absoudre, to absolve, follows the form of Resoudre, but has no Past Definite, no Imper- 
fect Subjunctive, and the Past Participle is Absous (feminine), absoute. 
Accroiee, to believe, is used only in the infinitive, and after Faire. 

Braire, to bray, is seldom used except in the Infinitive ; the Indicative Peesent, U 
brait, Us braient ; the Future, II braira, Us brairont ; and the Conditional, 71 
brairait, Us brairaient. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



503 



Bruire, to roar, Present Participle, Bruyant ; Indicative Present, Bruit; Imper- 
fect, Bruyait, bruyaient (no other forms)." 

Circoncire, to circumcise, follows the form of Dire, except Indicative Present second 
person, Circonsisez, and Past Participle, Circoncis. 

Clore, to close, Indicative Present, Je clos, tu clos, il clot; Future, Clorai ; Condi- 
tional, Clorais; Imperative, Clos; Past Participle, Clos. 

Contredire, to contradict, varied as Dire, has Contredisez, in the second person plural 
Indicative Present. So Bed ire, to unsay ; Interdirc, to forbid ; Me.dire de, to slan- 
der ; and Fredire, to foretell, have this person in ez, making Bedisez, Interdisez, Jfe- 
disez, and Fredises. 

Deconfire, to discomfort, is an old verb, used only in the infinitive, and has Past Parti- 
ciple, Deconfit. 

Colore, to be hatched, following the model of Clore, is used only in the third person. 
S'ensuivre, tofolloiv, is conjugated like Suivre, but used only in the third person. 
Fouclore, to foreclose, is used only in the Infinitive and tenses compounded of the Past 
Participle, Forclos. 

Frire, to fry, has Indicative Present, Je fris, tu fris, il frit; Future, Je frirai, etc. : 
Conditional, Je friraiis, etc. ; Imperative singular, Fris; Past Participle, Frit (the 
rest is wanting, but always made up by conjugating the verb faire with the infinitive 
frire; as,^"<3 fls frire, fai fait frire, faisons frire, etc.). 

Maudire, to curse, follows the form of Dire, except that it doubles s before a vowel. 

Occire, to kill, is an old verb, used only in the infinitive. 

Paitee, to graze, varied as Faraitre, has no Preterite Definite, no Imperfect Subjunc- 
tive, nor any compound tenses. (They are also made up by conjugating faire m ith the 
infinitive paItre ; asjeflspaitre, qiiejefissepaUre,faifaitpaUre,faiso)ispaitre,Gtc.) 

Sourdre, to well forth, has only Indicative Present, Sourd, sourdent. 

Suffiee, to suffice, is conjugated like Circoncire, except Past Participle, Suffl. 

Tistre, to waive, has only the compound tenses formed with its Past Participle, Tissu. 



TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The numbers, in the following table, denote the pages where each verb will be found in 
all its moods and tenses, or some other verb whose paradigm it follows : 

PAGE 

Abattre, conj. as Battre . 496 

Absoudre 502 

SAbstenir, as Venir 494 

Abstraire, as Traire 498 

Accourir, as Courir 434 

Accroitre, as Croitrc 495 

Accueillir, as Cueillir ... 492 

Acqnerir 492 

Adincttre, as Mettre 496 

Alter 492 

Apparaitre, as Paraitre. . 493 

Apparoir 502 

Appartenir, as Veuir 494 

Appro ndre, as Prendre .. 493 

Assaiil ir 492 

Asseoir 494 

SAsseoir. as Asseoir 494 

Astreindre, as Joindre .. 496 

Attein Ire, as Joindre 496 

Attraire, as Traire 493 

Avenir, as Venir 494 

Avoir 477 

Bitttre 496 

B.uir 502 



PAGE 

Boire 496 

Bouillir 492 

Braire 502 

Bruire 503 

Ceindre, as Joindre 496 

Choir 5d2 

Circoncire 503 

Circon venir, as Venir . . . 494 

Clore 503 

Combattre, as Battre 496 

Commettre, as Mettre . . . 496 
Comparaitre, as Paraitre. 498 

Complaire, as Plaire 498 

Comprendre, as Prendre. 498 
Compromettre, as Mettre 496 

Conclure 496 

Concourir, as Courir 492 

So Condouloir 502 

Conduire, as Cuire 496 

Confire, as Contredire. . . 503 
Conjoindre, as Joindre .. 496 
Connaitre, as Paraitre... 498 
Conquerir, asAcquerir.. 492 
Consentir, as Mentir 492 



PAGE 

Construire, as Cuire 496 

Contenir, as Venir 494 

Contraindre, as Joindre. . 496 

Contredire 503 

Contrefaire, as Faire 496 

Contrevenir, as Veuir... 494 
Convaincre, as Vaincre.. 493 

Con venir, as Venir 494 

Corrompre, as Eompre.. 493 

Coudre 496 

Courir 492 

Couvrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Crai ndre, as Joindre 496 

Croire 496 

Croitre 496 

Cueillir 492 

Cuire 496 

Dcbattre, as Battre 496 

Dechoir 494 

Declore. as Clore 503 

Deconfire, as Contredire. 503 

Decoudre, as Coudre 496 

Decouvrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Decrire, as £crire 496 



504 



TABLE OF IRREGULAR YERBS. 



Decroitre, as Croitre 490 

Se Dedire, asContredire. 50.3 

Dcduire, as Uuire 4'Ji> 

Defaillir 5o2 

Defaire, as Faire 496 

Dejoindre, as Joindre .. . 490 
Dementir, as Mentir .... 492 

Dcplaire, as Plaire 493 

Dcsapprendre,as Prendre 493 

Desservir, as Mentir 492 

Deteindre, as Joindre . . . 490 

Detenir, as Yenir 494 

Detruire, as Cuire 49(5 

Devenir, as Yenir 494 

Se Devetir, as Yetir 494 

Dire 49(5 

Disconvenir, as Yenir. . . 494 

Discourir, as Courir 492 

Disparaitre, as Paraitre . 493 
Dissoudre, as Absoudre. . 502 

Distraire, as Traire 493 

Dormir 492 

Ebattre, as Battre 490 

Ebouillir, as Bouillir 492 

Echoir 502 

Eclore 503 

Ecrire 490 

Eiire, as Lire 490 

Einboire, as Bo-ire 490 

Emoadre, as Moudre 493 

Emouvoir, as Mouvoir . . 494 
Empreindre, as Joindre . 490 
Enceindre, as Joindre... 490 

Enclore, as Clore 503 

Encourir, as Courir 492 

Endorniir, as Dormir 492 

Enduire, as Cuire 490 

Enfreindre, as Joindre .. 490 

Enfuir, as Fuir , 492 

Enjoindre, as Joindre . . . 490 
S'Enquerir, as Acquerir . 492 

S'Ensuivre, as Suivre 493 

S'Entremettre, as Mettre 490 
Entrouvrir, as Ouvrir .. 494 
Entreprendre, as Prendre 498 
494 



Entretenir, as Yenir. 



Entrevoir, as Yoir 494 

Envoyer 492 

Equivaloir, as Yaloir 494 

£ teindre, as Joindre. s . . . 490 

Etre 

Exclure, as Conclure.., 
Extraire, as Traire ..... 

Faillir 

Faire , 

Falloir 



Feindre, as Joindre 
Ferir 



481 
490 

49S I 
502 
490 I 

501 j 
498 ! 

502 | 

Fleurir 502 

Forclore 503 i 

Frire 503 

Fuir 492 

Gesir 502 

Hair 502 

Induire, as Cuire 490 j 

Inscrirc, as Ecrire 490 ' 

Instruire, as Cuire 490 

Inte'rdire, asContredire. 503 j 
Interrompre, as Eompre. 493 

Intervenir, as Yenir 494 

Introduire, as Cuire 490 



PAGR 

Joindre 490 

Lire * 490 

Luire,* as Cuire 490 

Maintenir, as Yenir 494 

Maud ire 503 

Meeonuaitre, as Croitre.. 490 
Modire, as Contredire . . . 503 

Mentir. 492 

be Meprendre, as Prendre 493 

Mesavenir, as Yenir 494 

Mcsseoir, as Seoir 502 

Mettre 490 

Moudre 493 

Mourir 494 

Mouvoir 494 

Naitre 493 

Nuire,* as Cuire 490 

Obtenir, as Yenir 494 

Offrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Oindre, as Joindre 490 

Omettre, as Mettre 490 

Ouir 502 

Ouvrir 494 

Paitre 503 

Paraitre 493 

Parcourir, as Courir 492 

Partir, as Mentir 492 

Parvenir, as Yenir 494 

Peindre, as Joindre 490 

Permettre, as Mettre. . . . 490 

Plaindre, as Joindre 490 

Plaire 493 

Pleuvoir 501 

Poindre, as Joindre 490 

Poursuivre, as Suivre... 493 

Pourvoir 502 

Pouvoir 494 

Predire, as Contredire. .. 503 

Prendre 493 

Presnrire, as Ecrire 490 

Pressentir, as Mentir 492 

Prevaloir, as Yaloir 494 

Pre venir, as Yenir 494 

Prevoir 502 

Produire, as Cuire 490 

Promettre, as Mettre 490 

Promouvoir, as Mouvoir. 494 

Proscrire, as Ecrire 490 

Provenir, as Yenir 494 

Querir, as Acquerir 492 

Eabattre. as Battre 490 

Eapprendre, as Prendre. 49S 

Easseoir, as Asseoir 494 

Eebattre, as Battre 490 

Eeboire, as Boire 490 

Eebouillir, as Bouillir. .. 492 

Eeconduire, as Cuire 490 

Eeconnaitre, as Paraitre. 493 
Eeconquerir, as Acquerir 492 

Eecoudre, as Coudre 490 

Eecourir, as Courir 492 

Eecouvrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Eecrire, as Ecrire 490 

Eecroitre, as Croitre 490 

Eecueillir, as Cueillir 492 

Eecuire, as Cnire 490 

Eedefaire, as Faire 493 

Eedevenir. as Yenir 494 

Eedire, as Dire 490 

Eedormir, as Dormir 492 

Eeduire, as Cuire 490 



PAGE 

Eeelire, as Lire 490 

Eeiieurir, as Fleurir 5o2 

Keiuire* as Cuire 490 

Eemettre, as Mettre 490 

Eemoudre, as Moudre. . . 49S 

Eenaitre, as Naitre 49S 

be Eendormir, as Dormir 492 

Een traire, as Traire 493 

Eepaitre, see Paitre 503 

Eepartir, as Mentir 492 

Se Kepentir, as Mentir.. 492 
Eeprendre, as Prendre. . . 493 
Eequerir, as Acquerir... 492 

Eesoudre 493 

Eessentir, as Mentir 492 

Eessouvenir, as Yenir. . . 494 
Eestreindre, as Joindre.. 496 

Eetenir, as Yenir 494 

Ee traire, as Traire 498 

Eevaloir, as Yaloir 494 

Eevcnir, as Yenir 494 

Eevetir, as Yetir 494 

Eevivre, as Yivre 493 

Eevoir, as Yoir 494 

Eire 498 

Eompre 493 

Eouvrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Saillir 502 

Satisfaire, as Faire 496 

Savoir 494 

Secourir, as Courir 492 

Seduire, as Cuire 490 

Sentir, as Mentir 492 

Seoir 502 

Servir, as Mentir 492 

Sortir, as Mentir 492 

Souffrir, as Ouvrir 494 

Soumettre, as Mettre . . . 496 

Sourdre 5o3 

Sourire, as Eire 493 

Souscrire, as Ecrire 496 

Soustraire, as Traire 493 

Soutenir, as Yenir 494 

Souvenir, as Yenir 494 

Sub Yenir, as Venir 494 

Suffire 503 

Suivre 493 

Surgir 502 

Suriaire. as Faire 496 

Surprendre, as Prendre.. 493 

Surseoir. 502 

Survenir, as Venir 494 

Survivre, as Yivre 493 

Se Taire, as Plaire 498 

Teindre, as Joindre 496 

Tenir, as Yenir 4 ( .U 

Tistre 50 J 

Traduire, as Cuire 490 

Traire 4!K 

Transcrire, as Ecrire .... •*•'.'•» 
Transmettre, as Mettre . 496 
Tressaillir, as Assaillir . . 492 

Yaincre 493 

Yaloir 494 

Yenir 434 

Yetir 494 

Yivre 49S 

Yoir 494 

Youloir 494 



* Luire, rcluire, naive, have the past participles lui, relui, and nui. 



DICTIORA.BY. 



ENGLISH INTO FRENCH. 



EXPLANATIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS. 



adj. adjective, 
adv. adverb, 
art. article, 
cony, conjunction, 
dem. demonstrative, 
/. feminine, 
imp. impersonal, 



tnt. interjection, prep, preposition, 

ttk masculine, pron. pronoun, 

num. numeral, rel. relative, 

part, participle, s. substantive, 

p. past, x. a. verb active, 

pi. plural, v. n. verb neuter, 

pres. present, v. r. verb reflective. 

Letters placed after nouns, adjectives, and participles, show that the feminine terminates 
in those letters. Some words, so common the learner can not be supposed to require their 
insertion, have been omitted. The figures placed after the French words show the Lesson 
where such words are introduced— P denotes preliminary, and S supplementary. 



A. 

To abide by, s'en tenir d, 25 S. 

Able, habile, adj., 55. 

To be able, pou'roir, v. n., 53. 

About, envi/'on. adv., 71. 

Above all, sur tout, pardessus tout, 106. 

Above, au desstis Oe, prep., 19 S. 

Absence, absence, s. f., 1 S. 

Absent, absent, e, adj., 10 S. 

To abstain, s'abstenfr, v. r., 92. 

To accept, accepter, v. a., 71. 

Accident, accident, s. m.. 52. 

To accompany, aecompar/ner, v. a. 86. 

To accomplish, accompli); v. a., 26 S. 

According to, Mien, prep., 21 S. 

Account, memo-ire, s. ru., 4 P. 

To accuse, accuser, v. a.. 6 S. 

Acquaintance, con n a i. stance, s. f., 37. 

To acquiesce in, en passer par, 26 S. 

To acquire, acquerir, v. a., 65. 

Across, d trarers. prep., 27 S. 

To act, agir, v. n., 99. 

Action,/«^, acte, s. m., 53; action, s. f., 66. 

To address, artresser, v., 3 S. 

To address one's self, s'adresser, v. r., 3 S. 

Address, adresse, s. f., 9 S. 

Adieu, adieu. Adieu until to-morrow, adieu 
jusqu'd deniain, 3 S. Adieu until we 
see each other again, adieu, jusqiCau re- 
roir, or au re voir, 3 S. To bid adieu, 
dire adieu, 14 S. 

Admirable, admirable, adj., 25 S. 

Admirably well, d merveille, 5 S. 

To admire, admirer, v. a., 41. 

To advance, a r. -nicer, v. n., 5 S. 

Advice, conseil, avis, s. m., 3 S. 

To advise. conseiUer, v., 6 S. 

Adviser, comeiller, s. m., 22 S. 

Affair, affaire, s. f.. 54. 

To affirm, affirmer, v. 95. 

Africa, Afrique, s. f., 62. 

After, apres, apres que, 76. 

Afternoon, apres-midi. apres-dlner,s. f.,75. 

Afterwards, enmite, 19 S. 

22 



Again, encore, adv., 29. 

Against, contre, prep., 54; against one's lik- 
ing, contre son gre; against one's will, 
d contre cozur, 2 S. 

Age, age, s. ru., 72; siicle, s. m., 8 S. 

To agree, convenir, v. 100. 

Agreeable, agreable, adj., 17 P., 56. 

To aid, aider, v. 9S. 

To aim at, coucher (mettre) enjoue, 24 S. 

Air, air, s. m., 27. 

Alexander, Alexandre, s. m. 79. 

All, tout (m.), toute (f.), tons, toutes (pi.), 15; 

tout, adv., 42. 
All alone, tout seul, 42. 
Ally, allie, 14 S. 
Almost, presque. adv., 58. 
Alone, seul, e, adj., 41. 
Along, le long de, 70. 
Aloud, haut, d haute voix, 16 S. 
Already, dfjd, adv.. 29. 
Also, aussi, adv., 9 P. 
Although, quoique, conj., 86. 
America, Arnei ique. s. f., 18. 
American, americain, e. 54. 
Amiable, aimable, adj., 56. 
Among, parmi, prep., 91. 
To amuse one's self, s'amtiser, v. r., 98. 
Amusement, amusement, s. m., 90. 
Amusing, amusant, e, 20 S. 
And I also, etmoi aussi, 19 S. 
Anger, colere, s. f., 65. 
Angry. /ache (contre), 64. 
To get angry, se/acher. 23 S. 
Animal, animal, s. m., 11. 
To annoy, ennuyer, tounnenter, gener, v. a., 

17 S. 

Annoyance, ennui, tourment, gene, s. f. 17 S. 

Answer, repondre. v. n., 59. 

Any body, quelqu'un^o. 

To appeaV, apparaltre, v. n.,97. 

Appetite, appetit, s. in., 56. 

Apple, pomme, s. f., 1. 

Apple-tree, pommier, s. m.. 24 P., 11 S. 

Apply to, s'adresser, v. r., 3 S. 

To approach, sapprocher, v. r., 15 9. 



506 



DICTIONARY. 



Apology, excuse, s. f, 83. 

Apothecary's shop, pharmacie, s. f., 41. 

To appear, paraitre, v. n., 58. 

To apprehend, apprehender, v. n., 84. 

Approach, approche, s. f., 18 S. 

To approve, approuver, 17 S. ; trouver bon. 

April, avril, s. m., 63. 

Apron, tablier, s. m., 23 P. 

Arithmetic, arithmetique, b. f, 44. 

Arm, bras, s. m., 44. 

Arm-chair, fauteuil, s. m., 4 8. 

Arms, armes, s. f., 8 8. 

Army, armee, s. f., 14 8. 

Around, autour, prep., 4 8. 

Arrangement, arrangement, s. m., 40. 

Arrival, arrivee, s. f., 89. 

To arrive, arriver, v. n., 72. 

As, comme, 72 ; <??*, 13 S. ; aussi, autant, 50. 

As — as, aussi — que, 50. 

As many, autant; as many as, autant que, 
51; as much, autant; as much as, aa- 
£cm£ awe, 51. 

As far as, jusqu'd, prep., 35. 

As soon as, aussitotque, sitot que, dis que, 76. 

As it should be. comme it faut, 11 S. 

To ascend, monter, v. n., 50. 

To be ashamed, avoir honte, 24. 

To ask, demander, v. a., 68. 

Asia, Asie, s. f, 62. 

To assure, assurer, v., 95. 

To astonish, etonner, v. a., 88. 

Astonishing, Homiant, e, 26 8. 

At, d, prep., 61. 

At first, d'abord, 9 S. 

At all events, quoiqu'il en soit; at the house 
of, chez, prep., 16 ; at the same time, en 
meme temps, or au mime instant, 84 ; at 
the same time, at once, d la fois, 8 8. 

At least, au moins, 71. 

At present, d present, 32 P., 42. 

At your service, d voire service, d voire dis- 
position, d vos ordres, 71. 

At what point, oil, en, 23 8. 

Atlas, Atlas, s. m., 26 P. 

To attach, attacher, v. a., 99. 

To attack, attaquer, v. a., 19 S. 

To attain, atteindre, v., 69. 

Attention, attention, s. f., 53. 

Attentive, attentif, ve., adj., 15 S. 

August, aout, s. m., 63. 

Aunt, tante, s. f., 15. 

Author, auteur, s. m., 18 8. 

Authority, autorite, s. f., 96. 

Autumn, automne, s. c, 56. 

Avarice, avarice, s. f., 15 S. 

To avoid, eviter, v. a., 72. 

To awake, eveiller, 18 8. ; reveiller, 18 8. ; 
s'eveiller, se reveiller, 18 8. 

Ax, hache, s. f., 59. 



B. 

Back, dos, s. m., 53. 

Back-door, porte de derriire, s. f., 91. 

Bad, mauvais, e, adj., 12 P., 3. 

Bad fortune, malheur, s. m., 48. 

Badly, mal, adv., 32. 

Bag, sac, s. m., 2 P., 4. 

Baker, boulanger, s. m., 19. 

Bald, chauve, adj., 43. 

Ball, bal, s. m., 65. 

Bank-hill, billet de banque, s. m., 28. 
Barber, barbier, s. m., 50. 
Bare-foot, nu-pieds, piedi nus, 80. 
Bare-headed, nu-tete % UU nut, 80. 



Bark, barque, s. f., 17. 

Bargain, marche, s. m., 4 S. 

Barrel, baril, s. m., 30. 

Basket, panier, s. m., 99. 

Bat, chauve-souris, s. f., 22. 

Bay, baie, s. f., 85. 

To be, etre, v. n., 29 P., 13. 

Beak, bee, s. m., 80. 

Bean, haricot, s. m.,fdve, s. f., 31. 

Bear, ours, s. m., 8 P. 

To bear the stamp of, etre/rappe au coin de, 
25 8. 

Beard, barbe, s. f., 67. 

To beat, battre, v. a., 48. 

Beauty, beaute, s. f., 67. 

Because, parce que, conj., 32. 

To beckon, /aire signe, v., 10 8. 

To become, devenir, v. n., 81. 

To become red, rougir, v. n., 90. 

To become again, redevenir, v. n., 96. 

Bed, lit, s. m., 6 P. 

Beef, bceuf, s. m., 11 P., 4. 

Beer, Mere, s. f., 2. 

Before, devant, avant, 39 ; avant que, 86. 
To begin, commencer, v. a., 74. 
Beginning, commencement, s. m., 103. 
To'begin speaking, prendre la parole, 27 8. 
To behave, se eomporter, v. r., 90 ; se con- 

duire, 90. 
Behind, derriere, prep., 91. 
Belief, croyance, s. f., 19 8. 
Bell, cloche, s. f., 15 8. 
To belong, appartenir d, itre d, 64. 
Below, en bas, 103. 
Bench, banc, s. m., 9 P., 24. 
To bend, plover, v., 24 8. 
Benefit, bienfait, s. m., 52. 
Bent, courbe, e, voute, e, 53. 
Best, le meilleur, e, adj., 12 ; le mieux, 59 ; his 

best, son mieux; to do one's best, fair* 

de son mieux, 27 8. 
Better, meilleur, 59 ; mieux, 51. 
Better than, mieux que, 51. 
To be better, valoir mieux,70. 
It is better, il vaut mieux, 85. 
To be better off, etre plus avanci, 96. 
Between, entre, prep., 2 S. 
To beware, prendre garde, 84. 
Beyond, au deld de, prep., 19 8. 
Big, gros, grosse, adj., 5 P., 4. 
Billet, billet, s. m., 28. 
Bird, oiseau, s. m., 11. 
Birth, naissance, s. f., 20 8. 
Biscuit, biscuit, s. m., 9. 
Bishop, eveque, s. m., 23. 
Bison, bison, s. m., 20 P. 
Bit, morceau, s. m., 43. 
Bitter, amer, e, adj., 43. 
Black, noir, e, adj., 8 P., 20. 
Blacksmith, forgeron, s. m., 19. 
To blame, bldmer, v. a., 14. 
To lay blame on, s'en prendre d, 24 8. 
To bleed, saigner, v. a., 5 8. 
Blind, aveugle, adj., 31. 
Blindman, aveugle, s. m., 81. 
Blind of one eye, borgne, adj., 81. 
Blow, coup, s. m., 42. 
Blue, bleu, e, adj., 12 P., 20. 
To blush, rougir, v. n., 90. 
Board, planche, s. f., 12. 
Boarder, pensionnaire, s. m., 1 S. 
Boarding-house, pension, s. f., 1 8. 
Boarding-school, pensionnat, s. m., 1 8. 
Boat, bateau, s. m., 5 P., 51. 
Body, corps, s. m., 49. 
Book, livre, s. m., 14 P., 1. 



DICTIONARY. 



507 



Bookseller, marchand de litres, s. m., 51. 
Boot, botte, s. f., 4. 
Border, bordure, s. f., 40. 
To be born, naitre, v. n., 67. 
To borrow, emprunter, v. a., 55. 
Both, Vun et Vautre, tous deux, 25. 
Bottle, bouteille, s. f., 3, 7 S. 
Bottom, fond, s. m., 53; has, s. m., 73. 
Bouquet, bouquet, s. m., 72. 
Bowl, bol, s. m., 5 P. 
Box, caisse, s. f.. 34 ; botte, s. f., 44. 
Boy, garc-on, s. m., 13 P., 6. 
Brain, cervea u, s. m., 66. 
Branch, rameau, s. in., 24 S. 
Brandy, eau de vie, s. £, 99. 
Bread, pa?';?, s. m., 2. 
Breadth, tor(7*>, largeur, g. f., 14 S. 
To break, ca.sser, 31 ; rompre, 19 S. 
To break through, se /aire jour d travers, 
2 1 S. 

Breakfast, dejeuner, s. m., 60. 
To breakfast.' dijeuner, 61. 
Breast, poitrine, s. f.,,66. 
To breathe, rexpirer, v. n., 12 S. 
Brick, brique, s. f., 19. 
Bridle, toftfe, s. f., 34. 
Bridge, pont, s. m., 19 S. 
Brief, bref, s. m., 3 P. 
Brilliant, "brillant, e, adj., 22 P. 
To bring, apporter, v. a., 44 ; amener, v. a., 
60. 

To bring near, approcher, v., 15 S. 

Britains, -Bretons, s. m., 79. 

Broad, large, adj., 43. 

Brook, ruisseau, s. m., 24. 

Broom, balai, a m., 4 P., 14. 

Brother, frere, s. m., 15 P., 5. 

Brother-in-lav, beau-frere, s. m., 12. 

Brown, brun, e, adj., 12 P. 

Brush, brosse, s. f., 12. 

Bucket, seau, s. in., 5 P., 20 S. 

Buckwheat, sarrasin, s. m., blenoir, 61. 

Buckwheat cake, or&» c?c sarrasin, 61. 

Buffalo, 6i/^ff, s. in., 17 P. 

Build, B4«r, v. a ., ». 

Bushel, boisxea u, s. m., 66. 

Business, affaire, s. f, 54. 

But, mais, conj., 23 P., 22. 

But not, mais non, mais non pas, 22. 

But little, ne-guere, 67. 

Butcher, boucher, s. m., 8 P. 

Butter, beurre, s. id., 11 P., 3. 

Button, bouton, s. m., 15 P., 6. 

To buy, acheter, v. a., 24. 

By, par, prep., 56. 

By the side of, d cote de, 81. 

By dint of, a force de, 2 S. 

By means of," era moyen de. 



C. 

Cabbage, chou, z. m.. 8 P., 61. 

Cable, cable, s. m., 17 P. 

Caesar, Cesar, s. m.. 79. 

Cage, cage, s. f., 10 S. 

Cake, gateau, s. m., 6 P., 11. 

Calf, reau, s. m., 6 S. 

To call, appeler, v. a., 78. 

To call (stvle), traiter de, 27 S. 

To call each other thou and thee, tutoyer, 

v. a., 23 S. 
Charitable, charitable, adj., 106. 
Camel, chameau, s. m., 17 P. 
It can be. il sepeut, 3 S. 
Canada, Canada, s. m., 62. 



Candle, chandelle, s. f, 2. 

Candlestick, chandelier' s, m. 9 

Cannon, canon, s. m., 18 P. ' 

Cannon-ball, boulet, s. m 8 P. 

Canopy, dais, s. m., 3 P. ' 

Cap, bonnet, s. ra., 9. 

Captain, capitaine, s. m., 8. 

Care, soin, s. m., 34. 

To take care, avoir soin. 33. 

For cash, cash down, comptant, au com*- 

tant, argent comptant, 54. 
Carpenter, charpentier, s. m. 23 P., 12. 
Carpet, tapis, s. m., 6 P., 6. 
Carriage, xoiture, s. f, 11. 
To carry, porter, v. a., 20. 
To carry awav, emporter, v. a., 7 S. 
Cart, charretie, s. f, 57. 
Case, caisse, s. f., 33; coft s. nx, 4 3. 
Cashmere, cachemire, 3 S. 
Cask, tonneau, s. m., 30. 
To cast down, baimer, v. a., 90. 
Cat, chat, s. m., 2 P., 22. 
Catholic, catholique, 20 S. 
Cauleflower, chou-fleur, s. m., 13. 
To cause, causer, v. a., 54. 
Cause, cause, s. f., 76. 
Cavern, cavern e, s. f, 14. 
To cease, cesser, v., 97. 
Cedar, cedre, s. m., 14 P. 
Cellar, cave, s. f., 14. 
Cent, sou, cent, s. m., 54. 
Century, Steele, s. rn., 8 S. 
Ceremony, ceremonie. s. f., 77. 
Certain, certain, e, adj., 76. 
Certainly, certaincment, adv., 88. 
Chain, chalne, s. f., 56. 
Chair, chaise, s. f., 4. 
Champagne, champagne, 66. 
Change, monnaie, s. f.,' 77. 
To change, changer, v. a., 67. 
To charm, charmer, v. a., 67. 
Charmed, charme, e, 75. 
Charming, charrnant, e, adj.. IS, 5L 
Cheap, d bon marche, 57. 
Cheek, joue, s. f., 77. 
Cheese, frornage, s. m., 8 P., 43. 
Cherry, cerise, s. f., 8. 
Cherry-tree, cerisier, s. m., 24 P. 
Chest, co/fz-e, 8. m., 14. 
Chicken, poulet, s. m., 8. 
Chief, c/if f, s. m., 2 P. 
Child, enfant,s. m., 24 P., 16. 
Chill, frisson, s. m., 21 S. 
Chimney, cheminee, s. £,99. 
Chin, menton, s. m., 59. 
China, porcelain e, s. f., 7. 
Chink, fente s. f. 42. 
Chocolate, chocolat, s. m., 28. 
To choose, choisir, v. a., 28. 
Christ, Christ, s. m., 20 S. 
Christian. Chretien, s. m., 20 S. 
Christian era, ere chretienne, 20 8. 
Christmas, noel, s. m., 21 S. 
Church, igliW, s. f., 23. 
Cicero, Ciceron, s. m., 1 S. 
Cider, cidre, s. m. 6 P. 
Cigar, cigare, s. m., 81. 
Ciphering, calcid, s. m.. 7S. 
Circumfe"rence, circonferejice, s. f., 15 8. 
City, ville s. f., 16. 
To claim, reclamer, v. a., 16 9. 
Class, c/rtsse, s. f, 16 S. 
Clean, propre, adj., 23. 
To clean, nettoyer, v. a., 72. 
Clerk, commit, s. m., 22. 
Climate, climat, b. m., 27 



508 



DICTIONARY. 



Cloak, manteau, s. m., 12 P., 8. 

Clock, horloge, s. f, pendicle, s. f., 14. 

Closet, armoire, s. f., 30. 

Cloth, drap, s. m., 2 P., 7. 

To clothe, cetir, v. a., 67. 

Clothes-press, garde-robe, s. f., 30. 

Cloud, image, s. m., 64. 

Coal, charbon, s. m., 17 P., 9. 

Coarse, gros, se, adj., 5 P., 4. 

Coat, habit, s. m., 7 P., 7. 

Codfish, morue, s. f., 14. 

Coffee, cafe, s. m., 2 P. 

Coffee-cup, tasse de cafe, s. f., 51. 

Coffee with milk, cafe au lait, 61. 

Coffee without milk, cafe noir, 61. 

Cold, froid, adj., 1 P., s. m., 24. 

Cold, rhume, s. m., 66. 

College, college, s. m., 78. 

Color, couleur, s. f., 40. 

Comb, peigne, s. m., 21 P. 

To come, venir, v. n., 28. 

To come again, revenir, v. n., 52. 

Comedian, comedien, s. m., 15 8. 

To command, commander, v., 84. 

Commendable, louable, adj., 77. 

Common, commun, e, adj., 6 S. 

To commit, commetire, v., 105. 

To communicate, fairepart de {a), 26 S. 

Companion, camarade, s. m., 21 P., 105; 
compagnon, s. m., 105. 

Company, compagnie, s. f., 48. 

To complain, seplaindre, v. r., 5 8. 

Complete, complet, e, adj., 23 8. 

Complexion, teint, s. m., 12 8. 

Compliment, compliment, s. m., 9 S. 

To compose, composer, v. a., 6 8. 

To comprehend, comprendre, v. a., 48. 

Computation, calcul, s. m., 78. 

Comrade, camarade, s. m., 7 P. 

To conceal, cacher, v. a., 8 S. 

To conceive, concevoir, v., 88. 

To conclude, conclure, v., 95. 

Conditional, conditionnec, adj., 2 S. . 

To conduct, conduire, v. a., 34. 

Conduct, conduite, s. f., 3 S. 

Conductor, conducteur, s. m., 19 S. 

To confess, avouer, v., 96; confesser, v., 19. 

To confide, confier, v. a., 41. 

Conformed, conforme, adj., 96. 

Congress, con g res, s. in., 6 S. 

Conqueror, vainqueur, s. m., 13 S ; as con- 
queror, en conquerant, 8 3. 

To conquer, conquerir, v. a., 79. 

To consent, consentir, v., 65. 

Consequently, consequemment, adv., 5. 

Constantly, constamment, adv., 6 8. 

To construct, construire, v. a., 90. 

To contain, contenir, v. a., 6 S. 

To be contending, etre aux prises, 26 8. 

On the contrary, an contraire, 79. 

To cook, cuire, v. a., 69. 

Cook, cuisinier, ere, s., 10. 

Cooked, cuit, e, adj., 31. 

Ooo\,frai$,fralctie, adj., 4 P., 20. 

Copper, cuivre, s. m., i6 P., 18. 

Copy-book, cahier, s. m., 23 P., 5. 

Coral, corail, s. in., 22 P. 

Cord, corde, s. f., 15. 

Cordial, liqueur, s. f., 59. 

Corn, ble, s. m., 2 P. 

Corner, coifi, s. m., 8 S. 

Corporal, caporal, s. m., 11. 

To correct, corriger, v. a., 60. 

Correct, correct, e, adj., 99. 

To cost, couter, v. a., 6S. 

Cotton, coton, s. m., 5. 



To cough, tousser, v. n., 72. 

Counsel, conseil, avis, s. m., 3 S ; opinion, 

s. f., 3 8. 
To count, compter, v. a., 40. 
Counterfeit, faux, ausse, 52. 
Country, campagne, s. i., 16; pays, s. m., 

27. 

Countryman, paysan, ne, s., 19 P., 10. 
Country-house, maieon de campagne, s. f., 
72. 

Courage, courage, s. m., 33. 
Cousin, cousin, e, s., 20 P., 6. 
To cover, couvrir, v. a., 64. 
Cow, vache, s. f., 4. 
Cravat, cravate, s. f., 7. 
Crazy, fou,folle, adj., 61. 
Craziness,/o£ie, s. f., 4 8. 
Cream, crime, s. f., 3. 
To create, creer, v. a., 20 8. 
Credit, credit, s. m., 46. 
On credit, d credit, 54. 
Creditor, creancier, s. m., 15 8. 
Credulous, credule, adj., 67. 
Crop, recolte, s. f., 88. 
Crown, couronne, s. f., 7 8. 
To cry, cHer, v. n., 6 8. 
To cry out, s 'eerier, v. r., 6 8. 
Cucumber, concombre, s. m., 14 P. 
Cup, tasse, s. f., 15. 
Cupboard, buffet, s. m., 30. 
Curdled, caille, p. part., 22 P. 
To cure, guerir, v. a., 13 8. 
Curtain, rideau, s. m., 6 P. 
Curved, voute, e, 53. 
Cushion, coussin, s. m., 20 P. 
To cut, cut off, couper, v. a., 80. 



9. 

Damp, humide, adj., 56. 

To dance, danser, v. n., 83. 

Dancing, danse, s. f., 90. 

Dancing-school, Vecole de danse, s. f., 18 8. 

Danger, danger, s. m., 72. 

Dangerous, dangereux, se, adj., 77. 

To dare, oser, v. n., 13 8. 

Dark, sombre, obscwr, adj., 56. 

Dart, dard, s. m., 4 P. 

Daughter,>'«e, s. f., 6. 

Daughter-in-law, belle-fille, s. f., 26. 

Day, jour, s. m., 54. 

Day after to-morrow, apres-d emain, 44. 

Day before yesterday, avant-hier, 44. 

Dead, mort, e, adj., 5 P., 28. 

Dean, doyen, s. m., 19 P. 

Deaf, sourd, e, adj., 104. 

Dear, cher, ere, adj., 57. 

Debt, dette, s. f., 13 S. 

Debtor, debiteur, s. m., 15 8. 

To deceive, tromper, v. a., 75. 

December, decembre, s. in., 63. 

To decide, decider, v. a., 19 8. 

To declare, declarer, v., 95. 

Deed, fait, acte, s., 58. 

Deer, daim, s. m., 9 P. 

Defect, defaut, s. m., 55. 

To defend, defendre, v. a., 84. 

Definite, defini, 100. 

Definition, definition, s. f., 25 8. 

To delay, tarder, v., 18 8. 

Delirium, delire, s. m., 5 8. 

To demand, demander, exiger, v., 95. 

Demijohn, dame-jeaime, s. f., 33. 

Den, caverne, s. f., 14. 

Denmark, Danemarc, s. m., 61. 



DICTIONARY. 



500 



Dentist, dentiste, s. m., 7 S. 
To deny, nier, v. a., 67 ; disconvenir, 87. 
, io depart, partir, v. n., 41. 

Department, departement, s. m., 22 S. 

Departure, depart, s. m,, 12 8. 

Depth, pro/ondeur, s. f., 14 S. 

To descend, descendre, v., 13. 

To descend again, redescendre, 97. 

To describe, depeindre,\. a., 25. 

To desire, ft&girer, v. a., 18. 

Desire, dtxir, s. m., 104. 

Desk, pt/j>/tre, s. m., 1. 

Despair, desespoir, s. m., 25 S. 

To despair, desesperer, v., 87. 

To despise, mepriser, v. a., 60. 

Destined, <l<*ti,u\ 2(5 S. 

Destiny, destinee. s. f., 19 S. 

To destroy, dMrvAre, v. a., 7 8. 

Diameter, diametre, s. m., 10 8. 

Diamond, diamnnt, s. m., 12 P. 

Dictionary, d ictionnaire, s. m., 26 P.. 21. 

To die, nw-.rir, v. n., 65; decider, v. n., *96. 

Difference, difference, s. f., 2 S. 

Different, .liferent, e, 78. 

Differently, diih re; anient, adv., 88. 

Difficult, difficile, adj., 45. 

Difficulty, difficult, s. f., 32. 

Diligent, diligent, e, adj., 74. 

To dine, diner, v. n., 61. 

Dinner, diner, s. m., 61. 

To direct, diriger, v. a., 21 S. 

Dirty, «&, adj., 33. 

To disappear, disparaitre, v. n., 97. 

To disapprove, trouver maiwais, 84. 

Discourse, discours, s. m , 9 8. 

To discourse, dtxcourir, 11 S. 

Discreet, nage, adj., 37. 

Dish, plat, s. m., 2 P., 2; mcfe, s. m., 7 S. 

Disinterestedly, SOUS interet, 57. 

Disobedient, diaobeissant, e, adj., 15 S. 

Displeased, mec&nt&nt, e, adj., 52. 

To be displeased, savoir mauvais gre, 7 S. 

Disposal, disposition, s. f., 40. 

Distance, distance, s. £, 71. 

Distinctly, d i»ti net orient, adv., 7 S. 

Divine, divin, e, adj., 4 S. 

To do (in health), se porter, v. r., 93. 

To do evil, /aire du null, 79. 

To do goo i.f.iire du bieil, 79. 

To do without, M passer de, 3 S. 

Docile, docile, adj., 104. 

Doctor, doc tear, s. m , 17. 
Dog, chien, ne, s., 17 P., 9. 
Dollar, dollar, s. in. : piastre, s. f. ; gourde, 

s. f., 19. 
Door, s. f, 17. 

Double, doM-W^, adj., 17 P. 
To doubt, doiiter, v. a., 33; without doubt, 

sans doute, 65. 
Doubtful, ihndcuiv, se, 85. 
Down stairs, en ban, 103. 
Dozen, douzaine, s. f., 94. 
To draw, tirer. v. a., 2 S. 
Drawer, tiroir, s. in., 43. 
To dream, rercr, v. n., 13 S. 
Dress, rol>c. s. f., 7. 
To dress, habiller, v. a., 90. 
To drink, boire, v. a., 45. 
Drink-money, pour boire, s. m., 13. 
Drunk, ivre, gris, adj., 51. 
To get drunk, s'enicrer, v. r., 21 S. 
Drunkard, irrogne, s. m., 22 P., 52. 
During, pendant, 50; durant, 65; pendant 

que, 50. 
Dutv, devoir, s. m., 49. 
To dry, seeker, v. a., 39. 



Dry, sec, seche, adj., 49. 
Dryness, secheresse, s. £. 55, 
Duck, canard, s. m., &S. 
Due, du, s. m., 66. 
Duke, due, s. m., 25 S. 
Duration, rifatr&, s. f., 106. 
To dwell, demeurer, v. a., 35. 
To dye, teindre, v. a., 93. 



E. 

Each, cliaque, adj., 64. 

Each one, chacun, pron., 12 P., 49 G4. 

Ear, oreille, s. f., 99. 

Earlier, tf<? meilleure lieure, 5S. 

Early, c/e &o«?ie heure, 5S. 

Early in the morning, de bon matin, da 

grand matin. 92. 
Earth, terre, s. t, 61. 

Earthquake, tremblement de terre, s. m., 

Easily,/a<->7o??<>?i£, adv., 40. 
Easy,/i/ci/c, adj., 45. 
East, est, s. in., 39. 
To cat. manger, v. a., 64. 
Edward, Edouard, s. m., 5. 
Eg?, s. m , 16 P., 10. 
Elbow, coude, s. m., 9 8. 
Elegant, elegant, e, adj., 105. 
Elephant, elephant, s.'m., 12 P., 17 8. 
Eloquence, eloquence, s. f., 9 8. 
Eloquent, eloquent, e, adj., 9 8. 
Elsewhere, ailleurs, adv., 73. 
To embarrass, embarrasxer, v. a., 22 8. 
To embrace, embrasser, v. a., 22 S. 
Emperor, empereur, s. m., 13 8. 
To employ, employer, v. a., 95. 
To employ to advantage,/<mv> raloir, 19 3. 
Employment, emploi, s. in., 97. 
Empty, ride, adj., 30. 
In emulation, d Vewei, 24 S. 
To encumber, embarrasses; v. a., 83. 
End, jin, s. f., 89 ; s. m., 9 8. 

Enemy, ennemi, e, s., 18. 
Engagement, engagement, s. m., 10 8. 
England, Angh'terre, s. f., 18. 
English, anglais, e, 27. 
To enjoy, jo uir, v. a., 92. 
Enough, assez {de), adv., 17 P., 51. 
To enter, entrer, v. n., 76, 96. 
Entire, entier, ere, adj., 97. 
To entreat, supplier, 28 S. 
Epigram, epigramme, s. i", 16. 
Episcopal, episcopal, e, adj., 22 S. 
Epoch, epoque, s. f , 20 8. 
Error, erreur, meprise, s. f., 55. 
To escape, echapper, v. n., 97. 
To escape with, e// e)V<? quitte pour, 26 S. 
To esteem, estimer, v. a., 60. 
Eve, t-ei«e, s. f., 21 8. 
Even, meme, adv, 41. 
Even if, quand meme, 95. 
Even with, d ficur de. 19 8. 
Evening, soir, s. m., 32 P.. 29 ; soiree, s. f., 67. 
Event, erenement, s. m., 80. 
Ever,i<-/w//*\adv., 29. 
Every body, tout le monde, 40. 
Every, tous les, etc., 73. 
Every where, jytniout, adv., 40. 
Evidently, evidemment, adv., 12 3. 
Evil, mat, s. m. ; tort, s. m., 49. 
Exactly so, tout juste, 41; exactement, 96. 
Exalted, eccafte, 26 S. 
To exceed, depasser, v. a., 26 8. 
I Excellent, excellent, e, adj., 10, 



510 



DICTIONARY. 



To exclaim, tfecrier, v. r., 6 8. 

Excuse, excuse, s. f., 83. 

To execute, execute?', v. a., 19 S. 

Executive, executif, re, adj., 22 S. 

Exercise, theme, s. in., 12; exercise, s. m., 56. 

To exist, existence, s. f., 22 S. 

Expense, depense, s. f., 49; depenses, 49. 

To expire, expirer, 97. 

To explain, expliquer, v. a., 1 S. 

To express, exprimer, v. a., 96. 

To extinguish, eteindre, v. a., 55. 

Extraordinary, extraordinaire, adj., 54. 

Extreme, extreme, adj., 14 S. 

Extremely, extremement, adv., 14 S. 

Extremity, extremite, s. f., 5 8. 

Eye, ceil, pi. ; yeux, s. in., 43. 



F. 

Face, visage, s. m. ; figure, s. f., 49. 
To face,/««/'e /ac(?, 10 8. 
Fact, fait, acte, s., 58. 
To fail, manquer, v., 10 S. 
To fail of satisfying, laisser d desirer, 25 S. 
• Faith, foi, s. f., 74. 
Fall, tomber, v. n., 59 ; choir, v. n., 96. 
To full again, retomber, v. n., 96. 
To fall to, echoir, v. n., like dechoir, p. 494 ; 
False, faux, se, adj., 52. [also p. 504. 

Falsely, faussement, adv., 6 S. 
To be familiar with, etre aufait, 22 8. 
Family, fami lie, s. f., 39. 
Family teacher, precepteur, s. m., 14 S. 
Famous, fameux, se, adj., 5 5. 
Fan, ecehtail, s. m., 22 P. 
Far, Zom, adv., 71. 
To fire a gun, tirer un fusil, 24 S. 
Farmer; fermier, s. m., 10 S. 
Fashion, mode, s. f., 57. 
Fat, gras, se, adj., 4 P., 42. 
Fate, deslin, s. m., desiinee, s. f., 19 S. 
Father, pere, s. m,, 15 P., 5. 
Father-in-law, beau-jiere, s. m., 36. 
To fatigue, fatiguer, v. a., 71. 
Fault, defaut, s. in., 5b;faute, s. f., 55. 
Favor, grace, s. f., 23 S. 
Fear, peur, s. f., 24. 

To fear, apprehender, v. a., 84; craindre, 
v. a., 84. 

For fear that, depeur que, decrainte que, S6. 

February, fevrier, s. m., 03. 

To feel, sentir, v. a., 42. 

To feign, feindre, v. a., 8 8. 

Fellow-man, semblable, 16 S. 

Feminine, feminin, e, adj.,18. 

Fever, fievre, s. f , 27. 

Field, champ, s. m., 9 P., 16 S. 

Fifty, cinquantaine, s. f., 94. 

Fig,^«<?, s. f., 76. 

To fight, se battre, v. r., 23 S. 

Fig-tree, figuier, s. m., 24 P. 

Figure, taille, s. f., 49 ; forme, figure, 71 

To fill (with), remplir (de), v. a., 32. 

To find, trouver, v. a., 30. 

To find fault with, trouver d redire, 24 8. 

Fine, pi, e, 41 ; beau, belle, 5 P., S. 

Finger, doigt, s. in., 1 P., 37. 

Finger-ring, bague, s. J.. 7. 

To finish, finir, v. a., 37. 

Fire,/<?w, s. m., 11 P., 29. 

Fireman, pompier, s. m., 21 8. 

Firewood, bois d brider, s. m., 7 S. 

Fir-tree, sapin, s. m., 24 S. 

Fish, poisson, s. m., 20 P. 15. 

Fisherman, pecheur, s. m., 16 P., 19. 



Fishing, peche, s. f., 105. 
Fist, poing, s. m., 14 8. 
To fit, alter Men, seoir, 76; not to fit, alter 

mal, ne pas Men alter, 76. 
Fixed, fixe, adj., 55. 
Flash (of lightning), eclair, s. id., 6 S. 
To flatter, fiatter, v. a., 83. 
To fiatter one's self, se flatter, v. r., 98. 
Flattery,^att<?/7>, s. f.j 91. 
Flax, tin, s. m., 9 P. 
Flexible, flexible, adj., 24 S. 
Flint, caillou, s. m., 22 P. 
Floor, plancher, s. m., 29 P., 12. 
Flour, farine, s. f., 2. 
Flower, fieur, s. f., 9. 
Flute, flute, s. f., 64. 
To fly, s'enfuir, v. n., 14 S. 
Fly, mouche, s f., 16 S. 
Fog, brouillard, s. in., 50. 
Follow, suivre, v. a., 37. 
Food, aliment, s. m., 20 S. 
Fool, sot, 106. 

Foolish, sot, sotte, adj., 1 8. 

Foolishly, folleme7it, adv., 31. 

Foot, pied, s. m., S3. 

On foot, dpied, depied, 56. 

For, pour, prep., 51. For, after a verb of mo- 
tion, is chercher, 78. 

For, car, conj., 78. 

To forbid, defendre, v. a., 81 . 

Foreigner, eir anger, ere, s., 10. 

Fore-runner, avant-coureur, s. m., 13. 

To forget, oublier, v. a., 35. 

To foresee, prevoir, v. a., 79. 

Fork, four chette, s. f, 2. 

Form,/orme, s. f., 74. 

Formerly, autrefois, adv., 89. 

Forthwith, d Vinstant, sur le champ, tout da 
suite, 42. 

Forty, quarantaine, s. f, 94. 

Fortunate, fortune, e, adj., 44. 

Fountain,, fontaine, s. f., 85. 

Fox, rendrd, s. m., 12 P., 105. 

Frame, cadre, s. m., 14 P. 

France, France, s. f., 18. 

Free, libre, adj., 20 S. 

To freeze, geler, v. n., 62. 

Frenchman, francais, 27. 

Frequently, frequemment, adv., 55. 

Fresh,frais, aiche, adj., 4 P., 20. 

Friday, jeudi, s. m , 58. 

Friend, ami, e, s., 16 P., 6. 

Friendship, amitie, s. f., 91. 

To frighten, faire peur (d), 16 S. 

Frightened, effraye, e, 103. 

From here, d'ici, 42. 

From time to time, de temps en temps, 71. 

Front door, parte de devant, 91. 

Fruit, fruit, s. m„ 10 P. 

Fruit-tree, arbre fruitier, s. m., 85. 

Full, plein, e, adj., 30. 

Further, furthermore, davantage, 67. 

Fnry,furie, s. i.,fureur, s. f., 24 S. 

F utuve, futur, e, adj., 97 ; avenir, s. m., 5 8. 

In future, d Vavenir, 5 8. 



€r. 

To gain, gagner, v. a , 56. 
Gallant, galant, e, adj., S6. 
Gr<ime,jeu, s. m., 11 P., 118. 
Garden, jardin, s. m., 16 P., 15. 
Gardener, jardinier, ere, s., 23 P., 80. 
To gather, cneillir, v. a., 63. 
Gauls, gaulois s. m., 79. 



DICTIONARY. 



.',11 



Gay, gai, e. adj., 52. 

General, general, s. m., 23 P., 11. 

Generous, genereux, se, adj., 79. 

Gentleman, monsieur, s. in., 7. 

Geography, geographie, s. f., 45. 

George. Georges, s. in., 7 P. 

German, allemand, e, 27. 

To get, followed by a past part, is /aire, 83. 

To get well, guerir, v. n., 13 S. 

To get clear for, etc., enetrequittepour, 2GS. 

To get used to, sefaire d, 9S. 

To get off, ffen iirer d. 

Girl,./? '/.'. s. f., 6. 

To give, (Jnnupy, v. a., 27 P., 26. 

To give it up (in messing), Jeter sa langue 

aux chienx, "27 B. 
Glad, a ise, adj., 104. 
Glance, coup \l\nil, 15 S. 
Glass, verre. s. ni., 3 P. 3. 
Glass (pane), v/fre, s. f., 16. 
Globe, glob*, b. in., 5 P., 74. 
Glove, gan'. s. m., 9 P., 4. 
To go up igain, /\monter, v. n., 96. 
To gnaw, ranger, v. a:, 72. 
To go, a'ler, v. n., 32 P., 16. 
To go to bed, se coucher, 5 S. ; aller se com- 

cher, 12 8. 
To go up, mjnter, v. n., 50. 
To go out. sortir, v. n., 29. 
To go away, Jen aller, v. r., 13 S. 
To go a huntini, aller d la cluisse, 105. 
To go a fishing, alter d la pecke, 105. 
To go a mile,/*£/-e un mitle, 57. 
Goat, cheore, s. f., 8. 
God, Die a, s. m.. 53. 
Gold, or, s. m., 5 P., 7. 
Good, bleu, s. m., 49. 
Good, bon, ne, adj., 13 P., 4. 
Good evening, bonsoir, s. m., 74. 
Good fortune, bonheur, s. ni., 43. 
Go'jd mornin jr, hon jour, s. m., 74. 
Goodness, bonte, s. f., 43. 
Good night, bonne nuit, s. f, 74. 
To govern, gouverne.r, v. a., 95. 
Governor, goa vemew; s. in., S3. 
Gown, robe, s. f., 7. 

Grain, ble, grain, s. m., 01 ; grains, 71. 
Grammar, gram ma ire, s. f.. 21. 
Grand-daughter, peUU-fitle, s. f., 36. 
Grandfather, grand-pere, s. in., 36. 
Grandmother, grand' mere, s. f., 36. 
Grandson, ]>etit-ri'*. s. m., 36. 
To grant, accoraer, v. a., 113. 
Grapes, raixins, s. m., 4 8. 
To be grateful for, savoir gre de, 54 
Gray, gri% e, adj., 34 

Great Britain. Grande-Bretagne, 103. * 
Greece, Grece, s. f., 62. 
Greek, grec, grecque, adj., 48. 
Green, vert, e. adj., 3 P., 20, 34. 
Grocer, epicier, s. m., 18. 
Ground, terre, s. f., 61. 
To grow, croltre, v. n., 97. 
To have, a grudge (against), en vouloir (d), 
24 S. 

Gruel, gruau, s. m.. 14 P. 
Guard, garde, s f., 90. 

To guess, deriner, v. n., 87; I give you three 
guesses.. /V mus le clonne en trois, 27 S. 
Guiltv. coicpable, adj., 96. 
Gun, fusil, s. in., 24 P., 12. 



Habitual, habituel, adj., 97. 
Hackney -coach, fiacre, s. m., 12 S. 



You had better, vous ferez bien, MM Arm 

niieux, S9. * 
To hail, greler, v. n., 12 S. 
Hair, cliereu, s. m. ; pi., chereux 44 
Half, moitie, s. f., 17. 
Half, f, adj., 71. 

Hall, salle, s. f., 1 S. 
Uaxn,jambon, s. m., 12. 
Hammer, marteau, s. m., 7 P. 15 
Hand, main, s. f., 33. 
Handrail, poignee, s. f., 25 S. 
Handkerchief, mouchoir, s. m., 10 r 13. 
Handle, manche, p. m., 54. 
Handsome, beau, belle, adj., 5 P., 8. 
To happen, avenir, advenir, v. n., 96. 
To happen to be, se trouver, v. r., 5 3. 
Happy, heurcnx, se, adj., 44. 
Hard, dur, e, adj., 10 P., 29, 80. 
Hardly, d peine, 70. 
Hare, lie ere, s. m., 14 P. 
Harm, mal, s. m., tort, s. m., 49. 
Harvest, recolte, s. f., 88. 
Hat, chapeau, s. in., 17 P., 4. 
T<» hate, hair, v. a., 75. 
Hatter, chapelier, s. m., 23 P., 40. 
To have, avoir, v. a., 1. 
To have need, aroir besoin, 33. 
To have a mind, desire, fancy, aroir enrie, 67. 
To have, followed by a past participle, is 

fa ire, 88. 
Hay,/«m, s. m., 11 S. 
Head, tete, e. f., 33. 
Head-dress, coiffure, s. f, 76. 
Health, sante, s. f., 48. 
Healthy, sain, e, adj., 53. 
Heap, tas, s. m., 4 P. 

Hear, entendre, v. a., 45. To be hard of hear- 
ing, aroir Vouie dure, 99. 

Heart, cozur, s. m., 11 P., 53; by heart, ;>ar 
cotur, 11 S. 

Hearth, foyer, dtre, s. m., 23 P., 20 S. 

Heartily, de bon co&ur, de bon gre, 07. 

Heat, chaleur, s. f., 11 S. 

Heavy, lourd, e, adj., 9 S. 

Height, haut, s. m. ; hauteur, s. f, 14 S. 

To help one's self, se servir, v. r., 2 S. 

Hemp, chanvre, s. m., 15 P. 

Hen, poule, s. f., 8. 

Henry, Henri, s. m., 5 P., 53. 

Herb, herbe, s. f., IS 8. 

Hero, heros, s. m., 3 3. 

Herself, clle-meme, 101. 

Here, iei, adv., 29 P., 12. 

Here is, here are, roici, 71. 

High, haut, e, adj., 43. 

Himself, lui-meme, 101. 

To hinder, empecher, v., 84. 

Hinge, gond, s. m., 13 P. 

Historian, Jiistorien, s. m., 8 S. 

History, histoire, s. f., 18. 

Hoc, /il??/?, s. f., 57. 

To hold, tenir, v. n., 28. 

Hole, trou, s. m., 8 P., 42. 

At home, d la maison. 95. 

Honest, honnete, adj., 11. 

Honey, iniel. s. m.. 9 S. 

Honesty, honnetete, s. f.. 14 3. 

Honor, "honneur, s. m.. 44. 

To honor, honorer, v. a., 3 8 

Honorable, honorable, adj., 10 3. 

Hook, crochet, s. m., 5 P. 

To hope, experer, v. n„ 66. 

Hope, espoir, s. m. ; esperance, s. f, 26 8. 

Horse, cheval, s. m., 17 P., 8; on horseback, 
d cheval. 56. 

Horse -shoe, fer d cheval, 15 S. 



512 



DICTIONARY. 



Hot, chaud, e, adj., 29. 
Hour, heure, s. f., 71. 
House, maison, s. f., 11. 
However, quel. . .que; quelqite. . .que; si. . . 
que ; 87. 

However it may be, quoi qu'il en soit. 
However, cependant, fjourtant, neanmois, 
conj., 91. 

However little, pour peu que, 17 S. 
How, comment, adv., 32 P., 55. 
How far? quelle distance? 71; jusqu'oii? 
91. 

How many? combien (de)? adv., 23; for 

bow mucb ? combien ? 55. 
How old are you ? quel age avez-vous? 72. 
Humor, Immeur, s. £, 46. 
Hundred, centaine, s. f., 94. 
Hunger,/aim, s. f., 24. 
Hunt, chasse, s. f., 97. 
To bunt, chasse?', v. v., 105. 
Hunting, chasse, s. f., 105. 
To hurry, presser, v. a., 9 S. 
Husband, mari, s. m., 55. 



I. 

I thank you, je vous remercie, 13. 
Ice, glace, s. f., 29. 
Ice-cream, glace, s. f., 16 S. 
Idea, idee, s. f., 17 S. 

If, si, conj.. 20 P. If you please, sHl tous 

plait, 20 P., 18. 
If, au cas que, en cas que, 86. 
Ignominious, ignominieux, se, adj., 20 S. 
Image, image, s. f., 6 S. 
Important, important, e, adj., 13 S. 
Incessantly, sans cesse, adv., 4 S. 
Inhabitant, habitant, e, s., 2 S. 
Injure, moire (d), v. n., 89. 
Ignorant, ignorant, e, adj., 21 P., 60. 
Island, He, s. f., 7 S. 

Immediately, aussitot, 76; immediatement, 
adv., 77. 

Immortal, immortel, le, adj., 14 S. 

It is important, il importe, 85. 

Impossible, impossible, adj., 3 S. 

Imprudence, imprudence, s. f., 10 S. 

Imprudent, imprudent, e, adj., 12 S. 

In, dans, prep., 29 P., 13. 

In a moment, tout a Vheure, adv., 43. 

In capacity of, en, 13 S. 

In case that, au cas que, en cas que, 86. 

| In order to, pour, 51 ; afln de, 14 S. 

In order that, pour que, afin que, 86. In 
such a manner that, in such a way that, 
defacon que, de sorte que, de telle mani- 
ere que, 86. In the same manner, de 
meme, de la mime maniere, 97. 

Inch, pouce, s. m., 55. 

To incommode, gener, v. a., 17. 

Incredulous, incredule, adj., 67. 

Indefinite, indefini, 100. 

Indisposed, indispose, 7 S. 

Indocile, indocile, adj., 104. 

Industrious, industrieux, se, laborieux, se, 
74. 

Infantry, infanterie, s. f., 17 S. 

Inferior, inferieur, e, adj., 22 S. 

Infinitely, infiniment, adv., 90. 

To inform, informer, v. a., 83. 

Ingenious, ingenieux, se, adj., 70. 

To inhabit, habiter, v. a., 83. 

Ink, en ere, s. f., 2. 

Inkstand, en crier, s. m., 70. 

In like manner, pareillement, adv., 6S. 



Insect, insecte, s. m., 11 S. 

Instantly, d V instant, sur le champ, tout de 
suite, adv., 41. 

Instead of, au lieu de, 60. 

To instruct, i)istruire, v. a., 16 S. 

Instructed, instruit, e, S3. 

Instrument, instrument, s. m., 64. 

To intend, compter, v. a., 41. 

To intend to do, vouloir /aire, 94. 

Intention, intention, s. £,57. 

Interest, interet, s. m., 57. 

Interestedly, from interest, par interet, 57. 

Interesting, interessant, e, adj., 70. 

Interrogative, interrogatif ve, adj., 17 S. 

Intervene, intervenir, v. n., 96. 

Intimately, intimement, adv.. 45. 

To introduce, introduire, v. a., 86; pre- 
senter, v. a., 86. 

To intrust, confier, v. a., 41. 

In the mean time, cependant, en attendant, 
91. 

In vain, en vain, adv., 

To be in vain, avoir beau, 25 S. 

To invite, inviter, v. a., 7 8. 

Ireland, Irlande, s. f., 62. 

Irishman, irlandais, s. in., 89. 

Iron, fer, s. m., 3 P., 7. 

Is there? y a-t-il? 

Is to be, doit avoir, 78. 

Italian, italien, ne, 27. 

Italy, Italie, s. f., 61. 

Ivory, ivoire, s. m., 16 P., 15. 



3. 

Jacket, veste, s. f., 8. 
James, Jacques, 53. 
January, janvier, s. in., 63. 
Jealous, jaloux, se, adj., 23 S. 
Jerome, Jerome, 7 P. 
Jet, jet, s. m., 3 P. 
Jew, juif, s. m., 26 S. 
Jewel, bijou,, s. m., 8 P. 
John, Jean, 9 P., 53. 
To join, joindre, v. a., 69. 
Joiner, m enuisier, s. m., 23. 
Jonquil, jonquille, s. f., 28. 
Joseph, Joseph, 7 P. 
Journey, voyage, s. m., 37. 
Joyous, joyeux, se, adj., 61. 
Judge, juge, s. m., 10 P. 
Judgment, jugement, s. m., 34. 
Judicial, judiciare, 22 S. 
Jug, cruche, s. f., 35. 
Juice, jus, s. m., 52. 
June, jiiin, s. m., 63. 
Julian, Julien, s. m., 10 P. 
Julius, Jules, s. m., 10 P. 
July, juillet, s. m., 63. 
Just, juste, adj., 85. 



KL. 

To keep, garder, v. a., 59. 
To keep a boarding-house, tenir pension, 
IS. 

Key, clef, s. f., 10. 

Kick, coup depied, s. m., 15. 

To kill, tuer, 105. 

Kind, genre, s. m., sorte, s. f., espece, s.f., 3 S. 
To kindle, allumer, v. a., 44. 
King, roi, s. m., 1 P., 20. 
Kingdom, royaume, s. m., 48. 
Kitchen, cuisine, s. f., 16. 



DICTIONARY. 



513 



Knee, genou, x, pi., s. m., 53. 

Knife, couteau, s. in., 8 P., 5. 

To knock, f rapper, v. a., 7 S. 

Knot, vn>ud, s. in., 11 P. 

To know, saroir, v. a., 33 ; connaitre, v. a., 35. 

I know better, d d'autres, 26 S. 



To labor, tram filer, v. a., 40. 

Labor, tm >■(/>/., s. m., 54. 

Laborious, laborievx, se, adj., 104. 

To lack, manquer, v. n., 10 S. 

It lacks, if x'eufaut, 23 S. 

Lady, dame, s. fc, 6. 

Lake, A/c, s. in., 2 P , 37. 

Lame, boiteux, se, adj., 53. 

Lame man. ouiteuv, s. m., 53. 

Lamp, lampe, s. f., 9. 

Landscape, paysage. s. m.. 19 P. 

Large, gra n J, <?, adj., 9 P., 3. 

Last, dernier, ere, adj., 10. 

Last evening, hier soir, hier au soil; 75. 

Latch, lagvet, s. m., 7 P. 

Late, turd, 63. 

Lately, dcrniercment, adv., SI; depuis pen, 

adv., 5 3. 
Latin, adj. and s. m., 48. 

To laugh, rire, v. n., 50. To laugh in the 

face, i ire au nez, 27 S. 
Lazy, parex.se if se, adj., 25. 
Lead-, pfomh, s. m., 14 P. 
To lead, mener, v. a., 40. 
Leaf, ft wMe, s. f., 3. 
Lean, maigre, adj., 42. 
To learn, apprei'idre, v. a., 48. 
Learned, meant. 6, adj., 70; inotruit, e, past 

part., 83. 

Least, le moindre, adj., 70 \le moins, 57. 

Leather, cuir, s. m., 12 P., 7. 

To leave, lai&eer, v. a., 41 ; quitter, v. a., 20 S. 

To leave it to, tim rapporter d, 25 S. 

Left, gauche, adj., 53. 

~Leg,jambe, s. f., 91. 

Legislative, legidatif, re, adj., 22 S. 

Leisure, loi*ir, s. m'., 18 S. 

To lend, prefer, v. a., 26. 

Length, fang, s. in., 14 ; longueur, s. f., 14 S. 

Less, moindre, adj., 59; moins, adv., 33; <fe 

moins, 71. 
Lest, c/f pe ur que, de crainte que, 86. 
To let, laiwer, v. a., 41. 
Letter, left re, s.f., 1. 
Lettuce, laitue, s. f., 31. 
Library, Hbliotheque, s. f., 27 S. 
To lie "down, se voucher, v. r., 5 S. 
To lie, meutir, v. n., 9 S. 
Lieutenant, lieutenant, s. m., 40. 
Life, vie, s. f., 06. 
Lightning, fowl re, s. f., 21 S. 
Light, lumiere, s. f., 55. 
Light, feg<r, ere, adj., 90. 
To light, allumer, v. a., 44. 
Lightly, h'grrcrnent, adv., 7 S. 
Like, eonfirmc, adj., 96: semblable, adj., 1C__S. 
To like better, aimer mieux, prefer er,\.&., 51. 
To my liking, d mon gre, 54. 
Lily, H&, s. m., 6 P., 35. 
Limb, membre, s. m., 4. 
Limit, Some, s. f., 21 S. 
Line, //p/ie, s. f, 45; cordenu, s. m., 90. 
Linen, Huge, s. m., 9 P. ; s. t, 9. 
Lion. /'('», s. m., 13 P., 103. 
Lip, lerre, s. f., 67. 
Liquor, liqueur, s. f., 59. 

22* 



To listen to. cconter, v a 2° 

Literary, litteraire, adj., ?05. 

Little, JWtf*. adj 6 V. ; ^ (de), adv., 15. 

A little, un peu (dr), 33. 7 ' ' 

Live, rivant, e, adj., 28. 

To live, demeurer, v. n'., 35; rirrr, v. n 37 

To live on, etore c/ f , 37. Wherewith to live' 

dequot vicre, 37. 
Living vie, s f., C6 ; good living. Ion rirrcfil. 
To load (with), charger (de), v. a. 88 78 
To lock,/(.>r™<>/- d era 12 S. 
Lock, .serrure, s. f, 13 S. 
London, Londres, s. m_ 62. 
Long, Zo?);7, ?/<>, adj., 13 P., 15. 
To long, tarder, v. n., 24. 
Long (in time), longtemiis, 45, 9 S. 
Look, ?h£h<>, s. f., 77. 
To look (appear), aroir Vair, 46. 
To look for, chercher, v. a, 21. 
To look at, regarder, v. a.. 70. 
To look as if one would or wished, avoir Fair 

de voriloir, 4 S. 
Looking-glass, miroir, s. m., glace, s. f., 37. 
To lose, perdre, v. a., 45. 
Lot, sort, s. m., 65. 
To love, aimer, v. a., 22. 
Low. bas, .se, adj., 4 P., 49. 
To lower, baisser, v. a., 90. 



M. 

Mackerel, mnquereav, s. m., 15. 

Madam, madume, s. f. 1. 

Madness, folie, s. f., 4 S. 

Magnificent, magnifique, adj., 21 P., 81. 

Maid (servant), serrante, s. f., 11. 

Mail, malle, s. f., 97. 

To maintain, soutcnir, v. a., 8 S. 

Majority (majorite), la plupart, s.f., S S. 

To make, /aire, v. a., 88. 

To make again, refaire, v. a., 52. 

Malicious, ma tin, gne, adj., 61. 

Mallet, maillet, s. m., 22 1'. 

Man, horame, s. m., 7 P., 6. 

Manage, s'y prendre, 24 S. 

To manifest, manifester, v. a., 18 S. 

Manufacture, manufacture, s. f., 12 S. 

Many, beaucovp (de). adv., 11 P., 15; bien 

(du, de la, dcs), 53. 
Marble, marbre, s. m., 14 P. 
March, mars, s. m., 63. 
To mark, marquer, v. a., 17 S. 
Market, marche, s. m., 15. 
Marriage, mariage, s. m., 1S S. 
Married, marie, e, p. part., 13 S. 
To marry, marier, se marier, epouser, 23 
Masculine, masculin, e, adj., 13 S. 
Mason, macon, s. m., 13 P., 23. 
Mast, mdt, s. ra., 4 P. 
Master, maitre, s. m., 16 P., 23. 
Master-work, chef-d'ce.urre, s. m., 89. 
Match, allumette. s. f., 56. 
Mathematics. matJiernatiques, s. f., 7S. 
Matrass, matelas, s. m., 31. 
May, mai, s. m., 63. 
It may be, if se pent, 3 S. 
Mayor, ma ire, s. m., 25 S. 
Meadow, pre, s. m., 2 P. 
Melon, melon, s. m., 4 S. 
To melt, fondre, v. a., 16 S. 
To mean (signify), vouloir dire, 94. 
Means, moi/en, s. m., 7 S. To have the means, 

avoir lea moyens, 7 S. 
To measure, mesurer, v. a., 16 S. 
Meat, via tide, s. f., 2. 



514 



DICTIONARY. 



Medicine, medicament, s. m., 95. 

To meet, to go to meet, alter d la rencontre, 

aio devant de, 75. 
To meet (to face) /aire face, 10 S. 
To meet with, rencontrer, v. a., 100. 
Melon, melon, s. m., 16 P. 
Member, membre, s. in., 16 P. 
Memorandum, memoire, s. m., 4 P. 
Memorial, memoire, s. f.. 4 P. 
Memory, memoire, s. f., 20 S. 
Menagery, menagerie, s. f. 25 S. 
To mend, raccommoder, v. a., 40. [S. 10. 
Merchant, negociant, s. m., 10; marchand, e, 
Merit, merite, s. m., 83, 11 S. 
To merit, meriter, v. a., 17 S. 
Methodist, methodiste, 22 S. 
Metre, metre, s m., 73. 
Middle, milieu, s. m., 57. 
Midnight, minuit, s. m., 13. 
Mile, mille, s. m., 57. 
Milk, lait, 8. m., 3 P., 2. 
Milk-pot, pot au lait, b. m., 20 S. 
Mill, moulin, s. m., 17. 
Miller, meunier, s. m., 11 P. 
Mind, esprit, s. m., 34. 
Minister, ministre, s. m., 43. 
Minute, minute, s. f., 73. 
Mirror, glace, s. f., 78; miroir. 
Misery, misere, s. f., 2 S. 
Miss, mademoiselle, s. f., 18 P., 6. 
Mistake, meprise, erreur, faute, s. f., 53. 
By mistake, par megarde, 55. 
To be mistaken, se tromper, v. r., 98. 
Mister, monsieur, s. m., 1. 
Mistress, maltresse, s. f., 23. 
Mode, mode, s. f., 57. 
Model, modele, s. m., 8 S. 
Moist, humide, adj., 56. 
Moment, moment, s. m., 72. 
Monday, lundi, s. m., 58. 
Money, argent, s. m., 7. 
Monk, moine, s. m., 7 P. 
Month, mois, s. m., 45. 
Moon, tune, s. f., 53. 
Moonlight, clair de lune. 56. 
More, plus, davantage, 67; deplus, 71. 
Morning, matin, s. m., 32 P., 29 ; matinee, s. 
Most part, plupart, s. f., 80. [f., 67. 

Motion, mouvement, s. m., 58. 
Motive, motif, mobile, s. in., 5S. 
Mother, mere, s. f., 5. 
Mother-in-law, belle-mere, s. f., 36. 
To mount, monter, v. n., 50. 
Mountain, montagne, s. f., 16. 
Mouse, souris, s. f., 22. 
Mouth, bouche, s. f., 33. 
To move, remuer, v. a., 65 ; mouvoir, v. a., 65. 
Movement, mouvement, s. in., 53. 
Much, beaucoup (de), adv., 11 P., 15; Men 
Mud, boue, s. f., 56. [du, de la, des], 53. 
Mule, mulet, s. m., 10 P. ; mule, s. f., 8. 
Musician, musicien, ne, s., 40. 
Must, devoir, v., 61. 
Mustard, moutarde, s. f., 27. 
Mustard-cup, pot d moutarde, s. f., 51. 
Myself, moi-meme, 93. 

N. 

Nail, clou, s. m.. 8 P., 18. 

Nail (of an animal), ongle, s. m., 106. 

Name, nom, s. m., 35. 

Napkin, serviette, s. f., 12. 

Narration, recit, s. m., 9S. 

Narrow, eiroit, e, adj., 11 P., 43. 

Nation, nation, s. f., 16 S. 



Natural, naturel, le, adj., 4 S. 

Nature, nature, s. f., 67. 

Nearly, d peu pres, adv., 95. 

To be necessary, ftlloir, v. imp., 57; etre ne- 

Neck, cou, s. m.,*49. [cessaire, 57. 

Needle, aiguille, s. f., 20. 

Negative, negatif ve, adj., 17. 

To neglect, negliger, v. a., 40. 

Negligent, negligent, e, adj., 74. 

Neighbor, voisin, e, s., 20 P., 10. 

Neither, ne—ni, conj., 21; ni run ni Vautre, 

Nephew, neveu, s. in., 23 P., 15. [pron., 25. 

Nest, nid, s. m., 42. 

Net, filet, s. m., 42. 

Never, (ne) jamais, adv., 29. 

New, neuf, ve, adj., 33; nowveau, 33; nou~ 

News, nouvelle, s. f., 37. [vel, le, 49. 

New Orleans, la Nouvelle Orleans, 62. 

Newspaper, journal, s. in., 14. 

Next, pvochain, e, adj., 45. 

Next to, d cote de, 81. 

Niece, niece, s. f , 15. 

Night, nuit, s. f., 29. 

Night before last, Vavant derniere nuit, 

Noble, noble, adj., 91. [avant-hier soir, 85. 

Nobody, (ne) personne, 32. 

Nobody's, celui de personne. 

Noise, bruit, s. m., 41. 

No sooner, pas plus tot, 76. 

No more, ne plus (de), 43. 

None, no one, ne — aucun, 40. 

No one, ne — personne, 32 P., 40. 

Noon, midi, s. m., 73. 

Nor, ni, conj., 21 ; nor I either, ni moi non 
North, nord, s. m., 39. [plus, 20 S. 

Nose, nez, s. m., 15 P. 
Not, ne—pas or point, adv., 5. 
Not yet, pas encore, adv., 29. 
Not at all, pas du tout, 34. 
Note, billet, s. m., 28. 
Nothing, ne—rien, 32 P. 
Nothing else, rien autre cJwse, 59. 
Novelty, nouveaute, s. f„ 73. 
Novel, nouveau, elle, adj., 49. 
Novel, roman, s. m , 22 S. 
November, novembre, s. m., 64. 
Now, d present, adv., 32 P., 41 ; maintenant, 
adv., 72, 

Nowhere, nullepart, adv., 32 P., 40. 
Number, nombre, s. m., 73 ; numero, s. m., 73. 
Nut, noix, s. f., 11. 

O. 

Oak. chene, s. m , 16 P. 

Obedient, obeissant, e, 15 S. 

To obey, obeir (d), v. n., 85. 

Object, objet. s. m., 8 S. 

Obligation, obligation, s. f., 91. 

To be under obligations, avoir des dbliga- 

To oblige, obliger^v. a., 79. [Hons, 99. 

Obliged, oblige, e, p. part., 89. 

To obscure, obscurcir, v. a., 24 S. 

Observation, observation, s. f., 104. 

Obstacle, obstacle, s. m., 89. 

Occasionally, de temps en temps, 71. 

Occupation, occupation, s. f., 18 S. 

Occupied, occupe, e, 77. 

To occur, survenir, v. n., 96. 

October, octobre, s. m., 63. 

Odor, odeur, s. f., 39. 

Of course, cela va sans dire, cela tfentend, 
Of i t, of them, en, pron., 33. [25 8. 

Of the, du, m.. de la, f., des, pi., 6. 
Of whom, dont, 41 ; de qui, * 
To offend, qffenser, v. a., 77. 



DICTIONARY. 



olo 



To offer, offirir, v. a., 55. 

Offer, offre, s. f., 75. 

Officer, officier, s. m., 41. 

Often. souvent, adv., 29. 

Old. riexx, vieil, na., vieille, f., 22. 

Old age, vifilUsse, s, f., 14 S. 

Old man, vieillard, s. m., S7. 

Old woman, vieille, s. f., 21 8. 

On, Mtf*, prep, H P., 12. 

On it, rifliwwy, adv., 45. 

On purpose, expres, adv., 86. 

On the other side, cfe I'autre cote, 85. 

One, o», pron., 49. 

One's self, toi, pron., 51. 

Onion, oignon, s. m., 14. 

Only, senlc/nent, adv., 41. 

Only, seul, e, adj., 41. 

To open, ouvHr, v. a., 55 ; eclore, v. n., 96. 

Opera, opera, s. m., 63. 

Opinion, aiv's, s. m., opinion, s. f., 3 S. 

To oppose, opposer, v. a., 24 S. 

Opposite, n«-(i-rM. prep., 80. 

Orchard, verger, 8. m., 85. 

To order, ordowrier- \, a., 84. 

Order, ordre, s. m., 3 S. 

Other, autre, adj., 19. 

Others, autrvi, 49. 

Out of, /io< «, prep., 64. 

Over, de V autre cote, 85. 

It is all over with, e'en est fait de, 25 &. 

To overlook, donner sur, 25 S. 

To overthrow, renverser, v. a., 8 8. 

To owe, devoir, v. a., 61. 

Ow], hi bo a. s. m., S P. 

Ox, loiuf, s. in., 11 P. 

P. 

Pace, pas, s. m., 71. 

Padlock, cad cuts, s. m., 4 P. 

Pase, p ige, s. f., 5. 

Pail, seau, s. m., 20. 

Pain, doit'rur, peine, gene, 6. f., 99. 

To pain,/<7i'/v mal. v. n., 51. 

To have a pain in, avoir mal a, 51. 

Painter, peintre, s. m., 10 P. 

Paintin?, pdnfnre, s. f, 12 8. 

Pair, pdire, s. f, 12. 

Palace, pa la in. 8. m , 3 P. 

Pancake, crepe, s. f, 61. 

Panorama, jjanorama, s. m., 8 P. 

Pansy, pensee, s. f., 35. 

Pantaloons, pantaion, s. m., 9. 

Paper, papier, s. rn., 12 P. 

Par i sol, 2>tn-anol, s. m , 14. 

Parlor, salon, s. m., 21. 

Parrot, perroquet, s. m., 7 P. 

Partner, associe, s. in., 55. 

Party, parti e, s. f., 73. 

To pass, passer, v. a., 63. 

To pass over, traverser, v. a., 6 S. 

To pa-s in spite of, passer sur le ventre d, 

Passion, passion, s. f., 63. • [27 8. 

Passport passe-port, s. m., 25 8. 

Past, paae, e, p. part., 54. 

Path, chemin, s. ni., 11 P. 

Patient, malade,, 8. in., 29 P. 

Vo.r\x\<\zo,perdreau, s. rn., perdrix, s.f., 2 S. 

To pav. payer, v. a., 68. 

To pay attention, /aire attention, 53. 

Pea, pais. s. m., 1 P. 

Peach, peche, s. f , 8. 

Peach-tree, pecher, s. in., 16 P. 

Pea-, poire, s. f, 8. 

Pear-tree, poirier, s. m., 24 P., 13 S. 

Pen, plume, s. f., 1. 



Pencil, crayon, 19 P., 5. 

Pendulum, pendule, s. m., 14 

To penetrate, penitrer, v. a., 5 S. 

Penknife, canif, a. in., 21 P., 33. 

People, gens, peuple, s. m., 13, C 8. ; monde, 

Pepper, poivre, s. in., 16. r 5 . m., 40 

Pepper-box, poivr-iere, 8. f., 89; boite d 

poivre, s. f., 19 S. 
To perceive, apercevoir, v. a., 57; s'apcrce- 

voir, v. r., 2 8. 
Perfectly, parfaitement, adv., 45. 
Perfume, parfum, s. m., 12 P. 
Perhaps, peut-etre, 58. 
To permit, permettre, v. a,, 86. 
Person, personne, s. f., 44. 
Peru, Perou, s. m., 62. 
Pewter, etain, s. m., 22. 
Philip, Philippe, s. in., 53. 
Philosopher, jihilosnphe, s. rn., 14 8. 
Phrase, phrase, s. £, S3. 
Physic, midecine. s. m., 95. 
Physician, medecin, s. m., 15. 
Piano, piano, s. m., 9 8. 
To pick up, ramasser, v. a., 30. 
Picture, tableau, s. m., 54. 
Pie, pate, s. in., 7S. 

Piece, piece, s. f., 19 ; morceau, s. m., 43. 

Pig. cochon, s. m., ;>9. 

Pigeon, pigeon, s. m., 14 P., 7 8. 

Pile, to*, s m., 4 P. 

Pin, eping/e, s. f., 7. 

Pine, pin, s. m., 9 P. 

Pink, au"/7e£, s. m., 4 8. 

Pious, pieux, &e, adj., 12. 

Pirate, pirate, s. m., 6 P. 

Pitcher, cruche, s. f., 35. 

To pity, phdndre, v. a., 35. 

It is a pity, e'est dommage, 91. 

What a pity, quel dommage, 22 8. 

Place, lieu, s. m., 11 P., 40; tndroit, s. m., 

40 ; place, s. f.. 40. 
To place, placer, v. a., 64. 
Plain, 2>(aine, s. f..l7 S. 
Plan, plan, s. m., 19 8. 
Plank, planche, s. f , 12. 
Plaster, pldtre, s. m., 14 P. 
Plate, assiette, s. f, 3. 
Pltiy,jeu, b. m., IIP: spectacle, s. m., 59. 
To \)\a.y, joue>\ v. n., 50, 0-1. 
To please, plaire, v. n., 57. 
Pleased, content, e, adj., D3. 
To be ] leased, saroir bon gre, 7 8. 
Much pleased, bien aise, 74. 
Pleasure, plaisir, s. m., 35. 
To give pleasure,/««>Y _p£ai«V, 57. 
Plow, charrue, s. £, 57. 
Plum, prune, s. f., 9. 
Plum-tree, prunier, s, m., 24 P., 11 3. 
Pocket, poche, s. f., 38. 
Pocket-book, porte-feuille, s. m., 31. 
Pocket-handkerchief, mouchoir de poche, 
Poet, poete, s. m., 18 8. [s. m., 35. 

Poison, poison, s. m.. 20 P., 22 8. 
Poor, pauvre, adj.. 11. 
Pope, p'ttpet, s. m., 2 P. 
Porcelain, porcelaine, s. f . 7. 
Portfolio, porte-feuille, s. m., 31. 
Portugal, Portugal, s. m., 62. 
Position, poste. s. m.. 10 8. 
Possible, possible, adj.. S5. 
Post, poteau, s. m.. 8 P. 
Post, paviff, s. m., 10 8. 
Post-office, posA', s. f., 10 8. 
Postpone, remettre. v. a., 8 3. 
Potato, pomme de terre, s f., 9. 
Poultry, volaillf, s. f, 23 



516 



DICTIONARY. 



Pound, livre, s. f , 22. 

To pour, terser, v. a., 19 S. 

Powder, pottdre, s. f, 98. 

Power, pouvoir, s. m., 48. 

Powerful, puissant, e, adj., 10 S. 

Practice, ]<»"atique, s f., C>4. 

To praise, loue/; v. a., 74. 

To pray, prier, v. a., 62. 

Prayer, priere, s. f., 20 S. 

To preach, precher, v. n., 21 S. 

Preacher, predicatev/r, s. in., 21 S. 

Precious, precieux, se, adj., 49. 

To precipitate, precipiter, v. a., 25 S. 

Precisely, au juste, bl ; precisemment, 96. 

To prefer, preferer, aimer mieux, v. a., 51. 

To prepare, preparer, v. a., 18 S. 

Presbyterian, presbyter ien, 22 S. 

Presence, presence, e. f., 20 S. 

Present, presen', e, adj., 97. 

Present, cadeau, present, s. m., 95. 

To present, presenter, introduire, v. a., 86. 

At present, d present, 5 S. 

Presently, tout a llieure, adv., 43. 

To preserve, cnnserver, v. a., 20 S. 

President, president, s. m., 17. 

To press, presser, v. a., 9 S. 

To pretend,/oire sembla»t, 7 S. 

Preterite, preterit, s. m., 98. 

Pretty, joli, e, adj., 7 P., 5. 

To prevent, empecher, v. a., 84. 

Price, prix, s. m., 68 ; at what price, combien, 

Priest, pretre, s. m.. 21 S. [55. 

Prince, prince, s. m , 23. 

Princess, princesse, s. f., 23. 

Principal, principal, s. m., 16 S. 

Prisoner, prisonnier, s. m., 13 S. 

To proceed (from), provenir, v. n., 96. 

Proclamation, proclamation, s. f., 103. 

To produce, produire, v. a., 62. 

Professor, professeur, s. m., 89. 

Profit, profit,' a. m., 46. 

To profit, profiler, v. a , 104 

Progress, progres, s. m., 93. 

Promenade, promenade, s. f., 5 S. 

Promise, promesse, s. f., 2 S. 

To promise, promettre, v. a., 55. 

To pronounce, 2y)"ononce?\ v. a., 3 S. 

Proper, propre, adj., 96. 

It is proper, il est a propos, 85. 

Properly, conv enablement, adv., 27. 

Property, bien, s. m., 49. 

Protestant, protestant, e, 21 S. 

Trovd, jier, e, adj., 37. 

To prove, prouver, v a., 86. 

Provided that, pourvu que, 86. 

Prudent, prudent, e, adj., 89. 

Prudently, prudemment, adv., 3 S. 

Prussia, Prusse, s. f., 62. 

To pull, arracher, v. a., 81. 

To punish, punir, v. a., 60. 

Pupil, e 7 eve, s. m. and f., 10. 

Pure, pur, e, adj., 67. 

Purse, bourse, s. f., 28. 

To put, mettre, v. a., 39. 

To put back, remettre, v. a., 8 S. 

To put to the sword, passer au fil de Vepee, 

Pyramid, pyramide, s. f., 24 S. [2 S. 

Q. 

Quarter, quart, s. m., 71. 

Queen, reine, s. f., 23. 

Question, question, s. f., 67. 

Quiet, tranquille, 105. 

Quince-tree, cou/nassier, s. m., 24 P. 

Quite, tout-d-fait, 66. 



R. 

Rabbit, Icqrin, s. m., 12 P. 

Pace, race, s. f., 26 S. 

Radish, rave, s. f., 32. 

Pailroad, chemin de fer, s. m., 20 3. 

Rain, pluie, s. f., 43. 

To rain, pleuvoir, v. imp., 5 S. 

It rains, ilpleut, 42. 

To raise, lever, v. a., 90. 

Rake, ruteati, s. m., 6 P. 

Rank, rang, s. m., 20 S. 

Rare, peu cuit, e, adj., 31. 

Rat. rat, s. m., 4 P., 22. 

Rather, plut'ot, adv., 5S. 

Raw, cru, e, adj., 31. 

To read, lire, v. a., 46. 

Reading, lecture, s. f., 42. 

Ready, pret, e, adj., 64. 

Real, reel, e, 25 S. 

Really, reellement, adv., 12 S. 

To reappear, reparaUre, v. n., 11 8. 

Reason, raison, s. f., 13 S. 

To receive, recevoir, v. a., 32. 

To recite, inciter, v. a., 45. 

To reckon, comjjter, v. a., 41. 

To reclaim, reclamer, v. a., 16 S. 

To recognize, reconnaitre, v. a., 48. 

To recollect, s<? rap>peler, se souvenir, v. r., 

Recompense, recompense, s. f., 51. [16 S. 

Red, rouge, adj., 26 P., 20. 

To reduce, reduire, v. a., 90. 

Reed, roseau, s. in., 7 P. 

To re-enter, rentrer, v. n., 96. 

Reflective, reflechi, e, adj., 4 S. 

To refresh, refraichir, v. a., 6 S. 

To refuse, refuser, v. a., 56. 

Regularly, regulierement, adv., 13 S. 

To'relate, raconter, v. a., IS S. 

Relation, parent, e, s., 29 P., 12. 

Relative, parent, e, s., 12. 

To remain, rester, v. n., 35. 

Remedy, remede, s. m., 70. 

To remember, se rappeler, v. r., 91 ; se souve- 

nir, v. r., 92. 
Remembrance, souvenir, s. m., 25 S. 
Repast, repas, s. m , 106. 
To repent, se repentir, v. r., 92. 
To reply, repliquer, v. n., 9 S. 
Representative, represeniant, s. m., 6 S. 
Republic, republique, s. f., 6 S. 
Reputation, reputation, s. f., 53. 
To resolve, resoudre, v., 69. 
Respect, respect, s. m., 86. 
To respect, respecter, v. a., 98. 
Rest, reste, s. m., 88. 
Resuming, reprise, s. f., 6 S. 
To retard, retarder, v. n., 5 S. 
Retreat, retraite, s. f., 21 S. 
Return, retour, s. m,, 44. 
To return (restore), rendre, v. a., 34. 
To return (come back), revenir, v. n., 45. 
To return (turn back), retourner, v. n., 99. 
To have .returned, etre de retour, 45. 
Revolution, revolution, s. f., 76. 
Reward, recompense, s. f., 52. 
To reward, recompenser, v. a., 60. 
Ribbon, ruban, s. m., 15 P., 45. 
Rice, riz, s. m., 9 S. 
Rich, riclie, adj., 11. 
Riches, richesse, richesses, s. f., 77. 
To ride a horse, monter un cheval, 106. 
To ride on horseback, monter d cheval, 106. 
Right, droit, s. m., 4 S. 
Right, droit, e, adj., 16 S. 
To be right, avoir raison, 24, 70. 



DICTIONARY. 



517 



King, anneau, s. m., 7. 
King (of the linger), bague, s. t , 7. 
To ring, nonner, v. n., 97. 
Kipe, mur, e, adj., 10 P., 72. 
To ripen, murir, v. n., 81. 
To rise, se fewer, v. r., 5 S. 
Kiver, riviere, s. £, 10. 
Road, chemin, s. in., 43. 
To roar, rugir, v. n., 103. 
Koast meat, row, s. rn., 16. 
Koast beet; bait/ rati, s. m., 16. 
To rob, -voter, v. a., 68. 
Kobber, col ear, s. m., 60. 
Kock, ruche r, s. m., 5 P., 71. 
Roman, romain, e, 67. 
Romance, roman, s. m., 22 S. 
Kooni, chambre, s. f., 14. 
Kope, twc/e, s. 1"., 15. 
Kose, roue, s. 1'., 9. 
Kose-tree, rosier, s. m., 24 P. 
Kound, rond, e, adj., 15 P., 42. 
Kuby, ruble, s. m., 10 P. 
Kule, regie, s. f., 44 
To run, courir, v. m, 57. 
To run away, fsen/uir, v. r., 14 S. 
i, Itussie, 8. £, 62. 



S. 

Saber, sa&re, s. m., 14 P. 

Sack, sac, s. rn., 2 P. 

Sacred, saint, e, adj., IS S. 

Sad, triste, adj.. 32 : fdcheux, se, adj., 89, 

Saddle, si-lle, s. f., 84 

Safety-rail Ing, garde-J'ou, s. £, 21 S. 

Sail, voile, s. f.,97. 

Sailor, mutelot, s. m., 5 P., 19. 

To sail, salir, v. a., 7 S. 

Salt, sel, s. m., 45. 

To salt, gofer, v. a., 76. 

Salt, salted, sale, e, adj., 42. 

Salt-cellar, saliere, s. f., 5. 

Same, mime, 16 P., 19. 

Sand, sable, s. m., 17 P. 

Sardine, sardine, s. f., 15. 

Saturday, samedi, s. rn., 58. 

Saucer, "soucoupe, s. f., 15. 

Saw, scie, s. i\, 6. 

Say, dm', v. a., 46. 

Scholar, ecolicr, ere, 10 ; eleve, 10. 

School, ecole, s. f., 29. 

School-mist res-. no .'Urease d' ecole, 23. 

Science, science, s. f., 16 S. 

Scotland, Ecosse, s. f., 62. 

Sea, mer, s. f.. 70 ; by sea, par mer, 7 S. 

Seamstress, couturiere, s. 1'., 23. 

Secret, secret, s. m., 41. 

Secret, secret, ete, adj., 41. 

To see, voir, v. a., 42. 

To seek, chercher, v. a., 25 P., 21. 

To seem, sembler, v. a , S6. 

To seize, xaisir, v. a., 46. 

Self, mime, 41. 

Self, M, 90. 

To sell, vendre, v. a., 46. 

Semblance, semblant, s. m., 7 3. 

Senate, sen at, s. m., 6 S. 

To send, enroyer, v. a., 26. 

To send away, renvoyer, v. a., 14 S. 

To separate, separer, v. a., 22 S. 

September, septembre, s. m., 63. 

Seriooa, serieux. se, adj., 94. 

Servant, domestique, s. m., 8 ; serviteur, 

s. m., 5 S. 
To 6erve, servir, v. a., 4 S. 
Service, service, s. m., 33. 



To set about, s'y prendre, 24 8. 

lo set out, partir, v. u., 41. 

Se\<i r a.\,plusieur8, 43. 

At several times, d plusieurs reprises. 6 S 

r l o sew, coudre, v. a., 09. ■'«»•<' °- 

Shade, ombruge, s. m., 79 ; ombre, s. f 79 

Share, j9«/-^<>, s. i.,2Mrt,&. f Lgft ' ' 

T.o shave, rosar, v. a., 90. 

Shawl, chdle, s. m., 3 S. 

Sheep, mouton, s. m., brebis, s £ 8. 

ST' hrilUr ' v - n -> 12 s -; n., 

Ship, vaisseau, s. m., 7 P. ; narfr* , s. m., 24. 

Shoe, Soulier, s. m., 23 P., 4. 

To shoe a horse, ferrer un cheval, 15 S. 

Shoemaker, cordonnier, s. m., 23. 

Shop, boutique, s. f., 79. 

Shopkeeper, man-hand, e, S., 10. 

Shore, nvage, s. m., 70. 

Short, court, e, adj., S P., 61. 

Shot, covp de fusil, 24 S. 

Shoulder, epaule, s. f., 53. 

Shovel, pelle, s. f., 57. 

To show, montrer, v. a., 30. 

To shut, fermer, v. a., 44. 

Sick, malade, adj., 29 P., 19. 

Sick man, malade, s. in., 20 P., 19. 

Sickness, maladie, s. 1'., 05. 

Side, cote, s. m., 59. 

Sight, vue, s. 1"., 43. 

Sign, signe, s. m., enseigne, s. f., 10 8. 

To signify, vouloir dire, 94. 

Silk, sole, s. 1'.. 7. 

Silver, argent, s. m., 18 P., 7. 

Similar, se.mblable, adj , 10 8. 

Simple, simple, adj., 100. 

Since, puixque, conj., 93; depuis, 80. 

To sing, chanter, v. a., 54. 

Singer, chant eur, s. in., 17 P. 

Singing, chant, s. in., 103. 

Sir, monsieur, s. m., 1. 

Sister, see Mr, s. f., 5. 

Sister-in-law, belle-soeur, s. f., 12. 

To sit down, s'asseoir, v. r., 93. 

Skill, savoir /aire, 9 S. 

Skillful, habile, adj., 55. 

To be skilled in, se connaltre en (or a), etre 

connuisseur en, 11 8. 
Skin, jieau, s. f., 43. 
Sky, del (cieux, pi.), 64. 
Slate, ardoise, s £, 4 
Sleep, sommeil, s. m., 24. 
To sleep, dormir, v. n., 56. 
Slightly, legcrement, adv., 7 8. 
Slippery, glissant, e, adj., 56. 
Slit./e/fte, s. f., 42. 
Slowly, lentement, adv., 3 S. 
Small, peM. e, adj., 6 P. 
Smell, odevr, s. t, 39. 
To smell, sentir, v. a., 42. 
To smoke, /timer, v. a., 75. 
Snow, neige, s. f., 78. 
To snow, neiger, v. imp., 12 8. 
Snuff, tabac d jiriser, s. m., 12. 
So, St, adv., 53. 
So soon, sitot, 46. 

So many, tant, so many that, tant que, 51. 

So much, tant, so much that, tant que, 51. 

So that, de sorte que, de J'aron que, de ma. 

Soap, savon, s. m., 12. [niere que, 86 

Society, societe, s. f., 105. 

Sofa, canape, s. m., 2 P., 15. 

Soft, mou, mode, adj., 29. 

Soldier, sold at. s. m'., 5 P., 19. 

To solve, rexoudre. v. a., 69. 

Some, du, de r (m.), de la (f.), des (pi), 



518 



DICTIONARY. 



Some, quelque, adj., 32. 

Some move, encore, 43. 

Somebody, quelqu'un, 35. 

Somebody's, celui de quelqu'un, 36. 

Some one, quelqu'un, 35. 

Something, quelque chose, 32 P., 14. 

Something else, quelque autre chose, s. f., 59. 

Some time, quelque temps, 45. 

Sometimes, quelquefois, adv., 29. 

Somewhere, quelque part, adv., 4C. 

So much the better, tantmieux, 17 S. 

Son,^s, s. m., 22 P., 6. 

Son-iu-law, gendre, s. m., 36. 

Song, chanson, s. f., 54. 

Soon, bientbt, adv., 53. 

Soon enough, asses tot, adv., 76. 

Sooner, plus tot, adv., 58. 

Sorrow, chagrin, s. m., 56. 

Sorry, fdche, e, 64. 

Soul, dme, s. f., 14 S. 

Sound, so?i, s. in., 15 S. 

Soup, soupe, s. f., 10. 

Sour, aigre, adj., 20. 

South, sud, s. m., 39. 

Space, espace, s. m., S S. 

Spade, Uche, s. f., 9 P., 57. 

Spain, Espagne, s. f., 62. 

Spaniard, espagnol, s. m., 27. 

Spectacle, spectacle, s. m., 17 P., 59. 

To spill, repandre, v. a., 8 S. 

Spirit, esprit, s. m., 34. 

To split, fend re, v. a., 80. 

Spoke, rais, s. m., 3 P. 

Spoon, cuiller, or cuillere, s. f., 5. 

Spot, tache, s. f., 50. 

Spouse, epoux, se, s., 55. 

To spread, etendre, v. a., 7 S. ; se repandre, 

Spring, printemps, s. m., 56. [v. a., 8 S. 

Square, carre, e, 42. 

Squirrel, ecureuil, s. m., 105. 

Stable, ecurie, s. f., 15 P., 30. 

Stag, cerf, s. in., 3 P., 97. 

Stair-case, escalier, s. m., 21 S. 

To be at stake, y aller de, 24 S. 

Star, etoile, s. f., 53. 

State, etat, s. m., 100. 

Stature, stature, s. f., 26 S. 

To stay, rester, v. n., 41. 

Stay, sejour, s. m., 12 S. 

To steal, voler, v. a., 68; derober, v. a., 80. 

By stealtb, d la derobee, 26 S. 

Steam, vapeur, s. m., 49. 

Steam-boat, bateau d vapeur, s. m., 51. 

Steam mill, moulin d vapeur, s. m., 51. 

Steel, acier, s. m., 16 P., 7. 

Step, pas, s. m., 71. 

Stepdaughter, belle-fille, s. f., 36. 

Stepfather, beau-pere, s. m., 36. 

Stepmother, belle-mere, s. f.. 36. 

Stepson, beau-Jils, s. m., 36.' 

Stick, baton, s. m., 6. 

Still, encore,toujours, adv., 29. 

Stocking, bas, s. m., 4 P. 

Stomach, estomac, s. m., 67. 

Stone, pierre, s. f., 19. 

Store, magasin, s. m., 29 P., 11. 

Storm, orage, s. m., 43. 

Stormy, orageux, se, adj., 24 S. 

Story, etage, s. m., 19 S. 

Stove, poele, s. m., 88. 

Straight, droit, e, adj., 53. 

Strange, etrange, adj., 54. 

Stranger, etranger, ere, s., 10. 

Straw, paille, s. f., 15. 

Strawberry, /raise, s. f., 14. 

Street, rue, s. f., 12. 



Strength, force, s. f., 74. 

The strife is who, &est d qui, 24 S. 

StriDg, cordon, s. m., 57. 

Strong,/^, e, adj., 5 P., 57. 

Studious, studieux, se, adj., 55. 

To study, etudier, v. a., 27. 

Study, etude, s. f., 52. 

Stupid, stupide, adj., 1 S. 

To style, traiter {de), v. a., 27 3. 

To subdue, soumettre, v. a., 89. 

Subject, sujet, s. m., 5 S. 

Subject, sujet, ie, adj., 52. 

Subjunctive, subjonctif, s. m., 18 S. 

To submit, en passer pa r, 26 S. 

Substantive, sicbstaniif, s. in., 17 S. 

To succeed, parvenir, reussir, v. n., 67. 

To succeed in, venir d bout de, 26 S. 

Such, tel, le, adj., 89. 

Suddenly, tout-d-coup, adv., 5 S. 

To suffer, souffrir, v. a., 64. 

Sufficient, asses, saffisamment, 51. 

It is sufficient, il suffit, 85. 

Sufficiently, suffisamment, 15 P., SL 

Sugar, sucre, s. m., 14 P., 2. 

To suit, convenir, v. n., 100. 

Suitable, convenable, adj., 96. 

It is suitable, il convient, 85. 

Sum, somme, s. f., 95. 

Summer, ete, s. m., 56. 

Sun, soleil, s. m., 22 P., 39. 

Sunday, dimanche, s. m., 58. 

To sup, souper, v. n., 76. 

Superb, superbe, adj., 22. 

Supper, souper, s. m., 76. 

To support, appuyer, v. a., 95; soutmir, 8 S. 

To suppose, supposer, v. n., 96. 

Supposition, supposition, s. f., 2 S. 

Supreme, supreme, adj., 22 S. 

Sure, sur, e, adj., 5 S. 

Surgeon, chirurgien, s. m., 80. 

To surprise, surprendre, v. a., 80. 

Surprised, surpris, e, 74. 

Swan, eigne, s. m., 21 P. 

Sweden, Suede, s. £, 61. 

Sweet, doux, ce, adj., 20 ; sucre, e, 59. 

Sweetened, sucre, e, 59. 

Swelled, ewjtfe, e, 49. 

Swift, adj., 49. 

To swim, nager, v. n., 75. 

Swimmer, nageur, s. m., 11 P. 

By swimming, d la nage. 

Swine, pore, s. m., 5 P. ; cochon, s. m., 59. 

Switzerland, Suisse, s. f., 62. 

Swollen, enfie, e, 49. 

Sword, sabre, s. m., 14 P. ; epee, s. f., 1 S. 
Syrup, sirop, s. m., 6 P., 61. 

T. 

Table, table, s. f., 1. 

Tailor, tailleur, s. m., 16. 

To take, prendre, v. a., 48. 

To take again, reprendre, v. a., 52. 

To take to, amener, v. a., 60. 

To take off, bter, v. a., 41. 

To take away from, derober, v. a., 80. 

To take cold, s'enrhumer, 2 S. 

To take place, avoir lieu, 77. 

To take care of, soigner, v. a., 85. 

To take it into one's head, s^aviser de, 16 S. 

To take possession of, s'emparer, v. r., 92. 

To talk, causer, v. n., 54. 

Task, tache, s. f., 50. 

Taste, gout, s. m., 4S. 

To taste, gouter, v. a., 25. 

To taste of, avoir un gout de, 48. 



DICTIONARY. 



519 



Tavern, auberge, taverne, s. f., 22 S. 

Tea, the, s. m., 2 P., 2. 

To teach, enseigner, v. a., 16 S. 

To tear, dechirer, v. a., 88. 

Terrible, terrible, adj., 103. 

Than, que, before a number, de, 72. 

To thank (for), remercier {de), v. a., 33. 

Thank God, Dieu merci, 75. 

That, ce, cet, cette, adj., celui, celle, pron., 25 

P. ; cela, 40; que, conj., 45. 
That which, celui qui, celui que, 31 P. 
That one, celui-ld, celle-ld, 21. 
That is it, &est cela, 41. 
That of which, celui dont, 41 ; ce dont, 41. 
That way, par Id. 
That, in order that, pour que, S6. 
The one. eetui, celle,; the ones, eeux, celles, 
The one of, cdui o>, ceWe de, 18. [25 P. 
The ones of, ceux de, celles de, 13. 
The one who, celui qui, celle qzri, 25 P. 
The one whom, celui que, celle que, 20 P. 
The one which, celui qui or que, celle qui or 

que, 20. 

The one of whom, celui de qui, duquel, dont. 
Theater, theatre, s. m., 14 P., 63. 
Theft, vol, s. m., 6 S. 

Then, ulors, dona, 46 ; and then, puis, 11 S. 

There, Id. adv., 29 P., 13. 

There is, there are. voikl, 71 ; il y a, 60. 

Thereon, dexsus. adv., 45. 

Thereunder, dessous, adv., 45. 

Therefore, c"e.st pourquoi, 23 S. 

These, ces, adj., 6. 

Thick, ipaia, se, adj., 43. 

Thickness, dpaissew, s. m., 15. 

Thief, voleur, s. m.. 60. 

Thimble, de, s. m., 2 P. 

Thing, chose, s C, 14. 

To think, penser (a\ v. n., 40. 

To think much of, fa ire cas de, 26 9. 

Third, Hare, s. m.. 93. 

Thirst, soif, s. f., 24. 

Thirty, treat ante, s. t, 94. 

This, ce, cet, cette, adj., ceci, pron. 

This one, celui-ci, oeue-ci, 21. 

This wav, par ici, 37. 

Thistle, chardon, s. m,, 17 P. 

Those, ces, adj., 6. 

Those which, ceux qui, ceux que, celles qui, 

celles que, 20. 
Though, Mm que, 86; encore que, quoique, 
Thread,^, s. m., 6 P., 41. [17 3. 

To threaten, menacer, v., 17 S. 
Throat, gorge, s. f., 19 S. 
To throw, jeter, v. a., 78. 
Thumb, pouce, s. m., 55. 
Thunder, tonnerre, s. m., 42. 
To thunder, tonner, v. imp., 12 3. 
Thursday, jeudi, s. m., 68. 
Thus, ainsi, adv., 79. 
Thyself, toi-meme, 101. 
To tie, attacker, v. a., 99. 
Tight, etroit, e, adj., 43. 
Time, tempt, s. m., 27 ; epoque, s. f., 20 S. 
To it, to them, y, pron., 39. 
To the, au (m.), d la (f.), aux (pi.), 16. 
To the house of, chez, prep., 16. 
Tobacco, tabac, s. m., 10. 
Tobacco-box, boite d tabac, s. f., 51. 
To-dav, aujourd'hui, 32 P., 25. 
Together, ensemble, adv., 66. 
Toilet, toilette, s. £, 76. 
Tolerably, passablement, adv., 18 9. 
Tomato, tomate, s. f., 29. 
To-morrow, demain, adv., 41. 
Tongs, pincettes, s. f., 20 S. 



Tongue, langue, s. f, 45. 

Too much, £rop, tfe trop, 42. 

Too little, ^'Oj9 peu, de mains, 71. 

Too soon, trop tut, adv., 76. 

Tool, outil, s. m., 45. 

Tooth, dent, s. f., 54. 

Tooth-ache, mat de dent, s. m., 54. 

Tooth-pick, cure-dents, s. m., 54. 

Top, haut, sommet, s. in., 73. 

Topsy-turvy, sens dessus dessous, 27 9. 

To touch, toucher, v. a., 61. 

Towards, vers, envers, prep., 79, 2 9. 

Towel, essuie-mains, s. m., 65. 

Trader, marchand, s. m., 17 P. 

To translate, traduire, v. a., 45. 

To travel, voyager, v. n., 64. 

Traveler, voyageur, s. m., 40. 

Good travelling, bon voyager, 6L 

Treasure, tresor, s. m., 8 3. 

Tree, arbre, s. m., 14 P., 15. 

To tremble, trembler, v. n., 84. 

To triumph, triompher, v. n., 104. 

True, vrai, e, adj., 52. 

Trunk, malle, s. £. 4, 97 ; tronc, s. m., 24 9. 

To trust, /aire credit, 79. 

Truth, t-e>-i7e, s. f., 91. 

To try, essayer, v. n., 77. 

Tuesday, mardi, s. m., 58. 

Tulip, tulipe, s. f., 9. 

Tumbler, rerre, s. m.. 3 P. 

Turf, gazon, s. m., 29 P., 34. 

Turkey, Turquie, s. f., 62. 

Turkey, dindon, s. in., dinde, s. f., S3, 

Turn, tour, s. m., 59. 

To turn, tourner, v. a., 66. 

Tutor, precepteur, s. m., 14 9. 

Twenty, vingtaine, s. f., 94. 

,U. 

Ugly, Jaid", e, adj., 4 P., 11 ; rilain, e, adj., 11. 

Umbrella. parapluie, s. m., 20. 

Uncle, oncle, s. m., 22 P., 15. 

Under, sous, prep., 29 P. 

Under it, dessous, adv., 45. 

That is understood, cela s'entend, 25 9. 

To undertake, entreprendre, v. a., 49. 

Unfortunate, infortune, e, adj., 44. 

Unhappy, rnalheureux, se, adj., 44. 

Uniform, uniforme, s. m., 16 P. 

Unitarian, unitaire, 22 S. 

United States, Utats-L'nis, s. m., 83. 

Unless, a moins que (Subj. with ne). 

Unsuitable, hors de propos, 27 3. 

Until, jusqu'd ce que, conj., S6. 

Unwillingly, contre son gre, 54. 

Up-stairs, en haut. adv., 103. 

To use, se servir, 2 S. : user {de), v. n., 9 9. 

Use, usage, s. m., S3 ; emploi, s. m., 97. 

To be used to, et re fait d, 9S. 

Useful, utile, adj., 52. 

Useless, inutile, adj., 91. 

As usual, comme d V ordinaire, 103. 

Better than usual, mieux qu'd Vordinaire, 

Usually, d' ordinaire, adv., 103. [103. 

V. 

Vail, voile, s. m., 7 P., 90. 
To value,/aire cas de, 26 9. 
To vanquish, raincre, v. a., 79. 
Vapor, vapeur, s. f., 49. 
Veal, verni, s. m., 6 3. 
Vegetable, legume, s. m., 55. 
Verb, verbe, s. m., 83. 
Verdure, verdure, s. f.. 84. 



520 



DICTIONARY. 



Very, lien, 24; iris, 32 ; fort, 32. 
Vessel, vaisseau, s. in., 24. 
Vest, veste, s. f., 8. 
Vice, vice, s. m , 10 S. 
Victory, victoire, s. f., 13 S. 
Village, village, s. m., 34. 
Vinegar, vinaigre, s. m., 21 P. 
Violet, violette, s. f., 28. 
Violin, violon, s. m., 64. 
Virtue, vertu, s. f., 103. 
Virtuous, vertueux, se, adj., 95. 
Visit, visite, s. f., 10 S. 
Voice, voix, s. f., 90. 
Volume, volume, s. f., 3, 76. 

W. 

Waistcoat, gilet, s. in., 9. 

To wait for, attendre, v. a., 45. 

To walk, marcher, v. n., 55 ; se promener, 9 

Wall, mur, s. m., 11 P., 16 S. [S. 

Walnut-tree, noyer, s. m., 24 P. 

Want, misere, s. f., 2 S. 

It wants, il s'en faut, 23 S. 

War, guerre, s. f., 65. 

Warlike, lelliqueux, se, adj., 8 S. 

To warm, chauffer, v. a., 80. 

Warm, chatid, 24. 

To wash, lover, v. a , 38. 

Washerwoman, llanchisseuse, s. f., 15. 

Watch, montre, s. f., 7. 

Water, eaw, s. f., 2. 

Weak, /ai&te. adj., 67. 

To wear out, user, v. a., 9 S. 

Weather, temps, s. m., 27, 56. 

Wedding, noce, s. f., 89. 

Wedge, coin, s. m., 8 S. 

Wednesday, mercredi, s. m., 58. 

Week, semaine, s. f., 42. 

To weep, pleurer, v. n., 50. 

Weight, poids, s. m., 1 P. 

Well, Men, adv., 24, eh! lien. 

Well cooked, well done, lien cuit, e, 31. 

Well, puits, s. m., 14 S. 

West, ouest, s. m., 39. 

Wet, mouille, e, 56. 

What (which), quel, le, adj., 10 P., 4. 

What (what thing), 9 P., 4 ; quoi, 32, 104. 

What, qu'est ce que or gm, 30. 

What day (of the month), quel quantieme, 6 

What o'clock ? quelle heure ? 73. [S. 

Whatever, quelque que, quel que, quoi que, 
quoi que ce soit qui or que, 87. 

Wheat, froment, s. m., 18 P., 61. 

Wheel, roue, s. f., 19 S. 

Wheelbarrow, Irouette, s. f., 57. 

When, quand, 42; lorsque, 76. 

Whence, d'oic, adv.. 28. 

Where, oil, adv., 29 P., 13. 

Which, qui, que, 30 P., 19. 

Which one, lequel, laquelle, 15 ; of which one, 
duquel, etc., 32 ; which way ? par ou t 
37 ; to which one, auquel, etc., 40. 

While, tandis que, 105. 

Whip, fouet, s. m., 11. 

Whirlwind, tourlillon, s. m., 24 S. 

White, llanc, llanche, 9 P., 20. 



Who ? qui t 7 ; qui est-ce qui ? 30. 
Whoever, qui que, qui que ce soit que, 87; 

quiconque, 13 S. 
Whom, que, whom ? qui ? 22 ; qui est-ce qui ? 

or que ? 30. 
Whomsoever, qui que cte sort que, 87. 
Whose, de qui, celui de qui, 23. 
Why, pourquoi, conj., 32» 
Wicked, mechant, e, ad>, 17 P., 12. 
Wide, large, adj., 11 P., 43. 
Widow, veuve, s. f., 11. 
Widower, veiif, s. m., 11. 
Wife, femme, s. f., 55. 
To will, vouloir, v. a., 18. 
William, Guillaume, s. m., 53. 
To be willing, vouloir lien, 18. 
Willingly, volontiers, adv., 54. 
Wind,\'e?i£, s m., 39. \montre. 
To wind up a watch, monter, remonter une 
Window, fenetre, croisee, s. f., 17. 
Wine, vin, s. m., 9 P., 3. 
Wing, aile. s. f., 80. 
Winter, hiver, s. m., 56. 
To wipe, essuyer, v. a., 88. 
Wisdom, sagesse, s. I, 83. 
Wise, sage, adj., 37. 
To wish, souhaiter, v. a., 77. 
To wish for, vouloir, v. a., 18. 
Wit, esprit, s. m., 34. 
With, avec, prep., 41. 
With all his might, de toute sa force, 66. 
With good will, de Ion cozur, de Ion gre, 67. 
To withdraw, eloigner, v. r., 15 S. 
Without, sans, prep., 51. 
Without, dehors, adv., 89 ; sans que, conj. 
Without the knowledge of, d Vinsu, 70. 
Wolf, loup, s. m., 105. 
Woman, /ewwie, s. f., 6. 
To wonder, s'etonner, v. r., 17 S. 
Wood, lois, s. m., 1 P., 8. 
Wool, laine, s. £, 5. 
Word, mot, s. m., 61 ; parole, s. f., 61. 
Work, ouvrage,. s. m., ozuvre, s. f., 56. 
Workman, ouvrier, ere, s., 34. 
World, monde, s. m., 40. 
Worm, ver, s. m., 3 P., 92. 
Worse, p ire, pis, 59. 
Worst, lepire, lepis. 

To be worth, etre riche de, 46; valoir, 66. 

To be worth more, valoir mieux. 
To write, ecrire, v. a., 46. 
Writing, ecriture, s. f., 42. 
To be wrong, avoir tort, 24, 70. 

"ST. 

Yard, cours, s. f., 13. 

Year, an, s. m., annee, s. f., 45. 

Yellow, jaune, adj., 2 S. 

Yes, oui, si, si fait, 71. 

Yesterday, hier, adv., 44. 

Yesterday evening, hi er au soir,Mer soir,75. 

To yield, ceder, v. a., 87 ; se rendre, v. r., 24 

Yonder, Id-las, adv., 74. [S. 

Young, jeune, adj., 26 P., 3. 

Young lady, demoiselle, s. f., 6. 

Youth, ieunesse, s. f., 14 S. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 117 602 5 ^ 



